GATE EE 2015 Solved Paper

GATE
ELECTRI CAL ENGI NEERI NG

Solved Paper ( 2014-1996 )
RK Kanodia
Ashish Murolia
w w w.nodi a.c o.i n

NODI A & COMPANY
GATE Electrical Engineering
Solved Paper (2014 - 1996 )
RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Copyright By NODIA & COMPANY
Information contained in this book has been obtained by author, from sources believes to be reliable. However,
neither NODIA & COMPANY nor its author guarantee the accuracy or completeness of any information herein,
and NODIA & COMPANY nor its author shall be responsible for any error, omissions, or damages arising out of
use of this information. This book is published with the understanding that NODIA & COMPANY and its author
are supplying information but are not attempting to render engineering or other professional services.
MRP Fr ee
NODI A & COMPANY
B 8, Dhanshree Ist, Central Spine, Vidyadhar Nagar, Jaipur 302039
Ph : +91 141 2101150,
www.nodia.co.in
email : enquiry@nodia.co.in
Printed by Nodia and Company, Jaipur
SYLLABUS
GENERAL ABILITY
Verbal Ability : English grammar, sentence completion, verbal analogies, word groups,
instructions, critical reasoning and verbal deduction.
Numerical Ability : Numerical computation, numerical estimation, numerical reasoning and
data interpretation.
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS
Linear Algebra: Matrix Algebra, Systems of linear equations, Eigen values and eigen vectors.
Calculus: Mean value theorems, Theorems of integral calculus, Evaluation of definite and
improper integrals, Partial Derivatives, Maxima and minima, Multiple integrals, Fourier series.
Vector identities, Directional derivatives, Line, Surface and Volume integrals, Stokes, Gauss
and Greens theorems.
Differential equations: First order equation (linear and nonlinear), Higher order linear
differential equations with constant coefficients, Method of variation of parameters, Cauchys
and Eulers equations, Initial and boundary value problems, Partial Differential Equations and
variable separable method.
Complex variables: Analytic functions, Cauchys integral theorem and integral formula,
Taylors and Laurent series, Residue theorem, solution integrals.
Probability and Statistics: Sampling theorems, Conditional probability, Mean, median, mode and
standard deviation, Random variables, Discrete and continuous distributions, Poisson,Normal
and Binomial distribution, Correlation and regression analysis.
Numerical Methods: Solutions of non-linear algebraic equations, single and multi-step methods
for differential equations.
Transform Theory: Fourier transform,Laplace transform, Z-transform.
ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING
Electric Circuits and Fields: Network graph, KCL, KVL, node and mesh analysis, transient
response of dc and ac networks; sinusoidal steady-state analysis, resonance, basic filter concepts;
ideal current and voltage sources, Thevenins, Nortons and Superposition and Maximum
Power Transfer theorems, two-port networks, three phase circuits; Gauss Theorem, electric
field and potential due to point, line, plane and spherical charge distributions; Amperes and
Biot-Savarts laws; inductance; dielectrics; capacitance.
Signals and Systems: Representation of continuous and discrete-time signals; shifting and
scaling operations; linear, time-invariant and causal systems; Fourier series representation of
continuous periodic signals; sampling theorem; Fourier, Laplace and Z transforms.
Electrical Machines: Single phase transformer equivalent circuit, phasor diagram, tests,
regulation and efficiency; three phase transformers connections, parallel operation; auto-
transformer; energy conversion principles; DC machines types, windings, generator
characteristics, armature reaction and commutation, starting and speed control of motors;
three phase induction motors principles, types, performance characteristics, starting and
speed control; single phase induction motors; synchronous machines performance, regulation
and parallel operation of generators, motor starting, characteristics and applications; servo and
stepper motors.
Power Systems: Basic power generation concepts; transmission line models and performance;
cable performance, insulation; corona and radio interference; distribution systems; per-unit
quantities; bus impedance and admittance matrices; load flow; voltage control; power factor
correction; economic operation; symmetrical components; fault analysis; principles of over-
current, differential and distance protection; solid state relays and digital protection; circuit
breakers; system stability concepts, swing curves and equal area criterion; HVDC transmission
and FACTS concepts.
Control Systems: Principles of feedback; transfer function; block diagrams; steady-state errors;
Routh and Niquist techniques; Bode plots; root loci; lag, lead and lead-lag compensation; state
space model; state transition matrix, controllability and observability.
Electrical and Electronic Measurements: Bridges and potentiometers; PMMC, moving iron,
dynamometer and induction type instruments; measurement of voltage, current, power, energy
and power factor; instrument transformers; digital voltmeters and multimeters; phase, time
and frequency measurement; Q-meters; oscilloscopes; potentiometric recorders; error analysis.
Analog and Digital Electronics: Characteristics of diodes, BJT, FET; amplifiers biasing,
equivalent circuit and frequency response; oscillators and feedback amplifiers; operational
amplifiers characteristics and applications; simple active filters; VCOs and timers;
combinational and sequential logic circuits; multiplexer; Schmitt trigger; multi-vibrators;
sample and hold circuits; A/D and D/A converters; 8-bit microprocessor basics, architecture,
programming and interfacing.
Power Electronics and Drives: Semiconductor power diodes, transistors, thyristors, triacs,
GTOs, MOSFETs and IGBTs static characteristics and principles of operation; triggering
circuits; phase control rectifiers; bridge converters fully controlled and half controlled;
principles of choppers and inverters; basis concepts of adjustable speed dc and ac drives.
***********
PREFACE
This book doesnt make promise but provides complete satisfaction to the readers. The
market scenario is confusing and readers dont find the optimum quality books. This book
provides complete set of problems appeared in competition exams as well as fresh set of
problems.
The book is categorized into units which are then sub-divided into chapters and the
concepts of the problems are addressed in the relevant chapters. The aim of the book is
to avoid the unnecessary elaboration and highlights only those concepts and techniques
which are absolutely necessary. Again time is a critical factor both from the point of view
of preparation duration and time taken for solving each problem in the examination. So
the problems solving methods is the books are those which take the least distance to the
solution.
But however to make a comment that this book is absolute for GATE preparation will be
an inappropriate one. The theory for the preparation of the examination should be followed
from the standard books. But for a wide collection of problems, for a variety of problems
and the efficient way of solving them, what one needs to go needs to go through is there
in there in the book. Each unit (e.g. Networks) is subdivided into average seven number of
chapters on an average each of which contains 40 problems which are selected so as to avoid
unnecessary redundancy and highly needed completeness.
I shall appreciate and greatly acknowledge the comments and suggestion from the users of
this book.
R. K. Kanodia
Ashish Murolia
CONTENTS
SP 1 Electric Circuit and Fields SP 1 - 83
SP 2 Signals and Systems SP 84 - 124
SP 3 Electrical Machines SP 125 - 200
SP 4 Power Systems SP 201 - 277
SP 5 Control Systems SP 278 - 343
SP 6 Electrical & Electronics Measurement SP 344 - 389
SP 7 Analog Electronics SP 390 - 451
SP 8 Digital Electronics SP 452 - 493
SP 8 Power Electronics SP 494 - 551
SP 9 Engineering Mathematics SP 552 - 595
SP 9 General Aptitude SP 596 - 623
***********
Chapter 1 Electric Circuits and Fields Page 1
Shop GATE Electrical in 4 Volumes by RK Kanodia at maximum discount at
nodi a
For online test series visit
w w w.gat ehel p.c om
CHAPTER 1
ELECTRI C CI RCUI TS AND FI ELDS
YEAR 2014 EE01 ONE MARK
EE SP 1.1 The three circuit elements shown in the figure are part of an electric circuit. The
total power absorbed by the three circuit elements in watts is _____.
EE SP 1.2
C
0
is the capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor with air as dielectric (as
in figure (a)). If, half of the entire gap as shown in figure (b) is filled with a
dielectric of permittivity
r
e , the expression for the modified capacitance is
(A)
C
2
1
r
0
e + ^ h (B) C
r 0
e + ^ h
(C)
C
2
r
0
e (D) C 1
r 0
e + ^ h
EE SP 1.3 A combination of F 1 m capacitor with an initial voltage V v 0 2
c
=- ^ h in series
with a 100 W resistor is connected to a mA 20 ideal dc current source by operating
both switches at s t 0 = as shown. Which of the following graphs shown in the
options approximates the voltage v
s
across the current source over the next few
seconds ?
Page 2 Electric Circuits and Fields Chapter 1
nodi a
EE SP 1.4 The undesirable property of an electrical insulating material is
(A) high dielectric strength
(B) high relative permittivity
(C) high thermal conductivity
(D) high insulation resistivity
YEAR 2014 EE01 TWO MARKS.
EE SP 1.5 In the figure, the value of resistor R is / ohms I 25 2 + ^ h , where I is the current
in amperes. The current I is _____.
EE SP 1.6 The following four vector fields are given in Cartesian co-ordinate system. The
vector field which does not satisfy the property of magnetic flux density is
(A) y z x a a a
x y z
2 2 2
+ +
(B) z x y a a a
x y z
2 2 2
+ +
(C) x y z a a a
x y z
2 2 2
+ +
(D) y z x z x y a a a
x y z
2 2 2 2 2 2
+ +
EE SP 1.7 Two identical coupled inductors are connected in series. The measured inductances
for the two possible series connections are H 380 m and H 240 m . Their mutual
inductance in H m is _____.
nodi a
EE SP 1.8 The switch SW shown in the circuit is kept at position 1 for a long duration.
At t 0 =
+
, the switch is moved to position 2. Assuming V V >
o o 2 1
, the voltage
v t
c^ h across the capacitor is
(A) v t V e V 1
/
c o
t RC
o 2
2
1
=- - -
-
^ ^ h h
(B) v t V e V 1
/
c o
t RC
o 2
2
1
= - +
-
^
^
h
h
(C) v t V V e V 1
/
c o o
t RC
o 2 1
2
1
=- + - -
-
^ ^ ^ h h h
(D) v t V V e V 1
/
c o o
t RC
o 2 1
2
1
= - - +
-
^ ^ ^ h h h
EE SP 1.9 A parallel plate capacitor consisting two dielectric materials is shown in the
figure. The middle dielectric slab is placed symmetrically with respect to the
plates.
If the potential difference between one of the plates and the nearest surface of
dielectric interface is 2 Volts, then the ratio :
1 2
e e is
(A) 1 : 4 (B) 2 : 3
(C) 3 : 2 (D) 4 : 1
YEAR 2014 EE02 TWO MARKS
EE SP 1.10 The voltage across the capacitor, as shown in the figure, is expressed as
v t
c^ h sin sin A t A t
1 1 1 2 2 2
w q w q = - + - ^ ^ h h
The values of A
1
and A
2
respectively, are
(A) 2.0 and 1.98 (B) 2.0 and 4.20
(C) 2.5 and 3.50 (D) 5.0 and 6.40
nodi a
EE SP 1.11 The magnitude of magnetic flux density B ^ h at a point having normal distance
d meters from an infinitely extended wire carrying current of I A is
d
I
2
0
p
m
(in
SI units). An infinitely extended wire is laid along the x-axis and is carrying
current of 4 A in the ve + x direction. Another infinitely extended wire is
laid along the y axis and is carrying 2 A current in the ve + y direction.
0
m is
permeability of free space. Assume i , j , k to be unit vectors along x, y and z
axes respectively.
Assuming right handed coordinate system, magnetic field intensity, H at
coordinate , , 2 1 0 ^ h will be
(A) / weber m k
2
3 2
p
(B) / A m i
3
4
p
(C) / A m k
2
3
p
(D) / A m 0
YEAR 2014 EE03 ONE MARK.
EE SP 1.12 Let f x y y z z x v
2 2 2
: d = + + ^ h , where f and v are scalar and vector fields
respectively. If y z x v i j k = + + , then f v:d is
(A) x y y z z x
2 2 2
+ + (B) xy yz zx 2 2 2 + +
(C) x y z + + (D) 0
EE SP 1.13 The line A to neutral voltage is V 10 15c for a balanced three phase star
connected load with phase sequence ABC . The voltage of line B with respect to
line C is given by
(A) V 10 3 105c (B) V 10 105c
(C) V 10 3 75c - (D) V 10 3 90c -
EE SP 1.14 The driving point impedance Z s ^ h for the circuit shown below is
(A)
s s
s s
2
3 1
3
4 2
+
+ +
(B)
s
s s
2
2 4
2
4 2
+
+ +
(C)
s s
s
1
1
4 2
2
+ +
+
(D)
s s
s
1
1
4 2
3
+ +
+
nodi a
EE SP 1.15 A non-ideal voltage source V
s
has an internal impedance of Z
s
. If a purely resistive
load is to be chosen that maximizes the power transferred to the load, its value
must be
(A) 0 (B) real part of Z
s
(C) magnitude of Z
s
(D) complex conjugate of Z
s
EE SP 1.16 The power delivered by the current source, in the figure, is ____.
EE SP 1.17 A perfectly conducting metal plate is placed in x-y plane in a right handed
coordinate system. A charge of 32 2
0
pe + coulombs is placed at coordinate
, , 0 0 2 ^ h.
0
e is the permittivity of free space. Assume i , j , k to be unit vectors
along x, y and z axes respectively. At the coordinate , , 2 2 0 ^ h, the electric
field vector E (Newtons/Coulomb) will be
(A) k 2 2 (B) k 2 -
(C) k 2 (D) k 2 2 -
EE SP 1.18 A series RLC circuit is observed at two frequencies. At / krad s 1
1
w = , we note
that source voltage V V 100 0
1
c = results in a current . A I 0 03 31
1
c = . At
/ krad s 2
2
w = , the source voltage V V 100 0
2
c = results in a current A I 2 0
2
c =
. The closest values for R, L, C out of the following options are
(A) R 50 W = ; mH L 25 = ; F C 10 m = ;
(B) R 50 W = ; mH L 10 = ; F C 25 m = ;
(C) R 50 W = ; mH L 50 = ; F C 5 m = ;
(D) R 50 W = ; mH L 5 = ; F C 50 m = ;
nodi a
EE SP 1.19 The Nortons equivalent source in amperes as seen into terminals X and Y is
____.
YEAR 2013 ONE MARK
EE SP 1.20 Consider a delta connection of resistors and its equivalent star connection as shown
below. If all elements of the delta connection are scaled by a factor k, k 0 > , the
elements of the corresponding star equivalent will be scaled by a factor of
(A) k
2
(B) k
(C) /k 1 (D) k
EE SP 1.21 The flux density at a point in space is given by 4 2 8 / Wb m B xa kya a
x y z
2
= + +
v
v v v
.
The value of constant k must be equal to
(A) 2 - (B) . 0 5 -
(C) . 0 5 + (D) 2 +
EE SP 1.22 A single-phase load is supplied by a single-phase voltage source. If the current
flowing from the load to the source is 10 150 A c +- and if the voltage at the load
terminal is 100 60 V c + , then the
(A) load absorbs real power and delivers reactive power
(B) load absorbs real power and absorbs reactive power
(C) load delivers real power and delivers reactive power
(D) load delivers real power and absorbs reactive power
EE SP 1.23 A source cos v t V t 100
s
p = ^ h has an internal impedance of j 4 3 W + ^ h . If a purely
resistive load connected to this source has to extract the maximum power out of
the source, its value in W should be
(A) 3 (B) 4
(C) 5 (D) 7
nodi a
EE SP 1.24 The transfer function
V s
V s
1
2
^
^
h
h
of the circuit shown below is
(A)
.
s
s
1
0 5 1
+
+
(B)
s
s
2
3 6
+
+
(C)
s
s
1
2
+
+
(D)
s
s
2
1
+
+
YEAR 2013 TWO MARKS
EE SP 1.25 A dielectric slab with mm mm 500 500
#
cross-section is 0.4 m long. The slab
is subjected to a uniform electric field of 6 8 / kV mm E a a
x y
= +
v
v v
. The relative
permittivity of the dielectric material is equal to 2. The value of constant
0
e is
8.85 10 / F m
12
#
-
. The energy stored in the dielectric in Joules is
(A) . 8 85 10
11
#
-
(B) . 8 85 10
5
#
-
(C) . 88 5 (D) 885
EE SP 1.26 Three capacitors C
1
, C
2
and C
3
whose values are 10 F m , 5 F m , and 2 F m
respectively, have breakdown voltages of 10 V, 5 V and 2 V respectively. For the
interconnection shown below, the maximum safe voltage in Volts that can be
applied across the combination, and the corresponding total charge in C m stored
in the effective capacitance across the terminals are respectively,
(A) 2.8 and 36 (B) 7 and 119
(C) 2.8 and 32 (D) 7 and 80
EE SP 1.27 In the circuit shown below, if the source voltage 100 53.13 V V
S
c + = then the
Thevenins equivalent voltage in Volts as seen by the load resistance R
L
is
nodi a
(A) 100 90c + (B) 800 0c +
(C) 800 90c + (D) 100 60c +
YEAR 2012 ONE MARK
EE SP 1.28 The impedance looking into nodes 1 and 2 in the given circuit is
(A) 0 5 W (B) 100 W
(C) 5 kW (D) 10.1 kW
EE SP 1.29 In the circuit shown below, the current through the inductor is
(A) A
j 1
2
+
(B) A
j 1
1
+
-
(C) A
j 1
1
+
(D) 0 A
EE SP 1.30 A system with transfer function ( )
( )( )( )
( )( )
G s
s s s
s s
1 3 4
9 2
2
=
+ + +
+ +
is excited by ( ) sin t w . The steady-state output of the system is zero at
(A) 1 / rad s w =
(B) / rad s 2 w =
(C) / rad s 3 w =
(D) / rad s 4 w =
EE SP 1.31 The average power delivered to an impedance (4 3) j W - by a current
5 (100 100) cos A t p + is
(A) 44.2 W (B) 50 W
(C) 62.5 W (D) 125 W
nodi a
EE SP 1.32 In the following figure, C
1
and C
2
are ideal capacitors. C
1
has been charged to 12
V before the ideal switch S is closed at . t 0 = The current ( ) i t for all t is
(A) zero (B) a step function
(C) an exponentially decaying function (D) an impulse function
YEAR 2012 TWO MARKS
EE SP 1.33 If 6 V V V
A B
- = then V V
C D
- is
(A) 5 V - (B) V 2
(C) V 3 (D) V 6
EE SP 1.34 Assuming both the voltage sources are in phase, the value of R for which
maximum power is transferred from circuit A to circuit B is
(A) 0.8 W (B) 1.4 W
(C) 2 W (D) 2.8 W
Common Data for Questions 35 and 36 :
With 10 V dc connected at port A in the linear nonreciprocal two-port network
shown below, the following were observed :
(i) 1 W connected at port B draws a current of 3 A
(ii) 2.5 W connected at port B draws a current of 2 A
nodi a
EE SP 1.35 With 10 V dc connected at port A, the current drawn by 7 W connected at port
B is
(A) 3/7 A (B) 5/7 A
(C) 1 A (D) 9/7 A
EE SP 1.36 For the same network, with 6 V dc connected at port A, 1 W connected at port
B draws 7/3 . A If 8 V dc is connected to port A, the open circuit voltage at port
B is
(A) 6 V (B) 7 V
(C) 8 V (D) 9 V
Statement for Linked Answer Questions 37 and 38 :
In the circuit shown, the three voltmeter readings are 220 , V V
1
= 122 , V V
2
=
136 V V
3
= .
EE SP 1.37 The power factor of the load is
(A) 0.45 (B) 0.50
(C) 0.55 (D) 0.60
EE SP 1.38 If 5 R
L
W = , the approximate power consumption in the load is
(A) 700 W (B) 750 W
(C) 800 W (D) 850 W
YEAR 2011 ONE MARK
EE SP 1.39 The r.m.s value of the current ( ) i t in the circuit shown below is
(A) A
2
1
(B) A
2
1
(C) 1 A (D) A 2
nodi a
EE SP 1.40 The voltage applied to a circuit is ( ) cos t 100 2 100p volts and the circuit draws
a current of ( / ) sin t 10 2 100 4 p p + amperes. Taking the voltage as the reference
phasor, the phasor representation of the current in amperes is
(A) / 10 2 4 p - (B) / 10 4 p -
(C) / 10 4 p + (D) / 10 2 4 p +
EE SP 1.41 In the circuit given below, the value of R required for the transfer of maximum
power to the load having a resistance of 3 W is
(A) zero (B) 3 W
(C) 6 W (D) infinity
YEAR 2011 TWO MARKS
EE SP 1.42 A lossy capacitor C
x
, rated for operation at 5 kV, 50 Hz is represented by an
equivalent circuit with an ideal capacitor C
p
in parallel with a resistor R
p
. The
value C
p
is found to be 0.102 F and value of 1.25 M R
p
W = . Then the power loss
and tand of the lossy capacitor operating at the rated voltage, respectively, are
(A) 10 W and 0.0002 (B) 10 W and 0.0025
(C) 20 W and 0.025 (D) 20 W and 0.04
EE SP 1.43 A capacitor is made with a polymeric dielectric having an
r
e of 2.26 and a
dielectric breakdown strength of 50 kV/cm. The permittivity of free space is 8.85
pF/m. If the rectangular plates of the capacitor have a width of 20 cm and a
length of 40 cm, then the maximum electric charge in the capacitor is
(A) 2 C (B) 4 C
(C) 8 C (D) 10 C
Common Data For Q. 44 and 45
The input voltage given to a converter is v
i
100 (100 ) sin V t 2 p =
The current drawn by the converter is
10 (100 /3) 5 (300 /4) sin sin i t t 2 2
i
p p p p = - + + 2 (500 /6) sin A t 2 p p + -
EE SP 1.44 The input power factor of the converter is
(A) 0.31 (B) 0.44
(C) 0.5 (D) 0.71
EE SP 1.45 The active power drawn by the converter is
(A) 181 W (B) 500 W
(C) 707 W (D) 887 W
nodi a
An RLC circuit with relevant data is given below.
EE SP 1.46 The power dissipated in the resistor R is
(A) 0.5 W
(B) 1 W
(C) W 2
(D) 2 W
EE SP 1.47 The current I
C
in the figure above is
(A) 2 A j - (B) A j
2
1
-
(C) A j
2
1
+ (D) 2A j +
YEAR 2010 ONE MARK
EE SP 1.48 The switch in the circuit has been closed for a long time. It is opened at . t 0 =
At t 0 =
+
, the current through the 1 F m capacitor is
(A) 0 A (B) 1 A
(C) 1.25 A (D) 5 A
EE SP 1.49 As shown in the figure, a 1 W resistance is connected across a source that has a
load line v i 100 + = . The current through the resistance is
(A) 25 A (B) 50 A
(C) 100 A (C) 200 A
nodi a
YEAR 2010 TWO MARKS
EE SP 1.50 If the 12 W resistor draws a current of 1 A as shown in the figure, the value of
resistance R is
(A) 4 W (B) 6 W
(C) 8 W (D) 18 W
EE SP 1.51 The two-port network P shown in the figure has ports 1 and 2, denoted by
terminals (a,b) and (c,d) respectively. It has an impedance matrix Z with
parameters denoted by Z
ij
. A 1 W resistor is connected in series with the network
at port 1 as shown in the figure. The impedance matrix of the modified two-port
network (shown as a dashed box ) is
(A)
Z
Z
Z
Z
1 1
1
11
21
12
22
+ +
+
e o (B)
Z
Z
Z
Z
1
1
11
21
12
22
+
+
e o
(C)
Z
Z
Z
Z
1
11
21
12
22
+
e o (D)
Z
Z
Z
Z
1
1
11
21
12
22
+
+
e o
YEAR 2009 ONE MARK
EE SP 1.52 The current through the 2 kW resistance in the circuit shown is
(A) 0 mA (B) 1 mA
(C) 2 mA (D) 6 mA
EE SP 1.53 How many 200 W/220 V incandescent lamps connected in series would consume
the same total power as a single 100 W/220 V incandescent lamp ?
(A) not possible (B) 4
(C) 3 (D) 2
nodi a
YEAR 2009 TWO MARKS
EE SP 1.54 In the figure shown, all elements used are ideal. For time , t S 0 <
1
remained closed
and S
2
open. At , t S 0
1
= is opened and S
2
is closed. If the voltage V
c2
across the
capacitor C
2
at t 0 = is zero, the voltage across the capacitor combination at
t 0 =
+
will be
(A) 1 V (B) 2 V
(C) 1.5 V (D) 3 V
EE SP 1.55 The equivalent capacitance of the input loop of the circuit shown is
(A) 2 F m (B) 100 F m
(C) 200 F m (D) 4 F m
EE SP 1.56 For the circuit shown, find out the current flowing through the 2 W resistance.
Also identify the changes to be made to double the current through the 2 W
resistance.
(A) (5 ; 30 ) V A Put V
S
= (B) (2 ; 8 ) V A Put V
S
=
(C) (5 ; 10 ) I A Put A
S
= (D) (7 ; 12 ) I A Put A
S
=
Statement for Linked Answer Question 57 and 58 :
nodi a
EE SP 1.57 For the circuit given above, the Thevenins resistance across the terminals A and B is
(A) 0.5 kW (B) 0.2 kW
(C) 1 kW (D) 0.11 kW
EE SP 1.58 For the circuit given above, the Thevenins voltage across the terminals A and B is
(A) 1.25 V (B) 0.25 V
(C) 1 V (D) 0.5 V
YEAR 2008 ONE MARK
EE SP 1.59 The number of chords in the graph of the given circuit will be
(A) 3 (B) 4
(C) 5 (D) 6
EE SP 1.60 The Thevenins equivalent of a circuit operation at 5 w = rads/s, has
3.71 15.9 V V
oc
+ = -
%
and 2.38 0.667 Z j
0
W = - . At this frequency, the minimal
realization of the Thevenins impedance will have a
(A) resistor and a capacitor and an inductor
(B) resistor and a capacitor
(C) resistor and an inductor
(D) capacitor and an inductor
YEAR 2008 TWO MARKS
EE SP 1.61 The time constant for the given circuit will be
(A) 1/9 s (B) 1/4 s
(C) 4 s (D) 9 s
EE SP 1.62 The resonant frequency for the given circuit will be
nodi a
(A) 1 rad/s (B) 2 rad/s
(C) 3 rad/s (D) 4 rad/s
EE SP 1.63 Assuming ideal elements in the circuit shown below, the voltage V
ab
will be
(A) 3 V - (B) 0 V
(C) 3 V (D) 5 V
Statement for Linked Answer Question 64 and 65
The current ( ) i t sketched in the figure flows through a initially uncharged 0.3
nF capacitor.
EE SP 1.64 The charge stored in the capacitor at 5 t s m = , will be
(A) 8 nC
(B) 10 nC
(C) 13 nC
(D) 16 nC
EE SP 1.65 The capacitor charged upto 5 ms, as per the current profile given in the figure,
is connected across an inductor of 0.6 mH. Then the value of voltage across the
capacitor after 1 s m will approximately be
(A) 18.8 V
(B) 23.5 V
(C) 23.5 V -
(D) 30.6 V -
nodi a
EE SP 1.66 In the circuit shown in the figure, the value of the current i will be given by
(A) 0.31 A (B) 1.25 A
(C) 1.75 A (D) 2.5 A
EE SP 1.67 Two point charges 10 Q C
1
m = and 20 Q
2
= mC are placed at coordinates (1,1,0)
and ( , , ) 1 1 0 - - respectively. The total electric flux passing through a plane
0 z 2 = will be
(A) 7.5 C m
(B) 13.5 C m
(C) 15.0 C m
(D) 22.5 C m
EE SP 1.68 A capacitor consists of two metal plates each 500 500 # mm
2
and spaced 6 mm
apart. The space between the metal plates is filled with a glass plate of 4 mm
thickness and a layer of paper of 2 mm thickness. The relative primitivities of
the glass and paper are 8 and 2 respectively. Neglecting the fringing effect, the
capacitance will be (Given that . 8 85 10
0
12
# e =
-
F/m )
(A) 983.3 pF
(B) 1475 pF
(C) 637.7 pF
(D) 9956.25 pF
EE SP 1.69 A coil of 300 turns is wound on a non-magnetic core having a mean circumference
of 300 mm and a cross-sectional area of 300 mm
2
. The inductance of the coil
corresponding to a magnetizing current of 3 A will be
(Given that 4 10
0
7
# m p =
-
H/m)
(A) 37.68 H m
(B) 113.04 H m
(C) 3.768 H m
(D) 1.1304 H m
YEAR 2007 ONE MARK
EE SP 1.70 Divergence of the vector field
( , , ) ( ) ( ) ( ) cos cos sin V x y z x xy y i y xy j z x y k
2 2 2
=- + + + + +
t t t
is
(A) cos z z 2
2

(B) sin cos xy z z 2
2
+
(C) sin cos x xy z -
(D) None of these
nodi a
YEAR 2007 TWO MARKS
EE SP 1.71 The state equation for the current I
1
in the network shown below in terms of the
voltage V
X
and the independent source V , is given by
(A) 1.4 3.75
dt
dI
V I V
4
5
X
1
1
=- - +
(B) 1.4 3.75
dt
dI
I V
4
5
V
X
1
1
= - -
(C) 1.4 3.75
dt
dI
V I V
4
5
X
1
1
=- + +
(D) 1.4 3.75
dt
dI
I V
4
5
V
X
1
1
=- + -
EE SP 1.72 The R-L-C series circuit shown in figure is supplied from a variable frequency
voltage source. The admittance - locus of the R-L-C network at terminals AB for
increasing frequency w is
EE SP 1.73 In the circuit shown in figure. Switch SW
1
is initially closed and SW
2
is open.
The inductor L carries a current of 10 A and the capacitor charged to 10 V with
polarities as indicated. SW
2
is closed at t 0 = and SW
1
is opened at t 0 = . The
nodi a
current through C and the voltage across L at ( ) t 0 =
+
is
(A) 55 A, 4.5 V (B) 5.5 A, 45 V
(C) 45 A, 5.5 A (D) 4.5 A, 55 V
EE SP 1.74 A 3 V DC supply with an internal resistance of 2 W supplies a passive non-linear
resistance characterized by the relation V I
NL NL
2
= . The power dissipated in the
non linear resistance is
(A) 1.0 W (B) 1.5 W
(C) 2.5 W (D) 3.0 W
EE SP 1.75 In the figure given below all phasors are with reference to the potential at point
'' '' O . The locus of voltage phasor V
YX
as R is varied from zero to infinity is shown
by
EE SP 1.76 The matrix A given below in the node incidence matrix of a network. The columns
correspond to branches of the network while the rows correspond to nodes.
Let [ ..... ] V V V V
T
1 2 6
= denote the vector of branch voltages while [ ..... ] I i i i
T
1 2 6
=
that of branch currents. The vector [ ] E e e e e
T
1 2 3 4
= denotes the vector of node
voltages relative to a common ground.
nodi a

1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
-
-
-
-
- -
R
T
S
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
W
Which of the following statement is true ?
(A) The equations , V V V V V V 0 0
1 2 3 3 4 5
- + = + - = are KVL equations for the
network for some loops
(B) The equations , V V V V V V 0 0
1 3 6 4 5 6
- - = + - = are KVL equations for the
network for some loops
(C) E AV =
(D) AV 0 = are KVI equations for the network
EE SP 1.77 A solid sphere made of insulating material has a radius R and has a total charge
Q distributed uniformly in its volume. What is the magnitude of the electric field
intensity, E , at a distance ( ) r r R 0 < < inside the sphere ?
(A)
R
Qr
4
1
0
3
pe
(B)
R
Qr
4
3
0
3
pe
(C)
r
Q
4
1
0
2
pe
(D)
r
QR
4
1
0
3
pe
An inductor designed with 400 turns coil wound on an iron core of 16 cm
2
cross
sectional area and with a cut of an air gap length of 1 mm. The coil is connected
to a 230 V, 50 Hz ac supply. Neglect coil resistance, core loss, iron reluctance and
leakage inductance, ( 4 10 ) H/M
0
7
# m p =
-
EE SP 1.78 The current in the inductor is
(A) 18.08 A (B) 9.04 A
(C) 4.56 A (D) 2.28 A
EE SP 1.79 The average force on the core to reduce the air gap will be
(A) 832.29 N (B) 1666.22 N
(C) 3332.47 N (D) 6664.84 N
YEAR 2006 ONE MARK
EE SP 1.80 In the figure the current source is 1 0 , 1 R A + W = , the impedances are Z j
C
W =-
and 2 Z j
L
W = . The Thevenin equivalent looking into the circuit across X-Y is
nodi a
(A) 0 , (1 2 ) j 2 V + W + (B) 2 45 , (1 2 ) j V + W -
%
(C) 2 45 , (1 ) j V + W +
%
(D) 45 , (1 ) j 2 V + W +
%
YEAR 2006 TWO MARKS
EE SP 1.81 The parameters of the circuit shown in the figure are 1 R M
i
W =
10 , 10 R A V/V
0
6
W = = If 1 v V
i
m = , the output voltage, input impedance and
output impedance respectively are
(A) 1 , , 10 V 3 W (B) 1 , 0, 10 V W
(C) 1 , 0, V 3 (D) 10 , , 10 V 3 W
EE SP 1.82 In the circuit shown in the figure, the current source 1 I A = , the voltage source
5 , 1 , 1 , 1 V R R R L L L C C V H F
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2
W = = = = = = = = =
The currents (in A) through R
3
and through the voltage source V respectively
will be
(A) 1, 4 (B) 5, 1
(C) 5, 2 (D) 5, 4
EE SP 1.83 The parameter type and the matrix representation of the relevant two port
parameters that describe the circuit shown are
(A) z parameters,
0
0
0
0
= G (B) h parameters,
1
0
0
1
= G
(C) h parameters,
0
0
0
0
= G (D) z parameters,
1
0
0
1
= G
nodi a
EE SP 1.84 The circuit shown in the figure is energized by a sinusoidal voltage source V
1
at
a frequency which causes resonance with a current of I .
The phasor diagram which is applicable to this circuit is
EE SP 1.85 An ideal capacitor is charged to a voltage V
0
and connected at t 0 = across an
ideal inductor L. (The circuit now consists of a capacitor and inductor alone). If
we let
LC
0
1
w = , the voltage across the capacitor at time t 0 > is given by
(A) V
0
(B) ( ) cos V t
0 0
w
(C) ( ) sin t V
0 0
w (D) ( ) cos V e t
t
0 0
0
w
w -
EE SP 1.86 An energy meter connected to an immersion heater (resistive) operating on an
AC 230 V, 50 Hz, AC single phase source reads 2.3 units (kWh) in 1 hour. The
heater is removed from the supply and now connected to a 400 V peak square
wave source of 150 Hz. The power in kW dissipated by the heater will be
(A) 3.478 (B) 1.739
(C) 1.540 (D) 0.870
EE SP 1.87 Which of the following statement holds for the divergence of electric and magnetic
flux densities ?
(A) Both are zero
(B) These are zero for static densities but non zero for time varying densities.
(C) It is zero for the electric flux density
(D) It is zero for the magnetic flux density
nodi a
YEAR 2005 ONE MARK
EE SP 1.88 In the figure given below the value of R is
(A) 2.5 W (B) 5.0 W
(C) 7.5 W (D) 10.0 W
EE SP 1.89 The RMS value of the voltage ( ) u t ( ) cos t 3 4 3 = + is
(A) 17 V
(B) 5 V
(C) 7 V
(D) (3 2 ) 2 V +
EE SP 1.90 For the two port network shown in the figure the Z-matrix is given by
(A)
Z
Z Z
Z Z
Z
1
1 2
1 2
2
+
+
= G (B)
Z
Z Z
Z
Z
1
1 2
1
2
+
= G
(C)
Z
Z
Z
Z Z
1
2
2
1 2
+
= G (D)
Z
Z
Z
Z Z
1
1
1
1 2
+
= G
EE SP 1.91 In the figure given, for the initial capacitor voltage is zero. The switch is closed
at t 0 = . The final steady-state voltage across the capacitor is
(A) 20 V (B) 10 V
(C) 5 V (D) 0 V
EE SP 1.92 If E
v
is the electric intensity, ( ) E 4 4#
v
is equal to
(A) E
v
(B) E
v
(C) null vector (D) Zero
nodi a
YEAR 2005 TWO MARKS
A coil of inductance 10 H and resistance 40 W is connected as shown in the
figure. After the switch S has been in contact with point 1 for a very long time,
it is moved to point 2 at, t 0 = .
EE SP 1.93 If, at t = 0
+
, the voltage across the coil is 120 V, the value of resistance R is
(A) 0 W (B) 20 W
(C) 40 W (D) 60 W
EE SP 1.94 For the value as obtained in (a), the time taken for 95% of the stored energy to
be dissipated is close to
(A) 0.10 sec (B) 0.15 sec
(C) 0.50 sec (D) 1.0 sec
EE SP 1.95 The RL circuit of the figure is fed from a constant magnitude, variable frequency
sinusoidal voltage source V
in
. At 100 Hz, the Rand L elements each have a
voltage drop
RMS
m .If the frequency of the source is changed to 50 Hz, then new
voltage drop across R is
(A) u
8
5
RMS
(B) u
3
2
RMS
(C) u
5
8
RMS
(D) u
2
3
RMS
EE SP 1.96 For the three-phase circuit shown in the figure the ratio of the currents : : I I I
R Y B

is given by
nodi a
(A) : : 1 1 3 (B) : : 1 1 2
(C) : : 1 1 0 (D) : : / 1 1 3 2
EE SP 1.97 The circuit shown in the figure is in steady state, when the switch is closed at
t 0 = .Assuming that the inductance is ideal, the current through the inductor at
t 0 =
+
equals
(A) 0 A
(B) 0.5 A
(C) 1 A
(D) 2 A
EE SP 1.98 The charge distribution in a metal-dielectric-semiconductor specimen is shown in
the figure. The negative charge density decreases linearly in the semiconductor
as shown. The electric field distribution is as shown in
nodi a
EE SP 1.99 In the given figure, the Thevenins equivalent pair (voltage, impedance), as seen
at the terminals P-Q, is given by
(A) (2 5 ) V, W
(B) (2 , 7.5 ) V W
(C) (4 , 5 ) V W
(D) (4 , 7.5 ) V W
YEAR 2004 ONE MARK
EE SP 1.100 The value of Z in figure which is most appropriate to cause parallel resonance
at 500 Hz is
(A) 125.00 mH (B) 304.20 F m
(C) 2.0 F m (D) 0.05 F m
EE SP 1.101 A parallel plate capacitor is shown in figure. It is made two square metal plates
of 400 mm side. The 14 mm space between the plates is filled with two layers of
dielectrics of 4
r
e = , 6 mm thick and 2
r
e = , 8 mm thick. Neglecting fringing of
fields at the edge the capacitance is
(A) 1298 pF (B) 944 pF
(C) 354 pF (D) 257 pF
EE SP 1.102 The inductance of a long solenoid of length 1000 mm wound uniformly with 3000
turns on a cylindrical paper tube of 60 mm diameter is
(A) 3.2 mH (B) 3.2 mH
(C) 32.0 mH (D) 3.2 H
nodi a
YEAR 2004 TWO MARKS
EE SP 1.103 In figure, the value of the source voltage is
(A) 12 V (B) 24 V
(C) 30 V (D) 44 V
EE SP 1.104 In figure, R
a
, R
b
and R
c
are 20 W, 20 W and 10 W respectively. The resistances R
1
, R
2
and R
3
in W of an equivalent star-connection are
(A) 2.5, 5, 5 (B) 5, 2.5, 5
(C) 5, 5, 2.5 (D) 2.5, 5, 2.5
EE SP 1.105 In figure, the admittance values of the elements in Siemens are
0.5 0, 0 1.5, 0 0.3 Y j Y j Y j
R L C
= + = - = + respectively. The value of I as a phasor
when the voltage E across the elements is 10 0 V +
%
(A) 1.5 0.5 j + (B) j 5 18 -
(C) .5 . j 0 1 8 + (D) 5 j12 -
EE SP 1.106 In figure, the value of resistance R in W is
(A) 10 (B) 20
(C) 30 (D) 40
nodi a
EE SP 1.107 In figure, the capacitor initially has a charge of 10 Coulomb. The current in the
circuit one second after the switch S is closed will be
(A) 14.7 A (B) 18.5 A
(C) 40.0 A (D) 50.0 A
EE SP 1.108 The rms value of the current in a wire which carries a d.c. current of 10 A and a
sinusoidal alternating current of peak value 20 A is
(A) 10 A (B) 14.14 A
(C) 15 A (D) 17.32 A
EE SP 1.109 The Z-matrix of a 2-port network as given by
.
.
.
.
0 9
0 2
0 2
0 6
= G
The element Y
22
of the corresponding Y-matrix of the same network is given by
(A) 1.2 (B) 0.4
(C) . 0 4 - (D) 1.8
YEAR 2003 ONE MARK
EE SP 1.110 Figure Shows the waveform of the current passing through an inductor of
resistance 1 W and inductance 2 H. The energy absorbed by the inductor in the
first four seconds is
(A) 144 J (B) 98 J
(C) 132 J (D) 168 J
EE SP 1.111 A segment of a circuit is shown in figure 5 , 4 2 sin v V v t
R c
= = .The voltage v
L
is
nodi a
(A) 3 8 cos t 2 - (B) 2 sin t 32
(C) sin t 16 2 (D) 16 2 cos t
EE SP 1.112 In the figure, 10 60 , 10 60 , 50 53.13 . Z Z Z
1 2 3
+ + + = - = =
% % %
Thevenin impedance
seen form X-Y is
(A) . 56 66 45 +
%
(B) 60 30 +
%
(C) 70 30 +
%
(D) . 34 4 65 +
%
EE SP 1.113 Two conductors are carrying forward and return current of +I and I - as shown
in figure. The magnetic field intensity H at point P is
(A)
d
I
Y
p
(B)
d
I
X
p
(C)
d
I
Y
2p
(D)
d
I
X
2p
EE SP 1.114 Two infinite strips of width w m in x-direction as shown in figure, are carrying
forward and return currents of +I and I - in the z- direction. The strips are
separated by distance of x m. The inductance per unit length of the configuration
is measured to be L H/m. If the distance of separation between the strips in
snow reduced to x/2 m, the inductance per unit length of the configuration is
(A) L 2 H/m (B) / L 4 H/m
(C) / L 2 H/m (D) L 4 H/m
nodi a
YEAR 2003 TWO MARKS
EE SP 1.115 In the circuit of figure, the magnitudes of V
L
and V
C
are twice that of V
R
. Given
that 50 f Hz = , the inductance of the coil is
(A) 2.14 mH (B) 5.30 H
(C) 31.8 mH (D) 1.32 H
EE SP 1.116 In figure, the potential difference between points P and Q is
(A) 12 V
(B) 10 V
(C) 6 V -
(D) 8 V
EE SP 1.117 Two ac sources feed a common variable resistive load as shown in figure. Under
the maximum power transfer condition, the power absorbed by the load resistance
R
L
is
(A) 2200 W
(B) 1250 W
(C) 1000 W
(D) 625 W
nodi a
EE SP 1.118 In figure, the value of R is
(A) 10 W
(B) 18 W
(C) 24 W
(D) 12 W
EE SP 1.119 In the circuit shown in figure, the switch S is closed at time (t = 0). The voltage
across the inductance at t 0 =
+
, is
(A) 2 V
(B) 4 V
(C) 6 - V
(D) 8 V
EE SP 1.120 The h-parameters for a two-port network are defined by

E
I
h
h
h
h
I
E
1
2
11
21
12
22
1
2
= = = = G G G
For the two-port network shown in figure, the value of h
12
is given by
(A) 0.125
(B) 0.167
(C) 0.625
(D) 0.25
nodi a
EE SP 1.121 A point charge of +I nC is placed in a space with permittivity of . 8 85 10
12
#
-

F/m as shown in figure. The potential difference
V
PQ
between two points P and
Q at distance of 40 mm and 20 mm respectively fr0m the point charge is
(A) 0.22 kV (B) 225 - V
(C) . 2 24 - kV (D) 15 V
EE SP 1.122 A parallel plate capacitor has an electrode area of 100 mm
2
, with spacing of
0.1 mm between the electrodes. The dielectric between the plates is air with
a permittivity of . 8 85 10
12
#
-
F/m. The charge on the capacitor is 100 V. The
stored energy in the capacitor is
(A) 8.85 pJ (B) 440 pJ
(C) 22.1 nJ (D) 44.3 nJ
EE SP 1.123 A composite parallel plate capacitor is made up of two different dielectric material
with different thickness (t
1
and t
2
) as shown in figure. The two different dielectric
materials are separated by a conducting foil F. The voltage of the conducting
foil is
(A) 52 V (B) 60 V
(C) 67 V (D) 33 V
***********
nodi a
SOLUTI ON
SOL 1.1 Correct answer is 330 W.
We redraw the given electric circuit as
From the given circuit, we have the following observations for the connected
batteries:
100 V battery: As the current flows through the battery from positive to negative
terminal, so it absorbs power.
80 V battery: As the current flows through the battery from negative to positive
terminal, so it delivers power.
15 V battery: As the current flows through the battery negative to positive
terminal, so it delivers power.
Thus, the net power absorbed by circuit elements is obtained as
P
net
= Power absorbed by 100 V battery
[Power emitted by 80 V battery + Power emitted by 15 V battery]
100 10 80 8 15 2
# # #
= - + ^ ^ h h
6 @
1000 640 30 = - -
W 330 =
SOL 1.2 Correct option is (A).
We redraw the given parallel plate capacitors as
(a) (b)
For the capacitor shown in figure (a), we have
C
0

d
A
o
e
= ...(1)
where, A = Area of the parallel plate capacitor
d = distance between the plates
Again, the capacitor shown in figure (b) can be considered as the two capacitors
C
1
and C
2
connected in parallel. So, we have
nodi a
C
1

d
A
o
2
e
=
and C
2

d
A
o r
2
e e
=
Therefore, we get the net capacitance as
C
net
C C
1 2
= +

/ /
d
A
d
A
d
A
d
A
d
A
2 2
2 2 2
1
o o r
o o r o
r
e e e
e e e e
e = + = + = +
^ h
...(2)
Thus, from equations (1) and (2), we get
C
net

C
2
1
o
r
e = +
^ h
SOL 1.3 Correct answer is (C)
We have the given circuit as
In the given circuit, the switches operates as shown by the respective arrows. So,
at t 0 = ,
Switch 1 (switch across V
s
) changes it state from short circuit to open circuit.
Switch 2 changes it state from open circuit to short circuit.
Therefore, we have the equivalent circuit at t 0 =
-
as (given V V 0 2
c
=- ^ h )
So, from the circuit, we get
V
s

V 0
t 0
=
=
-
Again, we consider the circuit for t 0 =
+
. By s-domain analysis, we have the
equivalent voltage across capacitor as
V
s ^ h
Sc
I
s
S
V 0
c
= +
+
^ ^ h h
So, we draw the equivalent circuit for given initial voltage across capacitor as
nodi a
Therefore, we redraw the complete circuit for t 0 =
+
as
Applying KVL, we get

Sc
I
I
5
2
100
-
+ + b l V
s
=
or
s s
s
s
2 20 10
100
1
100
20 10
3
6
3
#
#
#
#
#
- + +
- -
V
s
Thus, we obtain
V
s

s
s
s
2 20 10 2
2
3
#
=- + +

s
2
10
2
4
#
=
So, V
t
s
^ h t 2 10
4
#
=
i.e. the plot of source voltage is a straight line passing through origin, as shown
below.
SOL 1.4 Correct option is (B).
Undesirable property of electrical insulating material is its high relative
permittivity r
e
^ h.
SOL 1.5 Correct answer is 10 A.
We redraw the given circuit as
Applying KVL in the circuit, we have
300 I R =
300 I
I
25
2
= +
b l
nodi a
300 I
I
25
2
2
= +
I I 50 600
2
+ - 0 =
I I I 60 10 600
2
+ - - 0 =
I I I 60 10 60 + - + ^ ^ h h 0 =
I I 10 60 - + ^ ^ h h 0 =
So, A I 10 = , A 60 -
Now, for the two obtained values of current, we get
R 25
2
10
30 = + =
b l
R 25
2
60
5 = - =-
b l
(Resistance can not be
negative)
Thus, the current through the circuit is
I A 10 =
SOL 1.6 Correct option is (C).
According to Maxwell fourth equation
B : D 0 =
i.e. the divergence of magnetic field is zero. Now, we check this property for each
of the given vectors.
Option (A): B y z x a a a
x y z
2 2 2
= + +
So, B : D
x
y
y
z
z
x 0
2 2 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
= + + =
Option (B): B z x y a a a
x y z
2 2 2
= + +
So, B : D
x
z
y
x
z
y 0
2 2 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
= + + =
Option (C): B x y z a a a
x y z
2 2 2
= + +
So, B : D
x
x
y
y
z
z
2 2 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
= + +
x y z 2 2 2 0 ! = + +
Option (D):
B y z x z x y a a a
x y z
2 2 2 2 2 2
= + +
So, B : D
x
y z
y
x z
z
x y 0
2 2 2 2 2 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
= + + =
Thus, the vector given in option (C) does not satisfy the property of magnetic
flux density.
SOL 1.7 Correct answer is 35.
There are two possible connections
(1) Series adding connection
nodi a
Equivalent inductance
L
eq
L L M 2
1 2
= + +
380 L L M 2 = + +
or L M + 190 = ...(1)
(2) Series opposing connection
Equivalent inductance
L
eq
L L M 2
1 2
= + -
240 L L M 2 = + -
or L M - 120 = ...(2)
Substituting eq (2) from eq (1), we get
L 2 70 =
or L mH 35 =
SOL 1.8 Correct option is (D).
For t 0 < , the switch was at position 1 and circuit is in steady state. In steady
state capacitor behaves as open circuit. So
Therefore v 0
C
-
^ h V
o1
=-
Step 2 : For t 0 > , the switch moves to position 2. Again in steady state capacitor
acts as an open circuit.
v
C
3 ^ h V
o2
=
Time constant t R C
Th
=
R
Th
is the Thevenin resistance across the capacitor terminal after t 0 = . So
t RC 2 =
Now, at any time t 0 > , capacitor voltage is given by
v t
C ^ h v v v e 0
/
C C C
t
3 3 = + -
t -
^ ^ ^ h h h 6 @
nodi a
V V V e
/
o o o
t RC
2 1 2
2
= + - -
-
6 @
or, V V V e
/
o o o
t RC
2 1 2
2
= + - -
-
6 @
or, v t
C ^ h V e V e 1
o
RC
t
o
RC
t
2
2
1
2 = - -
- -
^ h
v t
C ^ h V e V e V e V e 1 1 1
/
o
RC
t
o
RC
t
o
RC
t
o
t RC
2
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
= - - - - + -
- - - -
^ ^ ^ h h h
or, v t
C ^ h V V e V 1
o o
RC
t
o 2 1
2
1
= - - +
-
^ ^ h h
As shown in Figure above this arrangement is equivalent to series combination
of three capacitors C
1
, C
2
and C
3
. We have
C
1

/ d
A
d
A
4
4
1 1
e e
= =
C
2

/ d
A
d
A
2
2
2 2
e e
= =
C
3

/ d
A
d
A
4
4
1 1
e e
= =
Now given that voltage across first capacitor is C
1
is 2 V, so we write
V
C1

/
j C j C j C
j C
V
1 1 1
1
2
s
1 2 3
1
#
w w w
w
=
+ +
=

C C C C C C
C C
10
2 3 1 3 1 2
2 3
#
+ +
2 = V 10 V
s
= ^ h
Substituting values of C
1
, C
2
and C
3
, we get

8 16 8
8
10
1 2 1
2
1 2
1 2
#
e e e e e
e e
+ +
2 =

16 16
8
1 2 1
2
1 2
e e e
e e
+

5
1
=

2 2
2 1
2
e e
e
+

5
1
=
2 2
2 1
e e + 5
2
e =
2
1
e 3
2
e =

2
1
e
e

2
3
=
:
1 2
e e : 3 2 =
Since there are two sources with different frequencies ( 10
1
w = , 5
2
w = ), we use
nodi a
superposition to obtain v t
C ^ h.
First consider source sin v t t 20 10 = ^ h . Open circuit current source and redrawing
circuit in domain with /sec rad 10
1
w = .
V
C1

j
j
1
10
1
10
1
20
#
=
+
(Using voltage division)

j 1 10
1
20
#
=
+
V
C1
tan
101
20
10
1
= -
-
A
1
. A V
101
20
1 99
C1
= = =
Now, consider current source sin i t t 10 5 = ^ h . Short circuit voltage source and
redrawing circuit in frequency domain with /sec rad 5
2
w = .
I
C2

j
1
5
1
1
10 0c =
+
j
j
1 5
5
10 0
#
c =
+
V
C2
I
j5
1
C2 #
=
V
C2

j 1 5
10 0c
=
+
V
C2
tan
26
10 5
= -
-
A
2
. A V
26
10
1 96
C2
= = =
nodi a
H By wire on x-axis
d
I
k
2p
=
k
1
4
2
1
#
p
=
H by wire on y-axis
d
I
k
2p
= - ^ h
k
2
2
2
1
#
p
= - ^ h
H on (2, 1, 0) k k
2
4
2
1
p p
= -
H / A m k
2
3
p
=
Given the relation
fv : d ^ h x y y z z x
2 2 2
= + + ...(1)
where f , v are scalar and vector field respectively. From the properties of vector
field, we have
f v : d ^ h v f f v : : d d = - ^ ^ h h
or v
f
:
d ^ h f v f v : : d d = + ^ ^ h h ...(2)
Again, we have
v y z x i j k = + +
So, v : d
x
y
y
z
z
x
2
2
2
2
2
2
= + +
0 =
Therefore, we get
f v : d ^ h 0 =
Substituting it in equation (2), we get
f v: d ^ h fv : d = ^ h
Thus, f v: d ^ h x y y z z x
2 2 2
= + + [from equation (1)]
We sketch the phasor diagram for three phase star connected load as
Since, line A to neutral voltage is
A V 10 15c =
nodi a
So, for balance 3-phase, we have
B 10 105c = -
and C 10 225c = -
Therefore, the voltage of line B with respect to line C is
v
BC
v v
B C
= -
10 105 10 225 c c = - - -
10 3 75c = -
We have the impedance circuit,
The capacitor and inductor can be replaced with its equivalent reactance (in
frequency domain) as shown below.
So, we have the equivalent circuit as
Solving the above circuit, we get the equivalent driving point impedance as
Z s ^ h | | s
s
s
s
1 1
= + +
b l
| | s
s s
s 1 1
2
= +
+
b l
s
s s
s
s s
s
1 1
1 1
2
2
#
= +
+
+
+
s
s s
s
2
1
3
2
= +
+
+
or Z s ^ h
s s
s s
2
3 1
3
4 2
=
+
+ +
nodi a
According to Gausss law, the total electric flux coming out of the concentric
spherical surface is equal to the charge enclosed by the surface, i.e.
Q D ds : =
#
Since, the electric potential is defined as
v
r
Q
4
0
pe
=
So, Q v r 4
0 #
pe =
r 4
0
pe = (since, v 1 = volt)
Hence, D ds :
#
r 4
0
pe =
To obtain the Norton equivalent along X -Y terminal, we redraw the given circuit
as
In the network, 5 W resistor is short-circuit. So, the equivalent circuit is
Now, writing the KVL equation in two loops, we have
I I I 5 5 5
sc 1 1
- - - ^ h 0 = ...(1)
. . I I I 5 2 5 2 5
sc sc 1
- - - + ^ h 0 = ...(2)
Solving equation (1),
I I 10 5
sc 1
- 5 =
I 2
1
I 1
sc
= + ...(3)
Solving equation (2),
. I I 7 5 5
sc 1
- . 2 5 =
or I I 3 2
sc 1
- 1 =
nodi a
or I I 3 1
sc sc
- - 1 = [using equation (3)]
or I 2
sc
2 =
Thus, I
sc
A 1 =
i.e. the Norton equivalent source as seen into terminals X and Y is 1 A.
SOL 1.17 Correct answer is 3 W.
To obtain the required unknown, we redraw the given circuit as
Applying KCL at node V
x
, we have

V V
1
1
1
x x
-
+ 2 =
or V 2 1
x
- 2 =
or V
x

2
3
=
Therefore, the power delivered by current source is obtained as
= Voltage across current source
#
current through
current source
W
2
3
2 3
#
= =
We have the given system of a charge and a perfectly conducting metal plate as
shown below.
Due to presence of conducting plane, we can assume an image charge for the
system as shown below
nodi a
So, we can observe from the figure that electric field vector along x-y plane
is cancelled, i.e. zero. Therefore, the electric field vector acts along negative z
-direction and given as
E
"

E E
k
2 2
1 2
= + -
t
d ^ n h
...(1)
where E
1
and E
2
are the field intensity due to the charge Q and Q - at point
( , , ) 2 2 0 . So, we obtain
E
1

( ( ) ( ) ( ) )
r
Q
4
1
4
1
2 2 2
32 2
0
2
0
2 2 2 2
0
pe pe
pe
= =
+ +
2 =
Similarly, we get, E 2
2
=
Substituting these values in equation (1), we obtain
E
"
k
2
2
2
2
= + -
t
e
^
o
h
k 2 =-
t
Consider the circuit shown below with non-ideal voltage source V
s
, an internal
impedance Z R jX
s s s
= + , and purely resistive load R
L
.
Current through the circuit is given by
I
R R jX
V
s L s
s
=
+ +
or I
R R X
V
s L s
s
2
=
+ + ^ ^ h h
Therefore, the power transferred to load is
P I R
L
2
=

R R X
V R
s L s
s L
2 2
2
=
+ + ^ ^ h h
For maximum power, we have
nodi a

dR
dP
L
0 =
or
[ ]
R R X
R R X R R R 1 2
s L s
s L s L s L
2 2 2
2 2
+ +
+ + - +
^ ^
^ ^
h h
h h
0 =
or R R R R X R R R 2 2 2
s L s L s s L L
2 2 2 2
+ + + - - 0 =
or R X
s s
2 2
+ R
L
2
=
or R
L
R X
s s
2 2
= +
i.e. to maximise the power transferred to pure resistive load (R
L
), its value must
be equal to the magnitude of Z
s
of internal circuit.
Given the current and voltage at different frequencies as
At krad 1
1
w = /s, V
1
100 0 = . I 0 03 31
1
c =
At krad 2
2
w = /s, V
2
100 0 = I 2 0
2
c =
From the given data, it is clear that voltage and current are in phase at 2
2
w = .
So, it satisfies the resonance condition. Therefore, we have
R
I
V
2
100
50 W = = =
Also, for the resonance circuit, we have
L w
C
1
w
=
or L 10 2
3
# #

C 2 10
1
3
# #
=
or L 4 10
6
#

C
1
= ...(1)
Again, at 1 w = krad/s, we have
cos 31c
Z
R
=
or cos 31c
R L
C
R
1 2
2
w
w
=
+ -
b l
or cos 31c
L
C
2500 10
10
1
50
3
3
=
+ -
b l
...(2)
Solving equations (1) and (2), we get
L mH 10 = and F C 25 . m
In the equivalent star connection, the resistance can be given as
R
C

R R R
R R
a b c
b a
=
+ +
; R
B

R R R
R R
a b c
a c
=
+ +
and R
A

R R R
R R
a b c
b c
=
+ +
So, if the delta connection components R
a
, R
b
and R
c
are scaled by a factor k
then
R
A
l
kR kR kR
kR kR
a b c
b c
=
+ +
^ ^ h h

k
k
R R R
R R
a b c
b c
2
=
+ +
kR
A
=
Hence, it is also scaled by a factor k
nodi a
Given, flux density
B
v
xa kya a 4 2 8
x y z
= + +
v v v
Since, magnetic flux density is always divergence less.
i.e., B $ d
v
0 =
So, for given vector flux density, we have
B $ d
v
k 4 2 0 0 = + + =
or, k 2 =-
Consider the voltage source and load shown in figure
We obtain the power delivered by load as
P
delivered
I V
*
L L
= 10 150 10 60 c c = + ^ ^ h h 100 210c =
cos sin j 1000 210 1000 210 c c = + . j 866 025 500 =- -
As both the reactive and average power (real power) are negative so, power is
absorbed by load. i.e., load absorbs real as well as reactive power.
For the purely resistive load, maximum average power is transferred when
R
L
R X
Th Th
2 2
= +
where R jX
Th Th
+ is the equivalent thevinin (input) impedance of the circuit.
i.e., R
L
4 3
2 2
= + 5 W =
For the given capacitance, C F 100m = in the circuit, we have the reactance.
X
C

sc
1
=
s 100 10
1
6
# #
=
-

s
10
4
=
So,
V s
V s
1
2
^
^
h
h

10
10
s s
s
10
10
10
4
4
4
4
4
=
+ +
+

s
s
2
1
=
+
+
Energy density stored in a dielectric medium is obtained as
w
E
/ J m E
2
1
2 2
e =
The electric field inside the dielectric will be same to given field in free space
nodi a
only if the field is tangential to the interface
So, w
E
2 10 /mm
2
1
6 8
0
2 2
2
6 2
e
#
= + ^ h
Therefore, the total stored energy is
W
E
W dv
E
v
=
#
100 10 / . mm mm 500 500 0 4
0
6 2 2
# #
e
# #
= ^ ^ h h
. 100 10 0 4 25 10
0
6 4
# # # # #
e =
. 8 85 10 10
12 13
# #
=
-
88.5 J =
Consider that the voltage across the three capacitors C
1
, C
2
and C
3
are V
1
, V
2
and
V
3
respectively. So, we can write

V
V
3
2

C
C
2
3
= ....(1)
Since, Voltage is inversely proportional to capacitance
Now, given that
C
1
F 10 m = ; 10V V
max
1
= ^ h
C
2
F 5 m = ; 5 V V
max
2
= ^ h
C
3
F 2 m = ; 2V V
max
3
= ^ h
So, from Eq (1) we have

V
V
3
2

5
2
=
for V
max
3 ^ h 2 =
We obtain, V
2
0.8 volt
5
2 2
5 <
#
= =
i.e., V
2
V <
max
2 ^ h
Hence, this is the voltage at C
2
. Therefore,
V
3
2 volt =
V
2
0.8 volt =
and V
1
2.8 volt V V
2 3
= + =
Now, equivalent capacitance across the terminal is
C
eq

C C
C C
C
2 3
2 3
1
=
+
+

5 2
5 2
10
#
=
+
+ F
7
80
m =
Equivalent voltage is (max. value)
V
max
. V 2 8
1
= =
So, charge stored in the effective capacitance is
Q C V
max eq
= .
7
80
2 8
#
=b ^ l h 32 C m =
nodi a
For evaluating the equivalent thevenin voltage seen by the load R
L
, we open the
circuit across it (also if it consist dependent source).
The equivalent circuit is shown below
As the circuit open across R
L
so
I
2
0 =
or, 40 j I
2
0 =
i.e., the dependent source in loop 1 is short circuited. Therefore,
V
L1

j
j V
4 3
4
s
=
+
^ h
V
Th
V 10
L1
= 100 53.13
j
j
4 3
40
c =
+

.
100 53.13
5 53 13
40 90
c
c
c =
800 90c =
Applying nodal analysis at top node.

1 1
j
V V
1
0
1
0
1 1
c c +
+
+
1 0c =
( 1 1) 1 1 j j V 0
1
c + + + j 1 =
V
1

j 1 1
1
=
+
-
Current I
1

1
j j
j V
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
c
=
+
=
-
+
+

( )
A
j j
j
j 1 1
1
=
+
=
+
nodi a
( ) G s
( )( )( )
( )( )
s s s
s s
1 3 4
9 2
2
=
+ + +
+ +
( ) G jw
( )( )( )
( )( )
j j j
j
1 3 4
9 2
2
w w w
w w
=
+ + +
- + +
The steady state output will be zero if
( ) G jw 0 =
9
2
w - + 0 =
w 3 / rad s =
We put a test source between terminal 1, 2 to obtain equivalent impedance
Z
Th

I
V
test
test
=
Applying KCL at top right node

9 1
99
k k
V V
I
100
test test
b
+
+ - I
test
=
99
k
V V
I
10 100
test test
b
+ - I
test
= ...(i)
But I
b

10k k k
V V
9 1
test test
=-
+
=-
Substituting I
b
into equation (i), we have

10 10 k k
V V V
100
99
test test test
+ + I
test
=

V V
10 10
100
100
test test
3
#
+ I
test
=

V
100
2
test
I
test
=
Z
Th

50
I
V
test
test
W = =
In phasor form Z j 4 3 = -
Z 5 . 36 86cW = -
I 5 A 100c =
Average power delivered :
P
. avg
cos Z I
2
1
2
q =
25 5 36.86 cos
2
1
#
c
#
= 50 W =
nodi a
Alternate Method:
Z (4 3) j W = -
I 5 (100 100) cos A t p = +
P
avg
Re
I
Z
2
1
2
= $ .
( ) ( ) Re j
2
1
5 4 3
2
# #
= - " ,
100 50 W
2
1
#
= =
The s-domain equivalent circuit is shown as below.
( ) I s
( )/ ( )
C s C s
v s
C C
v
1 1
0
1 1
0
c c
1 2 1 2
=
+
=
+
(12 ) V
C C
C C
1 2
1 2
=
+
b l
(0) 12 V v
C
=
12C
eq
=
Taking inverse Laplace transform for the current in time domain,
( ) i t ( ) C t 12
eq
d = (Impulse)
In the given circuit, V V
A B
- 6 V =
So current in the branch, I
AB
3 A
2
6
= =
We can see, that the circuit is a one port circuit looking from terminal BD as
shown below

For a one port network current entering one terminal, equals the current leaving
the second terminal. Thus the outgoing current from A to B will be equal to the
incoming current from D to C as shown
i.e. I
DC
3 A I
AB
= =
nodi a
The total current in the resistor 1 W will be
I
1
2 I
DC
= + (Writing KCL at node D)
2 3 5 A = + =
So, V
CD
( ) I 1
1 #
= - 5 V =-
We obtain Thevenin equivalent of circuit B.
Thevenin Impedance :
Z
Th
R =
Thevenin Voltage :
V
Th
3 V 0c =
Now, circuit becomes as
Current in the circuit, I
1

R 2
10 3
=
+
-
Power transfer from circuit to A B
P ( ) 3 I R I
1
2 2
1
= +
nodi a

10 3 10 3
R
R
R 2
3
2
2
=
+
-
+
+
-
: : D D

( ) ( ) R
R
R 2
49
2
21
2
=
+
+
+

( )
( )
R
R R
2
49 21 2
2
=
+
+ +

( )
42 70
R
R
2
2
=
+
+

dR
dP

( )
( ) ( ) ( )
R
R R R
2
2 70 42 70 2 2
0
4
2
=
+
+ - + +
=
(2 )[(2 )70 (42 70 )2] R R R + + - + 0 =
R R 140 70 84 140 + - - 0 =
56 R 70 =
R 0.8 W =
When 10 V is connected at port A the network is
Now, we obtain Thevenin equivalent for the circuit seen at load terminal, let
Thevenin voltage is V
, V Th 10
with 10 V applied at port A and Thevenin resistance
is R
Th
.
I
L

R R
V
,10 V
Th L
Th
=
+
For 1 R
L
W = , 3 A I
L
=
3
R
V
1
,10 V
Th
Th
=
+
...(i)
For 2.5 R
L
W = , 2 A I
L
=
2
. R
V
2 5
,10 V
Th
Th
=
+
...(ii)
Dividing above two

2
3

.
R
R
1
2 5
Th
Th
=
+
+
R 3 3
Th
+ R 2 5
Th
= +
R
Th
2 W =
Substituting R
Th
into equation (i)
V
,10 V Th
3(2 1) 9 V = + =
nodi a
Note that it is a non reciprocal two port network. Thevenin voltage seen at port
B depends on the voltage connected at port A. Therefore we took subscript
V
,10 V Th
. This is Thevenin voltage only when 10 V source is connected at input
port . A If the voltage connected to port A is different, then Thevenin voltage
will be different. However, Thevenins resistance remains same.
Now, the circuit is
For 7 R
L
W = , I
L
1 A
R
V
2 2 7
9 ,10 V
L
Th
=
+
=
+
=
Now, when 6 V connected at port A let Thevenin voltage seen at port B is V
,6 V Th
. Here 1 R
L
W = and A I
3
7
L
=
V
, V Th 6
R
3
7
1
3
7
Th # #
= + 2 7 V
3
7
3
7
#
= + =
This is a linear network, so V
Th
at port B can be written as
V
Th
V
1
a b = +
where V
1
is the input applied at port A.
We have 10 V V
1
= , 9 V V
,10 V Th
=
9 10a b = + ...(i)
When 6 V V
1
= , 9 V V
, V Th 6
=
7 6a b = + ...(ii)
Solving (i) and (ii)
a . 0 5 = , 4 b =
Thus, with any voltage V
1
applied at port A, Thevenin voltage or open circuit
voltage at port B will be
So, V
, Th V1
. V 0 5 4
1
= +
For V
1
8 V =
V
,8 V Th
. V 0 5 8 4 8
oc #
= + = = (open circuit voltage)
By taking , V V
1 2
and V
3
all are phasor voltages.
V
1
V V
2 3
= +
Magnitude of , V V
1 2
and V
3
are given as
nodi a
V
1
220 V = , 122 V V
2
= , 136 V V
3
=
Since voltage across R is in same phase with V
1
and the voltage V
3
has a phase
difference of q with voltage V
1
, we write in polar form
V
1
V V 0
2 3
c q = +
V
1
cos sin V V jV
2 3 3
q q = + +
V
1
( ) cos sin V V jV
2 3 3
q q = + +
V
1
( ) ( ) cos sin V V V
2 3
2
2
2
q q = + +
220 ( ) ( ) cos sin 122 136 136
2 2
q q = + +
Solving, power factor
cos q . 0 45 =
Voltage across load resistance
V
RL
cos V
3
q = . 136 0 45
#
= 61.2 V =
Power absorbed in R
L
P
L

( . )
750 W
R
V
5
61 2
L
RL
2
2
- = =
The frequency domains equivalent circuit at 1 /sec rad w = .
Since the capacitor and inductive reactances are equal in magnitude, the net
impedance of that branch will become zero.
Equivalent circuit
Current ( ) i t
1
(1 )
sin
sin A
t
t
W
= =
rms value of current i
rms
A
2
1
=
Voltage in time domain
( ) v t ( ) cos t 100 2 100p =
Current in time domain
nodi a
( ) i t ( / ) sin t 10 2 100 4 p p = +
Applying the following trigonometric identity
( ) sin f ( ) cos 90c f = -
So, ( ) i t 10 (100 /4 /2) cos t 2 p p p = + -
10 (100 /4) cos t 2 p p = -
In phasor form, I /
2
10 2
4 p = -
Power transferred to the load
P I R
L
2
=
1
R R
R
0
th L
L
2
=
+
b l
For maximum power transfer R
th
, should be minimum.
R
th

R
R
6
6
0 =
+
=
R 0 =
Note: Since load resistance is constant so we choose a minimum value of R
th
Power loss
.
( )
0 W
R
V
1 25 10
5 10
2
p
rated
2
6
3 2
#
#
= = =
For an parallel combination of resistance and capacitor
tand
. . C R
1
2 50 1 25 0 102
1
p p # # # w p
= =
.
40
1
0 025 = =
Charge Q CV =
d
A
V
r 0
e e
= ( ) A
d
V
r 0
e e = C
d
A
r 0
e e
=
Q Q
max
=
We have 8.85 10 / F m c
0
14
e
#
=
-
, 2.26
r
e = , 20 40 m A c
2
#
=
nodi a

d
V
50 10 kV/cm
3
#
=
Maximum electrical charge on the capacitor
when
d
V
50 / kV cm
d
V
max
= =
b l
Thus, Q 8.85 10 2.26 20 40 50 10
14 3
# # # # # #
=
-

8 C m =
v
i
100 (100 ) sin V t 2 p =
Fundamental component of current
i
i1
10 (100 /3) sin t 2 A p p = -
Input power factor
pf cos
I
I
1( )
rms
rms
1
f =
I
( ) 1 rms
is rms values of fundamental component of current and I
rms
is the rms value
of converter current.
pf /3 0.44 cos
10 5 2
10
2 2 2
p =
+ +
=
Only the fundamental component of current contributes to the mean ac input
power. The power due to the harmonic components of current is zero.
So, P
in
cos V I
rms rms 1 1
f =
100 10 /3 cos p
#
=
500 W =
Power delivered by the source will be equal to power dissipated by the resistor.
P / cos V I 4
s s
p =
1 / cos W 2 4 1
#
p = =
I
C

RL
/ / I I 2 4 2 4
s
p p = - = - -
/ / / / cos sin cos sin j j 2 4 4 4 4 p p p p = + - -
^ ^ h h $ .
/ sin j 2 2 4 p = j 2 =
For t 0 < , the switch was closed for a long time so equivalent circuit is
nodi a
Voltage across capacitor at t 0 =
(0) v
c
4
4 1
5
#
= = V
Now switch is opened, so equivalent circuit is
For capacitor at 0 t =
+
(0 ) v
c
+
(0) 4 v
c
= = V
current in 4 W resistor at t 0 =
+
,
(0 )
i
v
4
1
c
1
= =
+
A
so current in capacitor at t 0 =
+
, ( ) i i 0 1
c 1
= =
+
A
Thevenin equivalent across 1 X resistor can be obtain as following
Open circuit voltage v
th
100 = V ( 0) i =
Short circuit current i
sc
100 = A ( 0 v
th
= )
So, R
th

i
v
sc
th
= 1
100
100
W = =
Equivalent circuit is
i 50
1 1
100
=
+
= A
The circuit is
Current in R W resistor is
i 2 1 1 = - = A
Voltage across 12 W resistor is
V
A
1 12
#
= 12 = V
So, i
R
V 6
A
=
-
6
1
12 6
W =
-
=
nodi a
V Z I Z I
1 11 1 12 2
= + V Z I Z I
1 11 1 12 2
= + l l l l l
V Z I Z I
2 21 1 22 2
= + V Z I Z I
2 21 1 22 2
= + l l l l l
Here, , I I I I
1 1 2 2
= = l l
When 1 R W = is connected
V
1
l 1 V I
1 1 #
= + l V I
1 1
= +
V
1
l Z I Z I I
11 1 12 2 1
= + +
V
1
l ( 1) Z I Z I
11 1 12 2
= + +
So, Z
11
l 1 Z
11
= +
Z
12
l Z
12
=
Similarly for output port
V 2
l Z I Z I
21 1 22 2
= + l l l l Z I Z I
21 1 22 2
= + l l
So, Z Z
21 21
= l , Z Z
22 22
= l
Z-matrix is Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
1
11
21
12
22
=
+
> H
In the bridge
R R
1 4
1 R R
2 3
= =
So it is a balanced bridge
I 0 = mA
Resistance of the bulb rated 200 W/220 V is
R
1

P
V
1
2
=
( )
242
200
220
2
W = =
Resistance of 100 W/220 V lamp is
R
T

P
V
2
2
=
( )
484
100
220
2
W = =
To connect in series
R
T
n R
1 #
=
484 242 n
#
=
n 2 =
nodi a
For 0 t < , S
1
is closed and S
2
is opened so the capacitor C
1
will charged upto 3
volt.
(0) V
C1
3 = Volt
Now when switch positions are changed, by applying charge conservation
(0 ) C V
eq C1
+
(0 ) (0 ) C V C V
C C 1 2 1 2
= +
+ +
(2 1) 3
#
+ 1 3 2 (0 ) V
C2
# #
= +
+
9 3 2 (0 ) V
C2
= +
+
(0 ) V
C2
+
3 = Volt
Applying KVL in the input loop
(1 1) 10 ( 49 ) v i
j C
i i
1
1 1
3
1 1 #
w
- + - + 0 =
v
1
2 10 50 i
j C
i
1 3
1 1 #
w
= +
Input impedance, Z
1

i
v
1
1
= 2 10
( / ) j C 50
1 3
#
w
= +
Equivalent capacitance, C
eq

C
50
= 2
F
F
50
100 n
n = =
Voltage across 2 X resistor, V
S
2 = V
Current, I
2W

V
2
S
=
2
4
2 = = A
To make the current double we have to take
V
S
8 = V
To obtain equivalent Thevenin circuit, put a test source between terminals AB
Applying KCL at super node
nodi a

V V V
2
5
2 1
P P S
-
+ + I
S
=
5 2 V V V
P P S
- + + 2I
S
=
2 2 V V
P S
+ 2 5 I
s
= +
V V
P S
+ 2.5 I
S
= + ...(1)
V V
P S
- 3V
S
=
& V
P
4V
S
=
So, 4V V
S S
+ 2.5 I
S
= +
5V
S
2.5 I
S
= +
V
S
0.2 0.5 I
S
= + ...(2)
For Thevenin equivalent circuit
V
S
I R V
S th th
= + ...(3)
By comparing (2) and (3),
Thevenin resistance R
th
0.2 kW =
From above V
th
0.5 = V
No. of chords is given as
l 1 b n = - +
b" no. of branches
n " no. of nodes
l " no. of chords
6 b= , n 4 =
l 6 4 1 = - + 3 =
Impedance Z
o
2.38 0.667 j W = -
Constant term in impedance indicates that there is a resistance in the circuit.
Assume that only a resistance and capacitor are in the circuit, phase difference
in Thevenin voltage is given as
q ( ) tan CR
1
w =-
-
(Due to capacitor)
Z
o
R
C
j
w
= -
So,
C
1
w
0.667 =
and R 2.38 W =
nodi a
q
.
.
tan
0 667
1 2 38 1 #
=-
-
b l
74.34 15.9 c c =- =- [
given V
oc
3.71 15.9c + = -
So, there is an inductor also connected in the circuit
Time constant of the circuit can be calculated by simplifying the circuit as follows

C
eq

3
2
= F
Equivalent Resistance
R
eq
3 3 6 W = + =
Time constant t R C
eq eq
= 6
3
2
#
= 4 = sec
Impedance of the circuit is
Z j L
R
R
j C
j C
1
1
w = +
+
w
w
j L
j CR
R
j CR
j CR
1 1
1
#
w
w w
w
= +
+ -
-

( )
j L
C R
R j CR
1
1
2 2 2
w
w
w
= +
+
-

( )
C R
j L C R R j CR
1
1
2 2 2
2 2 2 2
w
w w w
=
+
+ + -

[ ( ) ]
C R
R
C R
j L C R CR
1 1
1
2 2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2
w w
w w w
=
+
+
+
+ -
For resonance ( ) 0 Im Z =
So, (1 ) L C R
2 2 2
w w + CR
2
w =
0.1 L = H, 1 C = F, 1 R W =
So, 0.1[1 (1)(1)]
2
#
w w + (1)(1)
2
w =
1
2
w + 10 =
& w 3 9 = = rad/sec
Applying KVL in the circuit
2 5 V i
ab
- + 0 =
1 i = A, V
ab
2 1 5
#
= - 3 =- Volt
nodi a
Charge stored at 5 t m = sec
Q ( ) i t dt
0
5
= # =area under the curve
Q =Area OABCDO
=Area (OAD)+Area(AEB)+Area(EBCD)
2 4 2 3 3 2
2
1
2
1
# # # # #
= + +
4 3 6 = + + 13 = nC
Initial voltage across capacitor
V
0

C
Q
o
=
. nF
nC
0 3
13
= 43.33 = Volt
When capacitor is connected across an inductor it will give sinusoidal esponse as
( ) v t
c
cos V t
o o
w =
where
o
w
LC
1
=
. . 0 3 10 0 6 10
1
9 3
# # #
=
- -
2.35 10
6
#
= rad/sec
At 1 sec t m = , ( ) v t
c
43.33 (2.35 10 1 10 ) cos
6 6
# # #
=
-
43.33 ( 0.70)
#
= - 30.44 =- V
Writing node equations at node A and B

V V
1
5
1
0
a a
-
+
-
0 =
2 5 V
a
- 0 =
V
a
2.5 = V
Similarly

V V V
3
4
1
0
b ab b
-
++
-
0 =

( ) V V V
V
3
4
b a b
b
- -
+ 0 =
4(2.5 ) 3 V V V
b b b
- - + 0 =
8 10 V
b
- 0 =
nodi a
V
b
1.25 = V
Current i 1.25
V
1
b
= = A
SOL 1.68 Correct option is ().
Here two capacitance C
1
and C
2
are connected in series, so equivalent capacitance
is
C
eq

C C
C C
1 2
1 2
=
+
C
1

d
A
r
1
0 1
e e
=
.
4 10
8 85 10 8 500 500 10
3
12 6
#
# # # # #
=
-
- -
. 442 5 10
11
#
=
-
F
C
2

d
A
r
2
0 2
e e
=
.
2 10
8 85 10 2 500 500 10
3
12 6
#
# # # # #
=
-
- -

. 221 25 10
11
#
=
-
F
C
eq

. .
. .
442 5 10 221 25 10
442 5 10 221 25 10
11 11
11 11
# #
# # #
=
+
- -
- -

. 147 6 10
11
#
=
-
1476 - pF
Circumference l 300 = mm
no. of turns n 300 =
Cross sectional area A 300 = mm
2
Inductance of coil L
l
n A
0
2
m
=

( )
4 10 (300) 300 10
300 10
3
7 2 6
#
# # # #
p
=
-
- -
. 113 04 = H m
Divergence of a vector field is given as
Divergence V 4: =
In cartesian coordinates
4
x
i
y
j
z
k
2
2
2
2
2
2
= + +
t t t
So ( ) ( ) ( ) cos cos sin V
x
x xy y
y
y xy
z
z x y
2 2 2
4:
2
2
2
2
2
2
= - + + + + +
6 6 6 @ @ @
( ) ( ) sin sin cos x xy y y xy x z z 2
2
=- - + - + cos z z 2
2
=
nodi a
Writing KVL for both the loops
3( ) 0.5 V I I V
dt
dI
x 1 2
1
- + - - 0 =
3 3 0.5 V I I V
dt
dI
x 1 2
1
- - - - 0 = ...(1)
In second loop
. . I V
dt
dI
5 0 2 0 5
x 2
1
- + + 0 =
I
2
0.04 0.1 V
dt
dI
x
1
= + ...(2)
Put I
2
from eq(2) into eq(2)
3 3 . . 0.5 V I V
dt
dI
V
dt
dI
0 04 0 1
x x 1
1 1
- - + - -
: D
0 =
0.8
dt
dI
1
1.12 3 V I V
x 1
=- - +

dt
dI
1
1.4 3.75 V I V
4
5
x 1
=- - +
Impedance of the given network is
Z R j L
C
1
w
w
= + -
b l
Admittance Y
Z
1
=
R j L
C
1
1
w
w
=
+ -
b l

R j L R j L
R j L
1
C C
C
1 1
1
#
w w
w
=
+ - - -
- -
w w
w
^ ^
^
h h
h

R L
R j L
C
C
2 1 2
1
w
w
=
+ -
- -
w
w
^
^
h
h

R L
R
R L
j L
C C
C
2 1 2 2 1 2
1
w w
w
=
+ -
-
+ -
-
w w
w
^ ^
^
h h
h
( ) ( ) Re Im Y Y = +
Varying frequency for ( ) Re Y and ( ) Im Y we can obtain the admittance-locus.
At 0 t =
+
, when switch positions are changed inductor current and capacitor
voltage does not change simultaneously
So at 0 t =
+
(0 ) v
c
+
(0 ) 10 v
c
= =
-
V
(0 ) i
L
+
(0 ) 10 i
L
= =
-
A
The equivalent circuit is
nodi a
Applying KCL

(0 ) (0 ) (0 ) v v v
10 10
L L c
+
-
+ + +
(0 ) 10 i
L
= =
+
2 (0 ) 10 v
L
-
+
100 =
Voltage across inductor at 0 t =
+
(0 ) v
L
+
55
2
100 10
=
+
= V
So, current in capacitor at 0 t =
+
(0 ) i
C
+

( ) ( ) v v
10
0 0
L c
=
-
+ +

4.5
10
55 10
=
-
= A
The circuit is
Applying KVL
3 2 I
NL
2
#
- V
NL
=
3 2I
NL
2
- I
NL
2
=
3I
NL
2
3 = & I
NL
1 = A
V
NL
(1) 1
2
= = V
In the circuit
V
X
V 0c + =
nodi a
( )
R
V V
V j C
2 0
y
y
c +
w
-
+ 0 =
( ) V j CR 1
y
w + V 2 0c + =
V
y

j CR
V
1
2 0c +
w
=
+
V
YX
V V
X Y
= - V
j CR
V
1
2
w
= -
+
R 0 " , V
YX
V V V 2 = - =-
R "3, V
YX
0 V V = - =
So power dissipated in the non-linear resistance
P V I
NL NL
= 1 1 1
#
= = W
In node incidence matrix
b b b b b b
n
n
n
n
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1 2 3 4 5 6
1
2
3
4
-
-
-
-
- -
R
T
S
S
S
S
SS
V
X
W
W
W
W
WW
In option (C)
E AV =
e e e e
T
1 2 3 4 8 B
V V V
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
T
1 2 6
=
-
-
-
-
- -
--
R
T
S
S
S
S
SS
8
V
X
W
W
W
W
WW
B

e
e
e
e
1
2
3
4
R
T
S
S
S
S
SS
V
X
W
W
W
W
WW

V V V
V V V
V V V
V V V
1 2 3
2 4 5
1 5 6
3 4 6
=
+ +
- - +
- - -
- + +
R
T
S
S
S
S
SS
V
X
W
W
W
W
WW
which is true.
Assume a Gaussian surface inside the sphere ( ) x R <
From gauss law
y Q
enclosed
=
D ds Q
enclosed
: = = #
Q
enclosed

R
Q
r
R
Qr
3
4
3
4 3
3
3
3
#
p
p = =
nodi a
So, D ds : #
R
Qr
3
3
=
or D r 4
2
#
p
R
Qr
3
3
=
Q
R
r
4
0
3
pe
= D E
0
a e =
Inductance is given as
L
l
N A
0
2
m
=

( )
( ) ( )
1 10
4 10 400 16 10
3
7 2 4
#
# # # #
p
=
-
- -

321.6 mH =
V I X
L
=
fL 2
230
p
= 2 X fL
L
` p =

. . 2 3 14 50 321 6 10
230
3
# # # #
=
-
. 2 28 = A
Energy stored is inductor
E LI
2
1 2
=
321.6 10 (2.28)
2
1 3 2
# # #
=
-
Force required to reduce the air gap of length 1 mm is
F
0.835
l
E
1 10
3
#
= =
-
835 = N
Thevenin voltage:
V
th
( ) I R Z Z
L C
= + +
1 0 [1 2 ] j j c + = + -
1(1 ) j = + 45 2 V + =
%

Thevenin impedance:
Z
th
R Z Z
L C
= + + 1 2j j = + - (1 ) j W = +
nodi a
In the given circuit
Output voltage
v
o
Av
i
= 10 1 V
6
#
m = 1 = V
Input impedance
Z
i

i
v
i
i
=
v
0
i
3 = =
Output impedance
Z
o

i
v
o
o
=
i
Av
R
o
i
o
= = 10 W =
All sources present in the circuit are DC sources, so all inductors behaves as
short circuit and all capacitors as open circuit
Equivalent circuit is
Voltage across R
3
is
5 I R
1 3
=
5 (1) I
1
=
I
1
5 = A (current through R
3
)
By applying KCL, current through voltage source
1 I
2
+ I
1
=
I
2
5 1 = - 4 = A
Given Two port network can be described in terms of h-parametrs only.
At resonance reactance of the circuit would be zero and voltage across inductor
and capacitor would be equal
V
L
V
C
=
At resonance impedance of the circuit
Z
R
R R
1 2
= +
nodi a
Current I
R

R R
V 0
1 2
1
c +
=
+
Voltage V
2
( ) I R j V V
R L C 2
= + -
V
2

R R
V
R
0
1 2
1
2
c +
=
+
Voltage across capacitor
V
C

j C
I
1
R #
w
=

j C R R
V 1 0
R
1 2
#
c +
w
=
+

( ) C R R
V 90
R
1 2
c +
w
=
+
-
So phasor diagram is
This is a second order LC circuit shown below
Capacitor current is given as
( ) i t
C

( )
C
dt
dv t
c
=
Taking Laplace transform
( ) I s
C
( ) (0) CsV s V = - , (0) V " initial voltage
Current in inductor
( ) i t
L
( )
L
v t dt
1
c
= #
( ) I s
L

( )
L s
V s
1
=
For t 0 > , applying KCL(in s-domain)
( ) ( ) I s I s
C L
+ 0 =
( ) (0)
( )
CsV s V
L s
V s
1
- + 0 =
( ) s
LCs
V s
1 2
+
: D
V
o
=
( ) V s V
s
s
o
2
0
2
w
=
+
,
LC
1
0
2
aw =
Taking inverse Laplace transformation
( ) v t cos V t
o o
w = , 0 t >
nodi a
Power dissipated in heater when AC source is connected
P 2.3 kW =
R
V
rms
2
=
2.3 10
3
#

( )
R
230
2
=
R 23 W = (Resistance of heater)
Now it is connected with a square wave source of 400 V peak to peak
Power dissipated is
P
R
V
rms
2
= , 400 200 V V V V
p p p
& = =
-

( )
1.739
23
200
2
= = kW V
rms
V
p
= =200 (for square wave)
From maxwells first equation
D 4:
v
r =
E 4:
v
e
r
= (Divergence of electric field intensity is non-Zero)
Maxwells fourth equation
B 4: 0 = (Divergence of magnetic field intensity is zero)
Current in the circuit
I
( | | )
8
R 10 10
100
=
+
= A (given)

R 5
100
+
8 =
Or R 7.5
8
60
W = =
Rms value is given as

rms
m
( )
3
2
4
2
2
= +
9 8 17 V = + =
Writing KVL in input and output loops
( ) V i i Z
1 1 2 1
- + 0 =
V
1
Z i Z i
1 1 1 2
= + ...(1)
Similarly
( ) V i Z i i Z
2 2 2 1 2 1
- - + 0 =
V
2
( ) Z i Z Z i
1 1 1 2 2
= + + ...(2)
From equation (1) and (2) Z-matrix is given as
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z Z
1
1
1
1 2
=
+
> H
nodi a
In final steady state the capacitor will be completely charged and behaves as an
open circuit
Steady state voltage across capacitor
( ) v
c
3 (10)
10 10
20
=
+

10 = V
We know that divergence of the curl of any vector field is zero
( ) E 4 4
#
0 =
When the switch is at position 1, current in inductor is given as
(0 ) i
L
-

20 40
120
=
+
2 = A
At 0 t = , when switch is moved to position 1,inductor current does not change
simultaneously so
(0 ) i
L
+
(0 ) i
L
=
-
=2 A
Voltage across inductor at 0 t =
+
(0 ) v
L
+
120 = V
By applying KVL in loop
120 2(40 20) R = + +
120 120 R = +
R 0 W =
nodi a
Let stored energy and dissipated energy are E
1
and E
2
respectively. Then
Current

i
i
1
2
2
2

E
E
1
2
= 0.95 =
i
2
. . i i 0 95 0 97
1 1
= =
Current at any time t, when the switch is in position (2) is given by
( ) i t i e
1
L
R
t
=
-
2 2 e e
t t
10
60
6
= =
- -
After 95% of energy dissipated current remaining in the circuit is
i 2 2 0.97 0.05
#
= - = A
So, 0.05 2e
t 6
=
-
t 0.50 . sec
At 100 f
1
= Hz, voltage drop across R and L is
RMS
m

RMS
m
.
R j L
V R
in
1
w
=
+

( )
R j L
V j L
in
1
1
w
w
=
+
So, R L
1
w =
At 50 f
2
= Hz, voltage drop across R

RMS
ml
.
R j L
V R
in
2
w
=
+

RMS
RMS
m
m
l

R j L
R j L
1
2
w
w
=
+
+

R L
R L
2
1
2 2
2
2
2 2
w
w
=
+
+

L L
L L
1
2 2
1
2 2
1
2 2
2
2 2
w w
w w
=
+
+
, R L
1
w =

2
1
2
1
2
2
2
w
w w
=
+

f
f f
2
1
2
1
2
2
2
=
+

( )
( ) ( )
2 100
100 50
8
5
2
2 2
=
+
=

RMS
ml
5
8
RMS
m =
In the circuit
I B 0 120 I I
R y
c c + + = +
I
B
2
2 cos I I I I
2
120
R y R y
2 2 c
= + +
b l

I I I I
R y R y
2 2
= + +
Since I
R
I
y
=
so, I
B
2
I I I
R R R
2 2 2
= + +
3IR
2
=
I
B
I 3
R
=
I 3
y
=
: : I I I
R y B
1: 1: 3 =
nodi a
Switch was opened before 0 t = , so current in inductor for 0 t <
(0 ) i
L
-
1
10
10
= = A
Inductor current does not change simultaneously so at t 0 = when switch is
closed current remains same
(0 ) i
L
+
(0 ) i
L
=
-
=1 A
Electric field inside a conductor (metal) is zero. In dielectric charge distribution
os constant so electric field remains constant from x
1
to x
2
. In semiconductor
electric field varies linearly with charge density.
Thevenin voltage:
Nodal analysis at P

V V
10
4
10
th th
-
+ 0 =
2 4 V
th
- 0 =
V
th
2 = V
Thevenin resistance:
R
th
10 | | 10 5 W W W = =
Resonance will occur only when Z is capacitive, in parallel resonance condition,
suseptance of circuit should be zero.
nodi a

j L
j C
1
w
w + 0 =
1 LC
2
w - 0 =
w
LC
1
= (resonant frequency)
C
L
1
2
w
=
( ) 4 500 2
1
2 2
# # #
p
= 0.05 m = F
Here two capacitor C
1
and C
2
are connected in series so equivalent Capacitance is
C
eq

C C
C C
1 2
1 2
=
+
C
1

. ( )
d
A
6 10
8 85 10 4 400 10
r
1
0 1
3
12 3 2
#
# # # e e
= =
-
- -

.
6 10
8 85 10 4 16 10
3
12 2
#
# # # #
=
-
- -
. 94 4 10
11
#
=
-
F
Similarly
C
2

. ( )
d
A
8 10
8 85 10 2 400 10
r
2
0 2
3
12 3 2
#
# # # # e e
= =
-
- -

.
8 10
8 85 10 2 16 10
3
12 12
#
# # # #
=
-
- -

. 35 4 10
11
#
=
-
F
C
eq

( . . )
. .
.
94 4 35 4 10
94 4 10 35 4 10
25 74 10
11
11 11
11
#
# # #
#
=
+
=
-
- -
-
257 - pF
Inductance of the Solenoid is given as
L
l
N A
0
2
m
=
Where A " are of Solenoid
l " length
L
( )
( ) ( )
1000 10
4 10 3000 30 10
3
7 2 3 2
#
# # # #
p p
=
-
- -

. 31 94 10
3
#
=
-
H
32 - mH
In the circuit
Voltage V
A
(2 1) 6
#
= + 18 = Volt
So, 2
E V
6
A
=
-
nodi a
2
E
6
18
=
-
E 12 18 = + 30 = V
Delta to star ( ) Y T- conversions is given as
R
1

R R R
R R
a b c
b c
=
+ +
2.5
20 10 10
10 10
#
W =
+ +
=
R
2

R R R
R R
a b c
a c
=
+ +
5
20 10 10
20 10
#
W =
+ +
=
R
3

R R R
R R
a b c
a b
=
+ +
5
20 10 10
20 10
#
W =
+ +
=
For parallel circuit
I
Z
E
eq
= EY
eq
=
Y
eq
" Equivalent admittance of the circuit
Y
eq
Y Y Y
R L C
= + +
(0.5 0) (0 1.5) (0 0.3) j j j = + + - + +
0.5 1.2 j = -
So, current I 10(0.5 1.2) j = - (5 12) j A = -
In the circuit
Voltage V
A

( | | )
(10 | | )
R
R
10 10
100
#
=
+

10
10
10
100
10
10
R
R R
R
=
+
+
+
f
b
p
l

R
R
100 20
1000
=
+

R
R
5
50
=
+
Current in R W resistor
2
R
V
A
=
2
( ) R R
R
5
50
=
+
or R 20 W =
Since capacitor initially has a charge of 10 coulomb, therefore
nodi a
Q
0
(0) Cv
c
= (0) v
c
" initial voltage across capacitor
10 0.5 (0) v
c
=
(0) v
c

. 0 5
10
= 20 = V
When switch S is closed, in steady state capacitor will be charged completely
and capacitor voltage is
( ) v
c
3 100 = V
At any time t transient response is
( ) v t
c
( ) [ (0) ( )] v v v e
c c c
RC
t
3 3 = + -
-
( ) v t
c
100 (20 100)e .
t
2 0 5 = + - #
-

100 80e
t
= -
-
Current in the circuit
( ) i t C
dt
dv
c
= [100 80 ] C
dt
d
e
t
= -
-
80 C e
t
#
=
-

0.5 80e
t
#
=
-
40e
t
=
-
At 1 t = sec,
( ) i t 40e
1
=
-
14.71 = A
Total current in the wire
I 10 20sin t w = +
I
rms

( )
10
2
20
2
2
= +
100 200 = +
17.32 300 = = A
From Z to Y parameter conversion

Y
Y
Y
Y
11
21
12
22
> H
Z
Z
Z
Z
11
21
12
22
1
=
-
> H
So,
Y
Y
Y
Y
11
12
12
22
> H
.
.
.
.
. 0 50
1
0 6
0 2
0 2
0 9
=
-
-
> H
Y22
.
.
1.8
0 50
0 9
= =
Energy absorbed by the inductor coil is given as
E
L
Pdt
t
0
= #
Where power P VI = I L
dt
dI
=
b l
So, E
L
LI
dt
dI
dt
t
0
=
b l
#
nodi a
For0 4 t # # sec
E
L
2 I
dt
dI
dt
0
4
=
b l
#
2 ( ) 2 ( ) I dt I dt 3 0
0
2
2
4
= + # #
,
,
,
dt
dI
t
t
3 0 2
0 2 4 < <
a # # =
=
*
6 . I dt
0
2
= # =6(area under the curve ( ) i t t - )
6 2 6
2
1
# # #
= 36 = J
Energy absorbed by 1 W resistor is
E
R
I Rdt
t
2
0
= # ( ) ( ) t dt dt 3 1 6
2
0
2
2
2
4
#
= + # #
,
A
I t t
t
3 0 2
6 2 4
# #
# #
=
=
)
9 36
t
3
3
0
2
2
4
[ ] t
#
= +
: D
24 72 = + =96 J
Total energy absorbed in 4 sec
E E E
L R
= + 36 96 = + 132 = J
Applying KCL at center node
i
L
1 2 i
C
= + +
i
L
3 i
C
= +
i
C
C
dt
dv
c
=- 1 [4 2 ] sin
dt
d
t =-
8 2 cos t =-
so i
L
8 2 3 cos t =- + (current through inductor)
Voltage across inductor
v
L
L
dt
di
L
= 2 [3 8 2 ] cos
dt
d
t
#
= - 32 2 sin t =
Thevenin impedance can be obtain as following
nodi a
Z
th
( | | ) Z Z Z
3 1 2
= +
Given that Z
1
10 60c + = -
10
j
2
1 3
=
-
c m 5(1 ) j 3 = -
Z
2
10 60c + =
10
j
2
1 3
=
+
c m 5(1 ) j 3 = +
Z
3
50 53.13c + =
50
j
5
3 4
=
+
b l
10(3 4 ) j = +
So, Z
th
10(3 4 )
( ) ( )
( ) ( )
j
j j
j j
5 1 3 5 1 3
5 1 3 5 1 3
= + +
- + +
- +
10(3 4 )
( )
j
10
25 1 3
= + +
+

30 40 10 j = + + 40 40j = +
Z
th
40 45 2 c + W =
Due to the first conductor carrying I + current, magnetic field intensity at point
P is
H
1

d
I
Y
2p
= (Direction is determined using right hand rule)
Similarly due to second conductor carrying I - current, magnetic field intensity
is
H
2
( )
d
I
Y
2p
=
-
-
d
I
Y
2p
=
Total magnetic field intensity at point P.
H H H
1 2
= +

d
I
d
I
Y Y
2 2 p p
= +
d
I
Y
p
=
SOL 1.115 Correct option is ( ).
Given that magnitudes of V
L
and V
C
are twice of V
R
V
L
V
C
= 2V
R
= (Circuit is at resonance)
Voltage across inductor
V
L
i j L
R #
w =
Current i
R
at resonance
i
R

R
5 0 +
=
%
5
5
= 1 A =
so, V
L
L w = 2V
R
=
L w 2 5
#
= 5 V
R
= V, at resonance
2 50 L
# # #
p 10 =
L
314
10
= 31.8 = mH
nodi a
Applying nodal analysis in the circuit
At node P
2
V V
2
10
8
P P
+
-
+ 0 =
16 4 40 V V
P P
+ - + 0 =
5 24 V
P
- 0 =
V
P

5
24
= Volt
At node Q
2
V V
4
10
6
0
Q Q
=
-
+
-
24 3 30 2 V V
Q Q
= - +
5 54 V
Q
- 0 =
V
Q

5
54
= V
Potential difference between P-Q
V
PQ
V V
P Q
= -

5
24
5
54
= - 6 =- V
First obtain equivalent Thevenin circuit across load R
L
Thevenin voltage
j
V
j
V
6 8
110 0
6 8
90 0
th th
c c + +
+
-
+
+
-
0 =
2 200 0 V
th
c + - 0 =
V
th
100 0c + = V
Thevenin impedance
Z
th
(6 8 ) | | (6 8 ) j j W W = + +
(3 4 ) j W = +
For maximum power transfer
R
L
Z
th
= 3 4
2 2
= + 5 W =
nodi a
Power in load
P i R
eff L
2
=
P 5
j 3 4 5
100
2
#
=
+ +

( )
5
80
100
2
#
=
625 = Watt
Applying mesh analysis in the circuit
10 I
1
= A, 5 I
2
=- A
Current in 2 W resistor
I
2W
( ) I I
1 2
= - -
10 ( 5) = - - 15 = A
So, voltage V
A
15 2 30
#
= = Volt
Now we can easily find out current in all branches as following
Current in resistor R is 5 A
5
R
100 40
=
-
R
5
60
= 12 W =
nodi a
Before 0 t = , the switch was opened so current in inductor and voltage across
capacitor for 0 t < is zero
(0 ) 0 v
c
=
-
, ( ) i 0 0 L =
-
at 0 t = , when the switch is closed, inductor current and capacitor voltage does
not change simultaneously so
(0 ) (0 ) 0 v v
c c
= =
+ -
, (0 ) (0 ) 0 i i
L L
= =
+ -
At 0 t =
+
the circuit is
Simplified circuit
Voltage across inductor (at 0 t =
+
)
(0 ) v
L
+
2
3 2
10
#
=
+

4 = Volt
Given that E
1
h I h E
11 1 12 2
= +
and I
2
h I h E
21 1 22 2
= +
Parameter h
12
is given as
h
12

E
E
( ) open circuit I
2
1
0 1
=
=
At node A

E E E E E
2 2 4
A A A 1 2
-
+
-
+ 0 =
E 5 A E E 2 2 1 2 = + ...(1)
nodi a
Similarly

E E E
2 2
A 1 1
-
+ 0 =
2E
1
E
A
= ...(2)
From (1) and (2)
5(2 ) E
1
2 2 E E
1 2
= + 4
8E
1
2E
2
=
h
12

E
E
2
1
=
4
1
=
V
PQ
V V
P Q
= -

KQ KQ
OP OQ
= -

40 10
9 10 1 10
20 10
9 10 1 10
3
9 9
3
9 9
#
# # #
#
# # #
= -
-
-
-
-
9 10
40
1
20
1 3
#
= -
: D
225 =- Volt
Energy stored in Capacitor is
E CV
2
1 2
=
C
d
A
0
e
=
.
.
0 1 10
8 85 10 100 10
3
12 6
#
# # #
=
-
- -

. 8 85 10
12
#
=
-
F
E . ( )
2
1
8 85 10 100
12 2
# # #
=
-

. 44 3 = nJ
The figure is as shown below
The Capacitor shown in Figure is made up of two capacitor C
1
and C
2
connected
in series.
C
1
,
t
A
C
t
A
r r
1
0 1
2
2
0 2
e e e e
= =
Since C
1
and C
2
are in series charge on both capacitor is same.
Q
1
Q
2
=
( ) C V 100
1
- C V
2
= (Let V is the voltage of foil)
nodi a
( )
t
A
V 100
r
1
0 1
e e
-
t
A
V
r
2
0 2
e e
=

.
( ) V
0 5
3
100 - V
1
4
=
V 300 3 - V 2 =
300 5 60 V V & = = Volt
************
Page 84 Signals and Systems Chapter 2
nodi a
CHAPTER 2
SI GNALS AND SYSTEMS
2014 EE01 ONE MARK
EE SP 2.1 Let X s
s s
s
10 21
3 5
2
=
+ +
+
^ h be the Laplace Transform of a signal x t ^ h. Then, x 0
+
^ h
is
(A) 0 (B) 3
(C) 5 (D) 21
EE SP 2.2 For a periodic square wave, which one of the following statements is TRUE ?
(A) The Fourier series coefficients do not exist.
(B) The Fourier series coefficients exist but the reconstruction converges at no
point.
(C) The Fourier series coefficients exist and the reconstruction converges at
most points.
(D) The Fourier series coefficients exist and the reconstruction converges at
every point.
2014 EE02 TWO MARKS
EE SP 2.3 Let f t ^ h be a continuous time signal and let F w ^ h be its Fourier Transform
defined by
F w ^ h f t e dt
j t
=
3
3
w -
-
^ h #
Define g t ^ h by g t ^ h F u e du
jut
=
3
3
-
-
^ h #
What is the relationship between f t ^ h and g t ^ h ?
(A) g t ^ h would always be proportional to f t ^ h
(B) g t ^ h would be proportional to f t ^ h if f t ^ h is an even function
(C) g t ^ h would be proportional to f t ^ h only if f t ^ h is a sinusoidal function
(D) g t ^ h would never be proportional to f t ^ h
EE SP 2.4 The function shown in the figure can be represented as
Chapter 2 Signals and Systems Page 85
nodi a
(A) u t u t T
T
t T
u t T
T
t T
u t T
2
2 - - +
-
- -
-
- ^ ^
^
^
^
^ h h
h
h
h
h
(B) u t
T
t
u t T
T
t
u t T 2 + - - - ^ ^ ^ h h h
(C) u t u t T
T
t T
u t
T
t T
u t
2
- - +
-
-
-
^ ^
^
^
^
^ h h
h
h
h
h
(D) u t
T
t T
u t T
T
t T
u t T 2
2
2 +
-
- -
-
- ^
^
^
^
^ h
h
h
h
h
2014 EE02 ONE MARK
EE SP 2.5 Consider an LTI system with transfer function
H s ^ h
s s 4
1
=
+ ^ h
If the input to the system is cos t 3 ^ h and the steady state output is sin A t 3 a + ^ h
, then the value of A is
(A) 1/30 (B) 1/15
(C) 3/4 (D) 4/3
EE SP 2.6 Consider an LTI system with impulse response h t e u t
t 5
=
-
^ ^ h h. If the output of
the system is y t e u t e u t
t t 3 5
= -
- -
^ ^ ^ h h h then the input, x t ^ h, is given by
(A) e u t
t 3 -
^ h
(B) e u t 2
t 3 -
^ h
(C) e u t
t 5 -
^ h
(D) e u t 2
t 5 -
^ h
2014 EE02 TWO MARKS
EE SP 2.7 A discrete system is represented by the difference equation

X k
X k
1
1
1
2
+
+
^
^
h
h
> H
a
a
a
a
X k
X k 1
1
1
2
=
+
- ^
^
h
h
> > H H
It has initial conditions ; X X 0 1 0 0
1 2
= = ^ ^ h h . The pole locations of the system
for a 1 = , are
(A) j 1 0 !
(B) j 1 0 ! -
(C) j 1 0 ! +
(D) j 0 1 !
EE SP 2.8 An input signal sin x t t 2 5 100p = + ^ ^ h h is sampled with a sampling frequency of
Hz 400 and applied to the system whose transfer function is represented by

X z
Y z
^
^
h
h

N
z
z 1
1
1
N
1
=
-
-
-
-
c m
where, N represents the number of samples per cycle. The output y n ^ h of the
system under steady state is
(A) 0 (B) 1
(C) 2 (D) 5
nodi a
2014 EE03 ONE MARK
EE SP 2.9 A function f t ^ h is shown in the figure.
The Fourier transform F w ^ h of f t ^ h is
(A) real and even function of w
(B) real and odd function of w
(C) imaginary and odd function of w
(D) imaginary and even function of w
EE SP 2.10 A signal is represented by
x t ^ h
t
t
1 1
0 1
<
>
= *
The Fourier transform of the convolved signal / y t x t x t 2 2 =
*
^ ^ ^ h h h is
(A) sin sin
4
2
2
2
w
w
w
a
^
k
h (B) sin
4
2
2
w
w
a k
(C) sin
4
2
2
w
w ^ h (D) sin
4
2
2
w
w
EE SP 2.11 For the signal sin sin sin f t t t t 3 8 6 12 14 p p p = + + ^ h , the minimum sampling
frequency (in Hz) satisfying the Nyquist criterion is _____.
2014 EE03 TWO MARKS
EE SP 2.12 A continuous-time LTI system with system function H w ^ h has the following pole-
zero plot. For this system, which of the alternatives is TRUE ?
(A) H 0 > w ^ ^ h h ; 0 > w
(B) H w ^ h has multiple maxima, at
1
w and
2
w
(C) H H 0 < w ^ ^ h h ; 0 > w
(D) H w = ^ h constant; < < 3 3 w -
nodi a
EE SP 2.13 A sinusoid x t ^ h of unknown frequency is sampled by an impulse train of period
20 ms. The resulting sample train is next applied to an ideal lowpass filter with
cutoff at Hz 25 . The filter output is seen to be a sinusoid of frequency 20 Hz.
This means that x t ^ h
(A) 10 Hz (B) 60 Hz
(C) 30 Hz (D) 90 Hz
EE SP 2.14 A differentiable non constant even function x t ^ h has a derivative y t ^ h, and
their respective Fourier Transforms are X w ^ h and Y w ^ h. Which of the following
statments is TRUE ?
(A) X w ^ h and Y w ^ h are both real
(B) X w ^ h is real and Y w ^ h is imaginary
(C) X w ^ h and Y w ^ h are both imaginary
(D) X w ^ h is imaginary and Y w ^ h is real
YEAR 2013 ONE MARK
EE SP 2.15 A band-limited signal with a maximum frequency of 5 kHz is to be sampled.
According to the sampling theorem, the sampling frequency which is not valid is
(A) 5 kHZ
(B) 12 kHz
(C) 15 kHz
(D) 20 kHz
EE SP 2.16 For a periodic signal / sin cos sin v t t t t 30 100 10 300 6 500 4 p = + + + ^ ^ h h, the
fundamental frequency in / rad s
(A) 100 (B) 300
(C) 500 (D) 1500
EE SP 2.17 Two systems with impulse responses h t
1 ^ h and h t
2 ^ h are connected in cascade.
Then the overall impulse response of the cascaded system is given by
(A) product of h t
1 ^ h and h t
2 ^ h
(B) sum of h t
1 ^ h and h t
2 ^ h
(C) convolution of h t
1 ^ h and h t
2 ^ h
(D) subtraction of h t
2 ^ h from h t
1 ^ h
EE SP 2.18 Which one of the following statements is NOT TRUE for a continuous time
causal and stable LTI system?
(A) All the poles of the system must lie on the left side of the jw axis
(B) Zeros of the system can lie anywhere in the s-plane
(C) All the poles must lie within s 1 =
(D) All the roots of the characteristic equation must be located on the left side
of the jw axis.
EE SP 2.19 The impulse response of a system is h t tu t = ^ ^ h h. For an input u t 1 - ^ h, the
nodi a
output is
(A)
t
u t
2
2
^ h (B)
t t
u t
2
1
1
-
-
^
^
h
h
(C)
t
u t
2
1
1
2
-
-
^
^
h
h (D)
t
u t
2
1
1
2
-
- ^ h
YEAR 2013 TWO MARKS
EE SP 2.20 The impulse response of a continuous time system is given by h t t t 1 3 d d = - + - ^ ^ ^ h h h
. The value of the step response at t 2 = is
(A) 0 (B) 1
(C) 2 (D) 3
YEAR 2012 ONE MARK
EE SP 2.21 If [ ] (1/3) (1/2) [ ], x n u n
n n
= - then the region of convergence (ROC) of its z
-transform in the z-plane will be
(A) z
3
1
3 < < (B) z
3
1
2
1
< <
(C) z
2
1
3 < < (D) z
3
1
<
EE SP 2.22 The unilateral Laplace transform of ( ) f t is
s s 1
1
2
+ +
. The unilateral Laplace
transform of ( ) tf t is
(A)
( ) s s
s
1
2 2
-
+ +
(B)
( ) s s
s
1
2 1
2 2
-
+ +
+
(C)
( ) s s
s
1
2 2
+ +
(D)
( ) s s
s
1
2 1
2 2
+ +
+
YEAR 2012 TWO MARKS
EE SP 2.23 Let [ ] y n denote the convolution of [ ] h n and [ ] g n, where [ ] ( / ) [ ] h n u n 1 2
n
= and
[ ] g n is a causal sequence. If [0] 1 y = and [1] 1/2, y = then [1] g equals
(A) 0
(B) / 1 2
(C) 1
(D) / 3 2
EE SP 2.24 The Fourier transform of a signal ( ) h t is ( ) ( )( )/ cos sin H j 2 2 w w w w = . The value
of ( ) h 0 is
(A) / 1 4
(B) / 1 2
(C) 1
(D) 2
EE SP 2.25 The input ( ) x t and output ( ) y t of a system are related as ( ) ( ) (3 ) cos y t x d
t
t t t =
3 -
#
. The system is
nodi a
(A) time-invariant and stable
(B) stable and not time-invariant
(C) time-invariant and not stable
(D) not time-invariant and not stable
YEAR 2011 ONE MARK
EE SP 2.26 The Fourier series expansion ( ) cos sin f t a a n t b n t
n
n
n 0
1
w w = + +
3
=
/ of
the periodic signal shown below will contain the following nonzero terms
(A) a
0
and , , , , ... b n 1 3 5
n
3 =
(B) a
0
and , , , , ... a n 1 2 3
n
3 =
(C) a a
n 0
and , , , , ... b n 1 2 3
n
3 =
(D) a
0
and , , , ... a n 1 3 5
n
3 =
EE SP 2.27 Given two continuous time signals ( ) x t e
t
=
-
and ( ) y t e
t 2
=
-
which exist for
t 0 > , the convolution ( ) ( ) ( ) z t x t y t
*
= is
(A) e e
t t 2
-
- -

(B) e
t 3 -
(C) e
t +

(D) e e
t t 2
+
- -
YEAR 2011 TWO MARKS
EE SP 2.28 Let the Laplace transform of a function ( ) f t which exists for t 0 > be ( ) F s
1

and the Laplace transform of its delayed version ( ) f t t - be ( ) F s
2
. Let * ( ) F s
1

be the complex conjugate of ( ) F s
1
with the Laplace variable set s j s w = + . If
( )
( )
( ) * ( )
G s
F s
F s F s
1
2
2 1
= , then the inverse Laplace transform of ( ) G s is an ideal
(A) impulse ( ) t d
(B) delayed impulse ( ) t d t -
(C) step function ( ) u t
(D) delayed step function ( ) u t t -
EE SP 2.29 The response ( ) h t of a linear time invariant system to an impulse ( ) t d , under
initially relaxed condition is ( ) h t e e
t t 2
= +
- -
. The response of this system for a
nodi a
unit step input ( ) u t is
(A) ( ) u t e e
t t 2
+ +
- -

(B) ( ) ( ) e e u t
t t 2
+
- -
(C) ( . . ) ( ) e e u t 1 5 0 5
t t 2
- -
- -

(D) ( ) ( ) e t e u t
t t 2
d +
- -
YEAR 2010 ONE MARK
EE SP 2.30 For the system /( ) s 2 1 + , the approximate time taken for a step response to
reach 98% of the final value is
(A) 1 s
(B) 2 s
(C) 4 s
(D) 8 s
EE SP 2.31 The period of the signal ( ) 0.8 sin x t t 8
4
p
p
= +
` j
is
(A) 0.4p s
(B) 0.8p s
(C) 1.25 s
(D) 2.5 s
EE SP 2.32 The system represented by the input-output relationship ( ) y t ( ) , x d t 0 >
t 5
t t =
3 -
# is
(A) Linear and causal
(B) Linear but not causal
(C) Causal but not linear
(D) Neither liner nor causal
EE SP 2.33 The second harmonic component of the periodic waveform given in the figure
has an amplitude of
(A) 0
(B) 1
(C) / 2 p
(D) 5
nodi a
YEAR 2010 TWO MARKS
EE SP 2.34
( ) x t is a positive rectangular pulse from 1 1 t t to =- =+ with unit height as
shown in the figure. The value of ( ) ( ) X d X where
2
w w w
3
3
-
" #
is the Fourier
transform of ( )} x t is.
(A) 2 (B) 2p
(C) 4 (D) 4p
EE SP 2.35 Given the finite length input [ ] x n and the corresponding finite length output [ ] y n
of an LTI system as shown below, the impulse response [ ] h n of the system is
(A)
-
[ ] {1, 0, 0, 1} h n = (B)
-
[ ] {1, 0, 1} h n =
(C)
-
[ ] {1, 1, 1, 1} h n =
(D)
-
[ ] {1, 1, 1} h n =
Common Data Questions Q. 36 and 37
Given ( ) f t and ( ) g t as show below
EE SP 2.36
( ) g t can be expressed as
(A) ( ) ( ) g t f t 2 3 = - (B) ( ) g t f
t
2
3 = -
` j
(C) ( ) g t f t 2
2
3
= -
` j
(D) ( ) g t f
t
2 2
3
= -
` j
EE SP 2.37 The Laplace transform of ( ) g t is
(A) ( )
s
e e
1 s s 3 5
- (B) ( )
s
e e
1 s s 5 3
-
- -
(C) (1 )
s
e
e
s
s
3
2
-
-
-
(D) ( )
s
e e
1 s s 5 3
-
nodi a
YEAR 2009 ONE MARK
EE SP 2.38 A Linear Time Invariant system with an impulse response ( ) h t produces output
( ) y t when input ( ) x t is applied. When the input ( ) x t t - is applied to a system
with impulse response ( ) h t t - , the output will be
(A) ( ) y t
(B) ( ( )) y t 2 t -
(C) ( ) y t t -
(D) ( ) y t 2t -
YEAR 2009 TWO MARKS
EE SP 2.39 A cascade of three Linear Time Invariant systems is causal and unstable. From
this, we conclude that
(A) each system in the cascade is individually causal and unstable
(B) at least on system is unstable and at least one system is causal
(C) at least one system is causal and all systems are unstable
(D) the majority are unstable and the majority are causal
EE SP 2.40 The Fourier Series coefficients of a periodic signal ( ) x t expressed as
( ) x t a e
/
k
j kt T
k
2
=
3
3 p
=-
/
are given by 2 1 a j
2
= -
-
, 0.5 0.2 a j
1
= +
-
, a j2
0
= ,
. . a j 0 5 0 2
1
= - , a j 2 1
2
= + and a 0
k
= for k 2 >
Which of the following is true ?
(A) ( ) x t has finite energy because only finitely many coefficients are non-zero
(B) ( ) x t has zero average value because it is periodic
(C) The imaginary part of ( ) x t is constant
(D) The real part of ( ) x t is even
EE SP 2.41 The z-transform of a signal [ ] x n is given by z z z z 4 3 2 6 2
3 1 2 3
+ + - +
- -
It is applied to a system, with a transfer function ( ) H z z 3 2
1
= -
-
Let the output be [ ] y n. Which of the following is true ?
(A) [ ] y n is non causal with finite support
(B) [ ] y n is causal with infinite support
(C) [ ] ; y n n 0 3 > =
(D) [ ( )] [ ( )]
[ ( )] [ ( )] ;
Re Re
Im Im
Y z Y z
Y z Y z <
z e z e
z e z e
j j
j j
# p q p
=-
= -
= =
= =
i i
i i
-
-
YEAR 2008 ONE MARK
EE SP 2.42 The impulse response of a causal linear time-invariant system is given as ( ) h t .
Now consider the following two statements :
Statement (I): Principle of superposition holds
Statement (II): ( ) h t 0 = for t 0 <
Which one of the following statements is correct ?
(A) Statements (I) is correct and statement (II) is wrong
(B) Statements (II) is correct and statement (I) is wrong
nodi a
(C) Both Statement (I) and Statement (II) are wrong
(D) Both Statement (I) and Statement (II) are correct
EE SP 2.43 A signal ( ) sin e t
t
w
a -
is the input to a real Linear Time Invariant system. Given K
and f are constants, the output of the system will be of the form ( ) sin Ke vt
t
f +
b -

where
(A) b need not be equal to a but v equal to w
(B) v need not be equal to w but b equal to a
(C) b equal to a and v equal to w
(D) b need not be equal to a and v need not be equal to w
YEAR 2008 TWO MARKS
EE SP 2.44 Given ( )
( )
X z
z a
z
2
=
-
with z a > , the residue of ( ) X z z
n 1 -
at z a = for n 0 $
will be
(A) a
n 1 -
(B) a
n
(C) na
n
(D) na
n 1 -
EE SP 2.45 A system with ( ) x t and output ( ) y t is defined by the input-output relation :
( ) ( ) y t x t d
t 2
t =
3 -
-
#
The system will be
(A) Casual, time-invariant and unstable
(B) Casual, time-invariant and stable
(C) non-casual, time-invariant and unstable
(D) non-casual, time-variant and unstable
EE SP 2.46 A signal ( ) ( ) x t t sinc a = where a is a real constant ( ) x sinc
( ) sin
x
x
=
p
p
^ h is the input
to a Linear Time Invariant system whose impulse response ( ) ( ) h t t sinc b = , where
b is a real constant. If min ( , ) a b denotes the minimum of a and b and similarly,
max ( , ) a b denotes the maximum of a and b, and K is a constant, which one of
the following statements is true about the output of the system ?
(A) It will be of the form ( ) t sinc K g where ( , ) min g a b =
(B) It will be of the form ( ) t sinc K g where ( , ) max g a b =
(C) It will be of the form ( ) t sinc K a
(D) It can not be a sinc type of signal
EE SP 2.47 Let ( ) x t be a periodic signal with time period T , Let ( ) ( ) ( ) y t x t t x t t
0 0
= - + +
for some t
0
. The Fourier Series coefficients of ( ) y t are denoted by b
k
. If b 0
k
= for
all odd k, then t
0
can be equal to
(A) / T 8 (B) / T 4
(C) / T 2 (D) T 2
EE SP 2.48
( ) H z is a transfer function of a real system. When a signal [ ] (1 ) x n j
n
= + is the
nodi a
input to such a system, the output is zero. Further, the Region of convergence
(ROC) of z 1
2
1 1
-
-
^ h
H(z) is the entire Z-plane (except z 0 = ). It can then be
inferred that ( ) H z can have a minimum of
(A) one pole and one zero
(B) one pole and two zeros
(C) two poles and one zero
D) two poles and two zeros
EE SP 2.49 Let ( ) x t t rect
2
1
= -
^ h
(where ( ) 1 rect x = for x
2
1
2
1
# # - and zero otherwise.
If ( ) x sinc
( ) sin
x
x
=
p
p
, then the FTof ( ) ( ) x t x t + - will be given by
(A)
2
sinc
p
w
` j
(B) 2
2
sinc
p
w
` j
(C) 2 cos
2 2
sinc
p
w w
` ` j j
(D) sin
2 2
sinc
p
w w
` ` j j
EE SP 2.50 Given a sequence [ ] x n, to generate the sequence [ ] [ ] y n x n 3 4 = - , which one of
the following procedures would be correct ?
(A) First delay ( ) x n by 3 samples to generate [ ] z n
1
, then pick every 4
th
sample
of [ ] z n
1
to generate [ ] z n
2
, and than finally time reverse [ ] z n
2
to obtain [ ] y n.
(B) First advance [ ] x n by 3 samples to generate [ ] z n
1
, then pick every 4
th
sample of [ ] z n
1
to generate [ ] z n
2
, and then finally time reverse [ ] z n
2
to
obtain [ ] y n
(C) First pick every fourth sample of [ ] x n to generate [ ] v n
1
, time-reverse [ ] v n
1

to obtain [ ] v n
2
, and finally advance [ ] v n
2
by 3 samples to obtain [ ] y n
(D) First pick every fourth sample of [ ] x n to generate [ ] v n
1
, time-reverse [ ] v n
1

to obtain [ ] v n
2
, and finally delay [ ] v n
2
by 3 samples to obtain [ ] y n
YEAR 2007 ONE MARK
EE SP 2.51 Let a signal ( ) sin a t
1 1
w f + be applied to a stable linear time variant system. Let
the corresponding steady state output be represented as ( ) a F t
2 2 2
w f + . Then
which of the following statement is true?
(A) F is not necessarily a Sine or Cosine function but must be periodic
with
1 2
w w = .
(B) F must be a Sine or Cosine function with a a
1 2
=
(C) F must be a Sine function with
1 2
w w = and
1 2
f f =
(D) F must be a Sine or Cosine function with
1 2
w w =
EE SP 2.52 The frequency spectrum of a signal is shown in the figure. If this is ideally
sampled at intervals of 1 ms, then the frequency spectrum of the sampled signal
will be
nodi a
YEAR 2007 TWO MARKS
EE SP 2.53 A signal ( ) x t is given by
( )
, / /
, / /
( )
x t
T t T
T t T
x t T
1 4 3 4
1 3 4 7 4
<
<
#
# =
-
-
- +
*
Which among the following gives the fundamental fourier term of ( ) x t ?
(A) cos
T
t 4
4 p
p p
-
` j
(B) cos
T
t
4 2 4
p p p
+
` j
(C) sin
T
t 4
4 p
p p
-
` j
(D) sin
T
t
4 2 4
p p p
+
` j
EE SP 2.54 Consider the discrete-time system shown in the figure where the impulse response
of ( ) G z is (0) 0, (1) (2) 1, (3) (4) 0 g g g g g g = = = = = =
nodi a
This system is stable for range of values of K
(A) [ 1, ]
2
1
- (B) [ 1, 1] -
(C) [ , 1]
2
1
- (D) [ , 2]
2
1
-
Common Data Questions Q. 55 and 56
A signal is processed by a causal filter with transfer function ( ) G s
EE SP 2.55 For a distortion free output signal wave form, ( ) G s must
(A) provides zero phase shift for all frequency
(B) provides constant phase shift for all frequency
(C) provides linear phase shift that is proportional to frequency
(D) provides a phase shift that is inversely proportional to frequency
EE SP 2.56
( ) G z z z
1 3
a b = +
- -
is a low pass digital filter with a phase characteristics same as
that of the above question if
(A) a b = (B) a b =-
(C)
( / ) 1 3
a b = (D)
( / ) 1 3
a b =
-
EE SP 2.57 If ( ), ( ) u t r t denote the unit step and unit ramp functions respectively and
( ) * ( ) u t r t their convolution, then the function ( ) * ( ) u t r t 1 2 + - is given by
(A) ( 1) ( 1) t u t
2
1
- - (B) ( 1) ( 2) t u t
2
1
- -
(C) ( 1) ( 1) t u t
2
1 2
- - (D) None of the above
EE SP 2.58
( ) 1 3 , ( ) 1 2 X z z Y z z
1 2
= - = +
- -
are Z transforms of two signals [ ], [ ] x n y n
respectively. A linear time invariant system has the impulse response [ ] h n
defined by these two signals as [ ] [ ] * [ ] h n x n y n 1 = - where * denotes discrete
time convolution. Then the output of the system for the input [ ] n 1 d -
(A) has Z-transform ( ) ( ) z X z Y z
1 -
(B) equals [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] n n n n 2 3 3 2 4 6 5 d d d d - - - + - - -
(C) has Z-transform 1 3 2 6 z z z
1 2 3
- + -
- - -
(D) does not satisfy any of the above three
YEAR 2006 ONE MARK
EE SP 2.59 The following is true
(A) A finite signal is always bounded
(B) A bounded signal always possesses finite energy
(C) A bounded signal is always zero outside the interval [ , ] t t
0 0
- for some t
0
(D) A bounded signal is always finite
nodi a
EE SP 2.60
( ) x t is a real valued function of a real variable with period T . Its trigonometric
Fourier Series expansion contains no terms of frequency 2 (2 )/ ; 1, 2 k T k g w p = =
Also, no sine terms are present. Then ( ) x t satisfies the equation
(A) ( ) ( ) x t x t T =- -
(B) ( ) ( ) ( ) x t x T t x t = - =- -
(C) ( ) ( ) ( / ) x t x T t x t T 2 = - =- -
(D) ( ) ( ) ( / ) x t x t T x t T 2 = - = -
EE SP 2.61 A discrete real all pass system has a pole at z 2 30 + =
%
: it, therefore
(A) also has a pole at 30
2
1
+
%
(B) has a constant phase response over the z-plane: ( ) arg H z constant =
constant
(C) is stable only if it is anti-causal
(D) has a constant phase response over the unit circle: ( ) arg H e constant
i
=
W
YEAR 2006 TWO MARKS
EE SP 2.62
[ ] ; , , [ ] , [ ] x n n n x x 0 1 0 1 1 0 2 < > = - - =- = is the input and
[ ] 0; 1, 2, [ 1] [1], [0] 3, [2] 2 y n n n y y y y 1 < > = - - =- = = =- is the output of a
discrete-time LTI system. The system impulse response [ ] h n will be
(A) [ ] 0; , , [ ] , [ ] [ ] h n n n h h h 0 2 0 1 1 2 1 < > = = = =-
(B) [ ] ; , , [ ] , [ ] [ ] h n n n h h h 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 2 < > = - - = = =
(C) [ ] 0; 0, 3, [0] 1, [1] 2, [2] 1 h n n n h h h < > = =- = =
(D) [ ] ; , , [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] h n n n h h h h 0 2 1 2 1 1 0 3 < > = - - = = - =- =
EE SP 2.63 The discrete-time signal [ ] ( ) x n X z
n
z
2
3
n
n
n
0
2
=
+
3
=
/
, where denotes a
transform-pair relationship, is orthogonal to the signal
(A) [ ] ( ) y n Y z z
3
2
n
n
n
1 1
0
) =
3
=
-
` j
/

(B) [ ] ( ) ( ) y n Y z n z 5
( ) n
n
n
2 2
0
2 1
) = -
3
=
- +
/
(C) [ ] ( ) y n Y z z 2
n
n
n
3 3
) =
3
3 -
=-
-
/
(D) [ ] ( ) y n Y z z z 2 3 1
4 4
4 2
) = + +
- -
EE SP 2.64 A continuous-time system is described by ( ) y t e
( ) x t
=
-
, where ( ) y t is the output
and ( ) x t is the input. ( ) y t is bounded
(A) only when ( ) x t is bounded
(B) only when ( ) x t is non-negative
(C) only for t 0 # if ( ) x t is bounded for t 0 $
(D) even when ( ) x t is not bounded
EE SP 2.65 The running integration, given by ( ) ( ) y t x t dt
' '
t
=
3 -
#
(A) has no finite singularities in its double sided Laplace Transform ( ) Y s
(B) produces a bounded output for every causal bounded input
nodi a
(C) produces a bounded output for every anticausal bounded input
(D) has no finite zeroes in its double sided Laplace Transform ( ) Y s
YEAR 2005 TWO MARKS
EE SP 2.66 For the triangular wave from shown in the figure, the RMS value of the voltage
is equal to
(A)
6
1
(B)
3
1
(C)
3
1
(D)
3
2
EE SP 2.67 The Laplace transform of a function ( ) f t is ( )
( 2 2)
F s
s s s
s s 5 23 6
2
2
=
+ +
+ +
as , ( ) t f t " 3
approaches
(A) 3 (B) 5
(C)
2
17
(D) 3
EE SP 2.68 The Fourier series for the function ( ) sin f x x
2
= is
(A) sin sin x x 2 + (B) cos x 1 2 -
(C) sin cos x x 2 2 + (D) . . cos x 0 5 0 5 2 -
EE SP 2.69 If ( ) u t is the unit step and ( ) t d is the unit impulse function, the inverse z
-transform of ( ) F z
1 z
1
=
+
for k 0 > is
(A) ( ) ( ) k 1
k
d - (B) ( ) ( ) k 1
k
d - -
(C) ( ) ( ) u k 1
k
- (D) ( ) ( ) u k 1
k
- -
YEAR 2004 TWO MARKS
EE SP 2.70 The rms value of the resultant current in a wire which carries a dc current of 10
A and a sinusoidal alternating current of peak value 20 is
(A) 14.1 A (B) 17.3 A
(C) 22.4 A (D) 30.0 A
EE SP 2.71 The rms value of the periodic waveform given in figure is
nodi a
(A) 2 6 A (B) 6 2 A
(C) / 4 3 A (D) 1.5 A
***********
nodi a
SOLUTI ON
Given the Laplace transform,
X s ^ h
s s
s
10 21
3 5
2
=
+ +
+
From final value theorem, we know
x t ^ h limsX
s
s
=
"3
^ h
So, we obtain
x 0
+
^ h limsX 0
s
=
"3
+
^ h
lims
s s
s
10 21
3 5
s
2
=
+ +
+
"3
d n
lims
s
s
1
3
s
s
s
s
2 10 21
5
2
=
+ +
+
"3
`
_
j
i

1
10 21
3
5
3
3 3
3
=
+ +
+
=
Consider a periodic square wave shown below.
For the square wave, we observe that the Fourier series coefficients exist and the
reconstruction converges at most point.
Given the Fourier transform pair,
F w
^ h
f
t
e dt
j t
=
3
3
w -
-
^ h
#
and the function g
t ^ h is defined as
g t ^ h F
u
e du
jut
=
3
3
-
-
^ h
#
...(1)
Again, the inverse Fourier transform of F w
^ h
is written as
f
t ^ h F e d
j t
w w =
3
3
w
-
^ h #
Replacing t by t - and w by u in above expression, we get
f t - ^ h F
u
e du
jut
=
3
3
-
-
^ h
#
...(2)
nodi a
Thus, by comparing equations (1) and (2), we have
g
t ^ h f t = - ^ h
If f
t ^ h be an even function, then
f
t - ^ h f
t
= ^ h
which in turn gives
( ) g t ( ) f t =
i.e. ( ) g t will be proportional to f
t ^ h, if f
t ^ h is an even function.
We have the waveform,
The function represented in the waveform can be resolved in the following four
waveforms; where ( ) u t is the unit step function.

Thus, the function shown in the waveform is
f t ^ h u t u t T
T
t T
u t T
T
t T
u t T
2
2 = - - +
-
- -
-
- ^ ^
^
^
^
^ h h
h
h
h
h
Let input x t ^ h cos k t 3 = , k 1 =
nodi a
y t ^ h sin A t 3 a = + ^ h
We can see that output differs only in phase. In Laplace domain
Y s ^ h X s H s = ^ ^ h h
Y s ^ h X s H s = ^ ^ h h
Y jw ^ h X j H j w w = ^ ^ h h
A 1
16
1
2
#
w w
=
+
For 3 w = , A 1
3 9 16
1
#
=
+

15
1
=
Impulse response h t ^ h e u t
t 5
=
-
^ h
Laplace transform, H s ^ h
s 5
1
=
+
Output, y t ^ h e u t e u t
t t 3 5
= -
- -
^ ^ h h
Laplace transform, ( ) Y s
s s 3
1
5
1
=
+
+
+

s s 3 5
2
=
+ + ^ ^ h h
We know that, ( ) Y s X s H s = ^ ^ h h
So, X s ^ h
H s
Y s
=
^
^
h
h
Substituting Y s ^ h and H s ^ h, we get
X s ^ h
s 3
2
=
+
Taking inverse Laplace, transform
x t ^ h e u t 2
t 3
=
-
^ h
Characteristic equation
zI A - 0 =
where A
a
a
a
a 1
1
=
+
-
> H
So, zI A -
z z a
a
a
a 0 0 1
1
= -
+
-
> > H H

z a
a
a
z a 1
1
=
-
- -
- +
-
> H
For a 1 = , zI A -
z
z
1
2
0
1
=
-
- -
> H
zI A - 0 =
z 1
2
- ^ h 0 =
z j 1 0 ! =
The roots of characteristic equation gives the system poles.
nodi a
Input signal, x t ^ h sin t 2 5 100p = + ^ h
Sample signal, x nT
s ^ h sin nT 2 5 100
s #
p = + ^ h
T
s
" Sampling period, T
400
1
s
=
x nT
s ^ h sin n 2 5 100
400
1
# #
p = +
b l
x nT
s ^ h sin
n
2 5
4
p
= +
a k
Transfer function
H z
X z
Y z
= ^
^
^
h
h
h

N
z
z 1
1
1
N
1
=
-
-
- c m

N
z
1 n
n
N
0
1
=
-
=
-
/
or h n ^ h
otherwise
N
n N
1
0 1
0
# #
=
-
*
N
f
f
s
=
50
400
8 = = Hz f
2
100
50
p
p
= =
So h n ^ h
otherwise
n
8
1
0 7
0
# #
= *
y n ^ h x n h n =
*
^ ^ h h
x n ^ h
, , , , ....... 2 2
2
5
2 5 2
2
5
2
=
+ + + ^
c
h
m
) 3
Solving the convolution
y n ^ h x k h n k
n
N
0
1
= -
=
-
^ ^ h h /
The integration sum of sine term will be zero and for constant term
y n ^ h 2
8
1
2
n 0
7
#
= =
=
/
We have the waveform of function ( ) f t as
From the waveform, we observe that ( ) f t is an odd function, i.e.
( ) f t - ( ) f t =-
Hence, the Fourier transform of the function is imaginary.
Given the signal,
nodi a
( ) x t
,
,
t
t
1 1
0 1
<
>
=
*
The waveform for the given signal is drawn as
Since, the waveform of rectangular function ( ) rect t is
So, comparing the two waveforms, we get
( ) x t rect
t
2
=
a k
Now, the Fourier transform pair for rectangular function is
sin rect
t
C
2
*
t
t
p
wt
c c m m
so, sin rect
t
C
2
2 *
p
w
b c l m
sin 2
w
w
=
Similarly, sin rect
t
C
4
4
2
*
p
w
c b m l
sin
sin
2
4
2
2 2
w
w
w
w
= =
^ ^ h h
and ( ) sin rect t C
2
*
p
w
c m
sin
2
2
=
w
w
^ h
Therefore, we have the fourier transforms
( ) x t 2 F
" ,
( ) rect t F =
" ,

sin
2
2
=
w
w
^ h
and { ( / )} x t 2 F { ( / )}
( ) sin
rect t 4
2 2
F
w
w
= =
Thus, we obtain the fourier transform of signal ( ) y t as
{ ( )} y t F { ( ) ( / )} x t x t 2 2 F =
*
{ ( )}. { ( / )} x t x t 2 2 F F =

( )
sin
sin 2 2
2
2
w
w
=
w
w
^ h
( ) sin sin
4
2
2
2
w
w
w = b l
SOL 2.11 Correct answer is 14 Hz.
Given the signal,
nodi a
f t ^ h sin sin sin t t t 3 8 6 12 14 p p p = + +
According to Nyquist criterion the sampling frequency is
f
s
f 2 >
max
where f
max
is the maximum frequency of the message signal. For the given signal,
we have maximum frequency as

max
w 14p =
or f 2
max
p 14p =
or f
max
7 =
Thus, the sampling frequency is
f
s
2 7 >
#
or f
s
14 >
i.e. minimum sampling frequency is 14 Hz.
To obtain the system function, we redraw the given pole-zero plot as
From the pole-zero plot, we obtain the transfer function as
H w
^ h

( )( )( )( )
( )( )( )( )
K
S P S P S P S P
S Z S Z S Z S Z
* *
* *
1 1 2 2
1 1 2 2
=
- - - -
- - - -
So, | ( ) | H w
( )( )( )( )
( )( )( )( )
K
S P S P S P S P
S Z S Z S Z S Z
* *
* *
1 1 2 2
1 1 2 2
=
- - - -
- - - -
...(1)
Since, we can observe from the pole-zero plot that
| | P
1
| | Z
2
=
and | | P
2
| | Z
1
=
Thus, the numerator and denominator terms of equation are cancelled. Hence,
we get
| ( ) | H w K =
Given the period of sampling train, ms T 20
S
=
So, the sampling frequency is Hz f
20 10
1
50
S
3
#
= =
-
Let the frequency of signal ( ) x t be f
x
After sampling the signal, the sampled signal has the frequency
f f
S x
- f 50
x
= -
and f f
S x
+ f 50
x
= +
Now, the sampled signal is applied to an ideal low-pass filter with cut off frequency,
f
c
Hz 25 =
Since, the output of the filter carried a single frequency component of 20 Hz. So,
nodi a
it is clear that only lower component ( ) f f
s x
- passes through the filter, i.e.
f f 25 <
S x
-
and f f
S x
- 20 =
f 50
x
- 20 =
f
x
Hz 50 20 30 = - =
Given the relation,
( ) y t ( )
dt
d
x t =
From the properties of Fourier transform we know that
if ( ) y t ( )
dt
d
x t =
Then ( ) Y w ( ) j X w w = ...(1)
where ( ) X w and ( ) Y w are the Fourier transform of ( ) x t and ( ) y t respectively.
Now, we have the function ( ) x t , which is differentiable, non-constant, even
function. So, its frequency response will be real, i.e. ( ) X w is real
Hence, equation (1) gives the result that ( ) Y w is imaginary.
Given, the maximum frequency of the band-limited signal
f
m
5 kHz =
According to the Nyquist sampling theorem, the sampling frequency must be
greater than the Nyquist frequency which is given as
f
N
2 2 5 10 kHz f
m #
= = =
So, the sampling frequency f
s
must satisfy
f
s
f
N
$
f
s
10 kHz $
only the option (A) does not satisfy the condition therefore, 5 kHz is not a
valid sampling frequency.
Given, the signal
v t ^ h sin cos sin t t t 30 100 10 300 6 500
4
= + + +
p
^ h
So we have
1
w 100 / rad s = ;
2
w 00 / rad s 3 = and
3
w 00 / rad s 5 =
Therefore, the respective time periods are
T
1
sec
2
100
2
1
w
p p
= =
T
2
sec
2
300
2
2
w
p p
= =
T
3
sec
500
2p
=
So, the fundamental time period of the signal is
L.C.M. , T T T
1 2 3 ^ h
, ,
2 , 2 , 2
HCF
LCM
100 300 500
p p p
=
^
^
h
h
nodi a
or, T
0

100
2p
=
Thus, the fundamental frequency in rad/sec is

0
w 100 / rad s
10
2p
= =
If the two systems with impulse response h t
1 ^ h and h t
2 ^ h are connected in
cascaded configuration as shown in figure, then the overall response of the system
is the convolution of the individual impulse responses.
For a system to be casual, the R.O.C of system transfer function H s ^ h which is
rational should be in the right half plane and to the right of the right most pole.
For the stability of LTI system. All poles of the system should lie in the
left half of S-plane and no repeated pole should be on imaginary axis. Hence,
options (A), (B), (D) satisfies both stability and causality an LTI system.
But, Option (C) is not true for the stable system as, S 1 = have one pole
in right hand plane also.
Given, the input
x t ^ h u t 1 = - ^ h
Its Laplace transform is
X s ^ h
s
e
s
=
-
The impulse response of system is given
h t ^ h t u t = ^ h
Its Laplace transform is
H s ^ h
s
1
2
=
Hence, the overall response at the output is
Y s ^ h X s H s = ^ ^ h h
s
e
s
3
=
-
Its inverse Laplace transform is
y t ^ h
t
u t
2
1
1
2
=
-
-
^
^
h
h
Given, the impulse response of continuous time system
h t ^ h t t 1 3 d d = - + - ^ ^ h h
nodi a
From the convolution property, we know
x t t t
0
d -
*
^ ^ h h x t t
0
= - ^ h
So, for the input
x t ^ h u t = ^ h (Unit step fun
n
)
The output of the system is obtained as
y t ^ h u t h t =
*
^ ^ h h
u t t t 1 3 d d = - + -
*
^ ^ ^ h h h
6 @
u t u t 1 3 = - + - ^ ^ h h
At t 2 = y 2 ^ h u u 2 1 2 3 = - + - ^ ^ h h 1 =
[ ] x n [ ] u n
3
1
2
1
n n
= -
b b l l
[ ] [ 1] ( ) u n u n u n
3
1
3
1
2
1
n n n
= + - - -
-
b b b l l l
Taking z-transform
X
z
6 @ [ ] [ ] z u n z u n
3
1
3
1
1
n
n
n
n
n n
= + - -
3
3
3
3
-
-
-
=- =-
b b l l
/ /
[ ] z u n
2
1
n
n
n
-
3
3
-
=-
b l
/
z z z
3
1
3
1
2
1
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n 0
1
0
= + -
3
3
3
-
=
-
-
=-
-
-
=
b b b l l l
/ / /

z
z
z 3
1
3
1
2
1
I II III
n
n
m
m
n
n 0 1 0
= + -
3 3 3
= = =
b b b l l l
1 2 3 44 44 1 2 3 44 44 1 2 3 44 44
/ / /
Taking m n =-
Series I converges if
z 3
1
1 < or z
3
1
>
Series II converges if z
3
1
1 < or z 3 <
Series III converges if
z 2
1
1 < or z
2
1
>
Region of convergence of ( ) X z will be intersection of above three
So, ROC : z
2
1
3 < <
Using s-domain differentiation property of Laplace transform.
If ( ) f t ( ) F s
L
( ) tf t
( )
ds
dF s L
-
So, [ ( )] tf t L
ds
d
s s 1
1
2
=
-
+ +
; E

( ) s s
s
1
2 1
2 2
=
+ +
+
Convolution sum is defined as
[ ] y n [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] h n g n h n g n k
k
= = -
3
3
=-
*
/
For causal sequence, [ ] y n [ ] [ ] h n g n k
k 0
= -
3
=
/
nodi a
[ ] y n [ ] [ ] [ ] [ 1] [ ] [ 2] ..... h n g n h n g n h n g n = + - + - +
For n 0 = , [ ] y 0 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] ........... h g h g 0 0 1 1 = + - +
[ ] [ ] h g 0 0 = [ ] [ ] .... g g 1 2 0 - = - =
[ ] [ ] h g 0 0 = ...(i)
For n 1 = , [ ] y 1 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] .... h g h g h g 1 1 1 0 1 1 = + + - +
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] h g h g 1 1 1 0 = +

2
1
[ ] [ ] g g
2
1
1
2
1
0 = + [1] h
2
1
2
1
1
= =
b l
1 [ ] [ ] g g 1 0 = +
[ ] g 1 [ ] g 1 0 = -
From equation (i), [ ] g 0
[ ]
[ ]
h
y
0
0
1
1
1 = = =
So, [ ] g 1 1 1 0 = - =
( ) H jw
( )( ) cos sin 2 2
w
w w
=
sin sin 3
w
w
w
w
= +
We know that inverse Fourier transform of sinc function is a rectangular function.
So, inverse Fourier transform of ( ) H jw
( ) h t ( ) ( ) h t h t
1 2
= +
( ) h 0 (0) (0) h h
1 2
= +

2
1
2
1
1 = + =
( ) y t ( ) ( ) cos x d 3
t
t t t =
3 -
#
Time invariance :
Let, ( ) x t ( ) t d =
( ) y t ( ) ( ) cos t d 3
t
d t t =
3 -
#

nodi a
( ) (0) cos u t = ( ) u t =
For a delayed input ( ) t t
0
- output is
( , ) y t t
0
( ) ( ) cos t t d 3
t
0
d t t = -
3 -
#

( ) (3 ) cos u t t
0
=
Delayed output ( ) y t t
0
- ( ) u t t
0
= -
( , ) y t t
0
( ) y t t
0
! -
System is not time invariant.
Stability :
Consider a bounded input ( ) cos x t t 3 =
( ) y t cos
cos
t
t
3
2
1 6
t t
2
= =
-
3 3 - -
# #

cos dt t dt
2
1
1
2
1
6
t t
= -
3 3 - -
# #
As , t "3 ( ) y t "3 (unbounded)
System is not stable.
( ) f t ( ) cos sin a a t b n t
n n
n
0
1
w w = + +
3
=
/
The given function ( ) f t is an even function, therefore b 0
n
=
( ) f t is a non zero average value function, so it will have a non-zero value of a
0
a
0

/
( )
T
f t dt
2
1
/ T
0
2
=
^ h
# (average value of ( ) f t )
a
n
is zero for all even values of n and non zero for odd n
a
n
( ) ( ) ( ) cos
T
f t n t d t
2
T
0
w w = #
So, Fourier expansion of ( ) f t will have a
0
and a
n
, , , n 1 3 5f3 =
( ) x t e
t
=
-
Laplace transformation
( ) X s
s 1
1
=
+
( ) y t e
t 2
=
-
( ) Y s
s 2
1
=
+
Convolution in time domain is equivalent to multiplication in frequency domain.
( ) z t ( ) ( ) x t y t ) =
nodi a
( ) Z s ( ) ( ) X s Y s
s s 1
1
2
1
= =
+ +
b b l l
By partial fraction and taking inverse Laplace transformation, we get
( ) Z s
s s 1
1
2
1
=
+
-
+
( ) z t e e
t t 2
= -
- -
( ) f t ( ) F s
1
L
( ) f t t - ( ) ( ) e F s F s
s
1 2
L
=
t -
( ) G s
( )
( ) ( )
F s
F s F s
1
2
2 1
=
)

( )
( ) ( )
F s
e F s F s
s
1
2
1 1
=
) t -

( )
( )
F s
e F s
sE
1
2
1
2
=
-
( ) ( ) ( ) F s F s F s
1 1 1
2
a =
)
"
e
s
=
t -
Taking inverse Laplace transform
( ) g t [ ] ( ) e t L
s 1
d t = = -
t - -
( ) h t e e
t t 2
= +
- -
Laplace transform of ( ) h t i.e. the transfer function
( ) H s
s s 1
1
2
1
=
+
+
+
For unit step input
( ) r t ( ) t m =
or ( ) R s
s
1
=
Output, ( ) Y s ( ) ( ) R s H s =

s s s
1
1
1
2
1
=
+
+
+
; E
By partial fraction
( ) Y s
s s s 2
3
1
1
2
1
2
1
= -
+
-
+
b l
Taking inverse Laplace
( ) y t ( ) ( )
( )
u t e u t
e u t
2
3
2
t
t 2
= - -
-
-
( ) . . u t e e 1 5 0 5
t t 2
= - -
- -
6 @
System is given as
( ) H s
( ) s 1
2
=
+
Step input ( ) R s
s
1
=
Output ( ) Y s ( ) ( ) H s R s =

( )
1
s s 1
2
=
+
b l

nodi a

( ) s s
2
1
2
= -
+
( ) y t ( ) ( ) e u t 2 2
t
= -
-
Final value of ( ) y t ,
( ) y t
ss
( ) limy t 2
t
= =
"3
Let time taken for step response to reach 98% of its final value is t
s
.
So,
2 2e
ts
-
-
. 2 0 98
#
=
. 0 02 e
ts
=
-
t
s
ln50 =
. 3 91 = sec.
Period of ( ) x t ,
T
2
w
p
=
. 0 8
2
p
p
=
. sec 2 5 =
Input output relationship
( ) y t ( ) , x d t 0 >
t 5
t t =
3 -
#
Causality :
( ) y t depends on ( ), x t t 5 0 > system is non-causal.
For example t 2 =
( ) y 2 depends on ( ) x 10 (future value of input)
Linearity :
Output is integration of input which is a linear function, so system is linear.
Fourier series of given function
( ) x t cos sin A a n t b n t
n
n n 0
1
0 0
w w = + +
3
=
/
( ) x t a ( ) x t =- odd function
So, A 0
0
=
a 0
n
=
b
n
( )sin
T
x t n t dt
2
T
0
0
w =
#
( ) ( ) sin sin
T
n t dt n t dt
2
1 1
/
/
T
T
T
0 0
2 0
2
w w = + -
= G # #

cos cos
T n
n t
n
n t 2
/
/
T
T
T
0
0
0
2
0
0
2
w
w
w
w
=
-
-
-
c c m m = G
( ) ( ) cos cos cos
n T
n n n
2
1 2
0
w
p p p = - + -
6 @
( )
n
2
1 1
n
p
= - - 6 @
nodi a
b
n

,
,
n
n
n
4
0
odd
even
p
=
*
So only odd harmonic will be present in ( ) x t
For second harmonic component ( ) n 2 = amplitude is zero.
By parsvals theorem
( ) X d
2
1 2
p
w w
3
3
-
#
( ) x t dt
2
=
3
3
-
#
( ) X d
2
w w
3
3
-
#
2 2 # p = 4p =
Given sequences [ ] x n
-
{ , }, n 1 1 0 1 # # = -
[ ] y n
-
{ , , , , }, n 1 0 0 0 1 0 4 # # = -
If impulse response is [ ] h n then
[ ] y n [ ] * [ ] h n x n =
Length of convolution ( [ ]) y n is 0 to 4, [ ] x n is of length 0 to 1 so length of [ ] h n
will be 0 to 3.
Let [ ] h n
-
{ , , , } a b c d =
Convolution
[ ] y n
-
{ , , , , } a a b b c c d d = - + - + - + -
Comparing we have
a 1 =
a b - + b a 0 1 & = = =
b c - + c b 0 1 & = = =
c d - + d c 0 1 & = = =
So, [ ] h n
-
{ , , , } 1 1 1 1 =
We can observe that if we scale ( ) f t by a factor of
2
1
and then shift, we will get
( ) g t .
First scale ( ) f t by a factor of
2
1
( ) g t
1
( /2) f t =
nodi a
Shift ( ) g t
1
by 3, ( ) g t ( ) g t f
t
3
2
3
1
= - =
-
` j
( ) g t f
t
2 2
3
= -
` j
( ) g t can be expressed as
( ) g t ( 3) ( 5) u t u t = - - -
By shifting property we can write Laplace transform of ( ) g t
( ) G s
s
e
s
e
1 1 s s 3 5
= -
- -

(1 )
s
e
e
s
s
3
2
= -
-
-
Let ( ) ( ) x t X s
L
( ) ( ) y t Y s
L
( ) ( ) h t H s
L
So output of the system is given as
( ) Y s ( ) ( ) X s H s =
Now for input ( ) x t t - ( ) e X s (shifting property)
s
L
t -
( ) h t t - ( ) e H s
s
L
t -
So now output is ' ( ) Y s ( ) ( ) e X s e H s
s s
$ =
t t - -
( ) ( ) e X s H s
s 2
=
t -

( ) e Y s
s 2
=
t -
' ( ) y t ( 2 ) y t t = -
Let three LTI systems having response ( ), ( ) H z H z
1 2
and ( ) H z
3
are
Cascaded as showing below
Assume ( ) H z
1
1 z z
2 1
= + + (non-causal)
nodi a
( ) H z
2
1 z z
3 2
= + + (non-causal)
Overall response of the system
( ) H z ( ) ( ) ( ) H z H z H z
1 2 3
=
( ) H z ( )( ) ( ) z z z z H z 1 1
2 1 3 2
3
= + + + +
To make ( ) H z causal we have to take ( ) H z
3
also causal.
Let ( ) H z
3
z z 1
6 4
= + +
- -
( )( )( ) z z z z z z 1 1 1
2 1 3 2 6 4
= + + + + + +
- -
( ) H z causal "
Similarly to make ( ) H z unstable atleast one of the system should be unstable.
Given signal
( ) x t a e
/
k
j kt T
k
2
=
3
3
p
=-
/
Let
0
w is the fundamental frequency of signal ( ) x t
( ) x t a e
k
jk t
k
0
=
3
3
w
=-
/

T
2
0
a
p
w =
( ) x t a e a e a a e a e
j t j t j t j t
2
2
1 0 1 2
2 0 0 0 0
= + + + +
w w w w
-
-
-
-
(2 ) (0.5 0.2 ) 2 j e j e j
j t j t 2 0 0
= - + + + +
w w - -
(0.5 0.2) (2 ) e j e
j t j t 2 0 0
+ - + +
w w
2 e e j e e
j t j t j t j t 2 2 2 2 0 0 0 0
= + + - +
w w w w - -
6 6 @ @
0.5 0.2 2 e e j e e j
j t j t j t j t 0 0 0 0
+ - - +
w w w w - + -
6 6 @ @
2(2 2 ) (2 2 ) 0.5(2 ) cos sin cos t j j t t
0 0 0
w w w = + + -
0.2 (2 ) 2 sin j j t j
0
w +
4 2 2 2 . 2 cos sin cos sin t t t t j 0 4
0 0 0 0
w w w w = - + + + 6 @
[ ( )] Im x t 2 (constant) =
Z-transform of [ ] x n is
( ) X z z z z z 4 3 2 6 2
3 1 2 3
= + + - +
- -
Transfer function of the system
( ) H z z 3 2
1
= -
-
Output
( ) Y z ( ) ( ) H z X z =
( ) Y z (3 2)(4 3 2 6 2 ) z z z z z
1 3 1 2 3
= - + + - +
- - -
12 9 6 18 6 8 6 4 12 4 z z z z z z z z z
4 2 1 2 3 1 2 3
= + + - + - - - + -
- - - - -
z z z z z z 12 8 9 4 18 18 4
4 3 2 2 3
= - + - - + -
- - -
Or sequence [ ] y n is
[ ] y n [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] n n n n 12 4 8 3 9 2 4 d d d d = - - - + - - -
18 [ 1] 18 [ 2] 4 [ 3] n n n d d d + + + - +
[ ] y n 0 =Y , 0 n <
So [ ] y n is non-causal with finite support.
nodi a
Since the given system is LTI, So principal of Superposition holds due to linearity.
For causal system ( ) 0 h t = , 0 t <
Both statement are correct.
For an LTI system output is a constant multiplicative of input with same
frequency.
Here ( ) input g t ( ) sin e t
t
w =
a -
( ) output y t ( ) sin e vt K
t
f = +
b -
Output will be in form of ( ) sin e t K
t
w f +
a -
So , v \ b w = =
Given that ( ) X z
( ) z a
z
2
=
-
, z a >
Residue of ( ) X z z
n 1 -
at z a = is
( ) ( )
dz
d
z a X z z
n
z a
2 1
= -
-
=
( )
( )
dz
d
z a
z a
z
z
n
z a
2
2
1
= -
-
-
=

dz
d
z
n
z a
=
=

nz
n
z a
1
=
-
=

na
n 1
=
-
Input-output relation
( ) y t ( ) x d
t 2
t t =
3 -
-
#
Causality :
Since ( ) y t depends on ( ) x t 2 - , So it is non-causal.
Time-variance :
( ) y t ( ) ( ) x d y t
t
0
2
0
t t t t = - = -
3 -
-
Y
#
So this is time-variant.
Stability :
Output ( ) y t is unbounded for an bounded input.
For example
Let ( ) x t ( ) bounded e =
t -
( ) y t Unbounded e d
e
1
2 2 t t
$ t = =
-
3
3
t
t
-
-
- -
-
-
8 B #
Output ( ) y t of the given system is
( ) y t ( ) ( ) x t h t ) =
Or ( ) Y jw ( ) ( ) X j H j w w =
Given that, ( ) x t ( ) t sinc a = and ( ) h t ( ) t sinc b =
nodi a
Fourier transform of ( ) x t and ( ) h t are
( ) X jw [ ( )] , x t rect
2
< < F
a
p
a
w
a w a = = -
` j
( ) H jw [ ( )] , h t rect
2
< < F
b
p
b
w
b w b = = -
` j
( ) Y jw rect rect
2 2
2
ab
p
a
w
b
w
=
` ` j j
So, ( ) Y jw rect
2
K
g
w
=
` j
Where g ( , ) min a b =
And ( ) y t ( ) t Ksinc g =
Let a
k
is the Fourier series coefficient of signal ( ) x t
Given ( ) y t ( ) ( ) x t t x t t
0 0
= - + +
Fourier series coefficient of ( ) y t
b
k
e a e a
jk t
k
jk t
k
0 0
= +
w w -
b
k
2 cos a k t
k 0
w =
b
k
0 = (for all odd k)
k t
0
w
2
p
= , k odd "
k
T
t
2
0
p

2
p
=
For k 1 = , t
0

T
4
=
Given signal
( ) x t rect t
2
1
= -
` j
So, ( ) x t
1, 0 1
, elsewhere
t t
2
1
2
1
2
1
0
or # # # #
=
- -
*
Similarly ( ) x t - rect t
2
1
= - -
` j
( ) x t -
1, 1 0
, elsewhere
t t
2
1
2
1
2
1
0
or # # # #
=
- - - -
*
nodi a
[ ( ) ( )] x t x t F + - ( ) ( ) x t e dt x t e dt
j t j t
= + -
3
3
3
3
w w -
-
-
-
# #
( ) ( ) e dt e dt 1 1
j t j t
0
1
1
0
= +
w w - -
-
# #

j
e
j
e
j t j t
0
1
1
0
w w
=
-
+
-
w w - -
-
; ; E E

(1 ) ( 1)
j
e
j
e
1 1 j j
w w
= - + -
w w -
( ) ( )
j
e
e e
j
e
e e
/
/ /
/
/ /
j
j j
j
j j
2
2 2
2
2 2
w w
= - + -
w
w w
w
w w
-
- -

( )( )
j
e e e e
/ / / / j j j j 2 2 2 2
w
=
- +
w w w w - -
2 sin cos
2
2 2
$
w
w w
=
` ` j j

2cos
2 2
sinc
w
p
w
=
` j
In option (A)
[ ] z n
1
[ ] x n 3 = -
[ ] z n
2
[4 ] [4 3] z n x n
1
= = -
[ ] y n [ ] z n
2
= -
[ ] [ ] x n x n 4 3 3 4 = - - = - Y
In option (B)
[ ] z n
1
[ ] x n 3 = +
[ ] z n
2
[4 ] [4 3] z n x n
1
= = +
[ ] y n [ ] [ 4 3] z n x n
2
= - = - +
In option (C)
[ ] v n
1
[ ] x n 4 =
[ ] v n
2
[ ] [ 4 ] v n x n
1
= - = -
[ ] y n [ ] v n 3
2
= +
[ ( )] [ ] x n x n 4 3 3 4 = - + = - Y
In option (D)
[ ] v n
1
[ ] x n 4 =
[ ] v n
2
[ ] [ 4 ] v n x n
1
= - = -
[ ] y n [ 3] [ 4( 3)] [3 4 ] v n x n x n
2
= - = - - = - Y
For an LTI system input and output have identical wave shape (i.e. frequency of
input-output is same) within a multiplicative constant (i.e. Amplitude response
is constant)
So F must be a sine or cosine wave with
1 2
w w =
The spectrum of sampled signal ( ) s jw contains replicas of ( ) U jw at frequencies
nf
s
! .
Where n , , ....... 0 1 2 =
nodi a
f
s
1
sec m
kHz
T
1
1
1
s
= = =

Given signal has the following wave-form
Function x(t) is periodic with period T 2 and given that
( ) x t ( ) x t T =- + (Half-wave symmetric)
So we can obtain the Fourier series representation of given function.
System response is given as
nodi a
( ) H z
( )
( )
KG z
G z
1
=
-
[ ] g n [ ] [ ] n n 1 2 d d = - + -
( ) G z z z
1 2
= +
- -
So ( ) H z
( )
( )
K z z
z z
1
1 2
1 2
=
- +
+
- -
- -

z Kz K
z 1
2
=
- -
+
For system to be stable poles should lie inside unit circle.
z 1 #
z 1
K K K
2
4
2
!
# =
+
2 K K K 4
2
! # +
4 K K
2
+ 2 K # -
4 K K
2
+ 4 4K K
2
# - +
8K 4 #
K 1/2 #
Output is said to be distortion less if the input and output have identical wave
shapes within a multiplicative constant. A delayed output that retains input
waveform is also considered distortion less.
Thus for distortion less output, input-output relationship is given as
( ) y t ( ) Kg t t
d
= -
Taking Fourier transform.
( ) Y w ( ) KG e
j td
w =
w -
( ) ( ) G H w w =
( ) H & w transfer function of the system
So, ( ) H w Ke
j td
=
w -
Amplitude response ( ) H K w =
Phase response, ( )
n
q w t
d
w =-
For distortion less output, phase response should be proportional to frequency.
( ) G z
z e
j
=
w
e e
j j 3
a b = +
w w - -
for linear phase characteristic a b = .
Given Convolution is,
( ) h t ( ) ( ) u t r t 1 2 ) = + -
Taking Laplace transform on both sides,
( ) H s [ ( )] [ ( 1)] [ ( 2)] h t u t r t L L L ) = = + -
We know that, [ ( )] / u t s 1 L =
[ ( 1)] u t L +
1
e
s
2
s
=
c m
(Time-shifting property)
and [ ( )] r t L 1/s
2
=
( ) r t 2 L[ -
1
e
s
2
s 2
=
-
c m
(Time-shifting property)
So ( ) H s
1 1
e
s
e
s
2
s s 2
=
-
` c j m ; ;
E E
nodi a
( ) H s
1
e
s
3
s
=
-
c m
( ) h t ( ) ( ) t u t
2
1
1 1
2
= - -
Impulse response of given LTI system.
[ ] h n [ ] [ ] x n y n 1 ) = -
Taking z-transform on both sides.
( ) H z ( ) ( ) z X z Y z
1
=
-
[ 1] ( ) x n z x z
1
Z
a -
-
We have ( ) 1 3 ( ) 1 2 and X z z Y z z
1 2
= - = +
- -
So
( ) H z ( )( ) z z z 1 3 1 2
1 1 2
= - +
- - -
Output of the system for input [ ] [ 1] is u n n d = - ,
( ) y z ( ) ( ) H z U z = [ ] ( ) U n U z z
1
Z
=
-
So
( ) Y z (1 3 )(1 2 ) z z z z
1 1 2 1
= - +
- - - -
( ) z z z z 1 3 2 6
2 1 2 3
= - + -
- - - -

z z z z 3 2 6
2 3 4 5
= - + -
- - - -
Taking inverse z-transform on both sides we have output.
[ ] y n [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] n n n n 2 3 3 2 4 6 5 d d d d = - - - + - - -
A bounded signal always possesses some finite energy.
E ( ) g t dt <
t
t
2
0
0
3 =
-
#
Trigonometric Fourier series is given as
( ) x t cos sin A a n t b n t
n
n
n 0 0
1
0
w w = + +
3
=
/
Since there are no sine terms, so b 0
n
=
b
n
( )sin
T
x t n t dt
2
T
0
0
0
0
w =
#
( ) ( ) sin sin
T
x n d x t n t dt
2
/
/
T
T
T
0
0 0
2 0
2
0
0
t w t t w = +
= G # #
Where T t d dt & t t = - =-
( ) ( )( ) ( ) sin sin
T
x T t n T t dt x t n t dt
2
/
/ T
T
T
T
0
0
2
0
2 0
0
0
w w = - - - +
; E # #
( ) ( ) sin sin
T
x T t n
T
T t dt x t n t dt
2 2
/ / T
T
T
T
0 2
0
2 O
O
0
p
w = - - ++
` j
; E # #
( ) ( ) ( ) sin sin
T
x T t n n dt x t n t dt
2
2
/ / T
T
T
T
0
0
2
0
2 0
0
0
0
p w w = - - +
; E # #
( ) ( ) ( ) sin sin
T
x T t n t dt x t n t dt
2
/ / T
T
T
T
0
0
2
0
2 0
0
0
0
w w = - - ++
; E # #
0 b
n
= if ( ) x t ( ) x T t = -
nodi a
From half wave symmetry we know that if
( ) x t x t
T
2
! =-
` j
Then Fourier series of ( ) x t contains only odd harmonics.
Z-transform of a discrete all pass system is given as
( ) H z
z z
z z
1
0
1
1
0
=
-
-
)
-
-
It has a pole at z
0
and a zero at /z 1
0
)
.
Given system has a pole at
z 2 30 + =
%
2
( ) j
2
3
=
+
( 3 ) j = +
system is stable if z 1 < and for this it is anti-causal.
According to given data input and output Sequences are

[ ] x n

-
{ , }, n 1 2 1 0 # # = - -
[ ] y n
{ , , , }, n 1 3 1 2 1 2 # # = - - - -
-
If impulse response of system is [ ] h n then output
[ ] y n [ ] [ ] h n x n ) =
Since length of convolution ( [ ]) y n is 1 - to 2, [ ] x n is of length 1 0 to - so length
of [ ] h n is 0 to 2.
Let [ ] h n { , , } a b c =
-
Convolution

[ ] y n

-
{ , , , } a a b b c c 2 2 2 = - - -
[ ] y n
-
{ 1, 3, 1, 2} = - - -
So, a 1 =
nodi a
a b b 2 3 1 & - = =-
a c c 2 1 1 & - =- =-
Impulse response
-
[ ] , 1, 1 h n 1 = - -
" ,
Output ( ) y t e
( ) x t
=
-
If ( ) x t is unbounded, ( ) x t " 3
( ) y t 0 ( ) bounded e
( ) x t
" =
-
So ( ) y t is bounded even when ( ) x t is not bounded.
Given ( ) y t ( ) x t dt
' '
t
=
3 -
#
Laplace transform of ( ) y t
( ) Y s =
( )
s
X s
, has a singularity at s 0 =
For a causal bounded input, ( ) y t ( ) x t dt
' '
t
=
3 -
# is always bounded.
RMS value is given by
V
rms
( )
T
V t dt
1
T
2
0
=
#
Where
( ) V t
,
,
T
t t
T
T
t T
2
0
2
0
2
<
# #
#
=
` j
*
So ( )
T
V t dt
1
T
2
0
#
( )
T T
t
dt dt
1 2
0
/
/
T
T
T
2
2 0
2
= +
` j
= G # #

T
T
t dt
1 4
/ T
2
2
0
2
$ =
#

T
t 4
3
/ T
3
3
0
2
=
; E

T
T 4
24
3
3
# =
6
1
=
V
rms

6
1
V =
By final value theorem
( ) limf t
t"3
( ) limsF s
s 0
=
"

( )
( )
lims
s s s
s s
2 2
5 23 6
s 0
2
2
=
+ +
+ +
"

2
6
= 3 =
nodi a
( ) f x sin x
2
=
cos x
2
1 2
=
-
. . cos x 0 5 0 5 2 = -
( ) f x cos sin A a n x b n x
n
n
n 0 0
1
0
w w = + +
3
=
/
( ) sin f x x
2
= is an even function so b 0
n
=
A
0
. 0 5 =
a
n

. ,
, otherwise
n 0 5 1
0
=
- =
)

0
w
T T
2 2
2
0
p p
= = =
Z-transform ( ) F z
z 1
1
=
+
1
z
z
1
= -
+
1
z 1
1
1
= -
+
-
so, ( ) f k ( ) ( 1) k
k
d = - -
Thus ( 1)
k
-
z 1
1
1
Z
+
-
Total current in wire
I sin t 10 20 w = +
I
rms
( )
( )
10
2
20
2
2
= + 17.32 A =
Root mean square value is given as
I
rms
( )
T
I t dt
1
T
2
0
=
#
From the graph, ( ) I t
,
, /
T
t t
T
T t T
12
0
2
6 2
<
<
#
#
=
-
` j
*
So
T
I dt
1
T
2
0
#
( )
T T
t
dt dt
1 12
6
/
/
T
T
T
2
2
2 0
2
=
-
+
` j
= G # #

T
T
t
t
1 144
3
36
/
/
T
T
T
2
3
0
2
2
= +
e o ; 6 E @

24 2 T
T
T T 1 144
36
3
2
= +
c
`
m
j ; E

[6 18 ]
T
T T
1
= + 24 =
I
rms
24 = 2 6 A =
***********
Chapter 3 Electric Machines Page 125
nodi a
CHAPTER 3
ELECTRI C MACHI NES
EE SP 3.1 An 8-pole, 3-phase, 50 Hz induction motor is operating at a speed of 700 rpm.
The frequency of the rotor current of the motor in Hz is ______.
EE SP 3.2 For a specified input voltage and frequency, if the equivalent radius of the core of
a transformer is reduced by half, the factor by which the number of turns in the
primary should change to maintain the same no load current is
(A) 1/4 (B) 1/2
(C) 2 (D) 4
EE SP 3.3 A star connected 400 V, 50 Hz, 4 pole synchronous machine gave the following
open circuit and short circuit test results :
Open circuit test : V
oc
V 400 = (rms, line-to-line) at field current, . A I 2 3
f
=
Short circuit test : I
sc
A 10 = (rms, phase) at field current, . A I 1 5
f
=
The value of per phase synchronous impedance in W at rated voltage is_____.
EE SP 3.4 The core loss of a single phase, / V 230 115 , 50 Hz power transformer is measured
from 230 V side by feeding the primary (230 V side) from a variable voltage
variable frequency source while keeping the secondary open circuited. The core
loss is measured to be 1050 W for 230 V, 50 Hz input. The core loss is again
measured to be 500 W for 138 V, 30 Hz input. The hysteresis and eddy current
losses of the transformer for 230 V, 50 Hz input are respectively,
(A) 508 W and 542 W (B) 468 W and 582 W
(C) 498 W and 552 W (D) 488 W and 562 W
EE SP 3.5 A 15 kW, 230 V dc shunt motor has armature circuit resistance of . 0 4 W and
field circuit resistance of 230 W . At no load and rated voltage, the motor runs at
1400 rpm and the line current drawn by the motor is 5 A. At full load, the motor
draws a line current of 70 A. Neglect armature reaction. The full load speed of
the motor in rpm is_____.
EE SP 3.6 A 3 phase, 50 Hz, six pole induction motor has a rotor resistance of . 0 1 W and
reactance of . 0 92 W . Neglect the voltage drop in stator and assume that the rotor
resistance is constant. Given that the full load slip is 3%, the ratio of maximum
torque to full load torque is
(A) 1.567 (B) 1.712
(C) 1.948 (D) 2.134
Page 126 Electric Machines Chapter 3
nodi a
EE SP 3.7 Assuming an ideal transformer, the Thevenins equivalent voltage and impedance
as seen from the terminals x and y for the circuit in figure are
(A) , sin t 2 4 w W ^ h (B) , sin t 1 1 w W ^ h
(C) , sin t 1 2 w W ^ h (D) , . sin t 2 0 5 w W ^ h
EE SP 3.8 A single phase, 50 kVA, 1000 V/100 V two winding transformer is connected as
an autotransformer as shown in the figure.
The kVA rating of the autotransformer is ________.
EE SP 3.9 A three-phase, 4-pole, self excited induction generator is feeding power to a load
at a frequency f
1
. If the load is partially removed, the frequency becomes f
2
. If
the speed of the generator is maintained at 1500 rpm in both the cases, then
(A) f
1
, Hz f 50 >
2
and f f >
1 2
(B) Hz f 50 <
1
and Hz f 50 >
2
(C) f
1
, Hz f 50 <
2
and f f >
2 1
(D) Hz f 50 >
1
and Hz f 50 <
2
EE SP 3.10 A single phase induction motor draws 12 MW power at 0.6 lagging power. A
capacitor is connected in parallel to the motor to improve the power factor of the
combination of motor and capacitor to 0.8 lagging. Assuming that the real and
reactive power drawn by the motor remains same as before, the reactive power
delivered by the capacitor in MVAR is ______.
EE SP 3.11 In a constant / V f control of induction motor, the ratio / V f is maintained
constant from 0 to base frequency, where V is the voltage applied to the motor
at fundamental frequency f . Which of the following statements relating to low
frequency operation of the motor is TRUE ?
(A) At low frequency, the stator flux increases from its rated value.
(B) At low frequency, the stator flux decreases from its rated value.
(C) At low frequency, the motor saturates.
(D) At low frequency, the stator flux remains unchanged at its rated value.
nodi a
EE SP 3.12 A 250 V dc shunt machine has armature circuit resistance of . 0 6 W and field
circuit resistance of 125 W . The machine is connected to 250 V supply mains. The
motor is operated as a generator and then as a motor separately. The line current
of the machine in both the cases is 50 A. The ratio of the speed as a generator
to the speed as a motor is _____.
EE SP 3.13 A three phase slip-ring induction motor, provided with a commutator winding,
is shown in the figure. The motor rotates in clockwise direction when the rotor
windings are closed.
If the rotor winding is open circuited and the system is made to run at rotational
speed f
r
with the help of prime-mover in anti-clockwise direction, then the
frequency of voltage across slip rings is f
1
and frequency of voltage across
commutator brushes is f
2
. The values of f
1
and f
2
respectively are
(A) f f
r
+ and f (B) f f
r
- and f
(C) f f
r
- and f f
r
+ (D) f f
r
+ and f f
r
-
EE SP 3.14 A 20-pole alternators is having 180 identical stator slots with 6 conductors in
each slot. All the coils of a phase are in series. If the coils are connected to realize
single-phase winding, the generated voltage is V
1
. If the coils are reconnected to
realize three phase star connected winding, the generated phase voltage is V
2
.
Assuming full pitch, single-layer winding, the ratio / V V
1 2
is
(A)
3
1
(B)
2
1
(C) 3 (D) 2
EE SP 3.15 For a single phase, two winding transformer, the supply frequency and voltage
are both increased by 10%. The percentage changes in the hysteresis loss and
eddy current loss, respectively, are
(A) 10 and 21 (B) 10 - and 21
(C) 21 and 10 (D) 21 - and 10
EE SP 3.16 In a synchronous machine, hunting is predominantly damped by
(A) mechanical losses in the rotor
(B) iron losses in the rotor
(C) copper losses in the stator
(D) copper losses in the rotor
nodi a
EE SP 3.17 A single phase induction motor is provided with capacitor and centrifugal switch
in series with auxiliary winding. The switch is expected to operate at a speed of
0.7 Ns, but due to malfunctioning the switch fails to operate. The torque-speed
characteristic of the motor is represented by
EE SP 3.18 The no-load speed of a 230 V separately excited dc motor is 1400 rpm. The
armature resistance drop and the brush drop are neglected. The field current is
kept constant at rated value. The torque of the motor in Nm for an armature
current of 8 A is ________.
EE SP 3.19 The torque speed characteristics of motor T
M ^ h and load T
L ^ h for two cases are
shown in the figures (a) and (b). The load torque is equal to motor torque at
points P , Q, R and S.
The stable operating points are
(A) P and R (B) P and S
(C) Q and R (D) Q and S
nodi a
EE SP 3.20 An open circuit test is performed on 50 Hz transformer, using variable frequency
source and keeping V/f ratio constant, to separate its eddy current and hysteresis
losses. The variation of core loss/frequency as function of frequency is shown in
the figure
The hysteresis and eddy current losses of the transformer at 25 Hz respectively
are
(A) 250 W and 2.5 W (B) 250 W and 62.5 W
(C) 312.5 W and 62.5 W (D) 312.5 W and 250 W
EE SP 3.21 A non-salient pole synchronous generator having synchronous reactance of 0.8
pu is supplying 1 pu power to a unity power factor load at a terminal voltage
of 1.1 pu. Neglecting the armature resistance, the angle of the voltage behind
the synchronous reactance with respect to the angle of the terminal voltage in
degrees is _______.
EE SP 3.22 A separately excited 300 V DC shunt motor under no load runs at 900 rpm
drawing an armature current of 2 A. The armature resistance is . 0 5 W and
leakage inductance is 0.01 H. When loaded, the armature current is 15 A. Then,
the speed in rpm is _____.
EE SP 3.23 The load shown in the figure absorbs 4 kW at a power factor of 0.89 lagging.
Assuming the transformer to be ideal, the value of the reactance X to improve
the input power factor to unity is _________.
EE SP 3.24 The parameters measured for a 220 V/110 V, Hz 50 , single phase transformer
are :
Self inductance of primary winding mH 45 =
nodi a
Self inductance of secondary winding mH 30 =
Mutual inductance between primary and secondary windings mH 20 =
Using the above parameters, the leakage , L L
l l 1 2 ^ h and magnetizing L
m ^ h inductance
as referred to primary side in the equivalent circuit respectively, are
(A) 5 mH, 20 mH and 40 mH
(B) 5 mH, 80 mH and 40 mH
(C) 25 mH, 10 mH and 20 mH
(D) 45 mH, 30 mH and 20 mH
YEAR 2013 ONE MARK
EE SP 3.25 Leakage flux in an induction motor is
(A) flux that leaks through the machine
(B) flux that links both stator and rotor windings
(C) flux that links none of the windings
(D) flux that links the stator winding or the rotor winding but not both
EE SP 3.26 The angle d in the swing equation of a synchronous generator is the
(A) angle between stator voltage and current
(B) angular displacement of the rotor with respect to the stator
(C) angular displacement of the stator mmf with respect to a synchronously
rotating axis.
(D) angular displacement of an axis fixed to the rotor with respect to a
synchronously rotating axis
EE SP 3.27 A single-phase transformer has no-load loss of 64 W, as obtained from an open
circuit test. When a short-circuit test is performed on it with 90% of the rated
currents flowing in its both LV and HV windings, he measured loss is 81 W. The
transformer has maximum efficiency when operated at
(A) 50.0% of the rated current
(B) 64.0% of the rated current
(C) 80.0% of the rated current
(D) 88.8% of the rated current
YEAR 2013 TWO MARKS
EE SP 3.28 A 4-pole induction motor, supplied by a slightly unbalanced three-phase 50 Hz
source, is rotating at 1440 rpm. The electrical frequency in Hz of the induced
negative sequence current in the rotor is
(A) 100 (B) 98
(C) 52 (D) 48
EE SP 3.29 The following arrangement consists of an ideal transformer and an attenuator
which attenuates by a factor of 0.8. An ac voltage 100 V V
WX1
= is applied
across WX to get an open circuit voltage V
YZ1
across YZ. Next, an ac voltage
nodi a
100 V V
YZ2
= is applied across YZ to get an open circuit voltage V
WX2
across WX.
Then, / V V
YZ WX 1 1
, / V V
WX YZ 2 2
are respectively,
(A) 125/100 and 80/100 (B) 100/100 and 80/100
(C) 100/100 and 100/100 (D) 80/100 and 80/100
YEAR 2012 ONE MARK
EE SP 3.30 The slip of an induction motor normally does not depend on
(A) rotor speed
(B) synchronous speed
(C) shaft torque
(D) core-loss component
YEAR 2012 TWO MARKS
EE SP 3.31 A 220 , V 15 , kW 100 rpm shunt motor with armature resistance of 0.25 , W has
a rated line current of 68 A and a rated field current of 2.2 A. The change in
field flux required to obtain a speed of 1600 rpm while drawing a line current of
52.8 A and a field current of 1.8 A is
(A) 18.18% increase
(B) 18.18% decrease
(C) 36.36% increase
(D) 36.36% decrease
EE SP 3.32 The locked rotor current in a 3-phase, star connected 15 , kW 4 , pole , V 230 50 Hz
induction motor at rated conditions is 50 A. Neglecting losses and magnetizing
current, the approximate locked rotor line current drawn when the motor is
connected to a 236 , V Hz 57 supply is
(A) 58.5 A (B) 45.0 A
(C) 42.7 A (D) 55.6 A
EE SP 3.33 A single phase 10 , kVA 50 Hz transformer with 1 kV primary winding draws
0.5 A and 55 , W at rated voltage and frequency, on no load. A second transformer
has a core with all its linear dimensions 2 times the corresponding dimensions
of the first transformer. The core material and lamination thickness are the same
in both transformer. The primary winding of both the transformers have the save
number of turns. If a rate voltage of 2 kV at 50 Hz is applied to the primary of
the second transformer, then the no load current and power, respectively, are
(A) 0.7 , A 77.8 A (B) 0.7 , A 155.6 W
nodi a
(C) 1 , A 110 W (D) 1 , A 220 W
YEAR 2011 ONE MARK
EE SP 3.34 A 4 point starter is used to start and control the speed of a
(A) dc shunt motor with armature resistance control
(B) dc shunt motor with field weakening control
(C) dc series motor
(D) dc compound motor
EE SP 3.35 A three phase, salient pole synchronous motor is connected to an infinite bus. It
is operated at no load a normal excitation. The field excitation of the motor is
first reduced to zero and then increased in reverse direction gradually. Then the
armature current.
(A) Increases continuously
(B) First increases and then decreases steeply
(C) First decreases and then increases steeply
(D) Remains constant
EE SP 3.36 A single phase air core transformer, fed from a rated sinusoidal supply, is operating
at no load. The steady state magnetizing current drawn by the transformer from
the supply will have the waveform
YEAR 2011 TWO MARKS
EE SP 3.37 A 220 V, DC shunt motor is operating at a speed of 1440 rpm. The armature
resistance is . 1 0 W and armature current is 10 A. of the excitation of the machine
is reduced by 10%, the extra resistance to be put in the armature circuit to
nodi a
maintain the same speed and torque will be
(A) . 1 79 W (B) . 2 1 W
(C) . 18 9 W (D) . 3 1 W
EE SP 3.38 A three-phase 440 V, 6 pole, 50 Hz, squirrel cage induction motor is running at
a slip of 5%. The speed of stator magnetic field to rotor magnetic field and speed
of rotor with respect of stator magnetic field are
(A) zero, 5 rpm -
(B) zero, 955 rpm
(C) 1000 rpm, 5 rpm -
(D) 1000 rpm, 955 rpm
YEAR 2010 ONE MARK
EE SP 3.39 A Single-phase transformer has a turns ratio 1:2, and is connected to a purely
resistive load as shown in the figure. The magnetizing current drawn is 1 A, and
the secondary current is 1 A. If core losses and leakage reactances are neglected,
the primary current is
(A) 1.41 A (B) 2 A
(C) 2.24 A (D) 3 A
EE SP 3.40 A balanced three-phase voltage is applied to a star-connected induction motor,
the phase to neutral voltage being V . The stator resistance, rotor resistance
referred to the stator, stator leakage reactance, rotor leakage reactance referred
to the stator, and the magnetizing reactance are denoted by r
s
, r
r
, X
s
, X
r
and
X
m
, respectively. The magnitude of the starting current of the motor is given by
(A)
( ) ( ) r r X X
V
s r s r
s
2 2
+ + +
(B)
( ) r X X
V
s s m
s
2 2
+ +
(C)
( ) ( ) r r X X
V
s r m r
s
2 2
+ + +
(D)
( ) r X X
V
s m r
s
2 2
+ +
YEAR 2010 TWO MARKS
EE SP 3.41 A separately excited dc machine is coupled to a 50 Hz, three-phase, 4-pole
induction machine as shown in figure. The dc machine is energized first and
the machines rotate at 1600 rpm. Subsequently the induction machine is also
connected to a 50 Hz, three-phase source, the phase sequence being consistent
with the direction of rotation. In steady state
nodi a
(A) both machines act as generator
(B) the dc machine acts as a generator, and the induction machine acts as a
motor
(C) the dc machine acts as a motor, and the induction machine acts as a
generator
(D) both machines act as motors
EE SP 3.42 A balanced star-connected and purely resistive load is connected at the secondary
of a star-delta transformer as shown in figure. The line-to line voltage rating of
the transformer is 110 V/200 V.
Neglecting the non-idealities of the transformer, the impedance Z of the equivalent
star-connected load, referred to the primary side of the transformer, is
(A) ( ) j 3 0 W + (B) ( . . ) j 0 866 0 5 W -
(C) ( . . ) j 0 866 0 5 W + (D) (1 0) j W +
Common Data for Questions 43 and 44
A separately excited DC motor runs at 1500 rpm under no-load with
200 V applied to the armature. The field voltage is maintained at
its rated value. The speed of the motor, when it delivers a torque of
5 Nm, is 1400 rpm as shown in figure. The rotational losses and armature reaction
are neglected.
nodi a
EE SP 3.43 The armature resistance of the motor is
(A) 2 W (B) 3.4 W
(C) 4.4 W (D) 7.7 W
EE SP 3.44 For the motor to deliver a torque of 2.5 Nm at 1400 rpm, the armature voltage
to be applied is
(A) 125.5 V (B) 193.3 V
(C) 200 V (D) 241.7 V
YEAR 2009 ONE MARK
EE SP 3.45 A field excitation of 20 A in a certain alternator results in an armature current
of 400 A in short circuit and a terminal voltage of 2000 V on open circuit. The
magnitude of the internal voltage drop within the machine at a load current of
200 A is
(A) 1 V
(B) 10 V
(C) 100 V
(D) 1000 V
EE SP 3.46 The single phase, 50 Hz iron core transformer in the circuit has both the vertical
arms of cross sectional area 20 cm
2
and both the horizontal arms of cross
sectional area 10 cm
2
. If the two windings shown were wound instead on opposite
horizontal arms, the mutual inductance will
(A) double (B) remain same
(C) be halved (D) become one quarter
EE SP 3.47 A 3-phase squirrel cage induction motor supplied from a balanced 3-phase source drives
a mechanical load. The torque-speed characteristics of the motor(solid curve) and of the
load(dotted curve) are shown. Of the two equilibrium points A and B, which of
the following options correctly describes the stability of A and B ?
nodi a
(A) A is stable, B is unstable (B) A is unstable, B is stable
(C) Both are stable (D) Both are unstable
YEAR 2009 TWO MARKS
EE SP 3.48 A 200 V, 50 Hz, single-phase induction motor has the following connection
diagram and winding orientations as shown. MM is the axis of the main stator
winding(M M )
1 2
and AA is that of the auxiliary winding(A A )
1 2
. Directions of
the winding axis indicate direction of flux when currents in the windings are in
the directions shown. Parameters of each winding are indicated. When switch S
is closed the motor
(A) rotates clockwise
(B) rotates anti-clockwise
(C) does not rotate
(D) rotates momentarily and comes to a halt
Common Data for Questions 49 and 50 :
The circuit diagram shows a two-winding, lossless transformer with
no leakage flux, excited from a current source, ( ) i t , whose waveform
is also shown. The transformer has a magnetizing inductance of
/ 400 p mH.
nodi a
EE SP 3.49 The peak voltage across A and B, with S open is
(A)
400
p
V (B) 800 V
(C)
4000
p
V (D)
800
p
V
EE SP 3.50 If the wave form of ( ) i t is changed to ( ) 10 (100 ) sin i t t p = A, the peak voltage
across A and B with S closed is
(A) 400 V
(B) 240 V
(C) 320 V
(D) 160 V
The star-delta transformer shown above is excited on the star side with balanced,
4-wire, 3-phase, sinusoidal voltage supply of rated magnitude. The transformer is
under no load condition
EE SP 3.51 With both S1 and S2 open, the core flux waveform will be
(A) a sinusoid at fundamental frequency
(B) flat-topped with third harmonic
(C) peaky with third-harmonic
(D) none of these
nodi a
EE SP 3.52 With S2 closed and S1 open, the current waveform in the delta winding will be
(A) a sinusoid at fundamental frequency
(B) flat-topped with third harmonic
(C) only third-harmonic
(D) none of these
EE SP 3.53 Figure shows the extended view of a 2-pole dc machine with 10 armature
conductors. Normal brush positions are shown by A and B, placed at the
interpolar axis. If the brushes are now shifted, in the direction of rotation, to A
and B as shown, the voltage waveform V
' ' A B
will resemble

Statement for Linked Answer Questions 54 and 55
The figure above shows coils-1 and 2, with dot markings as shown, having 4000
and 6000 turns respectively. Both the coils have a rated current of 25 A. Coil-1
is excited with single phase, 400 V, 50 Hz supply.
EE SP 3.54 The coils are to be connected to obtain a single-phase,
1000
400
V,
auto-transformer to drive a load of 10 kVA. Which of the options given should
nodi a
be exercised to realize the required auto-transformer ?
(A) Connect A and D; Common B
(B) Connect B and D; Common C
(C) Connect A and C; Common B
(D) Connect A and C; Common D
EE SP 3.55 In the autotransformer obtained in Question 16, the current in each coil is
(A) Coil-1 is 25 A and Coil-2 is 10 A
(B) Coil-1 is 10 A and Coil-2 is 25 A
(C) Coil-1 is 10 A and Coil-2 is 15 A
(D) Coil-1 is 15 A and Coil-2 is 10 A
YEAR 2008 ONE MARK
EE SP 3.56 Distributed winding and short chording employed in AC machines will result in
(A) increase in emf and reduction in harmonics
(B) reduction in emf and increase in harmonics
(C) increase in both emf and harmonics
(D) reduction in both emf and harmonics
EE SP 3.57 Three single-phase transformer are connected to form a 3-phase transformer
bank. The transformers are connected in the following manner :
The transformer connecting will be represented by
(A) Y d0 (B) Y d1
(C) Y d6 (D) Y d11
EE SP 3.58 In a stepper motor, the detent torque means
(A) minimum of the static torque with the phase winding excited
(B) maximum of the static torque with the phase winding excited
(C) minimum of the static torque with the phase winding unexcited
(D) maximum of the static torque with the phase winding unexcited
EE SP 3.59 It is desired to measure parameters of 230 V/115 V, 2 kVA,
single-phase transformer. The following wattmeters are available in a laboratory:
W
1
: 250 V, 10 A, Low Power Factor
W
2
W
3
: 150 V, 10 A, High Power Factor
W
4
nodi a
The Wattmeters used in open circuit test and short circuit test of the transformer
will respectively be
(A) W
1
and W
2
(B) W
2
and W
4
(C) W
1
and W
4
(D) W
2
and W
3
YEAR 2008 TWO MARKS
EE SP 3.60 A 230 V, 50 Hz, 4-pole, single-phase induction motor is rotating in the clockwise
(forward) direction at a speed of 1425 rpm. If the rotor resistance at standstill is
7.8 W, then the effective rotor resistance in the backward branch of the equivalent
circuit will be
(A) 2 W (B) 4 W
(C) 78 W (D) 156 W
EE SP 3.61 A 400 V, 50 Hz 30 hp, three-phase induction motor is drawing
50 A current at 0.8 power factor lagging. The stator and rotor copper losses are
1.5 kW and 900 W respectively. The friction and windage losses are 1050 W and
the core losses are 1200 W. The air-gap power of the motor will be
(A) 23.06 kW (B) 24.11 kW
(C) 25.01 kW (D) 26.21 kW
EE SP 3.62 The core of a two-winding transformer is subjected to a magnetic flux variation
as indicated in the figure.
The induced emf ( ) e
rs
in the secondary winding as a function of time will be of
the form
nodi a
A 3-phase, 440 V, 50 Hz, 4-pole slip ring induction motor is feed from the
rotor side through an auto-transformer and the stator is connected to a variable
resistance as shown in the figure.
The motor is coupled to a 220 V, separately excited d.c generator feeding power
to fixed resistance of 10 W. Two-wattmeter method is used to measure the
input power to induction motor. The variable resistance is adjusted such the
motor runs at 1410 rpm and the following readings were recorded 1800 W
1
= W,
200 W
2
=- W.
EE SP 3.63 The speed of rotation of stator magnetic field with respect to rotor structure will
be
(A) 90 rpm in the direction of rotation
(B) 90 rpm in the opposite direction of rotation
(C) 1500 rpm in the direction of rotation
(D) 1500 rpm in the opposite direction of rotation
EE SP 3.64 Neglecting all losses of both the machines, the dc generator power output and
the current through resistance ( ) R
ex
(A) 96 W, 3.10 A (B) 120 W, 3.46 A
(C) 1504 W, 12.26 A (D) 1880 W, 13.71 A
EE SP 3.65 A 400 V, 50 Hz, 4-pole, 1400 rpm, star connected squirrel cage induction motor
has the following parameters referred to the stator:
1.0 , ' 1.5 R X X
'
r s r
W W = = =
Neglect stator resistance and core and rotational losses of the motor. The motor
is controlled from a 3-phase voltage source inverter with constant / V f control.
The stator line-to-line voltage(rms) and frequency to obtain the maximum torque
at starting will be :
(A) 20.6 V, 2.7 Hz (B) 133.3 V, 16.7 Hz
(C) 266.6 V, 33.3 Hz (D) 323.3 V, 40.3 Hz
A 240 V, dc shunt motor draws 15 A while supplying the rated load at a speed
of 80 rad/s. The armature resistance is 0.5 W and the field winding resistance is
nodi a
80 W.
EE SP 3.66 The net voltage across the armature resistance at the time of plugging will be
(A) 6 V (B) 234 V
(C) 240 V (D) 474 V
EE SP 3.67 The external resistance to be added in the armature circuit to limit the armature
current to 125% of its rated value is
(A) 31.1 W (B) 31.9 W
(C) 15.1 W (D) 15.9 W
A synchronous motor is connected to an infinite bus at 1.0 pu voltage and
draws 0.6 pu current at unity power factor. Its synchronous reactance is 1.0 pu
resistance is negligible.
EE SP 3.68 The excitation voltage (E ) and load angle ( ) d will respectively be
(A) 0.8 pu and 36.86c lag (B) 0.8 pu and 36.86c lead
(C) 1.17 pu and 30.96c lead (D) 1.17 pu and 30.96c lag
EE SP 3.69 Keeping the excitation voltage same, the load on the motor is increased such
that the motor current increases by 20%. The operating power factor will become
(A) 0.995 lagging (B) 0.995 leading
(C) 0.791 lagging (D) 0.848 leading
YEAR 2007 ONE MARK
EE SP 3.70 In a transformer, zero voltage regulation at full load is
(A) not possible
(B) possible at unity power factor load
(C) possible at leading power factor load
(D) possible at lagging power factor load
EE SP 3.71 The dc motor, which can provide zero speed regulation at full load without any
controller is
(A) series (B) shunt
(C) cumulative compound (D) differential compound
EE SP 3.72 The electromagnetic torque T
e
of a drive and its connected load torque T
L
are
as shown below. Out of the operating points A, B, C and D, the stable ones are
nodi a
(A) A, C, D (B) B, C
(C) A, D (D) B, C, D
YEAR 2007 TWO MARKS
EE SP 3.73 A three-phase synchronous motor connected to ac mains is running at full load
and unity power factor. If its shaft load is reduced by half, with field current held
constant, its new power factor will be
(A) unity
(B) leading
(C) lagging
(D) dependent on machine parameters
EE SP 3.74 A 100 kVA, 415 V(line), star-connected synchronous machine
generates rated open circuit voltage of 415 V at a field current
of 15 A. The short circuit armature current at a field current of
10 A is equal to the rated armature current. The per unit saturated synchronous
reactance is
(A) 1.731 (B) 1.5
(C) 0.666 (D) 0.577
EE SP 3.75 A single-phase, 50 kVA, 250 V/500 V two winding transformer has an efficiency
of 95% at full load, unity power factor. If it is re-configured as a 500 V/750 V
auto-transformer, its efficiency at its new rated load at unity power factor will be
(A) 95.752% (B) 97.851%
(C) 98.276% (D) 99.241%
EE SP 3.76 A three-phase, three-stack, variable reluctance step motor has 20 poles on each
rotor and stator stack. The step angle of this step motor is
(A) 3c (B) 6c
(C) 9c (D) 8 1 c
EE SP 3.77 A three-phase squirrel cage induction motor has a starting torque of 150% and
a maximum torque of 300% with respect to rated torque at rated voltage and
nodi a
rated frequency. Neglect the stator resistance and rotational losses. The value of
slip for maximum torque is
(A) 13.48% (B) 16.42%
(C) 18.92% (D) 26.79%
Common Data for Question 78 to 80
A three phase squirrel cage induction motor has a starting current of seven times
the full load current and full load slip of 5%
EE SP 3.78 If an auto transformer is used for reduced voltage starting to provide 1.5 per unit
starting torque, the auto transformer ratio(%) should be
(A) 57.77 % (B) 72.56 %
(C) 78.25 % (D) 81.33 %
EE SP 3.79 If a star-delta starter is used to start this induction motor, the per unit starting
torque will be
(A) 0.607 (B) 0.816
(C) 1.225 (D) 1.616
EE SP 3.80 If a starting torque of 0.5 per unit is required then the per unit starting current
should be
(A) 4.65 (B) 3.75
(C) 3.16 (D) 2.13
YEAR 2006 ONE MARK
EE SP 3.81 In transformers, which of the following statements is valid ?
(A) In an open circuit test, copper losses are obtained while in short circuit
test, core losses are obtained
(B) In an open circuit test, current is drawn at high power factor
(C) In a short circuit test, current is drawn at zero power factor
(D) In an open circuit test, current is drawn at low power factor
EE SP 3.82 For a single phase capacitor start induction motor which of the following
statements is valid ?
(A) The capacitor is used for power factor improvement
(B) The direction of rotation can be changed by reversing the main winding
terminals
(C) The direction of rotation cannot be changed
(D) The direction of rotation can be changed by interchanging the supply
terminals
EE SP 3.83 In a DC machine, which of the following statements is true ?
(A) Compensating winding is used for neutralizing armature reaction while
interpole winding is used for producing residual flux
nodi a
(B) Compensating winding is used for neutralizing armature reaction while
interpole winding is used for improving commutation
(C) Compensating winding is used for improving commutation while interpole
winding is used for neutralizing armature reaction
(D) Compensation winding is used for improving commutation while interpole
winding is used for producing residual flux
YEAR 2006 TWO MARKS
EE SP 3.84 A 220 V DC machine supplies 20 A at 200 V as a generator. The armature
resistance is 0.2 ohm. If the machine is now operated as a motor at same terminal
voltage and current but with the flux increased by 10%, the ratio of motor speed
to generator speed is
(A) 0.87 (B) 0.95
(C) 0.96 (D) 1.06
EE SP 3.85 A synchronous generator is feeding a zero power factor (lagging) load at rated
current. The armature reaction is
(A) magnetizing
(B) demagnetizing
(C) cross-magnetizing
(D) ineffective
EE SP 3.86 Two transformers are to be operated in parallel such that they share load in
proportion to their kVA ratings. The rating of the first transformer is 500
kVA ratings. The rating of the first transformer is 500 kVA and its pu leakage
impedance is 0.05 pu. If the rating of second transformer is 250 kVA, its pu
leakage impedance is
(A) 0.20 (B) 0.10
(C) 0.05 (D) 0.025
EE SP 3.87 The speed of a 4-pole induction motor is controlled by varying the supply
frequency while maintaining the ratio of supply voltage to supply frequency (
/ V f ) constant. At rated frequency of 50 Hz and rated voltage of 400 V its speed
is 1440 rpm. Find the speed at 30 Hz, if the load torque is constant
(A) 882 rpm (B) 864 rpm
(C) 840 rpm (D) 828 rpm
EE SP 3.88 A 3-phase, 4-pole, 400 V 50 Hz , star connected induction motor has following
circuit parameters
1.0 , ' 0.5 , ' 1.2 , 35 r r X X X
m 1 2 1 2
W W W W = = = = =
The starting torque when the motor is started direct-on-line is (use approximate
equivalent circuit model)
(A) 63.6 Nm (B) 74.3 Nm
(C) 190.8 Nm (D) 222.9 Nm
nodi a
EE SP 3.89 A 3-phase, 10 kW, 400 V, 4-pole, 50Hz, star connected induction motor draws 20
A on full load. Its no load and blocked rotor test data are given below.
No Load Test : 400 V 6 A 1002 W
Blocked Rotor Test : 90 V 15 A 762 W
Neglecting copper loss in no load test and core loss in blocked rotor test, estimate
motors full load efficiency
(A) 76% (B) 81%
(C) 82.4% (D) 85%
EE SP 3.90 A 3-phase, 400 V, 5 kW, star connected synchronous motor having an internal
reactance of 10 W is operating at 50% load, unity p.f. Now, the excitation is
increased by 1%. What will be the new load in percent, if the power factor is to
be kept same ? Neglect all losses and consider linear magnetic circuit.
(A) 67.9% (B) 56.9%
(C) 51% (D) 50%
A 4-pole, 50 Hz, synchronous generator has 48 slots in which a
double layer winding is housed. Each coil has 10 turns and is short
pitched by an angle to 36c electrical. The fundamental flux per pole is
0.025 Wb
EE SP 3.91 The line-to-line induced emf(in volts), for a three phase star connection is
approximately
(A) 808 (B) 888
(C) 1400 (D) 1538
EE SP 3.92 The line-to-line induced emf(in volts), for a three phase connection is approximately
(A) 1143 (B) 1332
(C) 1617 (D) 1791
EE SP 3.93 The fifth harmonic component of phase emf(in volts), for a three phase star
connection is
(A) 0 (B) 269
(C) 281 (D) 808
A 300 kVA transformer has 95% efficiency at full load 0.8 p.f. lagging and 96%
efficiency at half load, unity p.f.
EE SP 3.94 The iron loss ( ) P
i
and copper loss ( ) P
c
in kW, under full load operation are
(A) . , . P P 4 12 8 51
c i
= = (B) . , . P P 6 59 9 21
c i
= =
(C) . , . P P 8 51 4 12
c i
= = (D) . , . P P 12 72 3 07
c i
= =
EE SP 3.95 What is the maximum efficiency (in %) at unity p.f. load ?
nodi a
(A) 95.1 (B) 96.2
(C) 96.4 (D) 98.1
YEAR 2005 ONE MARK
EE SP 3.96 The equivalent circuit of a transformer has leakage reactances , ' X X
1 2
and
magnetizing reactance X
M
. Their magnitudes satisfy
(A) ' X X X >> >>
M 1 2
(B) ' X X X << <<
M 1 2
(C) ' X X X >>
M 1 2
. (D) ' X X X <<
M 1 2
.
EE SP 3.97 Which three-phase connection can be used in a transformer to introduce a phase
difference of 30c between its output and corresponding input line voltages
(A) Star-Star (B) Star-Delta
(C) Delta-Delta (D) Delta-Zigzag
EE SP 3.98 On the torque/speed curve of the induction motor shown in the figure four points
of operation are marked as W, X, Y and Z. Which one of them represents the
operation at a slip greater than 1 ?
(A) W (B) X
(C) Y (D) Z
EE SP 3.99 For an induction motor, operation at a slip s, the ration of gross power output
to air gap power is equal to
(A) ( ) s 1
2
-
(B) ( ) s 1 -
(C) ( ) s 1 -
(D) ( ) s 1 -
YEAR 2005 TWO MARKS
EE SP 3.100 Two magnetic poles revolve around a stationary armature carrying two coil
( , ) c c c c
1 1 2 2
- - l l as shown in the figure. Consider the instant when the poles are
in a position as shown. Identify the correct statement regarding the polarity of
the induced emf at this instant in coil sides c
1
and c
2
.
nodi a
(A) c in
1
9 , no emf in c
2

(B) c in
1
7 , no emf in c
2
(C) c in
2
9 , no emf in c
1

(D) c in
2
7 , no emf in c
1
EE SP 3.101 A 50 kW dc shunt is loaded to draw rated armature current at any given speed.
When driven
(i) at half the rated speed by armature voltage control and
(ii) at 1.5 times the rated speed by field control, the respective output powers
delivered by the motor are approximately.
(A) 25 kW in (i) and 75 kW in (ii)
(B) 25 kW in (i) and 50 kW in (ii)
(C) 50 kW in (i) and 75 kW in (ii)
(D) 50 kW in (i) and 50 kW in (ii)
EE SP 3.102 In relation to the synchronous machines, which on of the following statements is
false ?
(A) In salient pole machines, the direct-axis synchronous reactance is greater
than the quadrature-axis synchronous reactance.
(B) The damper bars help the synchronous motor self start.
(C) Short circuit ratio is the ratio of the field current required to produces the
rated voltage on open circuit to the rated armature current.
(D) The V-cure of a synchronous motor represents the variation in the
armature current with field excitation, at a given output power.
EE SP 3.103 In relation to DC machines, match the following and choose the correct
combination
List-I List-II
Performance Variables Proportional to
P. Armature emf (E ) 1. Flux(f), speed ( ) w and armature current ( ) I
a
Q. Developed torque (T ) 2. f and w only
R Developed power (P ) 3. f and I
a
only
4. I
a
and w only
5. I
a
only
Codes:
P Q R
(A) 3 3 1
(B) 2 5 4
nodi a
(C) 3 5 4
(D) 2 3 1
EE SP 3.104 Under no load condition, if the applied voltage to an induction motor is reduced
from the rated voltage to half the rated value,
(A) the speed decreases and the stator current increases
(B) both the speed and the stator current decreases
(C) the speed and the stator current remain practically constant
(D) there is negligible change in the speed but the stator current decreases
EE SP 3.105 A three-phase cage induction motor is started by direct-on-line (DOL) switching
at the rated voltage. If the starting current drawn is 6 times the full load current,
and the full load slip is 4%, then ratio of the starting developed torque to the full
load torque is approximately equal to
(A) 0.24 (B) 1.44
(C) 2.40 (D) 6.00
EE SP 3.106 In a single phase induction motor driving a fan load, the reason for having a high
resistance rotor is to achieve
(A) low starting torque (B) quick acceleration
(C) high efficiency (D) reduced size
EE SP 3.107 Determine the correctness or otherwise of the following assertion[A] and the
reason[R]
Assertion [A] : Under / V f control of induction motor, the maximum value of
the developed torque remains constant over a wide range of speed in the sub-
synchronous region.
Reason [R] : The magnetic flux is maintained almost constant at the rated value
by keeping the ration / V f constant over the considered speed range.
(A) Both [A] and [R] are true and [R] is the correct reason for [A]
(B) Both [A] and [R] are true and but [R] is not the correct reason for [A]
(C) Both [A] and [R] are false
(D) [A] is true but [R] is false
A 1000 kVA, 6.6 kV, 3-phase star connected cylindrical pole synchronous
generator has a synchronous reactance of 20 W. Neglect the armature resistance
and consider operation at full load and unity power factor.
EE SP 3.108 The induced emf(line-to-line) is close to
(A) 5.5 kV (B) 7.2 kV
(C) 9.6 kV (D) 12.5 kV
EE SP 3.109 The power(or torque) angle is close to
(A) 13.9c (B) 18.3c
(C) 24.6c (D) 33.0c
nodi a
YEAR 2004 ONE MARK
EE SP 3.110 A 500 kVA, 3-phase transformer has iron losses of 300 W and full load copper
losses of 600 W. The percentage load at which the transformer is expected to
have maximum efficiency is
(A) 50.0% (B) 70.7%
(C) 141.4% (D) 200.0%
EE SP 3.111 For a given stepper motor, the following torque has the highest numerical value
(A) Detent torque (B) Pull-in torque
(C) Pull-out torque (D) Holding torque
EE SP 3.112 The following motor definitely has a permanent magnet rotor
(A) DC commutator motor
(B) Brushless dc motor
(C) Stepper motor
(D) Reluctance motor
EE SP 3.113 The type of single-phase induction motor having the highest power factor at full
load is
(A) shaded pole type (B) split-phase type
(C) capacitor-start type (D) capacitor-run type
EE SP 3.114 The direction of rotation of a 3-phase induction motor is clockwise when it
is supplied with 3-phase sinusoidal voltage having phase sequence A-B-C. For
counter clockwise rotation of the motor, the phase sequence of the power supply
should be
(A) B-C-A
(B) C-A-B
(C) A-C-B
(D) B-C-A or C-A-B
EE SP 3.115 For a linear electromagnetic circuit, the following statement is true
(A) Field energy is equal to the co-energy
(B) Field energy is greater than the co-energy
(C) Field energy is lesser than the co-energy
(D) Co-energy is zero
YEAR 2004 TWO MARKS
EE SP 3.116 The synchronous speed for the seventh space harmonic mmf wave of a 3-phase,
8-pole, 50 Hz induction machine is
(A) 107.14 rpm in forward direction
(B) 107.14 rpm in reverse direction
(C) 5250 rpm in forward direction
nodi a
(D) 5250 rpm in reverse direction
EE SP 3.117 A rotating electrical machine its self-inductances of both the stator and the rotor
windings, independent of the rotor position will be definitely not develop
(A) starting torque (B) synchronizing torque
(C) hysteresis torque (D) reluctance torque
EE SP 3.118 The armature resistance of a permanent magnet dc motor is 0.8 W. At no load,
the motor draws 1.5 A from a supply voltage of 25 V and runs at 1500 rpm.
The efficiency of the motor while it is operating on load at 1500 rpm drawing a
current of 3.5 A from the same source will be
(A) 48.0% (B) 57.1%
(C) 59.2% (D) 88.8%
EE SP 3.119 A 50 kVA, 3300/230 V single-phase transformer is connected as an auto-
transformer shown in figure. The nominal rating of the auto- transformer will be
(A) 50.0 kVA (B) 53.5 kVA
(C) 717.4 kVA (D) 767.4 kVA
EE SP 3.120 The resistance and reactance of a 100 kVA, 11000/400 V, Y 3- distribution
transformer are 0.02 and 0.07 pu respectively. The phase impedance of the
transformer referred to the primary is
(A) (0.02 0.07) j W +
(B) (0.55 1.925) j W +
(C) (15.125 52.94) j W +
(D) (72.6 254.1) j W +
EE SP 3.121 A single-phase, 230 V, 50 Hz 4-pole, capacitor-start induction motor had the
following stand-still impedances
Main winding 6.0 4.0 Z j
m
W = + , Auxiliary winding 8.0 6.0 Z j
a
W = +
The value of the starting capacitor required to produce 90c phase difference
between the currents in the main and auxiliary windings will be
(A) 176.84 F m (B) 187.24 F m
(C) 265.26 F m (D) 280.86 F m
EE SP 3.122 Two 3-phase, Y-connected alternators are to be paralleled to a set of common
busbars. The armature has a per phase synchronous reactance of 1.7 W and
negligible armature resistance. The line voltage of the first machine is adjusted
to 3300 V and that of the second machine is adjusted to 3200 V. The machine
voltages are in phase at the instant they are paralleled. Under this condition, the
nodi a
synchronizing current per phase will be
(A) 16.98 A (B) 29.41 A
(C) 33.96 A (D) 58.82 A
EE SP 3.123 A 400 V, 15 kW, 4-pole, 50Hz, Y-connected induction motor has full load slip of
4%. The output torque of the machine at full load is
(A) 1.66 Nm (B) 95.50 Nm
(C) 99.47 Nm (D) 624.73 Nm
EE SP 3.124 For a 1.8c, 2-phase bipolar stepper motor, the stepping rate is
100 steps/second. The rotational speed of the motor in rpm is
(A) 15 (B) 30
(C) 60 (D) 90
EE SP 3.125 A 8-pole, DC generator has a simplex wave-wound armature containing 32 coils
of 6 turns each. Its flux per pole is 0.06 Wb. The machine is running at 250 rpm.
The induced armature voltage is
(A) 96 V (B) 192 V
(C) 384 V (D) 768 V
EE SP 3.126 A 400 V, 50 kVA, 0.8 p.f. leading 3-connected, 50 Hz synchronous machine has
a synchronous reactance of 2 W and negligible armature resistance. The friction
and windage losses are 2 kW and the core loss is 0.8 kW. The shaft is supplying
9 kW load at a power factor of 0.8 leading. The line current drawn is
(A) 12.29 A (B) 16.24 A
(C) 21.29 A (D) 36.88 A
EE SP 3.127 A 500 MW, 3-phase, Y-connected synchronous generator has a rated voltage of
21.5 kV at 0.85 p.f. The line current when operating at full load rated conditions
will be
(A) 13.43 kA (B) 15.79 kA
(C) 23.25 kA (D) 27.36 kA
YEAR 2003 ONE MARK
EE SP 3.128 A simple phase transformer has a maximum efficiency of 90% at full load and
unity power factor. Efficiency at half load at the same power factor is
(A) 86.7% (B) 88.26%
(C) 88.9% (D) 87.8%
EE SP 3.129 Group-I lists different applications and Group-II lists the motors for these
applications. Match the application with the most suitable motor and choose the
right combination among the choices given thereafter
Group-I Group-II
nodi a
P. Food mixer 1. Permanent magnet dc motor
Q Cassette tape recorder 2. Single-phase induction motor
R. Domestic water pump 3. Universal motor
S. Escalator 4. Three-phase induction motor
5. DC series motor
6. Stepper motor
Codes:
P Q R S
(A) 3 6 4 5
(B) 1 3 2 4
(C) 3 1 2 4
(D) 3 2 1 4
EE SP 3.130 A stand alone engine driven synchronous generator is feeding a partly inductive
load. A capacitor is now connected across the load to completely nullify the
inductive current. For this operating condition.
(A) the field current and fuel input have to be reduced
(B) the field current and fuel input have to be increased
(C) the field current has to be increased and fuel input left unaltered
(D) the field current has to be reduced and fuel input left unaltered
EE SP 3.131 Curves X and Y in figure denote open circuit and full-load zero power factor(zpf)
characteristics of a synchronous generator. Q is a point on the zpf characteristics
at 1.0 p.u. voltage. The vertical distance PQ in figure gives the voltage drop
across
(A) Synchronous reactance (B) Magnetizing reactance
(C) Potier reactance (D) Leakage reactance
EE SP 3.132 No-load test on a 3-phase induction motor was conducted at different supply
voltage and a plot of input power versus voltage was drawn. This curve was
extrapolated to intersect the y-axis. The intersection point yields
(A) Core loss
(B) Stator copper loss
(C) Stray load loss
(D) Friction and windage loss
nodi a
YEAR 2003 TWO MARKS
EE SP 3.133 Figure shows an ideal single-phase transformer. The primary and secondary coils
are wound on the core as shown. Turns ratio / N N 2
1 2
= .The correct phasors of
voltages , E E
1 2
, currents , I I
1 2
and core flux F are as shown in
EE SP 3.134 To conduct load test on a dc shunt motor, it is coupled to a generator which
is identical to the motor. The field of the generator is also connected to the
same supply source as the motor. The armature of generator is connected to
a load resistance. The armature resistance is 0.02 p.u. Armature reaction and
mechanical losses can be neglected. With rated voltage across the motor, the
load resistance across the generator is adjusted to obtain rated armature current
in both motor and generator. The p.u value of this load resistance is
(A) 1.0
(B) 0.98
(C) 0.96
(D) 0.94
EE SP 3.135 Figure shows a Y 3- connected, 3-phase distribution transformer used to step
down the voltage from 11000 V to 415 V line-to-line. It has two switches S
1
and
S
2
. Under normal conditions S
1
is closed and S
2
is open. Under certain special
conditions S
1
is open and S
2
is closed. In such a case the magnitude of the
voltage across the LV terminals a and c is
nodi a
(A) 240 V (B) 480 V
(C) 415 V (D) 0 V
EE SP 3.136 Figure shows an ideal three-winding transformer. The three windings 1, 2, 3 of
the transformer are wound on the same core as shown. The turns ratio : : N N N
1 2 3
is
4: 2: 1. A resistor of 10 W is connected across winding-2. A capacitor of reactance
2.5 W is connected across winding-3. Winding-1 is connected across a 400 V, ac
supply. If the supply voltage phasor 400 0 V
1
+ =
%
, the supply current phasor I
1
is
given by
(A) ( 10 10) j - + A (B) ( 10 10) j - - A
(C) (10 10) j + A (D) (10 10) j - A
EE SP 3.137 Following are some of the properties of rotating electrical machines
P. Stator winding current is dc, rotor winding current is ac.
Q. Stator winding current is ac, rotor winding current is dc.
R. Stator winding current is ac, rotor winding current is ac.
S. Stator has salient poles and rotor has commutator.
T. Rotor has salient poles and sliprings and stator is cylindrical.
U. Both stator and rotor have poly-phase windings.
DC machines, Synchronous machines and Induction machines exhibit some of
the above properties as given in the following table.
Indicate the correct combination from this table
DC Machine Synchronous Machines Induction Machines
(A) P,S
(B) Q,U
(C) P,S
(D) R,S
Q,T
P,T
R,U
Q,U
R,U
R,S
Q,T
P,T
EE SP 3.138 When stator and rotor windings of a 2-pole rotating electrical machine are excited,
each would produce a sinusoidal mmf distribution in the airgap with peal values
F
s
and F
r
respectively. The rotor mmf lags stator mmf by a space angle d at any
instant as shown in figure. Thus, half of stator and rotor surfaces will form one
pole with the other half forming the second pole. Further, the direction of torque
nodi a
acting on the rotor can be clockwise or counter-clockwise.
The following table gives four set of statement as regards poles and torque. Select
the correct set corresponding to the mmf axes as shown in figure.
Stator Surface
ABC forms
Stator Surface
CDA forms
Rotor Surface
abc forms
Rotor surface
cda forms
Torque
is
(A) North Pole
(B) South Pole
(C) North Pole
(D) South Pole
South Pole
North Pole
South Pole
North Pole
North Pole
North Pole
South Pole
South Pole
South Pole
South Pole
North Pole
North Pole
Clockwise
Counter
Clockwise
Counter
Clockwise
Clockwise
EE SP 3.139 A 4-pole, 3-phase, double-layer winding is housed in a 36-slot stator for an ac
machine with 60c phase spread. Coil span is 7 short pitches. Number of slots in
which top and bottom layers belong to different phases is
(A) 24
(B) 18
(C) 12
(D) 0
EE SP 3.140 A 3-phase induction motor is driving a constant torque load at rated voltage
and frequency. If both voltage and frequency are halved, following statements
relate to the new condition if stator resistance, leakage reactance and core loss
are ignored
1. The difference between synchronous speed and actual speed remains same
2. The airgap flux remains same
3. The stator current remains same
4. The p.u. slip remains same
Among the above, current statements are
(A) All
(B) 1, 2 and 3
(C) 2, 3 and 4
(D) 1 and 4
EE SP 3.141 A single-phase induction motor with only the main winding excited would exhibit
the following response at synchronous speed
nodi a
(A) Rotor current is zero
(B) Rotor current is non-zero and is at slip frequency
(C) Forward and backward rotaling fields are equal
(D) Forward rotating field is more than the backward rotating field
EE SP 3.142 A dc series motor driving and electric train faces a constant power load. It is
running at rated speed and rated voltage. If the speed has to be brought down to
0.25 p.u. the supply voltage has to be approximately brought down to
(A) 0.75 p.u (B) 0.5 p.u
(C) 0.25 p.u (D) 0.125 p.u
***********
nodi a
SOLUTI ON
SOL 3.1 Correct answer is 3.33 Hz.
For the given induction motor, we have
P 8 = , Hz f 50 = , rpm N 700
r
=
So, we obtain
N
s
rpm
P
f 120
8
120 50
750
#
= = =
Therefore, the slip
s
N
N N
750
750 700
s
s r
=
-
=
-

15
1
=
Thus, the frequency of rotor current of the motor is obtained as
Frequency of rotor current s f
#
=
. Hz
15
1
50 3 33
#
= =
EMF equation of Transformer is given by
E f N 2 p f =
where f is the flux density, given as
f B A
#
=
Now, the given radius is reduced by half, i.e.
r / r 2 "
So, the area will be reduced by 1/4, i.e.
A / A 4 "
To maintain no load current constant [in turn emf ( ) E to be constant], number
of turn should be increased by 4 times.
SOL 3.3 Correct answer is . 15 06 W .
For the open circuit test, we have line-to-line voltage at . A I 2 3
f
= as
V
ocL L -
V 400 =
So, the open circuit phase voltage is obtained as
V
ocPh
V
3
400
. A I 2 3 g
=
=
Again, for short circuit test, we have phase rms current at . A I 1 5
f
= as
I
scPh

A 10
. A I 1 5 g
=
=
Since I
sc
and I
f
are linearly related, so we get the short circuit phase current at
. A I 2 3
f
= as

sc
I
Ph
l
.
. A
1 5
10
2 3
3
46
. A I 2 3 g
#
= =
=
Thus, per phase synchronous impedance is
Z
ph

sc
I
V
. A
oc
I 2 3
Ph
Ph
g
=
=
l

/
/
.
46 3
400 3
46
400 3
15 06
#
W = = =
nodi a
For V V 230 = and Hz f 50 = , we have
Core loss W 1050 =
or Iron loss + Hysteresis loss W 1050 = ...(i)
Since, iron loss and hysteresis loss are given by
Iron loss P k V
i i
2
= =
and Hysteresis loss P K V f
. .
H H
1 6 0 6
= =
-
Substituting it in equation (i), we get
K K 230
50
230
.
.
i H
2
0 6
1 6
+ ^
^
^
h
h
h
1050 =
or . K K 52900 574 62
i H
+ ^ ^ h h 1050 = ...(ii)
Again, for V V 138 = and Hz f 30 = , we have
Core loss W 500 =
or Iron loss + Hysteresis loss W 500 =
or K K 138
30
138
.
.
P H
2
0 6
1 6
+ ^
^
^
h
h
h
500 =
or . K K 19044 344 77
P H
+ ^ ^ h h 500 = ...(ii)
Solving equations (i) and (ii), we get
K
P
. 0 01024 =
and K
H
. 0 855 =
For 230 V, 50 Hz; we have
Hysteresis loss K V f
. .
H
1 6 0 6
=
-
. 0 855 230 50
. . 1 6 0 6
# #
=
-
^ ^ h h
. W 508 53 =
Hence, the eddy loss is
Eddy loss K
I V
2
= . 0 01024 52900
#
=
. W 541 69 =
SOL 3.5 Correct answer is 1241. rpm.
For the given data, we draw the circuit as
So, the current through field resistance is
I
f
A
R
V
230
230
1
f
= = =
Hence, we have the armature current,
I
a
I I
f
= - A 5 1 4 = - =
nodi a
From the given circuit, we have
V E I R
f a s 1 #
= +
or 230 . E 4 0 4
f1 #
= +
or E
f1
. V 228 4 =
At full load, I A 70 =
So, I
a
A 70 1 69 = - =
and E
f 2
. 230 69 0 4
#
= - . V 202 4 =
as emf flux speed \
#
For DC shunt motor flux f ^ h is constant. So,
E
f
\w
or
E
E
f
f
2
1

2
1
w
w
=
or
.
.
202 4
228 4

1400
2
w
=
Thus,
2
w
.
.
. rpm
228 4
202 4
1400 1241 1
#
= =
For the induction motor, we have
T
f
(Full load torque)
R s X
s R
f
f
2
2
2
2
2
\
+
^ h
or max torque T
max
m
^ h

X 2
1
2
\
So, we get
T
T
max
f

R s X
s R X 2
f
f
2
2
2
2
2 2
=
+^ h
or
T
T
max
f

s
s
s
s
2
max
max f
f
=
+
...(i)
Now, the slip at full load is % 3 , i.e.
s
f
. 0 003 =
and s
max

.
.
.
X
R
0 92
0 1
0 108
2
2
= = =
Substituting these values in equation (i), we get

T
T
max
f

.
.
.
.
0 03
0 108
0 108
0 03
2
=
+
or
T
T
max
f

. .
2
3 623 0 276
=
+
or
T
T
max
f
. 1 948 =
i.e. the ratio of maximum torque to full load torque is . 1 948.
nodi a
Referring to secondary side
V
Th

N
N
V
s
1
2
=
b l
V
Th
sin sin t t
1
2
2 w w = = ^ ^ h h
R
Th
R
1
2
P
2
=
b l
R
1
2
4 1 4
P
2
#
W = = =
b l
From the given information for the two winding transformer, we have
V
1
V 1000 = , V V 100
2
= , kVA S 50
0
=
So, I
1
A 50 = , A I 500
2
=
For the autotransformer as shown in figure
V
i
V V 1000
1
= =
V
o
V V V 1000 100 1100
1 2
= + = + =
Rating of auto transformer
S
a 0
V I
a 0 2 #
= I I
a 2 2
= ^ h
kVA 1100 500 550
#
= =
nodi a
As the load decreases, the speed increases. Relative speed between stator rmf
and rotor speed reduced which decrease the slip consequently emf induced in the
rotor and current decreases. Hence frequency decreases.
So , f f
1 2
Hz 50 <
but f
2
f >
1
Let complex power (kVA) is given as
S P jQ = +
P " Real power W ^ h
Q " Reactive Power VR ^ h
Real power P cos S q =
Reactive power Q sin S q =
or Q
cos
sin tan
P
P
q
q q = =
Initially when the real power is MW 12 and power factor is 0.6, the reactive
power is
Q
1
tan P
1 1
q =
. tan 12 53 13c = ^ h . . cos 0 6 53 13
1
c q = =
-
^ h
MVR 12
3
4
16
#
= =
Now, when capacitor is added, improved power factor angle
Q
2
. . cos 0 80 36 86
1
c = =
-
^ h
Total reactive power after adding capacitor
Q
2
tan P
1 2
q = (P
1
is same)
Q
2
. tan 12 36 86
#
c = ^ h
MAR 12
4
3
9
#
= =
From the power triangle (before and after capacitor is added)
Reactive power delivered by capacitor
Q
C
Q Q
1 2
= -
MVR 16 9 7 = - =
nodi a

f
V
= Constant
At low frequency the stator plan decrease from its rated value as at low frequency
will increase the flux density which results in saturation of stator are therefore
stator flux decreases.
SOL 3.12 Correct answer is 1.27 .
When the machine is running as a generator
Field current I
sn
A
120
250
2 = =
Load current I
L
A 50 =
Armature current I
a
A I I 50 2 52
L sn
= + = + =
Induced Emf E
g
. . V 250 52 0 6 281 2 = + = ^ h
When the machine is running as a motor
Field current
sn
I l A
125
250
2 = =
Load current
L
I l A 50 =
Armature current
a
I l
L sn
A I I 50 2 48 = - = - = l l
Induced Emf E
m
. . V 250 48 0 6 221 2 = - = ^ h
For DC machine, f is constant, so

E
N
g
g

E
N
m
m
=
Speed Ratio
N
N
m
g

.
.
.
E
E
221 2
281 2
1 27
m
g
= = =
Given that Rotor winding is open circuit and rotor is rotating anti-clockwise,
therefore
Slip s
N
N N
s
s r
=
+
or f
1
f f f f
s r r
= + = +
So frequency of voltage across slip rings is Hz f f
r
+ ^ h .
At the same time, frequency of voltage across commutator brushes is same as
rotor frequency
f
2
f =
For single phase winding
no. of coils in the phase
n
20 1
180
9
#
= =
The slop span in electric degree
r
. / no of slots per pole
180
180 20
180
20c = = =
Distribution factor k
d1

/
/
sin
sin
n r
nr
2
2
=
^
^
h
h

/
/
.
sin
sin
9 20 2
9 20 2
0 6398
#
#
= =
^
^
h
h
No. of turns, N
1
.
.
no of slots
no of conductors
2
#
=
2
180 6
540
#
= =
nodi a
Now for three phase winding
Slot span r 20c =
No. of coils in a phase group
n
20 3
180
3
#
= =
Distribution factor k
d2

/
/
sin
sin
n r
nr
2
2
=
^
^
h
h

/
/
.
sin
sin
3 20 2
3 20 2
0 9597
#
#
= =
^
^
h
h
no. of turns, N
2
.
.
.
no of slots
no of conductor
no of phase 2
1
# #
=
180
2
6
3
1
# #
=
180 =
The rms value of generator voltage
For single, phase, V
1
. k fN 4 44
d1 1
f =
For three phase, V
2
. k fN 4 44
d2 2
f =

V
V
2
1

k N
k N
d
d
2 2
1 1
#
#
=
.
.
0 9597 180
0 6398 540
#
#
=
2 -
Hysteris loss in transformer
P
h
k fB
max n
n
=
Where, the k
n
is the proportionality constant dependent on the characteristics
and volume of material, n is known as steinmetz exponents.
B
max

f
V
\
Change in voltage and frequency is same, so B
max
is constant.
So, P
h
f \
Change in voltage and frequency is same, so B
max
is constant.
So, P
h
f \
Therefore percentage change in hysteris loss will be same as that of change in
frequency
P
h
T % f 10 T = =
Eddy current loss is given by
P
e
k B f
max e
2
d = ^ h
Where
d = lamination thickness
B
max
= maximum flux density
f = frequency
k
e
= Proportionality constant
Again, B
max

f
V
\ (Constant)
So, P
e
f
2
\

P
P
e
e
2
1

f
f
2
2
1
2
=

f
f
2
1

. . f f
f
0 1 1 1
1
=
+
=
nodi a
So
P
P
e
e
2
1

. 1 1
1
2
=
b l
or P
e2
. P 1 1
e
2
1
=^ h
. P 1 21
e1
=
Now, percentage change in eddy current loss
P
e
T
P
P P
100
e
e e
1
2 1
#
=
-

.
1
1 21 1
100
#
=
-
% 21 =
After sudden change of the load in three phase synchronous machine, the rotor
has to search or hunt for its new equilibrium position. It causes the hunting,
which can be damped by rotor copper losses.
SOL 3.17 Correct answer is (C).
If the switch operates correctly, then the torque-speed characteristic is
But, the switch does not operate due to malfunctioning. So, there will be no
discontinuity in the characteristic curve. Thus, we have the modified characteristic
curve of the motor as
SOL 3.18 Correct answer is 12.55 N-m.
A dc motor circuit is shown below.
nodi a
Given
No load speed, N rpm 1400 =
Armature current, I
a
A 8 =
Excitation voltage, V V 230 =
So, we obtain the torque of the motor as
t
V I
N
V I
a a
60
2
#
w
= =
p

1400
230 8
60
2
#
#
=
p
. 9 55
1400
230 8
#
#
=
. N m 12 55
-
=
Since, increase in torque accelerates the motor, so the slope of torque speed
characteristic should be negative to restore the speed to original value, which in
turn makes the system stable.
Thus, for stable operating point, the slope of torque-speed characteristic should
be negative.
Hence, the points P and S are stable operating points.
Since, we know that
P
C
P f P f
H e
2
= + ...(i)
where P
C
= total core losses of the transformer
f = frequency
P
H
= Hysteresis losses constant
P
e
= eddy current losses constant
Now, we have the plot of core loss/frequency versus frequency as
So, we rewrite equation (i) as

f
P
C
P P f
H e
= + ...(ii)
i.e. the plot between / P f
C
and f is a straight line. From the graph, we have the
values of P
H
and P
e
as
nodi a
P
H
10 = ; P
10
1
e
=
From equation (i), we have the hysteresis and eddy current losses as
P
e
P f P f
Hysteresis loss Eddy current loss
H e
2
= +
S S
Thus, we get P f
H
W 10 25 250
#
= =
P f
e
2
. W
10
1
25 62 5
2
#
= = ^ h
SOL 3.21 Correct answer is 33.47.
For the non-salient synchronous generator, we have
Synchronous reactance, X
S
. . . p u 0 8 =
Supplied power, P . . p u 1 =
Power, factor, cos f 1 =
Terminal voltage, V
t
. . . p u 1 1 =
Since, power factor is unity, so phase angle of armature current is also zero. So,
we get
I
a

( . )( ) . cos V
P
1 1 1
1
1 1
1
t
f
= = =
or I
a

. 1 1
1
0 < c =
Again, we define the armature current as
I
a

jX
E V 0
S
f t
+ + d
=
-
So, E
f
+d ( ) I jX V 0 <
a S t
= +

.
( . ) . j
1 1 0
1
0 8 1 1 0
+
+ = +

.
. .
1 1 0
1
0 8 90 1 1 0 c
+
+ + = +
.
.
.
1 1 0
1 1
0 8
90c + + = +
or cos sin E jE
f f
d d + .
.
.
j 1 1
1 1
0 8
= + ...(i)
Now, we have the power equation
P sin
X
E V
S
f t
d =
1
.
( . )
sin
E
0 8
1 1
f
d =
sin E
f
d
.
.
1 1
0 8
= ...(ii)
So, from equation (i), we get
cos E
f
d . 1 1 = ...(iii)
Dividing equation (ii) by equation (iii), we get

cos
sin
E
E
f
f
d
d

. .
.
1 1 1 1
0 8
#
=
tand
.
.
1 21
0 8
=
d
.
.
. tan
1 21
0 8
33 47
1
c = =
-
b l
SOL 3.22 Correct answer is 880 rpm.
At no load, we have
nodi a
Armature resistance, r
a
. 0 5 W =
Armature current, I
a
A 2 =
Leakage inductance, L . H 0 01 =
So, we draw the circuit as
Since, we have 300 V dc shunt motor, so we obtain
E
( ) no load 1
V I R
a a
= -
or E
1
. 300 2 0 5 = - ^ h
V 300 1 299 = - =
Again, when the load is applied, we have
Armature resistance, r
a
. 0 5 W =
Armature current, I
a
A 15 =
So, we draw the circuit as
Therefore, we obtain
E
( ) load 2
V I R
a a
= -
or E
2
. 300 15 0 5
#
= -
. . 300 7 5 292 5 = - =
Since, we know that
E N \
So,
E
E
2
1

N
N
2
1
=
or
. 292 5
299

N
900
2
= (given rpm N 900
1
= )
or N
2
rpm 880 =
SOL 3.23 Correct answer is 23.618 ohm.
We have the transformer circuit,
nodi a
Given the power absorbed by load; kW W P 4 4000
2
= = .
and the power factor is . cos lagging 0 89
2
f =
From the given circuit, voltage across load is V V 110
2
=
So, the current through the load is
I
2

cos V
P
2 2
2
2
+
f
f = -

.
. cos
110 0 89
4000
0 89
1
#
+ = -
-
. . 40 858 27 13c + = -
This is the current through secondary winding of transformer. So, the current
through primary winding is given by

I
I
2
1
N
N
1
2
=
where N
1
= number of turns in primary winding
N
2
= Number of turns in secondary winding.

N
N
2
1

1
2
=
So,
I
I
2
1

2
1
=
Therefore, I
1

. . I
2 2
40 858 27 13
2
c +
= =
-
. . 20 43 27 13c + =
Since, it is required to improve the input power factor to unity. So, the input
current should be red. Therefore, the imaginary part of I
1
should pass through
reactance X . Thus, current through X is
I
X
{ } I I
m 1
=
. ( . ) sin 20 43 27 13c =
. 9 31 =
Hence, the reactance is
X
. I
220
9 31
220
X
= =
. 23 618 W =
For long transmission lines (over 200 km), parameters of a line are not lumped
but distributed uniformally throughout its length. The ABCD parameter of
equivalent p circuit are given as

A
C
B
D
> H
YZ
Y
YZ
Z
YZ
YZ
2
1
1
6
1
6
1
2
=
+
+
+
+ b
b
l
l
R
T
S
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
W
...(i)
The p -equivalent circuit
nodi a
ABCD parameter of above circuit

A
C
B
D
> H
Y Z
Y Y Y Y Z
Z
Y Z
1
1
2
1 2 1 2 1
=
+
+ + +
l
> H ...(ii)
comparing equation (i) and (ii), we get
Zl B Z
YZ
1
6
= =
+
b l
where Z zl = = total series impedance/phase
Y yl = = total shunt admittance/phase
So, . Z j j 0 5 400 200
#
W = =
Y j j 5 10 400 2 10
6 3
# # #
W = =
- -
So, Zl ( . ) j
j j
j 200 1
6
2 20 200
200 0 066
3
# #
= + = -
-
c m
. . j j 200 0 934 186 8
#
W = =
| | Zl . 186 8 W =
Primary leakage reactance
L
l1
( ) L M 2 45 2 20
1
= - = - mH 5 =
Self inductance of secondary winding refers to primary side

2
Ll
N
N
L
V
V
L
2
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
= = b b l l

110
220
30
2
#
=b l
So,
2
Ll mH 120 =
Leakage inductance of secondary referred to primary side
L
l2

2
L M 2 = - l
( ) mH 120 2 20 80 = - =
Magnetizing inductance, ( ) mm L M 2 2 20 40
m
= = =
Leakage flux in an induction motor is flux that linked the stator winding or the
rotor winding but not both.
The angle d in the swing equation of a synchronous generator is the angular
displacement of an axis fixed to the rotor with respect to a synchronously rotating
axis.
Since, the no-load loss (when load is not connected) is 64 W. So, the open
circuit loss is
W
0
6 watt = (no load)
As the % 90 of rated current flows in its both LV and HV windings, the lost is
nodi a
measured as
copper loss at % 90 load 81 watt =
or, % W at 90
cu^ h 81 watt =
Now, we have the copper loss for x load as
W x
cu^ h at full load W
I
I
cu
FL
x
2
#
= ^ c h m
or, at full load W
cu^ h % at load W x
I
I
cu
x
FL
2
#
= ^ c h m

.
81
0 9
1
2
#
=^
^
h
h
100 watt =
For maximum efficiency we must have
copper lossed = no-load loss
64 watt =
Consider at % x load copper loss is 64 watt. So,
at full load x W
cu
2
^ ^ h h 64 =
or, x .
100
64
0 8 = =
or x % 80 = load
Given,
frequency of source, f 50 Hz =
no. of poles P 4 =
rotating speed N 1440 rpm =
Now, the synchronous speed is determined as
N
S

P
f 120
=
1500 rpm
4
120
50 = = ^ h
So, the slip in the motor is
S
N
N N
S
S
=
-
.
1500
1500 1440
0 04 =
-
=
Now, the electrical frequency of the induced negative sequence current in rotor
is obtained as
f
0
f 2 5 = - ^ h
where f is stator frequency given as f 50 Hz = .
Therefore, f
0
. 50 98 Hz 2 0 04 = - = ^ h
For the given transformer, we have

V
V
WX

.
1
1 25
=
nodi a
Since,
V
V
YZ
. 0 8 = (attenuation factor)
So,
V
V
WX
YZ
. . 0 8 1 25 1 = = ^ ^ h h
or, V
YZ
V
WX
=
at V
WX1
100 V = ;
V
V
100
100
WX
YZ
1
1
=
at V
WZ2
100 V = ;
V
V
100
100
YZ
WX
2
2
=
Slip is given as S
n
n n
s
s
=
-
where, n
s
= synchronous speed
n = rotor speed
Thus, slip depend on synchronous speed and the rotor speed. Also, torque
increases with increasing slip up to a maximum value and then decreases. Slip
does not depend on core/loss component.
E n \ f
where n " speed, " f flux and E " back emf
Given that, V
t
250 V = , 0.25 R
a
W =
n
1
100 rpm 0 = , 68 A I
L1
= , 2.2 A I
F1
=
Armature current, I
a1
68 2.2 65.8 A I I
L F 1 1
= - = - =
E
1
, V I R
t a a
= -
( . )( . ) 250 65 8 0 25 = - 203.55 V =
Now, n
2
1600 rpm = , 52.8 A I
L2
= , 1.8 A I
F 2
=
Armature current, I
a2
I I
L F 2 2
= - . . 52 8 1 8 = - 51 A =
E
2
V I R
t a a 2
= -
( )( . ) 220 51 0 25 = - 207.25 V =

E
E
2
1

n
n
2
1
2
1
f
f
=
a c k m

.
.
207 45
203 55

1600
1000
2
1
f
f
=
b c l m

2
f . 0 6369
1
f =
% reduce in flux 100
1
1 2
#
f
f f
=
-

.
100
0 6369
1
1 1
f
f f
#
=
-
nodi a
. % 36 3 -
Given that magnetizing current and losses are to be neglected. Locked rotor line
current.
I
2

Z
E
R X
E
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
= =
+
( ) R 0
2
=
I
2

X
E
2
2
=
L
E
2
2
w
=
f
E
2
\
So
I
50
2
l

236
230
50
57
=
b b l l
I
2
l 45.0 A =
Since the core length of the second transformer is 2 times of the first, so the
core area of the second transformer is twice of the first.
Let subscript 1 is used for first transformer and 2 is used for second transform.
Area a
2
a 2
1
=
Length l
2
l 2
1
=
Magnetizing inductance, L
l
N a
2
m
=
N = no. of turns
m = length of flux path
a = cross section area
l = length
L
l
a
\ N and m are same for both the
transformer

L
L
2
1

a
a
l
l
2
1
1
2
: =

L
L
2
1

a
a
l
l
2
2
1
1
1
1
: =
L
2
L 2
1
=
Thus, magnetizing reactance of second transformer is 2 times of first.
Magnetizing current X
m2
X 2
m1
=
I
m

X
V
m
=

I
I
m
m
2
1

V
V
X
X
m
m
2
1
1
2
: =
V
V
X
X
2
2
m
m
1
1
1
1
=
b
c
l
m
( ) V V 2
2 1
=
I
m2
I 2
m1
=
Thus, magnetizing current of second transformer
I
m2
0.5 0.707 A 2
#
= =
Since voltage of second transformer is twice that of first and current is 2 times
that of first, so power will be 2 2 times of first transformer.
P
2
2 55 155.6 W 2
#
= =
The armature current of DC shunt motor
nodi a
I
a

R
V E
a
b
=
-
at the time of starting, E 0
b
= . If the full supply voltage is applied to the motor,
it will draw a large current due to low armature resistance.
A variable resistance should be connected in series with the armature resistance
to limit the starting current.
A 4-point starter is used to start and control speed of a dc shut motor.
The Back emf will go to zero when field is reduced, so Current input will be
increased. But when Field increases (though in reverse direction) the back emf
will cause the current to reduce.
An air-core transformer has linear B-H characteristics, which implies that
magnetizing current characteristic will be perfectly sinusoidal.
Initially E
b1
V I R
a a
= - 220 1 10 210 V
#
= - =
Now the flux is reduced by 10% keeping the torque to be constant, so the current
will be
I
a 1 1
f I
a 2 2
f =
I
a2
I
1
a
2
1
f
f
= 10
.
11.11
0 9
1
A
#
= = 0.9
2 1
`f f =
E
b
N \ f
&
E
E
b
b
1
2
0.9
N
N
1 1
2 2
f
f
= = N N
1 2
=
E
b2
0.9 0.9 2 0 E 1
b1
#
= = 189 V =
Now adding a series resistor R in the armature resistor, we have
E
b2
( ) V I R R
a a 2
= - +
189 . ( ) R 220 11 11 1 = - +
R 1.79 W =
SOL 3.38 Option ( ) is correct.
The steady state speed of magnetic field
n
s
1000 rpm
6
120 50
#
= =
Speed of rotor n
r
(1 ) S n
s
= - . S 0 05 =
0.95 1000 950 rpm
#
= =
In the steady state both the rotor and stator magnetic fields rotate in synchronism
, so the speed of rotor field with respect to stator field would be zero.
Speed of rotor which respect to stator field
n n
r s
= - 50 rpm 950 1000 = - =-
None of the option matches the correct answer.
Given
nodi a
I
0
1 amp = (magnetizing current)
Primary current I
P
? =
I
2
1 A =
I
2
l secondary current reffered to Primary =
1 2
1
2
amp
#
= =
I
P
i i
0
2
2
2
= +
1 4 = + 5 = 2.24 Amp =
Synchronize speed of induction machine
N
s
1500
P
f 120
4
120 50
rpm
#
= = =
Speed of machine 1600 rpm =
Actual speed of induction machine =
slip .066
1500
1500 1600
15
1
0 =
-
=
-
=- (negative)
Hence induction machine acts as induction generator and dc machine as dc
motor.
T 2.5 Nm = at 1400 rpm
than V ? =
T
E I
b b
~
=
. 2 5
. I
2 1400
186 6 60
a
#
# #
p
=
I
a
1.963 A =
V E I R
b a a
= +
. . . 186 6 1 963 3 4
#
= + 193.34 V =
Given no-load speed N
1
1500 = rpm
V
a
200 T N V, 5 Nm, 1400 rpm = = =
emf at no load
nodi a
E
b1
200 V V
a
= =
N E
b
\
N
N
E
E
b
b
2
1
2
1
& =
E
b2
200 186.67
N
N
E
1500
1400
V
1
2
b1
#
= = =
b l
T /
.
5 E I I
2 1400
186 67 60
b a a
&
#
#
w
p
= =
^ h
I
a
3.926 A =
V E I R
b a a
= +
R
a

.
.
3.4
I
V E
3 926
200 186 67
a
a b
W =
-
=
-
=
Given field excitation of 20 A =
Armature current 400 A =
Short circuit and terminal voltage 200 V =
On open circuit, load current 200 A =
So, Internal resistance 5
400
2000
W = =
Internal vol. drop 5 200
#
=
1000 V =
Given single-phase iron core transformer has both the vertical arms of cross
section area 20 cm
2
, and both the horizontal arms of cross section are 10 cm
2
So, Inductance
NBA
1
= (proportional to cross section area)
When cross section became half, inductance became half.
Given 3-phase squirrel cage induction motor.
At point A if speed -, Torque -
speed ., Torque .
So A is stable.
At point B if speed - Load torque .
So B is un-stable.
nodi a
Peak voltage across A and B with S open is
V ( ) m
dt
di
m slope of I t
#
= = -
10
400
5 10
10 800 3
3
# #
#
p p
= =
-
- : D
V
Wave form V
A B l l
When both S1 and S2 open, star connection consists 3
rd
harmonics in line current
due to hysteresis A saturation.
Since S2 closed and S1 open, so it will be open delta connection and output will
be sinusoidal at fundamental frequency.
N
1
4000 =
N
2
6000 =
I 25 A =
V 400 V = , 50 f Hz =
Coil are to be connected to obtain a single Phase,
1000
400
V auto transfer to drive
Load 10 kVA. Connected A & D common B
nodi a
Given 3-phase, 400 V, 5 kW, Star connected synchronous motor.
Internal Resistance 10 W =
Operating at 50% Load, unity p.f. So
kVA rating 25 400
#
= 1000 =
Internal Resistance 10 W =
So
kVA rating 1000 10
#
= 10000 kVA =
Distributed winding and short chording employed in AC machine will result in
reduction of emf and harmonics.
Transformer connection will be represented by Y d1.
Detent torque/Restraining toque:
The residual magnetism in the permanent magnetic material produced.
The detent torque is defined as the maximum load torque that can be applied
to the shaft of an unexcited motor without causing continuous rotation. In case
the motor is unexcited.
Given: 1-f transformer, 230 V/115 V, 2 kVA
W
1
W
2
W
3
W
4
In one circuit test the wattmeter W
2
is used and in short circuit test of transformer
W
3
is used.
Given: 230 V, 50 Hz, 4-Pole, 1-f induction motor is rotating in
clock-wise(forward) direction
N
s
1425 = rpm
Rotar resistance at stand still(R
2
) . 7 8 W =
So
N
s

4
120 50
1500
#
= =
Slip(S) .
1500
1500 1425
0 05 =
-
=
Resistance in backward branch r
b

S
R
2
2
=
-

.
.
2 0 05
7 8
=
-
4 W =
Given: a 400 V, 50 Hz, 30 hp, 3-f induction motor
Current 50 A = at 0.8 p.f. lagging
nodi a
Stator and rotor copper losses are 1.5 kW and 900 W
fraction and windage losses 1050 W =
Core losses 1200 W 1.2 kW
=
=
So,
Input power in stator . 3 400 50 0 8
# # #
=
27.71 kW =
Air gap power . . . 27 71 1 5 1 2 = - -
25.01 kW =
Induced emf in secondary N
dt
d
2
f
=-
During t 0 1 < < - , E
1
( ) 12
dt
d
100 V
f
=- =-
E
1
and E
2
are in opposition
E
2
2 24 E V
1
= =
During time t 1 2 < < ,
dt
df
0 = , then E E 0
1 2
= =
During . t 2 2 5 < < , E
1
(100) 24
dt
d
V
f
=- =-
Then E
2
0 48 V =- -
Given 3-f, 440 V, 50 Hz, 4-Pole slip ring motor
Motor is coupled to 220 V
N 1410 , 1800 , 200 W W rpm W W
1 2
= = =
So, N
s

P
f 120
= 1500
4
120 50
rpm
#
= =
Relative speed 1500 1410 = -
90 rpm = in the direction of rotation.
Neglecting losses of both machines
Slip(S)
N
N N
s
s
=
-

1500
1500 1410
=
-
. 0 06 =
total power input to induction motor is
P
in
1800 200 = - 1600 W =
Output power of induction motor
P
out
(1 ) S P
in
= - ( . ) 1 0 06 1600 = - 1504 W =
Losses are neglected so dc generator input power output power =
1504 W =
So, I R
2
1504 =
I 12.26
10
1504
A = =
Given 400 V, 50 Hz, 4-Pole, 1400 rpm star connected squirrel cage induction
nodi a
motor.
R 1.00 , 1.5 X X
s r
W W = = = l
So, for max. torque slip S
m

X X
R
sm rm
r
=
+ l
l
For starting torque S 1
m
=
Then X X
sm rm
+ l R
r
= l
. f L f L 2 0 2
m s m r
p p + l 1 =
Frequency at max. torque
f
m

2 ( ) L L
1
s r
p
=
+ l
L
s

. X
2 50 2 50
1 5
s
# #
p p
= =
L
r
l
.
2 50
1 5
#
p
=
f
m

. .
50
1 5
50
1 5
1
=
+

3
50
= 16.7 Hz =
In const / V f control method

f
V
1
1

50
400
8 = =

f
V
1
2
8 =
So V
2
f 8
2 #
=
. 16 7 8
#
= 133.3 V =
Given: 240 V V = , dc shunt motor
I 15 A =
Rated load at a speed 80 rad/s =
Armature Resistance . 0 5 W =
Field winding Resistance 80 W =
So, E 240 12 0.5
#
= - 234 =
V
plugging
V E = + 240 234 = + 474 V =
External Resistance to be added in the armature circuit to limit the armature
current to 125%.
So I
a
.
R R
12 1 25
474
a external
#
= =
+
R R
a external
+ . 31 6 =
R
external
. 31 1 W =
A synchronous motor is connected to an infinite bus at 1.0 p.u. voltage and
0.6 p.u. current at unity power factor. Reactance is 1.0 p.u. and resistance is
negligible.
So,
nodi a
V 1 0c + = p.u.
I
a
0.6 0c + = p.u.
Z
s
0 1 1 90 R jX j
a s
c + = + = + = p.u.
V 1 0 0.6 0 1 90 E I Z
a s #
c c c + + + + d = + = -
E+d 1.166 30.96c + = - p.u.
Excitation voltage . 1 17 = p.u.
Load angle ( ) d . 30 96c = (lagging)
In transformer zero voltage regulation at full load gives leading power factor.
Speed-armature current characteristic of a dc motor is shown as following
The shunt motor provides speed regulation at full load without any controller.
From the given characteristics point A and D are stable
When the 3-f synchronous motor running at full load and unity power factor
and shaft load is reduced half but field current is constant then it gives leading
power factor.
Given star connected synchronous machine, 100 P kVA =
Open circuit voltage 415 V V = and field current is 15 A, short circuit armature
current at a field current of 10 A is equal to rated armature current.
So,
Line synchronous impedance

3 short ckt phase current
open circuit line voltage
#
=

3
3 415
100 1000
415
#
#
#
=
c m
. 1 722 =
nodi a
Given 1-f transformer
50 P kVA = , 250 V V/500 V =
Two winding transformer efficiency 95% at full load unity power factor.
Efficiency 95%
W W 50
50 1 1
cu i #
# #
=
+
So W W
cu i
+ . 2 631 =
Reconfigured as a 500 V/750 V auto-transformer
auto-transformer efficiency
h
. 150 2 631
150
=
+
. % 98 276 =
Given 3-f, 3-stack
Variable reluctance step motor has 20-poles
Step angle
3 20
360
6
#
c = =
Given a 3-f squirrel cage induction motor starting torque is 150% and maximum
torque 300%
So T
Start
1.5T
FL
=
T
max
3T
FL
=
Then
T
T
max
Start

2
1
= ...(1)

T
T
max
Start

S
S
1
2
max
max
2 2
=
+
...(2)
From equation (1) and (2)

S
S
1
2
max
max
2
+

2
1
=
4 1 S S
max max
2
- + 0 =
So S
max
. % 26 786 =
Given 3-f squirrel cage induction motor has a starting current of seven the full
load current and full load slip is 5%
nodi a
I
St
7I
Fl
=
S
Fl
% 5 =

T
T
Fl
St

T
I
x S
2
2
Fl
St
Fl # #
=
b l
. 1 5 ( ) . x 7 0 05
2 2
# #
=
x . % 78 252 =
Star delta starter is used to start this induction motor. So

T
T
Fl
St

I
I
S
3
1
2
Fl
St
Fl # #
=
b l
.
3
1
7 0 05
2
# #
=

T
T
Fl
St
. 0 816 =
Given starting torque is 0.5 p.u.
So,
T
T
Fl
St

I
I
S
sc
2
Fl
Fl #
=
b l
0.5 0.05
I
I
sc
2
Fl
#
=
b l
Per unit starting current

I
I
sc
Fl

.
.
0 05
0 5
= 3.16 = A
In transformer, in open circuit test, current is drawn at low power factor but in
short circuit test current drawn at high power factor.
A single-phase capacitor start induction motor. It has cage rotor and its stator
has two windings.
The two windings are displaced 90c in space. The direction of rotation can be
changed by reversing the main winding terminals.
In DC motor, compensating winding is used for neutralizing armature reactance
while interpole winding is used for improving commutation.
Interpoles generate voltage necessary to neutralize the e.m.f of self induction in
nodi a
the armature coils undergoing commutation. Interpoles have a polarity opposite
to that of main pole in the direction of rotation of armature.
Given: A 230 V, DC machine, 20 A at 200 V as a generator.
R
a
. 0 2 W =
The machine operated as a motor at same terminal voltage and current, flux
increased by 10%
So for generator
E
g
V I R
a a
= +
. 200 20 0 2
#
= +
E
g
204 = volt
for motor E
m
V I R
a a
= -
. 200 20 0 2
#
= -
E
m
196 = volt
So
E
E
m
g

N
N
m
g
m
g
#
f
f
=

196
204

. N
N
1 1
1
m
g
#
=

N
N
g
m

.
.
204 1 1
196
0 87
#
= =
A synchronous generator is feeding a zero power factor(lagging) load at rated
current then the armature reaction is demagnetizing.
Given the rating of first transformer is 500 kVA
Per unit leakage impedance is 0.05 p.u.
Rating of second transformer is 250 kVA
So, Per unit impedance
base impedance
actual impedance
=
and, Per unit leakage impedance
kVA
1
\
Then 500 kVA 0.05
#
250 x kVA
#
=
x . .
250
500
0 05 0 1
#
= = p.u.
Given speed of a 4-pole induction motor is controlled by varying the supply
frequency when the ratio of supply voltage and frequency is constant.
50 f Hz = , 400 V V = , 1440 N rpm =
So V f \

V
V
2
1

f
f
2
1
=
V
2
400 240
50
30
V
#
= =
nodi a
T
f
V
S
2
\
c m
So
S
S
1
2

V
V
f
f
T
T
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
# #
=
b l
Given T
1
T
2
=
Then S
2
. 0 04
240
400
50
30
2
# #
=
b l
S
2
. 0 066 =
N
r
(1 ) N S
s
= -
N
r

P
f 120
=
So N
r
.
4
120 30
1 0 066
#
= -
^ h

840.6 rpm =
Given a 3-f induction motor
P 4 = , 400 V V = , 50 f Hz =
r
1
1.0 W = , . r 0 5
2
W = l
X
1
1.2 , 35 X X
m 2
W W = = = l
So, Speed of motor is
N
s
1500
P
f 120
4
120 50
rpm
#
= = =
Torque T
st

( )
N
r r X
V r
2
180
s
1 2
2 2
2
2
#
p
=
+ + l
l

.
( . ) ( . )
.
2 3 14 1500
180
1 5 2 4
3
400
0 5
2 2
2
# #
#
#
=
+
c m
63.58 Nm =
Given that 3-f induction motor star connected
P 10 kW = , 400 V f V, Poles 4, 50 Hz = = =
Full load current 20 I A
Fl
=
Efficiency
input
output
=
So
Cu losses at full load

15
20
762
2
#
=
b l
. 1354 67 =
Total losses . . 1354 67 1002 2356 67 = + =
Efficiency
. 10000 2356 67
10000
100
#
=
+
% 81 =
Given 3-f star connected synchronous motor
internal reactance 10 W =
nodi a
Operating at 50% load, unity power factor, 400 V, 5 kW
Excitation increased % 1 =
So,
full load current
I
Fl
.
3 400 1
5 10
7 22
3
# #
#
= =
E
2
( ) ( ) cos sin V I R V I X
a a a s
2 2
q q = - + -
So, E .
3
400
10 3 6
2
2
#
= +
c
^
m
h
. 2133 7289 =
Excitation will increase 1% then E
2
E
2
. . 2133 7289 0 01
#
= 236 =
I X
a
( ) E V
2
2 2
= -
( ) 236
3
400 2
2
= -
c m
. 48 932 =
I
a

.
10
48 932
= . 4 8932 =
Load(%)
.
.
. %
7 22
4 8932
67 83 = =
Given P 4 = , 50 f Hz =
Slots 48 = , each coil has 10 turns
Short pitched by an angle(a) to 36c electrical
Flux per pole 0.05 Wb =
So,
E
ph
4.44 K f T
W ph
f =
Slot/Pole/ph
4 3
48
4
#
= =
Slot/Pole
4
48
12 = =
Slot angle
12
180
15c = =
K
d

( / )
( / )
sin
sin
4 15 2
4 15 2
#
= . 0 957 =
K
p
cos
2
a
= . cos 18 0 951 c = =
In double layer wdg
No. of coil No of slots =
No. of turns/ph
3
48 10
160
#
= =
Then E
ph
. . . . 4 44 0 025 50 0 957 0 951 160
# # # # #
=
808 = V
E
L
808 3
#
=
E
L
1400 V = (approximate)
line to line induced voltage, so in 2 phase winding
Slot/ pole/ph 6 =
nodi a
T
ph

2
480
240 = =
Slot angle 15
48
180 4
#
c = =
K
d

( / )
( / )
sin
sin
6 15 2
6 15 2
#
= 0.903 =
K
p

2
36
0.951 cos = =
b l
E
ph
. . . . 4 44 0 025 50 240 0 951 0 903
# # # # #
=
1143 =
Fifth harmonic component of phase emf
So Angle
5
180
36c = =
the phase emf of fifth harmonic is zero.
Given that: A 300 kVA transformer
Efficiency at full load is 95% and 0.8 p.f. lagging
96% efficiency at half load and unity power factor
So
For I
st
condition for full load
95%
0.8
0.8
W W kVA
kVA
cu i #
#
=
+ +
...(1)
Second unity power factor half load
96%
0.5
0.5
W W kVA
kVA
cu i #
#
=
+ +
...(2)
So W W
cu i
+ . 12 63 =
. . W W 0 25 0 96
cu i
+ . 6 25 =
Then W
cu
. 8 51 = , . W 4 118
i
=
Efficiency ( ) h
X W W X
X
kVA
p.f. kVA
i cu
2
# #
# #
=
+ +
So X
.
4.118
.
8 51
0 6956 = =
% h
. . . ( . )
.
0 6956 300 4 118 8 51 0 6956
0 6956 1 300
2
# #
# #
=
+ +
h . % 96 20 =
The leakage reactances X
1
, and X
2
l are equal and magnetizing reactance X
m
is
higher than X
1
, and X
2
l
X
1
X X <<
m 2
. l
nodi a
Three phase star delta connection of transformer induces a phase difference of
30c between output and input line voltage.
Given torque/speed curve of the induction motor
When the speed of the motor is in forward direction then slip varies from 0 to 1
but when speed of motor is in reverse direction or negative then slip is greater
then 1. So at point W slip is greater than 1.
For an induction motor the ratio of gross power output to air-gap is equal to
( ) s 1 -
So
airgap power
gross power
( ) s 1 = -
Given that two magnetic pole revolve around a stationary armature.
At c
1
the emf induced upward and no emf induced at c
2
and c
2
l
Given A 50 kW DC shunt motor is loaded, then
at half the rated speed by armature voltage control
So P N \
P
new
25
2
50
kW = =
At 1.5 time the rated speed by field control
P constant =
So P 50 kW =
nodi a
In synchronous machine, when the armature terminal are shorted the field current
should first be decreased to zero before started the alternator.
In open circuit the synchronous machine runs at rated synchronous speed. The
field current is gradually increased in steps.
The short circuit ratio is the ratio of field current required to produced the rated
voltage on open to the rated armature current.
In DC motor, E PN
A
Z
f =
b l
or E K
n
w f =
So armature emf E depends upon f and w only and torque developed depends
upon
T
A
PZ I
2
a
p
f
=
So, torque(T ) is depends of f and I
a
and developed power(P ) is depend of flux
f, speed w and armature current I
a
.
Given a three-phase cage induction motor is started by direct on line switching
at rated voltage. The starting current drawn is 6 time the full load current.
Full load slip % 4 =
So

T
T
Fl
St
b l

I
I
S
2
Fl
St
Fl #
=
b l
( ) . . 6 0 04 1 44
2
#
= =
Given single-phase induction motor driving a fan load, the resistance rotor is
high
So
E
b
V I R
a a
= - ...(1)
P
mech
E I
a a
=
t
P
m
mech
w
= ...(2)
From equation (1) and (2) the high resistance of rotor then the motor achieves
quick acceleration and torque of starting is increase.
Given / V f control of induction motor, the maximum developed torque remains
same
we have, E 4.44K f T
w 1 1
f =
If the stator voltage drop is neglected the terminal voltage E
1
. To avoid saturation
and to minimize losses motor is operated at rated airgap flux by varying terminal
voltage with frequency. So as to maintain ( / ) V f ratio constant at the rated
nodi a
value, the magnetic flux is maintained almost constant at the rated value which
keeps maximum torque constant.
Given P 1000 kVA = , 6.6 kV
Reactance 20 W = and neglecting the armature resistance at full load and unity
power factor
So P V I 3
L L
=
I
.
.
3 6 6
1000
87 47
#
= = A
So, I X . . 87 47 20 1 75
#
= = kV
E
ph
2

.
( . )
3
6 5
1 75
2
2
= +
c m
E
ph

.
( . )
3
6 5
1 75
2
2
= +
c m
E
ph
4.2 kV =
E
L
E 3
ph
= a Star connection
E
L
. . 1 732 4 2
#
= 7.26 kV =
Torque angle
z
a tan
R
X
a
s 1
=
-
b l

z
a
.
.
tan
6 6
3 1 75 1 #
=
-
c m
. 24 6c =
Given that
Transformer rating is 500 kVA
Iron losses 300 = W
full load copper losses 600 = W
Maximum efficiency condition
W
i
X W
c
2
=
nodi a
So, X
W
W
c
i
=
600
300
= 0.707 =
efficiency% . 0 707 100
#
= . % 70 7 =
Stepper motor is rotated in steps, when the supply is connected then the torque
is produced in it. The higher value of torque is pull out torque and less torque
when the torque is pull in torque.
The stepper motor has the permanent magnet rotor and stator has made of
windings, its connected to the supply.
1-phase induction motor is not self starting, so its used to start different method
at full load condition, capacitor-run type motor have higher power factor. In this
type the capacitor is connected in running condition.
Given that if 3-f induction motor is rotated in clockwise then the phase sequence
of supply voltage is A-B-C. In counter clock wise rotation of the motor the phase
sequence is change so in the counter clockwise rotation the phase sequence is
A-C-B.
In linear electromagnetic circuit the field energy is equal to the
co-energy.
W
f
W Li
L 2
1
2
1
2
1 '
f i
2 2
y y = = = =
W
f
field energy =
W
'
f
co energy =
Given that
8-Pole, 50 Hz induction machine in seventh space harmonic mmf wave.
So,
Synchronous speed at 7
th
harmonic is /7 N
s
=
Speed of motor N
s

P
f 120
= 750
8
120 50
rpm
#
= =
nodi a
Synchronous speed is
N
7 7
750
s
= = 107.14 rpm = in forward direction
Rotating electrical machines having its self inductance of stator and rotor
windings is independent of the rotor position of synchronizing torque.
synchronizing torque
T
synchronizing
m
d
dP 1
s
w d
= Nm/elect. radian
m
d
dP P 1
180
s
w d
p
=
b l
Nm/mech.degree
Given that the armature of a permanent magnet dc motor is
R
a
0.8 W =
At no load condition
V 25 V = , 1.5 I A = , 1500 N rpm =
No load losses E I
#
=
a E V I R
a
= -
So no load losses ( . . ) . 25 1 5 0 8 1 5
#
= - 5.7 3 W =
At load condition I 3.5 A =
Iron losses I R
2
= ( . ) . 3 5 0 8
2
#
= 9.8 W =
Total losses No load losses iron losses
+
=
5.7 9.8 3 = + 5.5 4 W =
Total power P VI =
P . 25 3 5
#
=
P . 87 5 = W
Efficiency
input
output
=
h
total power
total power losses
=
-

.
. .
100
87 5
87 5 45 5
#
=
-
. % 48 0 =
Given that 50 kVA, 3300/230 V, 1-f transform
V
in
3300 V =
V
out
3300 230 3530 V = + =
Output current I
2
and output voltage 230 V
nodi a
So
I
2
217.4
230
50 10
A
3
#
= =
When the output voltage is V
out
then kVA rating of auto transformer will be
I
2
. 3530 217 4
#
=
. 767 42 = kVA
Given that 100 kVA, 11000/400 V, Delta-star distribution transformer resistance
is 0.02 pu and reactance is 0.07 pu
So pu impedance Z
pu
. . j 0 02 0 07 = +
Base impedance referred to primary
Z
Base

/
( )
3630
V I
V
3
3
100 10
11 10
L L
P
2
3
3 2
#
#
W = = =
The phase impedance referred to primary
Z
primary
Z Z
pu Base #
=
( . . )( ) j 0 02 0 07 3630 = + . . j 72 6 254 1 = +
Given that
230 V, 50 Hz, 4-Pole, capacitor-start induction motor
Z
m
R X
m m
= + . . j 6 0 4 0 W = +
Z
A
R X
A A
= + . . j 8 0 6 0 W = +
Phase angle of main winding
I
m
+ Z
m
+ = -
(6 4) j + =- + . 33 7c + =-
So angle of the auxiliary winding when the capacitor is in series.
I
A
+ (8 6) j
j C
1
+
w
=- + +
(8 6) j
C
j
+
w
= + -
a I I
A m
+ + = -
So 90 ( . ) tan
C
8
6
1
33 7
1 w
=-
-
- -
-
f p > H

C
1
w
18 = w f 2p =
nodi a
So C
. f 18 2
1
18 2 3 14 50
1
# # # # p
= =
176.8 F m =
Given that the armature has per phase synchronous reactance of
1.7 W and two alternator is connected in parallel
So,
both alternator voltage are in phase
So,
E
f1

3300
3
=
E
f2

3
3200
=
Synchronizing current or circulating current

T T
E
S S
C
1 2
=
+
Reactance of both alternator are same
So
T T
E E
S S
f f
1 2
1 2
=
+
-

. .
3
1
1 7 1 7
3300 3200
=
+
-
b l
. 16 98 = A
Given 400 4 V P V, 15 kWpower and = =
f 50 Hz = , Full load slip (S) % 4 =
So N
s

P
f 120
=
4
120 50
1500
#
= = rpm
Actual speed synchronous speed slip = -
N 1500
100
4
1500
#
= - 1440 = rpm
Torque developed T
( ) S
P
1
s
w
=
-
, where ( ) S 1
s
w -
2 N
60
p
=

2 1440
15 10 60
3
#
# #
p
= . 99 47 = Nm
Given . 1 8c angle, 2-f Bipolar stepper motor and stepping rate is
100 step/second
So step required for one revolution

.
200
1 8
360
steps = =
a Time required for one revolution 2 = seconds
rev/sec 0.5 rps =
nodi a
and rev/min 30 = rpm
Given that:
P 8 = Pole, DC generator has wave-wound armature containing 32 coil of 6 turns
each. Simplex wave wound flux per pole is 0.06 Wb
N 250 rpm =
So induced armature voltage
E
g

60A
ZNP f
=
Z total no.of armature conductor =
2 2 32 6 384 CN
C # #
= = =
E
g

. .
60 2
0 06 250 3 84 8
#
# # #
=
2 A a = for wave winding
E
g
384 = volt
Given a 400 V, 50 Hz and 0.8 p.f. loading delta connection 50 Hz synchronous
machine, the reactance is 2 W. The friction and windage losses are 2 kW and core
losses is 0.8 kW and shaft is supply 9 kW at a 0.8 loading power factor
So
Input power 9 kW 2 kW 0.8 kW = + + 11.8 kW =
a Input power V I 3
2 2
= 11.8 kW =
I
2

.
11.8
3 400 0 8
kW
# #
= 21.29 = A
Given that 500 MW, 3-f star connected synchronous generator has a rated
voltage of 21.5 kV and 0.85 Power factor
So V I 3
L L
500 = MW
I
L

. . 3 21 5 10 0 85
500 10
3
6
# # #
#
=
15.79 10
3
#
=
I
L
. 15 79 = kA
Given that 1-f transformer, maximum efficiency 90% at full load and unity
power factor
So h
cos
cos
V I P P
V I
i c 2 2 2
2 2 2
f
f
=
+ +

( . )
( . )
cos
cos
L F P P
L F
c 2
2
i(Pu)
f
f
=
+ +
where . . L F is the load fator.
At full load, load factor is
. . L F 1
P
P
c
i
= =
nodi a
cos
2
f 1 = at unity power factor
so, 90%
P 1 2
1 1
i
#
=
+
P
i
. 0 0555 = MVA
At half load, load factor is
L.F .
2
1
5 = =
So, h
. . ( . ) .
.
0 5 0 0555 0 5 0 0555
0 5 1
100
2
# #
#
#
=
+
. % 87 8 =
In food mixer the universal motor is used and in cassette tap recorder permanent
magnet DC motor is used. The Domestic water pump used the single and three
phase induction motor and escalator used the three phase induction motor.
Given a engine drive synchronous generator is feeding a partly inductive load. A
capacitor is connected across the load to completely nullify the inductive current.
Then the motor field current has to be reduced and fuel input left unaltered.
Given open circuit and full-load zero power factor of a synchronous generator. At
point Q the zero power factor at 1.0 pu voltage. The voltage drop at point PQ is
across synchronous reactance.
Given no load test on 3-f induction motor, the graph between the input power
and voltage drop is shown in figure, the intersection point yield the friction and
windage loss.
nodi a
Given that: The armature resistance in per unit is 0.2
so, R
a
. 0 2 =
back emf equation of motor is
E
b
V I R
a a
= -
given that no mechanical losses and armature reaction is neglected, so per unit
value of emf induced by motor is
E
b
. 0 98 =
The DC shunt motor is mechanically coupled by the generator so the emf
induced by motor and generator is equal
E
g
E
b
=
so voltage generated by the generator is
V . . . 0 98 1 0 2 0 96
#
= - =
per unit value of load resistance is equal to 0.96
Given that when the switch S
1
is closed and S
2
is open then the 11000 V is step
down at 415 V output
Second time when the switch S
1
is open and switch S
2
is closed then 2-phase
supply is connected to the transformer then the ratio of voltage is

V
V
2
1
26.50
N
N
415
11000
2
1
= = =
The output terminal a and c are in opposite phase so cancelled with each other
and terminal is equal to zero volt.
Given that
N
1
: : N N
2 3
is : : 4 2 1
Resistance R 10 W =
V
1
400 V =
So
V
V
2
1

N
N
2
4
2
1
= =
V
2

V
4
2
1
= 200 V =
and
V
V
3
1

N
N
1
4
3
1
= =
V
3
100 V =
so current in secondary winding
I
2

R
V
10
200
2
= = 20 A =
The current in third winding when the capacitor is connected
nodi a
so I
3

. jX
V
j
j
2 5
100
40
c
3
=
-
=
-
=
When the secondary winding current I
2
is referred to primary side i.e I
'
1
So
I
I
'
2
1

N
N
4
2
1
2
= =
I
'
1

20
10
2
A = =
and winding third current I
3
is referred to Primary side i.e I
''
1
. I
3
flows to opposite
to I
1

So
I
I
''
3
1
-

N
N
4
1
1
3
= =
I
''
1
j10 =-
So total current in primary winding is
I
1
I I
'' ''
1 2
= + 10 10 j A = -
Given that:
P Stator winding current is dc, rotor winding current is ac
Q Stator winding current is ac, rotor winding current is dc
R Stator winding current is ac, rotor winding current is ac
S Stator has salient pole and rotor has commutator
T Rotor has salient pole and slip rings and stator is cylindrical
U Both stator and rotor have poly-phase windings
So
DC motor/machines:
The stator winding is connected to dc supply and rotor winding flows ac current.
Stator is made of salient pole and Commutator is connected to the rotor so rotor
winding is supply ac power.
Induction machines:
In induction motor the ac supply is connected to stator winding and rotor and
stator are made of poly-phase windings.
Synchronous machines:
In this type machines the stator is connected to ac supply but rotor winding is
excited by dc supply. The rotor is made of both salient pole and slip rings and
stator is made of cylindrical.
Given that
F
s
is the peak value of stator mmf axis. F
r
is the peak value of
rotor mmf axis. The rotor mmf lags stator mmf by space angle
d. The direction of torque acting on the rotor is clockwise or counter clockwise.
When the opposite pole is produced in same half portion of stator and rotor
then the rotor moves. So portion of stator is north-pole in ABC and rotor abc is
produced south pole as well as portion surface CDA is produced south pole and
the rotor cda is produced North pole.
The torque direction of the rotor is clock wise and torque at surface is in counter
clockwise direction.
nodi a
Given that:
A 4-pole, 3-f, double layer winding has 36 slots stator with 60c phase spread,
coil span is 7 short pitched
so,
Pole pitch
pole
slot
=
4
36
9 = =
Slot/pole/phase 3 =
so, 3-slots in one phase, if it is chorded by 2 slots then
Out of 3 2 " have different phase
Out of 36 24 " have different phase.
Given that:
3-f induction motor is driving a constant load torque at rated voltage and
frequency. Voltage and frequency are halved and stator resistance, leakage
reactance and core losses are ignored.
Then the motor synchronous speed and actual speed difference are same.
N
s

P
f 120
=
The leakage reactance are ignored then the air gap flux remains same and the
stator resistance are ignored then the stator current remain same.
Given that: 1-f induction motor main winding excited then the rotating field of
motor changes, the forward rotating field of motor is greater then the back ward
rotating field.
Given that:
A dc series motor driving a constant power load running at rated speed and
rated voltage. Its speed brought down 0.25 pu. Then
Emf equation of dc series motor
E ( ) V R R
a se
= - +
R R
a se
+ R =
so, E V I R = - K N f =
then N
K
E
f
=
In series motor I fa
so, N
KI
V I R
=
-
At constant power load
E I
#
T W Const
#
= = ...(1)
T K I KI
2
f = = ...(2)
If W is decreased then torque increases to maintain power constant.
T I
2
\
W
4
1
= then T 4 =
nodi a
So current is increased 2 time and voltage brought down to 0.5 pu.

***********
Chapter 4 Power Systems Page 201
nodi a
CHAPTER 4
POWER SYSTEMS
EE SP 4.1 Three-phase to ground fault takes place at locations F
1
and F
2
in the system
shown in the figure.
If the fault takes place at location F
1
, then the voltage and the current at bus
A are V
F1
and I
F1
respectively. If the fault takes place at location F
2
, then the
voltage and the current at bus A and V
F2
and I
F2
respectively. The correct
statement about voltages and currents during faults at F
1
and F
2
is
(A) V
F1
leads I
F1
and V
F2
leads I
F2
(B) V
F1
leads I
F1
and V
F2
lags I
F2
(C) V
F1
lags I
F1
and V
F2
leads I
F2
(D) V
F1
lags I
F1
and V
F2
lags I
F2
EE SP 4.2 A 2-bus system and corresponding zero sequence network are shown in the figure.
The transformers T
1
and T
2
are connected as
Page 202 Power Systems Chapter 4
nodi a
EE SP 4.3 In an unbalanced three phase system, phase current pu I 1 90
a
c = - ^ h , negative
sequence current pu I 4 150
b2
c = - ^ h , zero sequence current pu I 3 90
c0
c = . The
magnitude of phase current I
b
in pu is
(A) 1.00 (B) 7.81
(C) 11.53 (D) 13.00
EE SP 4.4 A three phase synchronous generator is to be connected to the infinite bus. The
lamps are connected as shown in the figure for the synchronization. The phase
sequence of bus voltage is R-Y-B and that of incoming generator voltage is
R Y B
- -
l l l.
It was found that the lamps are becoming dark in the sequence L L L
a b c
- -
. It
means that the phase sequence of incoming generator is
(A) opposite to infinite bus and its frequency is more than infinite bus
(B) opposite to infinite bus but its frequency is less than infinite bus
(C) same as infinite bus and its frequency is more than infinite bus
(D) same as infinite bus and its frequency is less than infinite bus
EE SP 4.5 A distribution feeder of 1 km length having resistance, but negligible reactance,
is fed from both the ends by 400 V, 50 Hz balanced sources. Both voltage sources
S
1
and S
2
are in phase. The feeder supplies concentrated loads of unity power
factor as shown in the figure.
The contributions of S
1
and S
2
in 100 A current supplied at location P respectively,
are
(A) 75 A and 25 A
nodi a
(B) 50 A and 50 A
(C) 25 A and 75 A
(D) 0 A and 100 A
EE SP 4.6 A two bus power system shown in the figure supplies load of . . j 1 0 0 5 + p.u.
The values of V
1
in p.u. and
2
d respectively are
(A) 0.95 and . 6 00c
(B) 1.05 and . 5 44c -
(C) 1.1 and . 6 00c -
(D) 1.1 and . 27 12c -
EE SP 4.7 The fuel cost functions of two power plants are
Plant P
1
: C
1
. Pg APg B 0 05
1
2
1
= + +
Plant P
2
: C
2
. Pg APg B 0 10 3 2
2
2
2
= + +
where, P
g1
and P
g2
are the generated powers of two plants, and A and B are the
constants. If the two plants optimally share 1000 MW load at incremental fuel
cost of 100 Rs/MWh, the ratio of load shared by plants P
1
and P
2
is
(A) 1 : 4
(B) 2 : 3
(C) 3 : 2
(D) 4 : 1
EE SP 4.8 The over current relays for the line protection and loads connected at the buses
are shown in the figure.
The relays are IDMT in nature having the characteristic
t
op

.
Plug Setting Multiplier
Time Multiplier Setting
1
0 14
. 0 02
#
=
- ^ h
The maximum and minimum fault currents at bus B are 2000 A and 500 A
respectively. Assuming the time multiplier setting and plug setting for relay R
B

to be 0.1 and 5 A respectively, the operating time of R
B
(in seconds) is_____.
nodi a
EE SP 4.9 A three phase star-connected load is drawing power at a voltage of 0.9 pu and
0.8 power factor lagging. The three phase base power and base current are 100
MVA and 437.38 A respectively. The line-to-line load voltage in kV is _____.
EE SP 4.10 Shunt reactors are sometimes used in high voltage transmission systems to
(A) limit the short circuit current through the line
(B) compensate for the series reactance of the line under heavily loaded
condition
(C) limit over-voltages at the load side under lightly loaded condition.
(D) compensate for the voltage drop in the line under heavily loaded condition.
EE SP 4.11 A synchronous generator is connected to an infinite bus with excitation voltage
. pu E 1 3
f
= . The generator has a synchronous reactance of 1.1 pu and is delivering
real power (P) of 0.6 pu to the bus. Assume the infinite bus voltage to be 1.0 pu.
Neglect stator resistance. The reactive power (Q) in pu supplied by the generator
to the bus under this condition is _____.
EE SP 4.12 There are two generators in a power system. No-load frequencies of the generators
are 51.5 Hz and 51 Hz, respectively, and both are having droop constant of
/ Hz MW 1 . Total load in the system is 2.5 MW. Assuming that the generators
are operating under their respective droop characteristics, the frequency of the
power system in Hz in the steady state is ______.
EE SP 4.13 The horizontally placed conductors of a single phase line operating at 50 Hz
are having outside diameter of 1.6 cm, and the spacing between centers of the
conductors is 6 m. The permittivity of free space is . / F m 8 854 10
12
#
-
. The
capacitance to ground per kilometer of each line is
(A) . F 4 2 10
9
#
-
(B) . F 8 4 10
9
#
-
(C) . F 4 2 10
12
#
-
(D) . F 8 4 10
12
#
-
EE SP 4.14 A three phase, 100 MVA, 25 kV generator has solidly grounded neutral. The
positive, negative, and the zero sequence reactances of the generator are 0.2 pu,
0.2 pu and 0.05 pu, respectively, at the machine base quantities. If a bolted single
phase to ground fault occurs at the terminal of the unloaded generator, the fault
current in amperes immediately after the fault is_____.
EE SP 4.15 In a long transmission line with r , l , g and c are the resistance, inductance,
shunt conductance and capacitance per unit length, respectively, the condition
for distortionless transmission is
(A) lg rc = (B) / r l c =
(C) rg lc = (D) / g c l =
nodi a
EE SP 4.16 For a fully transposed transmission line
(A) positive, negative and zero sequence impedances are equal
(B) positive and negative sequence impedances are equal
(C) zero and positive sequence impedances are equal
(D) negative and zero sequence impedances are equal
EE SP 4.17 A 183 bus power system has 150 PQ buses and 32 PV buses. In the general
case, to obtain the load flow solution using Newton-Raphson method in polar
coordinates, the minimum number of simultaneous equations to be solved is
_____.
EE SP 4.18 For a 400 km long transmission line, the series impedance is . . /km j 0 0 0 5 W + ^ h
and the shunt admittance is . . / mho km j 0 0 5 0 m + ^ h . The magnitude of the series
impedance (in W ) of the equivalent p circuit of the transmission line is ____.
EE SP 4.19 The complex power consumed by a constant-voltage load is given by P jQ
1 1
+ ^ h,
where, . kW kW P 1 1 5
1
# # and . kVAR kVAR Q 0 5 1
1
# #
A compensating shunt capacitor is chosen such that . kVAR Q 0 25 # , where
Q is the net reactive power consumed by the capacitor load combination. The
reactive power (in kVAR) supplied by the capacitor is ____.
EE SP 4.20 The figure shows the single line diagram of a single machine infinite bus system.
The inertia constant of the synchronous generator H 5 = MW-s/MVA. Frequency
is 50 Hz. Mechanical power is 1 pu. The system is operating at the stable
equilibrium point with rotor angle d equal to 30c. A three phase short circuit
fault occurs at a certain location on one of the circuits of the double circuit
transmission line. During fault, electrical power in pu is sin P
max
d . If the values of
d and / d dt d at the instant of fault clearing are 45c and 3.762 radian/s respectively,
then P
max
(in pu) is ______.
YEAR 2013 TWO MARKS
EE SP 4.21 For a power system network with n nodes, Z
33
of its bus impedance matrix is
. j0 5 per unit. The voltage at node 3 is . 1 3 10c - per unit. If a capacitor having
reactance of . j3 5 - per unit is now added to the network between node 3 and the
reference node, the current drawn by the capacitor per unit is
(A) . 0 325 100c - (B) . 0 325 80c
(C) . 0 371 100c - (D) . 0 433 80c
nodi a
Statement for Linked Answer Questions: 22 and 23
In the following network, the voltage magnitudes at all buses are equal to 1 pu,
the voltage phase angles are very small, and the line resistances are negligible.
All the line reactances are equal to 1 j W
EE SP 4.22 The voltage phase angles in rad at buses 2 and 3 are
(A) . 0 1
2
q =- , . 0 2
3
q =- (B) 0
2
q = , . 0 1
3
q =-
(C) . 0 1
2
q = , . 0 1
3
q = (D) . 0 1
2
q = , . 0 2
3
q =
EE SP 4.23 If the base impedance and the line-to line base voltage are 100 ohms and 100 kV
respectively, then the real power in MW delivered by the generator connected at
the slack bus is
(A) 10 - (B) 0
(C) 10 (D) 20
YEAR 2012 ONE MARK
EE SP 4.24 The bus admittance matrix of a three-bus three-line system is
Y j
13
10
5
10
18
10
5
10
13
=
-
-
-
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
If each transmission line between the two buses is represented by an equivalent p
-network, the magnitude of the shunt susceptance of the line connecting bus 1 and
2 is
(A) 4 (B) 2
(C) 1 (D) 0
EE SP 4.25 A two-phase load draws the following phase currents : ( ) ( ), sin i t I t
m 1 1
w f = -
( ) ( ) cos i t I t
m 2 2
w f = - . These currents are balanced if
1
f is equal to.
(A)
2
f - (B)
2
f
(C) ( / ) 2
2
p f - (D) ( / ) 2
2
p f +
EE SP 4.26 The figure shows a two-generator system applying a load of 40 MW P
D
= ,
connected at bus 2.
nodi a
The fuel cost of generators G
1
and G
2
are :
( ) 10000 / Rs MWh C P
G 1 1
= and ( ) 12500 / Rs MWh C P
G 2 2
= and the loss in the line
is . , P P 0 5
( ) ( ) loss pu G pu 1
2
= where the loss coefficient is specified in pu on a 100 MVA
base. The most economic power generation schedule in MW is
(A) , P P 20 22
G G 1 2
= = (B) , P P 22 20
G G 1 2
= =
(C) , P P 20 20
G G 1 2
= = (D) , P P 0 40
G G 1 2
= =
EE SP 4.27 The sequence components of the fault current are as follows : 1.5 , pu I j
positive
=
0.5 , pu I j
negative
=- 1 pu I j
zero
=- . The type of fault in the system is
(A) LG (B) LL
(C) LLG (D) LLLG
YEAR 2012 TWO MARKS
EE SP 4.28 For the system below, and S S
D D 1 2
are complex power demands at bus 1 and bus
2 respectively. If 1 pu V
2
= , the VAR rating of the capacitor ( ) Q
G2
connected
at bus 2 is
(A) 0.2 pu (B) 0.268 pu
(C) 0.312 pu (D) 0.4 pu
EE SP 4.29 A cylinder rotor generator delivers 0.5 pu power in the steady-state to an infinite
bus through a transmission line of reactance 0.5 pu. The generator no-load voltage
is 1.5 pu and the infinite bus voltage is 1 pu. The inertia constant of the generator
is 5 MW- / s MVA and the generator reactance is 1 pu. The critical clearing angle,
in degrees, for a three-phase dead short circuit fault at the generator terminal is
(A) 53.5 (B) 60.2
(C) 70.8 (D) 79.6
YEAR 2011 ONE MARK
EE SP 4.30 A nuclear power station of 500 MW capacity is located at 300 km away from a
load center. Select the most suitable power evacuation transmission configuration
among the following options
nodi a
EE SP 4.31 A negative sequence relay is commonly used to protect
(A) an alternator (B) an transformer
(C) a transmission line (D) a bus bar
EE SP 4.32 For enhancing the power transmission in along EHV transmission line, the most
preferred method is to connect a
(A) Series inductive compensator in the line
(B) Shunt inductive compensator at the receiving end
(C) Series capacitive compensator in the line
(D) Shunt capacitive compensator at the sending end
YEAR 2011 TWO MARKS
EE SP 4.33 A load center of 120 MW derives power from two power stations connected by
220 kV transmission lines of 25 km and 75 km as shown in the figure below. The
three generators , G G
1 2
and G
3
are of 100 MW capacity each and have identical
fuel cost characteristics. The minimum loss generation schedule for supplying the
120 MW load is
(A)
MW losses
MW
MW
P
P
P
80
20
20
1
2
3
= +
=
=
(B)
MW
MW losses
MW
P
P
P
60
30
30
1
2
3
=
= +
=
nodi a

(C)
MW
MW
MW losses
P
P
P
40
40
40
1
2
3
=
=
= +
(D)
MW losses
MW
MW
P
P
P
30
45
45
1
2
3
= +
=
=
EE SP 4.34 The direct axis and quadrature axis reactances of a salient pole alternator are
1.2 p.u and 1.0 p.u respectively. The armature resistance is negligible. If this
alternator is delivering rated kVA at upf and at rated voltage then its power
angle is
(A) 30c (B) 45c
(C) 60c (D) 90c
EE SP 4.35 A three bus network is shown in the figure below indicating the p.u. impedance
of each element.
The bus admittance matrix, Y -bus, of the network is
(A)
.
.
0.
.
.
.
.
j
0 3
0 2
0
2
0 12
0 08
0
0 08
0 02
-
-
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
(B) .
.
.
.
j
15
5
0
5
7 5
12 5
0
12 5
2 5
-
-
-
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
(C)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
j
0 1
0 2
0
0 2
0 12
0 08
0
0 08
0 10 -
-
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
(D) .
.
. j
10
5
0
5
7 5
12 5
0
12 5
10
-
-
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
Statement For Linked Answer Questions : 36 and 37
EE SP 4.36 Two generator units G
1
and G
2
are connected by 15 kV line with a bus at the
mid-point as shown below
250 MVA G
1
= , 15 kV, positive sequence reactance 25% X
G1
= on its own base
100 MVA G
2
= , 15 kV, positive sequence reactance 10% X
G2
= on its own base L
1

and 10 km L
2
= , positive sequence reactance 0.225 /km X
L
W =
nodi a
EE SP 4.37 In the above system, the three-phase fault MVA at the bus 3 is
(A) 82.55 MVA (B) 85.11 MVA
(C) 170.91 MVA (D) 181.82 MVA
YEAR 2010 ONE MARK
EE SP 4.38 Power is transferred from system A to system B by an HVDC link as shown in
the figure. If the voltage V
AB
and V
CD
are as indicated in figure, and I 0 2 , then
nodi a
(A) 0, 0, V V V V < >
AB CD AB CD
1
(B) 0, 0, V V V V
AB CD AB CD
2 2 1
(C) 0, 0, V V V V >
AB CD AB CD
2 2
(D) 0, 0 V V <
AB CD
2
EE SP 4.39 Consider a step voltage of magnitude 1 pu travelling along a lossless transmission
line that terminates in a reactor. The voltage magnitude across the reactor at the
instant travelling wave reaches the reactor is
(A) 1 - pu (B) 1 pu
(C) 2 pu (D) 3 pu
EE SP 4.40 Consider two buses connected by an impedence of ( ) j 0 5 W + . The bus 1 voltage
is 100 30c + V, and bus 2 voltage is 100 0c + V. The real and reactive power
supplied by bus 1 respectively are
(A) 1000 W, 268 VAr (B) 1000 - W, 134 - VAr
(C) 276.9 W, . 56 7 - VAr (D) . 276 9 - W, 56.7 VAr
YEAR 2010 TWO MARKS
EE SP 4.41 A three-phase, 33 kV oil circuit breaker is rated 1200 A, 2000 MVA, 3 s. The
symmetrical breaking current is
(A) 1200 A (B) 3600 A
(C) 35 kA (D) 104.8 kA
EE SP 4.42 Consider a stator winding of an alternator with an internal high-resistance ground
fault. The currents under the fault condition are as shown in the figure The
winding is protected using a differential current scheme with current transformers
of ratio 400/5 A as shown. The current through the operating coils is
(A) 0.1875 A (B) 0.2 A
(C) 0.375 A (D) 60 kA
nodi a
EE SP 4.43 The zero-sequence circuit of the three phase transformer shown in the figure is
EE SP 4.44 A 50 Hz synchronous generator is initially connected to a long lossless transmission
line which is open circuited at the receiving end. With the field voltage held
constant, the generator is disconnected from the transmission line. Which of the
following may be said about the steady state terminal voltage and field current
of the generator ?
(A) The magnitude of terminal voltage decreases, and the field current does
not change.
(B) The magnitude of terminal voltage increases, and the field current does not
change.
(C) The magnitude of terminal voltage increases, and the field current
increases
(D) The magnitude of terminal voltage does not change and the field current
decreases.
EE SP 4.45 Consider a three-phase, 50 Hz, 11 kV distribution system. Each of the conductors
is suspended by an insulator string having two identical porcelain insulators. The
self capacitance of the insulator is 5 times the shunt capacitance between the link
and the ground, as shown in the figures. The voltages across the two insulators are
nodi a
(A) 3.74 , 2.61 e e kV kV
2 1
= = (B) 3.46 , 2.89 e e kV kV
1 2
= =
(C) 6.0 , 4.23 e e kV kV
1 2
= = (D) 5.5 , 5.5 e e kV kV
1 2
= =
EE SP 4.46 Consider a three-core, three-phase, 50 Hz, 11 kV cable whose conductors are
denoted as , R Y and B in the figure. The inter-phase capacitance(C
1
) between
each line conductor and the sheath is 0.4 F m . The per-phase charging current is
(A) 2.0 A (B) 2.4 A
(C) 2.7 A (D) 3.5 A
EE SP 4.47 For the power system shown in the figure below, the specifications of the
components are the following :
G
1
: 25 kV, 100 MVA, % X 9 =
G
2
: 25 kV, 100 MVA, % X 9 =
T
1
: 25 kV/220 kV, 90 MVA, % X 12 =
T
2
: 220 kV/25 kV, 90 MVA, % X 12 =
Line 1: 200 kV, X 150 = ohms
Choose 25 kV as the base voltage at the generator G
1
, and 200 MVA as the MVA
base. The impedance diagram is
nodi a
YEAR 2009 ONE MARK
EE SP 4.48 Out of the following plant categories
(i) Nuclear
(ii) Run-of-river
(iii) Pump Storage
(iv) Diesel
The base load power plant are
(A) (i) and (ii)
(B) (ii) and (iii)
(C) (i), (ii) and (iv)
(D) (i), (iii) and (iv)
EE SP 4.49 For a fixed value of complex power flow in a transmission line having a sending
nodi a
end voltage V , the real loss will be proportional to
(A) V
(B) V
2
(C)
V
1
2

(D)
V
1
YEAR 2009 TWO MARKS
EE SP 4.50 For the Y-bus matrix of a 4-bus system given in per unit, the buses having shunt
elements are

. .
.
.
Y j
5
2
2 5
0
2
10
2 5
4
2 5
2 5
9
4
0
4
4
8
BUS
=
-
-
-
-
R
T
S
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
W
(A) 3 and 4 (B) 2 and 3
(C) 1 and 2 (D) 1, 2 and 4
EE SP 4.51 Match the items in List-I (To) with the items in the List-II (Use) and select the
correct answer using the codes given below the lists.
List-I List-II
a. improve power factor 1. shunt reactor
b. reduce the current ripples 2. shunt capacitor
c. increase the power flow in line 3. series capacitor
d. reduce the Ferranti effect 4. series reactor
(A) 2, 3, 4, 1 a b c d " " " "
(B) 2, 4, 3, 1 a b c d " " " "
(C) 4, 3, 1, 2 a b c d " " " "
(D) a 4, b 1, c 3, d 2 " " " "
EE SP 4.52 Match the items in List-I (Type of transmission line) with the items in List-II
(Type of distance relay preferred) and select the correct answer using the codes
given below the lists.
List-I List-II
a. Short Line 1. Ohm Relay
b. Medium Line 2. Reactance Relay
c. Long Line 3. Mho Relay
(A) a 2, b 1, c 3 " " " (B) a 3, b 2, c 1 " " "
(C) a 1, b 2, c 3 " " " (D) a 1, b 3, c 2 " " "
EE SP 4.53 Three generators are feeding a load of 100 MW. The details of the generators are
Rating
(MW)
Efficiency
(%)
Regulation (Pu.)
( on 100 MVA base)
nodi a
Generator-1 100 20 0.02
Generator-2 100 30 0.04
Generator-3 100 40 0.03
In the event of increased load power demand, which of the following will happen
?
(A) All the generator will share equal power
(B) Generator-3 will share more power compared to Generator-1
(C) Generator-1 will share more power compared to Generator-2
(D) Generator-2 will share more power compared to Generator-3
EE SP 4.54 A 500 MW, 21 kV, 50 Hz, 3-phase, 2-pole synchronous generator having a rated
p.f = 0.9, has a moment of inertia of 27.5 10
3
# kg-m
2
.The inertia constant (H
) will be
(A) 2.44 s (B) 2.71 s
(C) 4.88 s (D) 5.42 s
YEAR 2008 ONE MARK
EE SP 4.55 A two machine power system is shown below. The Transmission line XY has
positive sequence impedance of Z
1
W and zero sequence impedance of Z
0
W
An a phase to ground fault with zero fault impedance occurs at the centre of the
transmission line. Bus voltage at X and line current from X to F for the phase
a, are given by V
a
Volts and I
a
amperes, respectively. Then, the impedance
measured by the ground distance relay located at the terminal X of line XY will
be given by
(A) /2 Z
1
W
^ h
(B) /2 Z
0
W
^ h
(C) ( )/2 Z Z
0 1
W + (D) / V I
a a
W
^ h
EE SP 4.56 An extra high voltage transmission line of length 300 km can be approximate by
a lossless line having propagation constant . 0 00127 b = radians per km. Then
the percentage ratio of line length to wavelength will be given by
(A) 24.24 % (B) 12.12 %
(C) 19.05 % (D) 6.06 %
EE SP 4.57 A-3-phase transmission line is shown in figure :
nodi a
Voltage drop across the transmission line is given by the following equation :

V
V
V
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
I
I
I
a
b
c
s
m
m
m
s
m
m
m
s
a
b
c
3
3
3
=
R
T
S
S
S
S
R
T
S
S
S
S
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
V
X
W
W
W
W
V
X
W
W
W
W
Shunt capacitance of the line can be neglect. If the has positive sequence
impedance of 15 W and zero sequence impedance of 48 W, then the values of Z
s

and Z
m
will be
(A) 31.5 ; 16.5 Z Z
s m
W W = =
(B) 26 ; 11 Z Z
s m
W W = =
(D) 11 ; 26 Z Z
s m
W W = =
YEAR 2008 TWO MARKS
EE SP 4.58 Voltages phasors at the two terminals of a transmission line of length 70 km have
a magnitude of 1.0 per unit but are 180 degree out of phase. Assuming that the
maximum load current in the line is 1/5
th
of minimum 3-phase fault current. Which one of the following transmission line
protection schemes will not pick up for this condition ?
(A) Distance protection using ohm relay with zoen-1 set to 80% of the line
impedance.
(B) Directional over current protection set to pick up at 1.25 times the
maximum load current
(C) Pilot relaying system with directional comparison scheme
(D) Pilot relaying system with segregated phase comparison scheme
EE SP 4.59 A loss less transmission line having Surge Impedance Loading (SIL) of 2280 MW
is provided with a uniformly distributed series capacitive compensation of 30%.
Then, SIL of the compensated transmission line will be
(A) 1835 MW (B) 2280 MW
(C) 2725 MW (D) 3257 MW
EE SP 4.60 A loss less power system has to serve a load of 250 MW. There are tow generation
(G
1
and G
2
) in the system with cost curves C
1
and C
2
respectively defined as
follows ;
( ) 0.055 C P P P
1
2
G1 G1 G1 # = +
( ) 3 0.03 C P P P
2
2
G2 G2 G2 # = +
Where P
G1
and P
G2
are the MW injections from generator G
1
and G
2
respectively.
Thus, the minimum cost dispatch will be
nodi a
(A) 250 ; 0 P P MW MW
G1 G2
= =
(B) 150 ; 100 P P MW MW
G1 G2
= =
(C) 100 ; 150 P P MW MW
G1 G2
= =
(D) 0 ; 250 P P MW MW
G1 G2
= =
EE SP 4.61 A loss less single machine infinite bus power system is shown below :
The synchronous generator transfers 1.0 per unit of power to the infinite bus. The
critical clearing time of circuit breaker is 0.28 s. If another identical synchronous
generator is connected in parallel to the existing generator and each generator is
scheduled to supply 0.5 per unit of power, then the critical clearing time of the
circuit breaker will
(A) reduce to 0.14 s
(B) reduce but will be more than 0.14 s
(C) remain constant at 0.28 s
(D) increase beyond 0.28 s
EE SP 4.62 Single line diagram of a 4-bus single source distribution system is shown below.
Branches , , e e e
1 2 3
and e
4
have equal impedances. The load current values indicated
in the figure are in per unit.
Distribution companys policy requires radial system operation with minimum
loss. This can be achieved by opening of the branch
(A) e
1
(B) e
2
(C) e
3
(D) e
4
nodi a
Given that: 1 0 V V j p.u
s1 s2
= = + ;
The positive sequence impedance are
0.001 0.01 Z Z j p.u
s1 s2
= = + and 0.006 0.06 Z j p.u
L
= +
3-phase Base 100 MVA =
voltage base 400 = kV(Line to Line)
Nominal system frequency 50 = Hz.
The reference voltage for phase a is defined as ( ) ( ) cos V t V t
m
w = .
A symmetrical three phase fault occurs at centre of the line, i.e. point F at
time t
0
. The positive sequence impedance from source S
1
to point F equals
0.004 0.04 j + p.u. The wave form corresponding to phase a fault current from
bus X reveals that decaying d.c. offset current is negative and in magnitude at
its maximum initial value, Assume that the negative sequence impedances are
equal to positive sequence impedance and the zero sequence impedances are
three times positive sequence impedances.
EE SP 4.63 The instant ( ) t
0
of the fault will be
(A) 4.682 ms (B) 9.667 ms
(C) 14.667 ms (D) 19.667 ms
EE SP 4.64 The rms value of the component of fault current ( ) I
f
will be
(A) 3.59 kA
(B) 5.07 kA
(C) 7.18 kA
(D) 10.15 kA
EE SP 4.65 Instead of the three phase fault, if a single line to ground fault occurs on phase
a at point F with zero fault impedance, then the rms of the ac component of
fault current ( ) I
x
for phase a will be
(A) 4.97 p.u
(B) 7.0 p.u
(C) 14.93 p.u
(D) 29.85 p.u
YEAR 2007 ONE MARK
EE SP 4.66 Consider the transformer connections in a part of a power system shown in the
figure. The nature of transformer connections and phase shifts are indicated for
all but one transformer.
Which of the following connections, and the corresponding phase shift q, should
be used for the transformer between A and B ?
nodi a
(A) Star-star ( 0 ) q =
%

(B) Star-Delta ( ) 30 q =-
%
(C) Delta-star ( ) 30 q =
%

(D) Star-Zigzag ( ) 30 q =
%
EE SP 4.67 The incremental cost curves in Rs/MWhr for two generators supplying a common
load of 700 MW are shown in the figures. The maximum and minimum generation
limits are also indicated. The optimum generation schedule is :
(A) Generator A : 400 MW, Generator B : 300 MW
(B) Generator A : 350 MW, Generator B : 350 MW
(C) Generator A : 450 MW, Generator B : 250 MW
(D) Generator A : 425 MW, Generator B : 275 MW
EE SP 4.68 Two regional systems, each having several synchronous generators and loads are
inter connected by an ac line and a HVDC link as shown in the figure. Which of
the following statements is true in the steady state :
nodi a
(A) Both regions need not have the same frequency
(B) The total power flow between the regions ( ) P P
ac dc
+ can be changed by
controlled the HDVC converters alone
(C) The power sharing between the ac line and the HVDC link can be changed
by controlling the HDVC converters alone.
(D) The directions of power flow in the HVDC link (P
dc
) cannot be reversed
EE SP 4.69 Considered a bundled conductor of an overhead line consisting of three identical
sub-conductors placed at the corners of an equilateral triangle as shown in the
figure. If we neglect the charges on the other phase conductor and ground, and
assume that spacing between sub-conductors is much larger than their radius,
the maximum electric field intensity is experienced at
(A) Point X (B) Point Y
(C) Point Z (D) Point W
YEAR 2007 TWO MARKS
EE SP 4.70 The figure below shows a three phase self-commutated voltage source converter
connected to a power system. The converters dc bus capacitor is marked as C
in the figure. The circuit in initially operating in steady state with 0 d = and the
capacitor dc voltage is equal to V
dc0
. You may neglect all losses and harmonics.
What action should be taken to increase the capacitor dc voltage slowly to a new
steady state value.
(A) Make d positive and maintain it at a positive value
(B) Make d positive and return it to its original value
(C) Make d negative and maintain it at a negative value
(D) Make d negative and return it to its original value
EE SP 4.71 The total reactance and total suspectance of a lossless overhead EHV line,
operating at 50 Hz, are given by 0.045 pu and 1.2 pu respectively. If the velocity
of wave propagation is 3 10
5
# km/s, then the approximate length of the line is
(A) 122 km (B) 172 km
(C) 222 km (D) 272 km
nodi a
EE SP 4.72 Consider the protection system shown in the figure below. The circuit breakers
numbered from 1 to 7 are of identical type. A single line to ground fault with zero
fault impedance occurs at the midpoint of the line (at point F), but circuit breaker
4 fails to operate (Stuck breaker). If the relays are coordinated correctly, a
valid sequence of circuit breaker operation is
(A) 1, 2, 6, 7, 3, 5 (B) 1, 2, 5, 5, 7, 3
(C) 5, 6, 7, 3, 1, 2 (D) 5, 1, 2, 3, 6, 7
EE SP 4.73 A three phase balanced star connected voltage source with frequency w rad/s
is connected to a star connected balanced load which is purely inductive. The
instantaneous line currents and phase to neutral voltages are denoted by ( , , ) i i i
a b c

and ( , , ) V V V
an bn cn
respectively, and their rms values are denoted by V and I .
If R = V V V
i
i
i
0
0
0
an bn cn
a
b
c
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
-
-
-
R
T
S
S
S
SS
R
T
S
S
S
S
8
V
X
W
W
W
WW
V
X
W
W
W
W
B
, then the magnitude of
of R is
(A) VI 3 (B) VI
(C) . VI 0 7 (D) 0
EE SP 4.74 Consider a synchronous generator connected to an infinite bus by two identical
parallel transmission line. The transient reactance x of the generator is 0.1 pu
and the mechanical power input to it is constant at 1.0 pu. Due to some previous
disturbance, the rotor angle (d) is undergoing an undamped oscillation, with the
maximum value of ( ) t d equal to 130
%
.One of the parallel lines trip due to the
relay maloperation at an instant when ( ) t 130 d =
%
as shown in the figure. The
maximum value of the per unit line reactance, x such that the system does not
lose synchronism subsequent to this tripping is

(A) 0.87 (B) 0.74
(C) 0.67 (D) 0.54
nodi a
EE SP 4.75 Suppose we define a sequence transformation between a-b-c and p-n-o
variables as follows :
f
f
f
k
f
f
f
1 1 1
1
1
a
b
c
p
n
o
2
2
a
a
a
a
=
R
T
S
S
S
S
R
T
S
S
S
S
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
V
X
W
W
W
W
V
X
W
W
W
W
where e
j
3
2
a =
p
and k and is a constant
Now, if it is given that :
.
.
.
V
V
V
i
i
i
0 5
0
0
0
0 5
0
0
0
2 0
p
n
o
p
n
0
=
R
T
S
S
S
S
R
T
S
S
S
S
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
V
X
W
W
W
W
V
X
W
W
W
W
and
V
V
V
Z
i
i
i
a
b
c
a
b
c
=
R
T
S
S
S
S
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
V
X
W
W
W
W
then,
(A)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Z
1 0
0 75
0 5
0 5
1 0
0 75
0 75
0 5
1 0
=
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
(B)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Z
1 0
0 5
0 5
0 5
1 0
0 5
0 5
0 5
1 0
=
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
(C) 3
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Z k
1 0
0 5
0 75
0 75
1 0
0 5
0 5
0 75
1 0
2
=
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
(D)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Z
k
3
1 0
0 5
0 5
0 5
1 0
0 5
0 5
0 5
1 0
2
= -
-
-
-
-
-
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
EE SP 4.76 Consider the two power systems shown in figure A below, which are initially not
interconnected, and are operating in steady state at the same frequency. Separate
load flow solutions are computed individually of the two systems, corresponding
to this scenario. The bus voltage phasors so obtain are indicated on figure A.
These two isolated systems are now interconnected by a short transmission line
as shown in figure B, and it is found that P P Q Q 0
1 2 1 2
= = = = .
The bus voltage phase angular difference between generator bus X and generator
bus Y after interconnection is
(A) 10c (B) 25c
nodi a
(C) 30c - (D) 30c
EE SP 4.77 A 230 V (Phase), 50 Hz, three-phase, 4-wire, system has a phase sequence ABC.
A unity power-factor load of 4 kW is connected between phase A and neutral N.
It is desired to achieve zero neutral current through the use of a pure inductor and
a pure capacitor in the other two phases. The value of inductor and capacitor is
(A) 72.95 mH in phase C and 139.02 F m in Phase B
(B) 72.95 mH in Phase B and 139.02 F m in Phase C
(C) 42.12 mH in Phase C and 240.79 F m in Phase B
(D) 42.12 mH in Phase B and 240.79 F m in Phase C
EE SP 4.78 An isolated 50 Hz synchronous generator is rated at 15 MW which is also the
maximum continuous power limit of its prime mover. It is equipped with a speed
governor with 5% droop. Initially, the generator is feeding three loads of 4 MW
each at 50 Hz. One of these loads is programmed to trip permanently if the
frequency falls below 48 Hz .If an additional load of 3.5 MW is connected then
the frequency will settle down to
(A) 49.417 Hz (B) 49.917 Hz
(C) 50.083 Hz (D) 50.583 Hz
YEAR 2006 ONE MARK
EE SP 4.79 The concept of an electrically short, medium and long line is primarily based on
the
(A) nominal voltage of the line (B) physical length of the line
(C) wavelength of the line (D) power transmitted over the line
EE SP 4.80 Keeping in view the cost and overall effectiveness, the following circuit breaker
is best suited for capacitor bank switching
(A) vacuum (B) air blast
(C) SF
6
(D) oil
EE SP 4.81 In a biased differential relay the bias is defined as a ratio of
(A) number of turns of restraining and operating coil
(B) operating coil current and restraining coil current
(C) fault current and operating coil current
(D) fault current and restraining coil current
EE SP 4.82 An HVDC link consist of rectifier, inverter transmission line and other equipments.
Which one of the following is true for this link ?
(A) The transmission line produces/ supplies reactive power
(B) The rectifier consumes reactive power and the inverter supplies reactive
power from/ to the respective connected AC systems
(C) Rectifier supplies reactive power and the inverted consumers reactive power
to/ from the respective connected AC systems
nodi a
(D) Both the converters (rectifier and inverter) consume reactive power from
the respective connected AC systems
YEAR 2006 TWO MARKS
EE SP 4.83 The A, B, C , D constants of a 220 kV line are : . A D 0 94 1c + = = , B 130 73c + =
, .001 90 C 0 c + = If the sending end voltage of the line for a given load delivered
at nominal voltage is 240 kV, the % voltage regulation of the line is
(A) 5 (B) 9
(C) 16 (D) 21
EE SP 4.84 A single phase transmission line and a telephone line are both symmetrically
strung one below the other, in horizontal configurations, on a common tower,
The shortest and longest distances between the phase and telephone conductors
are 2.5 m and 3 m respectively.
The voltage (volt/km) induced in the telephone circuit, due to 50 Hz current of
100 amps in the power circuit is
(A) 4.81 (B) 3.56
(C) 2.29 (D) 1.27
EE SP 4.85 Three identical star connected resistors of 1.0 pu are connected to an unbalanced
3-phase supply. The load neutral is isolated. The symmetrical components of the
line voltages in pu. are: V X
ab 1 1
+q = , V Y
ab 2 2
+q = . If all the pu calculations are
with the respective base values, the phase to neutral sequence voltages are
(A) ( 30 ), ( 30 ) V X V Y
an an 1 2 1 2
c c + q q = + = -
(B) ( 30 ), ( 30 ) V X V Y
an an 1 2 1 2
c c + + q q = - = +
(C) ( 30 ), ( 30 ) V X V Y
3
1
3
1
an an 1 2 1 2
c c + + q q = - = -
(D) ( 60 ), ( 60 ) V X V Y
3
1
3
1
an an 1 2 1 2
c c + + q q = - = -
EE SP 4.86 A generator is connected through a 20 MVA, 13.8/138 kV step down transformer,
to a transmission line. At the receiving end of the line a load is supplied through a
step down transformer of 10 MVA, 138/69 kV rating. A 0.72 pu. load, evaluated
on load side transformer ratings as base values , is supplied from the above
system. For system base values of 10 MVA and 69 kV in load circuit, the value
of the load (in per unit) in generator will be
(A) 36 (B) 1.44
(C) 0.72 (D) 0.18
EE SP 4.87 The Gauss Seidel load flow method has following disadvantages.
Tick the incorrect statement.
(A) Unreliable convergence
(B) Slow convergence
(C) Choice of slack bus affects convergence
(D) A good initial guess for voltages is essential for convergence
nodi a
A generator feeds power to an infinite bus through a double circuit transmission
line. A 3-phase fault occurs at the middle point of one of the lines. The infinite
bus voltage is 1 pu, the transient internal voltage of the generator is 1.1 pu and
the equivalent transfer admittance during fault is 0.8 pu. The 100 MVA generator
has an inertia constant of 5 MJ/MVA and it was delivering 1.0 pu power prior of
the fault with rotor power angle of 30c. The system frequency is 50 Hz.
EE SP 4.88 The initial accelerating power (in pu) will be
(A) 1.0 (B) 0.6
(C) 0.56 (D) 0.4
EE SP 4.89 If the initial accelerating power is X pu, the initial acceleration in elect-deg/sec,
and the inertia constant in MJ-sec/elect-deg respectively will be
(A) . X 31 4 , 18 (B) X 1800 , 0.056
(C) / X 1800, 0.056 (D) / . X 31 4, 18
For a power system the admittance and impedance matrices for the fault studies
are as follows.
Y
bus

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
8 75
1 25
2 50
1 25
6 25
2 50
2 50
2 50
5 00
=
-
-
- -
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
Z
bus

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
0 16
0 08
0 12
0 08
0 24
0 16
0 12
0 16
0 34
=
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
The pre-fault voltages are 1.0 pu. at all the buses. The system was unloaded
prior to the fault. A solid 3-phase fault takes place at bus 2.
EE SP 4.90 The post fault voltages at buses 1 and 3 in per unit respectively are
(A) 0.24, 0.63 (B) 0.31, 0.76
(C) 0.33, 0.67 (D) 0.67, 0.33
EE SP 4.91 The per unit fault feeds from generators connected to buses 1 and 2 respectively
are
(A) 1.20, 2.51 (B) 1.55, 2.61
(C) 1.66, 2.50 (D) 5.00, 2.50
EE SP 4.92 A 400 V, 50 Hz, three phase balanced source supplies power to a star connected
load whose rating is 12 3 kVA, 0.8 pf (lag). The rating (in kVAR) of the delta
connected (capacitive) reactive power bank necessary to bring the pf to unity is
(A) 28. 78 (B) 21.60
(C) 16.60 (D) 12.47
YEAR 2005 ONE MARK
EE SP 4.93 The p.u. parameter for a 500 MVA machine on its own base are:
inertia, M 20 = p.u. ; reactance, X 2 = p.u.
nodi a
The p.u. values of inertia and reactance on 100 MVA common base, respectively, are
(A) 4, 0.4 (B) 100, 10
(C) 4, 10 (D) 100, 0.4
EE SP 4.94 An 800 kV transmission line has a maximum power transfer capacity of P . If it
is operated at 400 kV with the series reactance unchanged, the new maximum
power transfer capacity is approximately
(A) P (B) P 2
(C) / P 2 (D) / P 4
EE SP 4.95 The insulation strength of an EHV transmission line is mainly governed by
(A) load power factor (B) switching over-voltages
(C) harmonics (D) corona
EE SP 4.96 High Voltage DC (HVDC) transmission is mainly used for
(A) bulk power transmission over very long distances
(C) inter-connecting two systems with same nominal frequency
(C) eliminating reactive power requirement in the operation
(D) minimizing harmonics at the converter stations
YEAR 2005 TWO MARKS
EE SP 4.97 The parameters of a transposed overhead transmission line are given as :
Self reactance 0.4 / X km
S
W = and Mutual reactance 0.1 / X km
m
W = The positive
sequence reactance X
1
and zero sequence reactance X
0
, respectively in /km W are
(A) 0.3, 0.2 (B) 0.5, 0.2
(C) 0.5, 0.6 (D) 0.3, 0.6
EE SP 4.98 At an industrial sub-station with a 4 MW load, a capacitor of
2 MVAR is installed to maintain the load power factor at 0.97 lagging. If the
capacitor goes out of service, the load power factor becomes
(A) 0.85 (B) 1.00
(C) 0.80 lag (D) 0.90 lag
EE SP 4.99 The network shown in the given figure has impedances in p.u. as indicated. The
diagonal element Y
22
of the bus admittance matrix Y
BUS
of the network is
(A) 19.8 j - (B) 20.0 j +
(C) 0.2 j + (D) 19.95 j -
EE SP 4.100 A load centre is at an equidistant from the two thermal generating stations G
1

nodi a
and G
2
as shown in the figure. The fuel cost characteristic of the generating
stations are given by
F a bP cP
1 1 1
2
= + + Rs/hour
F a bP cP 2
2 2 2
2
= + + Rs/ hour
Where P
1
and P
2
are the generation in MW of G
1
and G
2
, respectively. For most
economic generation to meet 300 MW of load P
1
and P
2
respectively, are
(A) 150, 150 (B) 100, 200
(C) 200, 100 (D) 175, 125
EE SP 4.101 Two networks are connected in cascade as shown in the figure. With usual
notations the equivalent , , A B C and D constants are obtained. Given that,
0.025 45 C c + = , the value of Z
2
is
(A) 10 30c + W (B) 40 45c + W -
(C) 1 W (D) 0 W
EE SP 4.102 A generator with constant 1.0 p.u. terminal voltage supplies
power through a step-up transformer of 0.12 p.u. reactance and a
double-circuit line to an infinite bus bar as shown in the figure. The infinite bus
voltage is maintained at 1.0 p.u. Neglecting the resistances and suspectances of
the system, the steady state stability power limit of the system is 6.25 p.u. If one
of the double-circuit is tripped, then resulting steady state stability power limit
in p.u. will be
(A) 12.5 p.u. (B) 3.125 p.u.
(C) 10.0 p.u. (D) 5.0 p.u.
At a 220 kV substation of a power system, it is given that the three-phase fault
level is 4000 MVA and single-line to ground fault level is 5000 MVA Neglecting
the resistance and the shunt suspectances of the system.
EE SP 4.103 The positive sequence driving point reactance at the bus is
(A) 2.5 W (B) 4.033 W
nodi a
(C) 5.5 W (D) 12.1 W
EE SP 4.104 The zero sequence driving point reactance at the bus is
(A) 2.2 W (B) 4.84 W
(C) 18.18 W (D) 22.72 W
YEAR 2004 ONE MARK
EE SP 4.105 Total instantaneous power supplied by a 3-phase ac supply to a balanced R-L
load is
(A) zero
(B) constant
(C) pulsating with zero average
(D) pulsating with the non-zero average
EE SP 4.106 The rated voltage of a 3-phase power system is given as
(A) rms phase voltage
(B) peak phase voltage
(C) rms line to line voltage
(D) peak line to line voltage
EE SP 4.107 The phase sequences of the 3-phase system shown in figure is
(A) RYB
(B) RBY
(C) BRY
(D) YBR
EE SP 4.108 In the thermal power plants, the pressure in the working fluid cycle is developed by
(A) condenser (B) super heater
(C) feed water pump (D) turbine
EE SP 4.109 For harnessing low variable waterheads, the suitable hydraulic turbine with high
percentage of reaction and runner adjustable vanes is
(A) Kaplan
(B) Francis
(C) Pelton
(D) Impeller
nodi a
EE SP 4.110 The transmission line distance protection relay having the property of being
inherently directional is
(A) impedance relay
(B) MHO relay
(C) OHM relay
(D) reactance relay
YEAR 2004 TWO MARKS
EE SP 4.111 A 800 kV transmission line is having per phase line inductance of
1.1 mH/km and per phase line capacitance of 11.68 nF/km. Ignoring the length
of the line, its ideal power transfer capability in MW is
(A) 1204 MW (B) 1504 MW
(C) 2085 MW (D) 2606 MW
EE SP 4.112 A 110 kV, single core coaxial, XLPE insulated power cable delivering power at
50 Hz, has a capacitance of 125 nF/km. If the dielectric loss tangent of XLPE is
2 10
4
#
-
, then dielectric power loss in this cable in W/km is
(A) 5.0 (B) 31.7
(C) 37.8 (D) 189.0
EE SP 4.113 A lightning stroke discharges impulse current of 10 kA (peak) on a
400 kV transmission line having surge impedance of 250 W The magnitude
of transient over-voltage travelling waves in either direction assuming equal
distribution from the point of lightning strike will be
(A) 1250 kV (B) 1650 kV
(C) 2500 kV (D) 2900 kV
EE SP 4.114 The generalized circuit constants of a 3-phase, 220 kV rated voltage, medium
length transmission line are
0.936 0.016 0.936 0.98 A D j c + = = + =
35.5 138 142.0 76.4 B j c + W = + =
( 5.18 914) 10 C j
6
# W = - +
-
If the load at the receiving end is 50 MW at 220 kV with a power factor of 0.9
lagging, then magnitude of line to line sending end voltage should be
(A) 133.23 kV (B) 220.00 kV
(C) 230. 78 kV (D) 246.30 kV
EE SP 4.115 A new generator having 1.4 30 E
g
c + = pu. [equivalent to
(1.212 0.70) j + pu] and synchronous reactance ' ' X
S
of 1.0 pu on the system base,
is to be connected to a bus having voltage V
t
, in the existing power system. This
existing power system can be represented by Thevenins voltage 0.9 0 E
th
c + = pu
in series with Thevenins impedance 0.25 90 Z
th
c + = pu. The magnitude of the
bus voltage V
t
of the system in pu will be
(A) 0.990 (B) 0.973
(C) 0.963 (D) 0.900
nodi a
EE SP 4.116 A 3-phase generator rated at 110 MVA, 11 kV is connected through circuit
breakers to a transformer . The generator is having direct axis sub-transient
reactance '' % X 19
d
= , transient reactance ' % X 26
d
= and synchronous reactance
=130%. The generator is operating at no load and rated voltage when a three
phase short circuit fault occurs between the breakers and the transformer . The
magnitude of initial symmetrical rms current in the breakers will be
(A) 4.44 kA (B) 22.20 kA
(C) 30.39 kA (D) 38.45 kA
EE SP 4.117 A 3-phase transmission line supplies 3-connected load Z. The conductor c of
the line develops an open circuit fault as shown in figure. The currents in the
lines are as shown on the diagram. The +ve sequence current component in line
a will be
(A) 5.78 30c +- (B) 5.78 90c +
(C) 6.33 90c + (D) 10.00 30c +-
EE SP 4.118 A 500 MVA, 50 Hz, 3-phase turbo-generator produces power at
22 kV. Generator is Y-connected and its neutral is solidly grounded. It sequence
reactances are 0.15 X X
1 2
= = pu and 0.05 X
0
= pu.It is operating at rated
voltage and disconnected from the rest of the system (no load). The magnitude
of the sub-transient line current for single line to ground fault at the generator
terminal in pu will be
(A) 2.851 (B) 3.333
(C) 6.667 (D) 8.553
EE SP 4.119 A 50 Hz, 4-pole, 500 MVA, 22 kV turbo-generator is delivering rated megavolt-
amperes at 0.8 power factor. Suddenly a fault occurs reducing in electric power
output by 40%. Neglect losses and assume constant power input to the shaft.
The accelerating torque in the generator in MNm at the time of fault will be
(A) 1.528 (B) 1.018
(C) 0.848 (D) 0.509
EE SP 4.120 A hydraulic turbine having rated speed of 250 rpm is connected to a synchronous
generator. In order to produce power at 50 Hz, the number of poles required in
the generator are
(A) 6 (B) 12
(C) 16 (D) 24
nodi a
YEAR 2003 ONE MARK
EE SP 4.121 Bundled conductors are mainly used in high voltage overhead transmission lines
to
(A) reduces transmission line losses
(B) increase mechanical strength of the line
(C) reduce corona
(D) reduce sag
EE SP 4.122 A power system consist of 300 buses out of which 20 buses are generator bus,
25 buses are the ones with reactive power support and 15 buses are the ones
with fixed shunt capacitors. All the other buses are load buses. It is proposed to
perform a load flow analysis in the system using Newton-Raphson method. The
size of the Newton Raphson Jacobian matrix is
(A) 553 553 # (B) 540 540 #
(C) 555 555 # (D) 554 554 #
EE SP 4.123 Choose two appropriate auxiliary components of a HVDC transmission system
from the following
P. D.C line inductor
Q. A.C line inductor
R. Reactive power sources
S. Distance relays on D.C line
T. Series capacitance on A.C. line
(A) P and Q
(B) P and R
(C) Q and S
(D) S and T
EE SP 4.124 A round rotor generator with internal voltage . E 2 0
1
= pu and . X 1 1 = pu is
connected to a round rotor synchronous motor with internal voltage . E 1 3
2
= pu
and 1. X 2 = pu. The reactance of the line connecting the generator to the motor
is 0.5 pu. When the generator supplies 0.5 pu power, the rotor angle difference
between the machines will be
(A) 57.42c (B) 1c
(C) 32.58c (D) 122.58c
EE SP 4.125 The interrupting time of a circuit breaker is the period between the instant of
(A) initiation of short circuit and the arc extinction on an opening operation
(B) energizing of the trip circuit and the arc extinction on an opening
operation
(C) initiation of short circuit and the parting of primary arc contacts
(D) energizing of the trip circuit and the parting of primary arc contacts
nodi a
YEAR 2003 TWO MARKS
EE SP 4.126 The ABCD parameters of a 3-phase overhead transmission line are
0.9 0 , 200 90 A D B c c + + W = = = and 0.95 10 90 C S
3
# + =
% -
. At no-load condition
a shunt inductive, reactor is connected at the receiving end of the line to limit
the receiving-end voltage to be equal to the sending-end voltage. The ohmic
value of the reactor is
(A) 3W (B) 2000 W
(C) 105.26 W (D) 1052.6 W
EE SP 4.127 A surge of 20 kV magnitude travels along a lossless cable towards
its junction with two identical lossless overhead transmission lines.
The inductance and the capacitance of the cable are 0.4 mH and
0.5 F m per km. The inductance and capacitance of the overhead transmission
lines are 1.5 mH and 0.015 F m per km. The magnitude of the voltage at the
junction due to surge is
(A) 36.72 kV (B) 18.36 kV
(C) 6.07 kV (D) 33.93 kV
EE SP 4.128 A dc distribution system is shown in figure with load current as marked. The two
ends of the feeder are fed by voltage sources such that 3 V V
P Q
- = V. The value
of the voltage V
P
for a minimum voltage of 220 V at any point along the feeder is
(A) 225.89 V
(B) 222.89 V
(C) 220.0 V
(D) 228.58 V
EE SP 4.129 A balanced delta connected load of (8 6) j W + per phase is connected to a 400 V,
50 Hz, 3-phase supply lines. If the input power factor is to be improved to 0.9
by connecting a bank of star connected capacitor the required kVAR of the of
the bank is
(A) 42.7 (B) 10.2
(C) 28.8 (D) 38.4
EE SP 4.130 A 3-phase 11 kV generator feeds power to a constant power unity power factor
load of 100 MW through a 3-phase transmission line. The line-to line voltage
at the terminals of the machine is maintained constant at 11 kV. The per unit
positive sequence impedance of the line based on 100 MVA and 11 kV is 0.2 j .
The line to line voltage at the load terminals is measured to be less than 11 kV.
The total reactive power to be injected at the terminals of the load to increase
nodi a
the line-to-line voltage at the load terminals to 11 kV is
(A) 100 MVAR (B) 10.1 MVAR
(C) 100 - MVAR (D) . 10 1 - MVAR
EE SP 4.131 The bus impedance matrix of a 4-bus power system is given by
Z
bus

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
0 3435
0 2860
0 2723
0 2277
0 2860
0 3408
0 2586
0 2414
0 2723
0 2586
0 2791
0 2209
0 2277
0 2414
0 2209
0 2791
=
R
T
S
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
W
A branch having an impedance of 0.2 j W is connected between
bus 2 and the reference. Then the values of Z
22,new
and Z
23,new
of the bus impedance
matrix of the modified network are respectively
(A) . j0 5408 W and . j0 4586 W (B) 0. j 1260 W and . j0 0956 W
(C) . j0 5408 W and . j0 0956 W (D) 0. j 1260 W and 0.1 j 630 W
EE SP 4.132 A 20-MVA, 6.6-kV, 3-phase alternator is connected to a 3-phase transmission line.
The per unit positive-sequence, negative-sequence and zero-sequence impedances
of the alternator are .1 j0 , .1 j0 and 0. j 04 respectively. The neutral of the alternator
is connected to ground through an inductive reactor of 0. j 05 p.u. The per unit
positive-, negative- and zero-sequence impedances of transmission line are
.1 j0 , .1 j0 and 0. j 3, respectively. All per unit values are based on the machine
ratings. A solid ground fault occurs at one phase of the far end of the transmission
line. The voltage of the alternator neutral with respect to ground during the
fault is
(A) 513.8 V (B) 889.9 V
(C) 1112.0 V (D) 642.2 V
EE SP 4.133 Incremental fuel costs (in some appropriate unit) for a power plant consisting of
three generating units are
. , . , I C P I C P I C 20 0 3 30 0 4 30
1 1 2 2 3
= + = + =
Where P
1
is the power in MW generated by unit i for , i 1 2 = and 3. Assume
that all the three units are operating all the time. Minimum and maximum loads
on each unit are 50 MW and 300 MW respectively. If the plant is operating on
economic load dispatch to supply the total power demand of 700 MW, the power
generated by each unit is
(A) 242.86 ; 157.14 ; 300 P P P MW MW and MW
1 2 3
= = =
(B) 157.14 ; 242.86 ; 300 P P P MW MW and MW
1 2 3
= = =
(C) 300 ; 300 ; 100 P P P MW MW and MW
1 2 3
= = =
(D) 233.3 ; 233.3 ; 233.4 P P P MW MW and MW
1 2 3
= = =
EE SP 4.134 A list of relays and the power system components protected by the relays are
given in List-I and List-II respectively. Choose the correct match from the four
choices given below:
List-I List-II
P. Distance relay 1. Transformers
nodi a
Q. Under frequency relay 2. Turbines
R. Differential relay 3. Busbars
S. Buchholz relay 4. Shunt capacitors
5. Alternators
6. Transmission lines
Codes:
P Q R S
(A) 6 5 3 1
(B) 4 3 2 1
(C) 5 2 1 6
(D) 6 4 5 3
EE SP 4.135 A generator delivers power of 1.0 p.u. to an infinite bus through a purely reactive
network. The maximum power that could be delivered by the generator is 2.0
p.u. A three-phase fault occurs at the terminals of the generator which reduces
the generator output to zero. The fault is cleared after t
c
second. The original
network is then restored. The maximum swing of the rotor angle is found to be
110
max
d = electrical degree. Then the rotor angle in electrical degrees at t t
c
= is
(A) 55 (B) 70
(C) 69.14 (D) 72.4
EE SP 4.136 A three-phase alternator generating unbalanced voltages is connected to an
unbalanced load through a 3-phase transmission line as shown in figure. The neutral
of the alternator and the star point of the load are solidly grounded. The phase
voltages of the alternator are 10 0 , 10 90 , 10 120 E E E V V V
a b c
c c c + + + = = - =
. The positive-sequence component of the load current is
(A) 1.310 107c +- A (B) 0.332 120c +- A
(C) 0.996 120c +- A (D) 3.510 81c +- A
***********
nodi a
SOLUTI ON
SOL 4.1 Correct option ( C).
We have the given system as
As fault always require/demand reactive power, so voltage should lead current.
Using this condition, we have the following observations for the given system:
At fault F
2
which is not near to source require reactive power, hence
V
F2
leads I
F2
Fault F
1
is near the source, so the current will lead voltage for active requirements,
i.e.
V
F1
lags I
F1
As the winding and neutral has affect then we represent transformer in zero
sequence network using switch diagram.
Switches 1, 1l " Primary
Switches 2, 2l, " Secondary winding
1, 2 " Series switches
1l, 2l " Shunt switches
Series switches are closed when transformer is star-connected.
Shunt switches are closed when transformer is delta-connected.
For ground effect X 3
0
.
Here, on T
1
side series switch are closed hence star-connection and grounded due
nodi a
to X 3
Gn
. On T
2
side, shunt switches are closed hence one delta and one star with
ground.
T
1
:
T
2
:
For the unbalanced three phase system, we have
I
a1
pu 1 90c = - ;
I
b2
pu 4 150c = - ;
I
c0
pu 3 90c =
The phase current is given by
I
a
I I I
a a a 1 2 0
= + + ...(i)
Now, we have
I
b2
I
a2
a =
So, for the given system
4 150c - I 1 120
a2
c =
or I
a2
4 270c = -
Also, we have
I
a0
I I 3 90
b c 0 0
c = = =
Substituting these values in equation (i), we get
I
a
I 1 90 4 270 3 90
a1
c c c = - = + - +
or I
a1
1 90 4 270 3 90 c c c = - - - -
8 90c = -
So, I
b1
I
a
2
1
a =
1 240 8 90 8 150
#
c c c = - =
Thus, we obtain
I
b
I I I
b b b 1 2 0
= + +
8 150 4 150 3 90 c c c = + - +
. . pu 11 53 154 3c =
Given the three phase synchronous generator,
nodi a
If all the bulbs glow dark simultaneously, then all the gear and infinite bus
are in same phase sequence. But, in the given problem, they are coming in
sequence (not simultaneously) L
a
then L
b
, and then L
c
. So, phase sequence of
the generator is opposite to infinite bus system and frequency is high (as dark
period is for more time).
We have the distribution feeder as
Let current I be supplied by source s
1 ^ h, and r be the resistance per unit length.
Applying KVL, we get
r I r I r I r I 400 400 200 200 200 300 200 500
#
- - - - - - - ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ h h h h h h h 400 =
or I r I r r I r r I r r 400 200 40000 200 60000 200 100000 0 + - + - + - =
or I r 1000 r 200000 =
So, I A 200 =
So, we redraw the current in distribution system as
Thus, the contribution of source s
1 ^ h in A 100 load at P is A 0 , and the contribution
of s
2
in A 100 load at P is 100 A.
Given the two bus power system,
nodi a
Now, the current through impedance Z is given by
I
Z
V V
1 2
=
-
For the given system, we have
V
1
V 0
1
c = ; V 1
2 2
d = , . z 0 1 90c =
So, we obtain the current
I q
.
.
V
j
0 1 90
0 1
1 0 5
1 2
c
c d
=
-
= +
or V 0 1
1 2
c d - . . 0 11 116 56 =
or cos sin V j
1 2 2
d d - - ^ h . . . cos sin j 0 11 116 56 116 36 c c = + 6 @
Comparing the real and imaginary terms, we get
sin
2
d - . . sin 0 11 116 36
#
c =
or sin
2
d - . 0 098 =
or
2
d . 5 65c =-
Also, cos V
1 2
d - . . cos 0 11 116 56c =
or V
1
. 1 05 =
The fuel cost functions for plant P
1
and P
2
are
C
1
. P AP B 0 05
g g 1
2
1
= + + ...(i)
C
2
. P AP B 0 10 3 2
g g 2
2
2
= + + ...(ii)
Given P P
g g 1 2
+ MW 1000 = ...(iii)
and
dP
dC
g
1
1

dP
dC
100
g
2
2
= = ...(iv)
Also, from equations (i) and (ii), we have

dP
dC
g
1
1
. P A 2 0 05
g1
#
= +

dP
dC
g
2
2
. P A 2 0 10 3
g2
#
= +
Substituting equation (iii) in above expressions, we get

.
.
. .
P A
P A
P P
0 1 100
0 2 3 100
0 3 0 2 200
g
g
g g
1
2
1 2
+ =
+ =
- = ...(v)
Hence, solving the equations (iii) and (v), we obtain
P
g1
MW 800 =
and P
g2
MW 200 =
Therefore, the ratio of load shared by plants P
1
and P
2
is

P
P
g
g
2
1

200
800
1
4
= =
We have the circuit,
nodi a
The operating time of relays is given as
t
op

plug setting multiplier 1
0.14 Time multiplier setting (TMS)
0.02
#
=
-
^ h
...(i)
For relay R
B
, we have
TMS . 0 1 =
PSM
maximumfault current
CT ratio
=

/
2
500 5
000
20 = =
Substituting the values in equation (i), we get
t
op

. .
.
. .
20
1
0 14 0 1
0 617
0 14 0 1
. 0 02
# #
=
-
=
^ h
. 0 226 =
p.u. value
Base value in same units
Acual value in same units
=
Base voltage
MVA
Base Current
Base
=
Base voltage
. A 437 38
100 10
6
#
= . kV 228 63 =
0.9 p.u.
. kV
Actual value
228 63
=
V
actual
. . kV 228 63 0 9
#
=
. kV 205 77 =
As load is star connected
V
L L -

. kV V
3 3
205 77
acutal
= =
V
L L -
. kV 118 80 =
Shunt reactors are used in high voltage transmission system to limit over voltages
at the load side under lightly loaded condition.
As active power in synchronous generator is given by
P sin
X
E V
s
f
d = d = Load angle
0.6
.
.
sin
1 1
1 3 1
#
d = { . pu E 1 3
f
= , pu V 1 = , . pu X 1 1
s
= , . pu P 0 6 = }
sind
.
. .
1 3 1
0 6 1 1
#
#
=
sind . 0 5077 =
nodi a
d . 30 504c =
Reactive power is given by
Q cos
X
E V
X
V
s
f
s
2
d = -

.
.
.
.
cos
1 1
1 3 1
30 504
1 1
1
2
#
c = - ^ h
Q . . . 1 1818 0 8616 0 9090
#
= -
Q . pu 0 1092 =
Since the generators are in parallel, they will operate at the same frequency f ^ h
at steady loss. Let load on generator G
1
is P
1
and on G
2
is P
2
. Then we can write
for generator G
1

.
P
f 51 5
1
-
= droop constant

.
P
f 51 5
1
-
1 =
. f 51 5 - P
1
= ...(i)
Now in steady state total load is . MW 2 5 , so load by second generator is . P 2 5
1
- ^ h
. For G
2
we write

. P
f
2 5
51
1
-
-
1 =
f 51 - . P 2 5
1
= - ...(ii)
Adding eq (i) and (ii), we get
. f f 51 5 51 - + - . P P 2 5
1 1
= + -
. f 102 5 2 - . 2 5 =
f 2 100 =
f Hz 50 =
C
ln
d
d
2
1
2
0
pe
=
b l
d
2
= distance b/w two sphere, d
1
= radius of first sphere

.
.
ln
0 8
600
2 8 85 10
12
# # #
p
=
-
b l
C . / F m 8 39 10
12
#
=
-
C . F 8 39 10 10
12 3
# #
=
- -
C
eq
. F 8 4 10
9
#
.
-
For single line-to-ground fault, the symmetrical component of current (in pu)
I
a1

. . .
. pu
z z z
E
0 2 0 2 0 05
1
2 22
a
0 1 2
1
=
+ +
=
+ +
=
The magnitude of fault current
I I 3
f a1
= . . pu 3 2 22 6 67
#
= =
Base value of current
nodi a
I
base
. A
3 25 10
100 10
2309 40
3
6
# #
#
= =
So actual value of fault current
I
f
. . 6 67 2309 40
#
= . A 15403 698 =
For a transmission line to be distortionless, the required condition is

L
R

C
G
=
where G = shunt conductance (in siemens/meter)
C = capacitance (in Farad/meter)
R = Resistance (in ohm/meter)
L = inductance (in henries per meter)
So, for the given parameters of long transmission line, the required condition for
distortionless transmission becomes

l
r

c
g
=
or rc lg =
A fully transposed transmission line is completely symmetrically and therefore
the phase impedance offered by it is independent of phase sequence of a balanced
set of current. In other word impedance offered by it to positive and negative
sequence currents are equal.
Given, number of PQ buses 150 =
number of PV buses 32 =
For PQ buses, 2 equations are formed (one for P and other for Q)
For PV buses only 1 equation is formed (for Q only)
Thus, the minimum number of simultaneous equations, required to obtain the
load, is
Total number of equations = Number of equation for PQ buses +
Number of equation for PV buses.
2
#
= (number of PQ buses) 1
#
+ (number of PV buses)
( ) ( ) 2 150 1 32
# #
= +
332 =
SOL 4.18 Correct answer is 187
SOL 4.19 Correct answer is 0.75kVAR.
Given the constant voltage load,
P jQ
1 1
+
where kW 1 . kW P 1 5 < <
1
and . kVAR 0 5 kVAR Q 1
1
# #
Now, the shunt capacitor is chosen such that reactive power across capacitor
nodi a
load is
Q . kVAR 0 25 #
Since, we have Q
1
kVAR 1 = , therefore, capacitor will supply
Q
C
. kVAR 75 =
i.e. capacitor must supply . kVAR 75 .
Consider the voltage phase angles at buses 2 and 3 be Q
2
and Q
3
since, all the
three buses have the equal voltage magnitude which is Pu 1 so, it is a . . D C load
flow. The injections at Bus 2 and 3 are respectively
P
2
0.1 pu =
P
3
0.2 pu =-
Therefore, the phase angles are obtained as

2
3
q
q
> H B
P
P
1
2
3
=
-
6
>
@
H
where B 6 @ is obtained as
B 6 @
X X
X
X
X X
1 1
1
1
1 1
12 23
23
23
23 13
=
+
-
+
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W

1 1
1
1
1 1
2
1
1
2
=
+
-
-
+
=
-
-
> > H H
Its inverse is obtained as
B
1 -
6 @
2
1
1
2
1
=
-
-
-
> H
.
. 3
1
2
1
1
2
0 1
0 2
=
+ -
> > H H
Therefore,

2
3
q
q
> H
.
. 3
1
2
1
1
2
0 1
0 2
=
+ -
> > H H
. 3
1
0
0 3
=
-
> H
.
0
0 1
=
-
> H
i.e.,
2
q 0 =
and
3
q 0.1 rad =-
From the above solution, we have
P
2
. 0 1 =
P
3
. 0 2 =-
since,
P P P
1 2 3
+ + 0 = (Where P
1
is injection at bus 1)
So, P
1
0.1 0.2 0.1 pu P P
2 3
- - =- + =
Now, the apparent power delivered to base is
S
R
V
100
100 10
2
3 2
#
= =
^ h
100 10 VA
6
#
=
Therefore, the real power delivered by slack bus (bus 1)
P . 100 10 P S 0 1
1
6
# #
= =^ h
nodi a
10 10 watt
6
#
= 10 MW =
For bus admittance matrix,
( ) Y Y y Y
line 11 12 13
+ + + 0 =
( ) j j y j 13 10 5
line
- + + + 0 =
y
line
j 2 =-
Magnitude of susceptance is 2 +
( ) i t
1
( ) sin I t
m 1
w f = -
( ) i t
2
( ) cos I t
m 2
w f = -
We know that, ( ) cos 90c q - sinq =
So, ( ) i t
1
can be written as
( ) i t
1
( ) cos I t 90
m 1
c w f = - -
( ) i t
2
( ) cos I t
m 2
w f = -
Now, in phasor form I
1
I 90
m 1
c f = +
I
2
I
m 2
f =
Current are balanced if I I
1 2
+ 0 =
I I 90
m m 1 2
c f f + + 0 =
cos sin cos sin I jI j 90 90
m m 1 1 2 2
c c f f f f + + + + +
^ ^ h h
0 =
cos sin cos sin I j I j 90 90
2 2 m m 1 1
c c f f f f + + + + +
^ ^ h h 8 6 B @
0 =
cos cos sin sin I jI 90 90
m m 1 2 2 1
c c f f f f + + + + +
^ ^ h h 8 8 B B
0 =
cos cos 90
1 2
c f f + +
^ h
0 =
cos 90
1
c f +
^ h
cos cos
2 2
f p f =- = +
^ h
90
1
c f +
2
p f = +
or,
1
f
2
2
p
f = +
Let penalty factor of plant G, is L
1
given as
L
1

P
P
1
1
G
L
1
2
2
=
-
P
L
. P 0 5
G
2
1
=

P
P
G
L
2
2
2
. ( ) P P 0 5 2
G G 1 1
= =
So, L
1

P 1
1
G2
=
-
Penalty factor of plant G
2
is
L
2

P
P
1
1
1
G
L
2
2
2
=
-
=
P
P
0
G
L
2
a
2
2
=
c m
For economic power generation
C L
1 1 #
C L
2 2 #
=
where C
1
and C
2
are the incremental fuel cost of plant G
1
and G
2
.
nodi a
So, ( )
P
10000
1
1
G2
-
b l
12500 1
#
=

5
4
P 1
G2
= -
P
G2
pu
5
1
=
It is an 100 MVA, so P
G2
100 20 MW
5
1
#
= =
Loss P
L
0.5 pu
5
1
50
1
2
= =
b l
or P
L
100 2 MW
50
1
#
= =
Total power, P
L
P P P
G G L 1 2
= + -
40 P 20 2
2
= + -
P
G2
22 MW =
For double line-to-ground (LLG) fault, relation between sequence current is
I
positive
I I
negative zero
=- +
^ h
Gives values satisfy this relation, therefore the type of fault is LLG.
Complex power for generator
S
G1
1 1 2 pu S S
D D 1 2
= + = + = (Line is lossless)
Power transferred from bus 1 to bus 2 is 1 pu, so
1
( ) sin
X
V V
1 2 1 2
q q
=
-

.
( ) sin
0 5
1 1
1 2
#
q q = -
0.5
pu
pu X
V V 1
1 2
= =
=
0.5 ( ) sin
1 2
q q = -

1 2
q q - 30c =

2
q 30 30
1
c c q = - =- ( ) 0
1
c q =
So, V
1
1 V 0c =
V
2
1 V 30c = -
Current, I
12

.
1 1
Z j
V V
0 5
0 30
1 2
c c
=
-
=
-

(1 0.288) pu j = -
Current in S
D2
is I
2
, S
D2
V I
2 2
=
)
1 1 I 30
2
c = -
)
I
2
1 pu 30c = -
Current in Q
G2
, I
G
I I
2 12
= - ( . ) j 1 30 1 0 288 c = - - -
. 0 268 120c = -
VAR rating of capacitor,
Q
C
1 0.268 0.268 pu V V
G 2 #
= = =
nodi a
Total reactance, X 1 0.5 1.5 pu j j j = + =
Critical angle is given as,
cr
d [( ) ] cos sin cos 2
1
0 0 0
p d d d = - -
-
...(i)
0
" d steady state torque angle.
Steady state power is given as
P
m
sin P
max 0
d =
where, P
max

X
E V
=
So, P
m
sin
X
E V
0
d =
. 0 5
.
( . )( )
sin
1 5
1 5 1
0
d = 0.5 pu P
m
=
sin
0
d . 0 5 =

0
d 30c =
In radian,
0
d . 30
180
0 523
#
c
c
p
= =
Substituting
0
d into equation (i)

cr
d [( . ) ] cos sin cos 2 0 523 30 30
1
#
c c p = - -
-
[( . )( . ) . ] cos 2 095 0 5 0 866
1
= -
-
( . ) cos 0 1815
1
=
-
. 79 6c -
Negative phase sequence relay is used for the protection of alternators against
unbalanced loading that may arise due to phase-to-phase faults.
Steady state stability or power transfer capability
P
max

X
E V
=
To improve steady state limit, reactance X should be reduced. The stability may
be increased by using two parallel lines. Series capacitor can also be used to get
a better regulation and to increase the stability limit by decreasing reactance.
Hence (C) is correct option.
We know that
loss P
G
2
\
loss length \
Distance of load from G
1
is 25 km Distance of load from & G G
2 3
is 75 km
generally we supply load from nearest generator. So maximum of load should be
nodi a
supplied from G
1
. But & G G
2 3
should be operated at same minimum generation.
Power angle for salient pole alternator is given by
tand
cos
sin
V I R
V I X
t a a
t a q
f
f
=
+
+
Since the alternator is delivering at rated kVA rated voltage
I
a
1 pu =
V
t
1 pu =
f 0c =
sinf , cos 0 1 f = =
X
q
1 , 1.2 pu pu X
d
= =
tand
( )
1 0
1 0 1 1
#
=
+
+

1 = & d 45c =
The admittance diagram is shown below
Here y
10
, , . , j y j y j y j 10 5 12 5 10
12 23 30
=- =- = =-
Note: y
23
is taken positive because it is capacitive.
Y
11
y y
10 12
= + j j 10 5 =- - j 15 =-
Y
12
Y y j 5
21 21
= =- =
Y
13
0 Y y
31 13
= =- =
Y
22
y y y
20 21 23
= + + ( ) ( . ) j j 0 5 12 5 = + - + . j 7 5 =
Y
23
. Y y j 12 5
32 23
= =- =-
Y
33
y y y
30 13 23
= + +
. j j 10 0 12 5 =- + + . j 2 5 =
So the admittance matrix is
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
11
21
31
12
22
32
13
33
33
=
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
.
.
.
.
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
15
5
0
5
7 5
12 5
0
12 5
2 5
=
-
-
-
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
For generator G
1
X
G1
m 0.25 0.1
250
100
pu
#
= =
For generator G
2
X
G1
m 0. 0.1 10
100
100
pu
#
= =
X
L2
.225 10 2.25 X 0
L1
W
#
= = =
nodi a
For transmission lines L
1
and L
2
Z
MVA
kV
base
base
base
2
= 2.25
100
15 15
#
W = =
( ) pu X
L2
m
.
.
1 pu
2 25
2 25
= =
( ) pu X
L1
m
.
.
1 pu
2 25
2 25
= =
So the equivalent pu reactance diagram
We can see that at the bus 3, equivalent thevenins impedance is given by
X
th
. . | | . . j j j j 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 = + +
^ ^ h h

1.1 | | 1.1 j j = 0.55 j pu =
Fault MVA
X
Base MVA
th
=

.
181.82
0 55
100
MVA = =
Given that,
I 0 >
a V
AB
0 > since it is Rectifier O/P
V
CD
0 > since it is Inverter I/P
a I 0 > so V
AB
V >
CD
, Than current will flow in given direction.
Given step voltage travel along lossless transmission line.
Voltage wave terminated at reactor as.
nodi a
Applying KVL
V V
L
+ 0 =
V
L
V =-
V
L
1 =- pu
Given two buses connected by an Impedance of ( ) j 0 5 W +
The Bus 1 voltage is 100 30c + V and Bus 2 voltage is 100 0c + V
We have to calculate real and reactive power supply by bus 1
P jQ + VI =
)

j
100 30
5
100 30 100 0
c
c c
+
+ +
=
-
; E
100 30 [20 60 20 90 ] c c c + + + = - - -
2000 30 200 60 0 c c + + = - - -
P jQ + 1035 15c + =
Real power P 1035 15 1000 cos W c = =
Reactive power Q 1035 15 sin c = 268 VAR =
Given 3-f, 33 kV oil circuit breaker.
Rating 1200 A, 2000 MVA, 3 sec
Symmetrical breaking current ? I
b
=
I
b

MVA
3 kV
kA =
34.99
3 33
2000
kA
#
= = 35 - kA
Given a stator winding of an alternator with high internal resistance fault as
shown in figure
Current through operating coil
I
1
220
400
5
#
= A, I 250
400
5
2 #
= A
Operating coil current I I
2 1
= -
nodi a
( ) / 250 220 5 400
#
= -
. 0 375 = Amp
Zero sequence circuit of 3-f transformer shown in figure is as following:
No option seems to be appropriate but (C) is the nearest.
Given that
A 50 Hz Generator is initially connected to a long lossless transmission line
which is open circuited as receiving end as shown in figure.
Due to ferranti effect the magnitude of terminal voltage does not change, and the
field current decreases.
Given : 3-f, 50 Hz, 11 kV distribution system, We have to find out , ? e e
1 2
=
Equivalent circuit is as following
e
1

( )
3.46
C C
C
6 5
3
11
6
3
11
11
6
#
=
+
= = kV
e
2

3
11
11
5
#
=
2.89 = kV
Given : 3-f, 50 Hz, 11 kV cable
C
1
0.2 F m =
C
2
0.4 F m =
Charging current I
C
per phase ? =
Capacitance Per Phase, C C C 3
1 2
= +
C 3 0.2 0.4 1 F
#
m = + =
nodi a
w 2 314 f p = =
Changing current I
C
( )
X
V
V C
C
w = =

3
11 10
314 1 10
3
6 #
# # #
=
-
2 = Amp
Generator G
1
and G
2
X
G1
X X
Old MVA
New MVA
New kV
Old kV
G2
2
old # #
= =
b l
0.9 0.18 j j
100
200
25
25
2
# #
= =
b l
Same as X
T1
0.12 0.27 j j
90
200
25
25
2
# #
= =
b l
X
T2
. . j j 0 12
90
200
25
25
0 27
2
# #
= =
b l
X
Line

( )
. j 150
220
220
0 62
2
#
= =
The Impedance diagram is being given by as
We know complex power
S ( ) cos sin P jQ VI j f f = + = + VI e
j
=
f
I
Ve
S
j
=
f
a Real Power loss I R
2
=
P
L

Ve
S
R
e
S R
V
1
j j
2
2
2
2
#
= =
f f c m

e
S R
Constant
j2
2
a =
f
So P
L

V
1
2
\
Y
Bus
matrix of Y-Bus system are given as
Y
Bus

. .
.
.
j
5
2
2 5
0
2
10
2 5
4
2 5
2 5
9
4
0
0
4
8
=
-
-
-
-
R
T
S
S
S
S
SS
V
X
W
W
W
W
WW
We have to find out the buses having shunt element
nodi a
We know Y
Bus

y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
11
21
31
41
12
22
32
42
13
23
33
43
14
24
34
44
=
R
T
S
S
S
S
SS
V
X
W
W
W
W
WW
Here y
11
y y y y j 5
10 12 13 14
= + + + =-
y
22
y y y y j 10
20 21 23 24
= + + + =-
y
33
y y y y j 9
30 31 32 34
= + + + =-
y
44
y y y y j 8
40 41 42 43
= + + + =-
y
12
y y j 2
21 12
= =- =
y
13
. y y j 2 5
31 13
= =- =
y
14
y y j 0
41 14
= =- =
y
23
. y y j 2 5
32 23
= =- =
y
24
y y j 4
42 24
= =- =
So y
10
5 2 2.5 0 0.5 y y y y j j j j j
11 12 13 14
= - - - =- + + + =-
y
20
. . y y y y j j j j j 10 2 2 5 4 1 5
22 12 23 24
= - - - =- + + + =-
y
30
. . y y y y j j j j 9 2 5 2 5 4 0
33 31 32 34
= - - - =- + + + =
y
40
y y y y j j j 8 0 4 4 0
44 41 42 43
= - - - =- - + + =
Admittance diagram is being made by as
From figure. it is cleared that branch (1) & (2) behaves like shunt element.
We know that
Shunt Capacitors are used for improving power factor.
Series Reactors are used to reduce the current ripples.
For increasing the power flow in line we use series capacitor.
Shunt reactors are used to reduce the Ferranti effect.
We know that for different type of transmission line different type of distance
relays are used which are as follows.
Short Transmission line -Ohm reactance used
Medium Transmission Line -Reactance relay is used
nodi a
Long Transmission line -Mho relay is used
Given that three generators are feeding a load of 100 MW. For increased load
power demand, Generator having better regulation share More power, so
Generator -1 will share More power than Generator -2.
Given Synchronous generator of 500 MW, 21 kV, 50 Hz, 3-f, 2-pole
0.9 P.F = , Moment of inertia 27.5 10 M
3
#
= kg-m
2
Inertia constant H ? =
Generator rating in MVA G
.
500
555.56
cos
P
0 9
MW
MVA
f
= = =
N 3000
2
120 50
pole
120 f
# #
= = = rpm
Stored K.E
2
2
1
2
1
60
M M
N 2
2
w
p
= =
b l
27.5 10
2
1
60
2 3000
MJ
3
# # #
#
p
=
b l
1357.07 MJ =
Inertia constant ( ) H
Rating of Generator (MVA)
Stored K.E
=
H
.
.
555 56
1357 07
=
2.44 sec =
Given for X to F section of phase a
V
a
-Phase voltage and I
a
-phase current.
Impedance measured by ground distance,
Relay at X
Current fromphase 'a'
Bus voltage
=
I
V
a
a
W =
For EHV line given data is
Length of line 300 = km and . 0 00127 b = S rad/km
wavelength l
.
2
.
2
0 00127
4947 39
b
p p
= = = km
So %
l
l

.
.
4947 39
300
100 0 06063 100
# #
= =
%
l
l
6.063 =
For three phase transmission line by solving the given equation
We get,
V
V
V
a
b
c
D
D
D
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W

( )
( )
( )
X X
X X
X X
I
I
I
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
s m
s m
s m
a
b
c
=
-
-
+
R
T
S
S
S
S
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
V
X
W
W
W
W
Zero sequence Impedance 2 48 X X
s m
= + = ...(1)
nodi a
and Positive Sequence Impedance Negative Sequence Impedance =
( ) X X
s m
= -
15 = ...(2)
By solving equation (1) and (2)
Z X or
s s
26 = and 11 Z X or
m m
=
SIL has no effect of compensation
So SIL 2280 = MW
Given P P
G1 G2
+ 250 = MW ...(1)
and
( )
( )
C P
C P
1
2
G1
G2

.
.
P P
P P
0 055
3 0 03
G1 G1
2
G2 G2
2
= +
= +
4
...(2)
from equation (2)

dP
dC
1
G1
1 0.11P
G1
= + ...(3a)
and
dP
dC
2
G2
3 0.06P
G2
= + ...(3b)
Since the system is loss-less
Therefore
dP
dC
1
G1

dP
dC
2
G2
=
So from equations (3a) and (3b)
We have 0.11 0.06 P P
2 G1 G
- 2 = ...(4)
Now solving equation (1) and (4), we get
P
G1
100 = MW
P
G2
150 = MW
After connecting both the generators in parallel and scheduled to supply 0.5 Pu
of power results the increase in the current.
` Critical clearing time will reduced from 0.28 s but will not be less than 0.14 s
for transient stability purpose.
Given that the each section has equal impedance.
Let it be R or Z, then by using the formula
line losses I R
2
= /
On removing ( ); e
1
losses ( ) (1 2) (1 2 5) R R R 1
2 2 2
= + + + + +
R R R R 9 64 74 = + + =
Similarly,
On removing e
2
;losses ( ) ( ) R R R 5 5 2 5 2 1
2 2 2
= + + + + + R 138 =
lossess on removing e
3
(1) ( ) ( ) R R R 2 5 2
2 2 2
= + + +
R R R 1 4 49 = + + R 54 =
nodi a
on removing e
4
lossless ( ) ( ) R R R 2 2 1 5
2 2 2
= + + +
R R R 4 9 25 = + + R 38 =
So, minimum losses are gained by removing e
4
branch.
Given : ( ) V t ( ) cos V t
m
w =
For symmetrical 3 f - fault, current after the fault
( ) i t ( ) cos Ae
Z
V
t
2 ( / ) R L t m
w a = + -
-
At the instant of fault i.e t t
0
= , the total current ( ) i t 0 =
` 0 ( ) cos Ae
Z
V
t
2 ( / ) R L t m
0
0
w a = + -
-
Ae
( / ) R L t0 -
( ) cos
Z
V
t
2
m
0
w a =- -
Maximum value of the dc offset current
Ae
( / ) R L t0 -
( ) cos
Z
V
t
2
m
0
w a =- -
For this to be negative max.
( ) t
0
w a - 0 =
or t
0

w
a
= ...(1)
and Z . . j 0 004 0 04 = +
Z 0.0401995 84.29 Z c + + a = =
a 84.29 1.471 or c = rad.
From equation (1)
t
0

( )
.
.
2 50
1 471
0 00468
#
p
= = sec
t
0
. 4 682 = ms
Since the fault F is at mid point of the system, therefore impedance seen is
same from both sides.

Z
2
. . 0 0201 84 29c + =
Z
1
(Positive sequence)
Z
2
= . . 0 0201 84 29c + =
also Z Z Z
1 2 0
= = (for 3-f fault)
` ( ) I pu
f

. . Z
1 0
0 0201 84 29
1 0
1
c
c
c +
+
+
= =
So magnitude I
f
(p.u.)
. 49 8 =
nodi a
` Fault current I
f
49.8
3 400
100
#
#
= 7.18 = kA
If fault is LG in phase a
Z
1
. .
Z
2
0 0201 84 29c + = =
Z
2
. . Z 0 0201 84 29
1
c + = =
and Z
0
. . Z 3 0 0603 84 29
1
c + = =
Then / I 3
a
I I I
a a a 1 2 0
= = =
( ) I pu
a1

.
Z Z Z
1 0 0
1 2 0
c +
=
+ +
and I
a1

( . . . )
.
.
0 0201 0 0201 0 0603
1 0
9 95 =
+ +
= pu
Fault Current I
f
. I I 3 29 85
a a1
= = = pu
So Fault current I
f
. 29 85
3 400
100
#
#
= . 4 97 = kA
a Equal Phase shift of point A & B with respect to source from both bus paths.
So the type of transformer Y-Y with angle 0c.
Given incremental cost curve
P P
A B
+ 700 = MW
nodi a
For optimum generator ? P
A
= , ? P
B
=
From curve, maximum incremental cost for generator A
600 = at 450 MW
and maximum incremental cost for generator B
800 = at 400 MW
minimum incremental cost for generator B
650 = at 150 MW
Maximim incremental cost of generation A is less than the minimum incremental
constant of generator B. So generator A operate at its maximum load 450 = MW
for optimum generation.
P
A
450 = MW
P
B
(700 450) = -
250 = MW
Here power sharing between the AC line and HVDC link can be changed by
controlling the HVDC converter alone because before changing only grid angle
we can change the power sharing between the AC line and HVDC link.
We have to find out maximum electric field intensity at various points. Electric
field intensity is being given by as follows
From figures it is cleared that at point Y there is minimum chances of cancelation.
So maximum electric field intensity is at point Y.
To increase capacitive dc voltage slowly to a new steady state value first we have
to make ve d =- than we have to reach its original value.
nodi a
Given that
Reactance of line . 0 045 = pu
.
L
2 50
045
&
#
p
=
Suspectance of Line . 1 2 = pu
.
C
2 50
1
1 2
1
&
#
#
p
=
Velocity of wave propagation 3 10
5
#
= Km/sec
Length of line l ? =
We know velocity of wave propagation
V
X

LC
l
=
l V LC
X
=

.
.
3 10
2 50
45
2 50
1
1 2
1 5
#
#
#
#
#
p p
= 185 = Km
Due to the fault F at the mid point and the failure of circuit-breaker 4 the
sequence of circuit-breaker operation will be 5, 6, 7, 3, 1, 2 (as given in options)
(due to the fault in the particular zone, relay of that particular zone must
operate first to break the circuit, then the back-up protection applied if any
failure occurs.)
R [ ] V V V
i
i
i
0
0
0
an bn cn
a
b
c
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
= -
-
-
R
T
S
S
S
S
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
V
X
W
W
W
W
Solving we get
R ( ) ( ) ( )
V
i i
V
i i
V
i i
3 3 3
an
b c
bn
c a
c
a b
= - + - + -
; E
R 3( ) VI = , where
( ) i i
I
3
b c
-
= and V V
an
=
Here P
1
power before the tripping of one ckt "
P
2
Power after tripping of one ckt "
P sin
X
EV
d =
Since P
max

X
EV
=
nodi a
` P
max 2

X
EX
2
= , here, [ (0.1 )( )] X X pu
2
= +
To find maximum value of X for which system does not loose synchronism
P
2
P
m
= (shown in above figure)
` sin
X
EV
2
2
d P
m
=
as 1 1.0 1.0 P E V pu, pu, pu
m
= = =

. .
sin
X
1 0 1 0
130
2
#
c 1 =
& X
2
. 0 77 =
& (0.1 ) X + . 0 77 =
& X 0.67 =
Given that F
P
KAF
S
= ...(1)
where, Phase component F
P
f
f
f
a
b
c
=
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
, sequence component F
S
f
f
f
p
n
o
=
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
and A
1 1 1
1
1
2
2
a
a
a
a
=
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
`
V
I
P
P

KAV
KAI
S
S
=
=
3
...(2)
and V
S
[ ] Z I
S
= l ...(3)
where Zl
.
0.
.
0 5
0
0
0
5
0
0
0
2 0
=
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
We have to find out Z if V
P
ZI
P
= ...(4)
V
P
[ ] KAZ I
S
= l
V
P
KAZ
K
A
I
p
1
=
-
l
b l
V
P
AZ A I
p
1
=
-
l ...(5)
A
1 1 1
1
1
2
2
a
a
a
a
=
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
A
1 -

A
A Adj
=
A Adj
1
1
1 1 1
2
2
a
a
a
a =
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
A
3
1
=
A
1 -

3
1
1
1
1 1 1
2
2
a
a
a
a =
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
nodi a
From equation (5)
V
p

.
. I
3
1
1 1 1
1
1
0 5
0
0
0
0 5
0
0
0
2
1
1
1 1 1
p
2
2
2
2
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a =
R
T
S
S
S
S
R
T
S
S
S
S
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
V
X
W
W
W
W
V
X
W
W
W
W
.
.
.
.
.
. I
1
0 5
0 5
0 5
1
0 5
0 5
0 5
1
p
=
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
...(6)
Comparing of equation (5) and (6)
Z .
.
.
.
.
.
1
0 5
0 5
0 5
1
0 5
0 5
0 5
1
=
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
Given that the first two power system are not connected and separately loaded.
Now these are connected by short transmission line.
as P P Q Q 0
1 2 1 2
= = = =
So here no energy transfer. The bus bar voltage and phase angle of each system
should be same than angle difference is
q 30 20 c c = - 10c =
Given that, 230 V, 50 Hz, 3-f, 4-wire system
Load 4 kw P = = at unity Power factor
I 0
N
= through the use of pure inductor and capacitor
Than L ? = , ? C =
a I
N
0 I I I
A B C
= = + + ...(1)
Network and its Phasor is being as
Here the inductor is in phase B and capacitor is in Phase C.
We know P VI =
So I
a
.
V
P
230
4 10
17 39
3
#
= = = Amp.
From equation (1)
I
A
( ) I I
B C
=- + I I
b c
a -
` I
A
I I
2
3
2
3
B C # #
=- +
c m

` I
A
I I 3 3
B C
= =
I
B

.
10 I
3
17 39
C
- - = Amp
Now X
C

I
V
10
230
23
C
- W = =
and X
C

fC 2
1
p
=
nodi a
& C
fX 2
1
2 50 23
1
C # # p p
= = 139.02 F m =
X
L

I
V
10
230
23
L
- W = = 2 fL p =
& L 72.95
f
X
2 2 100
23
L
# p p
= = = mH
So L = 72.95 mH in phase B
C = 139.02 F m in phase C
Maximum continuous power limit of its prime mover with speed governor of 5%
droop.
Generator feeded to three loads of 4 MW each at 50 Hz.
Now one load Permanently tripped
` f 48 = Hz
If additional load of 3.5 MW is connected than ? f =
a Change in Frequency w.r.t to power is given as
f D
rated power
drop out frequency
Change in power
#
=
. . %
15
5
3 5 1 16
#
= = 1.16 0.58
100
50
Hz
#
= =
Systemfrequency is 50 .58 0 = -
49.42 Hz =
With the help of physical length of line, we can recognize line as short, medium
and long line.
For capacitor bank switching vacuum circuit breaker is best suited in view of
cost and effectiveness.
Ratio of operating coil current to restraining coil current is known as bias in
biased differential relay.
HVDC links consist of rectifier, inverter, transmission lines etc, where rectifier
consumes reactive power from connected AC system and the inverter supplies
power to connected AC system.
Given ABCD constant of 220 kV line
.94 10 A D 0 c + = = , B 130 730c + = , . C 0 001 900c + = , V 240
S
= kV
% voltage regulation is being given as
%V.R.
( )
( ) ( )
V
V V
100
Full load
R
R R No Load Full load
#
=
-
At no load I
R
0 =
( ) V
R NL
/ V A
S
= , ( ) V 220
R Full load
= kV
nodi a
%V.R.
.
100
220
0 94
240
220
#
=
-
%V.R. 16 =
Given that,
V X
ab1 1
+q = , V Y
ab2 2
+q = , Phase to neutral sequence volt ? =
First we draw phasor of positive sequence and negative sequence.
From figure we conclude that positive sequence line voltage leads phase voltage
by 30c
V
AN1
30 X
1
c +q = -
V
AN2
4 30
2
c +q = +
For system base value 10 MVA, 69 kV, Load in pu(Z
new
) = ?
Z
new
Z
(MVA)
(MVA)
kV
kV
old
new
old
old
new
2
# #
=
b l
Z
new
.72
.
0
10
20
13 8
69
2
# #
=
b l
36 = pu
Unreliable convergence is the main disadvantage of gauss seidel load flow method.
Generator feeds power to infinite bus through double circuit line 3-f fault at
middle of line.
Infinite bus voltage(V ) 1 = pu
Transient internal voltage of generator(E ) . 1 1 = pu
Equivalent transfer admittance during fault .8 0 = pu /X 1 =
delivering power(P
S
) 1.0 pu =
Perior to fault rotor Power angle 30c d = , 50 f Hz =
Initial accelerating power(P
a
) ? =
P
a
sin P P
S m2
d = -
sin
X
EV
1 30c = -
nodi a

/ .
.
1
1 0 8
1 1 1
2
1
#
#
= - . 0 56 = pu
If initial acceleration power X = pu
Initial acceleration ? =
Inertia constant ? =
a
/
( )
M
X
S S
X S
180
180 50
SH F
pu S
P
a
#
#
# # #
= = =
a 1800 / deg sec X
2
=
Inertia const.
18
1
= . 0 056 =
The post fault voltage at bus 1 and 3 are.
Pre fault voltage.
V
Bus

V
V
V
1 0
1 0
1 0
1
2
3
c
c
c
+
+
+
= =
R
T
S
S
S
S
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
V
X
W
W
W
W
At bus 2 solid fault occurs ( ) Z f 0 = , r 2 =
Fault current I
f

Z Z
V
Z Z
V
rr f
r
f 22
2
c c
=
+
=
+
Z
f

.
4
j
j
0 24
1 0c +
= =-
( ) V f
i
(0) ( ) V Z I f
i ir
c = - , V Prefault voltage
i
c =
( ) V f
1
1 0 0.08( 4) 1 0.32 V Z I j j
i f 12
c c + = - = - - = -
( ) V f
1
. 0 68 = pu
( ) V f
3
1 0 0.16( 4) 1 0.64 V Z I j j
f 3 32
c c + = - = - - = -
( ) V f
3
.36 0 = pu
Rating of D-connected capacitor bank for unity p.f.
real power P
L
12 .8 16.627 cos S 3 0
#
f = = = kW
reactive power Q
L
12 .6 12.47 sin S 3 0
#
f = = = kW
For setting of unity p.f. we have to set capacitor bank equal to reactive power
. 12 47 = kW
nodi a
Given that pu parameters of 500 MVA machine are as following
M 20 = pu, X 2 = pu
Now value of M and X at 100 MVA base are
for inertia ( ) M
( ) pu
new
(pu)
new MVA
old MVA
old #
=
( ) M
pu new
( ) M
100
500
Pu old #
=
20 100
1
5
#
= = pu
and for reactance (X )
( ) pu
new
( ) pu
old MVA
new MVA
old #
=
( ) X
pu new
( ) X
500
100
pu old #
=
( ) X
Pu new
2 0.4
5
1
#
= = pu
800 kV has Power transfer capacity P =
At 400 kV Power transfer capacity = ?
We know Power transfer capacity
P sin
X
EV
d =
P V
2
\
So if V is half than Power transfer capacity is
4
1
of previous value.
In EHV lines the insulation strength of line is governed by the switching over
voltages.
For bulk power transmission over very long distance HVDC transmission
preferably used.
Parameters of transposed overhead transmission line
X
S
0.4 /km W = , .1 X 0 /km
m
W =
ve + sequence reactance X
1
? =
Zero sequence reactance X
0
? =
We know for transposed overhead transmission line.
ve + sequence component X
1
X X
S m
= -
0.4 0.1 .3 0 /km W = - =
Zero sequence component X
0
2 X X
S m
= +
.4 2( .1) .6 0 0 0 /km W = + =
nodi a
Industrial substation of 4 MW load = P
L
Q
C
2 MVAR = for load .97 0 p.f. = lagging
If capacitor goes out of service than load . ? p.f =
cos f .97 0 =
tanf ( .97) .25 tan cos 0 0
1
= =
-

P
Q Q
L
L C
-
. 0 25 =

Q
4
2
L
-
0.25 3 Q MVAR
L
& = =
f
4
3
36 tan tan
P
Q
L
L 1 1
c = = =
- -
c b m l
cos f . cos 36 0 8 c = = lagging
Y
22
? =
I
1
( ) V Y V V Y
1 11 1 2 12
= + -
0.05 10( ) 9.95 10 V j V V j V j V
1 1 2 1 2
= - - =- +
I
2
( ) ( ) V V Y V V Y
2 1 21 2 3 23
= - + -
. . j V j V j V 10 9 9 0 1
1 2 3
= - -
Y
22
Y Y Y
11 23 2
= + +
9.95 9.9 0.1 j j j =- - -
19.95 j =-
F
1
a bP cP
1 1
2
= + + Rs/hour
F
2
2 a bP cP
2 2
2
= + + Rs/hour
For most economical operation
P P
1 2
+ 300 = MW then , ? P P
1 2
=
We know for most economical operation

P
F
1
1
2
2

P
F
2
2
2
2
=
2cP b
1
+ 4cP b
2
= +
P
1
P 2
2
= ...(1)
P P
1 2
+ 300 = ...(2)
From eq (1) and (2)
P
1
200 MW = , 100 P MW
2
=
We know that ABCD parameters
V
I
1
1
> H
A
C
B
D
V
I
2
1
=> > H H
B
I
V
V
2
1
0 2
=
=
, C
V
I
I
2
1
0 2
=
=
In figure C
Z Z
V
Z
Z Z
V
Z
1
1 2
1
2
1 2
1
2
#
=
+
+
=
nodi a
or Z
2

C
1
=
. 0 025 45
1
40 45
c
c
+
+ = = -
Given
Steady state stability Power Limit . 6 25 = pu
If one of double circuit is tripped than
Steady state stability power limit ? =
P
m1

.
6.25
X
EV
X
0 12
2
1 1
#
= =
+
=

. . X 0 12 0 5
1
+
. 6 25 =
& X . 0 008 = pu
If one of double circuit tripped than
P
m2

X
EV
=

. . . X 0 12
1 1
0 12 0 08
1
#
=
+
=
+
P
m2

.
5
0 2
1
= = pu
Given data
Substation Level 220 = kV
3-f fault level 4000 = MVA
LG fault level 5000 = MVA
Positive sequence reactance:
Fault current I
f

3 220
4000
#
=
X
1
/ V I
ph f
=
4000
220 220
3 220
4000
3
220
#
= =
#
12.1 W =
Zero sequence Reactance ? X
0
=
I
f

3 220
5000
#
=
I
a1
I I
I
3
3 3 220
5000
a a
f
2 0
#
= = = =
X X X
1 2 0
+ +
I
V
a
ph
1
220 3
5000
3
220
= =
#
X X X
1 2 0
+ + .
3 5000
220 220
29 04
#
#
W = =
nodi a
X
1
. X 12 1
2
W = =
X
0
29.04 12.1 12.1 = - - 4.84 W =
Instantaneous power supplied by 3-f ac supply to a balanced R-L load.
P V I V I V I
a a a b c c
= + +
( ) ( ) ( 120 ) ( 120 ) sin sin sin sin V t I t V t I t
m m m m
c c w w f w w f = - + - - -
( 240 ) ( 240 ) sin sin V t I t
m m
c c w w f + - - -
[ (2 ) (2 240 ) cos cos cos cos cos VI t t f w f f w f f = - - + - - - +
(2 240 )] cos t w f - + -
P 3 cos VI f = ...(1)
equation (1) implies that total instantaneous power is being constant.
In 3-f Power system, the rated voltage is being given by RMS value of line to
line voltage.
In this figure the sequence is being given as RBY
In thermal power plants, the pressure in the working fluid cycle is developed by
the help to feed water pump.
Kaplan turbines are used for harnessing low variable waterheads because of high
percentage of reaction and runner adjustable vanes.
MHO relay is the type of distance relay which is used to transmission line
protection. MHO Relay has the property of being inherently directional.
Surge impedance of line is being given by as
Z
.
C
L
11 68 10
11 10
9
3
#
#
= =
-
-

306.88 W =
Ideal power transfer capability
nodi a
P
.
( )
Z
V
306 88
800
0
2
2
= = 2085 = MW
Given that,
Power cable voltage 110 = kV
C 125 = nF/km
Dielectric loss tangent tan 2 10
4
#
d = =
-
Dielectric power loss ? =
dielectric power loss is given by
P tan V C 2
2
w d =
2(110 10 ) 2 125 10 2 10 f
3 2 9 4
# # # # # #
p =
- -
2(121 10 2 3.14 50 250 10 )
8 13
# # # # # #
=
-
189 = W/
km
Given data
Lightening stroke discharge impulse current of I 10 = kA
Transmission line voltage 400 = kV
Impedance of line Z 250 W =
Magnitude of transient over-voltage ? =
The impulse current will be equally divided in both directions since there is equal
distribution on both sides.
Then magnitude of transient over-voltage is
V / I Z 2 =
2
10
10 250
3
# #
=
1250 10
3
#
= V 1250 = kV
The , , , A B C D parameters of line
A .936 .98 D 0 0 c + = =
B . 142 76 4c + =
C ( . ) j 5 18 914 10
6
W = - +
-
At receiving end 50 P MW
R
= , 220 V
R
= kV
p.f .9 0 = lagging
V
S
? =
Power at receiving end is being given by as follows
P
R
( ) ( ) cos cos
B
V V
B
A V
S R R
2
b d b a = - - -
(76.4 )
. ( )
75.6 cos cos
V
142
220
142
0 936 220
S
2
#
c c d = - -
( . ) cos V 76 4
S
d - .936 220 .2486
220
50 142
0 0
#
# #
= +
. . 32 27 51 19 = +
( . ) cos V 76 4
S
d - . 83 46 = ...(1)
nodi a
Same as Q
R
tan P
R
f =
( ) 50 ( .9) tan cos tan cos P 0
R
1 1
f = =
- -
. 24 21 = MW
Q
R
( ) ( ) sin sin
V V
B
A V
B
S R R
2
b d b a = - - -
(76.4 )
. ( )
75.6 sin sin
V
142
220
142
0 936 220
S
2
#
#
c c d = - -
(24.21) .936 220 .9685
220
142
0 0
# #
+ (76.4 ) sin V
S
c d = - ...(2)
from equation (1) & (2)
V
S
2
( ) ( . ) 215 83 46
2 2
= +
V
S
. 53190 5716 = . 230 63 = kV
A new generator of E
g
. 1 4 30c + = pu
X
S
. 1 0 = pu, connected to bus of V
t
Volt
Existing Power system represented by thevenins equivalent as
. E 0 9 0
th
c + = , .25 90 Z 0
th
c + = , ? V
t
=
From the circuit given
I
Z X
E E
th S
g th
=
+
-

( . )
. .
( . )
. .
j j
j
1 25
1 4 30 0 9 0
1 25
1 212 7 0 9
c c + +
=
-
=
+ -

( . )
.
.56 .2496
j
j
j
1 25
0 312 7
0 0 =
+
= -
V
t
E I X
g S
= - 1.212 7 ( .56 .2496 )( 1) j j j 0 0 = + - -
1.212 .2496 ( .7 .56) j 0 0 0 = - + -
.9624 .14 j 0 0 = +
V
t
.972 8.3 0 c + =
Given that
3-f Generator rated at 110 MVA, 11 kV
X
d
m % 19 = , 26% X
d
= l
X
S
% 130 = , Operating at no load
3-f short circuit fault between breaker and transformer
symmetrical I
rms
at breaker = ?
We know short circuit current
I
sc

. X j
1
0 19
1
d
= =
m
. j5 26 =- pu
Base current I
B

3 kV of generator
rating MVAof generator
#
=
nodi a
I
B

3 11 10
110 10
3
6
# #
#
=
I
B
. 5773 67 = Amp
Symmetrical RMS current I I
B sc #
=
. . . 5773 67 5 26 30369 50
#
= = Amp
I
rms
& . 30 37 = kA
ve + sequence current I
a
[ ] I I I
3
1
a b c
2
a a = + +
[10 0 1 120 10 180 0]
3
1
#
c c c + + + = + +
[ ]
3
1
10 0 10 300 c c + + = + [ . ] j
3
1
10 5 8 66 = + -
[ . ] j
3
1
15 8 66 = -

.
3
17 32 30c +
=
-
. 5 78 30c + = -
Given data 500 MVA , 50 Hz, 3 f - generator produces power at 22 kV
Generator Y " connected with solid neutral
Sequence reactance .15 X X 0
1 2
= = , .05 X 0
0
= pu
Sub transient line current ? =
I
a1

. . . .
2.857
Z Z Z
E
j j j j
j
0 15 0 15 0 05
1
0 35
1
1 2 0
=
+ +
=
+ +
= =-
Now sub transient Line current 3 I I
a a1
=
I
a
( . ) . j j 3 2 857 8 57 = - =-
Given: 50 Hz, 4-Pole, 500 MVA, 22 kV generator
p.f. .8 0 = lagging
Fault occurs which reduces output by 40%.
Accelerating torque ? =
Power 500 .8 400 0
#
= = MW
After fault, Power 400 .6 240 0
#
= = MW
a P
a
T
a #
w =
T
a

P
a
w
=
Where w f 2
mechanical
p =
f
mechanical f
P
2
electrical #
= f
4
2
electrical #
=
P
a 400 240 160 MW = - =
T
a

/ 2 50 2
160
# #
p
=
T
a
. 1 018 = MN
nodi a
Turbine rate speed N 250 = rpm
To produce power at f 50 = Hz.
No. of Poles P ? =
a N
P
f
120
=
P
N
f
120
= 24
250
120 50
#
= =
P 24 = Poles
In case of bundled conductors, We know that self GMD of conductor is increased
and in a conductor critical disruptive voltage of line depends upon GMD of
conductor. Since GMD of conductor is increased this causes critical disruptive
voltage is being reduced and if critical disruptive voltage is reduced, the corona
loss will also be reduced.
Given that no. of buses n 300 =
Generator bus 20 =
Reactive power support buses 25 =
Fixed buses with Shunt Capacitor 15 =
Slack buses (n
s
) 20 25 15 30 = + - =
a Size of Jacobian Matrix is given as
2( ) 2( ) n n n n
s s #
= - -
( ) ( ) 2 300 30 2 300 30
#
= - -
540 540
#
=
Auxiliary component in HVDC transmission system are DC line inductor and
reactive power sources.
a Exchanged electrical power is being given as follows
P ( ) sin
X
EV
d
1 2
d d = -
6 @
...(1)
Given that P s Power upply by generator " 0.5 = pu
E Voltage for rotar generator " 2.0 = pu
V Voltage of motor rotor " 1.3 = pu
X
d
X Reactance of generator Reactance of motor
eq
= = +
Recatance of connecting line +
X
d
1.1 1.2 .5 2.8 0 = + + =

1 2
d d - Rotor angle difference ? = =
from eq(1), . 0 5
.
.
( ) sin
2 8
2 1 3
1 2
#
d d = -
nodi a

1 2
&d d -
.
. .
sin
2 6
2 8 0 5 1 #
=
-
b l

. 32 58 =
Time period between energization of trip circuit and the arc extinction on an
opening operation is known as the interrupting time of Circuit breaker.
Given that ABCD parameters of line as
0.9 0 A D c + = = , 200 90 B + W =
%
, 0.95 10 90 C S
3
# + =
% -
.
at no-load condition,
Receiving end voltage( ) V
R
sending end voltage(V )
S
=
ohmic value of reactor ? =
We know V
S
AV BI
R R
= +
V
S
V
R
=
V
R
AV BI
R R
= +
(1 ) V A
R
- BI
R
=

I
V
R
R

A
B
1
=
-

. 1 0 9 0
200 90
c
c
+
+
=
-

I
V
R
R
200 90 0 c + =
The ohmic value of reactor 2000 W =
Surge impedance of cable
Z
1

C
L
= ; . L 0 4 = mH/km, 0.5 C F m = /km

.
.
28.284
0 5 10
0 4 10
6
3
#
#
= =
-
-
Surge impedance of overhead transmission line
Z
2
Z
C
L
3
= = ; . L 1 5 = mm/km, 0.015 C F/km m =
Z Z
2 3
=
.
.
316.23
0 015 10
1 5 10
6
5
#
#
= =
-
-
Now the magnitude of voltage at junction due to surge is being given by as
Vl
Z Z
V Z 2
2 1
2 # #
=
+
V 20 = kV

.
.
316 28 284
2 20 10 316 23
3
# # #
=
+

. 36 72 = kV
Let that current in line is I amp than
from figure current in line section PR is ( 10) I - amp
current in line section RS is ( 10 20) ( 30) I I - - = - amp
current in SQ Section is ( ) ( ) I I 30 30 60 - - = - amp
nodi a
Given that V
P
and V
Q
are such that
V V
P Q
- 3 V =
Applying KVL through whole line
V V
P Q
- ( 10)0.1 ( 30)0.15 ( 60) .2 I I I 0
#
= - + - + -
3 & .45 17.5 I 0 = -
I
.
.
45.55
0 45
20 5
= = amp
Now the line drop is being given as
( 10) .1 ( 30) .15 ( 60) .2 I I I 0 0 0 = - + - + -
(33.55)0.1 (15.55)0.15 (14.45)0.2 = + +
. 8 58 = V
The value of V
P
for minimum voltage of 220 V at any feeder is
220 Line voltage = +
220 8.58 = +
228.58 = V
A balanced delta connected load j 8 6 2 = + =
V
2
400 = volt
Improved Power Factor cos
2
f .9 0 =

1
f 6/8 36.85 tan
1
c = =
-
^ h

2
f ( .9) 25.84 cos 0
1
c = =
-
I
Z
V
j 8 6
400
= =
+

.
.
10 36 86
400
40 36 86
c
c
+
+ = = -
j 32 24 = -
Since Power factor is Improved by connecting a Y-connected capacitor bank like
as
Phasor diagram is being given by as follows
nodi a
In figure oa cos cos I I
2 1
f f = = l
. cos I 25 84c l 32 =
. I 0 9
#
l 32 =
I l . 35 55 =
ac 24 = Amp. ( ) sin I ac
1
f =
ab 35.55 25.84 sin sin I
2
c f = = l
ab . 15 49 = Amp
I
c
bc ac ab 24 15.49 8.51 = = - = - = Amp
KVAR of Capacitor bank
V I
1000
3
C # #
=
.
1000
3 400 8 51
# #
=
. 10 2 = KVAR
Given Load Power 100 = MW
V V
S R
= 11 = kV
Impedance of line Z
L

MV
p.u. (kV)
2
#
=
. ( ) j
100
0 2 11
2
#
= .242 j0 W =
We know P
L

sin
X
V V
S R
d
=
100 10
6
#

.
sin
0 242
11 10 11 10
3 3
# # #
d =

.
121
100 0 242
#
sind =
d (0.2) 11.537 sin
1
c = =
-
Reactive Power is being given by
Q
L
cos
X
V V
X
V
S R R
2
d = -

.
(11.537 )
.
( )
cos
0 242
11 10 11 10
0 242
11 10
3 3
3 2
# # #
#
c = -

.
[ (11.537 ) 1] cos
0 242
121 10
6
#
c = - . 10 1 =- MVAR
Given the bus Impedance Matrix of a 4-bus Power System
Z
bus

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
0 3435
0 2860
0 2723
0 2277
0 2860
0 3408
0 2586
0 2414
0 2723
0 2586
0 2791
0 2209
0 2277
0 2414
0 2209
0 2791
=
R
T
S
S
S
S
SS
V
X
W
W
W
W
WW
Now a branch os . j0 2 W is connected between bus 2 and reference
Z
B(New)
Z
Z Z
Z
Z
Z Z
1
( B
ij b
ij
nj
ji jn Old)
h g = -
+
R
T
S
S
S
S
8
V
X
W
W
W
W
B
New element 0.2 Z j
b
W = is connected in j
th
and reference bus 2 j = , n 4 = so
Z Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z Z Z Z
1
ij b
12
22
23
24
21 22 23 24
+
R
T
S
S
S
S
SS
8
V
X
W
W
W
W
WW
B
nodi a

( . ) .
.
.
.
.
. . . .
j j
j
j
j
j
j j j j
0 3408 0 2
1
0 2860
0 3408
0 2586
0 2414
0 2860 0 3408 0 2586 0 2414 =
+
R
T
S
S
S
S
SS
6
8
V
X
W
W
W
W
WW
@
B
...(1)
Given that we are required to change only , Z Z
22 23
So in equation (1) Z
22
l
( . )
( . )
.2147
j
j
j
0 5408
0 3408
0
2 2
= =
Z
23
l
.
( . )( . )
.16296
j
j
0 5408
0 3408 0 2586
0
2
= =
Z
22( ) New
Z Z
22( ) 22 Old
= - l
.3408 .2147 .1260 j j j 0 0 0 = - =
Z
23( ) New
Z Z
23 23 (Old)
= - l
0.2586 0.16296 0.0956 j j j = - =
Total zero sequence impedance, ve + sequence impedance and ve - sequence
impedances
Z
0
( ) ( ) 0.04 0.3 0.34 Z Z j j j pu
0 0 Line Generator
= + = + =
Z
1
( ) ( ) 0.1 0.1 .2 Z Z j j j0 pu
1 1 Line Generator
= + = + =
Z
2
( ) ( ) 0.1 0.1 .2 Z Z j j j0 pu
2 2 Line Generator
= + = + =
Z
n
.05 j0 pu =
for L-G fault
I
a1

Z Z Z Z
E
3
n
a
0 1 2
=
+ + +

. . . .
.
j j j j 0 2 0 2 0 34 0 15
0 1
=
+ + +
1.12 j pu =-
I
B

3 generator kV
generator MVA
=

.
175
3 6 6 10
20 10
0 Amp
3
6
# #
#
= =
Fault current
I
f
( ) I I 3
a B
=
3( 1.12)(1750) 5897.6 j j Amp = - =-
Neutral Voltage
V
n
I Z
f n
=
and Z
n
Z Z
B pu #
=

( . )
. .
20
6 6
0 05 0 1089
2
#
W = =
V
n
5897.6 0.1089
#
= . 642 2 = V
We know that Optimal Generation
I C
1
I C
2
= , and P 300
3
= MW (maximum load)
I C
3
30 = (Independent of load)
. P 20 0 3
1
+ . P 30 0 4
2
= +
nodi a
. . P P 0 3 0 4
1 2
- 10 = ...(1)
P P P
1 2 3
+ + 700 =
P P 300
1 2
+ + 700 =
P P
1 2
+ 400 = ...(2)
P
1
242.8 = MW
P
2
. 157 14 = MW
For transmission line protection-distance relay
For alternator protection-under frequency relay
For bus bar protection-differential relay
For transformer protection-Buchholz relay
We know by equal area criteria
( ) P
S m 0
d d - sin P d
max
C
m
d d =
d
d
#
( ) sin P
max m 0 0
d d d - [ ] cos cos P
max m 0
d d = - ...(1)
P
max
2 =
P
0
sin P 1
max 0
d = =

0
d 30c =

max
d 110c = (given)
Now from equation (1)
( ) sin 2 30 110 30
180
c
p
- [ ] cos cos 2 110
c
c d = -
.5 0
180
80
#
p
.342 cos 0
c
d = +
cos
c
d .698 .342 0 0 = -

c
d . 69 138c =
a Both sides are granted
So, I
a
5 90
Z
E
j 2
10 0
a
a
c
c
+
+ = = = -
I
b
.
Z
E
j 3
10 90
3 33 180
b
b
c
c
+
+ = =
-
= -
I
c
.
Z
E
j 4
10 120
2 5 30
c
c
c
c
+
+ = = =
nodi a
We know I
a1
[ ] I I I
3
1
a b c
2
a a = + +
where 1 120 1 240
2
& c c + + a a = =
I
a1
[5 90 3.33 180 120 2.5 240 30 ]
3
1
c c c c c + + + = - + - + + +
^ ^ h h
I
a1
[ . . ]
3
1
5 90 3 33 60 2 5 270 c c c + + + = - + - +
[ . . . ] j j j
3
1
5 1 665 2 883 2 5 = - + - -
[ . . ] j
3
1
1 665 10 383 = - . . 3 5 80 89c + = -
***********
Page 278 Control Systems Chapter 5
nodi a
CHAPTER 5
CONTROL SYSTEMS
EE SP 5.1 In the formation of Routh-Hurwitz array for a polynomial, all the elements of
a row have zero values. This premature termination of the array indicates the
presence of
(A) only one root at the origin
(B) imaginary roots
(C) only positive real roots
(D) only negative real roots
EE SP 5.2 The root locus of a unity feedback system is shown in the figure.
The closed loop transfer function of the system is
(A)
R s
C s
s s
K
1 2
=
+ + ^
^
^ ^ h
h
h h
(B)
R s
C s
s s K
K
1 2
=
+ + +
-
^
^
^ ^ h
h
h h
(C)
R s
C s
s s K
K
1 2
=
+ + - ^
^
^ ^ h
h
h h
(D)
R s
C s
s s K
K
1 2
=
+ + + ^
^
^ ^ h
h
h h
EE SP 5.3 For the given system, it is desired that the system be stable. The minimum value
of a for this condition is ______.
EE SP 5.4 The Bode magnitude plot of the transfer function
G s ^ h
.
s
s
bs
s
K s as
1
8
1 1
36
1 0 5 1
=
+ + +
+ +
a
^
a
^ ^
k
h
k
h h
is shown below :
Chapter 5 Control Systems Page 279
nodi a
Note that / / dB octave dB decade 6 20 - =- . .
The value of
bK
a
is _____
EE SP 5.5 The closed-loop transfer function of a system is
.
T s
s s 0 4 4
4
2
=
+ +
^
^
h
h
. The
steady state error due to unit step input is _____.
EE SP 5.6 The state transition matrix for the system

x
x
1
2
o
o
> H
x
x
u
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
2
= + > > > H H H is
(A)
e
e e
0
t
t t
> H (B)
e
t e e
0
t
t t 2
> H
(C)
e
te e
0
t
t t
> H (D)
e te
e 0
t t
t
> H
EE SP 5.7 A system with the open loop transfer function
G s ^ h
s s s s
K
2 2 2
2
=
+ + + ^ ^ h h
is connected in a negative feedback configuration with a feedback gain of unity.
For the closed loop system to be marginally stable, the value of K is ______
EE SP 5.8 For the transfer function
G s ^ h
. s s s s
s
0 25 4 25
5 4
2
=
+ + +
+
^ ^
^
h h
h
The values of the constant gain term and the highest corner frequency of the
Bode plot respectively are
(A) 3.2, 5.0
(B) 16.0, 4.0
(C) 3.2, 4.0
nodi a
(D) 16.0, 5.0
EE SP 5.9 The second order dynamic system

dt
dX
PX Qu = +
y RX =
has the matrices P , Q and R as follows :
P
1
0
1
3
=
-
-
> H Q
0
1
=> H R 0 1 =6 @
The system has the following controllability and observability properties:
(A) Controllable and observable
(B) Not controllable but observable
(C) Controllable but not observable
(D) Not controllable and not observable
EE SP 5.10 The signal flow graph of a system is shown below. U s ^ h is the input and C s ^ h is
the output.
Assuming, h b
1 1
= and h b ba
0 0 1 1
= - , the input-output transfer function,
G s
U s
C s
= ^
^
^
h
h
h
of the system is given by
(A) G s
s a s a
b s b
2
0 1
0 1
=
+ +
+
^ h
(B) G s
s bs b
a s a
2
1 0
1 0
=
+ +
+
^ h
(C) G s
s a s a
bs b
2
1 0
1 0
=
+ +
+
^ h
(D) G s
s b s b
a s a
2
0 1
0 1
=
+ +
+
^ h
EE SP 5.11 A single-input single output feedback system has forward transfer function G s ^ h
and feedback transfer function H s ^ h. It is given that G s H s 1 < ^ ^ h h . Which of
the following is true about the stability of the system ?
(A) The system is always stable
(B) The system is stable if all zeros of G s H s ^ ^ h h are in left half of the s-plane
(C) The system is stable if all poles of G s H s ^ ^ h h are in left half of the s-plane
nodi a
(D) It is not possible to say whether or not the system is stable from the
information given
EE SP 5.12 The block diagram of a system is shown in the figure
If the desired transfer function of the system is

R s
C s
^
^
h
h

s s
s
1
2
=
+ +
then G s ^ h is
(A) 1 (B) s
(C) /s 1 (D)
s s s
s
2
3 2
+ - -
-
EE SP 5.13 Consider the system described by following state space equations

x
x
1
2
o
o
> H
x
x
u
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
2
=
- -
+ > > > H H H ; y
x
x
1 0
1
2
=8
>
B
H
If u is unit step input, then the steady state error of the system is
(A) 0 (B) 1/2
(C) 2/3 (D) 1
EE SP 5.14 The magnitude Bode plot of a network is shown in the figure
The maximum phase angle
m
f and the corresponding gain G
m
respectively, are
(A) 30c - and 1.73 dB (B) 30c - and 4.77 dB
(C) 30c + and 4.77 dB (D) 30c + and 1.73 dB
YEAR 2013 ONE MARK
EE SP 5.15 Assuming zero initial condition, the response y t ^ h of the system given below to
a unit step input u t ^ h is
nodi a
(A) u t ^ h (B) tu t ^ h
(C)
t
u t
2
2
^ h (D) e u t
t -
^ h
EE SP 5.16 The Bode plot of a transfer function G s ^ h is shown in the figure below.
The gain log G s 20 ^
_
h
i
is 32 dB and 8 dB - at 1 / rad s and 10 / rad s respectively.
The phase is negative for all w. Then G s ^ h is
(A)
.
s
39 8
(B)
.
s
39 8
2
(C)
s
32
(D)
s
32
2
YEAR 2013 TWO MARKS
EE SP 5.17 The signal flow graph for a system is given below. The transfer function
U s
Y s
^
^
h
h

for this system is
(A)
s s
s
5 6 2
1
2
+ +
+
(B)
s s
s
6 2
1
2
+ +
+
(C)
s s
s
4 2
1
2
+ +
+
(D)
s s 5 6 2
1
2
+ +
EE SP 5.18 The open-loop transfer function of a dc motor is given as

V s
s
s 1 10
10
a
w
=
+
^
^
h
h

When connected in feedback as shown below, the approximate value of K
a
that
will reduce the time constant of the closed loop system by one hundred times as
nodi a
compared to that of the open-loop system is
(A) 1 (B) 5
(C) 10 (D) 100
The state variable formulation of a system is given as
x
x
x
x
u
2
0
0
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
=
-
-
+
o
o
> > > > H H H H , x 0 0
1
= ^ h , x 0 0
2
= ^ h and y
x
x
1 0
1
2
=6
>
@
H
EE SP 5.19 The response y t ^ h to the unit step input is
(A) e
2
1
2
1 t 2
-
-
(B) e e 1
2
1
2
1 t t 2
- -
- -
(C) e e
t t 2
-
- -
(D) e 1
t
-
-
EE SP 5.20 The system is
(A) controllable but not observable
(B) not controllable but observable
(C) both controllable and observable
(D) both not controllable and not observable
YEAR 2012 TWO MARKS
EE SP 5.21 The state variable description of an LTI system is given by

x
x
x
1
2
3
o
o
o
J
L
K
K
K
N
P
O
O
O

0
a
a
a
x
x
x
u
0
0 0
0 0
0
0
1
3
1
2
1
2
3
= +
J
L
K
K
K
J
L
K
K
K
J
L
K
K
K
N
P
O
O
O
N
P
O
O
O
N
P
O
O
O
y
x
x
x
1 0 0
1
2
3
=
J
L
K
K
K
_
N
P
O
O
O
i
where y is the output and u is the input. The system is controllable for
(A) 0, 0, 0 a a a
1 2 3
! ! = (B) 0, 0, 0 a a a
1 2 3
! ! =
(C) 0, 0, 0 a a a
1 3 3
! = = (D) 0, 0, 0 a a a
1 2 3
! ! =
EE SP 5.22 The feedback system shown below oscillates at 2 / rad s when
nodi a
(A) 2 0.75 and K a = = (B) 3 0.75 and K a = =
(C) 4 0.5 and K a = = (D) 2 0.5 and K a = =
Statement for Linked Answer Questions 23 and 24 :
The transfer function of a compensator is given as
( ) G s
c

s b
s a
=
+
+
EE SP 5.23
( ) G s
c
is a lead compensator if
(A) 1, 2 a b = =
(B) 3, 2 a b = =
(C) 3, 1 a b =- =-
(D) 3, 1 a b = =
EE SP 5.24 The phase of the above lead compensator is maximum at
(A) / rad s 2
(B) / rad s 3
(C) / rad s 6
(D) 1/ / rad s 3
YEAR 2011 ONE MARK
EE SP 5.25 The frequency response of a linear system ( ) G jw is provided in the tubular form
below
( ) G jw 1.3 1.2 1.0 0.8 0.5 0.3
( ) G j + w 130c - 140c - 150c - 160c - 180c - 200c -
(A) 6 dB and 30c (B) 6 dB and 30c -
(C) 6 dB - and 30c (D) 6 dB - and 30c -
EE SP 5.26 The steady state error of a unity feedback linear system for a unit step input is
0.1. The steady state error of the same system, for a pulse input ( ) r t having a
magnitude of 10 and a duration of one second, as shown in the figure is
(A) 0 (B) 0.1
(C) 1 (D) 10
nodi a
EE SP 5.27 An open loop system represented by the transfer function
( ) G s
( )( )
( )
s s
s
2 3
1
=
+ +
-
is
(A) Stable and of the minimum phase type
(B) Stable and of the nonminimum phase type
(C) Unstable and of the minimum phase type
(D) Unstable and of nonminimum phase type
YEAR 2011 TWO MARKS
EE SP 5.28 The open loop transfer function ( ) G s of a unity feedback control system is given
as
( ) G s
( ) s s
K s
2
3
2
2
=
+
+
b l
From the root locus, at can be inferred that when K tends to positive infinity,
(A) Three roots with nearly equal real parts exist on the left half of the s-plane
(B) One real root is found on the right half of the s-plane
(C) The root loci cross the jw axis for a finite value of ; 0 K K !
(D) Three real roots are found on the right half of the s-plane
EE SP 5.29 A two loop position control system is shown below
The gain K of the Tacho-generator influences mainly the
(A) Peak overshoot
(B) Natural frequency of oscillation
(C) Phase shift of the closed loop transfer function at very low frequencies
( ) 0 " w
(D) Phase shift of the closed loop transfer function at very high frequencies
( ) "3 w
YEAR 2010 TWO MARKS
EE SP 5.30 The system A Bu X X = +
o
with , A B
1
0
2
2
0
1
=
-
= > > H H is
(A) Stable and controllable
(B) Stable but uncontrollable
(C) Unstable but controllable
(D) Unstable and uncontrollable
nodi a
EE SP 5.31 The characteristic equation of a closed-loop system is
( )( ) ( ) , s s s k s k 1 3 2 0 0 > + + + = .Which of the following statements is true ?
(A) Its root are always real
(B) It cannot have a breakaway point in the range [ ] Re s 1 0 < < -
(C) Two of its roots tend to infinity along the asymptotes [ ] Re s 1 =-
(D) It may have complex roots in the right half plane.
EE SP 5.32 The frequency response of ( )
( 1)( 2)
G s
s s s
1
=
+ +
plotted in the
complex ( ) G jw plane 0 ) (for < < 3 w is
YEAR 2009 ONE MARK
EE SP 5.33 The measurement system shown in the figure uses three sub-systems in cascade
whose gains are specified as , , 1/ G G G
1 2 3
. The relative small errors associated with
each respective subsystem , G G
1 2
and G
3
are ,
1 2
e e and
3
e . The error associated
with the output is :
(A)
1
1 2
3
e e
e
+ + (B)
3
1 2
e
e e
(C)
1 2 3
e e e + - (D)
1 2 3
e e e + +
EE SP 5.34 The first two rows of Rouths tabulation of a third order equation are as follows.

s
s
2
4
2
4
3
2
This means there are
(A) Two roots at s j ! = and one root in right half s-plane
(B) Two roots at 2 s j ! = and one root in left half s-plane
nodi a
(C) Two roots at 2 s j ! = and one root in right half s-plane
(D) Two roots at s j ! = and one root in left half s-plane
EE SP 5.35 The polar plot of an open loop stable system is shown below. The closed loop
system is
(A) always stable
(B) marginally stable
(C) un-stable with one pole on the RH s-plane
(D) un-stable with two poles on the RH s-plane
EE SP 5.36 The asymptotic approximation of the log-magnitude v/s frequency plot of a
system containing only real poles and zeros is shown. Its transfer function is
(A)
( )( )
( )
s s s
s
2 25
10 5
+ +
+
(B)
( )( )
( )
s s s
s
2 25
1000 5
2
+ +
+
(C)
( )( )
( )
s s s
s
2 25
100 5
+ +
+
(D)
( )( )
( )
s s s
s
2 25
80 5
2
+ +
+
YEAR 2009 TWO MARKS
EE SP 5.37 The unit-step response of a unity feed back system with open loop transfer
function ( ) /(( 1)( 2)) G s K s s = + + is shown in the figure. The value of K is
(A) 0.5 (B) 2
(C) 4 (D) 6
nodi a
EE SP 5.38 The open loop transfer function of a unity feed back system is given by
( ) ( )/ G s e s
. s 0 1
=
-
. The gain margin of the is system is
(A) 11.95 dB (B) 17.67 dB
(C) 21.33 dB (D) 23.9 dB
Common Data for Question 39 and 40 :
A system is described by the following state and output equations

( )
( ) ( ) ( )
( )
2 ( ) ( )
( ) ( )
dt
dx t
x t x t u t
dt
dx t
x t u t
y t x t
3 2
1
1 2
2
2
1
=- + +
=- +
=
when ( ) u t is the input and ( ) y t is the output
EE SP 5.39 The system transfer function is
(A)
s s
s
5 6
2
2
+ -
+
(B)
s s
s
5 6
3
2
+ +
+
(C)
s s
s
5 6
2 5
2
+ +
+
(D)
s s
s
5 6
2 5
2
+ -
-
EE SP 5.40 The state-transition matrix of the above system is
(A)
e
e e e
0
t
t t t
3
2 3 2
+
-
- - -
= G (B)
e e e
e 0
t t t
t
3 2 3
2
-
- - -
-
= G
(C)
e e e
e 0
t t t
t
3 2 3
2
+
- - -
-
= G (D)
e e e
e 0
t t t
t
3 2 3
2
-
- -
-
= G
YEAR 2008 ONE MARK
EE SP 5.41 A function ( ) y t satisfies the following differential equation :

( )
( )
dt
dy t
y t + ( ) t d =
where ( ) t d is the delta function. Assuming zero initial condition, and denoting
the unit step function by ( ), ( ) u t y t can be of the form
(A) e
t
(B) e
t -
(C) ( ) eu t
t
(D) ( ) e u t
t -
YEAR 2008 TWO MARK
EE SP 5.42 The transfer function of a linear time invariant system is given as
( ) G s
s s 3 2
1
2
=
+ +
The steady state value of the output of the system for a unit impulse input
applied at time instant t 1 = will be
(A) 0 (B) 0.5
(C) 1 (D) 2
nodi a
EE SP 5.43 The transfer functions of two compensators are given below :
( )
( )
,
( )
C
s
s
C
s
s
10
10 1
10 1
10
1 2
=
+
+
=
+
+
Which one of the following statements is correct ?
(A) C
1
is lead compensator and C
2
is a lag compensator
(B) C
1
is a lag compensator and C
2
is a lead compensator
(C) Both C
1
and C
2
are lead compensator
(D) Both C
1
and C
2
are lag compensator
EE SP 5.44 The asymptotic Bode magnitude plot of a minimum phase transfer function is
shown in the figure :
This transfer function has
(A) Three poles and one zero
(B) Two poles and one zero
(C) Two poles and two zero
(D) One pole and two zeros
EE SP 5.45 Figure shows a feedback system where K 0 >
The range of K for which the system is stable will be given by
(A) 0 30 K < < (B) 0 39 K < <
(C) 0 390 K < < (D) 390 K >
EE SP 5.46 The transfer function of a system is given as

s s 20 100
100
2
+ +
The system is
(A) An over damped system
(B) An under damped system
(C) A critically damped system
(D) An unstable system
nodi a
Statement for Linked Answer Question 47 and 48 .
The state space equation of a system is described by , A B C X X u Y X = + =
o

where X is state vector, u is input, Y is output and
, , [1 0] A B C
0
0
1
2
0
1
=
-
= = = = G G
EE SP 5.47 The transfer function G(s) of this system will be
(A)
( ) s
s
2 +
(B)
( ) s s
s
2
1
-
+
(C)
( ) s
s
2 -
(D)
( ) s s 2
1
+
EE SP 5.48 A unity feedback is provided to the above system ( ) G s to make it a closed loop
system as shown in figure.
For a unit step input ( ) r t , the steady state error in the input will be
(A) 0 (B) 1
(C) 2 (D) 3
YEAR 2007 ONE MARK
EE SP 5.49 The system shown in the figure is
(A) Stable
(B) Unstable
(C) Conditionally stable
(D) Stable for input u
1
, but unstable for input u
2
YEAR 2007 TWO MARKS
EE SP 5.50 If [ ( )] Re x G jw = , and [ ( )] Im y G jw = then for 0 " w
+
, the Nyquist plot for
( ) / ( )( ) G s s s s 1 1 2 = + + is
(A) x 0 =
(B) / x 3 4 =-
(C) / x y 1 6 = -
(D) / x y 3 =
nodi a
EE SP 5.51 The system 900/ ( 1)( 9) s s s + + is to be such that its gain-crossover frequency
becomes same as its uncompensated phase crossover frequency and provides a
45c phase margin. To achieve this, one may use
(A) a lag compensator that provides an attenuation of 20 dB and a phase lag
of 45c at the frequency of 3 3 rad/s
(B) a lead compensator that provides an amplification of 20 dB and a phase
lead of 45c at the frequency of 3 rad/s
(C) a lag-lead compensator that provides an amplification of 20 dB and a
phase lag of 45c at the frequency of 3 rad/s
(D) a lag-lead compensator that provides an attenuation of 20 dB and phase
lead of 45c at the frequency of 3 rad/s
EE SP 5.52 If the loop gain K of a negative feed back system having a loop transfer function
( 3)/( 8) K s s
2
+ + is to be adjusted to induce a sustained oscillation then
(A) The frequency of this oscillation must be 4 3 rad/s
(B) The frequency of this oscillation must be 4 rad/s
(C) The frequency of this oscillation must be 4 or 4 3 rad/s
(D) Such a K does not exist
EE SP 5.53 The system shown in figure below
can be reduced to the form
with
(A) , 1/( ), X c s c Y s a s a Z b s b
0 1
2
0 1 0 1
= + = + + = +
(B) 1, ( )/( ), X Y c s c s a s a Z b s b
0 1
2
0 1 0 1
= = + + + = +
(C) , ( )/( ), 1 X c s c Y bs b s a s a Z
1 0 1 0
2
1 0
= + = + + + =
(D) , 1/( ), X c s c Y s a s a Z bs b
1 0
2
1 1 0
= + = + + = +
EE SP 5.54 Consider the feedback system shown below which is subjected to a unit step input.
The system is stable and has following parameters 4, 10, 500 K K
p i
w = = = and
nodi a
. 0 7 x = .The steady state value of Z is
(A) 1 (B) 0.25
(C) 0.1 (D) 0
R-L-C circuit shown in figure
EE SP 5.55 For a step-input e
i
, the overshoot in the output e
0
will be
(A) 0, since the system is not under damped
(B) 5 %
(C) 16 %
(D) 48 %
EE SP 5.56 If the above step response is to be observed on a non-storage CRO, then it would
be best have the e
i
as a
(A) Step function
(B) Square wave of 50 Hz
(C) Square wave of 300 Hz
(D) Square wave of 2.0 KHz
YEAR 2006 ONE MARK
EE SP 5.57 For a system with the transfer function ( )
( )
H s
s s
s
4 2 1
3 2
2
=
- +
-
,
the matrix A in the state space form A B X X u = +
o
is equal to
(A)
1
0
1
0
1
2
0
0
4 - -
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
(B)
0
0
1
1
0
2
0
1
4 - -
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
(C)
0
3
1
1
2
2
0
1
4
-
-
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
(D)
1
0
1
0
0
2
0
1
4 - -
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
nodi a
YEAR 2006 TWO MARKS
EE SP 5.58 Consider the following Nyquist plots of loop transfer functions over 0 w = to
3 w = . Which of these plots represent a stable closed loop system ?
(A) (1) only (B) all, except (1)
(C) all, except (3) (D) (1) and (2) only
EE SP 5.59 The Bode magnitude plot ( )
( )( )
( )
H j
j j
j
10 100
10 1
2
4
w
w w
w
=
+ +
+
is
nodi a
EE SP 5.60 A closed-loop system has the characteristic function ( )( ) ( ) s s K s 4 1 1 0
2
- + + - =
. Its root locus plot against K is
YEAR 2005 ONE MARK
EE SP 5.61 A system with zero initial conditions has the closed loop transfer function.
( ) T s
( )( ) s s
s
1 4
4
2
=
+ +
+
The system output is zero at the frequency
(A) 0.5 rad/sec (B) 1 rad/sec
(C) 2 rad/sec (D) 4 rad/sec
EE SP 5.62 Figure shows the root locus plot (location of poles not given) of a third order
system whose open loop transfer function is
nodi a
(A)
s
K
3
(B)
( ) s s
K
1
2
+
(C)
( ) s s
K
1
2
+
(D)
( ) s s
K
1
2
-
EE SP 5.63 The gain margin of a unity feed back control system with the open loop transfer
function ( ) G s
( 1)
s
s
2
=
+
is
(A) 0 (B)
2
1
(C) 2 (D) 3
YEAR 2005 TWO MARKS
EE SP 5.64 A unity feedback system, having an open loop gain
( ) ( ) G s H s
( )
( )
s
K s
1
1
=
+
-
,
becomes stable when
(A) K 1 > (B) K 1 >
(C) K 1 < (D) K 1 <-
EE SP 5.65 When subject to a unit step input, the closed loop control system shown in the
figure will have a steady state error of
(A) . 1 0 - (B) . 0 5 -
(C) 0 (D) 0.5
EE SP 5.66 In the ( ) ( ) G s H s -plane, the Nyquist plot of the loop transfer function
( ) ( ) G s H s
s
e
. s 0 25
=
p
-
passes through the negative real axis at the point
(A) ( 0.25, 0) j - (B) ( 0.5, 0) j -
(C) 0 (D) 0.5
EE SP 5.67 If the compensated system shown in the figure has a phase margin of 60c at the
nodi a
crossover frequency of 1 rad/sec, then value of the gain K is
(A) 0.366 (B) 0.732
(C) 1.366 (D) 2.738
A state variable system ( ) ( ) ( ) t t t X X u
0
0
1
3
1
0
=
-
+
o
= = G G with the initial condition
(0) [ , ] X 1 3
T
= - and the unit step input ( ) u t has
EE SP 5.68 The state transition matrix
(A)
( ) e
e
1
0
1
t
t
3
1 3
3
-
-
-
= G (B)
( ) e e
e
1
0
t t
t
3
1 3
-
- -
-
> H
(C)
( ) e e
e
1
0
t t
t
3
1 3 3
3
-
- -
-
> H (D)
( ) e
e
1
0
1
t
t
-
-
-
> H
EE SP 5.69 The state transition equation
(A) ( ) t
t e
e
X
t
t
=
-
-
-
= G (B) ( ) t
e
e
X
1
3
t
t 3
=
-
-
-
= G
(C) ( ) t
t e
e
X
3
t
t
3
3
=
-
-
= G (D) ( ) t
t e
e
X
t
t
3
=
-
-
-
= G
YEAR 2004 ONE MARK
EE SP 5.70 The Nyquist plot of loop transfer function ( ) ( ) G s H s of a closed loop control
system passes through the point ( , ) j 1 0 - in the ( ) ( ) G s H s plane. The phase
margin of the system is
(A) 0c (B) 45c
(C) 90c (D) 180c
EE SP 5.71 Consider the function, ( )
( )
F s
s s s 3 2
5
2
=
+ +

where ( ) F s is the Laplace transform of the of the function ( ) f t . The initial value
of ( ) f t is equal to
(A) 5 (B)
2
5
(C)
3
5
(D) 0
EE SP 5.72 For a tachometer, if ( ) t q is the rotor displacement in radians, ( ) e t is the output
voltage and K
t
is the tachometer constant in V/rad/sec, then the transfer
function,
( )
( )
Q s
E s
will be
(A) K s
t
2
(B) K s
t
nodi a
(C) K s
t
(D) K
t
YEAR 2004 TWO MARKS
EE SP 5.73 For the equation, s s s 4 6 0
3 2
- + + = the number of roots in the left half of s
-plane will be
(A) Zero (B) One
(C) Two (D) Three
EE SP 5.74 For the block diagram shown, the transfer function
( )
( )
R s
C s
is equal to
(A)
s
s 1
2
2
+
(B)
s
s s 1
2
2
+ +
(C)
s
s s 1
2
+ +
(D)
s s 1
1
2
+ +
EE SP 5.75 The state variable description of a linear autonomous system is, A X X =
o
where
X is the two dimensional state vector and A is the system matrix given by
A
0
2
2
0
== G. The roots of the characteristic equation are
(A) 2 - and 2 + (B) 2 j - and 2 j +
(C) 2 - and 2 - (D) 2 + and 2 +
EE SP 5.76 The block diagram of a closed loop control system is given by figure. The values
of K and P such that the system has a damping ratio of 0.7 and an undamped
natural frequency
n
w of 5 rad/sec, are respectively equal to
(A) 20 and 0.3 (B) 20 and 0.2
(C) 25 and 0.3 (D) 25 and 0.2
EE SP 5.77 The unit impulse response of a second order under-damped system starting from
rest is given by ( ) . , sin c t e t t 12 5 8 0
t 6
$ =
-
. The steady-state value of the unit
step response of the system is equal to
(A) 0 (B) 0.25
(C) 0.5 (D) 1.0
nodi a
EE SP 5.78 In the system shown in figure, the input ( ) sin x t t = . In the steady-state, the
response ( ) y t will be
(A) ( 45 ) sin t
2
1
c - (B) ( 45 ) sin t
2
1
c +
(C) ( ) sin t 45c - (D) ( 45 ) sin t c +
EE SP 5.79 The open loop transfer function of a unity feedback control system is given as
( ) G s
s
as 1
2
=
+
.
The value of a to give a phase margin of 45c is equal to
(A) 0.141 (B) 0.441
(C) 0.841 (D) 1.141
YEAR 2003 ONE MARK
EE SP 5.80 A control system is defined by the following mathematical relationship
( )
dt
d x
dt
dx
x e 6 5 12 1
t
2
2
2
+ + = -
-
The response of the system as t " 3 is
(A) x 6 = (B) x 2 =
(C) . x 2 4 = (D) x 2 =-
EE SP 5.81 A lead compensator used for a closed loop controller has the following transfer
function
(1 )
(1 ) K
b
s
a
s
+
+
For such a lead compensator
(A) a b <
(B) b a <
(C) a Kb >
(D) a Kb <
EE SP 5.82 A second order system starts with an initial condition of
2
3
= G without any external
input. The state transition matrix for the system is given by
e
e 0
0
t
t
2 -
-
= G. The state
of the system at the end of 1 second is given by
(A)
.
.
0 271
1 100
= G (B)
.
.
0 135
0 368
= G
(C)
.
.
0 271
0 736
= G (D)
.
.
0 135
1 100
= G
nodi a
YEAR 2003 TWO MARKS
EE SP 5.83 A control system with certain excitation is governed by the following mathematical
equation

dt
d x
dt
dx
x
2
1
18
1
2
2
+ + 10 5 2 e e
t t 4 5
= + +
- -
The natural time constant of the response of the system are
(A) 2 sec and 5 sec
(B) 3 sec and 6 sec
(C) 4 sec and 5 sec
(D) 1/3 sec and 1/6 sec
EE SP 5.84 The block diagram shown in figure gives a unity feedback closed loop control
system. The steady state error in the response of the above system to unit step
input is
(A) 25%
(B) 0.75 %
(C) 6%
(D) 33%
EE SP 5.85 The roots of the closed loop characteristic equation of the system shown above
(Q-5.55)
(A) 1 - and 15 -
(B) 6 and 10
(C) 4 - and 15 -
(D) 6 - and 10 -
EE SP 5.86 The following equation defines a separately excited dc motor in the form of a
differential equation

dt
d
J
B
dt
d
LJ
K
LJ
K
V
a
2 2
w w
w + + =
The above equation may be organized in the state-space form as follows

dt
d
dt
d
P dt
d
QV
a
2
2
w
w
w
w
= +
R
T
S
S
S
SS
>
V
X
W
W
W
WW
H
nodi a
Where the P matrix is given by
(A)
1 0
J
B
LJ
K
2
- -
= G (B)
0 1
LJ
K
J
B
2
- -
= G
(C)
0 1
LJ
K
J
B
2
- -
= G (D)
1 0
J
B
LJ
K
2
- -
= G
EE SP 5.87 The loop gain GH of a closed loop system is given by the following expression
( )( ) s s s
K
2 4 + +
The value of K for which the system just becomes unstable is
(A) K 6 =
(B) K 8 =
(C) K 48 =
(D) K 96 =
EE SP 5.88 The asymptotic Bode plot of the transfer function /[1 ( / )] K s a + is given in figure.
The error in phase angle and dB gain at a frequency of 0.5a w = are respectively
(A) 4.9c, 0.97 dB (B) 5.7c, 3 dB
(C) 4.9c, 3 dB (D) 5.7c, 0.97 dB
EE SP 5.89 The block diagram of a control system is shown in figure. The transfer function
( ) ( )/ ( ) G s Y s U s = of the system is
(A)
18 1 1
1
s s
12 3
+ +
^ ^ h h
(B)
27 1 1
1
s s
6 9
+ +
^ ^ h h
(C)
1 27 1
1
s s
12 9
+ +
^ ^ h h
(D)
1 1 27
1
s s
9 3
+ +
^ ^ h h
***********
nodi a
SOLUTI ON
SOL 5.1 Correct option (B).
In the given Routh-Hurwitz array of polynomial, all the elements of a row have
zero value. This is due to symmetrical location of the roots in the s-plane with
respect to origin. The system is either marginally stable or unstable. Now, we
check this characteristic for all the given options.
Option (A):
Only one root is at origin. So, it does not satisfy the symmetrical condition.
Option (B):
Since, the system has imaginary roots, so we get the pole-zero location diagram
as shown below.
The imaginary roots on jw (imaginary) axis are symmetrical with respect to
origin. Hence, this option is correct.
Option (C):
The system has only positive real roots as shown below. So, the root location
diagram does not satisfy the symmetrical condition.
Option (D):
Again, the system has only negative real roots, as shown below. So, the root
location diagram does not satisfy the symmetrical condition.
SOL 5.2 Correct option (C).
We have the root locus diagram as
nodi a
As the root locus have poles s 1 =- , 2 - and root lies in even multiple of poles,
so it is converse of the main transfer function. Hence, gain should be negative, i.e.
G s H s ^ ^ h h
s s
K
1 2
=
+ +
-
^ ^ h h
This is open loop transfer function and closed loop transfer function is given by

R s
C s
^
^
h
h

G s H s
G s H s
1
=
+ ^ ^
^ ^
h h
h h

s s
K
s s
K
1
1 2
1 2
=
+
+ +
-
+ +
-
^ ^
^ ^
h h
h h

s s K
K
1 2
=
+ + -
-
^ ^ h h
The Block diagram of given system is
The open loop transfer function is
G s H s ^ ^ h h
s s s
s
1 1 1
3 2
a a a
a
=
+ + + - + -
+
^ ^ ^
^
h h h
h
So, we obtain the character equation as
G s H s 1 + ^ ^ h h 0 =
or
s s s
s
1
1 1 1
3 2
a a a
a
+
+ + + - + -
+
^ ^ ^
^
h h h
h
0 =
or s s s s 1 1 1
3 2
a a a a + + + - + - + + ^ ^ ^ ^ h h h h 0 =
or s s s 1 1 1 1
3 2
a a a a + + + - + + - + ^ ^ h h 0 =
or s s s 1 1
3 2
a a + + + + ^ h 0 =
For the characteristic equation, we form the Rouths array as

s
s
s
s
1
1
1
1 1
1
1
0
3
2
1
0
a
a
a a
a
+
+
+ - ^ h
For stable system, the required condition is
1 a + 0 >
or a 1 >-
or
1
1 1
a
a a
+
+ - ^ h
0 >
or 1 1 a a + - ^ h 0 >
Solving the inequality, we obtain the roots
a
2
1 5
=
- -
,
2
1 5 - +
nodi a
So, we get the result for inequality as
a . 0 618 > and . 1 62 < a -
i.e. the minimum value of a is
a . 0 618 =
Given the Bode magnitude plot of the transfer function,
Also, from the given transfer function, we have
G s ^ h
.
s
s
bs
s
K as
1
8
1 1
36
1 0 55 1
=
+ + +
+ +
a
^
a
^ ^
k
h
k
h h

/
/ /
s
s
b
s s
K s s
1
8
1
1
1
36
1 2 1
a
1
=
+ + +
- +
a b a
^
^
k l k
h
h
The first slope / dB octave 6 - is due to one pole that is /s 1
Then, slope 0 dB/octave is due to addition of a zero in T.F. / s 1 2 + ^ h.
Again, / dB octave 6 + slope is due to one zero at corner frequency 4
C
w = .
Comparing it to the transfer function, we get

as 1 + ^ h / s 1 4 = + ^ h
or a / 1 4 =
Similarly, at 24
C
w = , there is an addition of a pole / dB octave 6 - ^ h. So, we get
bs 1 + ^ h / s 1 24 = + ^ h
or b
24
1
=
From the shown Bode plot, we observe that if we extended the slope / dB octave 6 -
, it meets the frequency axis at 8
C
w = . So, we have
0 log
s
KX
20
8 C
=
w =
or 1
K
8
=
or K 8 =
Therefore, we obtain the desired value as

bK
a

/
.
8
1 4
4 8
24
0 75
24
1
#
#
= = =
nodi a
Closed loop T.F.
T s ^ h
. s s 0 4 4
4
2
=
+ +

G s
G s
1 + ^
^
h
h

. s s 0 4 4
4
2
=
+ +

G s
G s 1 +
^
^
h
h

. s s
4
0 4 4
2
=
+ +

G s
1
1
+
^ h

. s s
4
0 4 4
2
=
+ +

G s
1
^ h

. s s
4
0 4 4 4
2
=
+ + -
Open loop. T.F. G s ^ h
. s s 0 4
4
=
+ ^ h
Error constant, K
p
limG s
s 0
=
"
^ h

.
lim
s s 0 4
4
s 0
3 =
+
=
"
^ h
Steady state error e
ss

K 1
1
0
p
=
+
=

x
x
1
2
o
o
> H
x
x
U
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
2
= + > > > H H H
Y AX BU = +
State transmission matrix
t f ^ h sI A L
1 1
= -
- -
^ h
SI A - 6 @
s
s
1
1
0
1
=
-
-
> H
So, t f ^ h
s
s
s
1
1
1
1
0
1
L
1
2
=
-
-
-
-
^ h
> H

0
L
s
s s
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
=
-
-
- -
^ h
> H
t f ^ h
e
te e
0
t
t t
=> H
G s ^ h
s s s s
K
2 2 2
2
=
+ + + ^ ^ h h
Closed loop T.F.
G s
G s
1
=
+ ^
^
h
h

s s s s
K
s s s s
K
1
2 2 2
2 2 2
2
2
=
+
+ + +
+ + +
^ ^
^ ^
h h
h h
Closed loop T.F.
s s s s K
K
2 2 2
2
=
+ + + + ^ ^ h h
Characteristics equation
nodi a
s s s s K 2 2 2
2
+ + + + ^ ^ h h 0 =
s s s s K 2 2 2
2 2
+ + + + ^ ^ h h 0 =
s s s s K 4 4 4
4 3 2
+ + + + 0 =
Routh array
s
4
1 6 k
s
3
4 4 0
s
2
5 k 0
s
1
k
5
20 4 - 0
s
0
k
For marginally stable
k 20 4 - 0 =
or k 5 =
G s ^ h
. s s s
s
0 25 4 25
5 4
2
=
+ + +
+
^ ^
^
h h
h

.
.
/
s s s
s
0 25 25
5 4
1
0 25
1
25
4
25
1 4
2
#
#
=
+ + +
+
a b
^
k l
h
.
.
/
s s s
s
3 2
1
0 25
1
25
4
25
1 4
2
#
=
+ + +
+
a b
^
k l
h
So constant gain term, K . 3 2 =
Highest corner frequency
H
w 5 =
For controllability, we check controllability matrix
C
M
B AB =6 @
or, C
M
Q PQ =6 @
PQ
1
0
1
3
0
1
1
3
=
-
-
=
-
>
>
> H
H
H
So, C
M

0
1
1
3
=
-
> H
det C
M ^ h 1 0 ! =-
So, the system is controllable.
For observalibility, we check observalibility matrix
O
M

C
CA
=> H
or O
M

R
RP
=> H
RP
0 1
1
0
1
3
0 3
=
-
-
=
- 8 > 8 B H B
nodi a
So, O
M

0
0
1
3
=
-
> H
det O
M ^ h 0 =
So, the system is not observable.
We have the signal flow graph of the system as
Now, we have to obtain the transfer function,
G s ^ h
U s
C s
=
^
^
h
h
From the SFG, we have two forward paths given as
p
1
h
s s
s
h
1
1
1
1
1
0
2
0
= =
p
2
h
s s
h 1
1
1
1
= =
The graph determinant is given by
T = 1 - (sum of all loop gains)
+ (sum of all gain products of 2 non-touching loops)
- (sum of all gain products of 3 non-touching loops)
... +
So, T
s
a
s
a
1
1
2
0
= -
-
+
-
a k

s
a
s
a
1
1
2
0
= + +
Also, we have the determinants for the forward paths p
1
and p
2
as

1
T 1 =

2
T
s
a
s
a
1 1
1 1
= -
-
= +
a k
Thus, using Masons gain formula, we obtain the transfer function as
T.F.
p
p p k k
1 1 2 2
D
D
D
D D
= =
+
/

s
a
s
a
s
h
s
h
s
a
1
1 1
1
2
0
2
0 1 1
=
+ +
+ + ^
a
h
k

s a s a
h h s a
2
1 0
0 1 1
=
+ +
+ + ^ h
Since, we have
nodi a
h
1
b
1
=
and h
0
b ba
0 1 1
= -
Substituting it in equation (1), we get
T.F.
s a s a
b bs
2
1 0
0 1
=
+ +
+
or G s
V s
C s
= ^
^
^
h
h
h

s a s a
b bs
2
1 0
0 1
=
+ +
+
For the given system, we have
G s H s ^ ^ h h 1 <
So, we may easily conclude that the Nyquist-plot intersect the negative real axis
between 0 and 1 - point, i.e. the Nyquist plot does not enclose the point , 1 0 - ^ h
or in other words number of encirclements is zero.
N 0 = ...(1)
From Nyquist criterion, we have the relation
N P Z = - ...(2)
where P is the number of open loop poles in right-half of s-plane and Z is the
number of closed loop poles (roots of characteristic equation) in right-half of s
-plane. Since, for a stable closed loop system, we must have
Z 0 = ...(3)
Thus, from equations (1), (2), and (3), we get
P 0 =
i.e. no poles of open loop system lies in right-half of s-plane, or in other words,
all the poles lies in left-half of s-plane.
Hence, the given system is stable if all poles of G s H s ^ ^ h h are in left half of the
s-plane.
We have the block diagram of given system as
By using minimization technique, we get
The closed loop transfer function for the dotted box is
nodi a

G s
G s
1 + ^
^
h
h
Again, we obtain the closed loop transfer function for the dotted box as

s G s
sG s
1 1 + + ^ ^
^
h h
h
So, the block diagram reduces to
Thus, we have the overall transfer function as
T.F.
s s G s
s s G s s G s
s
G s
G s
1 1
1
1
2
+ +
+ + +
+
+
^ ^
^ ^ ^
^
^
^
h h
h h h
h
h
h
6 @

s s G s s
sG s
1
2
=
+ + + ^ ^
^
h h
h
ALTERNATI VE METHOD :
For the given block diagram, we draw the signal flow graph as
From the signal flow graph, we have forward paths
p
1

s
G s s G s
1
= = ^ ^ h h
and the closed loops
L
11

s
G s
s
G s
1
1 = - =- ^ ^
^
h h
h
;
L
12
G s G s 1 = - =- ^ ^ ^ h h h;
nodi a
and L
13
G s s 1 = - ^ ^ h h
sG s =- ^ h
So, the transfer function is obtained as
T.F.
p
1 1
T
T
=

s
G s
G s sG s
G s
1
1
=
- - - -
^
^ ^
^ ^
h
h h
h h
; E
T.F.
s G s s s
sG s
1
2
=
+ + + ^ ^
^
h h
h
For any value of G s ^ h given in the options, the desired system transfer function
can not be achieved.
We have the state space equation,

x
x
1
2
o
o
> H
x
x
u
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
2
=
- -
+ > > > H H H
y
x
x
1 0
1
2
=8 > B H
From the state-space equation, we obtain the matrices
A
0
1
1
1
=
- -
> H
B
0
1
=> H
C
1 0
=8 B
So, we obtain

SI A -
6 @
S
S
S
S 0
0 0
1
1
1 1
1
1
= -
- -
=
-
+
> > > H H H
Therefore,

SI A
1
-
-
6 @
S S
S
S
1
1
1
1
1
2
=
+ +
+
-
> H
Hence, we obtain the transfer function of the system as
T.F. [ ] C SI A B
1
= -
-

S S
S
S
1 0
1
1
1
1
1 0
1
2
=
+ +
+
-
8 > > B H H

S S
S
1
1
1 0
1
2
=
+ +
8 > B H

S S 1
1
2
=
+ +
This is the closed loop transfer function,
So we get

( )
( )
G S
G S
1 +

S S 1
1
2
=
+ +
( ) G S
S S
1
2
=
+
Thus, the steady state error for unit step input is
nodi a
e
SS

( ) limG S 1
1
S 0
=
+
"

lim 1
1
1
0
2
d d
=
+
+
" d

1
1
0
3
=
+
=
Given the magnitude Bode plot,
Since, slope at 1/3 is increasing and slope at 1 is decreasing. So, we can write
frequency response function as
G jw ^ h
j
j
1
3
1
w
w
=
+
+
^
b
h
l
or G jw ^ h
/
j
j
1
1
1 3
3
1
w
w
=
+
+
^
c
h
m
or G jw ^ h
/
/
j b
j a
1
1
b
a
w
w
=
+
+
^
^
h
h
Therefore, the maximum phase angle is

m
f / tan a b 90 2
1
c = -
-
_ i
/ tan 90 2 1 3
1
c = -
-
^ h
90 60 30 c c c = - =
and the maximum phase occur at
w / ab 1 3 = =
Thus, we obtain the gain at the frequency as
G
m
log log 20
3
1
3
1
20 1
3
1
/ 2 2
2
2 1 2
= + - +
c
b
c e m
l
m o
. 4 76 =
The Laplace transform of unit step fun
n
is
U s ^ h
s
1
=
So, the O/P of the system is given as
Y s ^ h
s s
1 1
=b b l l
s
1
2
=
For zero initial condition, we check
nodi a
u t ^ h
dt
dy t
=
^ h
& U s ^ h SY s y 0 = - ^ ^ h h
& U s ^ h s
s
y
1
0
2
= - c ^ m h
or, U s ^ h
s
1
= y 0 0 = ^
^
h
h
Hence, the O/P is correct which is
Y s
^ h

s
1
2
=
its inverse Laplace transform is given by
y t ^ h tu t = ^ h
From the given plot, we obtain the slope as
Slope
log log
log log
w w
G G 20 20
2 1
2 1
=
-
-
From the figure
logG 20
2
8 dB =-
logG 20
1
32 dB =
and
1
w 1 / rad s =

2
w 10 / rad s =
So, the slope is
Slope
log log
8 32
10 1
=
-
- -
40 / dB decade =-
Therefore, the transfer function can be given as
G s ^ h
S
k
2
=
At 1 w = , G jw ^ h
w
k
k
2
= =
In decibel,
log G j 20 w ^ h logk 20 32 = =
or, k . 10 39 8
32
20
= =
Hence, the Transfer function is
G s ^ h
.
s
k
s
39 8
2 2
= =
For the given SFG, we have two forward paths
P
k1
s s s 1 1
1 1 2
= =
- - -
^ ^ ^ ^ h h h h
P
k2
s s 1 1 1
1 1
= =
- -
^ ^ ^ ^ h h h h
since, all the loops are touching to both the paths P
k1
and P
k2
so,
k
1
D 1 k
2
D = =
Now, we have
D 1 = - (sum of individual loops)
nodi a
+ (sum of product of nontouching loops)
Here, the loops are
L
1
4 1 4 = - =- ^ ^ h h
L
2
s s 4 4
1 1
= - =
- -
^ ^ h h
L
3
s s s 2 2
1 1 2
= - =-
- - -
^ ^ ^ h h h
L
4
s s 2 1 2
1 1
= - =-
- -
^ ^ ^ h h h
As all the loop , , L L L
1 2 3
and L
4
are touching to each other so,
D L L L L 1
1 2 3 4
= - + + + ^ h
s s s 1 4 4 2 2
1 2 1
= - - - - -
- - -
^ h
5 6 2 s s
1 2
= + +
- -
From Masons gain formulae

U s
Y s
^
^
h
h

P
k k
D
S D
=
s s
s s
5 6 2
1 2
2 1
=
+ +
+
- -
- -

s s
s
5 6 2
1
2
=
+ +
+
Given, open loop transfer function
G s ^ h
s
K
s
K
1 10
10
a a
10
1
=
+
=
+
By taking inverse Laplace transform, we have
g t ^ h e
t 10
1
=
-
Comparing with standard form of transfer function, Ae
/ t t -
, we get the open
loop time constant,

ol
t 10 =
Now, we obtain the closed loop transfer function for the given system as
H s ^ h
1 10 10
G s
G s
s K
K
1
10
a
a
=
+
=
+ +
^
^
h
h

s K
K
a
a
10
1
=
+ + ^ h
By taking inverse laplace transform, we get
h t ^ h . k e
a
k t a
10
1
=
- +
^ h
So, the time constant of closed loop system is obtained as

cl
t
k
1
a
10
1
=
+
or,
cl
t
k
1
a
= (approximately)
Now, given that k
a
reduces open loop time constant by a factor of 100. i.e.,

cl
t
100
ol
t
=
or,
k
1
a

100
10
=
or, k
a
10 =
Given, the state variable formulation,

x
x
1
2
o
o
> H
x
x
u
2
0
0
1
1
1
1
2
=
-
-
+ > > > H H H ....(1)
nodi a
and y
x
x
1 0
1
2
=6 > @ H ....(2)
From Eq. (1) we get
x
1
o
x u 2
1
= +
Taking Laplace transform
sX x 0
1 1
- ^ h X
s
2
1
1
=- + (Here, X
1
denotes Laplace transform of x
1
)
So,
s X 2
1
+ ^ h
s
1
= x 0 0
1
= ^ ^ h h
or, X
1

s s 2
1
=
+ ^ h
....(3)
Now, from Eq. (2) we have
y x
1
=
Taking Laplace transform both the sides,
Y X
L
=
or, Y
s s 2
1
=
+ ^ h
(from eq. (3))
or, Y
s s 2
1 1
2
1
= -
+
; E
y u t e u t
2
1 t 2
= -
-
^ ^ h h 8 B
e
2
1
2
1 t 2
= -
-
for t 0 > ^ h
From the given state variable system, we have
A
2
0
0
1
=
-
> H
and B
1
1
=> H; C 1 0 =6 @
Now, we obtain the controllability matrix
C
M
: B AB =6 @

1
2
2
1
=
-
> H
and the observability matrix is obtained as
O
M

C
CA
=> H
1
2
0
0
=
-
> H
So, we get
Rank of the controllability matrix " Rank C 2
M
= ^ h
Rank of the observability matrix " Rank O 1
M
= ^ h
Since, the order of state variable is and x x 2
1 2 ^ h. Therefore, we have
Rank C
M ^ h = order of state variables
but, Rank ( ) O
M
< order of state variables
Thus, system is controllable but not observable
nodi a
General form of state equations are given as
x
o
x u A B = +
y
o
x u C D = +
For the given problem
A
0
,
a
a
a
0
0 0
0 0
3
1
2
=
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
B
0
0
1
=
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
AB
0
a
a
a a
0
0 0
0 0
0
0
1
0
0
3
1
2 2
= =
R
T
S
S
S
S
R
T
S
S
S
S
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
V
X
W
W
W
W
V
X
W
W
W
W
A B
2
a a
a a
a a a a 0
0
0
0 0
0
0
0
1
0
0
2 3
3 1
1 2 1 2
= =
R
T
S
S
S
S
R
T
S
S
S
S
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
V
X
W
W
W
W
V
X
W
W
W
W
For controllability it is necessary that following matrix has a tank of n 3 = .
U : : B AB A B
2
=
6 @

0
a
a a 0
0
1 0
0
0
2
1 2
=
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
So, a
2
0 !
a a
1 2
0 ! a 0
1
& !
a
3
may be zero or not.
( ) Y s
( )
[ ( ) ( )]
s as s
K s
R s Y s
2 1
1
3 2
=
+ + +
+
-
( )
( )
Y s
s as s
K s
1
2 1
1
3 2
+
+ + +
+
; E

( )
( )
s as s
K s
R s
2 1
1
3 2
=
+ + +
+
( )[ ( ) ( )] Y s s as s k k 2 1
3 2
+ + + + + ( 1) ( ) K s R s = +
Transfer Function,
( )
( )
( )
H s
R s
Y s
=
( ) ( )
( )
s as s k k
K s
2 1
1
3 2
=
+ + + + +
+
Routh Table :
For oscillation,

( ) ( )
a
a K K 2 1 + - +
0 =
a
K
K
2
1
=
+
+
Auxiliary equation
nodi a
( ) A s ( ) as k 1 0
2
= + + =
s
2

a
k 1
=-
+
s
2

( )
( )
k
k
k
1
1
2 =
+
- +
+ ( ) k 2 =- +
s j k 2 = +
jw j k 2 = +
w k 2 2 = + = (Oscillation frequency)
k 2 =
and a .
2 2
2 1
4
3
0 75 =
+
+
= =
( ) G s
C

s b
s a
j b
j a
w
w
=
+
+
=
+
+
Phase lead angle, f tan tan
a b
1 1 w w
= -
- -
a a k k
tan
ab
a b
1
1
2
w
w w
=
+
-
-
J
L
K
K
K
N
P
O
O
O

( )
tan
ab
b a
1
2
w
w
=
+
-
-
c m
For phase-lead compensation 0 > f
b a - 0 >
b a >
Note: For phase lead compensator zero is nearer to the origin as compared to
pole, so option (C) can not be true.
f tan tan
a b
1 1 w w
= -
- -
a a k k

d
d
w
f

/ /
a
a
b
b
1
1
1
1
0
2 2
w w
=
+
-
+
=
a a k k

a
ab
1
2
2
w
+
b b
a
1 1
2
2
w
= +

a b
1 1
-
ab a b
1 1
2
w
= -
b l
w ab =
/sec rad 1 2 2
#
= =
Gain margin is simply equal to the gain at phase cross over frequency (
p
w ). Phase
cross over frequency is the frequency at which phase angle is equal to 180c - .
From the table we can see that ( ) G j 180
p
c + w =- , at which gain is 0.5.
GM 20
( )
log
G j
1
p
10
w
=
e o

20
0.5
1
6 log dB = =
b l
Phase Margin is equal to 180c plus the phase angle
g
f at the gain cross over
nodi a
frequency (
g
w ). Gain cross over frequency is the frequency at which gain is unity.
From the table it is clear that ( ) G j 1
g
w = , at which phase angle is 150c -

PM
f 180 ( ) G j
g
c + w = +
180 150 30c = - =
We know that steady state error is given by
e
ss

( )
( )
lim
G s
sR s
1 s 0
=
+ "
where ( ) R s input "
( ) G s open loop transfer function "
For unit step input
( ) R s
s
1
=
So e
ss

( )
1
0.1 lim
G s
s
s
1 s 0
=
+
=
"
b l
( ) G 1 0 + 10 =
( ) G 0 9 =
Given input ( ) r t 10[ ( ) ( 1)] t t m m = - -
or ( ) R s
s s
e 10
1 1 s
= -
-
: D

s
e
10
1
s
=
-
-
: D
So steady state error

ss
el
( )
( )
lim
G s
s
s
e
1
10
1
s
s
0
#
=
+
-
"
-

( ) e
1 9
10 1
0
=
+
-
0 =
Transfer function having at least one zero or pole in RHS of s-plane is called
non-minimum phase transfer function.
( ) G s
( )( ) s s
s
2 3
1
=
+ +
-
In the given transfer function one zero is located at s 1 = (RHS), so this is a
non-minimum phase system.
Poles , 2 3 - - , are in left side of the complex plane, So the system is stable
( ) G s
( ) s s
K s
2
3
2
2
=
+
+
b l
Steps for plotting the root-locus
(1) Root loci starts at 0, 0 2 s s s and = = =-
(2) n m > , therefore, number of branches of root locus b 3 =
(3) Angle of asymptotes is given by
nodi a

( )
n m
q 2 1 180c
-
+
, , q 0 1 =
(1)
( )
( )
3 1
2 0 1 180
#
c
-
+
90c =
(2)
( )
( )
3 1
2 1 1 180
#
c
-
+
270c =
(4) The two asymptotes intersect on real axis at centroid
x
n m
Poles Zeroes
=
-
-/ /

2
3
2
3 1 3
2
=
-
- - -
=-
b l
(5) Between two open-loop poles s 0 = and s 2 =- there exist a break away
point.
K
3
2
( )
s
s s 2
2
=-
+
+
b l

ds
dK
0 =
s 0 =
Root locus is shown in the figure
Three roots with nearly equal parts exist on the left half of s-plane.
The system may be reduced as shown below

( )
( )
R s
Y s

( )
( )
s s K
s s K
1
1
1
1
1
=
+
+ +
+ +

( ) s s K 1 1
1
2
=
+ + +
This is a second order system transfer function, characteristic equation is
nodi a
(1 ) 1 s s K
2
+ + + 0 =
Comparing with standard form
s s 2
n n
2 2
xw w + + 0 =
We get x
K
2
1
=
+
Peak overshoot, M
p
e
/ 1
2
=
px x - -
So the Peak overshoot is effected by K .
Stability :
Eigen value of the system are calculated as
A I l - 0 =
A I l -
1
0
2
2 0
0 l
l
=
-
- > > H H

1
0
2
2
l
l
=
- -
-
> H
A I l - ( 1 )(2 ) 2 0 0
#
l l = - - - - =
& ,
1 2
l l , 1 2 =-
Since eigen values of the system are of opposite signs, so it is unstable
Controllability :
A
1
0
2
2
=
-
> H, B
0
1
=> H
AB
2
2
=> H
[ : ] B AB
0
1
2
2
=> H
: B AB
6 @
0 =Y
So it is controllable.
Given characteristic equation
( 1)( 3) ( 2) s s s K s + + + + 0 = ; K 0 >
( 4 3) s s s K (s 2)
2
+ + + + 0 =
4 (3 ) 2 s s K s K
3 2
+ + + + 0 =
From Rouths tabulation method
s
3
1
K 3 +
s
2
4
K 2
s
1
0 >
4(3 ) 2
12 2
K K
K
4 4
(1)
=
+ -
+
s
0
K 2
There is no sign change in the first column of routh table, so no root is lying in
nodi a
right half of s-plane.
For plotting root locus, the equation can be written as

( )( )
( )
s s s
K s
1
1 3
2
+
+ +
+
0 =
Open loop transfer function
( ) G s
( )( )
( )
s s s
K s
1 3
2
=
+ +
+
Root locus is obtained in following steps:
1. No. of poles n 3 = , at 0, 1 s s = =- and 3 s =-
2. No. of Zeroes m 1 = , at s 2 =-
3. The root locus on real axis lies between s 0 = and s 1 =- , between s 3 =-
and s 2 =- .
4. Breakaway point lies between open loop poles of the system. Here
breakaway point lies in the range [ ] Re s 1 0 < < - .
5. Asymptotes meet on real axis at a point C , given by
C
n m
real part of poles real parts of zeroes
=
-
-/ /

( ) ( )
3 1
0 1 3 2
=
-
- - - -
1 =-
As no. of poles is 3, so two root loci branches terminates at infinity along
asymptotes ( ) Re s 1 =-
Given ( ) G s
( )( ) s s s 1 2
1
=
+ +
( ) G jw
( )( ) j j j 1 2
1
w w w
=
+ +
( ) G jw
1 4
1
2 2
w w w
=
+ +
( ) G j + w ( ) ( / ) tan tan 90 2
1 1
c w w =- - -
- -
In nyquist plot
For , ( ) G j 0 w w = 3 =
( ) G j + w 90c =-
For , ( ) G j 3 w w = 0 =
( ) G j + w 90 90 90 c c c =- - -
270c =-
Intersection at real axis
( ) G jw
( )( ) j j j 1 2
1
w w w
=
+ +

( ) j j3 2
1
2
w w w
=
- + +

( ) ( )
( )
j j
j
3 2
1
3 2
3 2
2 2 2 2
2 2
#
w w w w w w
w w w
=
- + - - - -
- - -

( )
( ) j
9 2
3 2
4 2 2 2
2 2
w w w
w w w
=
+ -
- - -

( ) ( )
( ) j
9 2
3
9 2
2
4 2 2 2
2
4 2 2 2
2
w w w
w
w w w
w w
=
+ -
-
-
+ -
-
nodi a
At real axis [ ( )] Im G jw 0 =
So,
( )
( )
9 2
2
4 2 2
2
w w w
w w
+ -
-
0 =
2 0
2
& w - = 2 w = rad/sec
At 2 w = rad/sec, magnitude response is
( ) G j
at 2
w
w=

2 2 1 2 4
1
=
+ +

6
1
4
3
< =
Overall gain of the system is written as
G G G
G
1
1 2
3
=
We know that for a quantity that is product of two or more quantities total
percentage error is some of the percentage error in each quantity. so error in
overall gain G is
G 3
1
1 2
3
e e
e
= + +
Given Rouths tabulation.
s
3
2 2
s
2
4 4
s
1
0 0
So the auxiliary equation is given by,
s 4 4
2
+ 0 =
s
2
1 =-
s j ! =
From table we have characteristic equation as
s s s 2 2 4 4
3 2
+ + + 0 =
s s s 2 2
3 2
+ + + 0 =
( ) ( ) s s s 1 2 1
2 2
+ + + 0 =
( )( ) s s 2 1
2
+ + 0 =
s 2 =- , s j ! =
From Nyquist stability criteria, no. of closed loop poles in right half of s-plane
is given as
Z P N = -
P " No. of open loop poles in right half s-plane
N " No. of encirclement of ( 1, 0) j -
nodi a
Here N 2 =- (` encirclement is in clockwise direction)
P 0 = (` system is stable)
So, ( ) Z 0 2 = - -
Z 2 = , System is unstable with 2-poles on RH of s-plane.
Since initial slope of the bode plot is 40 - dB/decade, so no. of poles at origin
is 2.
Transfer function can be written in following steps:
1. Slope changes from 40 - dB/dec. to 60 - dB/dec. at 2
1
w = rad/sec., so at
1
w there is a pole in the transfer function.
2. Slope changes from 60 - dB/dec to 40 - dB/dec at 5
2
w = rad/sec., so at
this frequency there is a zero lying in the system function.
3. The slope changes from 40 - dB/dec to 60 - dB/dec at 25
3
w = rad/sec, so
there is a pole in the system at this frequency.
Transfer function
( ) T s
( )( )
( )
s s s
K s
2 25
5
2
=
+ +
+
Constant term can be obtained as.
( ) T j
. at 0 1
w
w=
80 =
So, 80
( . )
( )
log
K
20
0 1 50
5
2
#
=
K 1000 =
therefore, the transfer function is
( ) T s
( )( )
( )
s s s
s
2 25
1000 5
2
=
+ +
+
From the figure we can see that steady state error for given system is
e
ss
. . 1 0 75 0 25 = - =
Steady state error for unity feed back system is given by
e
ss

1 ( )
( )
lim
G s
sR s
s 0
=
+ "
= G
lim
s
1
( 1)( 2)
s
s s
K
s
0
1
=
+
"
+ +
^ h
> H
; ( ) R s
s
1
= (unit step input)

1
1
K
2
=
+

K 2
2
=
+
So, e
ss
0.25
K 2
2
=
+
=
nodi a
2 0.5 0.25K = +
K
.
.
0 25
1 5
6 = =
Open loop transfer function of the figure is given by,
( ) G s
s
e
. s 0 1
=
-
( ) G jw
j
e
. j0 1
w
=
w -
Phase cross over frequency can be calculated as,
( ) G j
p
+ w 180c =-
0.1
180
90
p #
c w
p
- -
b l
180c =-
. 0 1
180
p #
c
w
p
90c =
. 0 1
p
w
180
90
#
c
c p
=

p
w . 15 7 = rad/sec
So the gain margin (dB)

( )
log
G j
20
1
p
w
=
e o

20log
1
15.7
1
=
^ h
= G
. log 20 15 7 =
. 23 9 = dB
Given system equations

( )
dt
dx t
1
3 ( ) ( ) 2 ( ) x t x t u t
1 2
=- + +

( )
dt
dx t
2
( ) ( ) x t u t 2
2
=- +
( ) y t ( ) x t
1
=
Taking Laplace transform on both sides of equations.
( ) sX s
1
( ) ( ) ( ) X s X s U s 3 2
1 2
=- + +
( ) ( ) s X s 3
1
+ ( ) ( ) X s U s 2
2
= + ...(1)
Similarly ( ) sX s
2
( ) ( ) X s U s 2
2
=- +
( ) ( ) s X s 2
2
+ ( ) U s = ...(2)
From equation (1) & (2)
( ) ( ) s X s 3
1
+
( )
( )
s
U s
U s
2
2 =
+
+
( ) X s
1

( ) ( )
s
U s
s
s
3 2
1 2 2
=
+ +
+ +
; E

( )
( )( )
( )
U s
s s
s
2 3
2 5
=
+ +
+
From output equation,
( ) Y s ( ) X s
1
=
nodi a
So, ( ) Y s ( )
( )( )
( )
U s
s s
s
2 3
2 5
=
+ +
+
System transfer function

( )
( )
U s
Y s
T.F =
( )( )
( )
s s
s
2 3
2 5
=
+ +
+

( )
s s
s
5 6
2 5
2
=
+ +
+
Given state equations in matrix form can be written as,

x
x
1
2
o
o
> H ( )
x
x
t u
3
0
1
2
2
1
1
2
=
-
-
+ > > > H H H

( )
dt
d t X
( ) ( ) A t B t X u = +
State transition matrix is given by
( ) t f ( ) s L
1
F =
-
6 @
( ) s F ( ) sI A
1
= -
-
( ) sI A -
s
s 0
0 3
0
1
2
= -
-
-
> > H H
( ) sI A -
s
s
3
0
1
2
=
+ -
+
> H
( ) sI A
1
-
-

( )( ) s s
s
s 3 2
1
2
0
1
3
=
+ +
+
+
> H
So ( ) ( ) s sI A
1
F = -
-

( ) ( )( )
( )
s s s
s
3
1
3 2
1
2
1
=
+ + +
+
0
R
T
S
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
W
( ) [ ( )] t s L
1
f F =
-

e e e
e 0
t t t
t
3 2 3
2
=
-
- - -
-
> H
Given differential equation for the function

( )
( )
dt
dy t
y t + ( ) t d =
Taking Laplace on both the sides we have,
( ) ( ) sY s Y s + 1 =
( 1) ( ) s Y s + 1 =
( ) Y s
s 1
1
=
+
Taking inverse Laplace of ( ) Y s
( ) y t ( ) e u t
t
=
-
, t 0 >
Given transfer function
( ) G s
s s 3 2
1
2
=
+ +
Input ( ) r t ( ) t 1 d = -
nodi a
( ) R s [ ( )] t e 1 L
s
d = - =
-
Output is given by
( ) Y s ( ) ( ) R s G s =

s s
e
3 2
s
2
=
+ +
-
Steady state value of output
( ) limy t
t"3
( ) limsY s
s 0
=
"

lim
s s
se
3 2
s
s
0
2
=
+ +
"
-

0 =
For C
1
Phase is given by

C1
q ( ) tan tan
10
1 1
w
w
= -
- -
a k
tan
1
10
10 1
2
w
w
w
=
+
-
-
J
L
K
K
K
N
P
O
O
O
tan
10
9
0 >
1
2
w
w
=
+
-
c m
(Phase lead)
Similarly for C
2
, phase is

C2
q ( ) tan tan
10
1 1 w
w = -
- -
a k
tan
1
10
10 1
2
w
w
w
=
+
-
-
J
L
K
K
K
N
P
O
O
O
tan
10
9
0 <
1
2
w
w
=
+
- -
c m
(Phase lag)
From the given bode plot we can analyze that:
1. Slope 40 - dB/decade"2 poles
2. Slope 20 - dB/decade (Slope changes by 20 + dB/decade)"1 Zero
3. Slope 0 dB/decade (Slope changes by 20 + dB/decade)"1 Zero
So there are 2 poles and 2 zeroes in the transfer function.
Characteristic equation for the system
1
( )( ) s s s
K
3 10
+
+ +
0 =
( 3)( 10) s s s K + + + 0 =
13 30 s s s K
3 2
+ + + 0 =
Applying Rouths stability criteria
s
3
1 30
nodi a
s
2
13
K
s
1
( ) K
13
13 30
#
-
s
0
K
For stability there should be no sign change in first column
So, K 390 - 0 > K 390 < &
K 0 >
0 K 90 < <
Given transfer function is
( ) H s )
s s 20 100
100
2
=
+ +
Characteristic equation of the system is given by
s s 20 100
2
+ + 0 =
100
n
2
w = 10
n
&w = rad/sec.
2
n
xw 20 =
or x
2 10
20
1
#
= =
( ) 1 x = so system is critically damped.
State space equation of the system is given by,
X
o
A B X u = +
Y CX =
Taking Laplace transform on both sides of the equations.
( ) s s X ( ) ( ) A s B s X U = +
( ) ( ) sI A s X - ( ) B s U =
( ) s X ( ) ( ) sI A B s U
1
= -
-
Since ( ) s Y ( ) C s X = so
( ) s Y ( ) ( ) C sI A B s U
1
= -
-

( )
( )
s
s
U
Y
T.F = ( ) C sI A B
1
= -
-
( ) sI A -
s
s 0
0 0
0
1
2
= -
-
> > H H

s
s 0
1
2
=
-
+
> H
( ) sI A
1
-
-

( ) s s
s
s 2
1
2
0
=
+
+ 1
> H

( )
( )
s s s
s
1
0
2
1
2
1
=
+
+
R
T
S
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
W
Transfer function
nodi a
( ) [ ] G s C sI A B
1
= -
-

( )
( )
s s s
s
1 0
1
0
2
1
2
1
0
1
=
+
+
R
T
S
S
S
S
S
8
>
V
X
W
W
W
W
W
B
H

( )
( )
s s
s
1 0
2
1
2
1
=
+
+
R
T
S
S
S
S
S
8
V
X
W
W
W
W
W
B

( ) s s 2
1
=
+
Steady state error is given by,
e
ss

1 ( ) ( )
( )
lim
G s H s
sR s
s 0
=
+ "
= G
Here ( ) R s [ ( )] r t
s
1
L = = (Unit step input)
( ) G s
( ) s s 2
1
=
+
( ) H s 1 = (Unity feed back)
So, e
ss
lim
s
1
( 2)
s
s s
s
0
1
1
=
+
"
+
^ h
> H

( 2) 1
( 2)
lim
s s
s s
s 0
=
+ +
+
"
= G
0 =
For input u
1
, the system is ( ) u 0
2
=
System response is
( ) H s
1

( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
s
s
s
s
s
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
=
+
+
-
-
+
-

( )
( )
s
s
3
1
=
+
-
Poles of the system is lying at s 3 =- (negative s-plane) so this is stable.
For input u
2
the system is ( ) u 0
1
=
System response is
nodi a
( ) H s
2

( )( )
( )
( )
s s
s
s
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
=
+
- +
-
-

( )( )
( )
s s
s
1 3
2
=
- +
+
One pole of the system is lying in right half of s-plane, so the system is unstable.
Given function is.
( ) G s
( )( ) s s s 1 2
1
=
+ +
( ) G jw
( )( ) j j j 1 2
1
w w w
=
+ +
By simplifying
( ) G jw
j j
j
j j
j
j j
j
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
2
# # #
w w
w
w w
w
w w
w
=
-
-
+ -
-
+ -
-
c c c m m m

1
1
4
2 j j j
2 2 2
w
w
w
w
w
w
= -
+
-
+
-
c c c m m m

( )( )
( ) j j
1 4
2 3
2 2 2
2
w w w
w w w
=
+ +
- - -

( )( ) ( )( )
( ) j
1 4
3
1 4
2
2 2 2
2
2 2 2
2
w w w
w
w w w
w w
=
+ +
-
+
+ +
-
( ) G jw x iy = +
x [ ( )] Re G j
1 4
3
4
3
0
#
w = =
-
=-
" w
+
Let response of the un-compensated system is
( ) H s
UC

( )( ) s s s 1 9
900
=
+ +
Response of compensated system.
( ) H s
C

( )( )
( )
s s s
G s
1 9
900
C
=
+ +
Where ( ) G s
C
" Response of compensator
Given that gain-crossover frequency of compensated system is same as phase
crossover frequency of un-compensated system
So,
( )
g compensated
w ( )
p uncompensated
w =
180c - ( ) H j
p UC
+ w =
180c - 90 ( ) tan tan
9
p
p 1 1
c w
w
=- - -
- -
a k
90c tan
1
9
9
p
p
p
1
2
w
w
w
=
-
+
-
J
L
K
K
K
N
P
O
O
O
1
9
p
2
w
- 0 =

p
w 3 = rad/sec.
So, ( )
g compensated
w 3 = rad/sec.
nodi a
At this frequency phase margin of compensated system is

PM
f 180 ( ) H j
g C
c + w = +
45c 180 90 ( ) ( / ) ( ) tan tan G j 9
g g C g
1 1
c c + w w w = - - - +
- -
45c 180 90 ( ) ( / ) ( ) tan tan G j 3 1 3
C g
1 1
c c + w = - - - +
- -
45c ( ) tan G j 90
1 3
3
g
1
3
1
3
1
C
c + w = -
-
+
+
-
^ h
> H
45c 90 90 ( ) G j
g C
c c + w = - +
( ) G j
g C
+ w 45c =
The gain cross over frequency of compensated system is lower than un-compensated
system, so we may use lag-lead compensator.
At gain cross over frequency gain of compensated system is unity so.
( ) H j
g C
w 1 =

( ) G j
1 81
900
g g g
g
2 2
C
w w w
w
+ +
1 =
( ) G j
g C
w
900
3 9 1 9 81
=
+ +

900
3 30
#
=
10
1
=
in dB ( ) G
g C
w log 20
10
1
=
b l
20 =- dB (attenuation)
Characteristic equation for the given system,
1
( )
( )
s
K s
8
3
2
+
+
+
0 =
( 8) ( 3) s s K
2
+ + + 0 =
(16 ) (64 3 ) s K s K
2
+ + + + 0 =
By applying Rouths criteria.
s
2
1
64 3K +
s
1
16 K +
0
s
0
64 3K +
For system to be oscillatory
16 0 K + = 16 K & =-
Auxiliary equation ( ) (64 3 ) 0 A s s K
2
= + + =
& ( ) s 64 3 16
2
#
+ + - 0 =
s 64 48
2
+ - 0 =
s 16
2
=- j j 4 & w =
w 4 = rad/sec
From the given block diagram we can obtain signal flow graph of the system.
Transfer function from the signal flow graph is written as
nodi a
T.F
s
a
s
a
s
Pb
s
Pb
s
c P
s
c P
1
0 0 1
1
1
2 2
2
0
=
+ + - -
+

( ) ( )
( )
s a s a P b sb
c c s P
2
1 0 0 1
0 1
=
+ + - +
+

( )
( )
s a s a
P b sb
s a s a
c c s P
1
2
1 0
2
1 0
0 1
0 1
=
-
+ +
+
+ +
+
^ h
from the given reduced form transfer function is given by
T.F
YPZ
XYP
1
=
-
by comparing above two we have
X ( ) c c s
0 1
= +
Y
s a s a
1
2
1 0
=
+ +
Z ( ) b sb
0 1
= +
For the given system Z is given by
Z ( ) E s
s
K
i
=
Where ( ) E s " steady state error of the system
Here ( ) E s
( ) ( )
( )
lim
G s H s
sR s
1 s 0
=
+ "
Input ( ) R s
s
1
= (Unit step)
( ) G s
s
s s 2
K
K
i
p
2 2
2
xw w
w
= +
+ +
b e l o
( ) H s 1 = (Unity feed back)
So,
Z
( )
lim
s
K
K
s s
s
s
s
K
1
2
1
s
i
p
i
0
2 2
2
xw w
w
=
+ +
+ +
"
b
b
b
l
l
l
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W

( )
( )
lim
s K K s
s s
K
2
s
i p
i
0
2 2
2
xw w
w
=
+ +
+ +
"
> H
1
K
K
i
i
= =
System response of the given circuit can be obtained as.
( )
( )
( )
H s
e s
e s
i
0
=
R Ls
Cs
Cs
1
1
=
+ +
b
b
l
l
( ) H s
1 LCs RCs
1
2
=
+ +

s
L
R
s
LC
LC
1
1
2
=
+ +
b l
nodi a
Characteristic equation is given by,
s
L
R
s
LC
1 2
+ + 0 =
Here natural frequency
LC
1
n
w =
2
n
xw
L
R
=
Damping ratio x
L
R
LC
2
=
R
L
C
2
=
Here x 0.5
2
10
10 10
1 10
6
3
#
#
= =
-
-
(under damped)
So peak overshoot is given by
% peak overshoot
e
100 1
2
#
= x
px
-
-

100 e ( . )
.
1 0 5
0 5
2
#
=
# p
-
-
% 16 =
In standard form for a characteristic equation give as
... s a s a s a
n
n
n
1
1
1 0
+ + + +
-
-
0 =
in its state variable representation matrix A is given as
A
a a a a
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
n 0 1 2 1
h h h
g
g
h
g
h
=
- - - -
-
R
T
S
S
S
S
SS
V
X
W
W
W
W
WW
Characteristic equation of the system is
s s 4 2 1
2
- + 0 =
So, , , a a a 4 2 1
2 1 0
= =- =
A
a a a
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
2
0
1
4
0 1 2
=
- - -
=
- -
R
T
S
S
S
S
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
V
X
W
W
W
W
In the given options only in option (A) the nyquist plot does not enclose the unit
circle ( , ) j 1 0 - , So this is stable.
Given function is,
( ) H jw
( )( )
( )
j j
j
10 100
10 1
2
4
w w
w
=
+ +
+
Function can be rewritten as,
( ) H jw
( )
j j
j
10 1
10
10 1
100
10 1
4
2
4
w w
w
=
+ +
+
9 9 C C

. ( )
j j
j
1
10
1
100
0 1 1
2
w w
w
=
+ +
+
a a k k
nodi a
The system is type 0, So, initial slope of the bode plot is 0 dB/decade.
Corner frequencies are

1
w 1 = rad/sec

2
w 10 = rad/sec

3
w 100 = rad/sec
As the initial slope of bode plot is 0 dB/decade and corner frequency 1
1
w = rad/
sec, the Slope after 1 w = rad/sec or log 0 w = is(0 20) 20 + =+ dB/dec.
After corner frequency 10
2
w = rad/sec or log 1
2
w = , the Slope is ( ) 20 20 0 + - =
dB/dec.
Similarly after 100
3
w = rad/sec or log 2 w = , the slope of plot is ( ) 0 20 2 40
#
- =-
dB/dec.
Given characteristic equation.
( )( ) ( ) s s K s 4 1 1
2
- + + - 0 =
or
( )( )
( )
s s
K s
1
4 1
1
2
+
- +
-
0 =
So, the open loop transfer function for the system.
( ) G s
( )( )( )
( )
s s s
K s
2 2 1
1
=
- + +
-
, no. of poles n 3 =
no of zeroes m 1 =
Steps for plotting the root-locus
(1) Root loci starts at , , s s s 2 1 2 = =- =-
(2) n m > , therefore, number of branches of root locus b 3 =
(3) Angle of asymptotes is given by

( )
n m
q 2 1 180c
-
+
, , q 0 1 =
(1)
( )
( )
3 1
2 0 1 180
#
c
-
+
90c =
(2)
( )
( )
3 1
2 1 1 180
#
c
-
+
270c =
(4) The two asymptotes intersect on real axis at
x
n m
Poles Zeroes
=
-
-/ /

( ) ( )
3 1
1 2 2 1
=
-
- - + -
1 =-
(5) Between two open-loop poles s 1 =- and s 2 =- there exist a break away
point.
K
( )
( )( )
s
s s
1
4 1
2
=-
-
- +

ds
dK
0 =
s . 1 5 =-
Closed loop transfer function of the given system is,
( ) T s
( )( ) s s
s
1 4
4
2
=
+ +
+
nodi a
( ) T jw
( )( )
( )
j j
j
1 4
4
2
w w
w
=
+ +
+
If system output is zero
( ) T jw
1 ( ) j j 4
4
2
w w
w
=
+ +
-
^ h
0 =
4
2
w - 0 =

2
w 4 =
&w 2 = rad/sec
From the given plot we can see that centroid C (point of intersection) where
asymptotes intersect on real axis) is 0.
So for option (a)
( ) G s
s
K
3
=
Centroid 0
n m 3 0
0 0
Poles Zeros
=
-
-
=
-
-
=
/ /
Open loop transfer function is.
( ) G s
( )
s
s 1
2
=
+
( ) G jw
j 1
2
w
w
=
-
+
Phase crossover frequency can be calculated as.
( ) G j
p
+ w 180c =-
( ) tan
p
1
w
-
180c =-

p
w 0 =
Gain margin of the system is.
G.M
( ) G j
1
1
1
p
p
p
2
2
w
w
w
= =
+

1
0
p
p
2
2
w
w
=
+
=
Characteristic equation for the given system
( ) ( ) G s H s 1 + 0 =

( )
( )
K
s
s
1
1
1
+
+
-
0 =
(1 ) (1 ) s K s + + - 0 =
( ) ( ) s K K 1 1 - + + 0 =
For the system to be stable, coefficient of characteristic equation should be of
same sign.
K 1 0 > - , K 1 0 > +
K 1 < , K 1 >-
1 - K 1 < <
nodi a
K 1 <
In the given block diagram
Steady state error is given as
e
ss
( ) limsE s
s 0
=
"
( ) E s ( ) ( ) R s Y s = -
( ) Y s can be written as
( ) Y s ( ) ( ) ( ) R s Y s
s
R s
s
3
2
2
= - -
+
: D " ,
( )
( )
( )
( )
R s
s s s
Y s
s s 2
6
2
2
2
6
=
+
-
+
-
+
; ; E E
( )
( )
Y s
s s
1
2
6
+
+
; E
( )
( )
R s
s s
s
2
6 2
=
+
-
; E
( ) Y s ( )
( )
( )
R s
s s
s
2 6
6 2
2
=
+ +
-
So, ( ) E s ( )
( )
( )
( ) R s
s s
s
R s
2 6
6 2
2
= -
+ +
-
( ) R s
s s
s s
2 6
4
2
2
=
+ +
+
; E
For unit step input ( ) R s
s
1
=
Steady state error e
ss
( ) limsE s
s 0
=
"
e
ss

1
( 2 6)
( 4 )
lim s
s
s s
s s
2
2
s 0
=
+ +
+
"
= G
0 =
When it passes through negative real axis at that point phase angle is 180c - So
( ) ( ) G j H j + w w 180c =-
0.25j
2
w
p
- - p =-
0.25jw -
2
p
=-
0.25 j w
2
p
=
j w
. 2 0 25
#
p
=
s 2 jw p = =
Put s 2p = in given open loop transfer function we get
( ) ( ) G s H s
s 2p =
.
e
2
0 5
. 0 25 2
p
p
= =-
# p -
nodi a
So it passes through ( 0.5, 0) j -
Open loop transfer function of the system is given by.
( ) ( ) G s H s ( 0.366 )
( 1)
1
K s
s s
= +
+
; E
( ) ( ) G j H j w w
( )
.
j j
K j
1
0 366
w w
w
=
+
+
Phase margin of the system is given as
60
PM
c f = 180 ( ) ( ) G j H j
g g
c + w w = +
Where gain
g
" w cross over frequency 1 = rad/sec
So, 60c
.
( ) tan tan
K
180
0 366
90
g
g
1 1
c c
w
w = + - -
- -
b l

.
( ) tan tan
K
90
0 366
1
1 1
c = + -
- -
b l

.
tan
K
90 45
0 366 1
c c = - +
-
b l
15c
.
tan
K
0 366 1
=
-
b l

.
K
0 366
tan15c =
K
.
.
0 267
0 366
=
1.366 =
Given state equation.
( ) t X
o
( ) ( ) t t X u
0
0
1
3
1
0
=
-
+ > > H H
Here A , B
0
0
1
3
1
0
=
-
= > > H H
State transition matrix is given by,
( ) t f [( ) ] sI A L
1 1
= -
- -
[ ] sI A -
s
s 0
0 0
0
1
3
= -
-
> > H H
s
s 0
1
3
=
-
+
> H
[ ] sI A
1
-
-

( ) s s
s
s 3
1
3
0
1
=
+
+
> H

( )
( )
s s s
s
1
0
3
1
3
1
=
+
+
R
T
S
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
W
( ) t f [( ) ] sI A L
1 1
= -
- -

e
1
0
t
t
3
1 3
3
=
-
-
( ) e 1 -
> H
State transition equation is given by
nodi a
( ) s X ( ) (0) ( ) ( ) s s B s X U F F = +
Here ( ) s " F state transition matrix
( ) s F
( )
( )
s s s
s
1
0
3
1
3
1
=
+
+
R
T
S
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
W
(0) X " initial condition
(0) X
1
3
=
-
> H
B
1
0
=> H
So ( ) s X
( )
( )
( )
s s s
s
s s s
s
s
1
0
3
1
3
1
1
3
1
0
3
1
3
1
1
0
1
=
+
+
-
+
+
+
R
T
S
S
S
S
S
R
T
S
S
S
S
> >
V
X
W
W
W
W
W
V
X
W
W
W
W
H H

( ) s s s
s
s
s
1
3
3
0
3
3
1
0
1
=
- +
+
+
+
+
R
T
S
S
S
S
>
V
X
W
W
W
W
H

s
s
s
3
1
3
3
1
0
2
=
-
+
+
+
R
T
S
S
S
S
>
V
X
W
W
W
W
H
( ) s X
s
s
s
1
3
1
3
3
2
=
-
+
+
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
Taking inverse Laplace transform, we get state transition equation as,
( ) t X
t e
e 3
t
t
3
3
=
-
-
-
> H
SOL 5.70 Option () is correct
Phase margin of a system is the amount of additional phase lag required to bring
the system to the point of instability or ( 1, 0) j -
So here phase margin 0c =
Given transfer function is
( ) F s
( ) s s s 3 2
5
2
=
+ +
( ) F s
( )( ) s s s 1 2
5
=
+ +
By partial fraction, we get
( ) F s
( ) s s s 2
5
1
5
2 2
5
= -
+
+
+
Taking inverse Laplace of ( ) F s we have
( ) f t ( ) u t e e
2
5
5
2
5 t t 2
= - +
- -
So, the initial value of ( ) f t is given by
( ) limf t
t 0 "
5 (1)
2
5
2
5
= - + 0 =
nodi a
In A.C techo-meter output voltage is directly proportional to differentiation of
rotor displacement.
( ) e t [ ( )]
dt
d
t \ q
( ) e t
( )
K
dt
d t
t
q
=
Taking Laplace tranformation on both sides of above equation
( ) E s ( ) K s s
t
q =
So transfer function
T.F
( )
( )
s
E s
q
= K s
t
=
^ h
Given characteristic equation,
s s s 4 6
3 2
- + + 0 =
Applying Rouths method,
s
3
1 1
s
2
4 -
6
s
1
2.5
4
4 6
-
- -
=
0
s
0
6
There are two sign changes in the first column, so no. of right half poles is 2.
No. of roots in left half of s-plane ( ) 3 2 = - 1 =
Block diagram of the system is given as.
From the figure we can see that
( ) C s ( ) ( ) ( ) R s
s
R s
s
R s
1 1
= + +
: D
( ) C s ( ) R s
s
s
1 1
1
2
= + +
: D

( )
( )
R s
C s

s
s s 1
2
2
=
+ +
nodi a
Characteristic equation is given by,
sI A - 0 =
( ) sI A -
s
s 0
0 0
2
2
0
= - > > H H

s
s 2
2
=
-
-
> H
s 4
2
= - 0 =
, s s
1 2
2 ! =
For the given system, characteristic equation can be written as,
1
( )
(1 )
s s
K
sP
2
+
+
+ 0 =
( 2) (1 ) s s K sP + + + 0 =
(2 ) s s KP K
2
+ + + 0 =
From the equation.

n
w 5 K = = rad/sec (given)
So, 25 K =
and 2
n
xw 2 KP = +
. 2 0 7 5
# #
2 25P = +
or P . 0 2 =
so K 25 = , P . 0 2 =
Unit - impulse response of the system is given as,
( ) c t . sin e t 12 5 8
t 6
=
-
, t 0 $
So transfer function of the system.
( ) [ ( )] H s c t L =
( ) ( )
.
s 6 8
12 5 8
2 2
#
=
+ +
( ) H s
s s 12 100
100
2
=
+ +
Steady state value of output for unit step input,
( ) limy t
t"3
( ) ( ) ( ) lim lim sY s sH s R s
s s 0 0
= =
" "
lims
s s
s
12 100
100 1
s 0
2
=
+ +
"
; E

. 1 0 =
System response is.
( ) H s
s
s
1
=
+
( ) H jw
j
j
1 w
w
=
+
Amplitude response
( ) H jw
1 w
w
=
+
nodi a
Given input frequency 1 w = rad/sec.
So ( ) H j
1 rad/sec
w
w=

1 1
1
=
+

2
1
=
Phase response
( )
h
q w ( ) tan 90
1
c w = -
-
( )
h
1
q w
w=
( ) tan 90 1 45
1
c c = - =
-
So the output of the system is
( ) y t ( ) ( ) H j x t
h
w q = -
( ) sin t
2
1
45c = -
Given open loop transfer function
( ) G jw
( ) j
ja 1
2
w
w
=
+
Gain crossover frequency ( )
g
w for the system.
( ) G j
g
w 1 =

a 1
g
g
2
2 2
w
w
-
+
1 =
a 1
g
2 2
w +
g
4
w =
a 1
g g
4 2 2
w w - - 0 = ...(1)
Phase margin of the system is
45
PM
c f = ( ) G j 180
g
c + w = +
45c ( ) tan a 180 180
g
1
c c w = + -
-
( ) tan a
g
1
w
-
45c =
a
g
w 1 = ...(2)

a
1
1 1
4
- - 0 =
a
4

2
1
= a & . 0 841 =
Given system equation is.
6 5
dt
d x
dt
dx
x
2
2
+ + ( ) e 12 1
t 2
= -
-
Taking Laplace transform on both side.
( ) ( ) ( ) s X s sX s X s 6 5
2
+ + 12
s s
1
2
1
= -
+
: D
( ) ( ) s s X s 6 5
2
+ + 12
( 2)
2
s s
=
+
; E
System transfer function is
( ) X s
( )( )( ) s s s s 2 5 1
24
=
+ + +
Response of the system as t "3 is given by
( ) lim f t
t"3
lim ( ) sF s
s 0
=
"
(final value theorem)
nodi a

( 2)( 5)( 1)
24
lims
s s s s s 0
=
+ + + "
; E

2 5
24
#
= . 2 4 =
Transfer function of lead compensator is given by.
( ) H s
b
s
K
a
s
1
1
=
+
+
a
a
k
k
( ) H jw K
j
b
j
a
1
1
w
w
=
+
+
a
a
k
k
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
So, phase response of the compensator is.
( )
h
q w tan tan
a b
1 1 w w
= -
- -
a a k k

1
tan
ab
a b
2
1
w
w w
=
+
-
-
J
L
K
K
K
N
P
O
O
O

( )
tan
ab
b a
1
2
w
w
=
+
-
-
; E
h
q should be positive for phase lead compensation
So, ( )
h
q w
( )
0 tan
ab
b a
>
1
2
w
w
=
+
-
-
; E
b a >
Since there is no external input, so state is given by
( ) t X ( ) (0) t X f =
( ) t " f state transition matrix
[0] X "initial condition
So ( ) x t
e
e 0
0 2
3
t
t
2
=
-
-
> > H H
( ) x t
e
e
2
3
t
t
2
=
-
-
> H
At t 1 = , state of the system
( ) x t
t 1 =

e
e
2
2
2
1
=
-
-
> H

.
.
0 271
1 100
=> H
Given equation

dt
d x
dt
dx
x
2
1
18
1
2
2
+ + e e 10 5 2
t t 4 5
= + +
- -
Taking Laplace on both sides we have
( ) ( ) ( ) s X s sX s X s
2
1
18
1 2
+ +
s s s
10
4
5
5
2
= +
+
+
+
( ) ( ) s s X s
2
1
18
1 2
+ +
( )( )
( )( ) ( ) ( )
s s s
s s s s s s
4 5
10 4 5 5 5 2 4
=
+ +
+ + + + + +
nodi a
System response is,
( ) X s
( )( )
( )( ) ( ) ( )
s s s s s
s s s s s s
4 5
2
1
18
1
10 4 5 5 5 2 4
2
=
+ + + +
+ + + + + +
b l

( )( )
( )( ) ( ) ( )
s s s s s
s s s s s s
4 5
3
1
6
1
10 4 5 5 5 2 4
=
+ + + +
+ + + + + +
b b l l
We know that for a system having many poles, nearness of the poles towards
imaginary axis in s-plane dominates the nature of time response. So here time
constant given by two poles which are nearest to imaginary axis.
Poles nearest to imaginary axis
s
1

3
1
=- , s
6
1
2
=-
So, time constants
sec
sec
3
6
1
2
t
t
=
=
)
Steady state error for a system is given by
e
ss

( ) ( )
( )
lim
G s H s
sR s
1 s 0
=
+ "
Where input ( ) R s
s
1
= (unit step)
( ) G s
s s 15
3
1
15
=
+ +
b b l l
( ) H s 1 = (unity feedback)
So e
ss

( )( )
lim
s s
s
1
15 1
45 s
s
0
1
=
+
+ +
"
^ h

15 45
15
=
+

60
15
=
%e
ss

60
15
100
#
=
25% =
Characteristic equation is given by
( ) ( ) G s H s 1 + 0 =
Here ( ) H s 1 = (unity feedback)
( ) G s
s s 15
3
1
15
=
+ +
b b l l
So, 1
s s 15
3
1
15
+
+ +
b b l l
0 =
( )( ) s s 15 1 45 + + + 0 =
16 60 s s
2
+ + 0 =
( 6)( ) s s 10 + + 0 =
s 6, =- 10 -
Given equation can be written as,
nodi a

dt
d
2
2
w

J dt
d
LJ
K
LJ
K
V
a
2
b w
w =- - +
Here state variables are defined as,

dt
dw
x
1
=
w x
2
=
So state equation is
x
1
o

J
B
x
LJ
K
x
LJ
K
V
a 1
2
2
=- - +
x
2
o

dt
dw
= x
1
=
In matrix form

x
x
1
2
o
o
> H
/ / / B J K LJ x
x
K LJ
V
1 0 0
a
2
1
2
=
- -
+ > > > H H H

dt
d
dt
d
2
2
w
w
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
P
d
dt
QV
a
w
= + > H
So matrix P is

/ / B J K LJ
1 0
2
- -
> H
Characteristic equation of the system is given by
GH 1 + 0 =

( )( ) s s s
K
1
2 4
+
+ +
0 =
( )( ) s s s K 2 4 + + + 0 =
s s s K 6 8
3 2
+ + + 0 =
Applying rouths criteria for stability
s
3
1 8
s
2
6 K
s
1
K
6
48 -
s
0
K
System becomes unstable if
K
6
48
0
-
= 48 K & =
The maximum error between the exact and asymptotic plot occurs at corner
frequency.
Here exact gain(dB) at 0.5a w = is given by
( ) gain dB
. a 0 5 w=
log log K
a
20 20 1
2
2
w
= - +

( . )
log log K
a
a
20 20 1
0 5
/
2
2 1 2
= - +
; E

. logK 20 0 96 = -
nodi a
Gain(dB) calculated from asymptotic plot at . a 0 5 w = is
logK 20 =
Error in gain (dB) 20 (20 0.96) log log K K dB = - -
. 0 96 = dB
Similarly exact phase angle at 0.5a w = is.
( )
.
h
a 0 5
q w
w=
tan
a
1 w
=-
-
a k

.
tan
a
a 0 5 1
=-
-
b l

2 .56 6 c =-
Phase angle calculated from asymptotic plot at ( 0.5 ) a w = is 22.5c -
Error in phase angle . ( . ) 22 5 26 56c =- - - . 4 9c =
Given block diagram
Given block diagram can be reduced as
Where G
1

1
s
s
1 3
1
=
+
^
^
h
h

s 3
1
=
+
G
2

s
s
1
1
12
1
=
+
b
b
l
l

s 12
1
=
+
Further reducing the block diagram.
( ) Y s
( ) G G
G G
1 2 9
2
1 2
1 2
=
+

( ) ( )
( )
s s
s s
1 2
3
1
12
1
9
2
3
1
12
1
=
+
+ +
+ +
b b
b b
l l
l l
nodi a

( )( ) s s 3 12 18
2
=
+ + +

s s 15 54
2
2
=
+ +

( 9)( 6) s s
2
=
+ +

s s
27 1
9
1
6
1
=
+ +
a a k k
***********
Page 344 Electronics and Electrical Mesurements Chapter 6
nodi a
EE 6
ELECTRONI CS AND ELECTRI CAL MESUREMENTS
EE SP 6.1 Power consumed by a balanced 3-phase, 3-wire load is measured by the two
wattmeter method. The first wattmeter reads twice that of the second. Then, the
load impedance angle in radians is
(A) /12 p (B) /8 p
(C) /6 p (D) /3 p
EE SP 6.2 In an oscilloscope screen, linear sweep is applied at the
(A) vertical axis
(B) horizontal axis
(C) origin
(D) both horizontal and vertical axis
YEAR 2014 EE01 TWO MARK
EE SP 6.3 An incandescent lamp is marked 40 W, 240 V. If resistance at room temperature
C 26c ^ h is 120 W , and temperature coefficient of resistance is . / C 4 8 10
3
#
c
-
, then
its ON state filament temperature in C c is approximately_____.
EE SP 6.4 The reading of the voltmeter (rms) in volts, for the circuit shown in the figure
is _________
EE SP 6.5 The dc current flowing in a circuit is measured by two ammeters, one PMMC
and another electrodynamometer type, connected in series. The PMMC meter
contains 100 turns in the coil, the flux density in the air gap is . / Wb m 0 2
2
, and the area of the coil is mm 80
2
. The electrodynamometer ammeter has
a change in mutual inductance with respect to deflection of 0.5 mH/deg. The
spring constants of both the meters are equal. The value of current, at which the
Chapter 6 Electronics and Electrical Mesurements Page 345
nodi a
deflections of the two meters are same, is ______
EE SP 6.6 The saw-tooth voltage waveform shown in the figure is fed to a moving iron
voltmeter. Its reading would be close to __________
EE SP 6.7 While measuring power of a three-phase balanced load by the two-wattmeter
method, the readings are 100 W and 250 W. The power factor of the load is
______.
EE SP 6.8 The total power dissipated in the circuit, shown in the figure, is 1 kW.
The voltmeter, across the load, reads 200 V. The value of X
L
is _____.
EE SP 6.9 Suppose that resistors R
1
and R
2
are connected in parallel to give an equivalent
resistor R. If resistors R
1
and R
2
have tolerance of 1% each, the equivalent
resistor R for resistors R 300
1
W = and R 200
2
W = will have tolerance of
(A) 0.5% (B) 1%
(C) 1.2% (D) 2%
EE SP 6.10 Two ammeters X and Y have resistances of . 1 2 W and . 1 5 W respectively and
they give full-scale deflection with 150 mA and 250 mA respectively. The ranges
have been extended by connecting shunts so as to give full scale deflection with
15 A. The ammeters along with shunts are connected in parallel and then placed
in a circuit in which the total current flowing is 15 A. The current in amperes
indicated in ammeter X is_____.
EE SP 6.11 An LPF wattmeter of power factor 0.2 is having three voltage settings 300 V, 150
nodi a
V and 75 V, and two current settings 5 A and 10 A. The full scale reading is 150.
If the wattmeter is used with 150 V voltage setting and 10 A current setting, the
multiplying factor of the wattmeter is _______.
EE SP 6.12 The two signals S1 and S2, shown in figure, are applied to Y and X deflection
plates of an oscilloscope.
The waveform displayed on the screen is
nodi a
EE SP 6.13 A periodic waveform observed across a load is represented by
V t ^ h
sin
sin
t t
t t
1 0 6
1 6 12
<
<
#
#
w w p
w p w p
=
+
- +
)
The measured value, using moving iron voltmeter connected across the load, is
(A)
2
3
(B)
3
2
(C)
2
3
(D)
3
2
EE SP 6.14 In the bridge circuit shown, the capacitors are loss free. At balance, the value of
capacitance C
1
in microfarad is ______.
YEAR 2013 ONE MARK
EE SP 6.15 Three moving iron type voltmeters are connected as shown below. Voltmeter
readings are V , V
1
and V
2
as indicated. The correct relation among the voltmeter
readings is
(A) V
V V
2 2
1 2
= + (B) V V V
1 2
= +
(C) V V V
1 2
= (D) V V V
2 1
= -
EE SP 6.16 The input impedance of the permanent magnet moving coil (PMMC) voltmeter
is infinite. Assuming that the diode shown in the figure below is ideal, the
reading of the voltmeter in Volts is
nodi a
(A) 4.46 (B) 3.15
(C) 2.23 (D) 0
YEAR 2013 TWO MARKS
EE SP 6.17 Two magnetically uncoupled inductive coils have Q factors q
1
and q
2
at the
chosen operating frequency. Their respective resistances are R
1
and R
2
. When
connected in series, their effective Q factor at the same operating frequency is
(A) q q
1 2
+
(B) / / q q 1 1
1 2
+ ^ ^ h h
(C) / qR q R R R
1 1 2 2 1 2
+ + ^ ^ h h
(D) / qR q R R R
1 2 2 1 1 2
+ + ^ ^ h h
EE SP 6.18 A strain gauge forms one arm of the bridge shown in the figure below and has
a nominal resistance without any load as 300 R
s
W = . Other bridge resistances
are 300 R R R
1 2 3
W = = = . The maximum permissible current through the strain
gauge is 20 mA. During certain measurement when the bridge is excited by
maximum permissible voltage and the strain gauge resistance is increased by 1%
over the nominal value, the output voltage V
0
in mV is
(A) 56.02 (B) 40.83
(C) 29.85 (D) 10.02
YEAR 2012 ONE MARK
EE SP 6.19 A periodic voltage waveform observed on an oscilloscope across a load is shown.
A permanent magnet moving coil (PMMC) meter connected across the same
load reads
nodi a
(A) 4 V (B) 5 V
(C) 8 V (D) 10 V
EE SP 6.20 The bridge method commonly used for finding mutual inductance is
(A) Heaviside Campbell bridge (B) Schering bridge
(C) De Sauty bridge (D) Wien bridge
EE SP 6.21 For the circuit shown in the figure, the voltage and current expressions are
( ) ( ) ( ) sin sin v t E t E t 3
1 3
w w = + and
( ) ( ) (3 ) ( ) sin sin sin i t I t I t I t 5
1 1 3 3 5
w f w f w = - + - +
The average power measured by the wattmeter is
(A) cos E I
2
1
1 1 1
f (B) [ ] cos cos E I E I E I
2
1
1 1 1 1 3 3 1 5
f f + +
(C) [ ] cos cos E I E I
2
1
1 1 1 3 3 3
f f + (D) [ ] cos cos E I E I
2
1
1 1 1 3 1 1
f f +
YEAR 2012 TWO MARKS
EE SP 6.22 An analog voltmeter uses external multiplier settings. With a multiplier setting
of 20 kW, it reads 440 V and with a multiplier setting of 80 kW, it reads 352 V.
For a multiplier setting of 40 kW, the voltmeter reads
(A) 371 V (B) 383 V
(C) 394 V (D) 406 V
YEAR 2011 ONE MARK
EE SP 6.23 A dual trace oscilloscope is set to operate in the ALTernate mode. The control
input of the multiplexer used in the y-circuit is fed with a signal having a
nodi a
frequency equal to
(A) the highest frequency that the multiplexer can operate properly
(B) twice the frequency of the time base (sweep) oscillator
(C) the frequency of the time base (sweep) oscillator
(D) haif the frequency of the time base (sweep) oscillator
EE SP 6.24 Consider the following statement
(1) The compensating coil of a low power factor wattmeter compensates the
effect of the impedance of the current coil.
(2) The compensating coil of a low power factor wattmeter compensates the
effect of the impedance of the voltage coil circuit.
(A) (1) is true but (2) is false (B) (1) is false but (2) is true
(C) both (1) and (2) are true (D) both (1) and (2) are false
EE SP 6.25 The bridge circuit shown in the figure below is used for the measurement of an
unknown element Z
X
. The bridge circuit is best suited when Z
X
is a
(A) low resistance (B) high resistance
(C) low Q inductor (D) lossy capacitor
YEAR 2011 TWO MARKS
EE SP 6.26 A 4
2
1
digit DMM has the error specification as: 0.2% of reading + 10 counts. If
a dc voltage of 100 V is read on its 200 V full scale, the maximum error that can
be expected in the reading is
(A) . % 0 1 ! (B) . % 0 2 !
(C) . % 0 3 ! (D) . % 0 4 !
YEAR 2010 ONE MARK
EE SP 6.27 A wattmeter is connected as shown in figure. The wattmeter reads.
nodi a
(A) Zero always
(B) Total power consumed by Z and Z
1 2
(C) Power consumed by Z
1
(D) Power consumed by Z
2
EE SP 6.28 An ammeter has a current range of 0-5 A, and its internal resistance is 0.2 W. In
order to change the range to 0-25 A, we need to add a resistance of
(A) 0.8 W in series with the meter
(B) 1.0 W in series with the meter
(C) 0.04 W in parallel with the meter
(D) 0.05 W in parallel with the meter
EE SP 6.29 As shown in the figure, a negative feedback system has an amplifier of gain 100
with % 10 ! tolerance in the forward path, and an attenuator of value 9/100 in
the feedback path. The overall system gain is approximately :
(A) % 10 1 ! (B) % 10 2 !
(C) % 10 5 ! (D) % 10 10 !
YEAR 2010 TWO MARKS
EE SP 6.30 The Maxwells bridge shown in the figure is at balance. The parameters of the
inductive coil are.
(A) / , R R R R L C R R
2 3 4 4 2 3
= =
nodi a
(B) / , L R R R R C R R
2 3 4 4 2 3
= =
(C) / , 1/( ) R R R R L C R R
4 2 3 4 2 3
= =
(D) / , 1/( ) L R R R R C R R
4 2 3 4 2 3
= =
YEAR 2009 ONE MARK
EE SP 6.31 The pressure coil of a dynamometer type wattmeter is
(A) Highly inductive (B) Highly resistive
(C) Purely resistive (D) Purely inductive
EE SP 6.32 The two inputs of a CRO are fed with two stationary periodic signals. In the X-Y
mode, the screen shows a figure which changes from ellipse to circle and back
to ellipse with its major axis changing orientation slowly and repeatedly. The
following inference can be made from this.
(A) The signals are not sinusoidal
(B) The amplitudes of the signals are very close but not equal
(C) The signals are sinusoidal with their frequencies very close but not equal
(D) There is a constant but small phase difference between the signals
YEAR 2009 TWO MARKS
EE SP 6.33 The figure shows a three-phase delta connected load supplied from a 400V, 50
Hz, 3-phase balanced source. The pressure coil (PC) and current coil (CC) of a
wattmeter are connected to the load as shown, with the coil polarities suitably
selected to ensure a positive deflection. The wattmeter reading will be
(A) 0 (B) 1600 Watt
(C) 800 Watt (D) 400 Watt
EE SP 6.34 An average-reading digital multi-meter reads 10 V when fed with a triangular
wave, symmetric about the time-axis. For the same input an rms-reading meter
will read
(A)
3
20
(B)
3
10
(C) 20 3 (D) 10 3
YEAR 2008 ONE MARK
EE SP 6.35 Two 8-bit ADCs, one of single slope integrating type and other of successive
nodi a
approximate type, take T
A
and T
B
times to convert 5 V analog input signal to
equivalent digital output. If the input analog signal is reduced to 2.5 V, the
approximate time taken by the two ADCs will respectively, be
(A) , T T
A B
(B) /2, T T
A B
(C) , / T T 2
A B
(D) /2, /2 T T
A B
YEAR 2008 TWO MARKS
EE SP 6.36 Two sinusoidal signals ( , ) sin p t A t
1 1
w w = and ( ) q t
2
w are applied to X and Y
inputs of a dual channel CRO. The Lissajous figure displayed on the screen
shown below :
The signal ( ) q t
2
w will be represented as
(A) ( ) , 2 sin q t A t
2 2 2 1
w w w w = =
(B) ( ) , / sin q t A t 2
2 2 2 1
w w w w = =
(C) ( ) , cos q t A t 2
2 2 2 1
w w w w = =
(D) ( ) , / cos q t A t 2
2 2 2 1
w w w w = =
EE SP 6.37 The ac bridge shown in the figure is used to measure the impedance Z.
If the bridge is balanced for oscillator frequency 2 f = kHz, then the impedance
Z will be
(A) (260 0) j W +
(B) (0 200) j W +
(C) (260 200) j W -
(D) (260 200) j W +
YEAR 2007 ONE MARK
EE SP 6.38 The probes of a non-isolated, two channel oscillocope are clipped to points A,
nodi a
B and C in the circuit of the adjacent figure. V
in
is a square wave of a suitable
low frequency. The display on Ch
1
and Ch
2
are as shown on the right. Then the
Signal and Ground probes S G
, 1 1
and , S G
2 2
of Ch
1
and Ch
2
respectively are
connected to points :
(A) A, B, C, A (B) A, B, C, B
(C) C, B, A, B (D) B, A, B, C
YEAR 2007 TWO MARKS
EE SP 6.39 A bridge circuit is shown in the figure below. Which one of the sequence given
below is most suitable for balancing the bridge ?
(A) First adjust R
4
, and then adjust R
1

(B) First adjust R
2
, and then adjust R
3
(C) First adjust R
2
, and then adjust R
4
(D) First adjust R
4
, and then adjust R
2
YEAR 2006 ONE MARK
EE SP 6.40 The time/div and voltage/div axes of an oscilloscope have been erased. A student
connects a 1 kHz, 5 V p-p square wave calibration pulse to channel-1 of the scope
and observes the screen to be as shown in the upper trace of the figure. An
unknown signal is connected to channel-2(lower trace) of the scope. It the time/
div and V/div on both channels are the same, the amplitude (p-p) and period of
the unknown signal are respectively
nodi a
(A) 5 V, 1 ms (B) 5 V, 2 ms
(C) 7.5 V, 2 ms (D) 10 V, 1 ms
EE SP 6.41 A sampling wattmeter (that computes power from simultaneously sampled values
of voltage and current) is used to measure the average power of a load. The peak
to peak voltage of the square wave is 10 V and the current is a triangular wave
of 5 A p-p as shown in the figure. The period is 20 ms. The reading in W will be
(A) 0 W (B) 25 W
(C) 50 W (D) 100 W
YEAR 2006 TWO MARKS
EE SP 6.42 A current of 8 6 ( ) sin t 2 30 w - + +
%
A is passed through three meters. They are
a centre zero PMMC meter, a true rms meter and a moving iron instrument. The
respective reading (in A) will be
(A) 8, 6, 10 (B) 8, 6, 8
(C) 8 - ,10,10 (D) 8 - ,2,2
EE SP 6.43 A variable w is related to three other variables x,y,z as / w xy z = . The variables
are measured with meters of accuracy . % 0 5 ! reading, % 1 ! of full scale value
and . % 1 5 ! reading. The actual readings of the three meters are 80, 20 and 50
with 100 being the full scale value for all three. The maximum uncertainty in the
measurement of w will be
(A) . % 0 5 ! rdg (B) . % 5 5 ! rdg
(C) . 6 7 ! rdg (D) . 7 0 ! rdg
EE SP 6.44 A 200/1 Current transformer (CT) is wound with 200 turns on the secondary
on a toroidal core. When it carries a current of 160 A on the primary, the ratio
and phase errors of the CT are found to be . % 0 5 - and 30 minutes respectively.
If the number of secondary turns is reduced by 1 new ratio-error(%) and phase-
nodi a
error(min) will be respectively
(A) . , 0 0 30 (B) 0.5, 35 -
(C) . , 1 0 30 - (D) 1.0, 25 -
EE SP 6.45
R
1
and R
4
are the opposite arms of a Wheatstone bridge as are R
3
and R
2
. The
source voltage is applied across R
1
and R
3
. Under balanced conditions which one
of the following is true
(A) / R R R R
1 3 4 2
= (B) / R R R R
1 2 3 4
=
(C) / R R R R
1 2 4 3
= (D) R R R R
1 2 3 4
= + +
YEAR 2005 ONE MARK
EE SP 6.46 The Q-meter works on the principle of
(A) mutual inductance (B) self inductance
(C) series resonance (D) parallel resonance
EE SP 6.47 A PMMC voltmeter is connected across a series combination of DC voltage
source 2 V
1
= V and AC voltage source ( ) 3 (4 ) sin V t t
2
= V. The meter reads
(A) 2 V (B) 5 V
(C) ( / ) 2 3 2 + V (D) ( / )V 17 2
EE SP 6.48 A digital-to-analog converter with a full-scale output voltage of 3.5 V has a
resolution close to 14 mV. Its bit size is
(A) 4 (B) 8
(C) 16 (D) 32
YEAR 2005 TWO MARKS
EE SP 6.49 The simultaneous application of signals ( ) x t and ( ) y t to the horizontal and
vertical plates, respectively, of an oscilloscope, produces a vertical figure-of-8
display. If P and Q are constants and ( ) (4 30 ) sin x t t P c = + , then ( ) y t is equal to
(A) (4 30 ) sin t Q c - (B) (2 15 ) sin t Q c +
(C) (8 60 ) sin t Q c + (D) (4 30 ) sin t Q c +
EE SP 6.50 A DC ammeter has a resistance of 0.1 W and its current range is 0-100 A. If
the range is to be extended to 0-500 A, then meter required the following shunt
resistance
(A) 0.010 W (B) 0.011 W
(C) 0.025 W (D) 1.0 W
EE SP 6.51 The set-up in the figure is used to measure resistance R .The ammeter and
voltmeter resistances are 0.01W and 2000 W, respectively. Their readings are 2 A
and 180 V, respectively, giving a measured resistances of 90 W The percentage
error in the measurement is
nodi a
(A) 2.25% (B) 2.35%
(C) 4.5% (D) 4.71%
EE SP 6.52 A 1000 V DC supply has two 1-core cables as its positive and negative leads
: their insulation resistances to earth are 4 MW and 6 MW, respectively, as
shown in the figure. A voltmeter with resistance 50 kW is used to measure the
insulation of the cable. When connected between the positive core and earth,
then voltmeter reads
(A) 8 V (B) 16 V
(C) 24 V (D) 40 V
EE SP 6.53 Two wattmeters, which are connected to measure the total power on a three-phase
system supplying a balanced load, read 10.5 kW and . 2 5 - kW, respectively. The
total power and the power factor, respectively, are
(A) 13.0 kW, 0.334 (B) 13.0 kW, 0.684
(C) 8.0 kW, 0.52 (D) 8.0 kW, 0.334
YEAR 2004 ONE MARK
EE SP 6.54 A dc potentiometer is designed to measure up to about 2 V with a slide wire of
800 mm. A standard cell of emf 1.18 V obtains balance at 600 mm. A test cell is
seen to obtain balance at 680 mm. The emf of the test cell is
(A) 1.00 V (B) 1.34 V
(C) 1.50 V (D) 1.70 V
EE SP 6.55 The circuit in figure is used to measure the power consumed by the load. The
current coil and the voltage coil of the wattmeter have 0.02 W and 1000W
resistances respectively. The measured power compared to the load power will be
nodi a
(A) 0.4 % less (B) 0.2% less
(C) 0.2% more (D) 0.4% more
EE SP 6.56 A galvanometer with a full scale current of 10 mA has a resistance of 1000 W.
The multiplying power (the ratio of measured current to galvanometer current)
of 100 W shunt with this galvanometer is
(A) 110 (B) 100
(C) 11 (D) 10
YEAR 2004 TWO MARKS
EE SP 6.57 A CRO probe has an impedance of 500 kW in parallel with a capacitance of 10
pF. The probe is used to measure the voltage between P and Q as shown in
figure. The measured voltage will be
(A) 3.53 V (B) 4.37 V
(C) 4.54 V (D) 5.00 V
EE SP 6.58 A moving coil of a meter has 100 turns, and a length and depth of 10 mm and
20 mm respectively. It is positioned in a uniform radial flux density of 200 mT.
The coil carries a current of 50 mA. The torque on the coil is
(A) 200 Nm m (B) 100 Nm m
(C) 2 Nm m (D) 1 Nm m
EE SP 6.59 A dc A-h meter is rated for 15 A, 250 V. The meter constant is 14.4 A-sec/rev.
The meter constant at rated voltage may be expressed as
(A) 3750 rev/kWh (B) 3600 rev/kWh
(C) 1000 rev/kWh (D) 960 rev/kWh
EE SP 6.60 A moving iron ammeter produces a full scale torque of 240 Nm m with a deflection
of 120c at a current of 10 A . The rate of change of self induction (mH/radian)
of the instrument at full scale is
(A) 2.0 mH/radian
(B) 4.8 mH/radian
nodi a
(C) 12.0 mH/radian
(D) 114.6 mH/radian
EE SP 6.61 A single-phase load is connected between R and Y terminals of a 415 V,
symmetrical, 3-phase, 4-wire system with phase sequence RYB. A wattmeter is
connected in the system as shown in figure. The power factor of the load is 0.8
lagging. The wattmeter will read
(A) 795 - W (B) 597 - W
(C) 597 + W (D) 795 + W
EE SP 6.62 A 50 Hz, bar primary CT has a secondary with 500 turns. The secondary supplies
5 A current into a purely resistive burden of 1 W. The magnetizing ampere-turns
is 200. The phase angle between the primary and second current is
(A) 4.6c (B) 85.4c
(C) 94.6c (D) 175.4c
EE SP 6.63 The core flux in the CT of Prob Q.44, under the given operating conditions is
(A) 0 (B) 45.0 mWb
(C) 22.5 mWb (D) 100.0 mWb
YEAR 2003 ONE MARK
EE SP 6.64 A Manganin swap resistance is connected in series with a moving coil ammeter
consisting of a milli-ammeter and a suitable shunt in order to
(A) minimise the effect of temperature variation
(B) obtain large deflecting torque
(C) reduce the size of the meter
(D) minimise the effect of stray magnetic fields
EE SP 6.65 The effect of stray magnetic field on the actuating torque of a portable instrument
is maximum when the operating field of the instrument and the stray fields are
(A) perpendicular (B) parallel
(C) inclined at 60
%
(D) inclined at 30
%
EE SP 6.66 A reading of 120 is obtained when standard inductor was connected in the circuit
of a Q-meter and the variable capacitor is adjusted to value of 300 pF. A lossless
capacitor of unknown value C
x
is then connected in parallel with the variable
nodi a
capacitor and the same reading was obtained when the variable capacitor is
readjusted to a value of 200 pF. The value of C
x
in pF is
(A) 100 (B) 200
(C) 300 (D) 500
YEAR 2003 TWO MARKS
EE SP 6.67 The simplified block diagram of a 10-bit A/D converter of dual slope integrator
type is shown in figure. The 10-bit counter at the output is clocked by a 1 MHz
clock. Assuming negligible timing overhead for the control logic, the maximum
frequency of the analog signal that can be converted using this A/D converter is
approximately
(A) 2 kHz (B) 1 kHz
(C) 500 Hz (D) 250 Hz
EE SP 6.68 The items in Group-I represent the various types of measurements to be made
with a reasonable accuracy using a suitable bridge. The items in Group-II
represent the various bridges available for this purpose. Select the correct choice
of the item in Group-II for the corresponding item in Group-I from the following
List-I List-II
P. Resistance in the milli-ohm range 1. Wheatstone Bridge
Q. Low values of Capacitance 2. Kelvin Double Bridge
R. Comparison of resistance which are nearly equal 3. Schering Bridge
S. Inductance of a coil with a large time-constant 4. Wiens Bridge
5. Hays Bridge
6. Carey-Foster Bridge
Codes :
(A) P=2, Q=3, R=6, S=5
(B) P=2, Q=6, R=4, S=5
(C) P=2, Q= 3, R=5, S=4
(D) P=1, Q=3, R=2, S=6
EE SP 6.69 A rectifier type ac voltmeter of a series resistance R
s
, an ideal full-wave rectifier
bridge and a PMMC instrument as shown in figure. The internal. resistance of
the instrument is 100 W and a full scale deflection is produced by a dc current of
1 mA. The value of R
s
required to obtain full scale deflection with an ac voltage
of 100 V (rms) applied to the input terminals is
nodi a
(A) 63.56 W (B) 69.93 W
(C) 89.93 W (D) 141.3 kW
EE SP 6.70 A wattmeter reads 400 W when its current coil is connected in the R-phase and
its pressure coil is connected between this phase and the neutral of a symmetrical
3-phase system supplying a balanced star connected 0.8 p.f. inductive load. This
phase sequence is RYB. What will be the reading of this wattmeter if its pressure
coil alone is reconnected between the B and Y phases, all other connections
remaining as before ?
(A) 400.0 (B) 519.6
(C) 300.0 (D) 692.8
EE SP 6.71 The inductance of a certain moving-iron ammeter is expressed as
10 3 ( /4) L H
2
q q m = + - , where q is the deflection in radians from the zero
position. The control spring torque is 25 10
6
#
-
Nm/radian. The deflection of the
pointer in radian when the meter carries a current of 5 A, is
(A) 2.4
(B) 2.0
(C) 1.2
(D) 1.0
EE SP 6.72 A 500A/5A, 50 Hz transformer has a bar primary. The secondary burden is a
pure resistance of 1 W and it draws a current of 5 A. If the magnetic core requires
250 AT for magnetization, the percentage ratio error is
(A) 10.56 (B) . 10 56 -
(C) 11.80 (D) . 11 80 -
EE SP 6.73 The voltage-flux adjustment of a certain 1-phase 220 V induction watt-hour
meter is altered so that the phase angle between the applied voltage and the flux
due to it is 85c(instead of 90c). The errors introduced in the reading of this meter
when the current is 5 A at power factor of unity and 0.5 lagging are respectively
(A) 3.8 mW, 77.4 mW
(B) . 3 8 - mW, . 77 4 - mW
(C) . 4 2 - W, . 85 1 - W
(D) 4.2 W, 85.1 W
EE SP 6.74 Group-II represents the figures obtained on a CRO screen when the voltage
signals sin V V t
x xm
w = and ( ) sin V V t
y ym
w F = + are given to its X and Y plates
respectively and F is changed. Choose the correct value of F from Group-I to
match with the corresponding figure of Group-II.
nodi a
Group-I
P. 0 F =
Q. /2 p F =
R. / 3 2 < < p p F
S. / 3 2 p F =

Group-II

Codes :
(A) P=1, Q= 3, R=6, S=5
(B) P=2, Q= 6, R=4, S=5
(C) P=2, Q= 3, R=5, S=4
(D) P=1, Q=5, R=6, S=4
***********
nodi a
SOLUTI ONS
For two wattmeter method, we define load impedance angle, f as
tanf
w w
w w
3
1 2
1 2
=
+
-
9 C
where w
1
and w
2
are the readings of two wattmeters. Since, we have
w
1
w 2
2
=
So, we obtain the load impedance angle as
tanf
w w
w w
3
2
2
2 2
2 2
=
+
-
: D
3
3
1
3
1
#
= =
or f rad
6
p
=
SOL 6.2 Correct option (B).
During sweep time t
s ^ h, the beam moves from left to right across the CRT screen.
The beam B deflected to the right by the increasing amplitude of the ramp
voltage and the fact that the positive voltage attracts the negative electrons, and
to make this effective we apply linear sweep in horizontal axis.
SOL 6.3 Correct answer is 2470.44C.
For the incandescent lamp, we have
P W 40 = , V V 240 =
So, the resistance of its filament in ON state is
R
Q

P
V
40
240
1440
2
2
W = = =
^ h
Now, we have
R 120 W = at t C 26c = ,
and a . / C 4 5 10
3
#
c =
-
Since, the relation between resistance and temperature is given by
R
Q
R Q Q 1
2 1
a = + - ^ h 6 @
Substituting the given values, we get
1440 . Q 120 1 4 5 10 26
3
2 #
= + -
-
^ h 8 B
or 12 . Q 1 4 5 10 26
3
2 #
= + -
-
^ h
or Q 26
2
-
. 4 5 10
11
3
#
=
-
or Q 26
2
- . . 2 444 44 =
Thus, Q
2
. C 2470 44c =
SOL 6.4 Correct answer is 141.42 V.
We have the circuit,
nodi a
It is a Wheatstone bridge. For the bridge to be balanced, the required condition
is
z z
1 4
z z
2 3
= ...(1)
z
1
z j 1
4
W = =
and z
2
z
j
1
3
W = =
Substituting these values in equation (1), we get
j j
#

j j
1 1
#
=
j
2

j
1
2
=
1 - 1 =-
Hence, it is a balanced Wheatstone bridge, and reading of voltmeter (rms) is
V 100 2
#
=
. V 141 42 =
SOL 6.5 Correct answer is 3.2 A.
Given that the two ammeters, one PMMC and another electrodynamometer
type, are connected in series. So, we have
For PMMC coil, we define the deflecting torque as

d
t NBAI =
GI = ...(1)
where G is a constant, given as
G NBA =
Again, the controlling torque is defined as
T
c
K q = ...(2)
At balance, we have
T
c
T
d
=
nodi a
So, deflection q
K
G
I = [using equations (1) and (2)] ...(3)
Now, for electrodynamometer, we have deflecting torque
T
d
I I
d
dM
1 2
q
=
where I
1
I I
2
= = (series)
So, T
d
I
d
dM 2
q
= ...(4)
The controlling torque is
T
c
Kq = ...(5)
Therefore, equating the equations (4) and (5) for balance condtion, the steady
deflection is obtained as
q
K
I
d
dM
2
q
= ...(6)
Since, it is given in the question that deflection is same in both meter. So, from
equations (3) and (6), we get

K
G
I
K
I
d
dM
2
q
=
or NBA I
d
dM
q
= (spring constants are equal)
or . 100 0 2 80 10
6
# # #
-
. I 0 5 10
3
# #
=
-
Thus, I . A
5
100 2 80 10
3 2
3
# # #
= =
-
From the graph, we write mathematical expression of voltage v t ^ h
v t ^ h t
20 10
100
3
#
=
-
,
So, v t ^ h Volt t 5 10
3
#
= ,
A moving iron voltmeter reads rms value of voltage, so
V
rms

T
v t dt
1
T
2
0
= ^ h #
t dt
20 10
1
5 10
3
3 2
0
20 10
3
#
# #
=
#
-
-
^ h #
t dt
20 10
25 10
3
6
2
0
20 10
3
#
#
=
#
-
-
#

t
20 10
25 10
3
3
6 3
0
20 10
3
#
#
=
#
-
-
: D

20 10
25 10
3
20 10
3
6
3 3
#
#
#
#
=
-
-
^ h

3
25 10 400 10
6 6
# # #
=
-
. A
3
100
57 74 = =
In two wattmeter method, power factor angle is given by
f tan
W W
W W 3
1
1 2
1 2
=
+
-
-
^ h
= G
nodi a

250 100
3 250 100
=
+
- ^ h
f . tan 0 7423
1
=
-
^ h
f . 36 586c =
Power factor cos f =
. . cos 36 586 0 8029 c = = ^ h lagging
Total power consumed, P KW W 1 1000 = =
We can see that power will be consumed by only 1 W resistor and load resistor
R. From the figure we can notice that current in 1 W resistor is 2 A and in load
resistorR is 10 A. So we can write total power equal to sum of power dissipated
in these two resistors.
P ( ) ( ) ( ) R 2 1 10
2 2
= +
1000 R 4 100 = +
R . 9 96 W =
Voltage across load, V
L
V 200 =
V
L
I R X
L
2 2
= +
200 . X 10 9 96
L
2 2
= + ^ h
20
2
^ h . X 9 96
L
2 2
#
=^ h
X
L
. 400 99 20 = -
X
L
. 17 34 W =
Equivalent resistance when connected in parallel is
R
eq

R R
R R
1 2
1 2
=
+
Let R R
1 2
+ R
sum
=
% Tolerance in R
eq
% % % R R R
sum 1 2
T T T = + - ^ ^ ^ h h h ...(1)
R
sum
T % % 300 1 200 1 ! ! = + ^ ^ h h
300 300
100
1
200 200
100
1
!
#
!
#
= +
b b l l ; ; E E
300 3 200 2 ! ! = + ^ ^ h h
500 5 ! =
% R
sum
T ^ h
500
5
100
#
=
b l
% 1 =
nodi a
Now, from eq (1)
% R
eq
T ^ h % % % 1 1 1 = + -
% R
eq
T ^ h % 1 =
For ammeter X , Let shunt resistor be R
mX
I R
mX mX
I I R
mX snX
= - ^ h
. . 0 15 1 2
#
. R 15 0 15
snX
= - ^ h
R
snX

.
.
.
14 85
0 18
0 0121 W = =
For ammeter Y , Let shunt resistor be R
MY
I R
MY MY
I I R
MY snY
= - ^ h
. . 0 25 1 5
#
. R 15 0 25
snY
= - ^ h
R
snY

.
.
.
14 75
0 375
0 0254 W = =
Equivalent resistance of ammeter X
R
X
| | R R
mX snX
=
. | | . 1 2 0 0121 =
. 0 0121 - W
Similarly R
Y
. 0 0254 W =
When connected in parallel, current in the circuit is A 15 , so current through
ammeter X
I
X

R R
R
15
X Y
Y
#
=
+
(Using current division)

. .
.
0 0121 0 0254
0 0254
15
#
=
+
. A 10 16 =
In low power factor (LPF) wattmeter, the multiplying factor is given by
M.F.
max power for imumdifflection
power setting
=
nodi a

( )
Full scale reading
voltage range used current range used power factor
# #
=
^ ^ h h
From the given data, we have
Full scale reading 150 =
Voltage range used V 150 =
Current range used A 10 =
Power factor . 0 2 =
Substituting these values in above expression, we get
M.F.
.
150
150 10 0 2
2
# #
= =
We consider the two signals S
1
and S
2
applied to Y and X deflection plates for
the period T as

observing the waveforms, we condude that
For / t T 0 2 < < , S 0 1 < <
1
and S 1
2
=
At t
T
2
= , S S 0
1 2
= =
For
T
t T
2
< < , S 0 1 > >
1
- and S 1
2
=-
Since, S
1
is applied to Y -deflection plate and S
2
is applied to X -deflection plate.
So, we have
For / t T 0 2 < < ; , y x 0 1 1 < < =
At / t T 2 = ; x y 0 = =
For / T t T 2 < < ; y 1 0 < < - , x 1 =-
Thus, the waveform displayed on the CRT screen is
nodi a
Moving iron instrument gives rms value, so measured value of moving iron is rms
of given function
v t ^ h
sin
sin
t t
t t
1 0 6
1 6 12
# #
# #
w w p
w p w p
=
+
- +
)
So, we have
V
rms
sin sin t d t t d t
12
1
1 1
/
2 2
6
12
0
6
1 2
p
w w w w = + + - +
p
p p
^ ^ ^ ^ h h h h
; = EG # #
sin sin sin sin t t d t t t d t
12
1
1 2 1 2
/
2 2
6
12
0
6
1 2
p
w w w w w w = + + + - +
p
p p
^ ^ ^ ^ h h h h
; = EG # #

cos cos t
d t
t
d t
12
1
6 6
2
1 2
2
1 2
/
6
12
0
6
1 2
p
p p
w
w
w
w = + +
-
+
-
p
p p
^ ^ h h
; = EG # #

12
1
12 6
/ 1 2
p
p p = + 6
:
@
D

12
18
2
3
/ 1 2
= =
b l
SOL 6.14 Correct answer is . F 0 3 m .
Capacitor are lossless and bridge is balanced. On balancing, we have
z z
1 4
z z
2 3
=
Now, the given bridge circuit is
For balancing, we have

. j
35 10
0 1 10
1 3
6
# #
# #
w
-

j C
105 10
1 3
# #
#
w
=
or C . F 0 3 m =
nodi a
For an ideal voltmeter interval resistance is always zero. So we can apply the
KVL along the two voltmeters as
V V V
1 2
- - 0 =
or V V V
1 2
= +
For the ve + half cycle of / I p voltage, diode will be forward biased ( 0 V =
g
, ideal
diode) Therefore, the voltmeter will be short circuited and reads
V
1
0 volt = (for ve + half cycle)
Now, for ve - half cycle, diode will be reverse biased and treated as open
circuit. So, the voltmeter reads the voltage across 100 kW. Which is given by
V
2

.
100
100 1
14 14 0
#
c
=
+
So, V
,rms 2
volt
2
14
=
Therefore, the average voltage for the whole time period is obtained as
V
ave

/ V V
2 2
0 14 2
2 2
14 , rms 1 2
=
+
=
+
=
^ h
4.94 4.46 volt . =
The quality factor of the inductances are given by
q
1

R
L
1
1
w
=
and q
2

R
L
2
2
w
=
So, in series circuit, the effective quality factor is given by
Q
R
X
R R
L L
eq
Leq
1 2
1 2
w w
= =
+
+

R R
R R
L
R R
L
1 1
2 1
1 2
1
1 2
2
w w
=
+
+

R R
R
q
R
q
1 1
2
1
2
2
2 1
=
+
+

R R
qR q R
1 2
1 1 2 2
=
+
+
PMMC instrument reads average (dc) value.
V
avg
( )
T
v t dt
1
T
0
=
#
( ) v t dt
20 10
1
3
0
20
#
=
-
#
( ) tdt dt dt
20
1
5 5
0
10
10
12
12
20
= + - +
; E # # #
nodi a
5 5
t
t t
20
1
2
2
0
10
10
12
12
20
= - +
c m : 6 6 D @ @
[50 5(2) 5(8)]
20
1
= - + 4 V
20
80
= =
Heaviside mutual inductance bridge measures mutual inductance is terms of a
known self-inductance.
Let t w q = , we have instaneous voltage and current as follows.
( ) v t sin sin E E 3
1 3
q q = +
( ) i t ( ) ( ) ( ) sin sin sin I I I 3 5
1 1 3 3 5
q f q f q = - + - +
We know that wattmeter reads the average power, which is gives as
P ( ) ( ) v t i t d
2
1
0
2
p
q =
p
#
...(1)
We can solve this integration using following results.
(1) ( ) ( ) ( ) sin sin cos A B d AB
2
1
2
1
0
2
:
p
q a q b q a b + + = -
p
#
(2) ( ) ( ) ( ) sin cos sin A B d AB
2
1
2
1
0
2
:
p
q a q a q a b + + = -
p
#
(3) ( ) ( ) sin cos A m B n d
2
1
0
0
2
:
p
q a q b q + + =
p
#
(4) ( ) ( ) sin cos A m B n d
2
1
0
0
2
:
p
q a q b q + + =
p
#
Result (3) and (4) implies that power is transferred between same harmonics of
voltages and currents. Thus integration of equation (1) gives.
P cos cos E I E I
2
1
2
1
1 1 3 3 3
f f = +
A voltmeter with a multiplier is shown in figure below.
Here I
m
= Fully scale deflection current of meter.
R
m
= Internal resistance of meter
R
s
= Voltage across the meter
V = Full range voltage of instrument
V
m
I R
m m
=
V ( ) I R R
m m s
= +
nodi a

V
V
m

R
R R
R
R
1
m
m s
m
s
=
+
= +
Here when, R
s1
20 kW = , 440 V V
m1
=
So,
V
440
1
20k
R
m
= + ...(1)
When, R
s2
80 kW = , 352 V V
m2
=
So,
V
352
1
80 k
R
m
= + ...(2)
Solving equation (1) and (2), we get
V 480 V = , 220 k R
m
W =
So when R
s3
40 kW = , ? V
m3
=

V
480
m3
1
220
40
k
k
= + & V
m2
406 V -
In the alternate mode it switches between channel A and channel B, letting each
through for one cycle of horizontal sweep as shown in the figure.
The compensating coil compensation the effect of impedance of current coil.
Let Z
1
| | R j C
1 1
w =
nodi a
so admittance Y
1

Z R
j C
1 1
1 1
1
w = = +
Z
2
R
2
= and Z
4
R
4
=
Let Z
X
R j L
X X
w = + (Unknown impedance)
For current balance condition of the Bridge
Z Z
2 4
Z Z
Y
Z
X
X
1
1
= =
Let Z
X
Z Z Y
2 4 1
=
R j L
X X
w +
1
R R
R
j C
1
1 2 4
w = +
b l
Equating imaginary and real parts
R
X

R
R R
2 4
1
= and L
X
R R C
2 4 1
=
Quality factor of inductance which is being measured
Q
R
L
R C
X
X
1 1
w
w = =
From above equation we can see that for measuring high values of Q we need
a large value of resistance R
4
which is not suitable. This bridge is used for
measuring low Q coils.
Note: We can observe directly that this is a maxwells bridge which is suitable
for low values of Q(i.e. Q 10 < )
4
2
1
digit display will read from 000.00 to 199.99 So error of 10 counts is equal to
0.10 V ! =
For 100 V, the maximum error is
e ( . . ) 100 0 002 0 1 !
#
= + 0.3 V ! =
Percentage error
.
%
100
0 3 100
!
#
= . % 0 3 ! = of reading
Since potential coil is applied across Z
2
as shown below
Wattmeter read power consumed by Z
2
Given that full scale current is 5 A
nodi a
Current in shunt I l I I
R fs
= - 25 5 = - 20 = A
R 20
sh #
. 5 0 2
#
=
R
sh

20
1
= .05 W =
Overall gain of the system is
g 10
1 100
100
9
100
=
+
=
b l
(zero error)
Gain with error
g
( %)
%
1 100 10
100
9
100 10
=
+ +
+
b l

110 9
1
100
110
#
=
+
. 10 091 =
error g 3 . 10 091 10 = - . 0 1 -
Similarly g
( %)
%
1 100 10
100
9
100 10
=
+ -
-

1 90
100
9
90
#
=
+
. 9 89 =
error g 3 . 9 89 10 = - . 0 1 --
So gain g 10 . 0 1 ! = % 10 1 ! =
At balance condition
( ) R j L R
C
j
4
4
< w
w
+
-
c m
R R
2 3
=
( ) R j L
R
C
j
C
jR
4
4
4
4
w
w
w
+
-
-
c m
R R
2 3
=

C
jRR
C
LR
4
4
4
4
w w
w -
+ R R R
C
jR R
2 3 4
4
2 3
w
= -

C
jRR
C
LR
4
4
4
4
w
-
+ R R R
C
jR R
2 3 4
4
2 3
w
= -
Comparing real & imaginary parts.

C
RR
4
4
w

C
R R
4
2 3
w
=
R
R
R R
4
2 3
=
Similarly,
C
LR
4
4
R R R
2 3 4
=
L R R C
2 3 4
=
Since Potential coil is connected across the load terminal, so it should be highly
resistive, so that all the voltage appears across load.
nodi a
A circle is produced when there is a 90c phase difference between vertical and
horizontal inputs.
Wattmeter reading P V I
PC CC
=
V
PC
" Voltage across potential coil.
I
CC
" Current in current coil.
V
PC
400 120 V
bc
c + = = -
I
CC
4 120 I
100
400 120
ac
c
c
+
+ = = =
Power P 400 120 4 120
#
c c + + = -
1600 240c + =
1600
2
1
#
= 800 = Watt
Average value of a triangular wave
V
av

V
3
m
=
rms value V
ms

V
3
m
=
Given that V
av

V
3
10
m
= = V
So V
rms

V
V
3
3 10 3
m
av
= = = V
Conversion time does not depend on input voltage so it remains same for both
type of ADCs.
Frequency ratio
f
f
X
Y

meeting points of vertical tangents
meeting points of horizontal tangents
=

f
f
X
Y

4
2
=
f
Y
( ) f
2
1
X
=

2
w /2
1
w =
Since the Lissajous figures are ellipse, so there is a phase difference of 90c exists
between vertical and horizontal inputs.
nodi a
So ( ) q t
2
w , cos A t
2
w = /2
2 1
w w =
Impedance of different branches is given as
Z
AB
500 = W
Z
BC

.
300
j F 2 2 10 0 398
1
3
# # # #
p m
= + W
( ) j 200 300 - - + W
Z
AD
2 2 10 15.91 300 j mH
3
# # # #
p W = +
( ) j 200 300 - + W
To balance the bridge
Z Z
AB CD
Z Z
AD BC
=
500Z ( )( ) j j 200 300 200 300 = + - +
500Z 130000 =
Z (260 0) j = + W
Since both the waveform appeared across resistor and inductor are same so the
common point is B. Signal Probe S
1
is connecte with A, S
2
is connected with C
and both the grount probes G
1
and G
2
are connected with common point B.
To balance the bridge
( )( ) R jX R jX
1 1 4 4
+ - R R
2 3
=
( ) ( ) R R X X j X R R X
1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4
+ + - R R
2 3
=
comparing real and imaginary parts on both sides of equations
R R X X
1 4 1 4
+ R R
2 3
= ...(1)
X R R X
1 4 1 4
- 0
X
X
R
R
4
1
4
1
& = = ...(2)
from eq(1) and (2) it is clear that for balancing the bridge first balance R
4
and
then R
1
.
From the Calibration pulse we can obtain

Division
Voltage
( V) 3 .
2
5
2 5 = = V

Division
Time
( T) 3
4
1
4
1 ms
= = msec
So amplitude (p-p) of unknown signal is
V
P P -
V 5 3
#
= . 2 5 5
#
= . 7 5 = V
Time period T T 8 3
#
=
4
1
8
#
= 2 = ms
Reading of wattmeter (Power) in the circuit
P
av

T
VI dt
1
T
0
= = # Common are between V I -
nodi a
total common area = 0 (Positive and negative area are equal)
So P 0
av
=
PMMC instrument reads only dc value so
I
PMMC
8 =- A
rms meter reads rms value so
I
rms
( 8)
( )
2
6 2
2
2
= - +
64 36 = + 10 = A
Moving iron instrument also reads rms value of current So
I
MI
10 = mA
Reading are ( , ) ( ) I I I 8 A, 10 A, 10 A
, PMMC MI rms
= -
Given that w
z
xy
=
logw log log log x y z = + -
Maximum error in w
%
d
w
w

x
dx
y
dy
z
dz
! ! ! =

x
dx
. % 0 5 ! = reading

y
dy
% 1 ! = full scale
100
1
100 1 !
#
! = =

y
dy
%
20
1
100 5 !
#
! = = reading

z
dz
. % 1 5 = reading
So %
d
w
w
. % % . % 0 5 5 1 5 ! ! ! =
7% ! =
nodi a
In balanced condition there is no current in CD arm so V V
C D
=
Writing node equation at C and D

R
V V
R
V
0
C C
1 3
&
-
+ = V V
R R
R
C
1 3
3
=
+
b l

R
V V
R
V
0
D
2
0
4
&
-
+ = V V
R R
R
D
2 4
4
=
+
b l
So V
R R
R
1 3
3
+
b l
V
R R
R
2 4
4
=
+
b l
R R R R
2 3 3 4
+ R R R R
1 4 3 4
= +
R
1
/ R R R
2 3 4
=
Q-meter works on the principle of series resonance.
At resonance V
C
V
L
=
and I
R
V
=
Quality factor Q
R
L
CR
1 w
w
= =

R I
L I
E
V
E
V
L C
#
#
w
= = =
Thus, we can obtain Q
PMMC instruments reads DC value only so it reads 2 V.
Resolution of n-bit DAC
V
2 1
n
fs
=
-
So 14 mv
3.5
2 1
V
n
=
-
2 1
n
-
.
14 10
3 5
3
#
=
-
2 1
n
- 250 =
2
n
251 =
nodi a
n 8 = bit
We can obtain the frequency ratio as following

f
f
X
Y

meeting points of vertical tangents
meeting points of horizontal tangents
=

f
f
X
Y

4
2
=
f
Y
f
2
1
X
=
There should exist a phase difference(15c) also to produce exact figure of-8.
The configuration is shown below
It is given that I 100
m
= A
Range is to be extended to 0 500 - A,
I 500 = A
So I R
m m
( ) I I R
m sh
= -
. 100 0 1
#
(500 100)R
sh
= -
R
sh

.
400
100 0 1
#
= . 0 025 = W
The configuration is shown below
Current in voltmeter is given by
I
V
.
E
2000 2000
180
09 = = = A
nodi a
I I
V
+ 2 = amp
So I . . 2 09 1 91 = - = V
R
.
.
I
E
1 91
180
94 24 = = = W
Ideally R
0

2
180
90 = = W
% error 100
R
R R
0
0
#
=
-

.
90
94 24 90 100
#
=
-
. 4 71 = %
The measurement system is shown below
Voltmeter reading
V
6 50 4
1000
M k M
(50 k 4 M )
z
z
W W W
W W =
+
b l

.
.
6 049
1000
049
#
=
+
. 8 10 = V
Total power P P P
1 2
= + 10.5 2.5 = - 8 = kW
Power factor cos q =
Where
q tan
P P
P P
3
1
2 1
2 1
=
+
- -
b l ; E
tan 3
8
13 1
#
=
- -
: D
. 70 43c =-
Power factor . cos 0 334 q = =
for the dc potentiometer E l \
so,
E
E
2
1

l
l
2
1
=
E
2
E
l
l
2
1
1
= d n ( . ) 1 18
600
680
#
= . 1 34 = V
Let the actual voltage and current are I
1
and V
1
respectively, then
nodi a
Current in CC is 20 A
20
.
I
1000 0 02
1000
1
=
+
b l
I
1
20.0004 20 A A - =
200 . V 02 20
1 #
= - . 200 40 =
Power measured P
m
( . ) V I 20 200 40
1 1
= = 4008 = W
Load power P
L
20 200 4000
#
= = W
% Change
P
P P
4000
4008 4000
100
L
m L
#
=
-
=
-
0.2% = more
We have to obtain n
I
I
1
=

I
I
2
1

R
R
1000
100
10
1
m
sh
= = =
I I
1 2
+ I =
I I 10
1 1
+ I =
I 11
1
I =
n
I
I
11
1
= =
In the following configuration
Rectance X
c

j C
1
2 100 10 10 10
1
3 12
# # # #
w
p
= =
-
writing node equation at P
nodi a

V
V
j
100
10
100
1
500
1
159
P
P
-
+ + -
b l
0 =
10 V
P
- (1.2 0.628) V j
P
= -
10 (2.2 0.628) j V
P
= -
V
P

.
.
2 28
10
4 38 = V
The torque on the coil is given by
t NI BA =
N " no. of turns, N 100 =
I " current, I 50 = mA
B " magnetic field, B 200 = mTA " Area,
A 10 mm 20 mm
#
=
So, t 100 50 10 200 10 200 10 10
3 3 3 3
# # # # # # #
=
- - - -
200 10
6
#
=
-
Nm
Meter constant (A-sec/rev) is given by
14.4
speed
I
=
14.4
Power
I
K
#
=
Where K is the meter constant in rev/kWh.
14.4
K VI
I
#
=
14.4
K 15 250
15
# #
=
K
. 250 14 4
1
#
=
K
.
1000 3600
250 14 4
1
#
#
=
b l

3600
1000 3600
#
= 1000 = rev/kWh.
For moving iron ameter full scale torque is given by

C
t I
d
dL
2
1 2
q
=
240 10
6
#
-
( )
d
dL
2
1
10
2
q
=
Change in inductance

d
dL
q
. 4 8 = H/radian m
In the figure
V
RY
415 30c + =
nodi a
V
BN

3
415
120c + =
Current in current coil
I
C

Z
V
RY
=
. 100 36 87
415 30
c
c
+
+
=
0.8
. . cos 0 8 36 87
power factor
&
`
c f f
=
= =
. . 4 15 6 87 + = -
Power VI =
)
. .
3
415
120 4 15 6 87
#
c c + + =
. . 994 3 126 87c + =
Reading of wattmeter
P 994.3 126.87 cos c =
^ h

. ( . ) 994 3 0 60 = - 597 =- W
For small values of phase angle

I
I
S
P
nf = ,
Phase angle (radians)
n turns ratio
"
"
f
Magnetizing ampere-turns 200 =
So primary current I
P
200 1 200
#
= = amp
Turns ratio n 500 =
Secondary current I
S
5 = amp
So
5
200
500f =
f (in degrees)
180
5 500
200
#
p
=
b b l l
. 4 58c -
Voltage appeared at secondary winding
E
S
I Z
S L #
= 5 1
#
= 5 = Volts
Voltage induced is given by
E
S
fN 2 p f = , flux " f
5 . 2 3 14 50 500
# # # #
f =
f
. 2 3 14 25 10
5
3
# # #
= 45 10
6
#
=
-
wb
In PMCC instruments, as temperature increases the coil resistance increases.
Swamp resistors are connected in series with the moving coil to provide
temperature compensation. Swamping resistors is made of magnin, which has a
zero-temperature coefficient.
nodi a
SOL 6.65 Correct answer is ().
Effect of stray magnetic field is maximum when the operating field and stray
fields are parallel.
Let C
1
300 = pF
Q
C R
120
1
1
w
= =
Now when C
x
is connected in parallel with variable resistor ' C 200
1
= pF
Q
( ' ) C C R
120
1
x 1
w
= =
+
So C
1
' C C
x 1
= +
300 C 200
x
= +
C
x
100 = pF
Maximum frequency of input in dual slop A/D converter is given as
T
m
T 2
n
C
=
where f
m

T
1
maximumfrquency of input
m
" =
f
C

T
1
clock frequency
C
" =
so f
m

f
2
n
C
= , n 10 =
1
1024
10
kHz
6
= = (approax)
Kelvin Double bridge is used for measuring low values of resistances. ( 2) P "
Low values of capacitances is precisely measured by schering bridge ( 3) Q "
Inductance of a coil with large time constant or high quality factor is measured
by hays bridge ( 5) R "
Full scale deflection is produced by a dc current of 1 mA
( ) I
dc fs
1 = mA
For full wave reactifier
( ) I
dc fs

I 2
m
p
= , I
m
"peak value of ac current
1 mA
.
I
3 14
2
m
=
nodi a
I
m
. 1 57 = mA
Full scale ac current
( ) I
rms fs

.
.
2
1 57
1 11 = = mA
V ( )( ) R R I
s m rms fs
= +
100 ( 100)(1.11 ) R mA
s
= +

(1.11 )
100
mA
R 100
s
= +
100 900
#
R 100
s
= +
R
s
. 89 9 = kW
First the current coil is connected in R-phase and pressure coil is connected
between this phase and the neutral as shown below
Reading of wattmeter
W
1
cos I V
P P 1
q = , . . cos 0 8 36 86
1 1
& c q q = =
400 cos I
V
3
L
L
1
q =
400 .
I V
3
0 8
L L
#
= ...(1)
Now when pressure coil is connected between B and Y-phases, the circuit is
nodi a
phasor diagram
Angle
2
q 23.14 30 . 54 14 c c c = + = 2
Now wattmeter reading W
2
cos V I
YB L 2
q =
From equation (1) V I
L L

. 0 8
400 3
#
=
so W
2

.
. cos
0 8
400
3 53 14
# #
c =
. 519 5 = W
In a moving-iron ammeter control torque is given as

c
t K I
d
dL
2
1 2
q
q
= =
Where
K " control spring constant
" q deflection
Given that L 10 3
4
2
q
q
= + -

d
dL
q
3
2
H/rad
q
m = -
b l
So,
nodi a
(25 10 )
c
6
#
t q =
-
( )
2
1
5 3
2
10
2 6
#
q
= -
-
b l
2q 3
2
q
= -

2
5
3 &
q
q = .
5
6
1 2 = = rad.
Magnetizing current I
m

1
250
250 = = amp
Primary current I
p
500 = amp
Secondary current I
s
5 = amp
Turn ratio n
I
I
5
500
100
s
p
= = =
Total primary current ( ) I
T
[primary current(I )]
p
2
= +
[magnetising current ( )] I
2
m
I
T
I I
p m
2 2
= +
( ) ( ) 500 250
2 2
= + . 559 01 = amp
Turn ratio n
'

.
.
I
I
5
559 01
111 80
s
T
= = =
Percentage ratio error n 3 100
n
n n
#
=
-
l
l

.
.
111 80
100 111 80
100
#
=
-
. % 10 55 =-
Power read by meter ( ) sin P VI
m
3 f = -
Where
" 3 Phase angle between supply voltage and pressure coil flux.
" f Phase angle of load
Here
3 85 , 60 c c f = = . cos 0 5 a f =
"
So measured power
P
m
( ) sin 200 5 85 60
#
c c = -
sin 1100 25c =
. 464 88 = W
Actual power P
O
cos VI f = . 220 5 0 5
# #
= 550 = W
Error in measurement P P
m O
= - . 464 88 550 = - . 85 12 =- W
For unity power factor cos f 1 =
f 0c =
So P
m
( ) sin 220 5 85 0
#
c c = - . 1095 81 = W
P
O
cos 220 5 0
#
c = 1100 =
Error in Measurement . 1095 81 1100 = - . 4 19 =- W
We can obtain the Lissaju pattern (in X-Y mode) by following method.
nodi a
For 0c f = , V
x
sin V t
xm
w =
V
y
( 0 ) sin sin V t t
ym
c w w = + =
Draw V
x
and V
y
as shown below
Divide both V
y
and V
x
equal parts and match the corresponding points on the
screen.
Similarly for f 90c =
V
x
sin V t
xm
w =
V
y
( 90 ) sin V t
ym
c w = +
Similarly for
2
3
f
p
=
nodi a
we can also obtain for 0
2
3
< < f
p
***********
Page 390 Analog Electronics Chapter 7
nodi a
CHAPTER 7
ANALOG ELECTRONI CS
EE SP 7.1 In the Wien Bridge oscillator circuit shown in figure, the bridge is balanced when
(A)
R
R
R
R
4
3
2
1
= ,
R C R C
1
1 1 2 2
w =
(B)
R
R
C
C
1
2
1
2
= ,
R C R C
1
1 1 2 2
w =
(C)
R
R
R
R
C
C
4
3
2
1
1
2
= + ,
R C R C
1
1 1 2 2
w =
(D)
R
R
R
R
C
C
4
3
2
1
1
2
+ = ,
R C R C
1
1 1 2 2
w =
EE SP 7.2 The magnitude of the mid-band voltage gain of the circuit shown in figure is
(assuming h
fe
of the transistor to be 100)
(A) 1
(B) 10
(C) 20
(D) 100
Chapter 7 Analog Electronics Page 391
nodi a
EE SP 7.3 Given that the op-amps in the figure are ideal, the output voltage V
0
is
(A) V V
1 2
- ^ h (B) V V 2
1 2
- ^ h
(C) / V V 2
1 2
- ^ h (D) V V
1 2
+ ^ h
EE SP 7.4 In the figure shown, assume the op-amp to be ideal. Which of the alternatives
gives the correct Bode plote for the transfer function
v
v
i
i
w
w
^
^
h
h
?
nodi a
EE SP 7.5 The transistor in the given circuit should always be in active region. Take
. V V 0 2
CE sat
=
^ h
, . V V 0 7
BE
= . The maximum value of R
c
in W which can be used,
is _____.
EE SP 7.6 The sinusoidal ac source in the figure has an rms value of V
2
20
. Considering all
possible values of R
L
, the minimum value of R
s
in W to avoid burnout of the
Zener diode is _____.
nodi a
EE SP 7.7 Assuming the diodes to be ideal in the figure, for the output to be clipped, the
input voltage v
i
must be outside the range
(A) V 1 - to V 2 - (B) V 2 - to V 4 -
(C) V 1 + to V 2 - (D) V 2 + to V 4 -
EE SP 7.8 A 10 kHz even-symmetric square ware is passed through a bandpass filter with
centre frequency at 30 kHz and 3 dB passband of 6 kHz. The filter output is
(A) a highly attenuated square wave at 10 kHz
(B) nearly zero
(C) a nearly perfect cosine wave at 30 kHz
(D) a nearly perfect sine wave at 30 kHz
EE SP 7.9 An oscillator circuit using ideal op-amp and diodes is shown in the figure.
The time duration for ve + part of the cycle is t
1
T and for ve - part is t
2
T . The
value of e RC
t t 1 2 T T -
will be ______.
YEAR 2014 EE03 ONE MAERK
EE SP 7.10 An operational amplifier circuit is shown in the figure. The output of the circuit
for a given input v
i
is
(A)
R
R
v
i
1
2
-
b l
(B)
R
R
v 1
i
1
2
- +
b l
(C)
R
R
v 1
i
1
2
+
b l
(D) V
sat
+ or V
sat
-
nodi a
EE SP 7.11 The transfer characteristic of the Op-amp circuit shown in figure is
YEAR 2013 ONE MARK
EE SP 7.12 In a voltage-voltage feedback as shown below, which one of the following
statements is TRUE if the gain k is increased?
nodi a
(A) The input impedance increases and output impedance decreases
(B) The input impedance increases and output impedance also increases
(C) The input impedance decreases and output impedance also decreases
(D) The input impedance decreases and output impedance increases
EE SP 7.13 In the circuit shown below what is the output voltage V
out ^ h if a silicon transistor
Q and an ideal op-amp are used?
(A) 15 V - (B) 0.7 V -
(C) 0.7 V + (D) 15 V +
YEAR 2013 TWO MARKS
EE SP 7.14 In the circuit shown below the op-amps are ideal. Then, V
out
in Volts is
(A) 4 (B) 6
nodi a
(C) 8 (D) 10
EE SP 7.15 A voltage sin t 1000 w Volts is applied across YZ. Assuming ideal diodes, the
voltage measured across WX in Volts, is
(A) sin t w (B) / sin sin t t 2 w w +
_ i
(C) / sin sin t t 2 w w -
^ h
(D) 0 for all t
EE SP 7.16 In the circuit shown below, the knee current of the ideal Zener dioide is 10 mA
. To maintain 5 V across R
L
, the minimum value of R
L
in W and the minimum
power rating of the Zener diode in mW, respectively, are
(A) 125 and 125 (B) 125 and 250
(C) 250 and 125 (D) 250 and 250
YEAR 2012 ONE MARK
EE SP 7.17 The i -v characteristics of the diode in the circuit given below are
i
.
, .
.
A V
A V
v
v
v
500
0 7
0 7
0 0 7 <
$
=
-
*
The current in the circuit is
nodi a
(A) 10 mA (B) 9.3 mA
(C) 6.67 mA (D) 6.2 mA
YEAR 2012 TWO MARKS
EE SP 7.18 The voltage gain A
v
of the circuit shown below is
(A) A 200
v
.
(B) A 100
v
.
(C) A 20
v
.
(D) A 10
v
.
EE SP 7.19 The circuit shown is a
(A) low pass filter with
( )
/ rad s f
R R C
1
dB 3
1 2
=
+
(B) high pass filter with / rad s f
R C
1
dB 3
1
=
(C) low pass filter with / rad s f
R C
1
dB 3
1
=
(D) high pass filter with
( )
/ rad s f
R R C
1
dB 3
1 2
=
+
YEAR 2011 ONE MARK
EE SP 7.20 A low-pass filter with a cut-off frequency of 30 Hz is cascaded with a high pass
filter with a cut-off frequency of 20 Hz. The resultant system of filters will
function as
(A) an all pass filter
nodi a
(B) an all stop filter
(C) an band stop (band-reject) filter
(D) a band pass filter
EE SP 7.21 The CORRECT transfer characteristic is
YEAR 2011 TWO MARKS
EE SP 7.22 The transistor used in the circuit shown below has a b of 30 and I
CBO
is negligible
nodi a
If the forward voltage drop of diode is 0.7 V, then the current through collector
will be
(A) 168 mA (B) 108 mA
(C) 20.54 mA (D) 5.36 mA
EE SP 7.23 A clipper circuit is shown below.
Assuming forward voltage drops of the diodes to be 0.7 V, the input-output
transfer characteristics of the circuit is
nodi a
YEAR 2010 ONE MARK
EE SP 7.24 Given that the op-amp is ideal, the output voltage v
o
is
(A) 4 V
(B) 6 V
(C) 7.5 V
(D) 12.12 V
EE SP 7.25 Assuming that the diodes in the given circuit are ideal, the voltage V
0
is
(A) 4 V (B) 5 V
(C) 7.5 V (D) 12.12 V
YEAR 2010 TWO MARKS
EE SP 7.26 The transistor circuit shown uses a silicon transistor with . , V I I 0 7
BE C E
. = and
a dc current gain of 100. The value of V
0
is
(A) 4.65 V
(B) 5 V
(C) 6.3 V
nodi a
(D) 7.23 V
YEAR 2009 ONE MARK
EE SP 7.27 The nature of feedback in the op-amp circuit shown is
(A) Current-Current feedback
(B) Voltage-Voltage feedback
(C) Current-Voltage feedback
(D) Voltage-Current feedback
YEAR 2009 TWO MARKS
EE SP 7.28 The following circuit has 10 , 10 R C k F m W = = . The input voltage is a sinusoidal
at 50 Hz with an rms value of 10 V. Under ideal conditions, the current
I
s
from
the source is
(A) 10p mA leading by 90
%

(B) 20p mA leading by 90
%
(C) 10p mA leading by 90
%

(D) 10p mA lagging by 90
%
EE SP 7.29 Transformer and emitter follower can both be used for impedance matching at
the output of an audio amplifier. The basic relationship between the input power
P
in
and output power
P
out
in both the cases is
(A) P P
in out
= for both transformer and emitter follower
(B) P P >
in out
for both transformer and emitter follower
(C) P P <
in out
for transformer and P P
in out
=

for emitter follower
(D) P P
in out
= for transformer and P P <
in out
for emitter follower
nodi a
EE SP 7.30 An ideal op-amp circuit and its input wave form as shown in the figures. The
output waveform of this circuit will be

YEAR 2008 ONE MARK
EE SP 7.31 The equivalent circuits of a diode, during forward biased and reverse biased
conditions, are shown in the figure.
(1)
(2)
If such a diode is used in clipper circuit of figure given above, the output voltage
nodi a
V
0
of the circuit will be
YEAR 2008 TWO MARKS
EE SP 7.32 Two perfectly matched silicon transistor are connected as shown in the figure
assuming the b of the transistors to be very high and the forward voltage drop
in diodes to be 0.7 V, the value of current I is
(A) 0 mA (B) 3.6 mA
(C) 4.3 mA (D) 5.7 mA
EE SP 7.33 In the voltage doubler circuit shown in the figure, the switch S is closed at
t 0 = . Assuming diodes D
1
and D
2
to be ideal, load resistance to be infinite and
initial capacitor voltages to be zero. The steady state voltage across capacitor C
1

and C
2
will be
(A) 10 , 5 V V V V
c c 1 2
= =
(B) 10 , 5 V V V V
c c 1 2
= =-
(C) 5 , 10 V V V V
c c 1 2
= =
(D) 5 , 10 V V V V
c c 1 2
= =-
nodi a
EE SP 7.34 The block diagrams of two of half wave rectifiers are shown in the figure. The
transfer characteristics of the rectifiers are also shown within the block.
It is desired to make full wave rectifier using above two half-wave rectifiers. The
resultants circuit will be
A general filter circuit is shown in the figure :
nodi a
EE SP 7.35 If R R R
A 1 2
= = and R R R
B 3 4
= = , the circuit acts as a
(A) all pass filter (B) band pass filter
(C) high pass filter (D) low pass filter
EE SP 7.36 The output of the this filter is given to the circuit in figure :
The gain v/s frequency characteristic of the output ( ) v
o
will be
YEAR 2007 ONE MARK
EE SP 7.37 The common emitter forward current gain of the transistor shown is 100
F
b =
The transistor is operating in
(A) Saturation region
(B) Cutoff region
(C) Reverse active region
(D) Forward active region
EE SP 7.38 The three-terminal linear voltage regulator is connected to a 10 W load resistor as
shown in the figure. If V
in
is 10 V, what is the power dissipated in the transistor ?
nodi a
(A) 0.6 W (B) 2.4 W
(C) 4.2 W (D) 5.4 W
EE SP 7.39 The circuit shown in the figure is
(A) a voltage source with voltage
R R
rV
1 2
<
(B) a voltage source with voltage
R
r R
V
1
2
<
(C) a current source with current
R R
r R
r
V
1 2
2
<
+
c m
(D) a current source with current
R R
R
r
V
1 2
2
+
c m
YEAR 2007 TWO MARKS
EE SP 7.40 The input signal V
in
shown in the figure is a 1 kHz square wave voltage that
alternates between 7 + V and 7 - V with a 50% duty cycle. Both transistor
have the same current gain which is large. The circuit delivers power to the load
resistor
R
L
. What is the efficiency of this circuit for the given input ? choose the
closest answer.
(A) 46% (B) 55%
(C) 63% (D) 92%
nodi a
YEAR 2006 ONE MARK
EE SP 7.41 For a given sinusoidal input voltage, the voltage waveform at point P of the
clamper circuit shown in figure will be

EE SP 7.42 What are the states of the three ideal diodes of the circuit shown in figure ?
(A) , , D D D ON OFF OFF
1 2 3
(B) , , D D D OFF ON OFF
1 2 3
(C) , , D D D ON OFF ON
1 2 3
(D) , , D D D OFF ON ON
1 2 3
YEAR 2006 TWO MARKS
EE SP 7.43 Assuming the diodes D
1
and D
2
of the circuit shown in figure to be ideal ones,
the transfer characteristics of the circuit will be
nodi a
EE SP 7.44 A relaxation oscillator is made using OPAMP as shown in figure. The supply
voltages of the OPAMP are 12 V ! . The voltage waveform at point P will be
nodi a
EE SP 7.45 Consider the circuit shown in figure. If the b of the transistor is 30 and I
CBO
is
20 mA and the input voltage is 5 V + , the transistor would be operating in
(A) saturation region
(B) active region
(C) breakdown region
(D) cut-off region
EE SP 7.46 A TTL NOT gate circuit is shown in figure. Assuming 0.7 V V
BE
= of both the
transistors, if 3.0 V
i
= V, then the states of the two transistors will be
(A) Q
1
ON and Q
2
OFF
(B) Q
1
reverse ON and Q
2
OFF
(C) Q
1
reverse ON and Q
2
ON
(D) Q
1
OFF and Q
2
reverse ON
YEAR 2005 ONE MARK
EE SP 7.47 Assume that D
1
and D
2
in figure are ideal diodes. The value of current is
nodi a
(A) 0 mA (B) 0.5 mA
(C) 1 mA (D) 2 mA
EE SP 7.48 Assume that the N-channel MOSFET shown in the figure is ideal, and that its
threshold voltage is 1.0 + V the voltage V
ab
between nodes a and b is
(A) 5 V (B) 2 V
(C) 1 V (D) 0 V
YEAR 2005 TWO MARKS
EE SP 7.49 The common emitter amplifier shown in the figure is biased using a 1 mA ideal
current source. The approximate base current value is
(A) 0 A m (B) 10 A m
(C) 100 A m (D) 1000 A m
EE SP 7.50 The typical frequency response of a two-stage direct coupled voltage amplifier is
as shown in figure
nodi a
EE SP 7.51 Consider the inverting amplifier, using an ideal operational amplifier shown in
the figure. The designer wishes to realize the input resistance seen by the small-
signal source to be as large as possible, while keeping the voltage gain between
10 - and 25 - . The upper limit on R
F
is 1 MW. The value of R
1
should be
(A) Infinity (B) 1 MW
(C) 100 kW (D) 40 kW
EE SP 7.52 In the given figure, if the input is a sinusoidal signal, the output will appear as
shown
nodi a
Assume that the threshold voltage of the N-channel MOSFET shown in figure is
+ 0.75 V. The output characteristics of the MOSFET are also shown
EE SP 7.53 The transconductance of the MOSFET is
(A) 0.75 ms (B) 1 ms
(C) 2 ms (D) 10 ms
EE SP 7.54 The voltage gain of the amplifier is
(A) 5 + (B) . 7 5 -
(C) 10 + (D) 10 -
YEAR 2004 ONE MARK
EE SP 7.55 The current through the Zener diode in figure is
(A) 33 mA (B) 3.3 mA
(C) 2 mA (D) 0 mA
EE SP 7.56 Two perfectly matched silicon transistor are connected as shown in figure. The
value of the current I is
nodi a
(A) 0 mA (B) 2.3 mA
(C) 4.3 mA (D) 7.3 mA
EE SP 7.57 The feedback used in the circuit shown in figure can be classified as
(A) shunt-series feedback (B) shunt-shunt feedback
(C) series-shunt feedback (D) series-series feedback
YEAR 2004 TWO MARKS
EE SP 7.58 Assuming that the diodes are ideal in figure, the current in diode D
1
is
(A) 9 mA (B) 5 mA
(C) 0 mA (D) 3 - mA
EE SP 7.59 The trans-conductance g
m
of the transistor shown in figure is 10 mS. The value
of the input resistance
R
in

is
nodi a
(A) 10.0 kW (B) 8.3 kW
(C) 5.0 kW (D) 2.5 kW
EE SP 7.60 The value of R for which the PMOS transistor in figure will be biased in linear
region is
(A) 220 W (B) 470 W
(C) 680 W (D) 1200 W
EE SP 7.61 In the active filter circuit shown in figure, if Q = 1, a pair of poles will be realized
with
0
w equal to
(A) 1000 rad/s (B) 100 rad/s
(C) 10 rad/s (D) 1 rad/s
EE SP 7.62 The input resistance / R v i
in x x
= of the circuit in figure is
nodi a
(A) 100 + kW (B) 100 kW -
(C) 1 + MW (D) 1 MW -
YEAR 2003 ONE MARK
EE SP 7.63 The variation of drain current with gate-to-source voltage (I V
D GS
- characteristic)
of a MOSFET is shown in figure. The MOSFET is
(A) an n-channel depletion mode device
(B) an n-channel enhancement mode device
(C) an p-channel depletion mode device
(D) an p-channel enhancement mode device
EE SP 7.64 In the circuit of figure, assume that the transistor has 99 h
fe
= and . V 0 7
BE
= V.
The value of collector current I
C
of the transistor is approximately
(A) [3.3/3.3] mA
(B) [3.3/(3.3+3.3)] mA
(C) [3.3/.33] mA
(D) [3.3(33+3.3)] mA
EE SP 7.65 For the circuit of figure with an ideal operational amplifier, the maximum phase
shift of the output v
out
with reference to the input v
in
is
nodi a
(A) 0c (B) 90c -
(C) 90c + (D) 180 ! c
YEAR 2003 TWO MARKS
EE SP 7.66 For the n-channel enhancement MOSFET shown in figure, the threshold voltage
2 V
th
= V. The drain current I
D
of the MOSFET is 4 mA when the drain resistance
R
D
is 1 kW.If the value of R
D
is increased to 4 kW, drain current I
D
will become
(A) 2.8 mA (B) 2.0 mA
(C) 1.4 mA (D) 1.0 mA
EE SP 7.67 Assuming the operational amplifier to be ideal, the gain / v v
out in
for the circuit
shown in figure is
(A) 1 -
(B) 20 -
(C) 100 -
(D) 120 -
EE SP 7.68 A voltage signal sin t 10 w is applied to the circuit with ideal diodes, as shown in
figure, The maximum, and minimum values of the output waveform V
out
of the
circuit are respectively
nodi a
(A) 10 V + and 10 V -
(B) 4 V + and 4 V -
(C) 7 V + and 4 V -
(D) 4 V + and 7 V -
************
nodi a
SOLUTI ONS
To determine the balancing condition, we reconstruct the Wien bridge as
At balance, we have
z z
1 4
z z
2 3
=
or R
C
j
R
1
1
4
w
-
c m

j C R
R
R
1
2 2
2
3
w
=
+
c m
or
R
R
4
3

R
R
C
C
j C R
C R
1
2
1
1
2
2 1
1 2
w
w
= + + -
b l
Comparing real and imaginary parts, we get

R
R
4
3

R
R
C
C
2
1
1
2
= +
and C R
C R
1
2 1
1 2
w
w
- 0 = &w
R C R C
1
1 1 2 2
=
SOL 7.2 Correct option (D).
We have the transistor circuit as
Its equivalent h-parameter circuit is drawn as
nodi a
For the circuit, we obtain the mid-band gain as
A
m

V
V
s
o
=

R h
h R
s ie
fe
=
+
l
(R 0
s
= as it by passes due to capacitor)

0 10 10
100 10 10
100
3
3
#
# #
=
+
=
i.e. the mid-band gain is 100.
We redraw the given op-amp circuit as
Node voltage V
c
is connected to inverting mode of op-amp. So, we have the
output due to V
c
as
V
o
+

R
R
V
R
R
V
f
c
1
1
= =-
Again, node voltage V
d
is connected to the non-inverting mode of op-amp. So, we
have the output due to V
d
as
V
o
-

R
R
R
R
V
R
R
R
R
V 1
2
1
2
f f
d
1 1
2
=+ + = +
c b m l
Therefore, the net output of the op-amp is
V
o
V V
o o
= +
+ -
V
R
R
V
R
R
R
R
2
1
c d #
=- + +
b b l l
V
V
V V
2
2
c
d
d c #
=- + = - ...(1)
Applying KVL in the op-amp circuit, we have
V I R I R I R V 2
c d
- + + + + ^ h 0 =
or V V
d c
- I R 4 =-
or V
o
I R 4 =- [using equation (1)] ...(2)
Also, we have
V I R V 2
a b
- + + 0 =
or I R 2 V V
a b
= - ...(3)
From equations (3) and (4), we get
V
o
V V 2
a b
=- - ^ h
nodi a
V V 2
b a
= - ^ h ...(4)
Since, the voltage at inverting and non-inverting terminals are same for ideal op-
amp. So, from the op-amp circuit, we have
V
1
V
b
= and V V
a 2
=
Substituting it in equation (4), we obtain
V
o
V V 2
1 2
= - ^ h
SOL 7.4 Correct option is (A)
We have the op-amp circuit
Let the voltage at inverting terminal of op-amp be X . So, we have

R
X s V s
f
o
- ^ ^ h h
0 =
or X s ^ h V s
o
= ^ h ...(1)
Applying KCL at non-inverting terminal of op-amp, we get
[ ] X s Cs
R
X s V s
0
i
1
- +
-
^
^ ^
h
h h
0 =
or X s Cs
R
1
1
+ ^ h
: D

R
V s
i
1
=
^ h
or V s
R
R Cs 1
o
1
1
+
^ h
: D

R
V s
i
1
=
^ h
[from equation (1)]
So,
V s
V s
i
o
^
^
h
h

R Cs 1
1
1 10
1
1
3
=
+
=
+
-
Therefore, the corner frequency for the transfer function is

C
w
10
1
10
3
3
= =
-
Hence, we draw the Bode plot for the function (in decibel),
log
V
V
20
i
o
w
w
^
^
h
h
log
j
20
1
10
1
3
w
=
+
f p
The obtained magnitude and phase plots are

nodi a
Given: V
sat CE^ h
. 0 2 =
V
BE
. 0 7 =
b 100 =
Writing KVL around the input loop
. I R 5 0 7
B S
- - 0 =
I
B

. .
.
k
mA
2
5 0 7
2 10
4 3
2 15
3
#
W
=
-
= =
I
C
. . mA A I 100 2 15 0 215
B #
b = = =
Writing KVL around the output loop
I R V 5
C C CE
- - 0 =
V
CE
. R 5 0 215
C
= -
For active region V
CE
V >
sat CE^ h
or, V
CE
. V 0 2 >
So, . R 5 0 215
C
- . 0 2 >
. R 0 215
C
. 5 0 2 < -
R
min C

.
.
.
0 215
4 8
22 32 . W =
The given circuit is a bridge full wave rectifier with zener regulator. The voltage
across the regulator is a full wave rectified output as shown below.
I
S
I I
Z L
= +
nodi a
I
Z
I I
S L
= -
I
max Z
I I
max min S L
= - ...(1)
Because when I
L
will be minimum I
Z
will be maximum.
We have
I
max S

R
V V
R
20 5
min min s
o Z
s
=
-
=
-
I
min L
0 = (for R
L
"3)
I
max Z

/
A
V
P
5
1 4
20
1
Z
Z
= = =
^ h
Substituting these values in eq (1), we get

20
1

R
20 5
min s
=
-
R
min s
15 20 300
#
W = =
Assume when both the diodes will be OFF.
In that case
v
o

v
2
i
=
For proper clipping operation, both the diode can not be forward biased together.
When both diodes are off, we have
v
o

v
2
i
=
Let v
p1
, v
n1
are voltage of anode and cathode of diode D
1
and v
p2
and v
n2
are
voltage of anode and cathode of D
2
. So
v
o
v
v
2
p
i
1
= =
v
o
v
v
2
n
i
1
= =
To make both diodes forward biased
v
p1
V 1 >- and V v 2 <
n2
-
or
v
2
i
V 1 >- and V
v
2
2 <
i
-
So v
i
V 2 =- to V 4 - range does not allow proper
clipping operation.
nodi a
We have the op-amp circuit as given below.
For an operation amplifier, we know that
1. If v V >
sat i
; then output voltage will be V
sat
2. If v V <
sat i
- ; then the output voltage will be V
sat
-
3. If V v V < <
sat sat i
- ; then the output voltage varies according to the applied
input.
For the given op-amp circuit, we assume that
V
sat
- v V < <
sat i
So, we obtain the output for the corresponding input v
i
. Applying KCL at non-
inverting terminal of first op-amp, we have

R
v
R
v x 0
i i
1 2
-
+
-
0 =
or v
R R
1 1
i
1 2
+
b l

R
x
2
=
or x
R
R R
v
i
1
1 2
=
+
b l
...(1)
where x is the voltage at non-inverting terminal of second op-amp. Again,
applying KCL at non-inverting terminal of second op-amp, we get

R
x
R
x v 0
0
-
+
-
0 =
or v
0
x 2 =
From eq (1) we have v
0

R
v
R R
2
i
1
1 2
= + ^ h v
R
R
2 1
i
1
2
= +
b l
There is no single option so our assumption is wrong and v V >
sat i
+ and v V <
sat i
-
. So, the output voltage is V
sat
+ and V
sat
- .
The given op-amp circuit is redrawn below.
For the given circuit, we consider the following two cased.
Case I : when v 0 >
i
For this case, the diode conducts. Since, the voltage at negative and positive
terminals are same for ideal op-amp. So, for the 1st op-amp, we have
V V
1 1
=
- +
0 =
Therefore, the output of first op-amp is zero, which is applied to negative terminal
of second op-amp.
nodi a
Thus we get the output v 0
o
= .
Case II : when v 0 <
i
For this case, the diode is open and the output of first op-amp is
V
o1

R
R
v v
i i
=- =-
Therefore, the output of second op-amp is
v
o

R
R
v v
o i 1
=- =
Thus, we have the output voltage
v
o

v
v v
0 0
0
>
<
i
i i
= )
Hence, the transfer characteristic of op-amp circuit is
The / i p voltage of the system is given as
V
in
V V
f 1
= + V kV
out 1
= +
V kA V
1 0 1
= + V A V
out 0 1
= ^ h
V kA 1
1 0
= + ^ h
Therefore, if k is increased then input voltage is also increased so, the input
impedance increases. Now, we have
V
out
A V
0 1
=
A
kA
V
1
in
0
0
=
+ ^ h

kA
A V
1
in
0
0
=
+ ^ h
Since, V
in
is independent of k when seen from output mode, the output voltage
decreases with increase in k that leads to the decrease of output impedance.
Thus, input impedance increases and output impedance decreases.
nodi a
For the given ideal op-amp, negative terminal will be also ground (at zero voltage)
and so, the collector terminal of the BJ T will be at zero voltage.
i.e., V
C
0 volt =
The current in 1 kW resistor is given by
I
1 k
5 0
W
=
-
5 mA =
This current will flow completely through the BJ T since, no current will flow
into the ideal op-amp ( / I P resistance of ideal op-amp is infinity). So, for BJ T
we have
V
C
0 =
V
B
0 =
I
C
5 mA =
i.e.,the base collector junction is reverse biased (zero voltage) therefore, the
collector current (I
C
) can have a value only if base-emitter is forward biased.
Hence,
V
BE
0.7 volts =
& V V
B E
- . 0 7 =
& V 0
out
- . 0 7 = & V
out
0.7 volt =-
For the given ideal op-Amps we can assume
V
2
-
V V
2 2
= =
+
(ideal)
V
1
+
V V
1 1
= =
-
(ideal)
So, by voltage division
V
1

V
2
1
out #
=
V
out
V 2
1
=
and, as the I/P current in Op-amp is always zero therefore, there will be no
voltage drop across 1 KW in II op-amp
i.e., V
2
1 V =
Therefore,
V V
1
1 2
-

V
1
2
2
=
- - ^ h
or, V 1
1
- 1 2 = +
or, V
1
4 =
So, V
out
2 8 volt V
1
= =
nodi a
Given, the input voltage V
YZ
sin t 100 w =
For ve + half cycle
V
YZ
0 >
i.e., V
Y
is a higher voltage than V
Z
So, the diode will be in cutoff region. Therefore, there will no voltage difference
between X and W node.
i.e., V
WX
0 =
Now, for ve - half cycle all the four diodes will active and so, X and W
terminal is short circuited
i.e., V
WX
0 =
Hence, V
WX
0 = for all t
From the circuit, we have
nodi a
I
s
I I
Z L
= +
or, I
Z
I I
s L
= - (1)
Since, voltage across zener diode is 5 V so, current through 100 W resistor is
obtained as
I
s
0.05 A
100
10 5
=
-
=
Therefore, the load current is given by
I
L

R
5
L
=
Since, for proper operation, we must have I
Z
I
knes
$
So, from Eq. (1), we write
0.05 A
R
5
L
- 10 mA $
50 mA
R
5
L
- 10 mA $
40 mA
R
5
L
$
40 10
3
#
-

R
5
L
$

1
40 10
3
#
-

R
5
L
#

40 10
5
3
#
-
R
L
#
or, 125 W R
L
#
Therefore, minimum value of 125 R
L
W =
Now, we know that power rating of Zener diode is given by
P
R
V I
max Z Z
=
^ h
I
max Z^ h
is maximum current through zener diode in reverse bias. Maximum currrent
through zener diode flows when load current is zero. i.e.,
I
max Z^ h
. I
100
10 5
0 05
s
= =
-
=
Therefore, P
R
5 0.05 W
#
= 250 mW =
Let 0.7 V v> and diode is forward biased. Applying Kirchoffs voltage law
10 1k i v
#
- - 0 =

.
( )
v
v 10
500
0 7
1000 -
-
-
: D
0 =
10 ( 0.7) 2 v v
#
- - - 0 =
v
.
3.8 > . V
3
11 4
0 7 = = (Assumption is true)
So,
.
i
v
500
0 7
=
-

. .
6.2 mA
500
3 8 0 7
=
-
=
DC Analysis :
nodi a
Using KVL in input loop,
. V I 100 0 7
C B
- - 0 =
V
C
. I 100 0 7
B
= + ...(1)
I
C

.
( ) I
k
V
I
12
13 7
1
E
C
B
- b =
-
= +

. V
12 10
13 7
C
3
#
-
I 100
B
= ...(2)
Solving equation (1) and (2), I
B
0.01 mA =
Small Signal Analysis :
Transforming given input voltage source into equivalent current source.
This is a shunt-shunt feedback amplifier.
Given parameters,
r
p

0.01
25
2.5
mA
mV
k
I
V
B
T
W = = =
g
m

.
0.04 s
r 2 5 1000
100
#
b
= = =
p
Writing KCL at output node

R
v
g v
R
v v
C
m
F
0 0
+ +
-
p
p
0 =
v
R R
v g
R
1 1 1
C F
m
F
0
+ + -
p : : D D
0 =
Substituting 1 , k R 2
C
W = 100 , k R
F
W = 0.04 s g
m
=
(9.33 10 ) (0.04) v v
0
5
#
+
p
-
0 = or v
0
. V 428 72 =-
p
...(1)
Writing KCL at input node

R
v
s
i

R
v
r
v
R
v v
s F
o
= + +
-
p
p
p p

v
R r R R
v 1 1 1
s F F
0
= + + -
p
p
: D
(5.1 10 ) v
R
v
F
4 0
#
= -
p
-
Substituting V
p
from equation (1)

R
v
s
i

.
.
v
R
v
428 72
5 1 10
F
4
0
0 #
=
-
-
-

v
10 10
i
3
#
1.16 10 1 10 v v
6
0
5
0 # #
=- -
- -
10 k R
s
W =
nodi a

v
10 10
i
3
#
. 1 116 10
5
#
=-
-
A
v

.
8.96
v
v
10 10 1 116 10
1
i
0
3 5
# # #
- = =
-
First we obtain the transfer function.

( ) ( )
R
V j
R
V j 0 0
j C
i o
1
1
2
w w
+
-
+
-
w
0 =

( )
R
V j
o
2
w

( )
R
V j
j C
i
1
1
w
=
+
-
w
( ) V j
o
w
( )
R j
V j R
j C
i
1
1
2
w
=-
-
w
At 0 " w (Low frequencies),
C
1
w
, "3 so V 0
o
=
At "3 w (higher frequencies),
C
1
w
, 0 " so ( ) ( ) V j
R
R
V j
o i
1
2
w w =-
The filter passes high frequencies so it is a high pass filter.
( ) H jw
V
V
R j
C
R
1
i
o
1
2
w
= =
-
-
( ) H 3
R
R
R
R
1
2
1
2
=
-
=
At 3 dB frequency, gain will be 2 times of maximum gain ( ) H 3
6 @
H j
0
w
^ h
( ) H
2
1
3 =
So,
R
C
R
1
1
2
0
2 2
2
w
+

R
R
2
1
1
2
=
b l
R 2
1
2
R
C
1
1
2
0
2 2
w
= + & R
1
2

C
1
2 2
w
=

0
w
R C
1
1
=
nodi a
So, it will act as a Band pass filter.
Zener Diode is used as stabilizer.
The circuit is assumed to be as
We can see that both BE and BC Junction are forwarded biased. So the BJT is
operating in saturation.
Collector current I
C

.
.
5.36 mA
k 2 2
12 0 2
=
-
=
Note:- In saturation mode I I
C B
-b
Y
nodi a
The first half of the circuit is a differential amplifier (negative feedback)
V
a
( ) V
i
=-
Second op-amp has a positive feedback, so it acts as an schmitt trigger.
Since V
a
V
i
=- this is a non-inverting schmitt trigger.
Threshold value V
TH
6 V
2
12
= =
V
TL
6 V =-
We can obtain three operating regions depending on whether the Zener and PN
diodes are forward biased or reversed biased.
1. 0.7 v V
i
#- , zener diode becomes forward biased and diode D will be off so
the equivalent circuit looks like
The output v
o
0.7 V =-
2. When . . v 0 7 5 7
i
1 # - , both zener and diode D will be off. The circuit is
Output follows input i.e v v
o i
=
Note that zener goes in reverse breakdown(i.e acts as a constant battery) only
when difference between its p-n junction voltages exceeds 10 V.
3. When 5.7 v V >
i
, the diode D will be forward biased and zener remains off,
the equivalent circuit is
nodi a
v
o
5 0.7 5.7 V = + =
Since the op-amp is ideal
v v =
+ -
2 =+ volt
Writing node equation

R
v
R
v v 0
2
o
-
+
-
- -
0 =

( )
R R
v
2
2
2
o
+
-
0 =
4 2 v
o
+ - 0 = or v
o
6 = volt
Given circuit is,
We can observe that diode D
2
is always off, whether D
1
,is on or off. So equivalent
circuit is.
D
1
is ON in this condition and
V
0

10 10
10
10
#
=
+
5 = volt
Writing KVL equation for input loop (Base emitter loop)
10 (10 )I V V k
B BE 0
W - - - 0 = ...(1)
Emitter current I
V
100
E
0
=
I
C
I I
E B
- b =
nodi a
So,
V
100
0
100I
B
=
I
B

V
10 10
3
0
#
=
Put I
B
into equation (1)
10 (10 10 ) 0.7
V
V
10 10
3
3
0
0 #
#
- - - 0 =
. V 9 3 2
0
- 0 =
& V
0

.
.
2
9 3
4 65 = = A
Equivalent circuit of given amplifier
Feedback samples output voltage and adds a negative feedback voltage ( ) v
fb
to
input.
So, it is a voltage-voltage feedback.
Let voltages at positive and negative terminals of op-amp are V
+
and V
-

respectively, then
V V V
s
= =
+ -
(ideal op-amp)
In the circuit we have,

( )
Cs
V
R
V V s
1
0 0 -
+
-
-
-
` j
0 =
( ) ( ) RCs V V V s
0
+ -
- -
0 =
(1 ) RCs V
s
+ ( ) V s
0
=
Similarly current I
s
is, I
s

R
V V
s 0
=
-
I
s

R
RCs
V
s
=
I
s
j CV
s
w =
I
s
CV 90
s
+ w = +
%
I
s
f 2 10 10 10
6
# # # p =
-
I
s
2 50 10 10 10
6
# # # # # p =
-
I
s
10p = mA, leading by 90
%
nodi a
Input and output power of a transformer is same
P P
in out
=
For emitter follower, ) voltage gain(A
v
1 =
( ) A current gain
i
1 >
( ) P Power
out
A A P
v i in
=
Since emitter follower has a high current gain so P P >
out in
This is a schmitt trigger circuit, output can takes two states only.
V 6
OH
=+ volt
3 V
OL
=- volt
Threshold voltages at non-inverting terminals of op-amp is given as

V V
2
6
1
0
TH TH
-
+
-
0 =
3 6 V
TH
- 0 =
V
TH
2 = V (Upper threshold)
Similarly
( ) V
V
2
3
1
TL
TL
- -
+ 0 =
3 3 V
TL
+ 0 =
V
TL
1 =- V (Lower threshold)
For 2 V Volt, <
in
6 V Volt
0
=+
2 V Volt, >
in
3 V Volt
0
=-
1 V Volt <
in
- 6 V Volt
0
=+
1 V Volt >
in
- 3 V Volt
0
=-
Output waveform
Assume the diode is in reverse bias so equivalent circuit is
nodi a
Output voltage V
0
10
sin t
10 10
10
#
w
=
+

5sin t w =
Due to resistor divider, voltage across diode 0 V <
D
(always). So it in reverse bias
for given input.
Output, V
0
5sin t w =
This is a current mirror circuit. Since b is high so , I I
C C 1 2
= I I
B B 1 2
=
V
B
( . ) 5 0 7 = - +
4.3 =- volt
Diode D
1
is forward biased.
So, current I is, I I I
C C 2 1
= =

( . )
4.3
1
0 4 3
=
- -
= mA
In positive half cycle of input, diode D
1
is in forward bias and D
2
is off, the
equivalent circuit is
Capacitor C
1
will charge upto 5 + volt. 5 V
C1
=+ volt
In negative halt cycle diode D
1
is off and D
2
is on.
nodi a
Now capacitor V
C2
will charge upto 10 - volt in opposite direction.
SOL 7.34 Option () is correct.
Let input V
in
is a sine wave shown below
According to given transfer characteristics of rectifiers output of rectifier P is.
Similarly output of rectifier Q is
Output of a full wave rectifier is given as
To get output V
0
( ) V V V K
P Q 0
= - + K- gain of op-amp
So, P should connected at inverting terminal of op-amp and Q with non-inverting
terminal.
nodi a
For low frequencies, 0 " w , so
C
1
" 3
w
Equivalent circuit is,
Applying node equation at positive and negative input terminals of op-amp.

R
v v
R
v v
A i A o
1 2
-
+
-
0 =
2v
A
v v
i o
= + , R R R
A 1 2
a = =
Similarly,

R
v v
R
v 0
A i A
3 4
-
+
-
0 =
2v
A
v
in
= , R R R
B 3 4
a = =
So, 0 v
o
= , iIt will stop low frequency signals.
For high frequencies, " 3 w , then 0
C
1
"
w
Equivalent circuit is,
Output, v v
o i
=
So it will pass high frequency signal.
This is a high pass filter.
In previous solution cutoff frequency of high pass filter is given by,

R C 2
1
h
A
w
p
=
Here given circuit is a low pass filter with cutoff frequency,

C
R C
2
1
2
2
L
R
A
2
A
w
p
p
= =
2
L h
w w =
When both the circuits are connected together, equivalent circuit is,
nodi a
So this is is Band pass filter, amplitude response is given by.
If transistor is in normal active region, base current can be calculated as following,
By applying KVL for input loop,
10 (1 ) 0.7 270 I I 10 10
C B
3 3
# # - - - 0 =
270 I I
B B
b + . 9 3 = mA, I I
C B
` b =
( 270) I
B
b + . 9 3 = mA
I
B

9.3
270 100
mA
=
+
0. 25 0 mA =
In saturation, base current is given by,
10 (1) (1) I V I
C CE E
- - - 0 =

2
10
I
C (sat)
=
I I
V 0
C E
CE
-
-
I
C (sat)
5 = mA
I
B(sat)

I
C (sat)
b
= .050
100
5
mA = =
I I
) B B(sat
1 , so transistor is in forward active region.
In the circuit
We can analyze that the transistor is operating in active region.
V
BE(ON)
0.6 = volt
V V
B E
- . 0 6 =
. V 6 6
E
- . 0 6 =
V
E
6.6 0.6 6 = - = volt
At emitter (by applying KCL),
I
E
I I
B L
= +
I
E

1
. 6 6 6
10
6
kW W
=
-
+ 0.6 amp -
10 6 4 V V V
CE C E
= - = - = volt
Power dissipated in transistor is given by.
nodi a
P
T
V I
CE C # = 4 0.6 # = 0.6 I I
C E
` - = amp
2.4 = W
This is a voltage-to-current converter circuit. Output current depends on input
voltage.
Since op-amp is ideal v v v
1
= =
+ -
Writing node equation.

R
v v
R
v 0
1
1
2
1
-
+
-
0 =
v
R R
R R
1 2
1 2
1
+
c m

R
V
1
=
v
1
V
R R
R
1 2
2
=
+
c m
Since the op-amp is ideal therefore
i
L
i
r
v
1
1
= =

r
V
R R
R
1 2
2
=
+
c m
This is a class-B amplifier whose efficiency is given as
h
V
V
4
CC
P
p
=
where V
P
" peak value of input signal
V
CC
" supply voltage
here V 7
P
= volt, V 10
CC
= volt
so, h 100
4 10
7
# #
p
=
54.95% = % 55 -
First we can check for diode D
2
. Let diode D
2
is OFF then the circuit is
nodi a
In the above circuit diode D
1
must be ON, as it is connected with 10 V battery
now the circuit is
Because we assumed diode D
2
OFF so voltage across it V 0
D2
# and it is possible
only when D
3
is off.
So, all assumptions are true.
In the positive half cycle of input, Diode D
1
will be reverse biased and equivalent
circuit is.
Since there is no feed back to the op-amp and op-amp has a high open loop gain
so it goes in saturation. Input is applied at inverting terminal so.
V
P
12 V
CC
=- =- V
In negative half cycle of input, diode D
1
is in forward bias and equivalent
circuit is shown below.
nodi a
Output V V V
P
= +
g -
Op-amp is at virtual ground so V V 0 = =
+ -
and 0.7 V V V
P
= =
g
Voltage wave form at point P is
In the circuit when 10 V <
i
V, both D
1
and D
2
are off.
So equivalent circuit is,
Output, 10 V
o
= volt
When 10 V >
i
V (D
1
is in forward bias and D
2
is off
So the equivalent circuit is,

Output, V V
o i
=
Transfer characteristic of the circuit is
nodi a
Here output of the multi vibrator is
12 V
0
! = volt
Threshold voltage at positive terminal of op-amp can be obtained as following
When output 12 V
0
=+ V, equivalent circuit is,
writing node equation at positive terminal of op-amp

V V
10
12
10
0
th th
-
+
-
0 =
V
th
6 = volt (Positive threshold)
So, the capacitor will charge upto 6 volt.
When output 12 V
0
=- V, the equivalent circuit is.
node equation

V V
2
12
10
0
th th
+
+
-
0 =
5 60 V V
th th
+ + 0 =
V
th
10 =- volt (negative threshold)
nodi a
So the capacitor will discharge upto 10 - volt.
At terminal P voltage waveform is.
Assume that BJT is in active region, thevenin equivalent of input circuit is
obtained as

( 12)
V V
V
15 100
th i
th -
+
- -
0 =
V V V 20 20 3 36
th i th
- + + 0 =
V 23
th
20 5 36
#
= - , V 5
i
= V
V
th
. 2 78 = V
Thevenin resistance R
th
15 | | 100 K K W W =
13.04 KW =
So the circuit is
Writing KVL for input loop
. . R I 2 78 0 7
th B
- - 0 =
I
B
. 0 157 = mA
Current in saturation is given as,
I
B(sat)

I
C(sat)
b
=
nodi a
I
C(sat)

.
.
5.4
2 2
12 2
= = mA
So, I
B(sat)

.
30
5 45 mA
= . 0 181 = mA
Since I I >
B B (sat)
, therefore assumption is true.
From the circuit we can observe that Diode D
1
must be in forward bias (since
current is flowing through diode).
Let assume that D
2
is in reverse bias, so equivalent circuit is.
Voltage V
n
is given by
V
n
1 2 2 Volt # = =
V
p
0 =
V V >
n p
(so diode is in reverse bias, assumption is true)
Current through D
2
is I
D2
0 =
This is a N-channel MOSFET with V
GS
2 V =
V
TH
1 V =+
V
DS(sat)
V V
GS TH
= -
V
DS(sat)
2 1 1 V = - =
Due to 10 V source V V >
DS DS(sat)
so the NMOS goes in saturation, channel
conductivity is high and a high current flows through drain to source and it acts
as a short circuit.
So, V 0
ab
=
Since the transistor is operating in active region.
I
E
I
B
. b
I
B

I
E
b
=
100
1 mA
= 10 A m =
Gain of the inverting amplifier is given by,
A
v

R
R
F
1
=-
R
1 10
1
6
#
=- , 1 R M
F
W =
nodi a
R
1

A
1 10
v
6
#
=-
10 A
v
=- to 25 - so value of R
1
R
1

10
10
6
= 100 kW = for A 10
v
=-
R
'
1

25
10
6
= 40 kW = for A 25
v
=-
R
1
should be as large as possible so 100 R k
1
W =
Direct coupled amplifiers or DC-coupled amplifiers provides gain at dc or very
low frequency also.
Since there is no feedback in the circuit and ideally op-amp has a very high value
of open loop gain, so it goes into saturation (ouput is either V + or V - ) for
small values of input.
The input is applied to negative terminal of op-amp, so in positive half cycle it
saturates to V - and in negative half cycle it goes to V + .
Trans-conductance of MOSFET is given by
g
m

V
i
GS
D
2
2
=

( )
( )
1
2 1
2 1
V
mA
=
-
-
= mS
Voltage gain can be obtain by small signal equivalent circuit of given amplifier.
v
o
g v R
m gs D
=-
v
gs
v
in
=
So, v
o
g R v
m D in
=-
Voltage gain A
v

v
v
i
o
= g R
m D
=-
(1 mS)(10 k ) 10 W
=-
=-
Given circuit,
nodi a
In the circuit
V
1
3.5 V = (given)
Current in zener is.
I
Z

R
V V
Z
Z 1
=
-

.
. .
0 1 10
3 5 3 3
3
#
=
-
2 mA =
This is a current mirror circuit. Since V
BE
is the same in both devices, and
transistors are perfectly matched, then
I I I I and
B B C C 1 2 1 2
= =
From the circuit we have,
I
R
I I I
C B B 1 1 2
= + + 2 I I
C B 1 2
= + I I
B B 1 2
a =
I
I 2
C
C
2
2
b
= + , I I I I
C C C B 1 2 2 2
a b = =
I
R
I 1
2
C2
b
= +
c m
I
C2
I =
I
1
2
R
b
=
+
c m
I
R
can be calculate as
I
R

.
4.3
1 10
5 0 7
3
#
=
- +
=- mA
So, I
.
4.3
1
100
2
4 3
- =
+
` j
mA
The small signal equivalent circuit of given amplifier
nodi a
Here the feedback circuit samples the output voltage and produces a feed back
current I
fb
which is in shunt with input signal. So this is a shunt-shunt feedback
configuration.
From the circuit, we can see the that diode D
2
must be in forward Bias.
For D
1
let assume it is in reverse bias.
Voltages at p and n terminal of D
1
is given by V
p
and V
n
V V <
p n
(D
1
is reverse biased)
Applying node equation

V V
1
5
1
8
p p
-
+
+
0 =
V 2
p
3 =-
V
p
. 1 5 =-
V
n
0 =
V V <
p n
(so the assumption is true and D
1
is in reverse bias) and current in D
1
I
D1
0 = mA
The small signal ac equivalent circuit of given amplifier is as following.
Here R
B
(10 k 10 k ) 5 k < W W W = =
g
m
10 ms =
g r
m
a
p
5 r
10 10
50
k
3
&
#
b W = = =
p
-
Input resistance
R
in
R r
B
< =
p
5 k 5 k < W W = 2.5 kW =
nodi a
For PMOS to be biased in non-saturation region.
V
SD
V <
SD(sat)
and
V
SD(sat)
V V
SG T
= +
V
SD(sat)
4 1 = - 4 V 4 0
SG
a = - =
"
volt
3 Volt =
So, V
SD
3 <
V V
S D
- 3 <
4 I R
D
- 3 <
1 I R <
D
I R
D
1 > , 1 I
D
= mA
R 1000 > W
SOL 7.62 Option (B is correct.
If op-amp is ideal, no current will enter in op-amp. So current i
x
is
i
x

v v
1 10
x y
6
#
=
-
...(1)
v
+
v v
x
= =
-
(ideal op-amp)

0
v v
v
100 10 10 10
x y
x
3 3
# #
-
+
-
0 =
10 v v v
x y x
- + 0 =
11v
x
v
y
= ...(2)
For equation (1) & (2)
i
x

v v
1 10
11
x x
6
#
=
-

v
10
10
x
6
=-
Input impedance of the circuit.
R
i
v
in
x
x
= 100
10
10
k
6
W =- =-
Since there exists a drain current for zero gate voltage ( ) V 0
GS
= , so it is a
depletion mode device.
I
D
increases for negative values of gate voltages so it is a p-type depletion mode
device.
Applying KVL in input loop,
( ) ( . )
4 (33 10 ) 0.7 (3.3 10 )( 1) 0
I V I
I h I
4 33 10 3 3 10 0
B BE E
B fe B
3 3
3 3
# #
# #
- - - =
- - - + =
( 1) I h I
E fe B
a = +
3.3 ( ) ( . )( ) I 33 10 3 3 10 99 1
B
3 3
# # = + + 6 @
I
B

.
.
33 10 3 3 10 100
3 3
3 3
# # #
=
+
nodi a
I
C
h I
fe B
=

[ . . ]
.
0 33 3 3 100
99 3 3
mA
#
#
=
+

. .
.
0 33 3 3
3 3
mA =
+
Let the voltages at positive and negative terminals of op-amp are v v and
+ -

respectively. Then by applying nodal equations.

R
v v
R
v v
in out
1 1
-
+
-
- -
0 =
2 v
--
v v
in out
= + ..(1)
Similarly,

R
v v
j C
v
1
0
in
w
-
+
-
+ +
c m
0 =
( ) v v v j CR
in
w - +
+ +
0 =
(1 ) v j CR w +
+
V
in
= ..(2)
By equation (1) and (2) we have

j CR
v
1
2
in
w +
v v
in out
= + v v a =
+ - "
(ideal op-amp)
v
j CR 1
2
1
in
w +
-
; E
v
out
=
v
out

( )
v
j CR
j CR
1
1
in
w
w
=
+
-
Phase shift in output is given by
q ( ) ( ) tan tan CR CR
1 1
w w = - -
- -
( ) ( ) tan tan CR CR
1 1
p w w = - -
- -
2 ( ) tan CR
1
p w = -
-
Maximum phase shift q p =
For a n-channel enhancement mode MOSFET transition point is given by,
V
( ) DS sat
V V
GS TH
= - 2 V volt
TH
a =
V
( ) DS sat
V 2
GS
= -
From the circuit,
V
DS
V
GS
=
So V
( ) DS sat
2 V V V 2
( ) DS DS DS sat
& = - = +
V
DS
V >
( ) DS sat
Therefore transistor is in saturation region and current equation is given by.
I
D
( ) K V V
GS TH
2
= -
4 ( 2) K V
GS
2
= -
V
GS
is given by
V V
GS DS
= I R 10
D D
= - 10 4 1 # = - 6 Volt =
So, 4 (6 2) K
2
= -
K
4
1
=
Now R
D
is increased to 4 kW, Let current is I
'
D
and voltages are V V
' '
DS GS
=
nodi a
Applying current equation.
I
'
D
( ) K V V
'
GS TH
2
= -
I
'
D
( 2) V
4
1 '
GS
2
= -
V V
' '
GS DS
= 10 I R
' '
D D # = - 10 4I
'
D
= -
So, 4I
'
D
(10 4 2) I
'
D
2
= - - (8 4 ) I
'
D
2
= -
16(2 ) I
'
D
2
= -
I
'
D
4(4 ' 4 ) I I
'
D D
2
= + -
4 ' I 17 16
D
2
- + 0 =
' I
D
2
2.84 mA =
Let the voltages at input terminals of op-amp are v
-
and v
+
respectively.
So, 0 v v = =
+ -
(ideal op-amp)
Applying node equation at negative terminal of op-amp,

v v
1
0
10
0
in x
-
+
-
0 = ...(1)
At node x
v v v v
10
0
10 1
0
x x out x
-
+
-
+
-
0 =
10 v v v v
x x out x
+ - + 0 =
12 v
x
v
out
=
v
x

v
12
out
=
From equation (1),
v v
1 10
in x
+ 0 =
v
in

v
120
out
=-

v
v
in
out
120 =-
In the positive half cycle (when 4 V V >
in
) diode D
2
conducts and D
1
will be off
so the equivalent circuit is,
nodi a
V
out
4 Volt = +
In the negative half cycle diode D
1
conducts and D
2
will be off so the circuit is,
Applying KVL
10I I V 4 10
in
- + - 0 =

V
20
4
in
+
I =
10 V V
in
=- (Maximum value in negative half cycle)
So, I
20
10 4
10
3
mA =
- +
=-

V V
10
in out
-
I =

V
10
10
out
- -

10
3
=-
V
out
( ) 10 3 =- -
V
out
7 =- volt
***********
Page 452 Digital Electronics Chapter 8
nodi a
CHAPTER 8
DI GI TAL ELECTRONI CS
EE SP 8.1 A cascade of three identical modulo-5 counters has an overall modulus of
(A) 5 (B) 25
(C) 125 (D) 625
EE SP 8.2 An output device is interfaced with 8-bit microprocessor 8085A. The interfacing
circuit is shown in figure
The interfacing circuit makes use of 3 Line to 8 Line decoder having 3 enables
lines E
1
, E2, E3. The address of the device is
(A) 50
H
(B) 5000
H
(C) A0
H
(D) A000
H
EE SP 8.3 Which of the following logic circuits is a realization of the function F whose
Karnaugh map is shown in figure
Chapter 8 Digital Electronics Page 453
nodi a
EE SP 8.4 Which of the following is an invalid state in an 8-4-2-1 Binary Coded Decimal
counter
(A) 1 0 0 0 (B) 1 0 0 1
(C) 0 0 1 1 (D) 1 1 0 0
EE SP 8.5 The SOP (sum of products) form of a Boolean function is , , , , 0 1 3 7 11 S ^ h, where
inputs are A, B, C , D (A is MSB, and D is LSB). The equivalent minimized
expression of the function is
(A) B C A C A B C D + + + + ^ ^ ^ ^ h h h h
(B) B C A C A C C D + + + + ^ ^ ^ ^ h h h h
(C) B C A C A C C D + + + + ^ ^ ^ ^ h h h h
(D) B C A B A B C D + + + + ^ ^ ^ ^ h h h h
EE SP 8.6 A JK flip flop can be implemented by T flip-flops. Identify the correct
implementation.
nodi a
EE SP 8.7 In an 8085 microprocessor, the following program is executed
Address location Instruction
2000H XRA A
2001H MVI B, 04H
2003H MVI A, 03H
2005H RAR
2006H DCR B
2007H JNZ 2005
200AH HLT
At the end of program, register A contains
(A) 60H (B) 30H
(C) 06H (D) 03H
YEAR 2013 EE03 ONE MAKR
EE SP 8.8 A state diagram of a logic gate which exhibits a delay in the output is shown in
the figure, where X is the dont care condition, and Q is the output representing
the state.
nodi a
The logic gate represented by the state diagram is
(A) XOR
(B) OR
(C) AND
(D) NAND
EE SP 8.9 In 8085A microprocessor, the operation performed by the instruction LHLD
2100
H
is
(A) H 21
H
! ^ h , L 00
H
! ^ h
(B) H M 2100
H
! ^ ^ h h , L M 2101
H
! ^ ^ h h
(C) H M 2101
H
! ^ ^ h h, L M 2100
H
! ^ ^ h h
(D) H 00
H
! ^ h , L 21
H
! ^ h
EE SP 8.10 Two monoshot multivibrators, one positive edge triggered M
1 ^ h and another
negative edge triggered M
2 ^ h, are connected as shown in figure
The monoshots M
1
and M
2
when triggered produce pulses of width T
1
and T
2

respectively, where T T >
1 2
. The steady state output voltage v
0
of the circuit is
nodi a
EE SP 8.11 A 3-bit gray counter is used to control the output of the multiplexer as shown
in the figure. The initial state of the counter is 000
2
. The output is pulled high.
The output of the circuit follows the sequence
(A) I
0
, 1, 1, I
1
, I
3
, 1, 1, I
2

(B) I
0
, 1, I
1
, 1, I
2
, 1, I
3
, 1
(C) 1, I
0
, 1, I
1
, I
2
, 1, I
3
, 1
(D) I
0
, I
1
, I
2
, I
3
, I
0
, I
1
, I
2
, I
3
YEAR 2013 ONE MARK
EE SP 8.12 A bulb in a staircase has two switches, one switch being at the ground floor
and the other one at the first floor. The bulb can be turned ON and also can
be turned OFF by any one of the switches irrespective of the state of the other
switch. The logic of switching of the bulb resembles
(A) and AND gate
nodi a
(B) an OR gate
(C) an XOR gate
(D) a NAND gate
YEAR 2013 TWO MARKS
EE SP 8.13 In the circuit shown below, Q
1
has negligible collector-to-emitter saturation
voltage and the diode drops negligible voltage across it under forward bias. If V
cc

is 5 V + , X and Y are digital signals with 0 V as logic 0 and V
cc
as logic 1, then
the Boolean expression for Z is
(A) XY (B) XY
(C) XY (D) XY
EE SP 8.14 The clock frequency applied to the digital circuit shown in the figure below is
1 kHz. If the initial state of the output of the flip-flop is 0, then the frequency of
the output waveform Q in kHz is
(A) 0.25
(B) 0.5
(C) 1
(D) 2
YEAR 2012 ONE MARK
EE SP 8.15 In the sum of products function ( , , ) ( , , , ), f X Y Z 2 3 4 5 =
/
the prime implicants
are
(A) , XY XY
(B) , , XY X Y Z XY Z
(C) , , XY Z XYZ XY
nodi a
(D) , , , XY Z XYZ XY Z XY Z
EE SP 8.16 The output Y of a 2-bit comparator is logic 1 whenever the 2-bit input A is
greater than the 2-bit input B. The number of combinations for which the
output is logic 1, is
(A) 4 (B) 6
(C) 8 (D) 10
EE SP 8.17 Consider the given circuit
In this circuit, the race around
(A) does not occur
(B) occur when CLK 0 =
(C) occur when 1 1 and CLK A B = = =
(D) occur when 1 0 and CLK A B = = =
YEAR 2012 TWO MARKS
EE SP 8.18 The state transition diagram for the logic circuit shown is
nodi a
YEAR 2011 ONE MARK
EE SP 8.19 The output Y of the logic circuit given below is
(A) 1 (B) 0
(C) X (D) X
YEAR 2011 TWO MARKS
EE SP 8.20 A two bit counter circuit is shown below
It the state Q Q
A B
of the counter at the clock time t
n
is 10 then the state Q Q
A B

of the counter at t 3
n
+ (after three clock cycles) will be
(A) 00 (B) 01
(C) 10 (D) 11
EE SP 8.21 A portion of the main program to call a subroutine SUB in an 8085 environment
is given below.
h
LXI D, DISP
LP : CALL SUB
LP+3
h
It is desired that control be returned to LP+DISP+3 when the RET instruction
is executed in the subroutine. The set of instructions that precede the RET
instruction in the subroutine are
(A)
POP
DAD
PUSH
D
H
D
(B)
POP
DAD
INX
INX
INX
PUSH
H
D
H
H
H
H
(C)
POP
DAD
PUSH
H
D
H
(D)
XTHL
INX
INX
INX
XTHL
D
D
D
nodi a
YEAR 2010 TWO MARKS
EE SP 8.22 The TTL circuit shown in the figure is fed with the waveform X (also shown).
All gates have equal propagation delay of 10 ns. The output Y of the circuit is
Statement For Linked Answer Questions: 23 and 24
The following Karnaugh map represents a function F .
EE SP 8.23 A minimized form of the function F is
(A) F X Y YZ = + (B) F X Y YZ = +
(C) F X Y Y Z = + (D) F X Y Y Z = +
EE SP 8.24 Which of the following circuits is a realization of the above function F ?
nodi a
EE SP 8.25 When a CALL Addr instruction is executed, the CPU carries out the following
sequential operations internally :
Note: (R) means content of register R
((R)) means content of memory location pointed to by R.
PC means Program Counter
SP means Stack Pointer
(A) (SP) incremented (B) (PC)!Addr
(PC)!Addr ((SP))!(PC)
((SP))!(PC) (SP) incremented
(C) (PC)!Addr (D) ((SP))!(PC)
(SP) incremented (SP) incremented
((SP))!(PC) (PC)!Addr
YEAR 2009 ONE MARK
EE SP 8.26 The following circuit has a source voltage
V
S

as shown in the graph. The current
through the circuit is also shown.
The element connected between a and b could be
nodi a
EE SP 8.27 The increasing order of speed of data access for the following device is
(I) Cache Memory
(II) CD-ROM
(III) Dynamic RAM
(IV) Processor Registers
(V) Magnetic Tape
(A) (V), (II), (III), (IV), (I) (B) (V), (II), (III), (I), (IV)
(C) (II), (I), (III), (IV), (V) (D) (V), (II), (I), (III), (IV)
EE SP 8.28 The complete set of only those Logic Gates designated as Universal Gates is
(A) NOT, OR and AND Gates (B) XNOR, NOR and NAND Gates
(C) NOR and NAND Gates (D) XOR, NOR and NAND Gates
YEAR 2009 TWO MARKS
EE SP 8.29 In an 8085 microprocessor, the contents of the Accumulator, after the following
instructions are executed will become
XRA A
MVI B, F0 H
SUB B
(A) 01 H (B) 0F H
(C) F0 H (D) 10 H
YEAR 2008 TWO MARKS
EE SP 8.30 A waveform generator circuit using OPAMPs is shown in the figure. It produces
a triangular wave at point P with a peak to peak voltage of 5 V for 0 V V
i
= .
If the voltage V
i
is made . 2 5 + V, the voltage waveform at point P will become
nodi a
EE SP 8.31 A 3-line to 8-line decoder, with active low outputs, is used to implement a
3-variable Boolean function as shown in the figure
The simplified form of Boolean function ( , , ) F A B C implemented in Product of
Sum form will be
(A) ( )( )( ) X Z X Y Z Y Z + + + +
(B) ( )( )( ) X Z X Y Z Y Z + + + +
(C) ( )( )( )( ) X Y Z X Y Z X Y Z X Y Z + + + + + + + +
(D) ( )( )( )( ) X Y Z X Y Z X Y Z X Y Z + + + + + + + +
EE SP 8.32 The content of some of the memory location in an 8085 accumulator based
system are given below
Address Content
g g
26FE 00
26FF 01
2700 02
2701 03
2702 04
g g
The content of stack (SP), program counter (PC) and (H,L) are 2700 H, 2100 H
and 0000 H respectively. When the following sequence of instruction are executed.
2100 H: DAD SP
nodi a
2101 H: PCHL
the content of (SP) and (PC) at the end of execution will be
(A) 2102 , 2700 PC H SP H = =
(B) 2700 , 2700 PC H SP H = =
(C) 2800 , 26 PC H SP FE H = =
(D) 2 02 , 2702 PC A H SP H = =
YEAR 2007 ONE MARK
EE SP 8.33
, , A B C and D are input, and Y is the output bit in the XOR gate circuit of the
figure below. Which of the following statements about the sum S of , , , A B C D
and Y is correct ?
(A) S is always with zero or odd
(B) S is always either zero or even
(C) 1 S = only if the sum of , , A B C and D is even
(D) 1 S = only if the sum of , , A B C and D is odd
YEAR 2007 TWO MARKS
EE SP 8.34 The switch S in the circuit of the figure is initially closed, it is opened at time
t 0 = . You may neglect the zener diode forward voltage drops. What is the
behavior of v
out
for t 0 > ?
(A) It makes a transition from 5 V - to 5 + V at 12.98 t s m =
(B) It makes a transition from 5 V - to 5 V + at 2.57 t s m =
(C) It makes a transition from 5 V + to 5 V - at 12.98 t s m =
(D) It makes a transition from 5 V + to 5 V - at 2.57 t s m =
EE SP 8.35 IC 555 in the adjacent figure is configured as an astable multi-vibrator. It is
enabled to to oscillate at t 0 = by applying a high input to pin 4. The pin
nodi a
description is : 1 and 8-supply; 2-trigger; 4-reset; 6-threshold 7-discharge. The
waveform appearing across the capacitor starting from t 0 = , as observed on a
storage CRO is
EE SP 8.36 The Octal equivalent of HEX and number AB.CD is
(A) 253.314 (B) 253.632
(C) 526.314 (D) 526.632
YEAR 2006 TWO MARKS
EE SP 8.37 A student has made a 3-bit binary down counter and connected to the R-2R
ladder type DAC, [Gain ( 1 /2 ) R kW = - ] as shown in figure to generate a staircase
waveform. The output achieved is different as shown in figure. What could be the
possible cause of this error ?
nodi a
(A) The resistance values are incorrect option.
(B) The counter is not working properly
(C) The connection from the counter of DAC is not proper
(D) The R and 2R resistance are interchanged
EE SP 8.38 A 4 1 # MUX is used to implement a 3-input Boolean function as shown in
figure. The Boolean function ( , , ) F A B C implemented is
(A) ( , , ) ( , , , ) F A B C 1 2 4 6 S =
(B) ( , , ) ( , , ) F A B C 1 2 6 S =
(C) ( , , ) ( , , , ) F A B C 2 4 5 6 S =
(D) ( , , ) ( , , ) F A B C 1 5 6 S =
EE SP 8.39 A software delay subroutine is written as given below :
DELAY : MVI H, 255D
MVI L, 255D
LOOP : DCR L
JNZ LOOP
DCR H
JNZ LOOP
How many times DCR L instruction will be executed ?
(A) 255 (B) 510
(C) 65025 (D) 65279
EE SP 8.40 In an 8085 A microprocessor based system, it is desired to increment the contents
of memory location whose address is available in (D,E) register pair and store
the result in same location. The sequence of instruction is
(A) XCHG (B) XCHG
INR M INX H
(C) INX D (D) INR M
XCHG XCHG
nodi a
YEAR 2005 ONE MARK
EE SP 8.41 The 8085 assembly language instruction that stores the content of H and L
register into the memory locations 2050
H
and 2051
H
, respectively is
(A) SPHL 2050
H
(B) SPHL 2051
H
(C) SHLD 2050
H
(D) STAX 2050
H
EE SP 8.42 The digital circuit shown in the figure works as
(A) JK flip-flop (B) Clocked RS flip-flop
(C) T flip-flop (D) Ring counter
YEAR 2005 TWO MARKS
EE SP 8.43 Select the circuit which will produce the given output Q for the input signals X
1

and X
2
given in the figure
EE SP 8.44 If X
1
and X
2
are the inputs to the circuit shown in the figure, the output Q is
nodi a
(A) X X
1 2
+ (B) X X
1 2
:
(C) X X
1 2
: (D) X X
1 2
:
EE SP 8.45 In the figure, as long as X 1
1
= and X 1
2
= , the output Q remains
(A) at 1 (B) at 0
(C) at its initial value (D) unstable
YEAR 2004 ONE MARK
EE SP 8.46 The digital circuit using two inverters shown in figure will act as
(A) a bistable multi-vibrator (B) an astable multi-vibrator
(C) a monostable multi-vibrator (D) an oscillator
EE SP 8.47 The voltage comparator shown in figure can be used in the analog-to-digital
conversion as
(A) a 1-bit quantizer (B) a 2-bit quantizer
(C) a 4-bit quantizer (D) a 8-bit quantizer
YEAR 2004 TWO MARKS
EE SP 8.48 The simplified form of the Boolean expression ( )( ) Y A BC D A D B C $ $ $ = + +
can be written as
nodi a
(A) A D B C D $ $ $ +
(B) AD B C D $ $ +
(C) ( )( ) A D B C D $ + +
(D) A D BC D $ $ +
EE SP 8.49 If the following program is executed in a microprocessor, the number of instruction
cycle it will take from START to HALT is
START MVI A, 14H ; Move 14 H to register A
SHIFT RLC ; Rotate left without carry
JNZ SHIFT ; Jump on non-zero to SHIFT
HALT
(A) 4 (B) 8
(C) 13 (D) 16
EE SP 8.50 The digital circuit shown in figure generates a modified clock pulse at the output.
Choose the correct output waveform from the options given below.
EE SP 8.51 A digit circuit which compares two numbers A A A A
3 2 1 0
and B B B B
3 2 1 0
is shown
in figure. To get output Y 0 = , choose one pair of correct input numbers.
nodi a
(A) 1010, 1010 (B) 0101, 0101
(C) 0010, 0010 (D) 1010, 1011
EE SP 8.52 In the Schmitt trigger circuit shown in figure, if 0.1 V V
( ) CE sat
= , the output logic
low level ( ) V
OL
is
(A) 1.25 V (B) 1.35 V
(C) 2.50 V (D) 5.00 V
YEAR 2003 ONE MARK
EE SP 8.53 Figure shows a 4 to 1 MUX to be used to implement the sum S of a 1-bit full
adder with input bits P and Q and the carry input C
in
. Which of the following
combinations of inputs to , , I I I
0 1 2
and I
3
of the MUX will realize the sum S ?
(A) ; I I C I I C
in in 0 1 2 3
= = = =
(B) ; I I C I I C in
in 0 1 2 3
= = = =
(C) ; I I C I I C
in in 0 3 1 2
= = = =
(D) ; I I C I I C in
in 0 3 1 2
= = = =
EE SP 8.54 When a program is being executed in an 8085 microprocessor, its Program
nodi a
Counter contains
(A) the number of instructions in the current program that have already been
executed
(B) the total number of instructions in the program being executed.
(C) the memory address of the instruction that is being currently executed
(D) the memory address of the instruction that is to be executed next
YEAR 2003 TWO MARKS
EE SP 8.55 The circuit of figure shows a 555 Timer IC connected as an astable multi-vibrator.
The value of the capacitor C is 10 nF. The values of the resistors R
A
and R
B
for a
frequency of 10 kHz and a duty cycle of 0.75 for the output voltage waveform are
(A) 3.62 , 3.62 R R k k
A B
W W = =
(B) 3.62 , 7.25 R R k k
A B
W W = =
(C) 7.25 , 3.62 R R k k
A B
W W = =
(D) 7.25 , 7.25 R R k k
A B
W W = =
EE SP 8.56 The boolean expression X Y Z XY Z XYZ XY Z XYZ + + + + can be simplified
to
(A) XZ XZ YZ + + (B) XY Y Z YZ + +
(C) XY YZ XZ + + (D) XY YZ XZ + +
EE SP 8.57 The shift register shown in figure is initially loaded with the bit pattern 1010.
Subsequently the shift register is clocked, and with each clock pulse the pattern
gets shifted by one bit position to the right. With each shift, the bit at the serial
input is pushed to the left most position (msb). After how many clock pulses will
the content of the shift register become 1010 again ?
(A) 3 (B) 7
(C) 11 (D) 15
nodi a
EE SP 8.58 An X-Y flip-flop, whose Characteristic Table is given below is to be implemented
using a J-K flip flop
(A) , J X K Y = = (B) , J X K Y = =
(C) , J Y K X = = (D) , J Y K X = =
EE SP 8.59 A memory system has a total of 8 memory chips each with 12 address lines and
4 data lines, The total size of the memory system is
(A) 16 kbytes (B) 32 kbytes
(C) 48 kbytes (D) 64 kbytes
EE SP 8.60 The following program is written for an 8085 microprocessor to add two bytes
located at memory addresses 1FFE and 1FFF
LXI H, 1FFE
MOV B, M
INR L
MOV A, M
ADD B
INR L
MOV M, A
XOR A
On completion of the execution of the program, the result of addition is found
(A) in the register A
(B) at the memory address 1000
(C) at the memory address 1F00
(D) at the memory address 2000
************
nodi a
SOLUTI ONS
The cascaded connection of three identical modulo-5 counters is shown below.
Since, overall modulus of cascade of n modulus-5 counters is given by
Overall modulas .....n 5 5
# #
= times
Hence, for the given system, we obtain
Overall modulas 5 5 5
# #
= (n 3 = )
125 =
Given the interfacing circuit,
As the output port is at 2 010 ^ h. Hence, the input to the interfacing circuit is
I I I
2 1 0
= 010
or A A A
15 14 13
= 010
Now, for E
1
to be enable, we have
or A A
12 11
= 10
Therefore, we have the value at address lines as

A A A A A
0 1 0 1 0
15 14 13 12 11
By default at starting the other address lines ..... A A A
10 9 0
should be zero. Thus,
we have the overall port address as

A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A
0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
which is equivalent to H 5000
nodi a
Using minimization technique, we redraw the given Karnaugh map as
For the given Karnaugh map, the output function is
Y C A CB = +
This function is realized by the logic circuit shown below.
8-4-2-1 Binary coded decimal counter valid as long as the value is less than 9 or
equal to 9.
(A) 1000 8 9 # =
(B) 1001 9 9 # =
(C) 0011 3 9 # =
(D) 1100 12 9 > = Invalid
SOP Form, F , , , , 0 1 3 7 11 S = ^ h
POS Form, F , , , , , , , , , , 2 4 5 6 8 9 10 12 13 14 15 P = ^ h
Now we represent the POS form on the k-map
nodi a
Here we enter 0s in those cells correspond to the max terms present in the given
POS function.
So, F
min
B C A C A B C D = + + + + ^ ^ ^ ^ h h h h
SOL 8.6 Correct option is (B)
Here, T flip-flop is available and we want to convert it into J -K flip-flop. Hence
J and K are the external input and T is the actual input to the existing flip-flop.
So, we have to find expression of T in terms of J , K and Q
n
.
Step 1: Construct the present-state-and-next-state table of a J -K flip-flop as
shown in Table 7.12.21.
Step 2: We write the values of input T that is required to change the state of
the flip-flop from Q
n
to Q
n 1 +
. The complete conversion table is as shown in Table
7.12.22.
7.12.22: Conversion Table
External Inputs Present State Next State Flip-flop Input
J K Q
n
Q
n 1 +
T
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 1 1 0
0 1 0 0 0
0 1 1 0 1
1 0 0 1 1
1 0 1 1 0
1 1 0 1 1
1 1 1 0 1
Step 3: Draw K-map for T
Writing expression of T in POS form
nodi a
T J K
n
n q q = + + ^ ^ h h
Thus the logic diagram showing the conversion of T flip-flop to J -K flip-flop is
show below.
XRA A " A H 00 ! Ex-OR (operation with accumulate)
2001H MVI B, 04H B H 04 ! (04H started in B)
2003H MVI A, 03H A H 03 ! (03H started in A)
2005H RAR rotate accumulater right with
carry
2006H DCR B B H 03 ! (B decremented by one)
2007H JNZ 2005 Jump to 2005H till B not comes equal to zero
So
B C A
03H 1 01H
02H 1 80H
01H 0 COH
00H 0 60H
We have the state diagram of a logic gate,
For the state diagram, we form the truth table (irrespective of the current state)
as
A B X
0 0 1
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 0
Thus, from the truth table, it is clear that the logic gate is NAND gate
nodi a
For the 8085A microprocessor, given instruction is
LHLD 2100
H
This operation loads registers register L and H with the content in memory at
locations 2100
H
and 2101
H
respectively, i.e.
H ^ h M 2101
H
! ^ h and L M 2100
H
! ^ ^ h h
We have the multivibrators circuit as shown below
When monoshot multivibrator M
1
is triggered, it produces a pulse of T
1
duration.
Similarly, when monoshot multivibrator M
2
is triggered, it produces a pulse of
T
2
duration
Let, the output Q
2
is initially high.
So, the output v
o
will be high for time period T
2
.
For this period, Q 0
2
=
So, the output of AND gate is low. Since, M
1
is positive triggered. So, M
1
will be
OFF for duration T
2
.
After T
2
time,
Q
2
0 =
nodi a
and Q
2
1 =
So, the output of AND gate is 1; i.e. M
1
is triggered. Hence, output Q
1
is high
for duration T
1
. Since, M
2
is negative edge triggered, So M
2
will be off for the
duration T
1
and hence, output v
o
will be as
After T
1
time, the output Q
1
becomes low, and the M
2
gets ON (due to negative
edge triggering). Hence, the output v
o
again goes high for duration T
2
. Thus, the
complete output waveform is
We have the given logic circuit
Initial state of gray counter is 000
2
^ h . So, we have the outputs
A 0
0
= and A 0
1
= and A 0
2
=
For the enable input to multiplexer, we have
If E 0 = , then it will select any one of I
0
, I
1
, I
2
, I
3
.
If E 1 = , then it will be in high impedance state.
So, we get the output of multiplexer for the different inputs (output of 3-bit gray
counter) as
Initial counter output
000 I
0
001 1 (High impedance state)
010 I
1
110 I
3
nodi a
100 I
2
Let A denotes the position of switch at ground floor and B denotes the position
of switch at upper floor. The switch can be either in up position or down position.
Following are the truth table given for different combinations of A and B
A B Y(Bulb)
up(1) up(1) OFF(0)
Down(0) Down(0) OFF(0)
up(1) Down(0) ON(1)
Down(0) up(1) ON(1)
When the switches A and B are both up or both down, output will be zero (i.e.
Bulb will be OFF). Any of the switch changes its position leads to the ON state
of bulb. Hence, from the truth table, we get
Y A B 5 =
i.e., the XOR gate.
For the given circuit, we can make the truth table as below

X Y Z
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
Logic 0 means voltage is 0 volt v= and logic 1 means voltage is 5 volt
For x 0 = , y 0 = , Transistor is at cut off mode and diode is forward biased. Since,
there is no drop across forward biased diode.
So, Z Y 0 = =
For x 0 = , y 1 = , Again Transistor is in cutoff mode, and diode is forward biased.
with no current flowing through resistor.
So, Z Y 1 = =
For x 1 = , y 0 = , Transistor is in saturation mode and so, z directly connected
to ground irrespective of any value of Y .
i.e., Z 0 = (ground)
Similarly for X Y 1 = =
Z 0 = (ground)
Hence, from the obtained truth table, we get
Z X Y =
From the given logic diagram, we obtain
X Q Q Q Q 5 $ 5 =^ ^ h h 0 1 = =
nodi a
So, the input is always 1 at T , since, clock is ve - edge trigged therefore, at
the negative edge Q changes its state as shown in waveform below
Hence, as obtained from the waveform, time period of Q is double to that of
CLK I/p and so, frequency is
2
1
of clock frequency
Thus, f
Q
0.5 kHz
F
2 2
1
CLK
= = =
Prime implicants are the terms that we get by solving K-map
F XY XY
prime implicants
= +
1 2 3 44 44
Y 1 = , when A B >
A , a a B bb
1 0 1 0
= =
a
1
a
0
b
1
b
0
Y
0 1 0 0 1
1 0 0 0 1
1 0 0 1 1
1 1 0 0 1
1 1 0 1 1
1 1 1 0 1
Total combination 6 =
nodi a
The given circuit is
Condition for the race-around
It occurs when the output of the circuit ( , ) Y Y
1 2
oscillates between 0 and 1
checking it from the options.
1. Option (A): When CLK 0 =
Output of the NAND gate will be 0 A B 1
1 1
= = = . Due to these input to the
next NAND gate, Y Y Y 1
2 1 1
: = = and 1 Y Y Y
2 1 2
: = = .
If Y 0
1
= , Y Y 1
2 1
= = and it will remain the same and doesnt oscillate.
If Y 0
2
= , Y Y 1
1 2
= = and it will also remain the same for the clock period.
So, it wont oscillate for CLK 0 = .
So, here race around doesnt occur for the condition CLK 0 = .
2. Option (C): When , 1 CLK A B 1 = = =
A B
1 1
= 0 = and so Y Y 1
1 2
= =
And it will remain same for the clock period. So race around doesnt occur for
the condition.
3. Option (D): When , 0 CLK A B 1 = = =
So, A B
1 1
= 1 =
And again as described for Option (B) race around doesnt occur for the
condition.
So, Option (A) will be correct.
Let Q
n 1 +
is next state and Q
n
is the present state. From the given below figure.
D Y AX AX
0 1
= = +
Q
n 1 +
D AX AX
0 1
= = +
Q
n 1 +
A Q AQ
n n
= + , X Q X Q
0 1
= =
If , A 0 = Q
n 1 +
Q
n
= (toggle of previous state)
If , A 1 = Q
n 1 +
Q
n
=
So state diagram is
nodi a
Y X X 5 = X X XX = +
XX X X = + X X 1 = + =
The characteristics equation of the JK flip-flop is
Q
n 1 +
J Q KQ
n n
= + Q
n 1 +
is the next state
From figure it is clear that J ; Q K Q
B B
= =
The output of JK flip flop Q
( ) A n 1 +
Q Q Q Q
B A B A
= + ( ) Q Q Q
B A A
= + Q
B
=
Output of T flip-flop Q
( ) n B 1 +
Q
A
=
Clock pulse Q
A
Q
B
Q
( ) A n 1 +
Q
( ) B n 1 +
Initially(t
n
) 1 0 1 0
t 1
n
+ 1 0 1 0
t 2
n
+ 1 0 1 0
t 3
n
+ 1 0 1 0
LXI D, DISP
LP : CALL SUB
LP + 3
When CALL SUB is executed LP+3 value is pushed(inserted) in the stack.
POP H HL LP 3 & = +
DAD D HL HL DE & = +
LP DE 3 = + +
PUSH H & The last two value of the stack will be HL value i.e, LP DI SP 3 + +
The circuit is
Output Y is written as Y X B 5 =
Since each gate has a propagation delay of 10 ns.
nodi a
Function F can be minimized by grouping of all 1s in K-map as following.
F X Y YZ = +
Since F X Y YZ = +
In option (D)
CALL, Address performs two operations
(1) PUSH PC & Save the contents of PC (Program Counter) into stack.
SP 2 SP = - (decrement)
(( )) SP ( ) PC !
(2) Addr stored in PC.
( ) PC Addr !
Figure shows current characteristic of diode during switching.
The increasing order of speed is as following
nodi a
Magnetic tape> CD-ROM> Dynamic RAM>Cache Memory>Processor register
NOR and NAND gates considered as universal gates.
For the given instruction set,
XRA A& XOR A with A & A = 0
MVI B, F0 H&B F0 H =
SUB B&A A B = -
A 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 =
B 11 1 0 0 0 0 1 =
2s complement of ( ) B - 0 0 01 0 0 0 0 =
( ) A B A B + - = - 0 0 01 0 0 0 0 = 10 H =
SOL 8.30 Correct option is ()
In SOP form, F is written as
F (1, 3, 5, 6) m S = X Y Z X YZ XY Z XYZ = + + +
Solving from K- map
F XZ Y Z XYZ = + +
In POS form F ( )( )( ) Y Z X Z X Y Z = + + + +
Since all outputs are active low so each input in above expression is complemented
F ( )( )( ) Y Z X Z X Y Z = + + + +
Given that SP 2700 H =
PC 2100 H =
HL 0000 H =
Executing given instruction set in following steps,
DAD SP & Add register pair (SP) to HL register
HL HL SP = +
HL 0000 H 2700 H = +
HL 2700 H =
PCHL & Load program counter with HL contents
PC = HL = 2700 H
So after execution contents are,
nodi a
PC = 2700 H, HL = 2700 H
In the circuit output Y is given as
Y [ ] [ ] A B C D 5 5 5 =
Output Y will be 1 if no. of 1s in the input is odd.
In the circuit the capacitor starts charging from 0 V (as switch was initially
closed) towards a steady state value of 20 V.
for t 0 < (initial) for t "3 (steady state)

So at any time t, voltage across capacitor (i.e. at inverting terminal of op-amp)
is given by
( ) v t
c
( ) [ (0) ( )] v v v e
c c c
RC
t
3 3 = + -
-
( ) v t
c
( ) e 20 1
RC
t
= -
-
Voltage at positive terminal of op-amp

v v v
10 100
0
out
-
+
-
+ +
0 =
v
+
v
11
10
out
=
Due to zener diodes, 5 5 v
out
# # - +
So, v
+
(5)
11
10
= V
Transistor form 5 - V to 5 + V occurs when capacitor charges upto v
+
.
So ( ) e 20 1
/ t RC
-
-

11
10 5 #
=
e 1
/ t RC
-
-

22
5
=

22
17
e
/ t RC
=
-
ln t RC
17
22
=
` j
. . 1 10 01 10 0 257
3 6
# # # # =
-
2.57 sec m =
Voltage waveforms in the circuit is shown below
nodi a
In a 555 astable multi vibrator circuit, charging of capacitor occurs through
resistor ( ) R R
A B
+ and discharging through resistor R
B
only. Time for charging
and discharging is given as.
T
C
. ( ) R R C 0 693
A B
= + . R C 0 693
B
=
But in the given circuit the diode will go in the forward bias during charging,
so the capacitor will charge through resistor R
A
only and discharge through R
B

only.
a R
A
R
B
=
So T
C
T
D
=
First convert the given number from hexadecimal to its binary equivalent, then
binary to octal.
Hexadecimal no. AB. CD
Binary equivalent
C A B D
1 010 1 011 11 0 0 11 01 $
A C BBB S S S
To convert in octal group three binary digits together as shown

5 2 3 6 3 2
01 0 1 01 011 11 0 011 01 0 $
S S S S S S
So, ( . ) AB CD
H
( . ) 253 632
8
=
SOL 8.37 Correct option is ()
Function F can be obtain as,
F I S S I S S I S S I S S
0 1 0 1 1 0 2 1 0 3 1 0
= + + +
1 0 AB C A B C BC BC $ $ = + + +
AB C A BC BC = + +
( ) AB C A BC BC A A = + + +
AB C A BC ABC A BC = + + +
( , , , ) 1 2 4 6 S =
MVI H and MVI L stores the value 255 in H and L registers. DCR L decrements
L by 1 and JNZ checks whether the value of L is zero or not. So DCR L executed
255 times till value of L becomes 0.
nodi a
Then DCR H will be executed and it goes to Loop again, since L is of 8 bit so
no more decrement possible and it terminates.
XCHG & Exchange the contain of DE register pair with HL pair So now addresses
of memory locations are stored in HL pair.
INR M & Increment the contents of memory whose address is stored in HL pair.
SHLD transfers contain of HL pair to memory location.
SHLD 2050
L M[2050H]
H M[2051H]
& "
"
Let the present state is Q(t), so input to D-flip flop is given by,
D ( ) Q t X 5 =
Next state can be obtained as,
( ) Q t 1 + D =
( ) Q t X 5 =
( ) ( ) Q t X Q t X = +
( ) Q t = , if 1 X =
and ( ) Q t 1 + ( ) Q t = , if 0 X =
So the circuit behaves as a T flip flop.
From the given input output waveforms truth table for the circuit is drawn as
X
1
X
2
Q
1 0 1
0 0 1
0 1 0
In option (A), for 1, 0 X Q
1
= = so it is eliminated.
In option (C), for 0, 0 X Q
1
= = (always), so it is also eliminated.
In option (D), for 0, 1 X Q
1
= = , which does not match the truth table.
Only option (B) satisfies the truth table.
In the given circuit NMOS Q
1
and Q
3
makes an inverter circuit. Q
4
and Q
5
are
in parallel works as an OR circuit and Q
2
is an output inverter.
So output is
Q X X
1 2
= + . X X
1 2
=
Let ( ) Q t is the present state then from the circuit,
nodi a
So, the next state is given by
( ) Q t 1 + ( ) Q t = (unstable)
In the given circuit output is stable for both 1 or 0. So it is a bistable multi-
vibrator.
Since there are two levels ( ) V or V
CC CC
+ - of output in the given comparator
circuit.
For an n-bit Quantizer
2
n
No. of levels =
2
n
2 =
n 1 =
Given Boolean expression,
Y ( )( ) A BC D A D B C $ $ $ = + +
( ) ( ) ( ) A BCD ABC B C AD B CD $ $ $ = + + +
A BCD AD B C D = + +
( 1) AD BC B CD = + +
AD B C D = +
The program is executed in following steps.
START MVI A, 14H " one instruction cycle.
RLC & rotate accumulator left without carry
RLC is executed 6 times till value of accumulator becomes zero.
JNZ, JNZ checks whether accumulator value is zero or not, it is executed 5 times.
HALT " 1-instruction cycle.
nodi a
So total no. of instruction cycles are
n 1 6 5 1 = + + +
13 =
In the given circuit, waveforms are given as,
In the given circuit, output is given as.
Y ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) A B A B A B A B
0 0 1 1 2 2 3 3
5 9 5 9 5 9 5 =
For option (A)
Y (1 1) (0 0) (1 1) (0 0) 5 9 5 9 5 9 5 =
0 0 0 0 9 9 9 =
1 =
nodi a
For option (B)
Y ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 5 9 5 9 5 9 5 =
0 0 0 0 9 9 9 =
1 =
For option (C)
Y ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 5 9 5 9 5 9 5 =
0 0 0 0 9 9 9 =
1 =
For option (D)
Y ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 5 9 5 9 5 9 5 =
0 0 0 1 9 9 9 =
0 =
In the given circuit 0 V
i
= V
So, transistor Q
1
is in cut-off region and Q
2
is in saturation.
5 1.25 I R V
C C CE(sat)
- - - 0 =
. . I R 5 0 1 1 25
C C
- - - 0 =
I R 5
C C
- . 1 35 =
V
0
. 1 35 = V I R 5
C 0
= -
In given circuit MUX implements a 1-bit full adder, so output of MUX is given
by.
F Sum A Q C
in
5 5 = =
Truth table can be obtain as.
P Q
C
in Sum
0 0 0 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 1
nodi a
0 1 1 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 1 0 0
1 1 1 1
Sum P Q C PQC P Q C P QC
in in in in
= + + +
Output of MUX can be written as
F P Q I PQ I PQ I PQ I
0 1 2 3
$ $ $ $ = + + +
Inputs are, I
0
, , , C I C I C I C
in in in in 1 2 3
= = = =
Program counter contains address of the instruction that is to be executed next.
In the circuit, the capacitor charges through resistor ( ) R R
A B
+ and discharges
through R
B
. Charging and discharging time is given as.
T
C
0.693( ) R R C
A B
= +
T
D
0.693 R C
B
=
Frequency
. ( )
f
T T T R R C
1 1
0 693 2
1
D C A B
= =
+
=
+

. ( ) R R 0 693 2 10 10
1
A B
9
# # +
-
10 10
3
# =
. 14 4 10
3
# R R 2
A B
= + ...(1)
duty cycle
T
T
C
= . 0 75 =

. ( )
. ( )
R R C
R R C
0 693 2
0 693
A B
A B
+
+

4
3
=
R R 4 4
A B
+ R R 3 6
A B
= +
R
A
R 2
B
= ...(2)
From (1) and (2) R 2
A
. 14 4 10
3
# =
R
A
7.21 kW =
and R
B
3.60 kW =
Given boolean expression can be written as,
F XYZ X Y Z XY Z XYZ XYZ = + + + +
( ) ( ) X YZ Y Z X X XY Z Z = + + + +
XYZ Y Z XY = + +
( ) Y Z Y X X Z = + + ( )( ) A BC A B A C a + = + +
( )( ) Y Z Y X X X Z = + + +
( ) Y Z Y X Z = + +
Y Z YX YZ = + +
nodi a
X = X X
1 0
5 , Y X
2
=
Serial Input [ ] Z X Y X X X
1 0 2
5 5 5 = =
Truth table for the circuit can be obtain as.
Clock pulse Serial Input Shift register
Initially 1 1010
1 0 1101
2 0 0110
3 0 0011
4 1 0001
5 0 1000
6 1 0100
7 1 1010
So after 7 clock pulses contents of the shift register is 1010 again.
Characteristic table of the X-Y flip flop is obtained as.
X Y Q
n
Q
n+1
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 0
Solving from k-map
nodi a
Characteristic equation of X-Y flip flop is
Q
n 1 +
Y Q XQ
n n
= +
Characteristic equation of a J-K flip-flop is given by
Q
n 1 +
KQ J Q
n n
= +
by comparing above two characteristic equations
J Y = , K X =
Total size of the memory system is given by.
( ) 2 4 8
12
# # = bits
2 8
14
# = bits 2
14
= Bytes 16 K = bytes
Executing all the instructions one by one.
LXI H, 1FFE ( ( H 1F) , L FE)
H H
& = =
MOV B, M B & Memory[HL] Memory[1FFE] = =
INR L L & ( ( L 1) FF)
H H
= + =
MOV A, M A & Memory[HL] Memory[1FFF] = =
ADD B A & A B = +
INR L L & ( ( ( L 1) FF) 1) 00
H H H
= + = + =
MOV M, A Memory[HL] & A =
Memory[1F00] A =
XOR A A & A XOR A = 0 =
So the result of addition is stored at memory address 1F00.
***********
Page 494 Power Electronics Chapter 9
nodi a
CHAPTER 9
POWER ELECTRONI CS
EE SP 9.1 The figure shows the circuit of a rectifier fed from a 230 V (rms), 50 Hz sinusoidal
voltage source. If we want to replace the current source with a resistor so that
the rms value of the current supplied by the voltage source remains unchanged,
the value of the resistance (in ohms) is _____.
(Assume diodes to be ideal.)
EE SP 9.2 Figure shows four electronic switches (i), (ii), (iii) and (iv). Which of the switches
can block voltages of either polarity (applied between terminals a and b) when
the active device is in the OFF state ?
(A) (i), (ii) and (iii) (B) (ii), (iii) and (iv)
(C) (ii) and (iii) (D) (i) and (iv)
EE SP 9.3 The figure shows the circuit diagram of a rectifier. The load consists of a resistance
10 W and an inductance 0.05 H connected in series. Assuming ideal thyristor and
ideal diode, the thyristor firing angle (in degree) needed to obtain an average
load voltage of 70 V is ____.
Chapter 9 Power Electronics Page 495
nodi a
EE SP 9.4 Figure (i) shows the circuit diagram of a chopper. The switch S in the circuit
in figure (i) is switched such that the voltage v
D
across the diode has the wave
shape as shown in figure (ii). The capacitance C is large so that the voltage
across it is constant. If switch S and the diode are ideal, the peak to peak ripple
(in A) in the inductor current is ______
EE SP 9.5 The figure shows one period of the output voltage of an inverter a should be
chosen such that 60 90 < < c c a . If rms value of the fundamental component is
50 V, then a in degree is _____.
EE SP 9.6 A step-up chopper is used to feed a load at 400 V dc from a 250 V dc source.
The inductor current is continuous. If the off time of the switch is s 20 m , the
nodi a
switching frequency of the chopper in kHz is _____.
EE SP 9.7 A fully controlled converter bridge feeds a highly inductive load with ripple free
load current. The input supply (v
s
) to the bridge is a sinusoidal source. Triggering
angle of the bridge converter is 30c a = . The input power factor of the bridge is
EE SP 9.8 A single-phase SCR based ac regulator is feeding power to a load consisting
of 5 W resistance and 16 mH inductance. The input supply is 230 V, 50 Hz ac.
The maximum firing angle at which the voltage across the device becomes zero
all throughout and the rms value of current through SCR, under this operating
condition, are
(A) 30c and 46 A (B) 30c and 23 A
(C) 45c and 23 A (D) 45c and 32 A
EE SP 9.9 The SCR in the circuit shown has a latching current of 40 mA. A gate pulse of
s 50 m is applied to the SCR. The maximum value of R in W to ensure successful
firing of the SCR is ______.
EE SP 9.10 A hysteresis type TTL inverter is used to realize an oscillator in the circuit
shown in the figure.
nodi a
If the lower and upper trigger level voltages are 0.9 V and 1.7 V, the period (in
ms), for which output is LOW, is _____.
EE SP 9.11 A three-phase fully controlled bridge converter is fed through star-delta
transformer as shown in the figure.
The converter is operated at a firing angle of 30c. Assuming the load current I
0 ^ h
to be virtually constant at 1 p.u. and transformer to be an ideal one, the input
phase current waveform is
nodi a
n
EE SP 9.12 A diode circuit feeds an ideal inductor as shown in the figure. Given
sin V v t 100
s
w = ^ h , where / rad s 100 w p = , and . mH L 31 83 = . The initial value
of inductor current is zero. Switch S is closed at . ms t 2 5 = . The peak value of
inductor current i
L
(in A) in the first cycle is _____.
EE SP 9.13 A single-phase voltage source inverter shown in figure is feeding power to a load.
The triggering pulses of the devices are also shown in the figure.
If the load current is sinusoidal and is zero at 0, p , 2p ....., the node voltage V
AO

has the waveform
nodi a
YEAR 2013 TWO MARKS
EE SP 9.14 Thyristor T in the figure below is initially off and is triggered with a single
pulse of width 10 s m . It is given that H L
100
m
p
=b l and F C
100
m
p
=b l . Assuming
latching and holding currents of the thyristor are both zero and the initial charge
on C is zero, T conducts for
nodi a
(A) 10 s m (B) 50 s m
(C) 100 s m (D) 200 s m
EE SP 9.15 The separately excited dc motor in the figure below has a rated armature current
of 20 A and a rated armature voltage of 150 V. An ideal chopper switching
at 5 kHz is used to control the armature voltage. If 0.1 mH L
a
= , 1 R
a
W = ,
neglecting armature reaction, the duty ratio of the chopper to obtain 50% of the
rated torque at the rated speed and the rated field current is
(A) 0.4 (B) 0.5
(C) 0.6 (D) 0.7
In the figure shown below, the chopper feeds a resistive load from a battery
source. MOSFET Q is switched at 250 kHz, with duty ratio of 0.4. All elements
of the circuit are assumed to be ideal
EE SP 9.16 The Peak to Peak source current ripple in amps is
(A) 0.96 (B) 0.144
(C) 0.192 (D) 0.228
EE SP 9.17 The average source current in Amps in steady-state is
(A) 3/2 (B) 5/3
(C) 5/2 (D) 15/4
The Voltage Source Inverter (VSI) shown in the figure below is switched to
provide a 50 Hz, square wave ac output voltage V
o
across an RL load. Reference
polarity of V
o
and reference direction of the output current i
o
are indicated in the
figure. It is given that R 3 = ohms, 9.55 mH L = .
nodi a
EE SP 9.18 In the interval when V 0 <
0
and i 0 >
0
the pair of devices which conducts the
load current is
(A) , Q Q
1 2
(B) , Q Q
3 4
(C) , D D
1 2
(D) , D D
3 4
EE SP 9.19 Appropriate transition i.e., Zero Voltage Switching ZVS ^ h/Zero Current Switching
ZCS ^ h of the IGBTs during turn-on/turn-off is
(A) ZVS during turn off (B) ZVS during turn-on
(C) ZCS during turn off (D) ZCS during turn-on
YEAR 2012 ONE MARK
EE SP 9.20 A half-controlled single-phase bridge rectifier is supplying an R-L load. It is
operated at a firing angle a and the load current is continuous. The fraction of
cycle that the freewheeling diode conducts is
(A) / 1 2 (B) ( / ) 1 a p -
(C) /2 a p (D) / a p
EE SP 9.21 The typical ratio of latching current to holding current in a 20 A thyristor is
(A) 5.0 (B) 2.0
(C) 1.0 (D) 0.5
YEAR 2012 TWO MARKS
EE SP 9.22 In the circuit shown, an ideal switch S is operated at 100 kHz with a duty ratio
of 50%. Given that i
c
D is 1.6 A peak-to-peak and I
0
is 5 A dc, the peak current
in S, is
nodi a
(A) 6.6 A (B) 5.0 A
(C) 5.8 A (D) 4.2 A
In the 3-phase inverter circuit shown, the load is balanced and the gating scheme
is 180c conduction mode. All the switching devices are ideal.
EE SP 9.23 The rms value of load phase voltage is
(A) 106.1 V (B) 141.4 V
(C) 212.2 V (D) 282.8 V
EE SP 9.24 If the dc bus voltage 300 , V V
d
= the power consumed by 3-phase load is
(A) 1.5 kW
(B) 2.0 kW
(C) 2.5 kW
(D) 3.0 kW
YEAR 2011 ONE MARK
EE SP 9.25 A three phase current source inverter used for the speed control of an induction
motor is to be realized using MOSFET switches as shown below. Switches S
1
to
S
6
are identical switches.
The proper configuration for realizing switches S
1
to S
6
is
nodi a
EE SP 9.26 Circuit turn-off time of an SCR is defined as the time
(A) taken by the SCR turn to be off
(B) required for the SCR current to become zero
(C) for which the SCR is reverse biased by the commutation circuit
(D) for which the SCR is reverse biased to reduce its current below the holding
current
YEAR 2011 TWO MARKS
EE SP 9.27 A voltage commutated chopper circuit, operated at 500 Hz, is shown below.
If the maximum value of load current is 10 A, then the maximum current through
the main ( ) M and auxiliary ( ) A thyristors will be
(A) 12 A i
max M
= and 10 A i
max A
=
(B) 12 A i
max M
= and 2 A i
max A
=
(C) 10 A i
max M
= and 12 A i
max A
=
(D) 10 A i
max M
= and 8 A i
max A
=
nodi a
A solar energy installation utilize a three phase bridge converter to feed energy
into power system through a transformer of 400 V/400 V, as shown below.
The energy is collected in a bank of 400 V battery and is connected to converter
through a large filter choke of resistance 10 W.
EE SP 9.28 The maximum current through the battery will be
(A) 14 A (B) 40 A
(C) 80 A (D) 94 A
EE SP 9.29 The kVA rating of the input transformer is
(A) 53.2 kVA (B) 46.0 kVA
(C) 22.6 kVA (D) 7.5 kVA
YEAR 2010 ONE MARK
EE SP 9.30 The power electronic converter shown in the figure has a single-pole double-
throw switch. The pole P of the switch is connected alternately to throws A and
B. The converter shown is a
(A) step down chopper (buck converter)
(B) half-wave rectifier
(C) step-up chopper (boost converter)
(D) full-wave rectifier
EE SP 9.31 Figure shows a composite switch consisting of a power transistor (BJT) in series
with a diode. Assuming that the transistor switch and the diode are ideal, the
I -V characteristic of the composite switch is
nodi a
EE SP 9.32 The fully controlled thyristor converter in the figure is fed from a single-phase
source. When the firing angle is 0c, the dc output voltage of the converter is 300
V. What will be the output voltage for a firing angle of 60c, assuming continuous
conduction
(A) 150 V
(B) 210 V
(C) 300 V
(D) 100p V
YEAR 2009 ONE MARK
EE SP 9.33 An SCR is considered to be a semi-controlled device because
(A) It can be turned OFF but not ON with a gate pulse.
(B) It conducts only during one half-cycle of an alternating current wave.
(C) It can be turned ON but not OFF with a gate pulse.
(D) It can be turned ON only during one half-cycle of an alternating voltage
wave.
YEAR 2009 TWO MARKS
EE SP 9.34 The circuit shows an ideal diode connected to a pure inductor and is connected
to a purely sinusoidal 50 Hz voltage source. Under ideal conditions the current
waveform through the inductor will look like.
nodi a
EE SP 9.35 The Current Source Inverter shown in figure is operated by alternately turning on
thyristor pairs (T, T )
1 2
and (T , T )
3 4
. If the load is purely resistive, the theoretical
maximum output frequency obtainable will be
(A) 125 kHz (B) 250 kHz
(C) 500 kHz (D) 50 kHz
EE SP 9.36 In the chopper circuit shown, the main thyristor (T )
M
is operated at a duty ratio
of 0.8 which is much larger the commutation interval. If the maximum allowable
reapplied / dv dt on T
M
is 50 V/ s m , what should be the theoretical minimum value
of C
1
? Assume current ripple through L
0
to be negligible.
(A) 0.2 F m (B) 0.02 F m
nodi a
(C) 2 F m (D) 20 F m
EE SP 9.37 Match the switch arrangements on the top row to the steady-state
V -I characteristics on the lower row. The steady state operating points are
shown by large black dots.

(A) P-I, Q-II, R-III, S-IV (B) P-II, Q-IV, R-I, S-III
(C) P-IV, Q-III, R-I, S-II (D) P-IV, Q-III, R-II, S-I
YEAR 2008 ONE MARK
EE SP 9.38 In the single phase voltage controller circuit shown in the figure, for what range
of triggering angle ( ) a , the input voltage ( ) V
0
is not controllable ?
(A) 0 45 < < c c a (B) 45 135 < < c c a
(C) 90 180 < < c c a (D) 135 180 < < c c a
EE SP 9.39 A 3-phase voltage source inverter is operated in 180c conduction mode. Which
one of the following statements is true ?
(A) Both pole-voltage and line-voltage will have 3
rd
harmonic components
(B) Pole-voltage will have 3
rd
harmonic component but line-voltage will be free
from 3
rd
harmonic
(C) Line-voltage will have 3
rd
harmonic component but pole-voltage will be free
from 3
rd
harmonic
(D) Both pole-voltage and line-voltage will be free from 3
rd
harmonic
components
nodi a
YEAR 2008 TWO MARKS
EE SP 9.40 The truth table of monoshot shown in the figure is given in the table below :
Two monoshots, one positive edge triggered and other negative edge triggered,
are connected shown in the figure, The pulse widths of the two monoshot outputs
Q
1
and Q
2
are T
ON1
and T
ON2
respectively.
The frequency and the duty cycle of the signal at Q
1
(A) , f
T T
D
1
5
1
ON ON 1 2
=
+
=
(B) , f
T T
D
T T
T
1
ON ON ON ON
ON
1 2 1 2
2
=
+
=
+
(C) , f
T
D
T T
T
1
ON ON ON
ON
1 1 2
1
= =
+

(D) , f
T
D
T T
T
1
ON ON ON
ON
2 1 2
1
= =
+
EE SP 9.41 A single phase fully controlled bridge converter supplies a load drawing constant
and ripple free load current, if the triggering angle is 30c, the input power factor
will be
(A) 0.65
(B) 0.78
(C) 0.85
(D) 0.866
EE SP 9.42 A single-phase half controlled converter shown in the figure feeding power to
highly inductive load. The converter is operating at a firing angle of 60c.
nodi a
If the firing pulses are suddenly removed, the steady state voltage ( ) V
0
waveform
of the converter will become
EE SP 9.43 A single phase source inverter is feeding a purely inductive load as shown in the
figure. The inverter is operated at 50 Hz in 180c square wave mode. Assume that
the load current does not have any dc component. The peak value of the inductor
current i
0
will be
(A) 6.37 A (B) 10 A
(C) 20 A (D) 40 A
EE SP 9.44 A three phase fully controlled bridge converter is feeding a load drawing a constant
and ripple free load current of 10 A at a firing angle of 30c. The approximate Total
harmonic Distortion (%THD) and the rms value of fundamental component of
input current will respectively be
(A) 31% and 6.8 A (B) 31% and 7.8 A
(C) 66% and 6.8 A (D) 66% and 7.8 A
EE SP 9.45 A single phase fully controlled converter bridge is used for electrical braking of a
separately excited dc motor. The dc motor load is represented by an equivalent
circuit as shown in the figure.
nodi a
Assume that the load inductance is sufficient to ensure continuous and ripple free
load current. The firing angle of the bridge for a load current of 10 I
0
= A will be
(A) 44c (B) 51c
(C) 129c (D) 136c
EE SP 9.46 In the circuit shown in the figure, the switch is operated at a duty cycle of 0.5.
A large capacitor is connected across the load. The inductor current is assumed
to be continuous.
The average voltage across the load and the average current through the diode
(A) 10 V, 2 A
(B) 10 V, 8 A
(C) 40 V 2 A
(D) 40 V, 8 A
YEAR 2007 ONE MARK
EE SP 9.47 A single-phase fully controlled thyristor bridge ac-dc converter is operating at a
firing angle of 25c and an overlap angle of 10c with constant dc output current of
20 A. The fundamental power factor (displacement factor) at input ac mains is
(A) 0.78 (B) 0.827
(C) 0.866 (D) 0.9
EE SP 9.48 A three-phase, fully controlled thyristor bridge converter is used
as line commutated inverter to feed 50 kW power 420 V dc to a
three-phase, 415 V(line), 50 Hz ac mains. Consider dc link current to be constant.
The rms current of the thyristor is
(A) 119.05 A (B) 79.37 A
(C) 68.73 A (D) 39.68 A
EE SP 9.49 A single phase full-wave half-controlled bridge converter feeds an inductive
load. The two SCRs in the converter are connected to a common DC bus. The
converter has to have a freewheeling diode.
nodi a
(A) because the converter inherently does not provide for free-wheeling
(B) because the converter does not provide for free-wheeling for high values of
triggering angles
(C) or else the free-wheeling action of the converter will cause shorting of the
AC supply
(D) or else if a gate pulse to one of the SCRs is missed, it will subsequently
cause a high load current in the other SCR.
EE SP 9.50 Six MOSFETs connected in a bridge configuration (having no other power
device) must be operated as a Voltage Source Inverter (VSI). This statement is
(A) True, because being majority carrier devices MOSFETs are voltage driven.
(B) True, because MOSFETs hav inherently anti-parallel diodes
(C) False, because it can be operated both as Current Source Inverter (CSI) or
a VSI
(D) False, because MOSFETs can be operated as excellent constant current
sources in the saturation region.
YEAR 2007 TWO MARKS
EE SP 9.51 A single-phase voltages source inverter is controlled in a single
pulse-width modulated mode with a pulse width of 150c in each half cycle. Total
harmonic distortion is defined as
THD 100
V
V V
rms
1
2
1
2
#
=
-
where V
1
is the rms value of the fundamental component of the output voltage.
The THD of output ac voltage waveform is
(A) 65.65% (B) 48.42%
(C) 31.83% (D) 30.49%
EE SP 9.52 A three-phase, 440 V, 50 Hz ac mains fed thyristor bridge is feeding a 440 V
dc, 15 kW, 1500 rpm separately excited dc motor with a ripple free continuos
current in the dc link under all operating conditions, Neglecting the losses, the
power factor of the ac mains at half the rated speed is
(A) 0.354 (B) 0.372
(C) 0.90 (D) 0.955
EE SP 9.53 A single-phase, 230 V, 50 Hz ac mains fed step down transformer (4:1) is supplying
power to a half-wave uncontrolled ac-dc converter used for charging a battery
(12 V dc) with the series current limiting resistor being 19.04 W. The charging
current is
(A) 2.43 A (B) 1.65 A
(C) 1.22 A (D) 1.0 A
EE SP 9.54 In the circuit of adjacent figure the diode connects the ac source to a pure
inductance L.
nodi a
The diode conducts for
(A) 90c (B) 180c
(C) 270c (D) 360c
EE SP 9.55 The circuit in the figure is a current commutated dc-dc chopper where,
Th
M
is
the main SCR and
Th
AUX
is the auxiliary SCR. The load current is constant at
10 A.
Th
M
is ON.
Th
AUX
is trigged at t 0 = .
Th
M
is turned OFF between.
(A) 0 25 t s s < # m m (B) 25 50 t s s < # m m
(C) 50 75 t s s < # m m (D) 75 100 t s s < # m m
Common Data for Question 37 and 38.
A 1:1 Pulse Transformer (PT) is used to trigger the SCR in
the adjacent figure. The SCR is rated at 1.5 kV, 250 A with
50 I 2
L
= mA, I 150
H
= mA, and I 150
max G
= mA, 1 0 I 0
min G
= mA. The SCR is
connected to an inductive load, where L 150 = mH in series with a small resistance
and the supply voltage is 200 V dc. The forward drops of all transistors/diodes
and gate-cathode junction during ON state are 1.0 V
EE SP 9.56 The resistance R should be
(A) 4.7 kW (B) 470 kW
(C) 47 W (D) 4.7 W
nodi a
EE SP 9.57 The minimum approximate volt-second rating of pulse transformer suitable for
triggering the SCR should be : (volt-second rating is the maximum of product of
the voltage and the width of the pulse that may applied)
(A) 2000 mV-s (B) 200 mV-s
(C) 20 mV-s (D) 2 mV-s
YEAR 2006 ONE MARK
EE SP 9.58 The speed of a 3-phase, 440 V, 50 Hz induction motor is to be controlled over a
wide range from zero speed to 1.5 time the rated speed using a 3-phase voltage
source inverter. It is desired to keep the flux in the machine constant in the
constant torque region by controlling the terminal voltage as the frequency
changes. The inverter output voltage vs frequency characteristic should be
EE SP 9.59 A single-phase half wave uncontrolled converter circuit is shown in figure. A
2-winding transformer is used at the input for isolation. Assuming the load
current to be constant and sin V V t
m
w = , the current waveform through diode
D
2
will be
nodi a
YEAR 2006 TWO MARKS
EE SP 9.60 A single-phase inverter is operated in PWM mode generating a
single-pulse of width d 2 in the centre of each half cycle as shown in figure. It is
found that the output voltage is free from 5
th
harmonic for pulse width 144c. What
will be percentage of 3
rd
harmonic present in the output voltage ( / ) V V
max o o 3 1
?
(A) 0.0% (B) 19.6%
(C) 31.7% (D) 53.9%
EE SP 9.61 A 3-phase fully controlled bridge converter with free wheeling diode is fed from
400 V, 50 Hz AC source and is operating at a firing angle of 60c. The load
current is assumed constant at 10 A due to high load inductance. The input
displacement factor (IDF) and the input power factor (IPF) of the converter will
be
(A) 0.867; 0.828 IDF IPF = =
(B) 0.867; 0.552 IDF IPF = =
(C) 0.5; 0.478 IDF IPF = =
(D) 0.5; 0.318 IDF IPF = =
EE SP 9.62 A voltage commutation circuit is shown in figure. If the turn-off time of the
SCR is 50 msec and a safety margin of 2 is considered, then what will be the
approximate minimum value of capacitor required for proper commutation ?
(A) 2.88 F m (B) 1.44 F m
(C) 0.91 F m (D) 0.72 F m
EE SP 9.63 A solar cell of 350 V is feeding power to an ac supply of 440 V, 50 Hz through a
3-phase fully controlled bridge converter. A large inductance is connected in the
dc circuit to maintain the dc current at 20 A. If the solar cell resistance is 0.5 W
,then each thyristor will be reverse biased for a period of
(A) 125c (B) 120c
(C) 60c (D) 55c
nodi a
EE SP 9.64 A single-phase bridge converter is used to charge a battery of 200 V having
an internal resistance of .2 0 W as shown in figure. The SCRs are triggered by
a constant dc signal. If SCR
2
gets open circuited, what will be the average
charging current ?
(A) 23.8 A (B) 15 A
(C) 11.9 A (D) 3.54 A
EE SP 9.65 An SCR having a turn ON times of 5 msec, latching current of 50 A and holding
current of 40 mA is triggered by a short duration pulse and is used in the circuit
shown in figure. The minimum pulse width required to turn the SCR ON will be
(A) 251 msec (B) 150 msec
(C) 100 msec (D) 5 msec
A voltage commutated chopper operating at 1 kHz is used to control the speed
of dc as shown in figure. The load current is assumed to be constant at 10 A
EE SP 9.66 The minimum time in msec for which the SCR M should be ON is.
(A) 280 (B) 140
(C) 70 (D) 0
EE SP 9.67 The average output voltage of the chopper will be
(A) 70 V (B) 47.5 V
(C) 35 V (D) 0 V
nodi a
YEAR 2005 ONE MARK
EE SP 9.68 The conduction loss versus device current characteristic of a power MOSFET is
best approximated by
(A) a parabola (B) a straight line
(C) a rectangular hyperbola (D) an exponentially decaying
function
EE SP 9.69 A three-phase diode bridge rectifier is fed from a 400 V RMS,
50 Hz, three-phase AC source. If the load is purely resistive, then peak
instantaneous output voltage is equal to
(A) 400 V (B) 400 2 V
(C) 400
3
2
V (D)
3
400
V
EE SP 9.70 The output voltage waveform of a three-phase square-wave inverter contains
(A) only even harmonics (B) both odd and even harmonic
(C) only odd harmonics (D) only triple harmonics
YEAR 2005 TWO MARKS
EE SP 9.71 The figure shows the voltage across a power semiconductor device and the
current through the device during a switching transitions. If the transition a
turn ON transition or a turn OFF transition ? What is the energy lost during
the transition?
(A) Turn ON, ( ) t t
VI
2
1 2
+ (B) Turn OFF, ( ) VI t t
1 2
+
(C) Turn ON, ( ) VI t t
1 2
+ (D) Turn OFF, ( ) t t
VI
2
1 2
+
EE SP 9.72 An electronics switch S is required to block voltage of either polarity
during its OFF state as shown in the figure (a). This switch is
required to conduct in only one direction its ON state as shown in the
figure (b)
nodi a
Which of the following are valid realizations of the switch S?
(A) Only P
(B) P and Q
(C) P and R
(D) R and S
EE SP 9.73 The given figure shows a step-down chopper switched at 1 kHz with a duty ratio
. D 0 5 = . The peak-peak ripple in the load current is close to
(A) 10 A (B) 0.5 A
(C) 0.125 A (D) 0.25 A
EE SP 9.74 Consider a phase-controlled converter shown in the figure. The thyristor is fired
at an angle a in every positive half cycle of the input voltage. If the peak value
of the instantaneous output voltage equals 230 V, the firing angle a is close to
(A) 45c (B) 135c
(C) 90c (D) 83.6c
EE SP 9.75 An electric motor, developing a starting torque of 15 Nm, starts
with a load torque of 7 Nm on its shaft. If the acceleration at start is
2 rad/sec
2
, the moment of inertia of the system must be (neglecting viscous and
coulomb friction)
(A) 0.25 kg-m
2
(B) 0.25 Nm
2
nodi a
(C) 4 kg-m
2
(D) 4 Nm
2
YEAR 2004 ONE MARK
EE SP 9.76 A bipolar junction transistor (BJT) is used as a power control switch by biasing
it in the cut-off region (OFF state) or in the saturation region (ON state). In the
ON state, for the BJT
(A) both the base-emitter and base-collector junctions are reverse biased
(B) the base-emitter junction is reverse biased, and the base-collector junction
is forward biased
(C) the base-emitter junction is forward biased, and the base-collector junction
is reverse biased
(D) both the base-emitter and base-collector junctions are forward biased
EE SP 9.77 The circuit in figure shows a full-wave rectifier. The input voltage is 230 V (rms)
single-phase ac. The peak reverse voltage across the diodes D
1
and D
2
is
(A) 100 2 V
(B) 100 V
(C) 50 2 V
(D) 50 V
EE SP 9.78 The triggering circuit of a thyristor is shown in figure. The thyristor requires a
gate current of 10 mA, for guaranteed turn-on. The value of R required for the
thyristor to turn on reliably under all conditions of V
b
variation is
(A) 10000 W
(B) 1600 W
(C) 1200 W
(D) 800 W
nodi a
EE SP 9.79 The circuit in figure shows a 3-phase half-wave rectifier. The source is a
symmetrical, 3-phase four-wire system. The line-to-line voltage of the source is
100 V. The supply frequency is 400 Hz. The ripple frequency at the output is
(A) 400 Hz (B) 800 Hz
(C) 1200 Hz (D) 2400 Hz
YEAR 2004 TWO MARKS
EE SP 9.80 A MOSFET rated for 15 A, carries a periodic current as shown in figure. The
ON state resistance of the MOSFET is 0.15 W. The average ON state loss in the
MOSFET is
(A) 33.8 W (B) 15.0 W
(C) 7.5 W (D) 3.8 W
EE SP 9.81 The triac circuit shown in figure controls the ac output power to the resistive
load. The peak power dissipation in the load is
(A) 3968 W (B) 5290 W
(C) 7935 W (D) 10580 W
EE SP 9.82 Figure shows a chopper operating from a 100 V dc input. The duty ratio of the
main switch S is 0.8. The load is sufficiently inductive so that the load current is
ripple free. The average current through the diode D under steady state is
nodi a
(A) 1.6 A (B) 6.4 A
(B) 8.0 A (D) 10.0 A
EE SP 9.83 Figure shows a chopper. The device
S
1
is the main switching device.
S
2
is the
auxiliary commutation device.
S
1
is rated for 400 V, 60 A.
S
2
is rated for 400 V,
30 A. The load current is 20 A. The main device operates with a duty ratio of
0.5. The peak current through
S
1
is
(A) 10 A (B) 20 A
(C) 30 A (D) 40 A
EE SP 9.84 A single-phase half-controlled rectifier is driving a separately excited dc motor.
The dc motor has a back emf constant of 0.5 V/rpm. The armature current is 5
A without any ripple. The armature resistance is 2 W. The converter is working
from a 230 V, single-phase ac source with a firing angle of 30c. Under this
operating condition, the speed of the motor will be
(A) 339 rpm (B) 359 rpm
(C) 366 rpm (D) 386 rpm
EE SP 9.85 A variable speed drive rated for 1500 rpm, 40 Nm is reversing under no load.
Figure shows the reversing torque and the speed during the transient. The
moment of inertia of the drive is
nodi a
(A) 0.048 kg-m
2

(B) 0.064 km-m
2
(C) 0.096 kg-m
2

(D) 0.128 kg-m
2
YEAR 2003 ONE MARK
EE SP 9.86 Figure shows a thyristor with the standard terminations of anode (A), cathode
(K), gate (G) and the different junctions named J1, J2 and J3. When the thyristor
is turned on and conducting
(A) J1 and J2 are forward biased and J3 is reverse biased
(B) J1 and J3 are forward biased and J2 is reverse biased
(C) J1 is forward biased and J2 and J3 are reverse biased
(D) J1, J2 and J3 are all forward biased
EE SP 9.87 Figure shows a MOSFET with an integral body diode. It is employed as a power
switching device in the ON and OFF states through appropriate control. The ON
and OFF states of the switch are given on the
V I
DS S
-
plane by
EE SP 9.88 The speed/torque regimes in a dc motor and the control methods suitable for the
nodi a
same are given respectively in List-II and List-I
List-I List-II
P. Field Control 1. Below base speed
Q. Armature Control 2. Above base speed
3. Above base torque
4. Below base torque
Codes:
(A) P-1, Q-3 (B) P-2, Q-1
(C) P-2, Q-3 (D) P-1, Q-4
EE SP 9.89 A fully controlled natural commutated 3-phase bridge rectifier is operating with
a firing angle 30c a = , The peak to peak voltage ripple expressed as a ratio of
the peak output dc voltage at the output of the converter bridge is
(A) 0.5 (B) / 3 2
(C) 1
2
3
-
c m
(D) 3 1 -
YEAR 2003 TWO MARKS
EE SP 9.90 A phase-controlled half-controlled single-phase converter is shown in figure. The
control angle 30c a =
The output dc voltage wave shape will be as shown in
nodi a
EE SP 9.91 A chopper is employed to charge a battery as shown in figure. The charging
current is 5 A. The duty ratio is 0.2. The chopper output voltage is also shown in
the figure. The peak to peak ripple current in the charging current is
(A) 0.48 A (B) 1.2 A
(C) 2.4 A (D) 1 A
EE SP 9.92 An inverter has a periodic output voltage with the output wave form as shown
in figure
When the conduction angle 120c a = , the rms fundamental component of the
output voltage is
(A) 0.78 V (B) 1.10 V
(C) 0.90 V (D) 1.27 V
EE SP 9.93 With reference to the output wave form given in above figure , the output of the
converter will be free from 5
th
harmonic when
(A) 72c a = (B) 36c a =
(C) 150c a = (D) 120c a =
EE SP 9.94 An ac induction motor is used for a speed control application. It is driven from
an inverter with a constant / V f control. The motor name-plate details are as
follows (no. of poles = 2)
: 415 : 3 : 50 : 2850 V V f N V V Hz rpm
Ph
The motor runs with the inverter output frequency set at 40 Hz, and with half
the rated slip. The running speed of the motor is
(A) 2400 rpm (B) 2280 rpm
(C) 2340 rpm (D) 2790 rpm
***********
nodi a
SOLUTI ONS
SOL 9.1 Correct answer is 23 ohm.
We have the rectifier circuit as
As the diodes are ideal, so if we are maintaining same current through resistor
then V
ab
also does not change, i.e.
V
ab
V 230 =
and I
ab
A 10 =
Hence, the required value of resistance is
R
ab

I
V
10
230
23
ab
ab
W = = =
We have to check all the given switches whether it can block voltages of either
polarity when the active device is in the OFF state.
Switch (i):
When V V >
a b
; diode will be OFF, but the transistor is ON.
When V V >
b a
; transistor is OFF, but diode will be ON.
So, the switch can not block voltages of either polarity when the active device
(diode or transistor) is in the OFF state.
Switch (ii):
nodi a
When V V >
a b
, both diode and transistor are ON.
When V V >
b a
both diode and transistor are OFF.
So, the switch can block voltages of either polarity when the active devices
(diode and transistor) are in the OFF state.
Switch (iii):
When V V >
a b
, the SCR is ON.
When V V >
b a
, the SCR is OFF.
So, the switch can block voltages of either polarity when the active device (SCR)
is in the OFF state.
Switch (iv):
When V V >
a b
, diode is OFF.
When V V >
b a
, SCR is OFF.
So, the switch can not block voltages of either polarity when the active device
(SCR or diode) is in the OFF state.
Thus, the switches (ii) and (iii) only can block voltage of either polarity, when
active device is OFF.
We have the rectifier circuit as
From the circuit, we obtain
V
o
sin V td t
2
1
m
p
w w =
a
p
^ h #
cos V t
2
1
m
T
p
w = -
a
6 @
cos V
2
1
1
m
p
a = + 6 @ ...(i)
Since, from the given problem, we have
V
o
V 70 = ; V V 325
m
=
70 . cos
2
1
32 5 1
p
a = + 6 @
or cos 1 a +
325
70 2
#
p
=
or cos 1 a + . 1 3526 =
or cos a . 0 3526 =
nodi a
Thus, a . cos 0 3526
1
=
-
^ h
. 69 35c =
We have the chopper circuit as
Since, the circuit is a buck regular. So, we have
V
o
V
s #
a = (a = duty cycle)

.
.
100
0 1
0 05
#
=
V 50 =
Therefore, peak to peak inductor ripple current is obtained as
I T
L
V t
o #
D
=

. sec
mH
m
1
50 0 05
#
=
^ h
. A 2 5 =
SOL 9.5 Correct answer is 77.15
Given the output voltage of an inverter as
Since, the output voltage is an odd function, so we compute only sine terms for
the given period
V
max
sin
T
v
t
t dt
2
o
T
0
w = ^
^
h
h #
From the output wave, we have
T 360 2 c p = =
and
o
w
T
2
2
2
1
p
p
p
= = =
So, we get the maximum value of fundamental component as
V
max
sin sin sin tdt tdt tdt
2
2
100 100 100
0
180
180
180
p
= - +
a
a
a
a
-
-
; # # #
nodi a
sin sin sin tdt tdt tdt 100 100 100
180
180
180
360
360
360
- + -
a
a
a
a
+
+
-
-
E # # #
cos cos cos cos cos cos cos
100
1 1 1
p
a a a a a a a = - - + + - + - - - - +
^ ^ ^ ^
^
h h h h
h
6 @

cos
100
4 8
p
a
=
-
6 @
cos
400
1 2
p
a = -
6 @
...(i)
Since, the rms value is
V
rms
V 50 =

V
2
max
50 =

cos
2
400
1
p
a -
^ h 50 =
or cos a
2
1
1
400
50 2
#
p
= - ; E
Thus, a . 77 15c =
As step up chopper
In step-up chopper output voltage is given by
V
o

V
1
s
a
=
-
where a is duty cycle
T
T
ON
a =
1 a -
V
V
400
250
o
s
= =
1 a - /
8
5
3 8 &a = =
So,
T
T
ON

8
3
=

T
T T
OFF
-

8
3
= (T T T
ON OFF
= + )

T
T
1
OFF
-
8
3
=

T
T
OFF

8
5
= where, s T 20
OFF
m = and
Hz
T
f
1
=
So, f 20 10
6
# #
-

8
5
=
f .
8 20 10
5
31 2 kHz
6
# #
= =
-
nodi a
For a fully controlled bridge converter input power factor is given by
Input P.F. cos
2 2
p
a =
cos
2 2
30c
p
=

2 2
2
3
#
p
=
. 0 779 -
The maximum firing angle at which the voltage across device becomes zero is the
minimum firing angle to converter. It is given by
f tan
R
L 1 w
=
-
b l
tan
5
2 50 16 10
45
1
3
# # #
c -
p
=
-
-
b l
Voltage across the device is zero is v v
o i
=
If input and output voltage are identical then V V 230
rms o
=
I
rms o

Z
V
5 2 50 16 10
230
rms o
2 3 2
# # #
p
= =
+
-
^ ^ h h

5 2
230
=
rms value of current through SCR

rms
I l A
I
2 5 2 2
230
23
rms o
#
= = =
Let us assume SCR is conducting mA I 40
L
= ^ h
i t
i ^ h
R
V
e 1
s
L
R
t
= -
-
8 B
. e 0 2 1
200 10
500
50 10
3
6
= - #
# # -
-
-
8 B
i
i
. mA 0 023 23 = =
R
s
.
17 10
100
5882 35
3
#
W = =
-
nodi a
SOL 9.10 Correct answer is 0.64 ms.
Given the oscillator circuit realiced using a hyteresis type TTL inverter as
Also, we have the upper and lower trigger level voltages as
UTL . V 1 7 =
LTL . V 0 9 =
For the capacitor, the voltage across it, is given as
( ) V t
c
( ) [ ( ) ( )] V V V e 0
/
c c c
t RC
3 3 = + -
-
For the given data, we have
( ) V 0
c
. V 1 7 =
( ) V
c
3 V 0 =
and ( ) V t
c
. 0 9 =
So, we obtain the time t after which output triggers as
0.9 [ . ] e 0 1 7 0
/ t RC
= + -
-
0.9 . e 1 7
/( . ) t 10 10 0 1 10
3 6
=
# # # -
-
t . sec 0 636 10
3
#
=
-
. ms 0 64 =
When R phase has maximum voltage at conducts and lines a and c conducts.
The current are divided into R and YB winding.

current through R
R
I R I
3
2
3
2
o o #
= =
current through B and Y
I
3
o
=
Phase an conduct from 90 to 150
nodi a
I
o

I
3
2
=
where B conducts,
current through R and Y
I
3
o
=
current through B
I
3
2
o
=
The current through D -phase winding
current through primary, I kI
p s
=
We have the diode circuit as
Given parameters for the circuit are
w / rad s 100p =
V
s
sin V t 100 w = ^ h
L . . mH H 31 83 31 83 10
3
#
= =
-
When switch is closed at . ms t 2 5 = , we have
V L
dt
dI
s
- 0 = (in positive half cycle)
or V
s
L
dt
dI
= ...(i)
For the current to be maximum, we have

dt
dI
0 =
or V
s
0 =
nodi a
So, V
s
sin t 100 0 w = =
or t w np =
or t ms
100
10
p
p
= =
Therefore, the current is obtained as

L
V dt
1
s
t
t
1
2
#
dI
I
0
=
#
or I
L
V dt
1
. ms
ms
s
2 5
10
=
#

.
sin t d t
31 83 10
1
100
. ms
ms
3
2 5
10
#
w w = +
-
^ h #

.
cos t
31 83 10
1
100
. ms
ms
t
t
3
2 5
10
#
#
w
w
= -
-
=
=
9 C

.
2
1
1
100
100
31 83 10
1
3
# #
#
p
= +
- c m
. A 17 07 =
It is given that load current is sinusoidal, so continuous conduction.
when S1 is off from 0 to q , diode parallel to 53 conducts and V
V
2
AO
DC
=-
from ( ) angle < < q p q - , S1 conducts V
V
2
AO
OC
=
Again from ( ) p q - to ( ) q , diode conducts and V
V
2
AO
DC
=-
Given,
L H
100
m
p
=
C F
100
m
p
=
When the circuit is triggered by 10 s m pulse, the thyristor is short circuited and
so, we consider
I
C
sin I t
m
w =
Therefore, voltage stored across capacitor is
V
C

C
I dt
1
C
=
#

cos V t 1
m
w = - ^ h
where w is angular frequency obtained as
w
LC
1
10
1
10
100 6
4
#
#
p = = =
p
-
^ h
So, T 200 s
f
1 2
m
w
p
= = =
As I
C
sin I t
m
w = oscillates between ve - and ve - half
cycle so, circuit is conducting for only half of cycle and thyristor is open after
half cycle.
i.e., the conduction period 100 s
T
2
m = =
nodi a
Given, the rated armature current
I
a rated ^ h
20 A =
as rated armature voltage
V
a rated ^ h
150 volt =
Also, for the armature, we have
L
a
0.1 mH = , 1 R
a
W =
and T % 50 = of T
rated
T Torque " ^ h
So, we get
I . 10 A I 0 5
rotated a
= = ^
^
h
h 6 @
N Nrated = ,
I
f
I
f rated
" = rated field current
At the rated conditions,
E V I R
rated a a
= -
^ h
150 20 130 volt 1 = - = ^ h
For given torque,
V 130 140 V E I R 10 1
a a
= + = + = ^ ^ h h
Therefore, chopper output 140 V =
or, D 200 ^ h 140 =
or, D .
200
140
0 7 = = (D " duty cycle)
Here, as the current from source of 12 V is the same as that pass through
inductor. So, the peak to peak current ripple will be equal to peak to peak
inductor current.
Now, the peak to peak inductor current can be obtained as
I
L
(Peak to Peak)
L
V
DT
s
s
=
where, V
s
" source voltage 12 volt = ,
L " inductance 100 10 H H
4
m = =
-
,
D " Duty ration . 0 4 = ,
T
S
" switching time period of MOSFET
f
1
S
=
and f
s
" switching frequency 250 kHz =
Therefore, we get
I
Peak to Peak L^ h
.
10
12
0 4
250 10
1
4 3
# #
#
=
-

0.192 A =
This is the peak to peak source current ripple.
Here, the average current through the capacitor will be zero. (since, it is a boost
converter). We consider the two cases :
Case I : When MOSFET is ON
i
c1
i
0
=- (i
0
is output current)
nodi a
(since, diode will be in cut off mode)
Case II : When MOSFET is OFF
Diode will be forward biased and so
i
c1
I i
s 0
= - (I
s
is source current)
Therefore, average current through capacitor
I
, c avg

i I
2
c c 1 2
=
+
& 0
1 DT i D T I i
2
s o s s o
=
- + - - ^ ^ ^ h h h
(D is duty ratio)
Solving the equation, we get
I
s

D
i
1
0
=
- ^ h
....(1)
Since, the output load current can be given as
i
0

/ / .
1A
R
V
R
V
20
12 0 6
s D
0
1
= = = =
-
Hence, from Eq. (1)
I
s

.
A
D
i
1 0 6
1
3
5
0
=
-
= =
We consider the following two cases :
Case I : When , Q Q
1 2
ON
In this case the ve + terminal of V
0
will be at higher voltage. i.e. V 0 >
0
and so
i 0 >
0
(i.e., it will be ve + ). Now, when the Q
1
, Q
2
goes to OFF condition we
consider the second case.
Case II : When Q
3
, Q
4
ON and Q, Q
2
OFF :
In this condition, ve - terminal of applied voltage V
0
will be at higher potential
i.e., V 0 <
0
and since, inductor opposes the change in current so, although the
polarity of voltage V
0
is inversed, current remains same in inductor i.e. I 0 >
0
.
This is the condition when conduction have been asked.
In this condition , V I 0 0 > >
0 0 ^ h since, IGBTs cant conduct reverse
currents therefore current will flow through , D D
3 4
until I
D
becomes negative.
Thus, D
3
and D
4
conducts.
When , Q Q
3 4
is switched ON, initially due to the reverse current it remain in
OFF state and current passes through diode. In this condition the voltage across
Q
3
and Q
4
are zero as diodes conduct. Hence, it shows zero voltage switching
during turn-ON
The circuit of a single-phase half controlled bridge rectifier with RL load and
free wheel diode is shown as below.
nodi a
The voltage current wave forms are shown in figure below.
We note that, for continuous load current, the flywheel diode conducts from p
to p a + in a cycle. Thus, fraction of cycle that freewheel diode conducts is / a p.
Thus fraction of cycle that freewheel diode conducts is / a p.
The latching current is higher than the holding current. Usually, latching current
is taken two to three times the holding currents.
I
S
5 0.8 5.8 A I
i
2
c
0
T
= + = + =
For a three-phase bridge inverter, rms value of output line voltage is
nodi a
V
L
V
3
2
dc
= 300
3
2
#
= 300 V V
dc
=
141.4 V =
P
R
V
3
L
2
#
=

( . )
3
20
141 4
2
#
= 3 kW -
Only option C allow bi direction power flow from source to the drive
Once the SCR start conducting by an forward current, the gate has no control on
it and the device can be brought back to the blocking state only by reducing the
forward current to a level below that of holding current. This process of turn-off
is called commutation. This time is known as the circuit turn-off time of an SCR.
Maximum current through main thyristor
( ) max I
M
I V
L
C
s 0
= +

.
10 200
1 10
0 1 10
3
6
#
#
= +
-

12 A =
Maximum current through auxiliary thyristor
( ) max I
A
10 I A
0
= =
Output voltage of 3-phase bridge converter
V
0
cos V
3 3
ph
p
a =
Maximum output
( ) V
max 0
V
3 3
ph
p
= cos 1 a =

3 3
3
400 2
#
#
p
= 540.6 V =
nodi a
Resistance of filter choke is 10 W, So
( ) V
max 0
E I R
chock
= +
. 540 6 ( ) I 400 10 = +
I 14 A -
kVArating V I 3 3 400
6
14
L L # # #
p
= =
7.5 kVA =
The figure shows a step down chopper circuit.
V
out
DV
in
=
where, 1 D D Duty cycle and < =
Given figure as
The I -V characteristic are as
Since diode connected in series so I can never be negative.
When current flows voltage across switch is zero and when current is zero than
there may be any voltage across switch.
Given fully-controlled thyristor converter, when firing angle 0 a = , dc output
voltage V
dc0
300 V =
If a 60c = , then ? V
dc
=
For fully-controlled converter
V
dc0
cos
V 2 2
dc1
p
a =
Since a 0 = , 300 V
dc0
= V
300 0 cos
V 2 2
dc1
c
p
=
V
dc1

2 2
300p
=
At a 60c = , ? V
dc2
=
V
dc2
cos
2 2
2 2
300
60
#
c
p
p
=
300 150
2
1
V
#
= =
nodi a
SCR has the property that it can be turned ON but not OFF with a gate pulse,
So SCR is being considered to be a semi-controlled device.
Current wave form for i
L
v
L

dt
Ldi
L
=
i
L
v dt
2
1
L
= #
for 0 <
t
+ w p, v
L
10sin v t
dt
di
L
in
w = = =
i
L
100 cos v dt t C
2
1
L
p = =- + #
at / t 100 2 p p = , i
L
0 = , C 0 =
i
L
cos t 100 p =-
i
( L peak)
1 Amp = for t < p w 0 v v
L in
= =
In CSI let T
3
and T
4
already conducting at t 0 =
At triggering T
1
and T
2
, T
3
and T
4
are force cumulated.
Again at t
T
2
= , T
1
and T
2
are force cumulated. This completes a cycle.
Time constant t . sec RC 4 0 5 2
#
m = = =
Frequency f 500
1
2 10
1
6
#
t
= = =
-
kHz
nodi a
duty ratio T
M
. 0 8 =
Maximum
dt
dv
on T
M
50 V/ sec m =
Minimum value of C
1
? =
Given that current ripple through L
0
is negligible.
Current through T
M
I duty ratio current
m #
= =
0.8 12.5 10 A
#
= =
a I
m
C
dt
dv
1
=
10 C
10
50
1
6
#
=
-
C
1
10 0.2
10
50
F
6
#
m = =
-
Characteristics are as
nodi a
R jXL + j 50 50 = +
` tanf
R
L
50
50
1
w
= = =
f 45c =
so, firing angle a must be higher the 45c, Thus for 0 45 < < c a , V
0
is
uncontrollable.
A 3-f voltage source inverter is operated in 180c mode in that case third
harmonics are absent in pole voltage and line voltage due to the factor ( / ) cos n 6 p
. so both are free from 3
rd
harmonic components.
In this case f
T T
1
ON ON 1 2
=
+

and, D
T T
T
ON ON
ON
1 2
2
=
+
Given 30c a = , in a 1-f fully bridge converter
we know that,
Power factor cos Distortion factor
#
a =
D.f. (Distortion factor) / 0.9 I I
s s (fundamental)
= =
power factor . cos 0 9 30
#
c =
. 0 78 =
Output of this
Here the inductor makes T
1
and T
3
in ON because current passing through T
1

and T
3
is more than the holding current.
Input is given as
nodi a
Here load current does not have any dc component
` Peak current occur at ( / ) p w
` V
s
L
dt
di
=
200 .
dt
di
0 1
#
=
Here di
2 50
1
100
1
p
p
= =
a b k l
So di
( ) max

.
200
100
1
0 1
1
# #
=
20 A =
Total rms current I
a
10 8.16
3
2
A
#
= =
Fundamental current I
a1
0.78 10 7.8 A
#
= =
THD
1
1
DF
2
= -
where
DF
.
.
0.955
I
I
0 816 10
0 78 10
a
a1
#
#
= = =
` THD
.
3 %
0 955
1
1 1
2
= - =
b l
Here for continuous conduction mode, by Kirchoffs voltage law, average load
current
V I 2 150
a
- + 0 =
I
a

V
2
150
=
+
10 I
1
` = A, So
V 130 =- V
cos
V 2
m
p
a 130 =-
nodi a
cos
2 2 230
# #
p
a 130c =-
a 129c =
In the given diagram
when switch S is open 4 20 I I V A, V
L s 0
= = =
when switch S is closed 0, 0 I V V
D 0
= =
Duty cycle . 0 5 = so average voltage is
V
1
s
d -
Average current 2
2
0 4
=
+
= amp
Average voltage
.
40
1 0 5
20
V =
-
=
Firing angle a 25c =
Overlap angle m 10c =
so, I
0
[ ( )] cos cos
Ls
V
m
w
a a m = - +
` 20 [ ( )] cos cos
Ls 2 50
230 2
25 25 10
#
c c c
p
= - +
` Ls 0.0045 H =
V
0

cos V LsI 2
m 0
p
a
p
w
= -

. .
. . cos
3 14
2 230 2 25
3 14
2 3 14 50 4 5 10 20
3
# # # # # #
c
= -
-
. 187 73 9 = - . 178 74c =
Displacement factor
V I
V I
s s
0 0
=
.
230 20
178 25 20
#
#
= . 0 78 =
Given that
P 50 1000 W
#
=
V
d
420 =
So P V I
d d #
=
I
d

420
50 1000
#
= . 119 05 =
RMS value of thyristor current
.
.
3
119 05
68 73 = =
nodi a
Single phase full wave half controlled bridge converter feeds an Inductive load.
The two SCRs in the converter are connected to a common dc bus. The converter
has to have free wheeling diode because the converter does not provide for free
wheeling for high values of triggering angles.
If we connect the MOSFET with the VSI, but the six MOSFETs are connected
in bridge configuration, in that case they also operated as constant current
sources in the saturation region so this statement is false.
Given that, total harmonic distortion
THD 100
V
V V
rms
1
1
2
2
#
=
-
Pulse width is 150c
Here V
rms

180
150
0.91 V V
s s
= =
b l
V
1
V
rms(fundamental)
=

.
sin
V
2
0 4
75
s
#
c
p
=
. V 0 8696
s
=
THD
( . )
( . ) ( . )
V
V V
0 87
0 91 0 87
s
s s
2
2 2
=
-

. % 31 9 =
When losses are neglected,
cos
3 2 440
# #
p
a K
60
750 2
m#
#
p
=
Here back emf e with f is constant
e V K
m m 0
w = =
440 K
60
1500 2
m#
#
p
=
K
m
. 2 8 =
cos a . 0 37 =
at this firing angle
V
t
(0.37)
3 2 440
#
#
p
=
219.85 = V
I
a
.
440
1500
34 090 = =
I
sr
/ . I 2 3 27 83
a
= =
p.f.
V I
V I
3
s sr
t s
= 0.354 =
nodi a
V
s
.
4
230
57 5 = =
Here charging current I =
sin V
m
q 12 =

1
q 8.486 0.148 radian = =
V
m
. 81 317 = V
e 12 V =
There is no power consumption in battery due to ac current, so average value of
charging current.
I
av(charging)

.
[ ( )] cos V
2 19 04
1
2 2
m 1 1
#
p
q e p q = - -

.
[ ( )] cos V
2 19 04
1
2 12 2
m 1 1
#
# #
p
q p q = - -
1.059 /A W =
Conduction angle for diode is 270c as shown in fig.
Here, V
m
= maximum pulse voltage that can be applied
so 10 1 1 1 7 V = - - - =
Here 1 V drop is in primary transistor side, so that we get 9V pulse on the
secondary side. Again there are 1 V drop in diode and in gate cathode junction
each.
I
g max
150 mA =
So R
I
V
g
m
max
=
150
7
mA
= . 46 67 W =
We know that the pulse width required is equal to the time taken by i
a
to rise
upto i
L
so, V
s
( ) L
dt
di
R V 0
i T
. = +
i
a
[ ] e
1
200
1
/ . t 0 15
= -
-
Here also t T
=
, 0.25 i i
a L = =
nodi a
0.25 [ ] e 200 1
/ . T 0 5
= -
-
T 1.876 10
4
#
=
-

187.6 s m =
Width of pulse 187.6 s m =
Magnitude of voltage 10 V =
V
sec
rating of P.T. 10 187.6 s
#
m =
1867
=
mV-s is approx to 2000 mV-s
If we varying the frequency for speed control, / V f should be kept as constant so
that, minimum flux density (B
m
) also remains constant
So, V 4.44NB f A
m
=
In first half cycle D
1
will conduct and D
2
will not and at 0 q = there is zero
voltage. So current wave form is as following
In the PWM inverter
V
0
output voltage of inverter =
V
0
/ sin sin sin
n
V
nd n t n
4
2
s
n 1
p
w p =
3
=
/
So the pulse width d 2 144c = =
V
01
sin sin
V
t
4
72
s
c
p
w =
V
03
3 72 3 sin sin
V
t
3
4
s
#
c
p
w =
^ h
so,
V
V
max 01
03
b l

( )
sin
sin
V
V
4
72
3
4
3 72
s
s
# #
c
c
p
p
= . % 19 61 =
Given that
400 V, 50 Hz AC source, a 60c = , 10 I A
L
=
so,
Input displacement factor . cos 0 5 a = =
nodi a
and, input power factor cos D.F.
#
a =
distortion factor
I
I
s
s(fundamental)
=
/
sin
10 2 3
2
4 10
60
#
#
#
c
p
=
0.955 =
so, input power factor . . 0 955 0 5
#
= . 0 478 =
We know that
T ln RC 2 =
So C
0.693 R
T
#
=
. 50 0 693
100
#
= 2.88 F m =
Let we have
R
solar
0.5 W = , 20 I A
0
=
so V
s
350 20 0.5 340 V
#
= - =
` 340 cos
3 440 2
# #
p
a =
cos a 55c =
So each thyristor will reverse biased for 180 55 c c - 125c = .
In this circuitry if SCR gets open circuited, than circuit behaves like a half wave
rectifier.
So I
avg
Average value of current =
( ) sin
R
V t E d
2
1
m
1
1
p
w q = -
q
p q -
#
a
I
0(avg)
( ) cos
R
V E
2
1
2 2
m 1
p
q p q = - -
6 @
[ ( ) ( )] cos
2 2
1
2 230 2 200 2
1
#
# #
p
q p q = - -

1
q sin
V
E
m
1
=
-
b l
38 0.66 sin
230 2
200
Rad
1
#
c = = =
-
c m
nodi a
` I
( 0 avg)
[2 230 38 200( 2 0.66)] cos
2 2
1
2
#
# #
c
p
p = - -
11.9 A =
In this given circuit minimum gate pulse width time= Time required by i
a
rise
up to i
L
i
2
20
5 10
100
mA
3
#
= =
i
1
[ ] e
20
100
1
t 40
= -
-
` anode current I I I
1 2
= + . [ ] e 0 02 5 1
t 40
= + -
-
0.05 . [ ] e 0 05 5 1
t 40
= + -
-
e 1
t 40
-
-

.
5
0 03
=
T 150 s m =
Given I
L
10 A = . So in the ve + half cycle, it will charge the capacitor, minimum
time will be half the time for one cycle.
so min time required for charging
LC
0
w
p
p = = . 3 14 2 10 10
3 6
# # #
=
- -
sec 140 m =
Given T
on
sec 140 m =
Average output
T
T
V
total
on
#
=
T
total
/f 1 = 1
103
1
msec = =
so average output 250
1 10
140 10
35
3
6
#
#
#
= =
-
-
V
The conduction loss v/s MOSFET current characteristics of a power MOSFET
is best approximated by a parabola.
In a 3-f bridge rectifier
V
rms
400 V = , 50 f Hz =
This is purely resistive then
instantaneous voltage V
0
400 V 2 2
rms
= = V
nodi a
A 3-f square wave (symmetrical) inverter contains only odd harmonics.
In Ideal condition we take voltage across the device is zero.
average power loss during switching ( )
VI
t t
2
1 2
= + (turn ON)
So in P thyristor blocks voltage in both polarities until gate is triggered and also
in R transistor along with diode can do same process.
Duty ratio a . 0 5 =
here T 10
1 10
1
3
3
#
= =
-
-
sec
T
a
40
R
L
5
200 mH
= = = msec
Ripple
( )( )
R
V
e
e e
1
1 1
/
/ ( ) /
s
T T
T T T T 1
s
s a
=
-
- -
a a
-
- - -
= G
( ) I
max
T
fL
V
4
4 10 200 10
100
s
3 3
# # #
= =
-
0.125 A =
We know that V
rms
230 V =
so, V
m
230 2 V
#
=
If whether a 90c 1
Then V
peak
sin V 230
m
a = =
sin 230 2 a 230 =
sina
2
1
=
angle a 135c =
T
st
15 Nm =
T
L
7 Nm =
a 2 rad/sec
2
=
T I a =
so T 8 T T Nm
L st
= - =
I 4
2
8
kgm
2
= =
When we use BJT as a power control switch by biasing it in cut-off region or in
the saturation region. In the on state both the base emitter and base-collector
junction are forward biased.
nodi a
Peak Inverse Voltage (PIV) across full wave rectifier is 2V
m
V
m
50 2 = V
so, PIV 100 2 = V
V
b
12 4 V ! =
V
max b
16 V =
V
min b
8 V =
Required value of R
( ) min
I
V
10 10
8
800
g
b
3
#
W = = =
-
Ripple frequency 3 400 1200 f 3
#
= = = Hz
So from V
0
ripple frequency 1200 Hz =
Given that R . 0 15 W =
I 15 A =
So average power losses
( / )
I Rdt
2
1
/
2
0 p w
=
p w
#
. /
2
10 0 15
2
# # #
p
w
p w = 7.5 W =
Output dc voltage across load is given as following
V
dc
( )
sin
V 2
1
2
2
2 2
1
ap
p a
a
= - +
; E & 0
230
/ sin
2 2
1
2
4 2
2
4
2
1
#
p
p
p
p
#
= - +
p a b k l = G ' 1
317.8 V =
losses
R
V
dc
2
=
( . )
10100
100
317 8
W
2
= =
V
s
100 V = , duty ratio 0.8 = , R 10 W =
So average current through diode
R
V
s
a
=
0.8 100
8
10
A
#
= =
Peak current through S
1
nodi a
I / I V C L
S 0
= + 20 200
200 10
2 10
6
6
#
#
= +
-
-
40 A =
so
a
.
( )
0 5
500 1500
60
2
#
p
=
- -
; E
. 418 67 = rad/sec
2
and T 40 Nm =
T I a =
I
.
0.096
T
418 67
40
kgm
2
#
a
= =
When thyristor turned on at that time J2 junction will break. So J1, J2, J3 all
are in forward bias.
The ON-OFF state of switch is given on V I
DS S
- plane as following
When V ve
DS
=+ , diode conducts and I 0
S
=
V ve
DS
=- , diode opens, but I 0
S
= , D ve "- potential.
P. Field control-Above base speed
Q. Armature control-below base torque
As we know in fully controlled rectifier.
V
PP
( / ) cos V V 6
m m
p a = - + 30 a c a =
or V
PP
[1 ( /6 30 )] cos V
m
c p = - +
or
V
V
m
PP
. 0 5 =
nodi a
In the chopper during turn on of chopper V -t area across L is,
V dt
L
T
0
on
# L
dt
di
dt Ldi
T
i
i
0 min
max on
= =
b l
# #
( ) L i i L I
max min
D = - =
^ h
V -t are applied to L is (60 12)T
on
= - T 48
on
=
So now volt area I D
L
T 48
on
=

.
0.48
20 10
48 0 2 10
3
3
#
# #
= =
-
-
A
Output voltage V
0

4
/ sin sin sin
n
V
nd n t n 2
, ,
S
n 1 3 5
p
w p =
3
=
b ^ ^ ^ l h h h
/
` RMS value of fundamental component
V
rms(fundamental)
sin
V
d
2
4
1
S
#
p
=
120c a = , 120 60 d d 2 & c c = =
V
rms(fundamental)
sin
V
2
4
60
S
#
c
p
=
0.78 0.78 V V
S
= =
nodi a
After removing 5
th
harmonic
d 5 , , 0 2 p p =
` Pulse width , , d 2 0
5
2
5
4
a
p p
= = = , , 0 72 144 c c c =
N
Sa
3000 rpm =
N
a
2850 rpm =
S
FL
.
3000
3000 2850
0 05 =
-
=
where by ( / ) V f control
N
sb
3000
50
40
=
b l
2400 rpm =
` N
2
new running speed of motor =
1
.
2400
2
0 05
= -
b l
2340 rpm =
***********
Page 552 Engineering Mathematics Chapter 10
nodi a
CHAPTER 10
ENGI NEERI NG MATHEMATI CS
EE SP 10.1 Given a system of equations
x y z 2 2 + + b
1
=
x y z 5 3 + + b
2
=
What of the following is true regarding its solutions
(A) The system has a unique solution for any given b
1
and b
2
(B) The system will have infinitely many solutions for any given b
1
and b
2
(C) Whether or not a solution exists depends on the given b
1
and b
2
(D) The systems would have no solution for any values of b
1
and b
2
EE SP 10.2 Let f x xe
x
=
-
^ h . The maximum value of the function in the interval , 0 3 ^ h is
(A) e
1 -
(B) e
(C) e 1
1
-
-
(D) e 1
1
+
-
EE SP 10.3 The solution for the differential equation

dt
d x
2
2
x 9 =-
with initial conditions x 0 1 = ^ h and
dt
dx
1
t 0
=
=
, is
(A) t t 1
2
+ + (B) sin cos t t 3 3
3
1
3
2
+ +
(C) sin cos t t 3 3
3
1
+ (D) cos t t 3 +
EE SP 10.4 Let S be the set of points in the complex plane corresponding to the unit circle.
(That is, : S z z 1 = = " ,). Consider the function * f z zz = ^ h where z
*
denotes
the complex conjugate of z. The f z ^ h maps S to which one of the following in
the complex plane
(A) unit circle
(B) horizontal axis line segment from origin to (1, 0)
(C) the point (1, 0)
(D) the entire horizontal axis
EE SP 10.5
x t ^ h is nonzero only for T t T < <
x x
l, and similarly, y t ^ h is nonzero only for
T t T < <
y y
l. Let z t ^ h be convolution of x t ^ h and y t ^ h. Which one of the following
statements is TRUE ?
(A) z t ^ h can be nonzero over an unbounded interval.
(B) z t ^ h is nonzero for t T T <
x y
+
(C) z t ^ h is zero outside of T T t T T < <
x y x y
+ + l l
(D) z t ^ h is nonzero for t T T >
x y
+ l l
Chapter 10 Engineering Mathematics Page 553
nodi a
EE SP 10.6 Let : , , g 0 0 " 3 3 h h 6 6 be a function defined by g x x x = - ^ h 6 @, where x 6 @ represents
the integer part of x. (That is, it is the largest integer which is less than or equal
to x).
The value of the constant term in the Fourier series expansion of g x ^ h is____.
EE SP 10.7 A fair coin is tossed n times. The probability that the difference between the
number of heads and tails is n 3 - ^ h is
(A) 2
n -
(B) 0
(C) C 2
n
n
n
3 -
-
(D) 2
n 3 - +
EE SP 10.8 The line integral of function yz F i = , in the counterclockwise direction, along the
circle x y 1
2 2
+ = at z 1 = is
(A) 2p - (B) p -
(C) p (D) 2p
EE SP 10.9 Let X z
z 1
1
3
=
-
-
^ h be the z-transform of a causal signal x n 6 @.
Then, the values of x 2 6 @ and x 3 6 @ are
(A) 0 and 0 (B) 0 and 1
(C) 1 and 0 (D) 1 and 1
EE SP 10.10 A system matrix is given as follows
A
0
6
6
1
11
11
1
6
5
=
-
-
-
-
-
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
The absolute value of the ratio of the maximum eigenvalue to the minimum
eigenvalue is _______.
EE SP 10.11 Which one of the following statements is true for all real symmetric matrices ?
(A) All the eigenvalues are real
(B) All the eigenvalues are positive
(C) All the eigenvalues are distinct
(D) Sum of all the eigenvalues is zero
EE SP 10.12 Consider a dice with the property that the probability of a free with n dots
showing up proportional to n. The probability of the face with three dots showing
up is____.
EE SP 10.13 Minimum of the real valued function f x x 1
/ 2 3
= - ^ ^ h h occurs at x equal to
(A) 3 - (B) 0
(C) 1 (D) 3
nodi a
EE SP 10.14 All the values of the multi-valued complex function 1
i
, where i 1 = - , are
(A) purely imaginary (B) real and non-negative
(C) on the unit circle (D) equal in real and imaginary parts
EE SP 10.15 Consider the differential equation x
dx
d y
x
dx
dy
y 0
2
2
2
+ - = . Which of the following
is
a solution to this differential equation for x 0 > ?
(A) e
x
(B) x
2
(C) /x 1 (D) lnx
EE SP 10.16 To evaluate the double integral
x y
dx dy
2
2
/
/
y
y
2
2 1
0
8
-
+
b e
^
l o
h
# #
, we make the
substitution
u
x y
2
2
=
-
^ h
and v
y
2
= . The integral will reduce to
(A) udu dv 2
0
2
0
4
c m # #
(B) udu dv 2
0
1
0
4
c m # #
(C) udu dv
0
1
0
4
c m # #
(D) udu dv
0
2
0
4
c m # #
EE SP 10.17 Let X be a random variable with probability density function
f x ^ h
. ,
. ,
,
for
for
otherwise
x
x
0 2 1
0 1 1 4
0
<
#
# =
Z
[
\
]
]
]]
The probability . P X 0 5 5 < < ^ h is _____.
EE SP 10.18 The minimum value of the function f x x x x 3 24 100
3 2
= - - + ^ h in the interval
, 3 3 - 6 @ is
(A) 20 (B) 28
(C) 16 (D) 32
EE SP 10.19 Two matrices A and B are given below :
A
p
r
q
s
=> H; B
p q
pr qs
pr qs
r s
2 2
2 2
=
+
+
+
+
> H
If the rank of matrix A is N, then the rank of matrix B is
(A) / N 2 (B) N 1 -
(C) N (D) N 2
EE SP 10.20 A particle, starting from origin at s t 0 = , is traveling along x-axis with velocity
v / cos m s t
2 2
p p
=
a k
At s t 3 = , the difference between the distance covered by the particle and the
magnitude of displacement from the origin is ______.
nodi a
EE SP 10.21 Lifetime of an electric bulb is a random variable with density f x kx
2
= ^ h , where
x is measured in years. If the minimum and maximum lifetimes of bulb are 1 and
2 years respectively, then the value of k is _____.
EE SP 10.22 Integration of the complex function f z
z
z
1
2
2
=
-
^ h , in the counterclockwise
direction, around z 1 1 - = , is
(A) i p - (B) 0
(C) i p (D) i 2p
EE SP 10.23 The mean thickness and variance of silicon steel laminations are 0.2 mm and
0.02 respectively. The varnish insulation is applied on both the sides of the
laminations. The mean thickness of one side insulation and its variance are 0.1
mm and 0.01 respectively. If the transformer core is made using 100 such varnish
coated laminations, the mean thickness and variance of the core respectively are
(A) 30 mm and 0.22
(B) 30 mm and 2.44
(C) 40 mm and 2.44
(D) 40 mm and 0.24
EE SP 10.24 The function f x e 1
x
= - ^ h is to be solved using Newton-Raphson method. If the
initial value of x
0
is taken as 1.0, then the absolute error observed at 2
nd
iteration
is _____.
YEAR 2013 ONE MARK
EE SP 10.25 Given a vector field F y xa yza x a
x y z
2 2
= - -
v
v v v
, the line integral F dl :
v v
#
evaluated
along a segment on the x-axis from x 1 = to x 2 = is
(A) . 2 33 - (B) 0
(C) . 2 33 (D) 7
EE SP 10.26 The equation
x
x
2
1
2
1
0
0
1
2
-
-
= > > > H H H has
(A) no solution (B) only one solution
x
x
0
0
1
2
= > > H H
(C) non-zero unique solution (D) multiple solutions
EE SP 10.27 Square roots of i - , where i 1 = - , are
(A) i , i -
(B) cos sin i
4 4
p p
- + - d d n n, cos sin i
4
3
4
3 p p
+ b b l l
(C) cos sin i
4 4
3 p p
+ d b n l, cos sin i
4
3
4
p p
+ b d l n
(D) cos sin i
4
3
4
3 p p
+ - b b l l, cos sin i
4
3
4
3 p p
- + b b l l
nodi a
EE SP 10.28 The curl of the gradient of the scalar field defined by V x y y z z x 2 3 4
2 2 2
= + + is
(A) 4 6 8 xya yza zxa
x y z
+ +
v v v
(B) 4 6 8 a a a
x y z
+ +
v v v
(C) xy z a x yz a y zx a 4 4 2 6 3 8
x y z
2 2 2
+ + + + +
v v v
^ ^ ^ h h h
(D) 0
EE SP 10.29 A continuous random variable X has a probability density function f x e
x
=
-
^ h ,
x 0 < < 3. Then P X 1 > " , is
(A) 0.368 (B) 0.5
(C) 0.632 (D) 1.0
YEAR 2013 TWO MARKS
EE SP 10.30 When the Newton-Raphson method is applied to solve the equation
f x x x 2 1 0
3
= + - = ^ h , the solution at the end of the first iteration with the
initial value as . x 1 2
0
= is
(A) . 0 82 - (B) . 0 49
(C) . 0 705 (D) . 1 69
EE SP 10.31 A function y x x 5 10
2
= + is defined over an open interval , x 1 2 =^ h. Atleast at
one point in this interval, / dy dx is exactly
(A) 20 (B) 25
(C) 30 (D) 35
EE SP 10.32
z
z
dz
4
4
2
2
+
-
#
evaluated anticlockwise around the circle z i 2 - = , where i 1 = -
, is
(A) 4p - (B) 0
(C) 2 p + (D) i 2 2 +
EE SP 10.33 A Matrix has eigenvalues 1 - and 2 - . The corresponding eigenvectors are
1
1 -
> H
and
1
2 -
> H respectively. The matrix is
(A)
1
1
1
2 - -
> H (B)
1
2
2
4 - -
> H
(C)
1
0
0
2
-
-
> H (D)
0
2
1
3 - -
> H
YEAR 2012 ONE MARK
EE SP 10.34 Two independent random variables X and Y are uniformly distributed in the
interval , 1 1 -
6 @
. The probability that , max X Y
6 @
is less than / 1 2 is
(A) / 3 4 (B) / 9 16
(C) / 1 4 (D) / 2 3
nodi a
EE SP 10.35 If , x 1 = - then the value of x
x
is
(A) e
/2 p -
(B) e
/2 p
(C) x (D) 1
EE SP 10.36 Given ( ) f z
z z 1
1
3
2
=
+
-
+
. If C is a counter clockwise path in the z-plane
such that z 1 1 + = , the value of ( )
j
f z dz
2
1
C
p
#
is
(A) 2 - (B) 1 -
(C) 1 (D) 2
EE SP 10.37 With initial condition ( ) . x 1 0 5 = , the solution of the differential equation
t
dt
dx
x t + = , is
(A) x t
2
1
= - (B) x t
2
1 2
= -
(C) x
t
2
2
= (D) x
t
2
=
YEAR 2012 TWO MARKS
EE SP 10.38 Given that and A I
5
2
3
0
1
0
0
1
=
- -
= > > H H, the value of A
3
is
(A) 15 12 A I + (B) 19 30 A I +
(C) 17 15 A I + (D) 17 21 A I +
EE SP 10.39 The maximum value of ( ) f x x x x 9 24 5
3 2
= - + + in the interval [ , ] 1 6 is
(A) 21 (B) 25
(C) 41 (D) 46
EE SP 10.40 A fair coin is tossed till a head appears for the first time. The probability that
the number of required tosses is odd, is
(A) / 1 3 (B) / 1 2
(C) / 2 3 (D) / 3 4
EE SP 10.41 The direction of vector A is radially outward from the origin, with kr A
n
= .
where r x y z
2 2 2 2
= + + and k is a constant. The value of n for which A 0 : d = is
(A) 2 - (B) 2
(C) 1 (D) 0
EE SP 10.42 Consider the differential equation

( ) ( )
( )
dt
d y t
dt
dy t
y t 2
2
2
+ + ( ) t d = with ( ) 2 0 and y t
dt
dy
t
t
0
0
=- =
=
=
-
-
The numerical value of
dt
dy
t 0 =
+
is
(A) 2 - (B) 1 -
(C) 0 (D) 1
nodi a
YEAR 2011 ONE MARK
EE SP 10.43 Roots of the algebraic equation x x x 1 0
3 2
+ + + = are
(A) ( , , ) j j 1 + + - (B) ( , , ) 1 1 1 + - +
(C) ( , , ) 0 0 0 (D) ( , , ) j j 1 - + -
EE SP 10.44 A point Z has been plotted in the complex plane, as shown in figure below.
The plot of the complex number Y
Z
1
= is
EE SP 10.45 With K as a constant, the possible solution for the first order differential equation
dx
dy
e
x 3
=
-
is
(A) e K
x
3
1 3
- +
-
(B) e K
x
3
1 3
- +
(C) e K
x
3
1 3
- +
-
(D) e K 3
x
- +
-
YEAR 2011 TWO MARKS
EE SP 10.46 Solution of the variables x
1
and x
2
for the following equations is to be obtained
by employing the Newton-Raphson iterative method.
Equation (1) . sin x x 10 0 8 0
2 1
- =
Equation (2) . cos x x x 10 10 0 6 0
2
2
2 1
- - =
nodi a
Assuming the initial values are . x 0 0
1
= and . x 1 0
2
= , the jacobian matrix is
(A)
.
.
10
0
0 8
0 6
-
-
> H (B)
10
0
0
10
> H
(C)
.
.
0
10
0 8
0 6
-
-
> H (D)
10
10
0
10 -
> H
EE SP 10.47 The function ( ) f x x x x 2 3
2 3
= - - + has
(A) a maxima at x 1 = and minimum at x 5 =
(B) a maxima at x 1 = and minimum at x 5 =-
(C) only maxima at x 1 = and
(D) only a minimum at x 5 =
EE SP 10.48 A zero mean random signal is uniformly distributed between limits a - and a +
and its mean square value is equal to its variance. Then the r.m.s value of the
signal is
(A)
a
3
(B)
a
2
(C) a 2 (D) a 3
EE SP 10.49 The matrix [ ] A
2
4
1
1
=
-
> H is decomposed into a product of a lower triangular
matrix [ ] L and an upper triangular matrix [ ] U . The properly decomposed [ ] L and
[ ] U matrices respectively are
(A)
1
4
0
1 -
> H and
1
0
1
2 -
> H (B)
2
4
0
1 -
> H and
1
0
1
1
> H
(C)
1
4
0
1
> H and
2
0
1
1 -
> H (D)
2
4
0
3 -
> H and
. 1
0
1 5
1
> H
EE SP 10.50 The two vectors [1,1,1] and [1, , ] a a
2
where a j
2
1
2
3
= - +
_ i
, are
(A) Orthonormal
(B) Orthogonal
(C) Parallel
(D) Collinear
YEAR 2010 ONE MARK
EE SP 10.51 The value of the quantity P , where P xe dx
x
0
1
= # , is equal to
(A) 0 (B) 1
(C) e (D) 1/e
EE SP 10.52 Divergence of the three-dimensional radial vector field r is
(A) 3
(B) /r 1
(C) i j k + +
t t t

nodi a
(D) 3( ) i j k + +
t t t
YEAR 2010 TWO MARKS
EE SP 10.53 A box contains 4 white balls and 3 red balls. In succession, two balls are
randomly and removed form the box. Given that the first removed ball is white,
the probability that the second removed ball is red is
(A) 1/3 (B) 3/7
(C) 1/2 (D) 4/7
EE SP 10.54 An eigenvector of P
1
0
0
1
2
0
0
2
3
=
J
L
K
K
K
N
P
O
O
O
is
(A) 1 1 1
T
-
8 B
(B) 1 2 1
T
8 B
(C) 1 1 2
T
-
8 B
(D) 2 1 1
T
-
8 B
EE SP 10.55 For the differential equation
dt
d x
dt
dx
x 6 8 0
2
2
+ + = with initial conditions ( ) x 0 1 =
and
dt
dx
0
t 0
=
=
, the solution is
(A) ( ) 2 x t e e
t t 6 2
= -
- -
(B) ( ) 2 x t e e
t t 2 4
= -
- -
(C) ( ) 2 x t e e
t t 6 4
=- +
- -
(D) ( ) 2 x t e e
t t 2 4
= +
- -
EE SP 10.56 For the set of equations, x x x x 2 4 2
1 2 3 4
+ + + = and 3 6 3 12 6 x x x x
1 2 3 4
+ + + = .
The following statement is true.
(A) Only the trivial solution 0 x x x x
1 2 3 4
= = = = exists
(B) There are no solutions
(C) A unique non-trivial solution exists
(D) Multiple non-trivial solutions exist
EE SP 10.57 At t 0 = , the function ( )
sin
f t
t
t
= has
(A) a minimum (B) a discontinuity
(C) a point of inflection (D) a maximum
YEAR 2009 ONE MARK
EE SP 10.58 The trace and determinant of a 2 2
#
matrix are known to be 2 - and 35 -
respectively. Its eigen values are
(A) 30 - and 5 - (B) 37 - and 1 -
(C) 7 - and 5 (D) 17.5 and 2 -
YEAR 2009 TWO MARKS
EE SP 10.59
( , ) f x y is a continuous function defined over ( , ) [ , ] [ , ] x y 0 1 0 1
#
! . Given the two
constraints, x y >
2
and y x >
2
, the volume under ( , ) f x y is
(A) ( , ) f x y dxdy
x y
x y
y
y
0
1
2
=
=
=
=
# # (B) ( , ) f x y dxdy
x y
x
y x
y 1 1
2 2
=
=
=
=
# #
nodi a
(C) ( , ) f x y dxdy
x
x
y
y
0
1
0
1
=
=
=
=
# # (D) ( , ) f x y dxdy
x
x y
y
y x
0 0 =
=
=
=
# #
EE SP 10.60 Assume for simplicity that N people, all born in April (a month of 30 days), are
collected in a room. Consider the event of at least two people in the room being
born on the same date of the month, even if in different years, e.g. 1980 and 1985.
What is the smallest N so that the probability of this event exceeds 0.5 ?
(A) 20 (B) 7
(C) 15 (D) 16
EE SP 10.61 A cubic polynomial with real coefficients
(A) Can possibly have no extrema and no zero crossings
(B) May have up to three extrema and upto 2 zero crossings
(C) Cannot have more than two extrema and more than three zero crossings
(D) Will always have an equal number of extrema and zero crossings
EE SP 10.62 Let x 117 0
2
- = . The iterative steps for the solution using Newton-Raphons
method is given by
(A) x x
x 2
1 117
k k
k
1
= +
+ b l
(B) x x
x
117
k k
k
1
= -
+
(C) x x
x
117
k k
k
1
= -
+
(D) x x x
x 2
1 117
k k k
k
1
= - +
+ b l
EE SP 10.63
( , ) ( ) ( ) x y x xy y xy F a a
x y
2 2
= + + +
t t
. Its line integral over the straight line from
( , ) ( , ) x y 0 2 = to ( , ) ( , ) x y 2 0 = evaluates to
(A) 8 - (B) 4
(C) 8 (D) 0
YEAR 2008 ONE MARKS
EE SP 10.64
X is a uniformly distributed random variable that takes values between 0 and 1.
The value of { } E X
3
will be
(A) 0 (B) 1/8
(C) 1/4 (D) 1/2
EE SP 10.65 The characteristic equation of a (3 3 # ) matrix P is defined as
( ) a I P 2 1 0
3 2
l l l l l = - = + + + =
If I denotes identity matrix, then the inverse of matrix P will be
(A) ( ) P P I 2
2
+ + (B) ( ) P P I
2
+ +
(C) ( ) P P I
2
- + + (D) ( ) P P I 2
2
- + +
EE SP 10.66 If the rank of a ( ) 5 6 # matrix Q is 4, then which one of the following statement
is correct ?
(A) Q will have four linearly independent rows and four linearly independent
columns
(B) Q will have four linearly independent rows and five linearly independent
columns
nodi a
(C)
QQ
T
will be invertible
(D) Q Q
T
will be invertible
YEAR 2008 TWO MARKS
EE SP 10.67 Consider function ( ) ( 4) f x x
2 2
= - where x is a real number. Then the function
has
(A) only one minimum (B) only tow minima
(C) three minima (D) three maxima
EE SP 10.68 Equation e 1 0
x
- = is required to be solved using Newtons method with an
initial guess x 1
0
=- . Then, after one step of Newtons method, estimate x
1
of
the solution will be given by
(A) 0.71828 (B) 0.36784
(C) 0.20587 (D) 0.00000
EE SP 10.69 A is m n # full rank matrix with m n > and I is identity matrix. Let matrix
' ( ) A A A A
1 T T
=
-
, Then, which one of the following statement is FALSE ?
(A) ' AA A A = (B) ( ') AA
2
(C) ' A A I = (D) ' ' AA A A =
EE SP 10.70 A differential equation / ( ) dx dt e u t
t 2
=
-
, has to be solved using trapezoidal rule
of integration with a step size . h 0 01 = s. Function ( ) u t indicates a unit step
function. If ( ) x 0 0 =
-
, then value of x at . t 0 01 = s will be given by
(A) 0.00099 (B) 0.00495
(C) 0.0099 (D) 0.0198
EE SP 10.71 Let P be a 2 2 # real orthogonal matrix and x is a real vector [ ] x,x
1 2
T
with
length ( ) x x x
/
1
2
2
2 1 2
= + . Then, which one of the following statements is correct ?
(A) Px x # where at least one vector satisfies Px x <
(B) Px x # for all vector x
(C) Px x $ where at least one vector satisfies Px x >
(D) No relationship can be established between x and Px
YEAR 2007 ONE MARK
EE SP 10.72
x x x x
n 1 2
T
g =
8 B
is an n-tuple nonzero vector. The n n # matrix
V xx
T
=
(A) has rank zero (B) has rank 1
(C) is orthogonal (D) has rank n
YEAR 2007 TWO MARKS
EE SP 10.73 The differential equation
dt
dx x 1
=
t
-
is discretised using Eulers numerical
integration method with a time step T 0 > 3 . What is the maximum permissible
nodi a
value of T 3 to ensure stability of the solution of the corresponding discrete time
equation ?
(A) 1 (B) /2 t
(C) t (D) 2t
EE SP 10.74 The value of
( ) z
dz
1
C
2
+
#
where C is the contour 1 z
i
2
- = is
(A) i 2p (B) p
(C) tan z
1 -
(D) tan i z
1
p
-
EE SP 10.75 The integral ( ) sin cos t d
2
1
0
2
p
t t t -
p
#
equals
(A) sin cos t t (B) 0
(C) cos t
2
1
(D) sint
2
1
EE SP 10.76 A loaded dice has following probability distribution of occurrences
Dice Value 1 2 3 4 5 6
Probability 1/4 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/4
If three identical dice as the above are thrown, the probability of occurrence of
values 1, 5 and 6 on the three dice is
(A) same as that of occurrence of 3, 4, 5
(B) same as that of occurrence of 1, 2, 5
(C) 1/128
(D) 5/8
EE SP 10.77 Let x and y be two vectors in a 3 dimensional space and x,y < > denote their
dot product. Then the determinant
det
x,x
y,x
x,y
y,y
< >
< >
< >
< >
= G
(A) is zero when x and y are linearly independent
(B) is positive when x and y are linearly independent
(C) is non-zero for all non-zero x and y
(D) is zero only when either x or y is zero
EE SP 10.78 The linear operation ( ) L x is defined by the cross product L(x) b x # = , where
b 0 1 0
T
=
8 B
and x x x x
1 2 3
T
=
8 B
are three dimensional vectors. The 3 3 # matrix
M of this operations satisfies
( ) M
x
x
x
L x
1
2
3
=
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
Then the eigenvalues of M are
(A) , , 0 1 1 + - (B) , , 1 1 1 -
(C) , , i i 1 - (D) , , i i 0 -
nodi a
Cayley-Hamilton Theorem states that a square matrix satisfies its own
characteristic equation. Consider a matrix
A
3
2
2
0
=
-
-
= G
EE SP 10.79
A satisfies the relation
(A) A I A 3 2 0
1
+ + =
-
(B) 2 2 0 A A I
2
+ + =
(C) ( )( ) A I A I 2 + + (D) ( ) 0 exp A =
EE SP 10.80
A
9
equals
(A) 511 510 A I +
(B) 309 104 A I +
(C) 154 155 A I +
(D) ( ) exp A 9
YEAR 2006 TWO MARKS
EE SP 10.81 The expression ( / ) V R h H dh 1
H
2 2
0
p = -
#
for the volume of a cone is equal to
(A) ( / ) R h H dr 1
R
2 2
0
p -
#
(B) ( / ) R h H dh 1
R
2 2
0
p -
#
(C) ( / ) rH r R dh 2 1
H
0
p -
#
(D) rH
R
r
dr 2 1
R
2
0
p -
` j
#
EE SP 10.82 A surface ( , ) S x y x y 2 5 3 = + - is integrated once over a path consisting of the
points that satisfy ( ) ( ) x y 1 2 1 2 2 + + - = . The integral evaluates to
(A) 17 2
(B) 17 2
(C) / 2 17
(D) 0
EE SP 10.83 Two fair dice are rolled and the sum r of the numbers turned up is considered
(A) ( 6) Pr r >
6
1
=
(B) Pr ( / r 3 is an integer)
6
5
=
(C) Pr ( / r r 8 4 ; = is an integer)
9
5
=
(D) ( 6 / Pr r r 5 ; = is an integer)
16
1
=
, , P Q R
10
1
3
2
5
9
2
7
12
T T T
=
-
=
-
- = -
R
T
S
S
S
S
R
T
S
S
S
S
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
V
X
W
W
W
W
V
X
W
W
W
W
are three vectors.
EE SP 10.84 An orthogonal set of vectors having a span that contains P,Q,Ris
(A)
6
3
6
4
2
3
-
-
-
-
R
T
S
S
S
S
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
V
X
W
W
W
W
(B)
4
2
4
5
7
11
8
2
3
-
- -
R
T
S
S
S
S
R
T
S
S
S
S
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
V
X
W
W
W
W
V
X
W
W
W
W
nodi a
(C)
6
7
1
3
2
2
3
9
4 -
-
- -
R
T
S
S
S
S
R
T
S
S
S
S
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
V
X
W
W
W
W
V
X
W
W
W
W
(D)
4
3
11
1
31
3
5
3
4
R
T
S
S
S
S
R
T
S
S
S
S
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
V
X
W
W
W
W
V
X
W
W
W
W
EE SP 10.85 The following vector is linearly dependent upon the solution to the previous
problem
(A)
8
9
3
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
(B)
2
17
30
-
-
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
(C)
4
4
5
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
(D)
13
2
3 -
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
YEAR 2005 ONE MARK
EE SP 10.86 In the matrix equation x q P = , which of the following is a necessary condition
for the existence of at least on solution for the unknown vector x
(A) Augmented matrix [ ] q P must have the same rank as matrix P
(B) Vector q must have only non-zero elements
(C) Matrix P must be singular
(D) Matrix P must be square
EE SP 10.87 If P and Q are two random events, then the following is TRUE
(A) Independence of P and Q implies that probability ( ) P Q 0 + =
(B) Probability ( ) P Q , $ Probability (P) + Probability (Q)
(C) If P and Q are mutually exclusive, then they must be independent
(D) Probability ( ) P Q + # Probability (P)
EE SP 10.88 If S x dx
3
1
=
3
-
#
, then S has the value
(A)
3
1
- (B)
4
1
(C)
2
1
(D) 1
EE SP 10.89 The solution of the first order DE ' ( ) ( ) x t x t 3 =- , (0) x x
0
= is
(A) ( ) x t x e
t
0
3
=
-
(B) ( ) x t x e
0
3
=
-
(C) ( ) x t x e
/
0
1 3
=
-
(D) ( ) x t x e
0
1
=
-
YEAR 2005 TWO MARKS
EE SP 10.90 For the matrix p
3
0
0
2
2
0
2
1
1
=
-
-
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
, one of the eigen values is equal to 2 -
Which of the following is an eigen vector ?
nodi a
(A)
3
2
1
-
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
(B)
3
2
1
-
-
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
(C)
1
2
3
-
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
(D)
2
5
0
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
EE SP 10.91 If R
1
2
2
0
1
3
1
1
2
=
-
-
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
, then top row of R
1 -
is
(A) 5 6 4
8 B
(B) 5 3 1 -
8 B
(C) 2 0 1 -
8 B
(D) / 2 1 1 2 -
8 B
EE SP 10.92 A fair coin is tossed three times in succession. If the first toss produces a head,
then the probability of getting exactly two heads in three tosses is
(A) 1/6 (B) 1/2
(C) 3/6 (D) 3/4
EE SP 10.93 For the function ( ) f x x e
x 2
=
-
, the maximum occurs when x is equal to
(A) 2 (B) 1
(C) 0 (D) 1 -
EE SP 10.94 For the scalar field u
x
y
2 3
2
2
= + , magnitude of the gradient at the point (1, 3) is
(A)
9
13
(B)
2
9
(C) 5 (D)
2
9
EE SP 10.95 For the equation '' ( ) ' ( ) ( ) x t x t x t 3 2 5 + + = ,the solution ( ) x t approaches which of
the following values as t " 3 ?
(A) 0 (B)
2
5
(C) 5 (D) 10
***********
nodi a
SOLUTI ON
x y z 2 2 + + b
1
= ...(i)
x y 5 32 + + b
2
= ...(ii)
On eliminating y, we have
x z 9 4 + b b 2
2 1
= - {2(ii)-(i)}
Let b b 1
1 2
= = ,
x z 9 4 + 1 =
x
z
9
1 4
=
-
z
x
4
1 9
=
-
Hence these will be infinitely many solutions for any given b
1
and b
2
.
Given the function,
f
x ^ h xe
x
=
-
To determine the maximum value, we equate the first derivative of function to
zero, i.e.
f
x
l^ h e x e e xe
x x x x
= + - = -
- - - -
^ h 0 =
or e
x 1
x
-
-
^ h 0 =
So, x , 1 3 =
Again, we check the point of maxima by substituting the obtained values in the
second derivative as
f
x
ll^ h e xe e
x x x
=- + -
- - -
At x 1 = f
x
ll^ h e e 2
1
1 1
=- +
- -
^
^
h
h
e 0 <
1
=-
-
Hence, f
x ^ h is maximum at x 1 = , and given as
f 1 ^ h e e 1
1 1
= =
- -
^ h at x 1 =
Given the differential equation,

dt
d x
2
2
x 9 =-
Taking the Laplace transform,
s X
s
sX X
0 0
2
- - l ^ ^ ^ h h h X
s
9 =- ^ h
or s X
s
s
1 1
2
- - ^ ^ ^ h h h X
s
9 =- ^ h
or X
s s 9
2
+ ^ ^ h h s 1 = +
or X
s ^ h
s
s
s
s
s 9
1
9 9
1
2 2 2
=
+
+
=
+
+
+
or X
s ^ h
s
s
s 9
3
1
9
3
2 2
=
+
+
+
d n
nodi a
Again, taking inverse Laplace transform, we obtain
x
t ^ h cos sin t t 3
3
1
3 = +
ALTERNATI VE METHOD :
Given the differential equation,

dt
d x
x 9
2
2
+ 0 =
Substituting D
dx
d
/ , we obtain
or D 9
2
+ 0 =
or D i 3 ! =
So, the auxiliary equation is written as
x cos sin A t iB t 3 3 = + ...(1)
From the given values,
x 0 ^ h A 1 = =
and
dt
dx
t 0 =
i B 1 3 = = B &
i 3
1
=
Substituting these values in equation (1), we get
x cos sin t t 3
3
1
3 = +
Given the set of points in complex plane,
S
: z z 1
=
= $ .
and the function,
f
z ^ h * zz =
By complex number property, we know
* zz z
2
=
Thus, for the given set of points, i.e. z 1 = ; the value of function is
f z
^ h
1 =
i.e. f z ^ h maps S to the point (1, 0) on the plane.
Given the functions,
x t ^ h 0 !
x
; T t T < <
n
l
and y t ^ h 0 !
y
; T t T < <
y
l
z t ^ h is the convolution of x t ^ h and y t ^ h, i.e.
z t ^ h x t y t =
*
^ ^ h h
So, by convolution theorem, we have
z t ^ h 0 = ;
y x
; t T T t T T < >
x y
+ + l l
or z t ^ h 0 = ; out side of
y x
T T T T T < <
x y
+ + l l
Given the function,
g x ^ h x x = -
6 @
nodi a
or g x ^ h x =
" ,
So, we have the graph
As this is a periodic function, the constant term will be is average value, i.e.
Average value a
0 ^ h

T
f x dx
1
T
0
= ^ h #
a
0

T
xdx
1
0
1
=
#
.
x x
1
2 2
0 5
2
0
1 2
0
1
#
= = =
: D
Hence, the constant term is . 0 5
Given the fair coin is tossed n times. Assume that
Number of head appearing x = times
Number of tail appearing y = times
So, we have
x y - n 3 = - (Given)
and x y + n =
Now, we consider the two cases.
Case I: When x y > ; we have

x y n
x y n
x n
3
2 2 3
- = -
+ =
= -
So, x
n
n
2
2 3
2
3
=
-
= -
As x is an integer and n is also an integer value. So, the above relation is
contradictory, and therefore
n
2
3
- x !
Case II: When x y < ; we have

x y n
x y n
y n
3
2
3
- + = -
+ =
= -
Again, y is an integer and n is also an integer value. So, the above relation is
contradictory.
Thus, the required probability is zero.
Given function, F
v
yzi =
t
and the circle, x y
2 2
+ 1 =
nodi a
Now, we have to determine the line integral of F
"
along the circle at z 1 = .
From Greens Theorem, we define line integral as
F dl $
" "
#

x
F
y
F
dxdy
y
x
2
2
2
2
= - d n ##
...(i)
where F
x
and F
y
are components of F
"
along x and y directions, respectively,
i.e.
F
x
yz =
F
y
0 =
Substituting it in equation (i), we have
F dl $
" "
#

y
yz
dxdy zdxdy 0
2
2
= - =-
^ h
= G
## ##
At z 1 = along the circle, we get
F dl $
" "
#
dxdy 1 =-
##
dxdy
1
2
p =- =- ^ h
##
(area of circle)
p =-
Given the z-transform of causal signal x n
6 @
as
X
z ^ h ...
z z z 1
1
1
1 1
3 3 3
2
=
-
= + + +
-
c m
.....
z z
1
1 1
3 6
= + + + ...(i)
Now, the z-transform is defined as
X
z ^ h x n z
n
n 0
=
3
-
=
6 @
/
... x
z
x
z
x
z
x
0
1 2 3
2 3
= + + + + 6
6 6 6
@
@ @ @
...(ii)
Comparing equations (i) and (ii), we get
x 0 6 @ 1 = , x
1
0 = 6 @
x
2
6 @ 0 = , x
3
1 = 6 @
Given the system matrix,
A
0
6
6
1
11
11
1
6
5
= -
-
-
-
-
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
The Eigen values for the system matrix is given by the roots of the equation
A I l - 0 =
or
0
6
6
1
11
11
1
6
5
0
0
0
0
0
0
l
l
l
-
-
-
-
-
-
R
T
S
S
S
S
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
V
X
W
W
W
W
0 =
or 6
6
1
11
11
1
6
5
l
l
l
=
-
-
-
- -
-
-
-
0 =
nodi a
or [ 55 5 11 66
2
l l l l - - - + + + ^ h
1 36 30 6 1 66 66 6 l l + - + - - - - ^ ^ h h 0 =
or 6 11 6 6 6
3 2
l l l l l - - - - - + ^ h 0 =
r 6 11 6
3 2
l l l + + + 0 =
So, l 1 =- , 2 - , 3 -
Thus, the ratio of maximum eigenvalue to minimum eigenvalue is

min
max
l
l

1
3
3 =
-
-
=
Corollary: Every real symmetric matrix has eigenvalues which are all real
numbers.
On the first dot probability 1 \
On the second dot probability 2 \
.
.
.
On the sixth dot probability 6 \
Total probability 1 2 3 4 5 6 = + + + + +
21 =
Probability of 3
rd
dot .
21
3
7
1
0 14 = = =
f x ^ h x 10 1
/ 2 3
= - ^ h
Since f x ^ h is a real valued function x 1 -
^ h
can not be negative, because in that
case fractional power of negative number is imaginary. So at x 1 = , the value of
f x ^ h will be minimum.
We can write
1 ( ) ( ) cos sin n i n 2 2 p p = + , where n is an integer
or, 1 e
i n 2
=
p
^ h
So, 1
i
e
( ) i n
i
2
=
p
6 @
or 1
i
e
( ) i n 2
2
=
p -
1
i
e
n 2
=
p -
Therefore all values of 1
i
are non-negative and real number.
This is a Cauchy-Euler equation, so we substitute x e
t
= . Then assuming x 0 >
, we have
t lnx =

dx
dy

dt
dy
dx
dt
=
nodi a
or
dx
dy

dt
dy
x
1
=
b l
ln t x
dx
dt
x
1
& = =
: D
or x
dx
dy

dt
dy
= ...(i)
Now,
dx
d y
2
2

x
dt
d y
dx
dt
x
dt
dy
1 1
2
2
2
= -
c m

dx
d y
2
2

x dt
d y
dt
dy
1
2 2
2
= -
c m
or x
dx
d y
2
2
2

dt
d y
dt
dy
2
2
= - ...(ii)
Substituting eq (i) and (ii) in given differential equation, we get

dt
d y
dt
dy
dt
dy
y
2
2
- + - 0 =

dt
d y
y
2
2
- 0 =
m 1
2
- 0 =
m 1 ! =
Roots are distinct real, so two possible solution
y e
t
= and y e
t
=
-
Since x e
t
=
So y x = or
x
1
are two possible solutions.

x y
dx dy
2
2
/ y
y
2
2
1
0
8
-
+
b
f
l
p
# #
? =

x y
u
2
2 -
= & x x
y
u
2
= - =
dx du =
At x
y
2
= u
/ y y
2
2 2
0
#
=
-
=
at x
y
2
1 = + u
y
y
2
2
2
1
1 =
+ -
=
a k
Thus integral becomes udu dy
0
1
0
8
; E # #
v
y
2
=
dv
dy
2
= dy dv 2 & =
at y 0 = & v 0 =
at y 8 = & v 4 =
udu dv 2
0
1
0
4
=
; E # #
Reduced form udu dv 2
0
1
0
4
=
; E # #
nodi a
f x ^ h
.
.
for
for
otherwise
x
x
0 2 1
0 1 1 4
0
<
#
#
= *
f x ^ h
. ,
. , ,
otherwise
x
x
0 2 1 1
0 1 4 1 1 4
0
,
=
= -
= - -
^
^ ^
h
h h
*
On solving inequalities
Probability P ^ h f x dx =
3
3
-
^ h #
. . dx dx 0 2 0 1
. 0 5
1
1
4
= +
# #
. . . 0 2 0 5 0 1 3
# #
= +
P . . . 0 1 0 3 0 4 = + =
f x ^ h x x x 3 24 100
3 2
= - - + on , 3 3 - 6 @
The given function is a polynomial and so continuous everywhere. Now we get
derivative of the function to option the critical points
f x l^ h x x 3 6 24
2
= - -
or x x 2 8
2
- - 0 =
x x x 4 2 8
2
- + - 0 =
x x x 4 2 4 - + - ^ ^ h h 0 =
x x 4 2 - + ^ ^ h h 0 =
So, x 4 = and x 2 =-
We consider the critical point that actually fall in the given interval. So we only
take x 2 =- . Now, we find the function value at the critical point x 2 =- and
end points x 3 =- , x 3 = .
f 2 - ^ h 2 3 2 24 2 100
3 2
= - - - - - + ^ ^ ^ h h h
f 2 - ^ h 128 =
f 3 - ^ h 3 3 3 24 3 100
3 2
= - - - - - + ^ ^ ^ h h h
f 3 - ^ h 172 =
f 3 ^ h 3 3 3 24 3 100
3 2
= - - + ^ ^ ^ h h h
f 3 ^ h 28 =
We have
f 2 - ^ h 128 = , f 3 172 - = ^ h , f 3 28 = ^ h
From list of above values we can see that absolute minimum is 28 which occurs
at x 3 = .
Given the two matrices,
A
p
r
q
s
=> H
and B
p q
pr qs
pr qs
r s
2 2
2 2
=
+
+
+
+
> H
nodi a
To determine the rank of matrix A, we obtain its equivalent matrix using the
operation, a
i 2
a
a
a
a
i i 2
11
21
1
! - as
A
p q
s
p
r
q 0
=
-
> H
If s
p
r
q - 0 =
or ps rq - 0 =
then rank of matrix A is 1, otherwise the rank is 2.
Now, we have the matrix
B
p q
pr qs
pr qs
r s
2 2
2 1
=
+
+
+
+
> H
To determine the rank of matrix B, we obtain its equivalent matrix using the
operation, a
i 2
a
a
a
a
i i 2
11
21
1
! - as
B
p q pr qs
r s
p q
pr qs
0
2 2
2 2
2 2
2
=
+ +
+ -
+
+
^
^
h
h
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
If r s
p q
pr qs
2 2
2 2
2
+ -
+
+
^
^
h
h
ps rq
2
= - ^ h 0 =
or ps rq - 0 =
then rank of matrix B is 1, otherwise the rank is 2.
Thus, from the above results, we conclude that
If ps rq 0 - = , then rank of matrix A and B is 1.
If ps rq 0 ! - , then rank of A and B is 2.
i.e. the rank of two matrices is always same. If rank of A is N then rank of B
also N.
SOL 10.20 Correct answer is (C).
Given the velocity of particle,
v cos
t
2 2
p p
=
Since, the velocity of the particle is along x-axis. So, we have
v
dt
dx
=
Therefore, the displacement of the particle from t 0 = (origin) to t 3 = is
x vdt
t
t
0
3
=
=
=
#
cos tdt
2 2
t
t
0
3
p p
=
=
=
#
sin t
2
0
3
=
p p=
6 @
1 =-
or | | x 1 =
i.e. the magnitude of displacement is 1.
Now, we have to determine the distance covered by the particle. For calculating
distance, we have to consider speed and speed cant be negative, so the distance
is given by
nodi a
x
0
v dt
t
t
0
3
=
=
=
#
cos t dt
2 2
t
t
0
3
p p
=
=
=
#
cos cos t tdt
2 2 2 2
t
t
t
t
0
1
1
3
p p p p
= -
=
=
=
=
# #
sin sin t t
2 2
t t
t
0
1
1
3
p p
= -
= =
=
9 9 C C
1 1 1 = - - - ^ h 3 =
Thus, the difference between the distance covered and magnitude of displacement
is
x D | | x x 3 1 2
0
= - = - =
Given that the life time of an electric bulb is a random variable with density,
f x ^ h kx
2
= .
where x is the lifetime measured in years.
From the property of random variable, we have
f x dx
3
3
-
^ h #
1 =
Since, the minimum and maximum lifetimes of bulbs are 1 and 2 years respectively.
So, we have
1 x 2 # #
Therefore, equation (i) becomes
f x dx
1
2
^ h #
1 =
or kx dx
2
1
2
#
1 =
or k
x
3
3
1
2
: D
1 =
or k
3
8 1 -
b l
1 =
Thus, k .
7
3
0 43 = =
Given the complex function,
f z ^ h
z
z
1
2
2
=
-
and the contour, along which integration to be performed, is
C : | | z 1 - 1 =
Here, z 1 1 - = is a circle with radius 1 and centre at point (1,0). So, we sketch
the contour C as
nodi a
Now, we have the complex function
f z ^ h
z
z
1
2
2
=
-
So, the poles and zeros of the function are
poles 1 = , 1 -
zeros 0 = , 0
Therefore, only pole (z= 1) lies within the curve C . So, the residue at z 1 =
pole is
Residue lim
z
z
1
z 1
2
=
+
"
^ h
lim
z
z
1 1 1
1
2
1
z 1
2
=
+
=
+
=
"
Thus, the integral of complex function along the contour is obtained as
f z dz
C
^ h #
i 2p = (sum of residues)
i 2
2
1
p =
b l
i p =
We have the function,
f x ^ h e 1
x
= -
So, its first derivative is obtained as
f x l^ h e
x
=
By Newton-Raphson method, we have
x
i 1 +
x
f x
f x
i
i
i
= -
l^
^
h
h
Since, we have the initial value,
x
0
1 =
So, we obtain the 1st iteration as
x
1
x
f x
f x
0
0
0
= -
l^
^
h
h
x
e
e 1
x
x
0
0
0
= -
-

e
e
1
1
1
1
= -
-
. e 3678
1
= =
-
Therefore, the 2nd iteration is
x
2
x
f x
f x
1
1
1
= -
l^
^
h
h
x
e
e 1
x
x
1
1
1
= -
-
x e 1
x
1
1
= - +
-
. e 0 3678 1
. 0 3678
= - +
-
.06005 =
nodi a
Given, the field vector
F
v
y xa yza x a
x y z
2 2
= - -
v v v
For the line segment along x-axis, we have
dl
v
dxa
x
=
v
So, F dl :
v v
y x dx
2
=^ ^ h h
Since, on x-axis y 0 = so,
F dl :
v v
0 =
or, F dl :
v v
#
0 =
Given the equations in matrix form as

x
x
2
1
2
1
1
2
-
-
> > H H
0
0
=> H
So, it is a homogeneous set of linear equation. It has either a trivial solution
x x 0
1 2
= = ^ h or an infinite no. of solution. Since, for the matrix
A
2
1
2
1
=
-
-
> H
We have the determinant
A
0 =
Hence, it will have multiple solutions
We know that
i e
/ i 2
=
p
(In phasor form)
or, i - e
/ i 2
=
p -
So, i - e e
/
/
/ i i 2
1 2
4
! ! = =
p p - -
^ h
cos sin i
4 4
!
p p
= - d d n n
= G
cos sin i
4 4
p p
= - d d n n ; cos sin i
4 4
p p
- + d d n n

i
2
1
2
= - ;
i
1
2
- +
This is equivalent to the given option (B) only.
Given the scalar field
V x y y z z x 2 3 4
2 2 2
= + +
Its gradient is given by
V d xy z a x yz a y zx a 4 4 2 6 3 8
x y z
2 2 2
= + + + + +
v v v
^ _ ^ h i h
So, the curl of the gradient is obtained as
v
#
d d ^ h
a
xy z
a
z yz
a
y zx 4 4 2 6 3 8
x
x
y
y
z
z
2 2 2
=
+ + +
2
2
2
2
2
2
v v v
8 8 a y y a z z a x x 6 6 4 4
x y z
= - - - + -
v v v
^ ^ ^ h h h 0 =
Note : From the properties of curl, we know that curl of gradient of any scalar
nodi a
field is always zero. So, there is no need to solve the curl and gradient.
Given, the PdF of random variable x as
f x ^ h e
x
=
-
x 0 < < 3
So, P x 1 > ^ h e dx
x
1
=
3
-
#

e
1
x
1
=
-
3 -
: D
e
1
=
-
. 0 368 =
Given, the equation
f x ^ h x x 2 1 0
3
= + - =
as initial condition is x
0
. 1 2 =
so, from N R - method we obtain
x
n 1 +
x
f x
f x
n
n
n
= -
l
^
^
h
h
Here x
0
. 1 2 =
f x
0 ^ h
. 2 . 1 3.128 1 2 1 2
3
= + - =
^ ^ h h
Also, f x l^ h x 3 2
2
= +
So, f x
0
l
^ h
. . 3 1 2 2 6 32
2
= + = ^ h
Hence, 1
st
iterative value is
x
1
x
f x
f x
0
0
0
= -
l
^
^
h
h

.
.
.
1 2
6 32
3 128
= -
. 0 705 =
Given the function
y 5 10 f x x x
2
= = +
^ h
in the internal , x 1 2 =^ h
Since, function y is continuous in the interval , 1 2 ^ h as well as its is
differentiable at each point so, from Lagranges mean value theorem there exist
at least a point where
f c l^ h
b a
f b f a
=
-
- ^ ^ h h
Here, we have
a 1 = , b 2 =
So, for x a 1 = = , we obtain
y 5 f a f 1 1 10 1 15
2
= = = + = ^ ^ ^ ^ h h h h
and for x b 2 = =
y 5 f b f 2 2 10 2 40
2
= = = + = ^ ^ ^ ^ h h h h
Therefore,
f c l^ h
2 1
40 15
25 =
-
-
=
nodi a
Given the contour integral

z
z
dz
4
4
2
2
+
-
#
It has two poles given as
z i 2 ! =
Now, the contour is defined by circle z i 2 - = which is shown in the figure
below
So, it can be observed that the given contour enclosed z i 2 = while z i 2 =- is
out of the contour. So, we obtain the residue at z i 2 = only as
residue
z i
z
2
4
z i
2
2
=
+
-
=

i i
i
i
i
2 2
2 4
4
8
2
2
=
+
-
=
-
=
^ h
Hence, contour integral is given as

z
z
dz
4
4
2
2
+
-
#
2 i p = (sum of residues)
2 i i 2 p = ^ h
4p =-
We know that the characteristic equation is given by
A X 6 6 @ @ X l = 6 @
where A 6 @ is the matrix as l is the scalar which gives eigen values. Now, we
consider the matrix
A 6 @
a
c
b
d
=> H matrix 2 2
# ^ h
For eigen value 1 - as eigen vector is
1
1 -
> H, so, we have

a
c
b
d
1
1 -
> > H H 1
1
1
=-
-
> H
or, a b - 1 =- ....(1)
c d - 1 = ....(2)
Similarly, for eigen value 2 - with eigen vector
1
2 -
> H, we obtain

a
c
b
d
1
2 -
> > H H 2
1
2
=-
-
> H
or, a b 2 - 2 =- ....(3)
nodi a
c d 2 - 4 = ....(4)
Solving Eqs. (1) and (3), we obtain
a , b 0 1 = =
and solving Eqs. (2) and (4), we obtain
c , d 2 3 =- =
Thus, the required matrix is

a
c
b
d
> H
0
2
1
3
=
- -
> H
Probability density function of uniformly distributed variables X and Y is shown
as
[ ( , )] max P x y
2
1
<
& 0
Since X and Y are independent.
[ ( , )] max P x y
2
1
<
& 0
P X P Y
2
1
2
1
< < =
b b l l
P X
2
1
<
b l
shaded area
4
3
= =
Similarly for Y : P Y
2
1
<
b l

4
3
=
So [ ( , )] max P x y
2
1
<
& 0

4
3
4
3
16
9
#
= =
Alternate Method:
From the given data since random variables X and Y lies in the interval [ , ] 1 1 -
as from the figure X , Y lies in the region of the square ABCD.
Probability for , 1/2 max X Y < 6 @ : The points for , / max X Y 1 2 < 6 @ will be inside
the region of square AEFG.
nodi a
So, , max P X Y
2
1
< 6 @
& 0

Area of square
Area of
ABCD
AEFG 4
=

2 2
2
3
2
3
16
9
#
#
= =
x i 1 = - = cos sin i
2 2
p p
= +
So, x e
i
2
=
p
x
x
e
i
x
2
=
p
^ h & e
i
i
2
p
^ h e
2
=
p
-
( ) f z
z z 1
1
3
2
=
+
-
+
( )
j
f z dz
2
1
C
p
#
= sum of the residues of the poles which lie inside the
given closed region.
C z 1 1 & + =
Only pole z 1 =- inside the circle, so residue at z 1 =- is.
( ) f z
( )( ) z z
z
1 3
1
=
+ +
- +

( )( )
( )( )
lim
z z
z z
1 3
1 1
2
2
1
z 1
=
+ +
+ - +
= =
"-
So ( )
j
f z dz
2
1
C
p
#
1 =
t
dt
dx
x + t =

dt
dx
t
x
+ 1 =

dt
dx
Px + Q = (General form)
Integrating factor, I F e e e t
lnt
Pdt t
dt
1
= = = =
#
#
Solution has the form x I F
#
Q I F dt C
#
= +
^ h #
x t
#
( )( ) t dt C 1 = +
#
xt
t
C
2
2
= +
Taking the initial condition ( ) x 1 . 0 5 =
0.5 C
2
1
= +
C 0 =
So, xt
t
2
2
= x
t
2
& =
Characteristic equation.
A I l - 0 =
nodi a

5
2
3 l
l
- - -
-
0 =
5 6
2
l l + + 0 =
5 6
2
l l + + 0 =
Since characteristic equation satisfies its own matrix, so
5 6 A A
2
+ + 0 = 5 6 A A I
2
& =- -
Multiplying with A
5 6 A A A
3 2
+ + 0 =
5( 5 6 ) 6 A A I A
3
+ - - + 0 =
A
3
19 30 A I = +
( ) f x x x x 9 24 5
3 2
= - + +

( )
dx
df x
x x 3 18 24 0
2
= - + =
&
( )
dx
df x
6 8 0 x x
2
= - + = x 4 = , x 2 =

( )
dx
d f x
2
2
x 6 18 = -
For , x 2 =
( )
dx
d f x
12 18 6 0 <
2
2
= - =-
So at , x 2 = ( ) f x will be maximum
( ) f x
max
( ) ( ) ( ) 2 9 2 24 2 5
3 2
= - + +
8 36 48 5 = - + + 25 =
Probability of appearing a head is / 1 2. If the number of required tosses is odd,
we have following sequence of events.
, H , TTH , ........... TTTTH
Probability P .....
2
1
2
1
2
1
3 5
= + + +
b b l l

1
3
2
4
1
2
1
=
-
=
Divergence of A in spherical coordinates is given as
A : d ( )
r r
r A
1
r
2
2
2
2
=
( )
r r
kr
1 n
2
2
2
2
=
+
( )
r
k
n r 2
n
2
1
= +
+
( ) k n r 2 0
n 1
= + =
-
(given)
n 2 + 0 = or n 2 =-

( ) ( )
( )
dt
d y t
dt
dy t
y t
2
2
2
+ + ( ) t d =
Taking Laplace transform with initial conditions
nodi a
( ) ( ) [ ( ) ( )] ( ) s Y s sy
dt
dy
sy s y Y s 0 2 0
t
2
0
- - + - +
=
; E
1 =
& ( ) 2 ( ) ( ) s Y s s sY s Y s 2 0 2
2
+ - + + +
6 6 @ @
1 =
( )[ ] Y s s s 2 1
2
+ + s 1 2 4 = - -
( ) Y s
s s
s
2 1
2 3
2
=
+ +
- -
We know If, ( ) y t ( ) Y s
L
then,
( )
dt
dy t
( ) ( ) sY s y 0
L
-
So, ( ) ( ) sY s y 0 -
( )
( )
s s
s s
2 1
2 3
2
2
=
+ +
- -
+

( ) s s
s s s s
2 1
2 3 2 4 2
2
2 2
=
+ +
- - + + +
( ) ( ) sY s y 0 -
( ) ( ) ( ) s
s
s
s
s 1
2
1
1
1
1
2 2 2
=
+
+
=
+
+
+
+

( )
s
s
1
1
1
1
2
=
+
+
+

( )
dt
dy t
( ) ( ) e u t te u t
t t
= +
- -
At t 0 =
+
,
dt
dy
t 0 =
+
e 0 1
0
= + =
x x x 1
3 2
+ + + 0 =
( ) ( ) x x x 1 1
2
+ + - 0 =
( )( ) x x 1 1
2
+ + 0 =
or x 1 + 0 1 x & = =-
and 1 x
2
+ 0 , x j j & = =-
x 1, , j j =- -
Z is Z 0 = where q is around 45c or so.
Thus Z Z 45c = where Z 1 <
Y
Z
Z Z
1
45
1 1
45
c
c = = = -
Y [ ] Z 1 1 > < a
nodi a
So Y will be out of unity circle.

dx
dy
e
x 3
=
-
dy e dx
x 3
=
-
by integrating, we get
y e K
3
1 x 3
=- +
-
, where K is constant.
f
1
. sin x x 10 0 8
2 1
= -
f
2
10 10 0.6 cos x x x
2
2
2 1
= - -
Jacobian matrix is given by
J
cos
sin
sin
cos
x
f
x
f
x
f
x
f
x x
x x
x
x x
10
10
10
20 10
1
1
1
2
2
1
2
2
2 1
2 1
1
2 1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
= =
-
R
T
S
S
S
S
S
>
V
X
W
W
W
W
W
H
For 0, 1 x x
1 2
= = , J
10
0
0
10
=> H
( ) f x x x 2 3
2
= - +
( ) f x l x 2 2 0 = - =
x 1 =
( ) f x m 2 =-
( ) f x m is negative for x 1 = , so the function has a maxima at x 1 = .
Let a signal ( ) p x is uniformly distributed between limits a - to a + .
Variance
p
s ( ) x p x dx
a
a
2
=
-
#

nodi a
x
a
dx
2
1
a
a
2
: =
-
#

a
x
2
1
3
a
a 3
=
-
: D

a a
6
2
3
3 2
= =
It means square value is equal to its variance
p
rms
2

a
3
p
2
s = =
p
rms

a
3
=
We know that matrix A is equal to product of lower triangular matrix L and
upper triangular matrix U.
A L U =
6 6 @ @
only option (D) satisfies the above relation.
Let the given two vectors are
X
1
[ , , ] 1 1 1 =
X
2
[ , , ] a a 1
2
=
Dot product of the vectors
X X
1 2
$ 1 a
a
a a X X 1 1 1
1
T
1 2
2
2
= = = + +
R
T
S
S
S
S
8
V
X
W
W
W
W
B
Where a 1 / j
2
1
2
3
2 3 p =- + = -
so,
a a 1
2
+ + 0 = , X X
1 2
are orthogonal
Note: We can see that , X X
1 2
are not orthonormal as their magnitude is 1 !
P xe dx
x
0
1
= #
( )
dx
d
x e dx dx
x
0
1
0
1
x e dx
x
= -
:
6
D
@
#
# #
( )e dx 1
x
0
1
0
1
xe
x
= - 6 @ #
( 0) e
1
0
1
e
x
= - -6 @
nodi a
[ ] e e e
1 1 0
= - - 1 =
Radial vector r x y z i j k = + +
t t t
Divergence r 4$ =

x y z
x y z i j k i j k :
2
2
2
2
2
2
= + + + +
t t t t t t
c
_
m
i

x
x
y
y
z
z
2
2
2
2
2
2
= + +
1 1 1 = + + 3 =
No of white balls 4 = , no of red balls 3 =
If first removed ball is white then remaining no of balls 6(3 , 3 white red) =
we have 6 balls, one ball can be choose in C
6
1
ways, since there are three red balls
so probability that the second ball is red is
P
C
C
3
1
6
1
=
6
3
=
2
1
=
Let eigen vector
X x x x
1 2 3
T
=
8 B
Eigen vector corresponding to 1
1
l =
A I X
1
l -
8 B
0 =

x
x
x
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
2
2
1
2
3
R
T
S
S
S
S
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
V
X
W
W
W
W

0
0
0
=
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
x
2
0 =
x x 2 0
2 3
+ = x 0
3
& = (not given in the option)
2
l =
A I X
2
l -
8 B
0 =

x
x
x
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
2
1
1
2
3
-
R
T
S
S
S
S
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
V
X
W
W
W
W

0
0
0
=
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
x x
1 2
- + 0 =
2 0 x
3
= x 0
3
& = (not given in options.)
3
l =
A I X
3
l -
8 B
0 =

x
x
x
2
0
0
1
1
0
0
2
0
1
2
3
-
-
R
T
S
S
S
S
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
V
X
W
W
W
W

0
0
0
=
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
x x 2
1 2
- + 0 =
x x 2
2 3
- + 0 =
Put , x x 1 2
1 2
= = and x 1
3
=
nodi a
So Eigen vector
X
x
x
x
1
2
3
=
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
1
2
1
1 2 1
T
= =
R
T
S
S
S
S
8
V
X
W
W
W
W
B
8
dt
d x
dt
dx
x 6
2
2
+ + 0 =
Taking Laplace transform (with initial condition) on both sides
( ) ( ) ' ( ) [ ( ) ( )] ( ) s X s sx x sX s x X s 0 0 6 0 8
2
- - + - + 0 =
( ) ( ) [ ( ) ] ( ) s X s s sX s X s 1 0 6 1 8
2
- - + - + 0 =
( )[ ] X s s s s 6 8 6
2
+ + - - 0 =
( ) X s
( )
( )
s s
s
6 8
6
2
=
+ +
+
By partial fraction
( ) X s
s s 2
2
4
1
=
+
-
+
( ) x t ( ) e e 2
t t 2 4
= -
- -
Set of equations
x x x x 2 4
1 2 3 4
+ + + 2 = .....(1)
x x x x 3 6 3 12
1 2 3 4
+ + + 6 = .....(2)
or ( ) x x x x 3 2 4
1 2 3 4
+ + + 3 2
#
=
Equation (2) is same as equation(1) except a constant multiplying factor of 3. So
infinite (multiple) no. of non-trivial solution exists.
Function ( ) f t
sin
t
t
= sinct = has a maxima at 0 t = as shown below
nodi a
Let the matrix is A
a
c
b
d
=> H
Trace of a square matrix is sum of its diagonal entries
Trace A a d = + 2 =-
Determinent ad bc - 35 =-
Eigenvalue A I l - 0 =

a
c
b
d
l
l
-
-
0 =
( )( ) a d bc l l - - - 0 =
( ) ( ) a d ad bc
2
l l - + + - 0 =
( ) ( ) 2 35
2
l l - - + - 0 =
2 35
2
l l + - 0 =
( )( ) 5 7 l l - + 0 =
,
1 2
l l , 5 7 = -
Given constraints x y >
2
and y x >
2
Limit of y : y 0 = to y 1 =
Limit of x : x y
2
= to x y x y
2
& = =
So volume under ( , ) f x y
V ( , ) f x y dxdy
x y
x y
y
y
0
1
2
=
=
=
=
=
# #
No of events of at least two people in the room being born on same date C
n
2
=
three people in the room being born on same date C
n
3
=
Similarly four for people C
n
4
=
Probability of the event, 0.5
N
C C C C
N 7
n
n n n
n 2 3 4
&
$ $ g
$ =
Assume a Cubic polynomial with real Coefficients
( ) P x a x a x a x a
0
3
1
3
2 3
= + + + , , , a a a a
0 1 2 3
are real
nodi a
' ( ) P x a x a x a 3 2
0
2
1 2
= + +
'' ( ) P x a x a 6 2
0 1
= +
''' ( ) P x 6a
0
=
( ) P x
iv
0 =
An iterative sequence in Newton-Raphsons method is obtained by following
expression
x
k 1 +

' ( )
( )
x
f x
f x
k
k
k
= -
( ) f x x 117
2
= -
' ( ) f x x 2 =
So ( ) f x
k
x 117
k
2
= -
' ( ) f x
k
x 2 2 117
k #
= =
So x
k 1 +

117
x
x
x
2
k
k
k
2
= -
-
x x
x 2
1 117
k k
k
= - +
: D
Equation of straight line
y 2 - ( ) x
2 0
0 2
0 =
-
-
-
y 2 - x =-
F dl $ [( ) ( ) ] [ ] x xy y xy dx dy dz a a a a a
x y x y z
2 2
= + + + + +
t t t t t
( ) ( ) x xy dx y xy dy
2 2
= + + +
Limit of x : 0 to 2
Limit of y : 2 to 0
F dl $ # ( ) ( ) x xy dx y xy dy
2 2
2
0
0
2
= + + + # #
Line y 2 - x =-
dy dx =-
So F dl $ # [ ( )] ( ) x x x dx y y y dy 2 2
2
0
2
2
2
0
= + - + + - # #
xdx ydy 2 2
2
0
0
2
= + # #
x
y
2
2
2
2
2
0
2 2
2
0
= +
: ; D E
4 4 = - 0 =
X is uniformly distributed between 0 and 1
So probability density function
( ) f X
X

1, 0 1
0,
x
otherwise
< <
=
)
So, { } E X
3
( ) X f X dx
X
3
0
1
= # ( ) X dx 1
3
0
1
= #

X
4
4
0
1
=
: D

4
1
=
According to CAYLEY-HAMILTON Theorem every non-singular square matrix
satisfies its own characteristic equation.
nodi a
( ) a I P l l = - 2 1 0
3 2
l l l = + + + =
Matrix P satisfies above equation
P P P I 2
3 2
+ + + 0 =
I ( ) P P P 2
3 2
=- + +
Multiply both sides by P
1 -
P
1 -
( 2 ) P P I
2
=- + +
Rank of a matrix is no. of linearly independent rows and columns of the matrix.
Here Rank ( ) Q 4 r =
So Q will have 4 linearly independent rows and flour independent columns.
Given function
( ) f x ( ) x 4
2 2
= -
' ( ) f x ( ) x x 2 4 2
2
= -
To obtain minima and maxima
' ( ) f x 0 =
( ) x x 4 4
2
- 0 =
, x x 0 4 0
2
= - = x 2 & ! =
So, x 0, 2, 2 = + -
'' ( ) f x ( ) ( ) x x x 4 2 4 4
2
= + - x 12 16
2
= -
For , '' ( ) ( ) x f 0 0 12 0 16 16 0 <
2
= = - =- (Maxima)
, '' ( ) ( ) x f 2 2 12 2 16 32 0 >
2
=+ = - = (Minima)
, '' ( ) ( ) x f 2 2 12 2 16 32 0 >
2
=- - = - - = (Minima)
So ( ) f x has only two minima
An iterative sequence in Newton-Raphson method can obtain by following
expression
x
n 1 +

' ( )
( )
x
f x
f x
n
n
n
= -
We have to calculate x
1
, so n 0 =
x
1

' ( )
( )
x
f x
f x
0
0
0
= - , Given x 1
0
=-
( ) f x
0
1 e e 1
x 1 0
= - = -
-
. 0 63212 =-
' ( ) f x
0
e e
x 1 0
= =
-
. 0 36787 =
So, x
1

( . )
( . )
1
0 36787
0 63212
=- -
-
. 1 1 71832 =- + . 0 71832 =
' A ( ) A A A
T T 1
=
-

( ) A A A
T T 1 1
=
- -
A I
1
=
-
nodi a
Put ' A A I
1
=
-
in all option.
option (A) ' AA A A =
AA A
1 -
A =
A A = (true)
option (B) ( ') AA
2
I =
( ) AA I
1 2 -
I =
( ) I
2
I = (true)
option (C) ' A A I =
A I A
1 -
I =
I I = (true)
option (D) ' AA A ' A =
AA I A
1 -
' A A = =Y (false)

dt
dx
( ) e u t
t 2
=
-
x ( ) e u t dt
t 2
=
-
# e dt
t 2
0
1
=
-
#
( ) f t dt
0
1
= # ,
t .01 = s
From trapezoid rule
( ) f t dt
t
t nh
0
0 +
# ( ) (. )
h
f f
2
0 01 = +
6 @
( ) f t dt
0
1
#
.
e e
2
01 . 0 02
= +
-
6 @
, . h 01 =
.0099 =
P is an orthogonal matrix So PP I
T
=
Let assume P
cos
sin
sin
cos
q
q
q
q
=
-
> H
PX
cos
sin
sin
cos
x x
T
1 2
q
q
q
q
=
-
>
8
H
B

cos
sin
sin
cos
x
x
1
2
q
q
q
q
=
-
> > H H
cos sin
sin cos
x x
x x
1 2
1 2
q q
q q
=
-
+
> H
PX ( ) ( ) cos sin sin cos x x x x
1 2
2
1 2
2
q q q q = - + +
x x
1
2
2
2
= +
PX X =
x x x x
n 1 2
T
g =
8 B
V xx
T
=
nodi a

x
x
x
x
x
x
n n
1
2
1
2
h h
=
R
T
S
S
S
S
SS
R
T
S
S
S
S
SS
V
X
W
W
W
W
WW
V
X
W
W
W
W
WW
So rank of V is n.
Given
z
dz
1
C
2
+
#
( )( ) z i z i
dz
C
=
+ -
#
Contour z
i
2
- 1 =
P(0, 1) lies inside the circle 1 z
i
2
- = and ( , ) P 0 1 does not lie.
So by Cauchys integral formula

z
dz
1
C
2
+
# 2 ( )
( )( )
lim i z i
z i z i
1
z i
p = -
+ - "
lim i
z i
2
1
z i
p =
+ "
i
i
2
2
1
#
p = p =
Probability of occurrence of values 1,5 and 6 on the three dice is
( , , ) P 1 5 6 ( ) ( ) ( ) P P P 1 5 6 =

4
1
8
1
4
1
# #
=
128
1
=
In option (A)
( , , ) P 3 4 5 ( ) ( ) ( ) P P P 3 4 5 =

8
1
8
1
8
1
# #
=
512
1
=
In option (B)
( , , ) P 1 2 5 ( ) ( ) ( ) P P P 1 2 5 =

4
1
8
1
8
1
# #
=
256
1
=
det
x x
y x
x y
y y
$
$
$
$
> H ( )( ) ( )( ) x x y y x y y x : : : : = -
0 = only when x or y is zero
For characteristic equation

3
1
2
0
l
l
- -
- -
> H 0 =
or ( )( ) 3 2 l l - - - + 0 =
nodi a
( )( ) 1 2 l l + + 0 =
According to Cayley-Hamiliton theorem
( )( ) A I A I 2 + + 0 =
According to Cayley-Hamiliton theorem
( )( ) A I A I 2 + + 0 =
or A A I 3 2
2
+ + 0 =
or A
2
( ) A I 3 2 =- +
or A
4
( ) ( ) A I A A I 3 2 9 12 4
2 2
= + = + +
9( 3 2 ) 12 4 A I A I = - - + + 15 14 A I =- -
A
8
( ) A I A A 15 14 225 420 196
2 2
= - - = + +
225( 3 2 ) 420 196 A I A I = - - + +
255 254 A I =- -
A
9
255 254 A A
2
=- -
255( 3 2 ) 254 A I A =- - - -
A I 511 510 = +
Volume of the cone
V R
H
h
dh 1
H
2
0
2
p = -
b l
#
Solving the above integral
V R H
3
1 2
p =
Solve all integrals given in option only for option (D)
rH
R
r
dr 2 1
R
0
2
p -
a k
# R H
3
1 2
p =
By throwing dice twice 6 6 36
#
= possibilities will occur. Out of these sample
space consist of sum 4, 8 and 12 because / r 4 is an integer. This can occur in
following way :
(1, 3), (2, 2), (2, 6), (3, 1), (3, 5), (4, 4), (5, 3), (6, 2) and (6, 6)
Sample Space 9 =
Favourable space is coming out of 8 5 =
Probability of coming out 8
9
5
=
nodi a
Matrix equation PX q = has a unique solution if
( ) P r ( ) r r =
Where ( ) P " r rank of matrix P
( ) r " r rank of augmented matrix [ ] P
r : P q =
8 B
for two random events conditional probability is given by
( ) probability P Q + ( ) ( ) probability probability P Q =
( ) Q probability
( )
( )
P
P Q
1
probability
probability +
# =
so ( ) P Q probability + ( ) P probability #
S x dx
3
1
=
3
-
#

x
2
2
1
=
-
3 -
: D

2
1
=
We have ( ) x t
o
( ) x t 3 =-
or ( ) 3 ( ) x t x t +
o
0 =
A.E. D 3 + 0 =
Thus solution is ( ) x t C e
t
1
3
=
-
From ( ) x x 0
0
= we get C
1
x
0
=
Thus ( ) x t x e
t
0
3
=
-
For eigen value l 2 =-

( )
( )
( )
x
x
x
3 2
0
0
2
2 2
0
2
1
1 2
1
2
3
- - -
- - -
- -
R
T
S
S
S
S
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
V
X
W
W
W
W

0
0
0
=
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W

x
x
x
5
0
0
2
0
0
2
1
1
1
2
3
-
R
T
S
S
S
S
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
V
X
W
W
W
W

0
0
0
=
R
T
S
S
S
S
V
X
W
W
W
W
x x x 5 2
1 2 3
- + 0 =
C
11
( ) 2 3 5 = - - =
C
21
( ( )) 0 3 3 =- - - =-
C
31
( ( )) 1 1 = - - =
R ( )C C C 1 2 2
11 21 31
= + +
5 6 2 = - + 1 =
nodi a
If the toss produces head, then for exactly two head in three tosses three tosses
there must produce one head in next two tosses. The probability of one head in
two tosses will be 1/2.
We have ( ) f x x e
x 2
=
-
or ' ( ) f x xe x e 2
x x 2
= -
- -
( ) xe x 2
x
= -
-
'' ( ) f x ( ) x x e 4 2
x 2
= - +
-
Now for maxima and minima, ' ( ) f x 0 =
( ) xe x 2
x
-
-
0 =
or x , 0 2 =
at x 0 = '' ( ) f 0 1( ) ve = +
at x 2 = '' ( ) f 2 2 ( ) e ve
2
=- -
-
Now '' ( ) f 0 1 = and '' ( ) f e 2 2 0 <
2
=-
-
. Thus x 2 = is point of maxima
u 4
x y
u i j
2
2
2
2
= +
t t
c m

x
u
y
u
i j
2
2
2
2
= +
t t

x y i j
3
2
= +
t t
At (1, 3) magnitude is
u 4 x y
3
2 2
2
= +
b l
1 4 = + 5 =
( )
dt
d x
dt
dx
x t
3
2
2
2
+ + 5 =
Taking Laplace transform on both sides of above equation.
( ) ( ) ( ) s X s sX s X s 3 2
2
+ +
s
5
=
( ) X s
( ) s s s 3 2
5
2
=
+ +
From final value theorem
( ) limx t
t"3
( ) limX s
s 0
=
"

( )
lims
s s s 3 2
5
s 0
2
=
+ +
"

2
5
=
***********
Page 596 General Aptitudes Chapter 11
nodi a
CHAPTER 11
GENERAL APTI TUDES
EE SP 11.1 Which of the following options is the closest in meaning to the phrase underlined
in the sentence below ?
It is fascinating to see life forms cope with varied environmental conditions.
(A) adopt (B) adapt to
(C) adept in (D) accept with
EE SP 11.2 Choose the most appropriate word from the options given below to complete the
following sentence.
He could not understand the judges awarding her the first prize, because he
thought that her performance was quite __________.
(A) superb (B) medium
(C) mediocre (D) exhilarating
EE SP 11.3 In a press meet on the recent scam, the minister said, The buck stops here.
What did the minister convey by the statement ?
(A) He wants all the money (B) He will return the money
(C) He will assume final responsibility (D) He will resist all enquiries
EE SP 11.4 If / z z 1 98
2
+ = ^ h , compute / z z 1
2 2
+ ^ h.
EE SP 11.5 The roots of ax bx c 0
2
+ + = are real and positive. a, b and c are real. Then
ax b x c 0
2
+ + = has
(A) no roots (B) 2 real roots
(C) 3 real roots (D) 4 real roots
EE SP 11.6 The Palghat Gap (or Palakkad Gap), a region about 30 km wide in the southern
part of the Western Ghats in India, is lower than the hilly terrain to its north
and south. The exact reasons for the formation of this gap are not clear. It
results in the neighbouring regions of Tamil Nadu getting more rainfall from
the South West mansoon and the neighbouring regions of Kerala having higher
summer temperatures.
What can be inferred from this passage ?
(A) The Palghat gap is caused by high rainfall and high temperatures in
southern Tamil Nadu nad Kerala
(B) The regions in Tamil Nadu and Kerala that are near the Palghat Gap are
low-lying
Chapter 11 General Aptitudes Page 597
nodi a
(C) The low terrian of the Palghat Gap has a significant impact on weather
patterns in neighbouring parts of Tamil Nadu and Kerala.
(D) Higher summer temperature result in higher rainfall near the Palghat Gap
area.
EE SP 11.7 Geneticists say that they are very close to confirming the genetic roots of
psychiatric illnesses such as depression and schizophrenia, and consequently, that
doctors will be able to eradicate these diseases through early identification and
gene therapy.
On which of the following assumptions does the statement above rely ?
(A) Strategies are now available for eliminating psychiatric illnesses
(B) Certain psychiatric illnesses have a genetic basis
(C) All human diseases can be traced back to genes and how they are
expressed
(D) In the future, genetics will become the only relevant field for identifying
psychiatric illnesses
EE SP 11.8 Round-trip tickets to a tourist destination are eligible for a discount of 10% on
the total fare. In addition, groups of 4 or more get a discount of 5% on the total
fare. If the one way single person fare is Rs 100, a group of 5 tourists purchasing
round-trip tickets will be charged Rs _________.
EE SP 11.9 In a survey, 300 respondents were asked whether they own a vehicle or not. If
yes, they were further asked to mention whether they own a car or scooter or
both. Their responses are tabulated below. What percent of respondents do not
own a scooter ?
Men Women
Own vehicle
Car 40 34
Scooter 30 20
Both 60 46
Do not own vehicle 20 50
EE SP 11.10 When a point inside of a tetrahedron (a solid with four triangular surfaces) is
connected by straight lines to its corners, how many (new) internal planes are
created with these lines ? _____________
EE SP 11.11 Choose the most appropriate phrase from the options given below to complete
the following sentence.
India is a post-colonial country because
(A) it was a former British colony
(B) Indian Information Technology professionals have colonized the world
(C) India does not follow any colonial practices
(D) India has helped other countries gain freedom
nodi a
EE SP 11.12 Who ______ was coming to see us this evening ?
(A) you said (B) did you say
(C) did you say that (D) had you said
EE SP 11.13 Match the columns
Column 1 Column 2
1. eradicate P. misrepresent
2. distort Q. soak completely
3. saturate R. use
4. utilize S. destroy utterly
(A) 1 : S, 2 : P, 3 : Q, 4 : R
(B) 1 : P, 2 : Q, 3 : R, 4 : S
(C) 1 : Q, 2 : R, 3 : S, 4 : P
(D) 1 : S, 2 : P, 3 : R, 4 : Q
EE SP 11.14 What is the average of all multiplies of 10 from 2 to 198 ?
(A) 90 (B) 100
(C) 110 (D) 120
EE SP 11.15 The value of ... 12 12 12 + + + is
(A) 3.464 (B) 3.932
(C) 4.000 (D) 4.444
EE SP 11.16 The old city of Koenigsberg, which had a German majority population before
World War 2, is now called Kaliningrad. After the events of the war, Kaliningrad
is now a Russian territory and has a predominantly Russian population. It is
bordered by the Baltic Sea on the north and the countries of Poland to the south
and west and Lithuania to the east respectively. Which of the statement below
can be inferred from this passage ?
(A) Kaliningrad was historically Russian in its ethnic make up
(B) Kaliningrad is a part of Russia despite it not being contiguous with the
rest of Russia
(C) Koenigsberg was renamed Kaliningrad, as that was its original Russain
name
(D) Poland and Lithuania are on the route from Kaliningrad to the rest of
Russia
EE SP 11.17 The number of people diagnosed with dengue fever (contracted from the bite of
a mosquito) in north India is twice the number diagnosed last year. Municipal
authorities have concluded that measures to control the mosquito population
nodi a
have failed in this region.
Which one of the following statements, if true, does not contradict this
conclusion ?
(A) A high proportion of the affected population has returned from
neighbouring countries where dengue is prevalent
(B) More cases of dengue are now reported because of an increase in the
Municipal Offices administrative efficiency
(C) Many more cases of dengue are being diagnosed this year since the
introduction of a new and effective diagnostic test
(D) The number of people with malarial fever (also contracted from mosquito
bites) has increased this year
EE SP 11.18 If x is real and x x 2 3 11
2
- + = , then possible values of x x x
3 2
- + - include
(A) 2, 4 (B) 2, 14
(C) 4, 52 (D) 14, 52
EE SP 11.19 The ratio of male to female students in a college for five years is plotted in the
following line graph. If the number of female students doubled in 2009, by what
percent did the number of male students increase in 2009 ?
EE SP 11.20 At what time between 6 a.m. and 7 a.m. will the minute hand and hour hand of
a clock make an angle closest to 60c ?
(A) 6 : 22 a.m. (B) 6 : 27 a.m.
(C) 6 : 38 a.m. (D) 6 : 45 a.m.
EE SP 11.21
While trying to collect
I
an envelope fromunder the table
II
, . Mr X fell down
III
and
sin was lo g consciousness
IV
Which one of the above underlined parts of the sentence is NOT appropriate ?
(A) I (B) II
(C) III (D) IV
nodi a
EE SP 11.22 If she ____ how to calibrate the instrument, she _____ done the experiment.
(A) knows, will have
(B) knew, had
(C) had known, could have
(D) should have known, would have
EE SP 11.23 Choose the word that is opposite in meaning to the word coherent.
(A) sticky
(B) well-connected
(C) rambling
(D) friendly
EE SP 11.24 Which number does not belong in the series below ?
2, 5, 10, 17, 26, 37, 50, 64
(A) 17 (B) 37
(C) 64 (D) 26
EE SP 11.25 The table below has question-wise data on the performance of students in an
examination. The marks for each question are also listed. There is no negative or
partial marking in the examination.
Q. No. Marks Answered Correctly Answered Wrongly Not Attempted
1 2 21 17 6
2 3 15 27 2
3 2 23 18 3
What is the average of the marks obtained by the class in the examination ?
(A) 1.34 (B) 1.74
(C) 3.02 (D) 3.91
EE SP 11.26 A dance programme is scheduled for 10.00 a.m. Some students are participating
in the programme and they need to come an hour earlier than the start of the
event. These students should be accompanied by a parent. Other students and
parents should come in time for the programme. The instruction you think that
is appropriate for this is
(A) Students should come at 9.00 a.m. and parents should come at 10.00 a.m.
(B) Participating students should come at 9.00 a.m. accompanied by a parent,
and other parents and students should come by 10.00 a.m.
(C) Students who are not participating should come by 10.00 a.m. and they
should not bring their parents. Participating students should come at 9.00
a.m.
(D) Participating students should come before 9.00 a.m. Parents who
accompany them should come at 9.00 a.m. All others should come at 10.00
a.m.
nodi a
EE SP 11.27 By the beginning of the 20
th
century, several hypotheses were being proposed,
suggesting a paradigm shift in our understanding of the universe. However, the
clinching evidence was provided by experimental measurements of the position
of a star which was directly behind our sun. Which of the following inference(s)
may be drawn from the above passage ?
(i) Our understanding of the universe changes based on the positions of stars
(ii) Paradigm shifts usually occur at the beginning of centuries
(iii) Stars are important objects in the universe
(iv) Experimental evidence was important in confirming this paradigm shift
(A) (i), (ii) and (iv) (B) (iii) only
(C) (i) and (iv) (D) (iv) only
EE SP 11.28 The Gross Domestic Product (GDP) in Rupees grew at 7% during 2012-2013.
For international comparison, the GDP is compared in US Dollars (USD) after
conversion based on the market exchange rate. During the period 2012-2013 the
exchange rate for the USD increased from Rs. 50/ USD to Rs. 60/USD. Indiaa
GDP in USD during the period 2012-2013.
(A) increased by 5%
(B) decreased by 13%
(C) decreased by 20%
(D) decreased by 11%
EE SP 11.29 The ratio of male to female students in a college for five years is plotted in the
following line graph. If the number of female students in 2011 and 2012 is equal,
what is the ratio of male students in 2012 to male students in 2011 ?
(A) 1 : 1 (B) 2 : 1
(C) 1.5 : 1 (D) 2.5 : 1
EE SP 11.30 Consider the equation Y 7526 4364
8 8 8
- = ^ ^ ^ h h h , where X
N
^ h stands for X to the
base N. Find Y .
(A) 1634 (B) 1737
(C) 3142 (D) 3162
nodi a
YEAR 2013 ONE MARK
EE SP 11.31 Choose the grammatically CORRECT sentence:
(A) Two and two add four
(B) Two and two become four
(C) Two and two are four
(D) Two and two make four
EE SP 11.32 Statement: You can always give me a ring whenever you need.
Which one of the following is the best inference from the above statement?
(A) Because I have a nice caller tune.
(B) Because I have a better telephone facility
(C) Because a friend in need is a friend indeed
(D) Because you need not pay towards the telephone bills when you give me a
ring
EE SP 11.33 In the summer of 2012, in New Delhi, the mean temperature of Monday to
Wednesday was 41C and of Tuesday to Thursday was 43 C c . If the temperature
on Thursday was 15% higher than that of Monday, then the temperature in C c
on Thursday was
(A) 40 (B) 43
(C) 46 (D) 49
EE SP 11.34 Complete the sentence: Dare .................. mistakes.
(A) commit (B) to commit
(C) committed (D) committing
EE SP 11.35 They were requested not to quarrel with others.
Which one of the following options is the closest in meaning to the word quarrel?
(A) make out (B) call out
(C) dig out (D) fall out
They were requested not to quarrel with others.
Quarrel has a similar meaning to fall out
YEAR 2013 TWO MARKS
EE SP 11.36 A car travels 8 km in the first quarter of an hour, 6 km in the second quarter
and 16 km in the third quarter. The average speed of the car in km per hour over
the entire journey is
(A) 30 (B) 36
(C) 40 (D) 24
EE SP 11.37 Find the sum to n terms of the series ... 10 84 734 + + +
nodi a
(A)
10
9 9 1
1
n
+
+
^ h
(B)
8
9 9 1
1
n
-
+
^ h
(C) n
8
9 9 1
n
-
+
^ h
(D) n
8
9 9 1
n
2
-
+
^ h
EE SP 11.38 Statement: There were different streams of freedom movements in colonial India
carried out by the moderates, liberals, radicals, socialists, and so on.
Which one of the following is the best inference from the above statement?
(A) The emergence of nationalism in colonial India led to our Independence
(B) Nationalism in India emerged in the context of colonialism
(C) Nationalism in India is homogeneous
(D) Nationalism in India is heterogeneous
EE SP 11.39 The set of values of p for which the roots of the equation x x p p 3 2 1 0
2
+ + - = ^ h
are of opposite sign is
(A) , 0 3 - ^ h (B) , 0 1 ^ h
(C) , 1 3 ^ h (D) , 0 3 ^ h
EE SP 11.40 What is the chance that a leap year, selected at random, will contain 53 Sundays?
(A) 2/7 (B) 3/7
(C) 1/7 (D) 5/7
2012 ONE MARK
EE SP 11.41 If ( . ) . 1 001 3 52
1259
= and ( . ) . , 1 001 7 85
2062
= then ( . ) 1 001
3321
(A) . 2 23 (B) . 4 33
(C) . 11 37 (D) . 27 64
EE SP 11.42 Choose the most appropriate alternate from the options given below to complete
the following sentence :
If the tired soldier wanted to lie down, he..................the mattress out on the
balcony.
(A) should take (B) shall take
(C) should have taken (D) will have taken
following sentence :
Give the seriousness of the situation that he had to face, his........was impressive.
(A) beggary (B) nomenclature
(C) jealousy (D) nonchalance
EE SP 11.44 Which one of the following options is the closest in meaning to the word given
below ?
Latitude
(A) Eligibility (B) Freedom
(C) Coercion (D) Meticulousness
nodi a
EE SP 11.45 One of the parts (A, B, C, D) in the sentence given below contains an ERROR.
Which one of the following is INCORRECT ?
I requested that he should be given the driving test today instead of tomorrow.
(A) requested that (B) should be given
(C) the driving test (D) instead of tomorrow
2012 TWO MARKS
EE SP 11.46 One of the legacies of the Roman legions was discipline. In the legious, military
law prevailed and discipline was brutal. Discipline on the battlefield kept units
obedient, intact and fighting, even when the odds and conditions were against
them.
Which one of the following statements best sums up the meaning of the above
passage ?
(A) Through regimentation was the main reason for the efficiency of the
Roman legions even in adverse circumstances.
(B) The legions were treated inhumanly as if the men were animals
(C) Disciplines was the armies inheritance from their seniors
(D) The harsh discipline to which the legions were subjected to led to the odds
and conditions being against them.
EE SP 11.47 Raju has 14 currency notes in his pocket consisting of only Rs. 20 notes and Rs.
10 notes. The total money values of the notes is Rs. 230. The number of Rs. 10
notes that Raju has is
(A) 5 (B) 6
(C) 9 (D) 10
EE SP 11.48 There are eight bags of rice looking alike, seven of which have equal weight and
one is slightly heavier. The weighing balance is of unlimited capacity. Using this
balance, the minimum number of weighings required to identify the heavier bag
is
(A) 2 (B) 3
(C) 4 (D) 8
EE SP 11.49 The data given in the following table summarizes the monthly budget of an
average household.
Category Amount (Rs.)
Food 4000
Clothing 1200
Rent 2000
Savings 1500
Other Expenses 1800
The approximate percentages of the monthly budget NOT spent on savings is
(A) 10% (B) 14%
nodi a
(C) 81% (D) 86%
EE SP 11.50
A and B are friends. They decide to meet between 1 PM and 2 PM on a given
day. There is a conditions that whoever arrives first will not wait for the other
for more than 15 minutes. The probability that they will meet on that days is
(A) / 1 4 (B) / 1 16
(C) / 7 16 (D) / 9 16
2011 ONE MARK
EE SP 11.51 There are two candidates P and Q in an election. During the campaign, % 40
of voter promised to vote for P , and rest for Q. However, on the day of election
15% of the voters went back on their promise to vote for P and instead voted for
Q. 25% of the voter went back on their promise to vote for Q and instead voted
for P . Suppose, P lost by 2 votes, then what was the total number of voters ?
(A) 100 (B) 110
(C) 90 (D) 95
EE SP 11.52 The question below consists of a pair of related words followed by four pairs of
words. Select the pair that best expresses the relations in the original pair :
Gladiator : Arena
(A) dancer : stage (B) commuter : train
(C) teacher : classroom (D) lawyer : courtroom
Under ethical guidelines recently adopted by the Indian Medical Association,
human genes are to be manipulated only to correct diseases for which...................
treatments are unsatisfactory.
(A) similar (B) most
(C) uncommon (D) available
EE SP 11.54 Choose the word from the from the options given below that is most opposite in
meaning to the given word :
Frequency
(A) periodicity (B) rarity
(C) gradualness (D) persistency
It was her view that the countrys had been ............. by foreign techno-crafts, so
that to invite them to come back would be counter-productive.
(A) identified (B) ascertained
(C) exacerbated (D) analysed
nodi a
2011 TWO MARKS
EE SP 11.56 The fuel consumed by a motor cycle during a journey while travelling at various
speed is indicated in the graph below.
The distance covered during four laps of the journey are listed in the table below
Lap Distance (km) Average speed (km/hour)
P 15 15
Q 75 45
R 40 75
S 10 10
From the given data, we can conclude that the fuel consumed per kilometre was
least during the lap
(A) P (B) Q
(C) R (D) S
EE SP 11.57 The horse has played a little known but very important role in the field of
medicine. Horses were injected with toxins of disease until their blood build up
immunities. Then a serum was made from their blood. Serums to fight with
diphteria and tetanus were developed this way.
It can be inferred from the passage, that horses were
(A) given immunity to diseases
(B) generally quite immune to diseases
(C) given medicines to fight toxins
(D) given diphtheria and tetanus serums
EE SP 11.58 The sum of n terms of the series ........ 4 44 444 + + +
(A) ( / )[ ] n 4 81 10 9 1
n 1
- -
+
(B) ( / )[ ] n 4 81 10 9 1
n 1
- -
-
(C) (4/81)[10 9 1 ] n 0
n 1
- -
+
(D) (4/81)[10 9 1 ] n 0
n
- -
EE SP 11.59 Given that ( ) / , and f y y y q = is any non-zero real number, the value of
( ) ( ) f q f q - - is
(A) 0 (B) 1 -
(C) 1 (D) 2
EE SP 11.60 Three friends , and R S T shared toffee from a bowl. R took / 1 3
rd
of the toffees,
but returned four to the bowl. / took S 1 4
th
of what was left but returned three
nodi a
toffees to the bowl. T took half of the remainder but returned two back into the
bowl. If the bowl had 17 toffees left, how many toffees were originally there in
the bowl ?
(A) 38 (B) 31
(C) 48 (D) 41
2010 ONE MARK
EE SP 11.61 Which of the following options is the closest in meaning to the word below ?
Circuitous
(A) Cyclic (B) Indirect
(C) Confusing (D) Crooked
EE SP 11.62 The question below consist of a pair of related words followed by four pairs of
words. Select the pair that best expresses the relation in the original pair.
Unemployed : Worker
(A) Fallow : Land (B) Unaware : Sleeper
(C) Wit : Jester (D) Renovated : House
If we manage to ........ our natural resources, we would leave a better planet for
our children.
(A) unhold (B) restrain
(C) cherish (D) conserve
His rather casual remarks on politics..................his lack of seriousness about the
subject.
(A) masked (B) belied
(C) betrayed (D) suppressed
EE SP 11.65 25 persons are in a room 15 of them play hockey, 17 of them play football and 10
of them play hockey and football. Then the number of persons playing neither
hockey nor football is
(A) 2 (B) 17
(C) 13 (D) 3
2010 TWO MARKS
EE SP 11.66 Modern warfare has changed from large scale clashes of armies to suppression
of civilian populations. Chemical agents that do their work silently appear
to be suited to such warfare ; and regretfully, their exist people in military
establishments who think that chemical agents are useful fools for their cause.
Which of the following statements best sums up the meaning of the above passage
nodi a
?
(A) Modern warfare has resulted in civil strife.
(B) Chemical agents are useful in modern warfare.
(C) Use of chemical agents in ware fare would be undesirable.
(D) People in military establishments like to use chemical agents in war.
EE SP 11.67 If 137 276 435 + = how much is 731 672 + ?
(A) 534 (B) 1403
(C) 1623 (D) 1531
EE SP 11.68 5 skilled workers can build a wall in 20 days; 8 semi-skilled workers can build a
wall in 25 days; 10 unskilled workers can build a wall in 30 days. If a team has
2 skilled, 6 semi-skilled and 5 unskilled workers, how long will it take to build
the wall ?
(A) 20 days (B) 18 days
(C) 16 days (D) 15 days
EE SP 11.69 Given digits 2, 2, 3, 3, 3, 4, 4, 4, 4 how much distinct 4 digit numbers greater
than 3000 can be formed ?
(A) 50 (B) 51
(C) 52 (D) 54
EE SP 11.70 Hari (H), Gita (G), Irfan (I) and Saira (S) are siblings (i.e. brothers and sisters.)
All were born on 1
st
January. The age difference between any two successive
siblings (that is born one after another) is less than 3 years. Given the following
facts :
1. Haris age + Gitas age > Irfans age + Sairas age.
2. The age difference between Gita and Saira is 1 year. However, Gita is not
the oldest and Saira is not the youngest.
3. There are no twins.
In what order were they born (oldest first) ?
(A) HSIG (B) SGHI
(C) IGSH (D) IHSG
***********
nodi a
SOLUTI ONS
cope with: presented by
To over come any difficulties presented by: adapt to
By the incomplete statement, we conclude that his performance is just ordinary
or not special or medium quality so it comes in mediocre.
He will assume final responsibility.
Given that

z
z
1
2
+
b l 98 = ...(i)
and we have to determine

z
z
1 2
2
+
b l ? =
Since,
a b
2
+ ^ h a b a b 2
2 2
$ = + +
Applying this formula in equation (i), we get

z
z
1
2
+
b l 98 =
or . . z z
z
z
2
1 1 2
2
+ + 98 =
or z
z
1 2
2
+ 98 2 = -
So, z
z
1 2
2
+ 96 =
Given the quadratic equations,
ax bx c
2
+ + 0 = ...(i)
and ax b
x
c
2
+ + 0 = ...(ii)
In equation (ii),
x
has two values x + and x - . So, it may be resolved into two
equations
ax bx c
2
+ + 0 = with roots ,
1 2
a a
^ h
and ax bx c
2
- + 0 = with roots
,
1 2
b b
^ h
Hence, there are total 4 real roots.
Passage summary gives the conclusion:
The low terrian of the Palghat gap has a significant impact on weather pattern
in neighbouring parts of Tamilnadu and Kerala.
nodi a
Strategies are now available for eliminating psychiatric illness.
Total round trip fare for group of 5 tourist without discount
. Rs 5 200 1000
#
= =
(i) Discount for round trip %of total fare 10 =
. Rs
100
10
1000 100
#
= =
(ii) Discount for having a group of 5 tourist % 5 = of total fare
. Rs
100
5
1000 50
#
= =
Total discount = Discount for round + Discount for having a
group of 5 tourist.
. Rs 100 50 150 = + =
Thus, the net round trip fare for group of 5 tourist after discount is
Net fare total fare total discount = -
. . Rs Rs 1000 150 = -
. Rs 850 =
SOL 11.9 Correct answer is 48%.
Total respondents 300 = (150 men + 150 women)
150 men
40 men 30 men 60(men) 20(men)
(car) (Scooter) (Car &Scooter) (Nothing)
= + + +
Total number of men who owns car 100 =
Total number of men who owns scooter 90 =
Total number of men who do not own a scooter 60 = ...(i)

car nothing
40 20 = + ^ ^ h h
150 women = 34 women + 20 women + 46 (women) + 50
(women)
(car) (Scooter) (Car & Scooter) (nothing)
Total number of women who owns car 80 =
Total number of women who owns scooter 66 =
Total number of women who do not own a scooter = 34(Car) + 50
(Nothing)
84 = ...(ii)
Percent of respondents who do not own a scooter

men women
100
Total respondents
who do not own scooter
#
=
+ ^ h
%
300
60 84
100 48
#
=
+
=
We draw a tetrahedron structure ABCD as
nodi a
Now, P is a point inside the tetrahedron.
The point P is connected to each corners , , , A B C D of the tetrahedron. So, we
have the internal planes as
, , , , , ABP APC BPC DPC DPB DPA
i.e the total number of internal planes is 6.
A pronoun (it) is used after a conjunction (because), so the complete sentence is:
India is a post-colonial country because it was a former British colony.
Who did you say was coming to see us this evening ?
This is a question and who in that sentence is an interrogative pronoun. For
that reason we need to invert subject and verb and write did you say ?
Eradicate- to remove or destroy utterly
Distort- to give a false, perverted, or disproportionate meaning to; misrepresent
Saturate-to soak, impregnate, or imbue thoroughly or completely
Utilize-to put to use
Average value
19
200 9 100
#
=
+
nodi a
100 =
Given expression can be written as
x ... 12 12 12 = + + +
x x 12 = + ... x 12 12 a = + +
x
2
x 12 = +
x x 12
2
- - 0 =
x x x 4 3 12
2
- + - 0 =
x x x 4 3 4 - + - ^ ^ h h 0 =
x x 3 4 + - ^ ^ h h 0 =
x 3 =- , 4
x 4 = (x can not be negative)
Ethnic cleansing or makeup is the process of using violent methods to force
certain groups of people out of a particular area or country. We can infer that
Kaliningrad was historically Russian in its ethnic make up.
The number of people with malarial fever (also contracted from mosquito bites)
has increased this year.
x x 2 3
2
- + 11 =
So we can have two possible equalities
x x 2 3
2
- + 11 = or x x 2 8 0
2
- - = ...(i)
and x x 2 3
2
- + 11 =- or x x 2 14 0
2
- + = ...(ii)
For eq (ii),
Discriminant T b ac 4
2
= -
( )( ) 4 4 1 14 0 1 = -
So, roots of equation (ii) will be imaginary, but given x is real. Therefore we
dont consider this equation.
For eq(i)
Discriminant T b ac 4
2
= -
( )( ) 4 4 1 8 0 1 = - -
So, roots of equation (i) will be real.
x x 2 8
2
- - 0 =
x x x 4 2 8
2
- + - 0 =
x x 4 2 - + ^ ^ h h 0 =
x 2 =- , 4
For x 2 =-
x x x
3 2
- + - 8 4 2 = - - + - - ^ ^ ^ h h h 8 4 2 14 = + + =
For x 4 =
x x x
3 2
- + - 64 16 4 52 - + - = ^ ^ h h
nodi a
Let male students in 2006 be x
1
and female students be y
1
. From the given graph
we can see that in 2008 ratio of male to female students is 2.5. So

y
x
1
1
. 2 5 =
x
1
. y 2 5
1
=
Let number of male student in 2009 be x
2
and number of female students be y
2
. From the graph we can see that in 2009, ratio of male to female students is 3.
So

y
x
2
2
3 =
Given that number of female students is double in 2009, so we have y y 2
2 1
= . The
above ratio now becomes as

y
x
2
1
2
3 =
x
2
y 6
1
=
% of No. of male students increased in 2009
x 3
x
x x
100
1
2 1
#
=
-
x 3
.
.
y
y y
2 5
6 2 5
100 140
1
1 1
#
=
-
=
As shown in Figure above, at 6:00 a.m. initial angle between minute and hour
hand is 180c. As we know that hour hand completes 30c in every hour (60
minutes), so angle moved by hour hand in 1 minute is
60
30
. Similarly, minute hand
complete 360c in every hour, so angle moved by minute hand in 1 minute is
60
360
.
Let us assume that after x minutes the angle is 60c. Let us assume that after x
minutes the angle is 60c.
60c x x 180
60
360
60
30
anglemoved
byhour hand m
c
c
c
c
c
= + -
anglemoved
by inhand
b b l l
60c . x x 180 6 0 5 c = + -
. x 5 5 120 =
x
.
. min
6 5
120
21 8
c
= =
Therefore approximately at 6.22 am the angle will close to 60c between the
hour hand and minute hand.
nodi a
IV underlined part is not correct. The correct statement for the IV underline
part will be lost consciousness.
For a conditional sentence, the rule is as given below.
If + past perfect tense
Would/could have + past participles.
Thus, the complete sentence is
If she had known how to calibrate the instrument, she could have done the
experiment.
SOL 11.23 Correct option is (C)
Coherent capable of thinking and expressing yourself in a clear and consistent
manner.
rambling spreading out in different directions or distributed irregularly.
Sticky covered with an adhesive material.
So, coherent and rambling are opposite to each other.
2, 5, 10, 17, 26, 37, 50, 64
The difference between successive terms is in AP with initial term 3 and the
common difference 2. With this logic 64 is the wrong term and the correct
number in place of 64 is 65.
Total students in class 44 =
Total marks scored by class 21 2 15 3 23 2
# # #
= + +
42 45 46 = + +
133 =
Average marks
de Total stu nts
Total marks
=

44
133
=
. 3 02 =
(i) Dance program is scheduled for 10 a.m.
(ii) Participating student should come at 9 a.m. accompanied by a parent.
(iii) non-participating student should come at 10 a.m. with their parents.
Combining these three instructions (B) option is most appropriate.
(i) Clinching evidence was provided by experimental measurement of position
of star.
(ii) Our understanding of universe changes, so experimental evidence are
important.
nodi a
So, by these (iv) is correct option.
Let GDP in 2011-12 be x
GDP in 2012-13 is . x 1 07 (7% grew)
During 2012-13 exchange rate increase from Rs. 50/USD to Rs.60/USD.
So, GDIP in comparison to USD is obtained as
at initial of 2012-13 GDP/USD
x
50
=
and at final 2012-13 GDP/USD
. x
60
1 07
=
So, increase and decrease % 100
.
x
x x
50
60
1 07
50
#
=
-
. % 10 83 =
% 11 =
Let number of female students in 2011 be x.
So, Number of male students in 2011 x = (ratio is 1)
Number of female students in 2012 x = (Given)
Number of male students in 2012 . x 1 5 = (ratio is 1.5)
Ratio of male students in 2012 to male students in 2011 is

.
. :
x
x 1 5
1 5 1 = =
Given equation is
Y 7526
8 8
- ^ ^ h h 4364
8
=^ h
or Y
8
^ h 7526 4364
8 8
= - ^ ^ h h
Octal subtraction is done in same way as decimal subtraction. The only difference
is that while obtaining carry we get 8 instead of 10.

7526
4364
3142
8
8
8
-
^
^
^
h
h
h
SOL 11.31 Option (D) is correct
Two and two make four
You can always given me a ring whenever you need. Because a friend is need is
a friend indeed
Let the temperature on Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday and Thursday be
respectively as , , , T T T T
M TU W TH

So, from the given data we have
nodi a

T T T
3
H TU W
+ +
41 = ....(1)
and
T T T
3
TU W TH
+ +
43 = ....(2)
also, as the temperature on Thursday was % 15 higher than that of Monday
i.e. T
TH
. T 1 15
M
= ....(3)
solving eq (1), (2) and (3), we obtain
T
TH
46 C c =
Dare to commit mistakes
They were requested not to quarrel with others.
Quarrel has a similar meaning to fall out
Given, the distance travelled by the car in each quarter intervals as
Distance Time Duration
8 km hr
4
1
6 km hr
4
1
16 km hr
4
1

Therefore, the total time taken hr
4
1
4
1
4
1
4
3
= + + +
Total distance travelled 8 6 16 30 km = + + =
Hence, average speed
Total time taken
Total distance travelled
=

/ 3 4
30
= / km hr 40 =
It will be easy to check the options for given series. From the given series.
10 84 73 ...... 4 + + +
We get
Sum of 1 term S 10
1
= =
Sum of 2 terms S 10 84 94
2
= = + =
and sum of 3 terms S 10 84 734 828
3
= = + + =
Checking all the options one by one, we observe that only (D) option satisfies
as
S
n
n
8
9 9 1
n
2
=
-
+
^ h
so, S
1
2
8
9 9 1
10
2
2
-
+ =
^ h
S
2
2
8
9 9 1
94
2
=
-
+ =
^ h
S
3
3
8
9 9 1
828
3
2
=
-
+ =
^ h

nodi a
Nationalism in India is heterogeneous
Given, the quadratic equation
x x P P 3 2 1
2
+ + - ^ h 0 =
It will have the roots with opposite sign if
P P 1 - ^ h 0 <
So it can be possible only when
P 0 < and 0 P 1 > -
or P 0 > and 0 P 1 < -
The 1
st
condition tends to no solution for P .
Hence, from the second condition, we obtain
0 P 1 < <
i.e., P is in the range , 0 1 ^ h
In a leap year, there are 366 days So, 52 weeks will have 52 saturdays and for
remaining two days 366 52 7 2
#
- = ^ h. We can have the following combinations
Saturday, Sunday
Sunday, Monday
Monday, Tuesday
Tuesday, Wednesday
Wednesday, Thursday
Thursday, Friday
Friday, Saturday
Out of these seven possibilities, only two consist a saturday. Therefore, the
probability of saturday is given as
P
7
2
=
Let . 1 001 x =
So in given data :
x
1259
. 3 52 =
x
2062
. 7 85 =
Again x
3321
x
1259 2062
=
+

x x
1259 2062
=
. . 3 52 7 85
#
=
. 27 64 =
nodi a
Let no. of notes of Rs.20 be x and no. of notes of Rs. 10 be y.
Then from the given data.
x y + 14 =
x y 20 10 + 230 =
Solving the above two equations we get
x 9 = , y 5 =
So, the no. of notes of Rs. 10 is 5.
We will categorize the 8 bags in three groups as :
(i) A A A
1 2 3
, (ii) B B B
1 2 3
, (iii) C C
1 2
Weighting will be done as bellow :
1
st
weighting " A A A
1 2 3
will be on one side of balance and B B B
1 2 3
on the other.
It may have three results as described in the following cases.
Case 1 : A A A
1 2 3
= B B B
1 2 3
This results out that either C
1
or C
2
will heavier for which we will have to
perform weighting again.
2
nd
weighting " C
1
is kept on the one side and C
2
on the other.
if C
1
C >
2
then C
1
is heavier.
C
1
C <
2
then C
2
is heavier.
Case 2 : A A A
2 1 3
B B B >
1 2 3
it means one of the A A A
1 2 3
will be heavier So we will perform next weighting as:
2
nd
weighting " A
1
is kept on one side of the balance and A
2
on the other.
if A
1
A
2
= it means A
3
will be heavier
A
1
A >
2
then A
1
will be heavier
A
1
A <
2
then A
2
will be heavier
Case 3 : A A A
1 2 3
B B B <
1 2 3
This time one of the B B B
1 2 3
will be heavier, So again as the above case weighting
will be done.
2
nd
weighting " B
1
is kept one side and B
2
on the other
if B
1
B
2
= B
3
will be heavier
B
1
B >
2
B
1
will be heavier
B
1
B <
2
B
2
will be heavier
So, as described above, in all the three cases weighting is done only two times to
give out the result so minimum no. of weighting required = 2.
Total budget 4000 1200 2000 1500 1800 = + + + + , 10 500 =
The amount spent on saving 1500 =
So, the amount not spent on saving
, 10 500 1500 9000 = - =
nodi a
So, percentage of the amount
%
10500
9000
100
#
= % 86 =
SOL 11.50 Option (S) is correct.
The graphical representation of their arriving time so that they met is given as
below in the figure by shaded region.
So, the area of shaded region is given by
Area of PQRS 4 (Area of EFQ T - + Area of
GSH T )
60 60 2
2
1
45 45
# # #
= -
b l
1575 =
So, the required probability
3600
1575
16
7
= =
Let us assume total voters are 100. Thus 40 voter (i.e. 40 %) promised to vote
for P and 60 (rest 60 % ) promised to vote fore Q.
Now, 15% changed from P to Q (15 % out of 40)
Changed voter from P to Q 40 6
100
15
#
=
Now Voter for P 40 6 34 - =
Also, 25% changed form to Q P (out of 60%)
Changed voter from Q to P 0
100
25
6 15
#
=
Now Voter for P 34 15 49 + =
Thus P P got 49 votes and Q got 51 votes, and P lost by 2 votes, which is
given. Therefore 100 voter is true value.
A gladiator performs in an arena. Commutators use trains. Lawyers performs,
but do not entertain like a gladiator. Similarly, teachers educate. Only dancers
nodi a
performs on a stage.
Available is appropriate because manipulation of genes will be done when other
treatments are not useful.
Periodicity is almost similar to frequency. Gradualness means something
happening with time. Persistency is endurance. Rarity is opposite to frequency.
The sentence implies that technocrats are counterproductive (negative). Only
(C) can bring the same meaning.
Since fuel consumption/litre is asked and not total fuel consumed, only average
speed is relevant. Maximum efficiency comes at 45 km/hr, So least fuel consumer
per litre in lap Q
Option B fits the sentence, as they built up immunities which helped humans
create serums from their blood.
.............. 4 44 444 + + + ( .......) 4 1 11 111 + + +
( ............)
9
4
9 99 999 = + + +
[( ) ( ) ........]
9
4
10 1 100 1 = - + - +
[ ( ) ] n
9
4
10 1 10 10 10
2 3
= + + + -
10 n
9
4
10 1
10 1
n
#
=
-
-
-
: D
n
81
4
10 10 9
n 1
= - -
+
6 @
( ) f y
y
y
=
Now ( ) f y - ( )
y
y
f y =
-
=-
or ( ) ( ) f q f q - - ( ) f q 2 2 = =
Let total no of toffees be x. The following table shows the all calculations.
Friend Bowl Status
nodi a
R
4
x
3
= - 4
x
3
2
= +
S
3
1 3 2
x
x x
4
1
3
2
4
6 6
= + -
= + - = -
: D
4 2
6
x x
x
3
2
6
2
= + - +
= +
T
2
x
x
2
1
2
6
4
1
= + -
= +
a k
6 1
x x
x
2 4
4
5
= + - -
= +
Now,
x
4
5 + 17 =
or
x
4
17 5 12 = - =
x 12 4 48
#
= =
Circuitous means round about or not direct. Indirect is closest in meaning to this
circuitous
(A) Cyclic : Recurring in nature
(B) Indirect : Not direct
(C) Confusing : lacking clarity of meaning
(D) Crooked : set at an angle; not straight
A worker may by unemployed. Like in same relation a sleeper may be unaware.
Here conserve is most appropriate word.
Betrayed means reveal unintentionally that is most appropriate.
Number of people who play hockey ( ) n A 15 =
Number of people who play football ( ) n B 17 =
Persons who play both hockey and football ( ) n A B + 10 =
Persons who play either hockey or football or both :
( ) n A B , ( ) ( ) ( ) n A n B n A B + = + -
15 17 10 22 = + - =
Thus people who play neither hockey nor football 25 22 3 = - =
Since 7 6 13 + = but unit digit is 5 so base may be 8 as 5 is the remainder when
nodi a
13 is divided by 8. Let us check.

137
276
435
8
8

731
672
1623
8
8

Thus here base is 8. Now
Let W be the total work.
Per day work of 5 skilled workers
W
20
=
Per day work of one skill worker
W W
5 20 100
#
= =
Similarly per day work of 1 semi-skilled workers
W W
8 25 200
#
= =
Similarly per day work of one semi-skill worker
W W
10 30 300
#
= =
Thus total per day work of 2 skilled, 6 semi-skilled and 5 unskilled workers is
2 6 5 12 18 10 W W W W W W W
100 200 300 600 15
= + + =
+ +
=
Therefore time to complete the work is 15 days.
As the number must be greater than 3000, it must be start with 3 or 4. Thus we
have two case:
Case (1) If left most digit is 3 an other three digits are any of 2, 2, 3, 3, 4, 4, 4, 4.
(1) Using 2, 2, 3 we have 3223, 3232, 3322 i.e.
!
!
3
2
3
= no.
(2) Using 2, 2, 4 we have 3224, 3242, 3422 i.e.
!
!
3
2
3
= no.
(3) Using 2, 3, 3 we have 233, 323, 332 3 3 3 i.e.
!
!
3
2
3
= no.
(4) Using 2, 3, 4 we have ! 3 6 = no.
(5) Using 2, 4, 4 we have 244, 424, 442 3 3 3 i.e.
!
!
3
2
3
= no.
(6) Using 3, 3, 4 we have 334, 343, 433 3 3 3 i.e.
!
!
3
2
3
= no.
(7) Using 3, 4, 4 we have 344, 434, 443 3 3 3 i.e.
!
!
3
2
3
= no.
(8) Using 4, 4, 4 we have 3444 i.e.
!
!
3
3
1 = no.
Total 4 digit numbers in this case is
1 3 3 3 6 3 3 3 1 25 + + + + + + + + =
Case 2 : If left most is 4 and other three digits are any of 2, 2, 3, 3, 3, 4, 4, 4.
(1) Using 2, 2, 3 we have 4223, 4232, 4322 i.e. .
!
!
3
2
3
= no
(2) Using 2, 2, 4 we have 4224, 4242, 4422 i.e. .
!
!
3
2
3
= no
(3) Using 2, 3, 3 we have 4233, 4323, 4332 i.e. .
!
!
3
2
3
= no
(4) Using 2, 3, 4 we have i.e. . ! 3 6 = no
(5) Using 2, 4, 4 we have 4244, 4424, 4442 i.e. .
!
!
3
2
3
= no
nodi a
(6) Using 3, 3, 3 we have 4333 i.e
!
!
3
3
1 = . no.
(7) Using 3, 3, 4 we have 4334, 4343, 4433 i.e. .
!
!
3
2
3
= no
(8) Using 3, 4, 4 we have 4344, 4434, 4443 i.e. .
!
!
3
2
3
= no
(9) Using 4, 4, 4 we have 4444 i.e.
!
!
3
3
1 = . no
Total 4 digit numbers in 2nd case 3 3 3 6 3 3 1 3 1 26 = + + + + + + + + =
Thus total 4 digit numbers using case (1) and case (2) is 25 26 51 = + =
Let H, G, S and I be ages of Hari, Gita, Saira and Irfan respectively.
Now from statement (1) we have H G >I S + +
Form statement (2) we get that G S 1 - = or S G 1 - =
As G cant be oldest and S cant be youngest thus either GS or SG possible.
From statement (3) we get that there are no twins
(A) HSIG : There is I between S and G which is not possible
(B) SGHI : SG order is also here and S >G >H >I G H >S I and + +
which is possible.
(C) IGSH : This gives I G > and S H > and adding these both inequalities we
have I S H G > + + which is not possible.
(D) IHSG : This gives I H > and S G > and adding these both inequalities we
have I S H G > + + which is not possible.
**********

GATE EE 2015 Solved Paper

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

GATE EE 2015 Solved Paper

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

GATE

ELECTRI CAL ENGI NEERI NG

Вам также может понравиться